Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAbout8300 W. 38th Avenue - 2015i CITY OF WHEAT RIDGE�'� AM �Building Inspection Division (303) 234-5933 Inspection line (303) 235-2855 Office • (303) 237-8929 Fax INSPECTION NOTICE Inspection Type: E rl Job Address: � 3 T Ave- Permit Number: 20 I 01 3) 7j 1 ❑ No one available for inspection: Time AM/PM i Re -Inspection required:es No When correct" ns have been made, call for re -inspection at 303-234-5933 1 Date: Inspector:_ 11PTI i DO NOT REMOVE THIS NOTICE V v `Jv INSPECTION RECORD INSPECTION REQUEST LINE: (303) 234-5933 -r- Inspector Comments Initials C/ Inspections will not be performed unless this card is posted on the project site. Call the inspection request line before 11:59 P.M. -eceive an inspection the following business day. Inspector Mus. ....... __ Spaces pertinent to this project Foundation Inspections Date Inspector Comments Initials Monolithic Slab Reinforcement Caissons Concrete Encased Ground (CEG) Footing/Stemwall P.E. Letter Do Not Pour concrete Prior To Approval Of The Ahnve Insnar-tiinnm Underground/Slab Inspections Date -r- Inspector Comments Initials Electrical (Underground) Sewer Service (Underground) Date Water Service (Underground) Comments Plumbing (Below / In -slab) Heating (Below/ In -slab) Do Not cover Underground or Below/ln-Slab Work Prior To Approval Of The Ahnva Inc.-nprfinno Rough Inspections Date Inspector Comments Initials Wall Sheathing Roof Sheathing Date Lath /Wall Tie Comments Rough Electric Rough Plumbing Rough Mechanical Gas Piping Do Not Proceed Without Approval Of Above Rouah Insnectinnc v - -r- Rough Framing Insulation Drywall Screw/ Nail Final Inspections Date Inspector Initials Comments Final Electrical TY Final Plumbing Final Mechanical Roof Final Building / Frame Landscaping & Parking / Planning Dept. Inspections from these entities should be requested one week in advance. For landscaping and parking inspections call 303-235-2846. For ROW and drainage inspections call 303-235-2861. For fire inspections contact the Fire Protection District for your project. ROW & Drainage / Public Works Dept. Fire Inspection / Fire Protection Dist. "Note: All items must be completed and approved by Planning, Public Works, Fire and Building before a Certificate of Occupancy is issued. Approval of the Final Building inspection does not constitute authorization of occupancy. Occupancy Is Not Permitted Until A Certificate of Occupancy Is Issued Protect This Card From The Weather ?���p•v6 �r c7v S City of Wheat Ridge Commercial Remodel PERMIT - 201501313 MIT NO: 201501313 ISSUED: 10/20/2015 ADDRESS: 8300 W 38th AVE EXPIRES: 10/19/2016 DESCRIPTION: Permanent electrical switchgear, feeder and panel replacement. CONTACTS *** ER (303)318-1920 EXEMPLA HEALTHCARE (303)295-2511 M.A. Mortenson, Jr 018817 M. A. Mortenson Company (303)286-8000 Richard Swartz 018567 Sturgeon Electric Co. PARCEL INFO *** 'E CODE: UA / Unassigned USE: / DIVISION CODE: UA / Unassigned BLOCK/LOT#: 0 / FEE SUMMARY *** ESTIMATED PROJECT VALUATION: 4,591,000.00 FEES .al Valuation 0.00 .n Review Fee 13,770.35 Tax 82,638.00 -mit Fee 21,185.15 TOTAL ** 117,593.50 COMMENTS *** CONDITIONS *** yy myy signature, do hereby attest that the work to be performed shall comply with all accompanying approved plans and specifications, licable building codes, and all applicable municipal codes, policies and procedures, and that I am the legal owner or have been authorized :he legal owner of the property and am authorized to obtain this permit and perform the work described and approved in conjunction with permit. I further attest that I am legally authorized to include all entities named within this document as parties to the work to be formed and that all work to be performed is disclosed in this document and/or its' accompanying approved plans and specifications. nature of OWNER or CONTRACTOR (Circle one) Date This permit was issued based on the information provided in the permit application and accompanying plans and specifications and is subject to the compliance with those documents, and all applicable statutes, ordinances, regulations, policies and procedures. This permit shall expire 365 days after the date of issuance regardless of activity. Requests for extension must be made in writing and received prior to the date of expiration. An extension of no more than 180 days made -be granted at the discretion of the Chief Building Official and maybe subject to a fee equal to one-half of the originalpermit fee. If this permit expires, a new permit may be required to be obtained. Issuance of a new permit shall be subject to the standard requirements, fees and procedures for approval of any new permit. Re -issuance or extension of expired permits is at the sole discretion of the Chief Building Offiial and is not guaranteed. No work of an manner shall be performed that shall results in a change of the natural flow of water without prior and specific approval. The permit holder shall notify the Building and Inspection Services Division in accordance with established policy of all required inspections and shall t proceed or conceal work without written approval of such work from the Building and Inspection Services Division. The iss nce or gran * g of a permit shall not be construed to be a permit for, or an approval of, any violation of any provision of any 'lica cq�lgor an rdinance or regulation of this jurisdiction. Approval of work is subject to field inspection. • nature of Chief'Buildilg"6fficial Date !VESTS MUST BE MADE BY 11:59PM ANY BUSINESS DAY FOR INSPECTION THE FOLLOWING BUSINESS DAY. is yF i CITY OF WHEAT RIDGE A - Building Inspection Division y `; (303) 234-5933 Inspection line (303) 235-2855 Office • (303) 237-8929 Fax INSPECTION NOTICE pj,.,(AL Inspection Type: k F / Fl~ 3-4 A-/ Job Address: 730 U w 3 $t- A vh:7 Permit Number: 201-5 6 131 3 �) 6K Q �-1 KA L yI;12C yK 6 4161- c ye -A OP -3/1 Kc -r -&-&-v 3KA 3�'Gl(, r�✓ 'n 36 i -A 31,A 36KA ❑ No one available for inspection: Time -vU /PM Re -Inspection required: Yes When corrections have been made, call for re -inspection at 303-234- Date:- 642 V/ -2 Inspector: G Ai0 DO NOT REMOVE THIS NOTICE i CITY OF WHEAT RIDGE Building Inspection Division / (303) 234-5933 Inspection line (303) 235-2855 Office - (303) 237-8929 Fax INSPECTION NOTICE Inspection Type: F 2 I Job Address: 93oo W. 38 '" Av6 Permit Number: 20/ Soo g q g Oro ( ❑ No one available for inspection: Time AM&) Re -Inspection required:(Y'e No t.�' When corrections have bade, call for re -inspection at 303-234-5933 Date: Inspector: DO NOT REMOVE THIS NOTICE A � w , °� .. • � � �, Ilgll�lll`I IPrO r y d ,, x m?G C) 3 Property Owner (please print): � �' Phone; D He a Mailing. Address- (if different than property address) Address: City, State, Zip: contractor.� t Contractor License #: Phone. sits Ccrfttrtcr: Electrical City License Plumbing City License a Mechanical City License ; Company- Company Company: me-ME77- a + "« M Certificate Of Completion Building Division 7500 W 29TH AVE WHEAT RIDGE CO 80033-8001 Permit#:201500218 Issued: 09/25/2015 Stipulations: Remodel of lab area for new equipment. This certificate verifies that the building constructed and/or the use proposed of the building and/or premises, under the above permit number and on property described below, does comply with the Wheat Ridge Building Code and development standards of the zone district in which it is located and may be occupied. All other licensing requirements for the City must be met. M93�� Owner- EXEMPLA HEALTHCARE 8300 W 38TH AVE WHEAT RIDGE CO 80033-6005 Contractor: Tracy douch 7200 S AI. TON WAY STE A300 ENGLEWOOD CO 80112-2252 For the Following Purpose: Commercial Remodel ?e Editions No change shall be made in the USE of 2012 ICC/2014 NEC this building without prior notice — 2006 ICC/2011 NEC and a new Certificate of Completion — 2006 /2 I!�CCfrom the City of Wheat Ridge. Other � FICATE MUST BE POSTED BY FRONT DOOR OF COMMERCIAL OCCUPANCIES wiNmy DI'VU1,01"'MUNT FOR OFFICE USE ONLY PlanlPermit# lo " � ;5 Plan Review Fee.' E - Building Permit Application Please comol* Of highlighted Ani4s'tm both sides of this form. Inc6nipl6te 00011cations may not be Processed. prop04� Ac1dress. 8300 West 38th Avenue, Wheat Ridge, CO Prop-qj2w* Lplease, print)- SCL Health - Lutheran Medical Center phone: 303-813-5056 chery1.schu1tz@sclhs.net Propoty OWner Etna . Address. 500 Eldorado Blvd, Suite 4300 City, State, Zip: Broomfield, CO 80021 Arshi IlEbWneerCator Ruma and Associates Contractor'. M- A. Mortenson 4 018817 phone. 720-259-4879 Con"ptors-City Lipense CR!jtro��K�MMVLdOje�s: ryan. may@ mortenson corn MR. City License # 018567 Plumbing: N/A W.R, City License Mechanicak N/A MEEE320= aM111111111111111"11 "I[MIMMI 111M.1 M NEW COMMERCIAL «:RUCTUR»$ ELECTR « v SERVICE2PGRAD ©RESIDENTIALSTRUCTURE $ COMMERCIAL ROOFING COMMERCIAL ADDITION RESIDENTIAL ROOFING RESDENTIAL ADDITION ■ WINDOWREPLACEMENT COMMERCIALACCESSORY STRUCTURE(Garage, shed, deck, RESIDENTIAL ACCESSORY STRUCTURE (Garage, ? \d, deck, MECHANICALSYSTEWAPPLIANCE.:PAI o REPLACEMENT PLUMBINGs ,-.:e CEREPAIR or REPLACMENT ELECTRICAL SYSTEM/APPLIANCE -«-Ef« REPLACEMENT OTHER (Describe)____ Sq.F!%F . .. .. ... mom, . . ... ..... Gallons Amp .. Squares . . . Oar . City of ��rWhbat Rjicge CITY OF WHEAT RIDGE BUILDING AND INSPECTION SERVICES DIVISION 7500 W 29th Ave Wheat Ridge, CO 80033-8001 p� 3013.235.2855.f 301237M29 Proof of Submission for Permitting/Plan Review A copy of this form must be completed by each agency indicated on the Permit Submittal Checklist for the project type and be attached to the Building Permit Application at the time of submission. Applications presented for submission without a completed Proof of Submission form from a required agency will not be accepted or processed. Date: Project Address. 4J Name of Firm/individual Project Type/Descriptior Signature of Firm Repre and do, by my signature below, the project indicated above, Wheat Ridge Fire Prote * Arvada Fire Protection * Wheat Ridge Water Dist * Consolidated MutUbfWa * Valley Water District c) Denver Water Agency Notes: e `IX 'Mill M N IL 1111Z I 111�4 ML-lifflM o Wheat Ridge Sanitation District o Clear Creek Sanitation District District o Fruitdale Sanitation District I Westridge Sanitation District o Other Signature:2 7 S �Date, From: Jackie Rudko <JRudko@catorruma.com> Sent: Wednesday, September 30, 2015 7:21 AM To: Phil Goddard Cc: Ryan May; Melissa Mackey; Kyle Olson Subject: RE: 8300 W 38th Ave - Lutheran Medical Center Electrical Upgrade Projet I= Thank You for sending us you plan review comments, We would like to get further clarification of item E-2. Will you send us your availability this week or early next week for a phone conference to discuss? Jacqueline H. Rudko �,�& I Wy�orrplrtg 896 Ea;. of Street, L akcs vv'(:xod, (3,0 80401 i'303) 462,81141 G r5 27 0 '303),514, CATOR RUMA Tfo Oifowrmon cont,'ained in this electronic message st'mukt be considered confidentiai, i-ind is intended soVy for the use of the indmduii o�, entity to which it addressed, Copyng, disserninatiori, or disdosure, of this infoc"rntawn is stricU), Prohibited Mhout the express rierrnsion of the sender K you are not the mihoded recpent, foe. ase ekt to Ifn message and noVy the sender nrned,atety, Thank y(Aw, From: Phil Goddard [mailto:pgoddard@buildingcci.com] Sent Tuesday, September 29, 2015 11:07 AM To: Jackie Rudko Cc: ryan.may@mortenson.com; Melissa Mackey Subject: 8300 W 38th Ave - Lutheran Medical Center Electrical Upgrade Projet After reviewing your drawings for the project we have the following ornments that will need a written response before a permit can e issued: COMMENTS: ELECTRICAL COMMENTS: At inspection all electrical equipment will e checked for proper working clearances as required by NEC Article 110. Please provide calculations per NEC 220.87 for existing demand load. Emergency power systems to be kept in continuous operation and tested upon completion of permanent wiring and equipment installation, Item #: E-4 Sheet #: N/A All conduit penetrations in walls, floors to be firestopped with a listed through-penetration-firestop-systeln to maintain the integrity of the fire rated construction, Philip C. Goddard Certificate Of Completion Building Division 7500 W 29TH AVE WHEAT RIDGE CO 80033-8001 Permit#:201500667 Issued: 08/25/2015 Stipulations: Remodel space for new Cath Equipment. 900 sf. This certificate verifies that the building constructed and/or the use proposed of the building and/or premises, under the above permit number and on property described below, does comply with the Wheat Ridge Building Code and development standards of the zone district in which it is located and may be occupied. All other licensing requirements for the City must be met. Owner: EXEMPLA HEALTHCARE 8300 W 38TH AVE WHEAT RIDGE CO 80033-6005 Contractor: Tracy AbBouch 7200 S ALTON WAY STE A300 ENGLEWOOD CO 80112-2252 For the Following Purpose: Commercial Remodel C ie Editions NO change shall be made in the USE of �12012ICC/2014 NEC this building without prior notice — 2006 ICC/2011 NEC and a new Certificate Of Completion — 2006 ICC/2005 NEC from the City of Wheat Ridge, Other A/ Chie Building Ins —Z- -on- T n HgA Imi n is �tr a t o �r Certificate Of Completion Building Division 7500 W 29TH AVE WHEAT RIDGE CO, 80033-8001 Permit#:201500666 Issued: 08/25/2015 Stipulations:Remodel space for new MRI machine provided by G.E. 1,500 sf. This certificate verifies that the building constructed and/or the use proposed of the building and/or premises, under the above permit number and on property described below, does comply with the Wheat Ridge Building Code and development standards of the zone district in which it is located and may be occupied. All other licensing requirements for the City must be met. Site Address: 8300 W 38th AVE Parcel No: 39-262-00-010 Owner: EXEMPLA HEALTHCARE 8300 W 38TH AVE WHEAT RIDGE CO 80033-6005 Contractor: Tracy Abdouch 7200 S ALTON WAY STE A300 ENGLEWOOD CO 80112-2252 For the Following Purpose: Commercial Remodel Code Editions NO change shall be made in the USE of 2012 ICC/2014 NEC this building without prior notice 2006 ICC/2011 NEC and a new Certificate Of Completion 2006 ICC/2005 NEC from the City of Wheat Ridge. Other Apn IV &- Chief Building Inspector ,Zoning �,Adm inistrator CERTIFICATE MUST BE POSTED BY FRONT DOOR OF COMMERCIAL OCCUPANCIES Date: Oty of w clay u3.8a1tt tttt"a$:t ;p'tani'Pe if u Building� Inspection a rtes %?fico -Z-, . ; C 4W 7500 W. 29h Ave., Wheat Ridge, CO 80033 Marr Review Fee: Office: 303-235-2355 * Fax: 303-237-8929 Inspection tine: 303-234-5933 Building er itApplication Address:' City, State, ! `, ° r �.... .�, Mechanical: .. V WR City License # Complete all informationo, --- Description, o work: (Check all that apply) COMMERCIALNEW lr RESIDENTIALNEW COMMERCIAL ROOFING COMMERCIAL ADDITION 0 RESIDENTIAL ROOFING RESDENTIAL ADDITION [I WINDri COMMERCIALO.. RESIDENTIAL ACCESSORY STRUCTURE (Garage, shed, deck, etc.) MECHANICAL M i III•t REPAIR M r w REPLACEMENT • t PLUMBING SYSTEM/APPLIANCE REPAIR or REPLACMENT ELECTRICAL k6 SYSTEM/APPLIANCE iM1 RY R 4Y or REPLACEMENT I w t OTHERr Sq. FULF Btu's gallons Amps Squares �..._ __. Other tp- "fie tl*0, at -),LCI g Ci'ry OF WHEAT RIDGE BUILDING AND INSPECTION SERVICES DIVISION 7500 W 29th Ave Wheat Ridge, CO 80033-8001 p, 303.235.2855. 301237.8929 Proof of Submission for Permitting/Plan Review A copy of this form must be completed by each agency indicated on the Permit Submittal Checklist for the project type and be attached to the Building Permit Application at the time of submission, Applications presented for submission without a completed Proof of Submission form from a required agency will not be accepted or processed, �5 ZMMMMMM 0 MMMM�� Is= the project indicated above, Wheat Ridge Fire Protectir o Arvada Fire Protection * Wheat Ridge Water Distric * Consolidated Mutual*aie * Valley Water District c) Denver Water Agency Notes: am= If L �4-C> Ll ME o Wheat Ridge Sanitation District o Clear Creek Sanitation District District o Fruitdale Sanitation District o Westridge Sanitation District o Other Signature: Date: (Agency Represent -*e) of DEVI� ii l�i 'wile; :11:�I 1 Plan/Permil 0 ) C Plan Review Fee: Address: City, State, Zip: 11111111,11' ir 11 j,' i IN IF 11 11111111111111111, SO doilitre ctor,,$': ..... . Electhcal,--S',-/vR,r Plumbing: Mechanical:" W.R. City License # WR City License # 4),?- W.R. City License # ,SHY Complete all information on BOTH sides of this form NEW COMMERCIAL STRUCTURE ELECTRICAL SERVICE UPGRADE NEW RESIDENTIAL STRUCTURE COMMERCIAL ROOFING COMMERCIAL ADDITION RESIDENTIAL ROOFING RESDENTIAL ADDITION WINDOW REPLACEMENT COMMERCIAL ACCESSORY STRVCTURE (Garage, shed, deck, etc.) RESIDENTIAL ACCESSORY«» • MECHANICAL SYSTEM/APPLIANCE.»,.o REPLACEMENT PLUMBING SYSTEM/APPLIANCESYSTEM/APPLIANCE REPAIR w REPLACMENT ELECTRICAL SYSTEM/APPLIANCE REPAIR or REPLACEMENT Sq. FULF Btu's Gallons Arps Squares Other FOR OFFICE USE ONLY C'44' of te. � � iez- COMMUNrTy DEVELOPMENT PlaniPermit# 0 15 Building & Inspection Services Division Z" 7500 W. 29th Ave,, Wheat Ridge, CO 80033 Plan Review Fee Office: 303-235-2855 * Fax: 303-237-8929 � C Inspection Line, 393-234-5933 Building Permit Application P_� t. -k-1 V1� '' r • , • -r wm (pleases r Address. City, State, Zip: contractor "'T1FjW0>JtJC (;r-4VP Electrical: ,l . City License I er>&" Plumbing: —Jeo:> WR City License Other City Licensed • City License # Mechanical: D IR, City License # Complete all information on BOTH shies of this forma NEW COMMERCIAL STRUCTURE ELECTRICAL SERVICE UPGRADE NEW RESIDENTIAL STRUCTURE COMMERCIAL ROOFING COMMERCIAL ADDITION RESIDENTIAL ROOFING RESDENTIAL ADDITION WINDOW REPLACEMENT COMMERCIAL ACCESSORY STRUCTURE (Garage, shed, deck, etc.) RESIDENTIAL ACCESSORY STRUCTURE (Garage, shed, deck, etc.) MECHANICAL SYSTEM/APPLIANCE REPAIR or REPLACEMENT PLUMBING SYSTEM/APPLIANCE REPAIR or RE,ILL LACMENT ELECTRICAL SYSTEM/APPLIANCE REPAIR or REPLACEMENT 1,115-clo `=F Sq. FULF Btu's Galloio Amps Square$ Other 0 H U4 Lutheran L RA Wheat ge 01 ir Building AL CENTER I SCL Health Sisters of Charity Leavenworth 0 Health System BUILDING OFFICtAL DME. Validity of permit; The issumm of a permit or approval of plans specifications and computations shall not be a permit for, or an approval of, any violation to. any of the provisions of the building code or of any its ordinances refits presuming fo give authority t~ violate or cancel the provisions of the building codes or other ordinances of ,tie City stall not be valid, Lutheran Medical Center 8300 West 38th Avenue Wheat Ridge, CO 80033 'M" RI Equipment R H+L Project Number. 177.308 APPROVES to Field I Whea� Ridge Bufldgng Dec' - Project Manual - } , ,Y April 29, 2015-inedi P' LMC: MRI ECUIMPENT REPLACEMENT 177.308 OWNER: LUTHERAN MEDICAL CENTER 8300 WEST 38THAVENUE WHEAT RIDGE, COLORADO 8003 H: 303-425-8685 ATTN: ANNE LUTA ARCHITECT: H+L ARCHITECTURE 1755 BLAKE ST, SUITE 400 DENVER, COLORADO 89202 PH: 303-298-4700 ATTN: MICHAEL. HAGAN MECHANICAL ENGINEER. CATOR, RUMA Ilc ASSOCIATES, INC. 896 TABOR STREET LAKEWOOD, CO 89401 PH: 303-232-6200 ATTN: MIKE CLIFT ELECTRICAL ENGINEER: CATOR, RUMA & ASSOCIATES, INC. 896 TOBOR STREET LAKEWOOD, CO 80401 PH: 303-232-620 ATTN: JACKIE RUIJKO LE OLSON PROJECT DIRECTOR 1 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement k 01 1000 Summary 01 1400 Work Restrictions 012100 Allowances 012300 Alternates 012600 Contract Modification Procedures 012900 Payment Procedures 013100 Project Management & Coordination License Waiver, Release & Indemnity Agreement for Electronic File Transfer 01 3200 Construction Progress Documentation 013300 Submittal Procedures 013500 014000 Special Procedures Quality Requirements coz 015000 Temporary Facilities and Controls 016000 Product Requirements PATRICK o 016000,01 Substitution Request Form DOUGLAS 017300 Execution Requirements JOHNSON 017329 Cuffing and Patching 017330 Selective Demolition for Interiors 203075 017700 Closeout Procedures 'Q 017839 Project Record Documents N� TABLE OF CONTENTS - 04/29/2015 DIVISION 21 — FIRE SUPPRESSION 210500 Common Work Results for Fire Suppression 211000 Water Based Fire Protection DIVISION 22 — PLUMBING 220500 Common Work Results for Plumbing 221110 Water Distribution Piping 221319 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties 230500 Common Work Results for HVAC 230505 Method of Procedure 230509 Mechanical Fire Stopping 230510 Basic Piping Materials and Methods 230516 Expansion Fittings and Loops for Mechanical Piping 230519 Meters and Gauges for Mechanical Piping 230523 General Duty Valves for Mechanical Piping 230529 Hangers and Supports for Mechanical Piping & Equipment 230540 Vibration Control for Mechanical Piping and Equipment 230553 Identification for HVAC Piping & Equipment 230593 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 230700 HVAC Insulation 230993 Sequence of Operation for HVAC Controls 232213 Steam and Condensate Heating Piping 2331 13 Metal Ducts 233300 Air Duct Accessories 238413 Humidifiers I 260500 Common Work Results for Electrical 260519 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 260526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems k1q N 260529 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems A 260533 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 0 260534 Cabinets, Boxes and Fittings 260553 Identification for Electrical Systems 260583 Wiring Connectionsp. 260923 Lighting Control Devices 262726 262800 Wiring Devices Low Voltage Circuit Protective Devices g 0 265000 Lighting fit DIVISION 28 — ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 111 11 1 11 LMC: MR[ Equipment Replacement 177.308 SECTION 01 1000 -SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1,1 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Project Identification: Project consists of MRI equipment replacement provided by GB, and re- quired infrastructure to support new equipment at Lutheran Medical Center as indicated in the Construction documents dated April 2e 2018. 1. Project Location: Lutheran Medical Center 8300 !Nest 38th Avenue Wheat Ridge„ Colorado 80033 . Owner: Sisters of Charity Leavenworth Health System B, Architect Identification: +L Architecture C, Contractor Identification: Kiewit Building Group D. Project Coordinator. Owner will appoint a project coordinator. , The Work consists of remodeling and installation of new equipment as shown on plans and specifications. 1.2 CONTRACT A. Project will be constructed under a construction contract (Master Agreement). 1.3 USE OF PREMISES A. General. The Contractor shall have partial use of premises for construction operations, includ- ing partial use of Project site, during construction period. Owner's right to perform work or to re- tain other contractors on portions of Project limits the Contractor's use of premises. The follow- ing existing facilities may not be used by construction personnel' 1, Parking lots. 2. Public entrances unless approved in writing by the Owner. . Toilet facilities outside current phase of construction, 4. Food service facilities unless as approved in writing by the Owner. Elevators unless as approved in writing by the Owner. 1.4 PRODUCTS ORDERED IN ADVANCE A. General: Owner has negotiated Purchase Orders with suppliers of material and equipment to be incorporated into the Work`.' The Owner will assign these Purchase Orders to the Contractor, Costs for receiving, handling, storage if required, and installation of material and equipment are included in the Contract Sum. SUMMARY — 04/29/201 01 1000-1 rMrit =- I Contractor's responsibilities are the same as if Contractor had negotiated Purchase Or- ders, including responsibility to renegotiate purchase and to execute final Purchase - Order agreements. 2. The Schedule of Products Ordered in Advance is as follows: a. No products are anticipated to be ordered in advance. 1.5 OWNER -FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Owner will furnish: Equipment as per the published Equipment book. The Work includes provid- ing support systems to receive Owner's equipment and plumbing, mechanical, and electrical connections. 1, Owner will arrange for and deliver Shop Drawings and Product Data to Contractor. 2. Owner will arrange and pay for delivery of Owner -famished items according to Contrac- tor's Construction Schedule. 3. After delivery, Owner will inspect delivered items for damage. Contractor shall be pre- sent for and assist in Owner's inspection. 4, If Owner -furnished items are damaged, defective, or missing, Owner will arrange for re- placement, 5. Owner will arrange for manufacturers field services. 6. Owner will furnish Contractor the earliest possible delivery date for Owner -furnished products. Using Owner -furnished earliest possible delivery dates, Contractor shall desig- 7, Contractor shall review Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples and return them to Architect noting discrepancies or anticipated problems in use of product. & Owner's Vendor is responsible for receiving, unloading, and handling Owner -furnished items at Project site. 9. Contractor is responsible for protecting Owner -furnished items from damage during stor- age and handling, including damage from exposure to the elements. 10If Owner -furnished items are damaged as a result of Contractors operations, Contractor shall repair or replace them. 11. Contractor will provide owner schedule information on required submittal, approved sub- mittal, and delivery dates for items listed in equipment schedule requiring contractor in- stallation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 31 PRE -CONSTRUCTION MEETING: A. A pre -construction meeting will be held at a time and place designated by the architect, for the purpose of identifying responsibilities of the owner's.and the architect's personnel and explana- tion of administrative procedures, BThe contractor shall also use this meeting for the following minimum agenda: 1. Construction schedule 2, Use of areas of the site. 3. Parking SUMMARY — 04/29/2015 01 1000-2 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 4, Delivery and storage. 5. Safety, 5. Security. 7. Cleaning up. 8. Subcontractor procedures relating to: a. Submittals. b. Change orders. C. Applications for, payment, d. Record documents. C. Attendees shall include: 1. The owner. 2. The construction manager - advisor. The architect; and any, consultants, 4. The contractor and its superintendent, 5. Major subcontractors, suppliers, and fabricators, 8, Others interested in the work, 3.2 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANT III ilillliill'l! MEN III IIII I� I =111 111 1, 1. Emergency means of egress. 2. Entrances which must remain open. 3. Utilities which must remain in operation. 4. Informational signage. .3 SECURITY PROCEDURES A, Limit access to the site to persons involved in the work, 1. provide secure storage for materials for which the owner has made payment and which are stored on site. C. Secure completed work as required to prevent loss. SUMMARY 0412912015 01 1000-3 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.30 DCONTRACTORS'PERSONNEL WILL BE REQUIRED TO WEAR BADGES ANY TIME THEY ARE WITHIN THE EXISTING HOSPITAL AND LEG BAND AT ANY TIME THEY ARE DOING ABOVE CEILING WORK OUTSIDE THE CURRENT CONSTRUCTION AREA. CONTRACTOR IS REQUIRED TO COORDINATE WITH OWNER'S SECURITY FORCES. 3A COORDINATION A. if necessary, contractor shall inform each party involved, in writing, of procedures required for coordination; include requirements for giving notice, submitting reports, and attending meetings. 1. inform the owner when coordination of his work is required. S. See other requirements in other portions of the contract documents. C. Conduct meetings for the specific purpose of coordination, at bast every week. 1. Attendees shall include: a. Contractor. b. Subcontractors currently working at the site. c. OWNER. A. Provide a staff member or members to perform mechanical and electrical coordination: 1. Qualifications; a. Experienced in coordination of mechanical and electrical work on projects of this type and scale, including administration and supervision. b. Approved by construction manager, owner, and architect: E3. Coordinate all mechanical, plumbing; and electrical work, and coordinate that work with the Cath- er work of the project. 1. Where space is limited, coordinate arrangement of mechanical, electrical, and other work to fit+ 2. Coordinate cutting and patching activities and sequencing: SUMMARY -- 04/29/2015 01 1000-4 W&W 3. Coordinate use of temporary facilities, C. Prepare coordination drawings where required and where indicated. D. Prepare and maintain a separate schedule of activities in the contract which relate to this work; include: 1, Submittals. 2, Temporary utilities. E, Participate in progress meetings-, report progress, changes required in schedules, and unre- solved problems. F. Review substitution proposals and recommend action. G. Review submittals for compliance with the contract documents and for coordination with other work, 1 , Check field dimensions, clearances, relationships to available space, and anchors. 2, Check compatibility with equipment, other work, electrical characteristics, and operational control requirements, 3. Check motor voltages and control characteristics. 4. Coordinate controls, interlocks, wiring of pneumatic switches, and relays, 5. Coordinate wiring and control diagrams, 6. Review the effect of changes on other work. K Obtain and distribute installation data on each item of equipment requiring mechanical or elec- trical connections; include: 1. Electrical power characteristics. Z Control wiring requirements, 1. Observe and maintain record of tests and inspections, 1. Prepare and submit separate reports similar to those specified. JObserve work for compliance with contract documents and notify the applicable contractor in writing of observed defects in the work. K. Coordinate and observe startup and demonstration of equipment and systems. L. Coordinate maintenance of record documents. MWEEMM= A, Interim Life Safety Measures (ILSM) are a series of eleven administrative actions required to be taken to temporarily compensate for the hazards posed by existing NFPA 101-1997 Life Safety Code (LSC) deficiencies or construction activities. B. Implementation of ILSM is required in or adjacent to all construction areas and throughout build- ings with existing LSC deficiencies, ISLM apply to all personnel, including construction workers, SUMMARY — 04/29/2015 61 1000-5 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177308 completion.must be implemented upon project development, and be continuously enforced through project intended to provide . level of * safety comparable to that described in chapters 1-7, 31 and the applicable occupancy chapters of the LSC. Each ILSM action must be documented through written policies and procedures. Except as stated below, frequencies for inspection, testing, training, and monitoring* evaluation must #*established b.#g. consists of # END OF SECTION 011000 SUMMARY 04/29/2015 01 1000-6 :1��w�ilm::Ill"llifll�ilUP! ff A. Use of Site- Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of site be- yond areas in which the Work is indicated. I Limits: Confine construction operations to the area(s) of construction shown on the draw- ing(s) and described in summary section 01 1000 as necessary for access to plumbing connections, or areas approved by Owner for use as access, and service elevator, Z Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of site and use by the public. 3. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times, Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials, aSchedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances, bSchedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of mate - dais and equipment on-site, & Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weathertight condition throughout con- struction period, Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and its occupants during construction period, A, Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and existing building during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage, Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's Hospital operations. I Before partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully opera- tional, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully , completed. On occupan- cy, Owner will provide, operate, and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of building. 2, On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of building. WORK RESTRICTIONS — 04/29/2015 01 1400-1 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 SECTION 012100 - ALLOWANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 11 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances. 1 Certain materials and equipment are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. In some cases, these allowances include installation. Allowances have been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when additional information is available for evaluation. If necessary, addi- tional requirements will be issued by Change Order. B. Types of allowances include the following: 1. Lump sum allowances. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division I Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders, 1.2 SELECTION AND PURCHASE A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be complet- ed to avoid delaying the Work. B. At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work, C. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier, 13 SUBMITTALS A. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement, ALLOWANCES — 04/29/2015 012100-1 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installa- tions n talla-tions to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work. 3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES A. None at this time. LEND OF SECTION 012100 ALLOWANCES — 04129/2015 012100-2 0-2 LMC-, MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES PART 1 ® GENERAL 11 SUMMARY X This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. AAlternate-, An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1 The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Con- tract Sum, 13 PROCEDURES A. Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted, rejected or deferred at Owner's option, Owner will have a minimum of 2 weeks to decide once presented with all the necessary information including the date(s) deferred decisions need to be made to avoid changes in cost or schedule. B. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project, 1 , Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. C. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, o deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates. D. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. E. Schedule: A Schedule of Alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sec- tions referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate, ALTERNATES — 04/29/2015 012300-1 31 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES — Please submit one bid document with full estimate amount, and another bid document that includes Alternates with a separate line for each item. Alternates: 1. None at this time. END OF SECTION 012300 ALTERNATES — 04/29/2015 012300-2 LMC: MR1 Equipment Replacement SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures for handling re- quests for substitutions made after Contract award, 1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK AArchitect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involv- ing adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G7 10, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." A. Owner -initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description 4 proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications, I Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only, Do not consider them in- structions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within fourteen (14) days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimat- ing cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change, BContractor-initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change, The Contrac- tor shall submit a written Change Order Request (COR) to the Owner and Architect within ten (10) days of the event giving rise to the change. I Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time, in terms of "not to ex- ceed". 2. Comply with requirements in Division I Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests. CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES — 04/29/2015 012600-1 i 1i•ii•! 1. F 15 1,15[ 102 1 111111101,7111 -L.� 177,308 K On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document 0701. 1.5 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive- Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document 0714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. I After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES — 04/29/2015 012600-2 11111111 SECTION 01 2900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 y GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 Division 1Section "Contract Modification procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to that Contact. 2. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress documentation" for administrative require- ments, governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals Schedule, 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applica- tions for Payment. 13 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination; Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contrac- tor's Construction Schedule: 1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules„ including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets, b; Submittals Schedule. 2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than five days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. a. If revisions are required by the Owner or Architect, resubmit corrected Schedule of Values within 5 days of receipt of revisions. B, Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address.. e. Gate of submittal. PAYMENT PROCEDURES — 0412912015 01 2900-1 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177308 Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the fol- lowing for each item listed. a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. C. Dame of subcontractor. d, name of manufacturer or fabricator. e, dame of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g, Dollar value. 1 } Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent, 3Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evalua- tion of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Man- ual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. Round amounts to nearest whole asllar; total shallequal • 5Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Val6es for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated s stored,but not• e- s - a r• •-• s s •• .,� wil 1A APPLICATIONS PCXR PAYMENT A, Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner, 1. Initial Application for Payment,: Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. S. PaymentApplication Times- The date for each Application for Payment is the 30th day of each month, The period covered by each Application for Payment starts on the day following the end of the, preceding period. C, Payment Application Forms; Use AIA Document 0702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets as form for Applications for Payment. D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person au- thorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete appli- cations without action. PAYMENT PROCEDURES — 04/29/2015 012900-2 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.306 1 Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application, E, Transmittal: Submit (4) four signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Pay- ment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1 Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. 2. Include verification of construction manager review that record drawings are current. F. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub -subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application. I Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested, before deduction for re- tainage, on each item. 2When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers. 1 Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers, 4. Waiver Delays: Submit each Application for Payment with Contractors waiver of mechanic's lien for construction period covered by the application. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien. 5. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner. G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or co- incide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1, List of subcontractors, 2. Approved Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final), 4Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). 5. List of Contractors principal consultants, subcontractors, principal sponsors and fabrica- tors. 6. Copies of building permits. 7, Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work, & Report of pre -construction conference. 9, Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 10. Performance and payment bonds, 11. Data needed to acquire Owners insurance. 12. Tax Exempt Certificate H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. PAYMENT PROCEDURES — 04/29/2015 012900-3 177.308 1: Include documentation supporting -claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sura. 1, Final Payment Application: ' Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the fallow- ing: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Seim. 4. AIA Document t3706A; "Contractor's<Affidavit of Release of Liens:„ PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Blot Used) PART 3EXECUTION (Not Used) ND OF SECTION 012900 PAYMENT NT PROCEDUR S -- 04/29/2015 012900-4 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 SECTION 013100 — PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations onPro- ject including, but not limited to, the following: 1 General project coordination procedures. 2. Coordination Drawings, 3. Requests for Information {REI} . Administrative and supervisory personnel. . Project meetings': B Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility will be assigned to a specific contractor. C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting the Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating Contract closeout. 1.2 COORDINATION ACoordination: Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of the Specifica- tions to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each pari of the Work. Coordinate construc- tion onstruetion operations,' included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. B: Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative proce- dures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not lim- ited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor"s Construction Schedule. 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values, . Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. . Delivery and processing of submittals. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7, Project closeout activities. 1.3 SUBMITTAL A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited spaceavailability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. 177.308 1, Indicate relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings, 2Indicate required installation sequences. 3. Refer to Mechanical and Electrical Divisions for specific Coordination Drawing require- ments for mechanical and electrical installations. B� Staff Names: Within 10 working days of starting construction operations, submit a list of princi- pal staff assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and <telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and tele- phone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. I Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each tempo- rary telephone. 1A CONTRACTOR'S USE OF ARCHITECT'S ELECTRONIC MEDIA A. General: At the Construction Manager's request and subject to the following conditions, copies of the indicated Design Team's Electronic Media, used in preparation of the Construction Doc- uments will be provided to the Construction Manager, for the Construction Manager's or Sub- contractor's use in preparing submittals: rt e -.*_r-a 21 ita discret4ll PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION — 04/29/2015 013100-2 LMC-. MRI Equipment Replacement 177308 EArchitecVs Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it. Allow a minimum of seven days for Architect's response for each RFL RFls received after 1:00 pm. (Architects local time) will be considered as received the following day.- Upon receipt of multiple RFls, additional time is to be provided for review. Prioritization of multiple RFI's is to be provided to facilitate review. RFls that are deemed "critical". where the Contractor desires a rrore rapid response, shall be clearly indicated as such in the RFl itself as well as the accompanying e- mail, and shall include an explanation as to the reason for the critical nature of the RFl. The Ar- chitect shall attempt to answer such RFls in an expedited manner. 015 013100-3 1. The following RFIs will be returned without: action: as Requests for approval of submittals. b: Requests for approval of substitutions. C. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. d. Requests to revise the Contract. e. Requests for interpretation of the Architect's actions on submittals. ; f. Requests to confirm information or resolutions already noted in other documents, such as meeting minutes, field observation reports or the like. g. Incomplete RFls or RFIs with numerous errors. h. Requests that pertain to Contractor's means and methods. i. Requests that document and/or solicit corrections or repairs required due to con- struction deficiencies or construction errors. 2. The Architects action may include a request for additional information, in which case the Architects time for response will start again, once the additional requested information is provided. The Architects action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for the Contractor to submit a Change Proposal according to Division 1 Section "Contract Modification:Procedures." a. If the Contractor believes the RF1 response warrants charge in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, immediately suspend :execution of the Architect's response and notify the Architect in writing, within four days of receipt of the lFI response.. F. iron receipt of the Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI re- sponse to affected parties. Review the response and notify the Architect within seven; days if the Contractor disagrees with response. G. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number, Submit the log weekly, Use a Log Form which includes, as a minimum, the following items - 1 . tems:1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. . Name and address of Architect. . RFI description. 5. Date the RFI was submitted. 1. Cute Architect's response was received. . Identification of related' Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL A General:`' In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory personnel as required for proper performance of the Work. 1. Include special personnel required for coordination of operations with other contractors. 1.7 PROJECT MEETINGS' A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise in- dicated LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177,368 r •• '" r a • f -a • • •- • e • a. Tentative constriction schedule. b. Phasing. C. Critical work sequencing. d. Designation of responsible personnel. e Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders, f. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment, g. Distribution of the Contract Documents. h. Submittal procedures, L Preparation of Record Documents. j: Use of the premises. k. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. 1. Parking availability. M. Office, work, and storage areas. n. Equipment deliveries and priorities. o. First aid. p. Security. q. Progress cleaning, r. Working hours. C, preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 1 . Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and in- stallations that have preceded, or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Owner, Construction Manager, and Architect of scheduled meeting dates, , Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the par- ticular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. Contract Documents, b. Options. C. Related Change Orders. d. Purchases, e. Deliveries. f, Submittals. g. Review of mockups. �"ROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION -- 04/29/2015 013100-5 • +� * • •EME h. possible conflicts. is Compatibility problems,. . Time schedules. k. Weather limitations. 1. Manufacturer's written recommendations. ren. Warranty requirements. n. Compatibility of materials. o. Acceptability of substrates, p Temporary facilities and controls, q. , Space and access limitations. r. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. S. Testing and inspecting requirements, t. Required performance results. U. protection of construction and,, personnel. 1 record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements. 4: Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Ini- tiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible dote. D, progress Meetings. Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. Coordinate dates of meet- ings with preparation of payment requests. 1. Attendees. In addition to representatives of Ownerr, Construction Manager, and Architect, contractor and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coor- dination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work, Agenda. Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of project. . Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. De- termine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction be- hind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. ) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries: 5); Cf -site fabrication. 5), Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) = Temporary facilities and controls. g) Work hours. 10) Hazards and risks. 11) progress cleaning. 1) Quality and work standards. 13) Change Orders, 14) Documentation of information for payment requests. 15) Contract modification documents. LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177308 3. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since the previous meeting and report. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each pro- gress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION — 04/29/2015 ARCHiTECJURE LICENSE WAIVER, RELEASE AND INDEMNITY AGREEMENT FOR ELECTRONIC FILE TRANSFER TO CONTRACTOR H+L Architecture, hereinafter referred to as "Architect" has utilized electronic CADD files (Electronic Media) in preparation of drawings for "The Project" on behalf of hereinafter referred to as "Owner"; and The Electronic Media are not construction documents. Differences may exist between these Electronic Media and corresponding hard -copy construction drawings for which the Architect is under no obligation to discover or disclose if known. The Architect makes no representation regarding the accuracy or completeness of the electronic files received. By use of these Electronic Media, Contractor is not relieved of its duty to fully comply with the contract documents, including and without limitation, the need to check, confirm and coordinate all dimensions and details, take field measurements, verify field conditions and coordinate its work with that of other contractors for the project. The Electronic Media may be incompatible with the Contractor's software and hardware configuration. In all ways the Contractor accepts the Electronic Media "as is" and Architect is under no obligation to correct, update for changes, enhance or maintain the Electronic Media for Contractor. Architect has taken reasonable precautions in the preparation of the Electronic Media, but does not warrant it to be free of viruses or other corruption, It is acknowledged that no client relationship and no legal duty is created by or through this instrument between Architect and Contractor. Because information presented on the Electronic Media can be modified, unintentionally or otherwise, we reserve the right to remove all indicia of ownership and /or involvement from all Electronic Media, 2, WAIVER AND RELEASE: Architect makes no representation regarding the accuracy or completeness of the Electronic Media Contractor receives, Contractor accepts all risk of incomplete, inaccurate, defective and variant information contained in the Electronic Media, and waives, acquits and forever discharges and releases the Owner, the Architect and hereby waive, to the fullest extent permitted by law, any claim or cause of action of any nature against the Owner, Architect, our officers, directors, employees, agents, or subconsultants that may arise out of on in connection with its use of the electronic files, Denver Cocredo Springs I , :­ 0o Spm,", ARO-VECTVRRE 1 REUSE: The Electronic Media is not reusable for any other project or for additions or extensions of The Project identified in this agreement. Architect does not authorize release of the Electronic Media to any person or party other than the Owner and Contractor agrees and covenants not to release the Electronic Media to any other party other than the Contractor's subcontractors for use on The Project, Contractor shall obtain "Waiver, Release and Indemnity Agreement" from each subcontractor and submit copy of said Release to Architect prior to release of the Electronic Media. 4� Electronic Media for use by Contractor be deemed a sale by Architect and Architect makes no warranties, either express or implied, of merchantability and fitness for any particular purpose. In no event shall we be liable for any loss of profit or any consequential damages as a result of Contractor's use or reuse of these Electronic Media. Contractor agrees to make no claim and furthermore, the Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by law, indemnify and hold harmless, the Owner, the Architect and its officers, directors, principals, consultants, employees and successors against all damages, liabilities or costs, including reasonable ..~`.'ey~ .~~~_.~_~~~~`~~.~.,g_ -- of ~_or _~resulting _from use these _Electronic -__Media. 5. ' exclusive license to utilize the file solely and exclusively for the purpose stated above and for no other purpose whatsoever. The license hereby granted may not be transferred, sold or assigned. It is a material term of the license hereby granted that Contractor has agreed to each of the foregoing terms, 6, This agreement is governed by and shall be construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Colorado and where applicable, the copyright laws of the Untied States of America, 7. If any term or provision hereof shall be unlawful, void, or for any reason unenforceable, then such provision shall be deemed severable from this agreement and shall not affect the validity and enforceability of any remaining provision, The parties have acknowledged and accepted this Release, Waiver and Indemnity Agreement and the above conditions by signing below.\ (Print name) ^ ` `- ' .` ' / c .. name) Signature`=_ ' . . Signature ^ Title ' ' ' ' ' Title ' - ' , Eate' Date � Denver Co�orado Springs �,,+se�oopmuoAv�num oan°e'coyuznu | c°�,a�osp,inmo�ouo*oa LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 SECTION"013200 . CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS D } i1MENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL RAu 1,1 SUMMARY 1. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Submittals Schedule, 3. Field condition reports. S Related Sections include the following; I . .division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of Values. 2. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports. 3. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting'a schedule of tests and inspec- tions. } AQualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demon- strate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information speci- Se Submittals Schedule: Submit three copies of schedule. 'Arrange the following information in a tabular format: "I : Scheduled data for first submittal. 2. Specification Section number and title. . Submittal category (action or informational). 4 Name of subcontractor: 5. Description of the Work covered. 6. Scheduled state for Architect's final release or approval. 7.. Include schedule of owner -furnished contractor -installed items. C.Contractor's Construction Schedule. Submit two printed copies of initial schedule, one a repro- ducible print and one a'blue- or black -line print, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period. D� Field Condition Reports: Submit two copies at time of discovery of differing conditions. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construc- tion activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION — 04/29/2015 013200-1 177.308 SubmittalsB. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcon- .• progress re•• payment - and other requiredschedules and 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties in- volved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. PARS" 2 - PRODUCT 2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates re- quired by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal„ ordering, manu- facturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. 1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule. A. Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in ACC's "Construction Planning & Schedul- ing." B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of Final Completion Contract • • s date shall notbe changed by • of .* an early completion date, unless specifically allthorized by Change Order. 1 C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Work byOwner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner. 2, Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include de- livery date indicated in Division 1 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date, Owner -Furnished Products. Include a separate activity for each product.. Include delivery date indicated in Division 1 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery data 4. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. C. Uninterruptible services. d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. e. Use of premise restrictions. f. Environmental control. LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177308 D; Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its sub- mission, prepare a time -impact analysis using fragments to demonstrate the effect of the pro- posed change on the overall project schedule. 23 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GAN TT CHART) X Gantt -Chart Schedule;Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt -chart -type, Contractor's Construction Schedule within 10 days of date established for the Notice of Award, Base schedule on the Preliminary Construction Schedule and whatever updating and feedback was received since the start of Project, B; Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line, 1 For construction activities that require 3 months or longer to complete, indicate an esti- mated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar, 2.4 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following infor- mation concerning events at Project site: I , List of subcontractors at Project site. 2, Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 1 Accidents. ,4C Meetings and significant decisions. 5, Unusual events (refer to special reports). 6Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 7. Meter readings and similar recordings, & Emergency procedures, Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdictiom 10. •- •s^ received and implemented, 11Construction Change Directives received, 12. Services connected and disconnected. 11 Equipment or system tests and startups. 14Partial Completions and occupancies. 15. Substantial Completions authorized. B. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare a detailed report. Submit with a request for information. In- clude a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents, A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At weekly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule before each regularly scheduled progress meeting, CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION — 04/29/2015 01 3200-3 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177,308 1, Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting, 2Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION — 04129/2015 013200-4 SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A, This Section"`...: administrative ! procedural r*f for submittingShop ,.;.. ings, Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action. B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's approval. Submit- tals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A, Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of con- struction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. B, Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resu mittals, as fol- lows, Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. 1. Initial Review: Allow 14 days for initial review and additional review of each submittal. At - low additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. Architect will advise Contractorwhen a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. . Direct 'Transmittal to Consultant: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted directly to Architect's consultants, provide duplicate copy of transmit- tal to Architect, Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contrac- tor. 3, No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmitsub- mittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing. C. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches on label or beside title block to record Con- tractor's review and approval markings and action takers by Architect. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken. a. Project name. b, Gate. C. blame and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. e, Name and address of subcontractor. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES — 04/29/201 013300-1 i I •In 111 •I Sislar• 177308 f. Name and address of supplier, g. Name of manufacturer. h. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. j. Submittal number consisting of specification section where the submittal is speci- fied followed by a sequence number for submittals for that specification section (06 0400-1, 06 4000-2, etc.), k. Other necessary identification. D. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. E. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions of the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final • a. Project name. b. Date. c. Destination (To:). d. Source (From:). e. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. t Categoryand type of submittal. g, Submittal purpose and description. h. Submittal and transmittal distribution record, L Remarks. j, Signature of transmitter. k. Submittal number consisting of specification section where the submittal is speci- fied followed by a sequence number for submittals for that specification section (06 4000-1, 064000- , etc.), 1. Other necessary identification, G. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fab- ricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms, K Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect in connection with construction. PART` 2 -PRODUCTS SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES — 04/29/2015 013300-2 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 21 ACTION SUBMITTALS X General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. 1 Number of Copies: Submit digital (PDF) files of each submittal, as follows, unless other- wise indicated: a. Submittal: Submit one (1) copy of each submittal where selection of options, color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics is required. Architect will return one (1) copy and digital file with options selected. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. I If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data, 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturers written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. C. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Standard color charts. e. Manufacturers catalog cuts, f. Wiring diagrams showing factory -installed wiring, g: Printed performance curves. fi: Operational range diagrams. i. Standard product operating and maintenance manuals. j. Compliance with recognized trade association standards, k. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. I. Application of testing agency labels and seals. m. Notation of coordination requirements, C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project -specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable: a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. C. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing -in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field -installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions, g. Templates and patterns. hSchedules. i, Design calculations. j. Compliance with specified standards, k. Notation of coordination requirements. 1. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. 2. Wiring Diagrams, Differentiate between manufacturer -installed and field -installed wiring. 3, Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES — 04/29/2015 013300-3 LMC, MRI Equipment Replacement 177.30 4. Number of Copies; Submit copies of each submittal, as follows: q. Initial Submittal: Submit one correctable" translucent, reproducible print and two blue- or black -line prints. Architect will return the reproducible print, D. Samples; Prepare physical units of materials or products, inclining the following: 1, Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section Quality Requirements" for mockups. 2. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's colter charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of calors„ textures, and patterns available. 3. Additional Information: On an attached separate shut, prepared on Contractor's letter- head, provide the following; a, Size limitations. b. Compliance with recognized standards. c. Availability. d. Delivery time. . Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern and texture for a final check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between final submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. a. If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the prod- uct represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of the variations. b. Refer to individual Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illus- trate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, oper- ation, and similar construction characteristics, Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply" with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construc- tion Progress Documentation" for Construction Manager's action. P. Submittals Scheduler Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."' G. Application for Payment. Comply with requirements in Division I Section ""Payment Proce- dures." H. Schedule of Values, Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." I. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying ,individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES -- 04/29/201 013300-4 1 111 113833m= A, Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note correc- tions and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. BApproval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents, 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B, Action Submittals-. Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows: C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will reject and return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to ap- propriate party. D. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES — 04/29/2015 013300-5 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 SECTION 01 3500 — SPECIAL PROCEDURES (INFECTION CONTROL, METHOD OF PROCEDURE AND NOISE PERMIT) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY X This Section includes requirements for Infection Control, Methods of Procedure and Noise Per- mits as follows: 1 Infection Control. - a. Requirements for Infection Control Permit (ICP) b. Temporary partitions, 2, Methods of Procedure: a. Requirements for developing and implementing Method of Procedure (MOP) dur- ing building system shut downs b. Additional requirements and supplemental instructions. C. MOP Guidelines d. Method of Procedure Outline form. e. Welding or cutting permit. f. Outside contractor evaluation form, 1 Noise Permit., a, Requirements for developing and implementing Noise Permits during the construc- tion of this project, b. Additional requirements and supplemental instructions. c. Noise permit Guidelines d, Noise Permit Outline form. B. Related Sections include the following. - 1 . Division 1 Section "Summary", 2. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures". 3. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination". 4. Division I Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls". 11 SUBMITTALS AImplementation and Interruption Schedule* Within 15 days of date established for submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule, submit a schedule indicating implementation and termina- tion of each temporary facility, periods of interruption to existing utilities and potential noise im- pacts to hospital operations resulting from demolition and construction related activities, B. Prior to beginning construction, Owner will schedule an Infedon Control Risk Assessment meeting. From this meeting a Risk Assessment Checklist will be provided to the Contractor. LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.30 Prior# beginning construction,contractor # submit a propose Method of Procedure fir`.. schedule using the procedures as established by the hospital (see Attachment C), If the initial ..fir schedule is not satisfactory,be revised to the satisfactionof * Owner for •. '# approval. D, Prior to beginning construction, contractor to submit a proposed Noise Permit schedule using the procedures as established by the hospital (see Attachment D). If the initial noise permit ap- proval, PART 2 - INFECTION CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS, CONSIDERATIONS ANIS REQUIREMENTS 2.1 INFECTION CONTROL DESCRIPTION: A. Submit an Infection control plan in any area occupied by patients or staff, unless directed to the contrary by the owner. construction d dust controlb plan view. 2Indicate types of barrier, (plastic, drywall, melamine -faced panels, etc.). 1 Indicate types of seats to be provided with each barrier type. 4Document methods to keep surfaces, clean at all times in patient, staff and public areas. 5. Show traffic patterns to be used during demolition and construction phases, 6. Indicate dumpster locations in plan, and routes of travel to dumpsters. 7, Establish and maintain negative air pressure within construction areas, & Document negative air pressure by using owner furnished recording instrumentation. a. Attach recorded tapes to corresponding superintendent's daily report and give to project manager. b. Contractor to supply negative air pressure recording instruments. 9: Protect air -Dandling equipment. 10. Weatherstrip openings. 3.1 MOP DESCRIPTION. A. Definition: Method of Procedure (MOP) is a written plan which describes the activities and pro- cedures to safeguard the building's occupants and contents and to interface with the building's management, operations and security. Building occupants shell be defined as employees, pa- tients, and visitors. 6: Requirements: 1. An MOP is required when aconstruction' activity affects the safety of the occupants, equipment or valuable contents, or any supporting system; or essentially affects the building's management, operations or security. 2. An MOP is required for any shutdown or interruption of any system which affects the building occupants, including, but not limited to, infrastructure, life safety, electrical, and building management systems. 1 An MOP is required when requested or deemed necessary by the Owner or Engineer. C; Development: 1. The Prime Contractor shall develop, submit, track and process the MOP. Any assistance required by the Subcontractors shall be provided." All MOP's shall be reviewed by the Prime Contractor prior to submitting the MOP to the Owner and Engineer. . ALL MOP'S SHALL BE TYPED hand written submittals will be rejected. 3. Contractor shall develop the MOP in a timely fashion prier to review and approval by all required parties. 4. Contractor shall develop the MOP with input from the subcontractor, where necessary.' o. Project schedule will not be compromised by Contractors failure to follow M.O.P. guide- lines. D. Form: Each MOP shall be a written document in narrative, descriptive or outline form supple- mented with drawings, diagrams and schedules as necessary.' The detailed format included under this section shall be utilized. E. Review and Approval: Contractor shall submit each MOP to the Engineer for review and ap- proval. All MOP's require Owner's approval. Incomplete MOP's will not be processed. F= Implementation: Contractor shall implement the MCP when approved by the Engineer and Owner in writing. No construction activity which requires a MOP shall proceed until the MOP is approved. G. Compliance: Contractor shall comply with the approved MOP. The Owner and Engineer re- serve the right to stop the work for non-compliance with the MOP.. Any cost or time delay result- ing from the work stoppage shall be borne by the Contractor. K Posting: Work shall not proceed on any facet of the work involving any MOP if an approved and signed MOP is not posted in the work area. 3.2 MOP CONSIDERATIONS: A. General: The following are considerations in developing the Method of Procedure: 1. Develop a detailed listing of MOPS which will be required as part of the project. Submit at the preconstrution meeting, included on the project schedule. 2. Identify the construction area and its boundaries. SPECIAL PROCEDURES — IC„ MOPsr NOISE PERMITS - 04/29/201 013500-3 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 3. Identify access of trades and materials to location. 4. Identify the sequence of work and impact on occupants in the area. 5. Identify the protection and separation required for access to work and work area. 6. Determine the exact amount of materials required and availability at time of work. 7, Determine the duration of the work. 8, Request temporary facilities for occupants and office equipment if necessary. 9, Notify occupants via Owner in pre -established time frame. 10, Require the presence of the Owner's technical personnel for additional procedures in sensitive areas, 11. Develop together with the Owners technical personnel for additional procedures in sensi- tive areas. 33 MOP ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS: A. Contractors that have been approved for access into the facility will be required to comply with all rules and or restrictions set forth and directed by the Building Management or applicable codes. Responsibility of the "Prime Contractor is to assure all sub -contractors are aware of and comply to the following, B. Major mechanical or electrical shutdowns require two weeks notice, minor shutdowns - 72 hours, in addition to a "Method of Procedure" (MOP) submitted and approved by the Owner's representative(s), All shutdowns are required to be completed during off hours. This require- ment will be at the discretion of the Engineer, Owner and Owner's technical personnel, C. If primary systems serving critical areas as determined by the Owners representative are taken out of service, for any reason, the Contractor shall be responsible for providing temporary sys- tems during the period when the primary system is out of service, The Contractor shall be re- sponsible for providing temporary power to the standby system, D. Limit construction operations to those methods and procedures which will not adversely and unduly affect the working environment of Owner's occupied spaces, including noise, dust, odors, air pollution, ambient discomfort, poor lighting, hazards and other undesirable effects and conditions. E, The Contractor shall coordinate and co-operate with Owner at all times for all new to existing connections, system shutdowns and restart -up, flushing and filling both new and existing sys- tems. F. Provide temporary ductwork and piping services where required to maintain existing areas op- erable, G. Coordinate all services shut -down with the Owner, provide temporary services as required. The Contractor shall not operate any valve, switch, mechanical equipment, electrical equipment, etc. without prior approval from the Owner or authorized Owner's Representative. All mechanical and electrical service shut -downs shall be identified as a critical step in the MOP. K The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance operation and servicing of all new me- chanical systems which are to be used by the Owner during the time ooccupancy and use of any areas within the construction limitations before final completion or acceptance of the sys- tems. A written record of maintenance, operation and servicing shall be turned over to the it prior to final acceptance. 3.4 MOP GUIDELINES: SPECIAL PROCEDURESMOPs, NOISE PERMITS — 04/29/2015 013500-4 LMC. MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 1. Step by step activities shall include the following.- a. ollowing:a. If new installations require connection to or termination of existing ,AC sources, ver- ify if power can be de -energized with Facilities Managment. Submit list of all sys- tems affected with M.O.P, including connections that should not be performed while energized. b, All affected systems: If power is de -energized, all affected systems shell be identi- fied and addressed. This should include review of panelboard directories to verify circuits effected if the panel is shut down. c: `Gime frame for each step shall be identified. d. ' Communication with Facilities Management shall be maintained at all times. This shall be done for safety reasons and to verify if there are any noted problems or if equipment shutdowns occurred due to loss of power. e. If temporary power feeds are required, equipmentaffected and temporary power source shall be checked before and after de-energization of primary AC power source. This should be included in the special tenant needs/requirements section, f. Prior to returning to normal' power source, Contractor shall' notify Facilities Manament and shall be identified as a critical step in the MOH Once this is clone, AC power should be verified (Le, voltage, rotation ground, etc.) and docu- mented in a formal submittal to the resign 'beam. g. AC/DC power cables must be tagged/labeled prior to being worked on. . Affected air conditioning systems equipment for mechanical related work or de- energization of air conditioning system equipment shall include the following: �• • � -•' s e, a -s a • Stop when the "unexpected" is encountered and proceed with the contingency/backout plan, If contingency/backout plan does not address the "unexpected," work shall be stopped - NO EXCEPTIONS. It is to everybody's advantage to: a. Anticipate problems; b. Clearly identify contingency plans; C. Clearly identify back out plan. 4: Verify with Building Operations any affected alarms at the beginning and ending of each M.O.P. to ensure integrity is in place. . What is going to be affected by M.O.P. work? •' # • "^• . • - a s # # - - .a s - � # s • -a s a s • -• s #- s -• -s # • s- #- �# # #- • -• a- s .ate _ #• # -+w a # • - • .#- # s .a• - s s a -• # # a a !#- # 9. List any and all systems that could be affected by the work procedure, wa- s � e -a •- -s # " # # # a s `- s• s sa # : -sass -# - -# a • a- •- -a r -a # .ss s -a • s a a .a- - # s - -iv 12. Prier to MOP work, the Contractor, Engineer shall walk through the MOP step-by-step procedure to verify each step is workable and in order. 13. AC/DC Power Maintenance, service- affectinga. All potential service -affecting switchgear activity, power arrangements, or p ys ca contact work inside any power board, controller, distribution bays or cabinets, shall be coordinated with the Owner's representative and performed during the time in - work• !include but # # •limited 1) Circuit breaker testing and replacement. 2) Bus duct and cable torquing, testing, and cleaning. SPECIAL. PROCEDURES -- IC, MI Ps; NOISE PERMITS -- 04/29/2015 013500-6 LMC, MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 3) Transformer testing and cleaning. 4) Motor and switching control center testing and cleaning.` ) Utility company transformer testing and maintenance. 6) damp -on AC/DC voltage and amperage readings on any power leads connected to fuses or breakers. ) Performing any physical contact work inside a power board, control bay, distribution center/unit or cabinet. ) Battery strap cleaning and/or replacement; b. Visual and infrared inspections of switchgear, load centers, transformers, panels, motor and switching control centers, batteries, fuses, etc., may be performed at any time. These inspections should be coordinated with Building Operations. PART 4 - PRODUCTS 4.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide new materials. Undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condi- tion may be used if approved by Architect. ' Provide' materials suitable for use intended. B, Faint: Comply with requirements in division 9 Section "Painting." C, Water: Potable, D, Tarpaulins: Fire -resistive labeled with flame -spread rating of 15 or less, 4.2 EQUIPMENT A. For core drilling; Contractor to use Hilti core drill, Hammer drills will not be allowed. PART 5 - EXECUTION 5.1 INFECTION CONTROL LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.318 Temporarye. Partitions: # duration # or less)projects rated plastic sheeting barrier wall construction, with approval of the Owner, Refer to Attachment, rr included in this section. K The contractor shall be responsible to complete the following MOP, Welding and Cutting Permit, and Outside Contractor Evaluation Form, per the instructions and direction outlined in this sec- #. Refer to Attachments C and D included in this section. Contact1. MOP numberNumber is to be sequentially numbered by Prime Contractor indicate# emergency contacts Management3, Description of Work: Describe each step in detail. Provide an asterisk for each critical step. A critical step is defined as anything which could potentially affect medical equip- ment or infrastructure systems which affect medical equipment, as defined by Facilities or the Design Affected:4Area describe area of building, # R. # pieces of equipment fected 5. Hoisting & Hauling: Include detailed information on the following: a. Identify route b. Identify floor/wall.protetion c. Identify weight sof object d. Identify weight capacity of elevator if appropriate e. If a structural system is used to support object, identify component, capacity and method of support. Safety/Infection Control: Include detailed information on the following: a. Fire Protection b. Fire watch C. Dust protection (Infection Control Permit as required) d. Asbestos Containment e. Smoke containment f noise containment (Permit as required) g. ?Vater Containment fm Personal Protection Equipment 7. Tool/Equipment Identification` a. Identify types of tools: Hydraulic tools, such as, conduit benders, crimpers, shears, cable pullers, lifts, hoists, and other devices that may be conductive, b. Include specifics regarding methods of cutting, wet methods detailed. c, Include specifics regarding welding/soldering. Execute a Cutting & welding Permit (Attachment Lt) SPECIAL PROCEDURES — IC, MOPs, NOISE PERMITS — 04/29/2015 013500-8 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 8. Detailed Testing Methods. Include specifics regarding testing methods and procedures required as part of this M.O.P. and procedures required prior to putting system into oper- ation. This should be included in step by step activities. 9, Weather Protection: Include specifics regarding protection from weather. In particular, address water protection, humidity protection, and temperature stability, 10. Special Tenant Needs/Requirements'- This Section to be completed with Us- er/GroupfTenant or on-site work force as applicable. 11. Building Security: This section to be completed by the On Site Work Force/Building Secu- rity as applicable, 1, Contingency Plans: This is an extremely important section that must be completed in de- tail. In the event of an unforeseen problem associated with any aspect of the M.O.P., a contingency plan is to be developed. Identify potential problems that may arise. Include safe stop points. Include back out procedures. Spare parts, materials, etc. shall be iden- tified for contingency plans. 13. Signature Sheet: If work procedure does not affect party identified, signature is not re- quired. a. Procedure for obtaining signatures shall be as follows: 1) Signatures shall be in the order indicated. 2) Originator of M.O.P. shall indicate "N/A" adjacent to individuals who are not involved and/or affected by the M.O.P. 5.3 NOISE PERMIT X Noise Permits: See Attachment E included in this section for Noise Permit Notification and Au- thorization. B. Noise Permit Instructions: 1. Complete Scheduled Noise Permit (Attachement E) 2Post executed permit at each impacted department 3. Provide copy of executed permit to Facilites Management Office R 177,308 SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART I - GENERAL HENNNN�� C. Related Sections include the following: 1 Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for developing a schedule of required tests and inspections, 2. Division I Section "Cutting and Patching" for repair and restoration of construction dis- turbed by testing and inspecting activities, 1 Divisions 2 through 33 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements. 12 DEFINITIONS A, Quality -Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defiacts and deficiencies and ensure that proposed con- struction complies with requirements. B Quality Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that completed construction complies with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C. Mockups: Full-size, physical example assemblies to illustrate finishes and materials. Mockups are used to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordina- tion, testing, or operation; they are not Samples. Mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. D. Testing Agency- An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing la- boratory shall mean the same as testing agency. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS — 04/29/2015 014000-1 Itgaff mall 1 M• " s�� 177.308 A. Copies of Regulations: Obtain copies of the following regulations and retain at Project site to be available for reference by parties who have a reasonable need: I Reference Standards — General: a. Comply with edition of standard indicated-, if data is not indicated, comply with edi- tion in effect as of: 1 ) Date of agreement b. Compliance with standards, which are revised or reissued after that date will not be required unless incorporated into the contract, documents by modification. c.Where applicable codes, laws or regulations require editions of different dates, ob- tain instructions from the governing authorities as to which edition is required. 2. The requirements of reference standards are binding on the Contractor, just as if they were copied into the contract documents, but no provisions of reference standards shall after the contractual relationship of the parties to the contract. 1 Keep at the site at least one copy of each reference standard specified which covers field mixing, installation quality, or field quality control methods. 1A SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data- For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. B. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency, 1 Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 4. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 5. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 6. Complete test or inspection data. 7Ambient conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. & Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 9Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 10. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, < jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compli- ance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE K Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar tothose indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient produc- tion capacity to produce required units. 014000-2 • # it •' # i :. i # # � i is #". i ,. ♦.. # 1.6 QUALITY CONTROL A towner Responsibilities Where quality -control service are indicated ted s Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. QUALITY REQUIREMENT – 04/29/201 014000-3 00- 1 Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing en- gaged to • - failed2. Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as au- thorized by Change Orders. 3. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor,. • the Contract Sum will be adjusted by • Order. I Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these duality -control services. e. Contractor shall not employ the same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires test- ing or inspecting will be performed. Construction Deficiencies frog: a. The Contractor shall develop and maintain a log of construction deficiencies and non -conforming work noted by the Owner, Architect, Contractor or resting Agency to be addressed and corrected by the Contractor. b. Each item on the log shell be referenced by an item number and include: 9 ) A description of the deficiency 2) The date the deficiency was reported ) Dame of individual and Firm name who reported the deficiency 4) A description of the corrective action taken if any) 6) The date when the correct action was taken ) Indication whether alion--Conformance Report (NCR) was issued I Testing agency will notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficien- observed in the Work during performance of 2Testing agency will submit a certified written report -of each test, inspection, and similar quality -control service tw Architectcopy to Contractor and to authorities juris- diction, QUALITY « 04/29/2015 3. Testing agency will submit a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies, 4. Testing agency will interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether test- ed and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents, 5. Testing agency will retest and reinspect corrected work, D� Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory -authorized service repre- sentative to inspect field -assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing. Jill 1111 11111 lJ lllll�Jllii iiii ii I illipillill 11111 1111ii I 1. Access to the Work. 2Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections, 1 Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and in- specting. Assist agency in obtaining samples, 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies, 6Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7, Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. K Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality -assurance and quality -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and re- placing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. I I Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities, 1. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality - control services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 5 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS — 04/29/2015 014000-5 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 1, Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Mot Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION K General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair dam- aged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other erections of these Specifications. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching. 2. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching." B3 Protect construction exposed by or for quality -control service activities: C. Repair and protection are Contractors responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsi- bility for quality -control services. END OF SECTION 014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 0412912015 014000-6 LMC: MR[ Equipment Replacement 177.308 SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY X This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. ZTemporary utilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Water service and distribution. 2. Sanitary facilities, including toilets, wash facilities, and drinking -water facilities. 3, Heating and cooling facilities, 4, Ventilation. 5Electric power service. 6. Lighting. 7. Telephone service. 1. Project identification and temporary signs, 2. Waste disposal facilities, 1 Field offices. 4, Temporary elevator usage. 5, Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities. D. Security, infection control and protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the following - I Barricades, warning signs, and lights. 2« Temporary partitions, 1 Fire protection. 4. Site clean-up, E, Related Sections include the following: I Division I Section "Submittal Procedures" for procedures for submitting copies of imple- mentation and termination schedule and utility reports. 2. Division I Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements, 3, Division I Section "Special Procedures" for infection control, method of procedure and noise permit requirements, 4« Divisions 2 through 33 for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements for products in those Sections, 1.2 USE CHARGES A, Water Service: Use water from Owner's existing water system without metering and without payment of use charges. B. Electric Power Service: Use electric power from Owner's existing system without metering and without payment of use charges. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS — 04/29/2015 015000-1 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177308 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Implementation and Termination Schedule. Within 15 days of date established for submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule, submit a schedule indicating implementation and termina- tion of each temporary utility. B. Prior to beginning construction, contractor to submit a proposed Infection Control Plan (ICP) us- ing the procedures as established by the hospital. If the initial ICP is not satisfactory,; it must be revised to the satisfaction of the Owner for signed approval. Refer to Division 1 "Special Proce- dures". 1 A QUALITY ASSURANCE X Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6, NECA's "Temporary Electrical Facilities," and NFPA 241 1 Trade jurisdictions: Assigned responsibilities for installation and operation of temporary utilities are not intended to interfere with trade regulations and union jurisdictions. tem- porary electric service, Install service to comply with NFPA 70. tem- porary before use. Obtain .w .• certifications and •- 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Utilities: At earliest feasible time, when acceptable to Owner, change over from use of temporary service to use of permanent service. I Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall as - responsibility foroperation, - _ b • protection of each permanent vice during its use as a construction facility before Owners acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. B. Conditions of e following conditions applyto use of - s• services • facilities by all parties engaged in the Work. 1. Deep temporary services and facilities clean and neat. 2, Relocate temporary services and facilities as required by progress of the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AGeneral- Provide new materials. Undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condi- tion may be used if approved by Architect. Provide materials suitable for use intended� B. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 9 Section "Painting." C, Water: Potable. D. Tarpaulins: Fire -resistive labeled with flame -spread rating of 15 or less. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS — 04/29/201 015000-2 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177308 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. General. Provide equipment suitable for use intended. B. Fire Extinguishers: Hard carried, portable, UL rated. Provide class and extinguishing agent as indicated or a combination of extinguishers of FP -recommended classes for exposures. 1 Comply with NEPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing went, and size re- quired by location and class of fire exposure. C, Field Office: Coordinate location of field office and telephone with the Hospital' Facilities manag- er. U. Staging Areas. No on-site Staging Areas are available. Minimal on-site storage areas should be coordinated with the Hospital Facilities Manager and/or Construction Manager -Advisor, if appli- cable. PART 3 - EXECUTION ION 31 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilitieswhere they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as re- quired. Cho not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. .2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION • .•- • .» W» s - • •» w • _ s •» • • •. C. Sanitary Facilities* Coordinate use of existing facilities with the Hospital Facilities Manager, TEMPORARY FACILITIESAND O 04/2912015 015000-3 LMC- MRI Equipment Replacement 177308 t .• - tt - ' t t- t ^° t.t- s ,, t.t� t - t t tr • t is t -t -• .t ,. t• . t t t- t t• t• t tt-t- • t- • t a - - -t - t li st - t • � .t^ t ttri rt t t •• � .tt t+� - - t t- • t -• - - tt - - t - t t •. .. is - e ; t t- -t t - • t ' t, t t t- - tt t •t -t t t t - • •• t t• t t. -t - t t s t t t -• t t t �• _ - t t s - - -t t - • t- -t s .. trot t- t• t ,.t -► w -- -t t t t FElectric Power - Use of t electric power service will be permitted, as long as equipment -r in a condition-• -t - to G. Electric Distribution: Provide receptacle outlets adequate for connection of power tools and equipment.. 1. Provide waterproof connectors to connect, separate lengths of electrical power cords if single lengths will not reach meas where construction activities are in progress. Co not exceed safe length -voltage ratio. H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills "security and protection requirements without operating entire system. 1. Telephone Service: Provide'temporary telephone service throughout LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.303 3. Provide a portable cellular telephone for superintendent's use in making and receiving telephone calls when away from field office. a xM I X Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for erecting structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning signs to inform personnel and public of possible hazard. Where appropriate and needed, pro- vide fighting, including flashing red or amber lights, B. Temporary Partitions: Refer to Division 1 "Special Procedures" for barrier construction and re- moval requirements, A # I fire - rated plastic sheetingo «construction,approval of - Owner, Referr Division "Special Procedures" for barrier construction t removal requirements. Temporary Fire Protection: fire -protection needsare supplied by permanent facilities, staff and maintain temporary fire -protection facilities of types needed to protect against reason- ably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241. 1 Provide fire e*inguishers, installed on walls on mounting brackets, visible and accessible from a - being served, with signmounted -ts - r� s r •t t •- t s s • m - t _ t«t � : « s - •s is - t e •« • « « r - • • rr • ,.« « t . s • • • - • s s r s- • « t s s • - t • •♦ e r a •- - e • •s- r • t t t- tt s • • t s r+ t- - t s- t a s s - s s•. tat- �► • a« • - • - r « ,, s r t- t t ,: e t « • is ,� � « • « « - t «t «t • ss • t •-s ars• to- a s u s r` s- s •. rt- • r « tr - r ,, ,�. t ss a t' s • - t s « star t r s« «t - ss ,; t -s -s s t •^:IN11111 I- - • s « a ss « « «a - st :t W s^ s s r :« is « « «' t t r « • � s •- « «s t-- -• . -• t r -r t t- • s t r t. r a ,� t • •- s s r• a« -s t- s is "'-r« sw «r -s s is .* « - +► «• . .. s s • r- � r -t« « TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS — 04/29/2015 015000-6 LMG: MRI Equipment Replacement 177308 1 . Miaterials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the property of Contract] Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during constru tion period. Comply with final cleaning requirements in Division I Section "Closeout P r cedures." END OF SECTION 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS — 04/29/2015 015000-7 SECTION 016000 . PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 _ GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY Substitutions: *eproducts, equipment,and methods of construction from those required by * Documents and proposed *Contractor. E� Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS — 04/29/201 016000-1 A. Substitution Requests: Submit digital (PDF) copy of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. I Substitution Request Form: Use form provided at end of Section, 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 2WRODUCT REQUIREMENTS — 04/29/2015 016000-2 LMC. MRI Equipment Replacement 177.31 1®5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STt RAG , AND HANDLING A: deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturers written instructions. 1. Schedule delivery to ` minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. . Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3 Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. . Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. . Sure products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units,. . Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. . Stare products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 3. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather -protection requirements for storage. gr Protect stored products from damage. S. Storage; provide a secure location and enclosure at project site for storage' of materials and equipment by Owners construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner. 1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other Documents.warranties required by the Contract Documents, Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract B: Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." PART 2 - PRODUCT 21 PRODUCT OPTIONS A General Product Requirements; Provide products that comply' with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged, and unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. .' Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in .similar situations on other projects. 1 Gainer reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4: Where products are 'accompanied` by the term' "as selected," Architect will make selection. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS — 04/29/2015 016000-3 & Timi% Architect will consider requests for substitution if received prior to submission o 1 proposals. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion o BConditions- Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied, If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: A Ili I ;162111 lit PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS — 04/29/2015 016000-4 6, Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction, 7. Requested substitution is compatible with • portions of the Work. 8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 9Requested substitution provides specified warranty. 10. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS — 04/29/2015 016000-5 LMC; MIDI Equipment replacement 177.306 SECTION 016000.01 6000.01 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FAR USE DURING BIDDING OR AFTER AWARD OF CONTRACT PROJECT NAME: ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NO: Bid or Construction Package. To: (Contractor's Company) (Street Address) (City State Zip) (Phone Fax Email) (Contact Name) From: (Subcontractor Company) (Street Address) (City State Zip) (Phone Fax Email) (Contact Nae) THE ABOVE FIRM HEREBY REQUESTS CONSIDERATION OF THE FOLLOWING PRODUCT OR SYSTEM AS A SUBSTITUTION IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE PROVISIONS OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: A. Reason for Substitution: (circle one)for Causeor for Convenience 1. After Bidding only; If applicable; explain advantage, to Owner: . After Bidding only, explain Caine: a. If applicable, non-availability due to: (circle one) [discontinuation of Production Unable to meet Construction Schedule Labor Dispute (strike or lockout) Bankruptcy Proven Shortage Proposed Cost Savings B. Specified Product or System. SUBSTITUTION REQUEST -- 04/29/2016 016000,01-1 SMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 977.308 1. Product Name - 2, Specification Section. , Articles)/Paragraphs: C. Requested Substitution: 1, Product Name/Number: 2. Maintenance Service Available? (circle one) "Yes No 3. Maintenance Company Name and Location; 4. Darts Source Available? (circle one) `les No 5 Farts Source Name and Location: Attach product description, specifications, drawings, photographs, performance data, test data, warranty information and any additional data or information for evaluation of the proposed substitution in accordance with requirements of Specifications Section 01800. 7. Sample is attached? (circle one) Yes No 8. Sample is available on request? (circle one) Yes No 9. history: (circle orae) New Product less than 5 years old 5 years old or older 1, Product Comparison: Specified Product Proposed Substitution 1: Product Name - 2. Manufacturer . Catalog No, . Variation(s) After Bidding, Unit Cost 6. After Bidding, Total Cost E, Effect of the Substitution: 1 Proposed substitution affects other parts of the Work? (circle one) Yes No 2. If yes, explain: . Substitution requires dimensional revision or redesign of Architectural, Structural„ Mechanical or Electrical work? (circle one) Yes No SUBSTITUTION REQUEST -- 04/2912015 01 8000.01-2 l_IVIC: MRI Equipment Replacement 173 4, If yes, explain: E. ,After Bidding only, Time and Cost Implications, including cost of effect on ether work: 1. Total cost implications: (circle one) Add Amount Deduct Amount 2: Total time implications: (circle ane) Add bays Deduct Days Gr Dist a minimum of 3 previousinstallations below, similar to use identified in the Construction Documents, where the proposed substitution has been used. Provide other data indicated, 1 Project Name: a. Address: bn Owner.- c, wner,c. Architect: d. General Contractor: e, bate Installed: f. Approximate Value ($): 2. Project Name: a. Address b. Owner.- c. wner:c. Architect.- d. rchitect:d. General Contractor. e, Gate Installed: t Approximate Value ( ): 3. Project Name. a. Address: b. Owner: SUBSTITUTION REQUEST — 04/29/201 01 60W 01-3 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177-308 c. Architect: d. general Contractor: e.. Date Installed: f, Approximate Value: H. For use by entity making Proposed Substitution: Statement of Compliance of Proposed Substitution with Contract Requirements: 1. I e have personally investigated the proposed substitution and determined it is equal or superior in all respects to the specified product or system and will perform the intended function, except as stated above. And: a. The proposed substitution is in full compliance with applicable code requirements, bThe propose substitution will provide the same or superior warranty as specified. c. The proposed substitution is compatible with adjacent construction. d. The proposed substitution has maintenance and parts which are locally or readily available. e. I have included complete dost data and implications of the proposed substitution. f. I will pay redesign cost of Architect, Special Inspections and ether costs possibly caused by the proposed substitution. g. I will pay additional costs to other Contractors caused by the proposed substitution. h. I will pay for additional costs to coordinate incorporation of the proposed substitution in the Work. L I will modify my work or pay for modifications to work by others as may be needed to incorporate the proposed substitution in the Work. t. I will waive all future claims for added cost or time to the Contract, except as indicated herein, caused by the proposed substitution. k. Additional Comments: . Signature: bate: Printed name: 4. Firm: 5. After Bidding: Date Sent to Contractor 5. During Bidding: Crate Sent to Architect 1. After Bidding, For use• • t additional • « • -d to document review and additional 1. Date received by Contractor: Testament: Contractor hereby attests that to the best of their knowledge the substitution proposed is equivalent or necessary according to the requirements of this specification section: a. By (Signature): Date,- b. ate: b. Print Name and Title: 1 Contractor's Recommendation: (circle one )Accept Substitution Reject Substitution SUBSTITUTION REQUEST — 04/29/2015 01 6000.01-4 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 a.. By (Signature) Date: . Print Name and Title: 4, Comments (include any anticipated adjustments to work, project sum or schedule): 5. Additional Information requested (date): . Date forwarded to Architect J. For use by Architect: 1. Gate Received by Architect: 2. Architect's Recommendation: (circle one) Accept Substitution Reject Substitution . By (Signature): Gate: 4. Print Name and Title: 5. Comments (Include any anticipated adjustments to documents or additional compensation): . Additional Information requested (date): 7, [Date forwarded to Owner: K. For use by Owner: 1. Date Received by Owner: 2. Owner's Decision: (circle one) Accept Recommendation Reject Recommendation SUBSTITUTION REQUEST — 04/2912015 01'60W01- LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177308 By (Signature): Effete: . Print Name and Title: 5. Comments: 6. Efate returned to Architect= L. If accepted by Owner, Architect will issue Change Order or Addendum: END OF SUBSTITUTION REQUEST SUBSTITUTION REQUEST -- 04/29/2015 01 60K 01-6 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART I -`GENE [ 1A SUMMARY & This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work includ- I ing, but not limited to, the following - I , Construction layout, Z Fielengineering and surveying. 1 General installation of products. 44 Coordination of Owner -installed products, 5Progress cleaning. q. Starting and adjusting. 7. Protection of installed construction, 8. Correction of the Work. 1 , Division I Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 2, Division 1 Section "Cuffing and Patching" for procedural requirements for cutting and patching necessary for 'the installation or performance of other components of the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 31 EXAMINATION A. ExistingCondons'. The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other con- struction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and veri- fy the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affect - w ing the Work. c CAcceptance of Condons: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Appli I tor present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances a other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS — 04/29/2015 017300-1 1 Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. connections2. Examine roughing -in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of equipment and fixture installation, 1 Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 4, Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Pro- ceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions, 3.2 PREPARATION "µ r • - s rtw ♦a • e • • -a t ri SpaceRequirements:space." _ and dimensions of items sh• diagrammati- cally • . on • EReview of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown onDraw- ings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discov- ered, notify Architect promptly. Lay -out: Review lay -out of interior partitions with Architect for owner review and sign -off prior to framing partitions. notice1. Schedule chalked lay -out review of project at least 24 -hours prior to scheduled start time of partition framing installation. Provide Architect and Owner at least three days advance of meeting for chalked lay�but review. CRecord Log- Maintain a log of layout control work, Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each - party member,and types of • tapes used. - the log available for reference by EXECUTIONREQUIREMENTS4 " LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177,308 3A INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and el- evation, as indicated. I Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work levet. Where space is limited;install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for: replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. S. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. Conduct construction operations so no part of the fork is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. "Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. F. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely In place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. 1 . Mounting Heights. Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. . Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. O. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in,exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. H, Hazardous Materials. Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.5 OWNER -INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction forces. B Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction forces. ► •••.WIN 16 OWNER FURNISHED CONTRACTOR INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Contractor to store products until ready for installation EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS — 04/29/2015 017300-3 KM • # # : •-• « =- I. Products will be stored in a banded warehouse until delivery. 2. Delivery will be coordinated with owner. PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Glean Project site and work areas daily, including common .areas. Use Infection Con- trol Plan procedures as established in Section Cil 5000, Appendix A for Construction Procedure Classification(s) Class{es} specified in Section 01 1000 "Summary" and as approved in Infection Control Flan . Coordinate progress cleaning for joint -use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. ,Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NEPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. Z Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the tempera- ture is expected to rise above 80 deg F. 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. 4. Comply with hospital's established Infection' Control Guidelines S. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C, Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.` JClean and provide maintenance on completed conslrubfionas frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS -- 04/2912015 017300-4 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177308 K, Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construc- tion, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise delete- rious exposure during the construction period. A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunction- ing units, replace with new units, and retest. B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory -authorized service representative is required to inspect field -assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division I Section "Quality Requirements." WOWN", i�I• - ♦Al "I, Wim"loww"Aw II 10 IZI II R I JIM am; Iff it ME IRM MR11 itur, I Mul a IIN MILE am A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finish- es. Comply with requirements in Division I Section "Cutting and Patching." 1 Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. DRepair components that do not operate property. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. ERemove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces, END OF SECTION 017300 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS -- 04/29/2015 017300-5 LMCMRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 SECTION 017329 — CUTTING AND PATCHING 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.' S. Related Sections include the following: 1,' Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition for Interiors" for demolition of selected portions of the building for alterations. 2, Division 7 Section "Through -Penetration Firestop Systems" for patching fire -rated con- struction, 3. Divisions 2 through 33 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work, a. Requirements in this Section apply to mechanical and electrical installations. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of existing construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work. S. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after instal.- lation of other Work, 13 SUBMITTALS A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit to the Architect or Construction Manager and Owner's Representative, a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed�Include the following information: A. Structural Elements., Do not cut and patch their load -carrying .p. or w.• •. +oratio. CUTTING AND PATCHING — 04129/2018 017329-1 177.303 maintenanceB, Operational Elements: Do not out and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased *rdecreased operational 1. Primary operational systems and equipment. 2. Air or smoke barriers. , Fire -protection systems. 4. Control systems. .. Communication systems. Conveying systems, 7. Electrical wiring systems. C. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conffi�i. Coordinate procedures and reso, Ive potential conflicts before proceed - 1,5 WARRANTY existingA. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or dam- aged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void DART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS e A. General: Comply with requirements specified ed ire other Sections of these Specifications. B. Existing Materials: Use materials identicalto existing materials. Forexposed terials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. #'materials_ unavailable or # be .# use materialswhen will match the visual and functional performance of eAsting materials, FART 3 - EXECUTION .1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to e performed. I. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, in- cluding compatibility with existing finishes or, primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been cor- rected. 3.2 PREPARATION CUTTING AND PATCHING -- /29/201 01 7329-2 51FIX11,151 A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Pro- vide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cuffing and patching operations. CAdjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas, D. Existing Services: Where existing services are required to be removed, relocated, or aban- doned, bypass such services before cutting to avoid interruption of services to occupied areas. 33 PERFORMANCE X General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay, 1 Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their origi- nal condition. 2. For core drilling, contractor provided Hilti core drills shall be used. Hammer drills or other types of core drilling will be allowed only with prior written approval by owner before commencing core drill work, B, CuttingCut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or ad- joining construction, If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations, I In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammer- ing and chopping, Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concretea Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond -core drill. 4, Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed, Cap, valve, or plug and seat remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent en- trance of moisture or other foreign matter after cuffing. 5Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cuffing are complete, C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possi- ble. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. I Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demo strate integrity of installation, Z Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restor tion into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patc n• «...# and refinishing. 3, Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished art I a rl into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide n ev surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and w CUTTING AND PATCHING — 04/29/2015 017329-3 177. 08 coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and ap- pearance. a. Where patching ,occurs in a painted surface„ apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface con- taining the patch. provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfac- es. 4, Ceilings; patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even - plane surface of uniform appearance. CUTTING AND PATCHING — 04/29/201 01 7329-4 177.308 X Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicat- ed to remain the Owners property, demolished materials shall become the ontractor's proper- ty and shall be removed from the site with further disposition at the Contractoes option. items to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled and relocated, B, Historic items, relics, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, antiques, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be encountered during selective demolition remain Ownees property, Carefully remove and salvage each item or object in a manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to Owner. I Coordinate with Owner's representative, who will establish special procedures for remov- al and salvage. 1.4 SUBMITTALS X General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Divi- sion 1 Specification Sections, for information only, unless otherwise indicated. B. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demon- strate their capabilities and experience, Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information speci- fied. C. Proposed Dust -Control and Noise -Control Measures: Submit statement or drawing that indi- cates the measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify options if proposed measures are later determined tel be inadequate. D. Schedule of selective demolition activities indicating the following: F. Inventory of items to be-rempyed by • G. Predemolition Photographs or Videotape. Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused • selective demolition operations. Submit before Work t•t SELECTIVE DEMOLITION — 04/29/2015 017330-2 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 H, Record drawings at Project closeout according to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout." I Identify and accurately locate capped utilities and other structural, electrical, or m- o. ond 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE K Demolition Firm Qualifications: Engage an experienced firm that has successfully completed selective demolition Work similar to that indicated for this Project, B. Regulatory Requirements-, Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before starting selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having juris- diction. C. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NEPA 241. D. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with preinstallation conference requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." E. Demolition Discovery Conference: Conduct conference at project site after completion of parti- tion and ceiling demolition and abatement for review of scope of mechanical and electrical work and discovery of any unforeseen conditions. Comply with preinstallation conference require- ments of division 1; section "Project Meetings," 1,6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of the building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so that Owners operations will not be disrupted. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations, 13. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction. c Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of areas to be selectively demolished, I Owner will maintain conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose as far as practical. D, Asbestos: It is expected that asbestos will be encountered in the Work. If any materials sus- pected of containing asbestos are encountered, do not disturb the materials, Immediately notify the Architect and the� Owner, 1 . Anticipated asbestos includes but may not be limited to 12" x 12,1 vinyl asbestos tile and mastic, caulk sealant, and pipe fitting insulation. 2. Owner will remove asbestos before start of Work, Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract, E� Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted. F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION -- 04/2912015 017330-3 30710 in 1.7 SCHEDULING 11; !pJ1111111111111 IIIIII111111I ill!lipll A. Schedule selective demolition so as not to interfere with Owner's, building manager's, and other tenants' on-site operations. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Existing Special WarrantyRemove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. I If possible, retain original Installer or fabricator to patch the exposed Work listed below that is damaged during selective demolition. If it is impossible to engage original Installer or fabricator, engage another recognized experienced and specialized firm. a. Processed concrete finishes. b. Stonework and stone masonry. c. Ornamental metal. d. Matched -veneer woodwork. e. Preformed metal panels. f. Roofing. g. Firestopping, h. Window wall system. i. Stucco and ornamental plaster, jTerrazzo. k. Finished wood flooring. L Fluid -applied flooring. M. Aggregate wall coating, n. Wall covering. 0. Swimming pool finishes. p. HVAC; enclosures, cabinets, or covers. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials. 1 . Where identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible, 2. Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing materi- als. B. Comply with material and installation requirements specified in individual Specification Sections. PART 3 - EXECUTION SELECTIVE DEMOLITION — 04/29/2015 017330-4 31 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. BSurvey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of se- lective demolition required. C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be re- moved and salvaged. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with the intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of the con- flict. Promptly submit a written report to the Architect. E. Survey the condition of the building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of the structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition, F. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities, 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES A. Existing Utilities: Maintain services indicated to remain and protect them against damage dur- ing selective demolition operations. B. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities, except when authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction, Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and to governing authorities, I Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner if shutdown of service is required during changeover, 2. Do not proceed with utility interruption without owner written permission, C. Utility Requirements: Locate, identify, shut off, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services serving space to be selectively demolished, I Where utility services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide by- pass connections to maintain continuity of service to other parts of the building before proceeding with selective demolition. 2. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seat the remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing, D: Utility Requirements: Refer to Division 15 and 16 Sections for shutting off, disconnecting, re- moving, and sealing or capping utility services. Do not start selective demolition until utility dis- connecting and sealing have been completed and verified in writing. 33 PREPARATION A. Drain, purge, or otherwise remove, collect, and dispose of chemicals, gases, explosives, acids, flammables, or other dangerous materials before proceeding with selective demolition opera- tions. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION — 04/29/2015 017330-5 177.308 DTemporary Facilities., Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent in- jury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilitl6i to� remain. Ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION — 04129/2015 017330-6 LMC.- MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 rl. Protect air -handling equipment. G. Temporary Shoring. Provide and maintaininterior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. 3A POLLUTION CONTROLS Dust Control: Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental -protection regulations. 1. Do not use water when it may damage existing construction or create hazardous or ob- jectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution.' Wet mop floors to eliminate trackable; dirt and wipe down walls and doors of demolition enclosure. Vacuum carpeted areas. B. Disposal: Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent sur- faces and areas. 1. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent, C. Cleaning; Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by se- lective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective dem- olition operations began. 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new con- struction and as indicated. Use methods rewired to complete Work within limitations of govern- ing regulations and as follows:' 1 Proceed with selective' demolition systematically, from higher to lower' level.' Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. Z Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required.' Use cut- ting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. 'Temporarily cover openings to remain. . Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring ex- isting finished surfaces. 4Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At con- cealed spaces, such as duct and pipe anteriors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame -cutting operations, Maintain fire watch and portable fire - suppression devices during flame -cutting operations. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 5: Remove 'decayed, vermin -infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION — 04/29/2015 01733! Wor-JIM "T 6. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 7Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to im- pose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. & Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. On -Site storage or sale of removed items is prohibited. 9Return elements • construction and surfaces that are to remain to condition existing be- fore selective demolition operations began. B. Comply with building manager's regulations for using and protecting elevators, stairs, walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other building facilities during selective demolition opera- tions. C, Removed and Salvaged Items- Comply with the following: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 1 Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owners storage area on site, designated by owner 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. D. Removed and Reinstalled Items: Comply with the following: EMFCTIVE DEMOLITION — 04/29/2015 017330-8 LMC: MR[ Equipment Replacement I Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings by one of the methods recommended by RFCI, K. Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than can be covered in one day by new roofing, Re- fer to applicable Division 7 Section for new roofing requirements. L, Air -Conditioning Equipment: Remove equipment without releasing refrigerants. X General: Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by selective demolition op- erations. C. Repairs: Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new materials, I Completely fill holes and depressions in existing masonry walls that are to remain with an approved masonry patching material applied according to manufacturer's written recom- mendations. DFinishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining con- struction in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing, E. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are demolished extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide a flush and even surface of uniform finish color, texture, and appearance, I Closely match texture and finish of existing adjacent surface. 2. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications, 1 Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing patch. Pro- vide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance, 5Inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation, where feasible. F. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even -plane sur- face of uniform appearance. X General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to ac- cumulate on-site. 14�1 mm�� SELECTIVE DEMOLITION — 04/29/2015 017330-9 � � AZ I I It 51 Ki III i, i • i li 71 1 11 177308 A. Sweep the Project site broom clean on completion of selective demolition operations. 13Change filters on air -handling equipment on completion of selective demolition operations, END OF SECTION 017330 017330-10 LMC: MR[ Equipment Replacement 177.308 SECTION 01 7700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 11 SUMMARY X This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, includ- ing, but not limited to, the following: 1, Inspection procedures, 2. Project Record Documents, 3. Operation and maintenance manuals. 4, Warranties. 5: Instruction of Owners personnel. 6, Final cleaning. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion. 2. Division 1 Section "Cons ' truction Progress Documentation" for submitting Final Comple- tion construction photographs and negatives. 3. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning of Project site, 4Division I Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data, 5, Divisions 2 through 33 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for products of those Sections. 12 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Com- pletion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES -- 04/29/2015 017700-1 177308 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10, Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, con- struction tools, and similar elements. 11Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities, 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, an maintenance. 11 Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting, 14, Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled require- ments. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued, 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion, 1.3 FINAL COMPLETION X Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Com- pletion, complete the following: 1..o - Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Proce- dures," 2. Submit certified copy of Architects Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for ac- ceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance re- quirements. 4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. TO a 1, Organize list of spaces in sequential order. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES — 04/29/2015 017700-2 Nor -WIT in 2, Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3, Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b, Date. C, Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor, e. Page number. 1,5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTa K General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction pUr*es. Protect Project Record Documents fr6m4A666fAtion and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during • working hours. BRefer to Section 017839 — Project Record Documents for specific requirements. 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows: I. Operation Data - a. Emergency instructions and procedures. b, System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions, including operating standards, GOperating procedures, including startup, shutdown, seasonal, and weekend opera- tions. d. Description of controls and sequence of operations. e. Piping diagrams. 2. Maintenance Data: 1. Distribute approved operation and maintenance manuals to Owner. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES — 04/29/2015 01 7700-3 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 1.7 WARRANTIES A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than cute of Substantial Completion is indicat- ed. S. Martial Occupancy. Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of desig- nated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by {owner during construc- tion period by separate agreement with Contractor. C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. Bind,1. R bonds R Operation 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-poyo* tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or in stallation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone num R- D. provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2- PRODUCTS , 2.1 MATERIALS S A. Meaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabrica- tor of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART" 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING • 11 - a- R - w�.R FR'- • • •R • R s R R R • • R � R +► R. • • R o R • 1. System design and operational philosophy: Review of documentation. . Operations. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES — 04/29/2015 01 7700- 4, Adjustments. 5Troubleshooting. 6. Maintenance, 7, Repair. 32 FINAL CLEANING X General. Provide final cleaning, Conduct cleaning and waste -removal operations to comply With local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regula- tions. 13� Cleaning: Employ experienced Workers or professional cleaners for final deaning� Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and mainte- nance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1 Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: 1 Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electri- cal nameplates. M Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. n. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. 01 Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains re- sulting from water exposure. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES — 04/29/2015 017700-5 LMC-. MR[ Equipment Replacement 177308 p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed sur- faces of diffusers, registers, and grills, q. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during con- struction. r. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned -out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and de- fective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. S. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property, Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materi- als into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from,Project site and dispose of lawfully. END OF SECTION 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES -- 04/29/2015 017700-6 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177,308 SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Docu- ments, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3.Record Product Data. im a 1. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures and mainte- nance manual requirements. 2. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 3. Divisions 2 through 33 Sections for specific requirements` for Project Record Documents of products in those Sections. SUBMITTALS Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit one set of marked -up Record Prints, 2, Number of Copies: Submit copies of Record Drawings as follows: o *r •' •s 1r, ase s • •_ t s sr M. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS ; PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS — 4129/201 017839-1 177.308 A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black --line white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, I Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally, Require individual or entity who obtained record data, wheth- individual or entity is Installer,or similar entity, to prepare »w • Record a. Give particular attentionto information on # -w elements that would be diffi- cult identifyor w record b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. cRecord data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following-, 1. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into man- ageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include Identification on cover sheets. 2. Record Transparencies: Organize Into unbound sets snatching Record Prints. Place transparencies in durable tube -type drawing containers with encu caps.. Mark end cap of PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS — 04/29/2015 017839-2 T_X= each container with identification. If container does not include a complete set, identify Drawings included. 3, Identification: As follows. - a. Project name, b. Date, c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor. 1 Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that can- not be readily identified and recorded later, 2Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 1 Record the name of the manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. 4For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data. 5, Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Product Data where applicable, 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DA1N A, Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation var- ies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1 Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that can- not be readily identified and recorded later, 2, Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manu- facturer's written instructions for installation. 1 Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Product Data where applicable. A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Rec- ord Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS — 04/29/2015 017839-3 9. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples the field office apart froms Documents used for construction.11r not use " • . Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order a in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to .. `- s •• - • _ - . s • � .a- - s normal• r hours. EN© OF SECTION 017839 PROJECT RECORD Ml 4 • i • I SECTION 210500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS. A. Refer to Section 23 0500. All work of Division 21 shall be in accordance with the corresponding section of Division 23, unless otherwise addressed in this Division. END OF SECTION 210500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION — 04/29/2015 SECTION 21 1000 _ WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION CSE WORK ' A. This Sections specifies automatic sprinkler systems for buildings and structures. Materials and equipment specified in this Section include: Pipe, fittings, valves and specialties. Sprinklers and accessories. B. Products furnished but not installed include sprinkler head cabinet with spare sprinkler heads, Furnish to the Owners maintenance personnel. C. The work of this section includes engineering by the Contractor. The Contractor shall act as Engineer of record for all fire protection work D. The fire protection system work is an extension of the existing fire protection system. Provide all modifications to the existing system as required to complete the new work. Provide hydraulic calculationsand shop drawings where required by the extent of the work or by the authority having jurisdiction. 1.2 DEFINITIONS: A. Pipe sues used in this Specification are Nominal Pipe Size (NPS). B. Other definitions for fire protection systems are listed in NFPA Standards 13 and 14. C. Working plans as used in this Section mems those documents (including drawings and calculations) prepared pursuant to the requirements containedin NEPA 13 and 14 for obtaining approval of the authority having jurisdiction. 13 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: A. Provide a complete fire sprinkler system for the entire project area (including, but not limited to, electrical rooms, mechanical rooms and accessible sections of air handling units,) except designated areas as shown on the drawings which will not require fire sprinkler coverage will be specifically noted with ""No A/S" B. Fire protection` system is a "wet -pipe" system employing automatic sprinklers' attached to a piping system containing water and connected to a water supply so that water discharges immediately from sprinklers opened by fire. 1.4 PROJECT SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS: A. All fire protection systems shall be installed to meet NEPA and IBC Seismic Design Category S requirements. 1. Where any conflicts arise the more stringent requirements shall be applicable. WATER BASED FIDE PROTECTION 04/29/201 21 1000-1 'EMME 1.5 SUBMITTALS: ------------- 1, Fire sprinkler piping design drawings shall show all ductwork, air devices, fighting and electrical panels. J. Shop drawings and hydraulic calculations shall be stamped and signed by the local fire prevention authority prior to submitting shop drawings to the Architect/Engineer, 1,6 HYDRAULIC DESIGN: X The Fire Sprinkler System shall be hydraulically calculated by the Contractor. Pipe schedule method is acceptable only as allowed in NFPA 13 5-2.2. BThe wet pipe fire sprinkler system for the building shall be hydraulically calculated to comply with NPA -13, C. The final fire protection system demand shall be a minimum of 10 PSI below the water supply curve. WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION — 04/29/2015 21 1000-2 177,308 D� Velocities in pipes shall be shown on hydraulic calculations, Velocities in overhead piping shall not exceed 32 feet per second. Velocities in underground piping shall not exceed 16 feet per second. E. Allow 10 feet of loss for electric water flow switches and note on hydraulic calculations. F, The Fire Protection Contractor shall provide as many sets of hydraulic calculations as necessary, performed and submitted to prove that the most remote and demanding areas are calculated. G. Design information shall be permanently affixed to the main riser as described in NFPA Pamphlet 13. H. The Fire Protection Contractor shall be responsible for water flow data from the appropriate water department. A copy of the water flow test data from the water department shall accompany the hydraulic calculations before hydraulically calculating equipment fire sprinkler system. 1. The pipe and valve sizes indicated on the drawings and details are minimum sizes to be used regardless of sizes allowed by hydraulic calculations, 11 QUALITY ASSURANCE: B. Qualifications for Welding Processes and Operators: Comply with the requirements of AWS 110.9, Specifications of Qualifications of Welding Procedures and Welders for Piping and Tubing, Level AR -3." C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the requirements of the following codes: 1. NFPA 13 - Standard for the installation of Sprinkler System, including applicable seismic requirements, 2. NFPA 1963 - Screw Threads and Gaskets for Fire Hose Connections. 3. UL and FM Compliance: All fire protection system materials and components shall be Underwriter's Laboratories and Factory Mutual listed as well as labeled for the application anticipated. 4, National Electrical Code (NEC). 5. Uniform Building Codes, including applicable seismic requirements. 6. Requirements of the local Building Department and Fire Department. D. Reference and standards listed are minimum requirements. Where more stringent requirements are specified or noted on the drawings, this shall be applicable. 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING: A. Schedule rough -in installations with installations of other building components. WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION — 04/29/2015 21 1000-3 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177308 B. Minimum time frame for notice of inspections, tests and meetings is five (5) days and list the persons to be notified. 1.9 EXTRA STOCK: A. Meads: For each style and temperature range (and length for dry Leads) required, furnish additional sprinkler heads per NFPA-13. 1. Obtain receipt from Owner that extra stock has been received, B. Drenches; Furnish 2 spanner wrenches for each type and size of valve connections and fire horse coupling. . .. '• s,.•s • + • .• �^•�• +►fir s - • B. All equipment used on this project shall be new and UL listed unless noted or specified otherwise. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire protection system products from one of the following: , 1. Gate Valves: a. Nibco b'. Kennedy Valve; div. of ITT Grinnell Valve Co., Inc; c. Mueller d. Stockha e. Grinnell f. Milwaukee . Swing Check Valves. e. ventral b. Mueller C. Kennedy Valve, Div, of ITT Grinnell Valve Co., Inca d. Star Sprinkler Corp. e. Viking f. Victaulc g. Globe h, Potter Roemer 3. Butterfly and Ball Valves: a. Grinnell b. Mueller WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION -- 04/29/2015 21 1000-4 LMC; MRI Equipment Replacement c. Victaulic , Milwaukee e, Kennedy 4. Grooved Mechanical Couplings: a. Cruvlok b. Victaulic Company of America c Central Sprink, Inc. Fire Protection Specialty Valves . Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co,, Inc. b. Star Sprinkler Corporation c. Viking Corporation . Central . Globe f. Grinnell/Gem • a, Automatic Sprinkler Corp, of America. b, Central Sprinkler Corp, C. ITT Grinnell d. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. e. Star Sprinkler Corp. f. Viking Corp, g, Globe T Fire Protection Specialties: a. Croker-Standard Div.,; Fire -End & Croker Corp: b, Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co,, Inc. C, Grinnell Fire Protection Systems Co.; Inca d. Grunau Sprinkler Mfgr. Co., Inc. e. Dotter Roemer, Inc, Inspector's Test and drain Module a. Victaulic b. A.C.F. Grinnell/Gem 2.3 BASIC IDENTIFICATION: A. General: Provide Identification complying with Division -23 "Mechanical Identification", in accordance with the following listing: 1. Fire Protection Piping: Pipe markers, 2. Fire Protection Valvas; Valve tags. , Fire Protection Signs: Provide the fallowing signs: a. At each sprinkler valve, sign indicating what portion of system valve controls. i WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION 041291201 1 1000-5 LMC MRI Equipment Replacement 177.303 b. At each outside alarm device, sign indicating what authority to call if device is activated. C. At door to each sprinkler control valves or at ceiling access points, sign reading "FIRE CONTROL". d. At each drain or test, sign indicating its purpose. B. Attach to the riser a metal sign indicating the name, address and telephone number of the fire protection contractor. Also indicate the date of installation. 2.4 BASIC PIPING SPECIALTIES: A. General; Provide piping specialties complying with Division -23 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods section "Piping Specialties", in accordance with the following listing; 1. Pipe escutcheons. Dielectric unions. 3. Grip pans. 4. pipe sleeves. 5. Sleeve seals. 6. Fire Barrier penetration Seals. 2,5 BASIC SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS: A. General: Provide supports and anchors complying with Division -23 "Supports and Anchors" in accordance with the following lining; 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers, adjustable steel band hangers, or adjustable band hangers, for horizontal -piping hangers and supports. Two -bolt riser clampsfor piping #il 1 Steel tumbuckles and malleable iron sockets for hanger- rod attachments. 4. Concrete inserts, top -beam C -clamps, side beam or channel clamps or center beam clamps for building attachments. . Concrete inserts and other type hangers penetrating into or through structural members shall be submitted (by the Fire Protection Contractor) to and have the approval of the structural engineer contracted for this project. 6. Powder driven studs shall not be allowed. 7. Hangers (which are acceptable for project) and hanger spacing shall be in accordance with NEPA-13. 2.6 PIPE AND TUBING MATERIALS (INSIDE BUILDING): A. General; Refer to Part 3 Article "Pipe Applications" for identification of systems where the below specified pipe and fitting materials are used. Bt Steel Pepe. ASTM A 53, A795 or A135; Schedule 40 or Schedule 10, U.S. manufacture, black steel pipe, plain ends. WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION — 04/25/2015 21 1000-6 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 C. American Tube Company "Dyna -Thread -40" and "Dyna -Flow" and Allied Tube and Conduit Corporation "Super Flo" are acceptable to Schedule 40 pipe. Installation shall be per manufacturer's recommendations. D. Schedule 5 pipe shall not be allowed. E. The Corrosion Resistance Ratio of the pipe shall be 1.00 or greater, Documentation shall be presented with product submittal, F. Schedule 10 pipe shall only be allowed for pipe sizes 2-1/2inches and larger. G. Provide galvanized, schedule 40, piping system for preaction system and drain risers, 23 FITTINGS (INSIDE BUILDING): A. Cast -Iron Threaded fittings: ANSI 816.4, Class 125 standard pattern, for threaded joints. Threads shall conform to ANSI 131.20.1, G. Cast -Iron Threaded Flanges: ANSI B16.1, Class 250; raised ground face, bolt spot faced. 1. Plain end, hooker type, or push -on fittings or couplings shall not be allowed, J. Bushings and reducing couplings shall not be allowed. K, UL listed and Factory Mutual approved segmentally welded fittings are acceptable, Friction loss and flow data shall accompany hydraulic calculations, 2.8 JOINING MATERIALS: A. Welding Materials: Comply with Section 11, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding matenalsappropn6te for the wall thickness and chemical analysis of the pipe being welded. B. Gasket Materials: Thickness, materials and type suitable for fluid or gas to be handled, and design temperatures and pressures, WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION -- 04/29/2015 21 1000-7 LMC. MRI Equipment Replacement 177.306 2.9 GENERAL DUTY VALVES. A. tate Valves - 2 inch and Smaller: Body and bonnet of east bronze, 175 pound cold water working pressure - non -shock„ threaded ends, solid wedge, outside screw and yoke, rising stem, screw-in bonnet, and malleable iron handwheel. Valves shall be capable of being repacked under pressure, with valve wide open. 13Gate Valves - 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: Iron body; bronze mounted, 175 pound cold water working pressure - non -shock. Valves shall have solid taper wedge; outside screw and yoke rising stem; flanged bonnet, with body and bonnet conforming to A§�TM A 126 Class B; replaceable bronze wedge facing rings; flanged ends, and a packing assembly consisting f a cast iron gland flange, brass gland, packing, bonnet, and bronze bonnet bushing. Valves sh- be capable of being repacked under pressure, with valve wl e open. I C. Butterfly Valves:-112inches to 12inches, grooved, ductile iron body and disc ASTM -536, disc EPDM coated, listed and approved minimum 175 psi service, actuator, self-contained supervisory switch, weatherproof approved for indoor or outdoor use. D. Ball Valves: 1-1/2inches and smaller shall be threaded, forged;brass construction, with Teflon seats and blow out proof stern. Ball shall be full port with chrome plated ball. E. Ball Valves. 2inches to 3inches shall be listed to 300 p.s.i. with optional internal tamper switch. Body shall be ductile iron with corrosion resistant coating. Ball shall be 316 stainless steel, standard port design. E. Swing Check Valves. MSS SP -71; Class 175, cast iron body and bolted cap conforming to ASTM A 125„ Glass B; horizontal swing, with a bronze disc or cast iron disc with bronze disc ring, and flanged ends. Valva shall be capable of being refitted while the valve remains in the line. .10 BASIC METERS AND GAUGES: A. General: Provide meters and gauges complying with Division- 23 "Meters and Gauges", in accordance with the following listing 1. Pressure gauges, 0-250 psi range. 2.11 ALARM DEVICE AND EIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES: , i � ,.� •: is # ..• i :" i.^....# "# ! : ».,. ... : # « ,+ ii... D} Pressure Switch: Indicating low pressure trouble in sprinkler system. WATER BASER SIRE PROTECTION — 04/29/2015 21 1000-8 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 E. Pressure switch:- Indicating flow in sprinkler system. F. Low Air Pressure Horn: Provide low air pressure horn as indicated. `.• •.:".` `.# . •"". . *. ...» *......* *•0 *•..'gip * •. 0 ! ; fi • 2. Concealed Style, Rough brass, adjustable, with painted white cover plate in finished spaces. (GEM Models FR946 and F946 Clean Line Sprinklers are not acceptable.) 3. Recessed Style-, Bright chrome, with bright chrome escutcheon plate. (GEM Models FR948 and F948 recessed sprinklers are not acceptable). . See drawings for additional sprinkler type requirements. C. Sprinkler HeadCabinet and Wrench: Finished steel cabinet, suitable for wall mounting, with hinged cover and space for spare sprinkler heads plus sprinkler head wrench. Provide amounts of each style per iFPA-1. Locate head cabinet on shop drawing submittal. D. Plastic fire sprinkler escutcheons are not acceptable. 2.13 INSPECTOR'S TEST AND BRAIN ASSEMBLY: A. Provide an alarm test module of a manufacturer listed in paragraph 2.2.. B. Comply with NEPA-14, Section 5-11, for draining and testing of wet standpipe system. C. Test and drain piping shall be routed to exterior. 'Location shall meet Owner's approval. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION: A. Examine rough -in for fire hose valves and cabinets to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installing cabinets. B. Examine walls for suitable conditions where cabinets are to be installed. C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PIPE APPLICATIONS: A. Install Schedule 40 steel pipe with threaded joints and fittings for 2 inches and smaller. WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION — 04/29/2015 21 1000-9 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 B, Install Schedule 40 steel pipe with roll -grooved ends and grooved mechanical coupling or with threaded joints and fittings, 13 PIPING INSTALLATIONS: 11 l�i "I P 11 1 v K All piping penetrating walls to structure shall be sleeved and seated per specification Section 230510. L Install test connections sized and located in accordance with NEPA 13 complete with shutoff valve. Test connections may also serve as drain pipes. J. Install pressure gauge on the riser or feed main at or near each test connection. Provide gauge With a connection not less than 1/4" and having a soft metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gauge and valve. Install gauges to permit removal, and where they will not be subject to freezing. K, The fire protection contractor shall be responsible for the coordination of his installation with all other contractors. See Section 23 05 00 for prioritized components, LProtect adjacent area where pipe cutting and threading takes place (e,g, floors, ceilings, walls, K There shall be no fire sprinkler piping in electrical rooms or IT rooms (other than piping serving sprinklers directly in that room) or installed over any electrical panels. N. Provide spring-loaded check valve at top of drain risers. WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION — 04/29/2015 21 1000-10 • «. OInstall pressure gauges on city and system sides of fire entry valve assembly. P. Install hangers straight and true and piping parallel to building lines.. 3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION: A. Welded Joints: AWS D10.9, Level AP -3. B. Threaded Joints: Conform to ANSI 51.20 1, tapered pipe threads for field crit threads. Jain pipe, fittings, and valves as follows; t I Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint. 2. Align threads at point of assembly. , Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads. 4. Assemble joint to appropriate thread depth, When using a wrench on valves place the wrench on the valve end into which the pipe is being threaded. o. Damaged Threads. Do not use pipe with threads which are corroded or damaged. If a weld opens during cutting or threading operations, that portion of pipe shall not be used. C. Flanged Joints: Alignflange surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly to appropriate torque specified by the bolt manufacturer. D. Mechanical Grooved Joints. Boll grooves on pipe ends dimensionally compatible with the couplings. E. End Treatment: After cutting pipe lengths, remove burrs and fins from pipe ends, 3.5 VALVE INSTALLATIONS; A. General: Install fire protection specialty valves, fittings and specialties in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, NEPA 13 and the authority having jurisdiction. 13. tate Valves: Install electronically supervised -open indicating valves so located to control all sources of water supply except fire department and roof manifolds connections. Where there is more than one control valve, provide permanently marked identification signs indicating the portion of the system' controlled by each valve. Refer to Division -2 Section ",Mechanical Identification" for valve tags and signs. WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION -- 04/29/2015 21 1000-11 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.3/38 C. Run piping concealed above heated furred ceilings and in joists to minimize obstructions. Expose only heads. Protect MM -r sprinkler heads againststandard guards. Provid. sprinkler head guards in all mechanical, electrical or storage rooms as well as exposed M. r •+ : ! " E. Provide I inch diameter nipple and 1 inch x 1/2 inch reducing fitting for each upright hea (Excluding equipment •s F. • r_ _.M "pocketed" areas caused by exposed duct,piping r beams. G. Sprinkler head deflector distance f M .ce of finished ceiling shall not exceed 4inches, H. Sprinkler heads shall be located in the center of all 2 foot x 2 foot ceiling tiles and quarter points, along the center line lengthwise of 2 foot x 4 foot ceiling tiles. L Use proper toads to prevent damage during installations. J. Install sprinkler piping in a manner such that mechanical equipment, ceiling tiles or lights can be accessed and easily removed. The sprinkler piping shall be installed to provide a minimum of flinches above the top of a finished ceiling. K. Minimum fire sprinkler head temperature rating for sprinklers in electrical roams shall be 212 degrees F. Keep sprinklers as far from transformers and/or panels as spacing allows. 3.7 INSTALLATION N GF BASIC IDENTIFICATION: A. General. Install mechanical Identification in accordance with Division -23 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods section "Mechanical Identification". B. Install fire protection signs on piping in accordance with NEPA 13 and NFPA 14 requirements. 3.8 INSTALLATION OF METERS AND GAUGES; A. install meters and gauges in accordance with Division -23 "Meters and Gauges". 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A, Flush, test and inspect sprinkler piping systems in accordance with NEPA 13, Standard for installation of sprinkler systems, Edition 1991 - Chapter 8. The fire sprinkler system shall not be connected to underground piping until the fire service main is tested and approved. "' •- r r r r r M•-. _ r M� _ M ., -• -r -M M r r r M M M r r M r M. _M M- • r M_ „ M M _ !1 "'M ., - M M a M MM .: Mr r r. - - r M _• M_ • • WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION — 04/29/2015 21 1000-12 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 17730 F. All piping tests (pneumatic and hydrostatic) shall be conducted prior to the application of any painting materials. This will prevent hidden leaks and/or repainting of repaired/altered piping.. 3.10 SYSTEM CERTIFICATION: A. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with written certification prior to final inspection, that all new equipment: 1. Has been visually inspected and functionally tested as required by the Specifications, . Is installed entirely in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations within the limitations of the system's UL listings and NFPA criteria. Is in proper working order. 31FINAL INSPECTION AND TESTING: A, The Contractor shall make arrangements with the Owner for final inspection and witnessing of the final acceptance tests, The Fire Protection Contractor, the Alarm System Contractor and the Owner will conduct the final inspection and witness the final acceptance test. B. All tests and inspections required by the referenced Codes and Standards, and the Owner shall be performed by the Contractor, CThe inspecting committee ".. referenced above the lit site to inspect the work and witness „ final acceptance testswhen they have been 4dvlsed by the Contractor « ,,. work is completed and ready for test. If the work is not complete or the test is unsatisfactory, the Contractor shall be responsible for the Consultant's extra time and expenses for re- inspection and witnessing the re -testing of the work. Such extra fees shall be deducted from payments by the Owner to the Contractor. D. After the system has been inspected and tested, a certificate, "Colltractoes Material and Test Certificate Sprinkler System - Water Spray System," shall be provided by the contractor and shall be signed by him or his representative, the Owners representative and by a representative of the fire department if appropriate. Sufficient copies shall be prepared to ensure the Engineer, Owner, all inspecting authorities and the contractor have a copy for their files. The Contractor shall prepare one (1) test report for each inspection performed whether successful or t E. The signing of the certificate by the Owner's representative shall in no way prejudice any claim against the contractor for faulty material, poor workmanship, or; failure to comply with inspecting authority's requirements or local ordinances, F. Contractor shall provide at least five () working nays notice for all tests. G� All sprinkler supervisory initiating devices shall be functionally tested to verify proper operation, N, All supervisory functions of each initiating device shall be functionally tested. verified1. Receipt of all alarm and trouble signals, initiated during the course of the testing, shall be at the fire alarm controlpanel. ! s* 1 # IF it 10 # I: •.. $ # # 1 -MC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 3.12 WORK BY OTHERS: A. Wiring of all water flaw switches and tamper switches on valves to central alarm panel are by Division 26, 3.13 OPERATION . M MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with a loose-leaf manual containing: 1.. A detailed description of the systems. 2. A detailed description of routine maintenance required or recommended or which would be provided under a maintenance contract including a maintenance schedule and detailed maintenance instructions for each type of device installed. . Manufacturers' data sleets and installation manualslinstructions for all equipment installed. 5. A list of recommended spare parts. 6. Service directory, listing the specific equipment items and where parts can be obtained, with name, address and telephone number. 7. Full size copies of the record drawings (stamped and signed per section 1.6): 8. Hydraulic calculations (stamped and signed per section 1,6). . Test certificates. B. Refer to Division 1 and Section 23 05 00 *$OPERATING ANIS MAINTENANCE" for additional requirements, C. Within 15 days of the completion of the work, six (6) copies of the manual shall be submitted for approval, 3.14 RECORD DRAWINGS: WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION _.. 04/29/2015 21 1000-14 IMMYRI D. The Record Drawings and Hydraulic Calculations shall have the signed stamp of a professional engineer registered in the State of Colorado certifying the Record Drawings and the Hydraulic Calculations accurately represent the completed fire protection system, EUpon completion of the work, two sets of record drawings shall be submitted to the Owner for review. X Guarantee: The Contractor shall guarantee all materials and workmanship for a period of o year beginning with the date of final acceptance by the Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible during the design, installation, testing and guarantee periods for any damage caused by him (or his subcontractors) or by defects in his (or his subcontractors') work, materials, or equipment. I BEmergency Service: During the installation and warranty period, the Contractor shall provide emergency repair service for the sprinkler system within four hours of a request by the Owner for such service. This service shall be provided on a 24 hour per day, seven days per week basis MEMMMMI�� A, The Contractor shall conduct two (2) training sessions of four (4) hours each to familiarize the building personnel with the features, operation and maintenance of the sprinkler systems, Training sessions shall be scheduled by the Owner at a time mutually agreeable to the Contractor and the Owner. X The Fire Protection Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to the work of others, to building and property/ materials of others caused by leaks in automatic sprinkler equipment, unplugged or disconnected pipes or fittings, and shall pay for necessary replacement or repair of work or items so damaged during the installation, testing or guarantee periods of the automatic sprinkler work. WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION — 04/29/2015 21 1000-15 SECTION 22 0500 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING PART 1 - GENERAL I'l RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Refer to Section 23 0500. All work of Division 22 shall be in accordance with the corresponding section of Division 23, unless otherwise addressed in this Division. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING - 04/29/2015 220500-1 LMC: Mi=ll Equipment Replacement 177.306 SECTION 22 1110 -w WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING WART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. This Section specifies the water distribution piping system, including {potable cold, hot, and recirculated hot water piping; fittings, and specialties within the building to a point 5 feet outside the building. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this section, Refer s other i • • apiping si for -. i pipe penetrations i i basement walls and fire and smoke itthermometers,i meters • pressure gauges; identification;plumbing pumps; dielectric unions, strainers and pressure regulating valves. 1.2 DEFINITIONS: A. Water Distribution Wiping: A pipe within the building or on the premises which conveys water from the water service pipe or meter to the points of usage. B, Water Service Wiping: The pipe from the water main or other source of potable water supply to the water distributing system of the building served. C. Wipe sizes used in this specification are Nominal Wipe Size (IFPS). 1.3 SUBMITTALS': A. Refer to Division 1 and Basic Mechanical Requirements for administrative and procedural requirements for submittals. B. Provide data for each piping specialty and valve specified. C. Certification of Compliance with ASME and UL fabrication requirements. D, Test reports as specified in Wart 3 of this section. E. Manufacturer and product data for lead free solder with material breakdown. E. Maintenance data for each piping specialty and valve specified for inclusion in operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 22, 1A QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the previsions of the following: 1. 2006 International Plumbing Code, 2. NSF Standard 61 "Drinking Water System Components," 3, AME B 31.9 "Building Services Wiping" for materials, products and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label, WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING — fl i2g12015 22 1110 -1 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177308 4, ASSE Compliance: Comply with applicable ble ASSE Standards pertaining to materials, products and installation of water distribution systems.. 5. Local Utility Department requirements. 6. Local Cross Connection Control Manual. . Latest edition of the Engineering Standards of the Denver Board of Water Commissioners, 1,5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Store pipe in a manner to prevent sagging and bending;: B. Cap ends of piping when being stared. C, Store all materials per the manufacturer's recommendations. 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING: A, Coordinate the size and location of concrete equipment pads. Cast anchor belt inserts into pad. Concrete, reinforcement and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3. B. Coordinate the installation of pipe sleeves for foundation wall penetrations. 1.7 EXTRA STOCK: A. Maintenance Stock: Furnish one valve key for each key operated wall: hydrant, hose bibb or faucet installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following; 1, Vacuum Breakers for Hose Connections: a. Woodford Manufacturing Co. b. Apollo C. Nidel d. Watts Regulator Co. 2.2 PIPE AND TUBE MATERIALS. A. general: Provide pipe material and pipe fittings complying with Division 22. BASIC SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS: A. General: Provide supports and anchors complying with Division 22. 2.4 GENERAL DUTY VALVES; A. General: Provide valves complying with Division 22. WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING -- 04/29/2015 221110-2 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 DART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify all dimensions by fieldmeasurements. Verify that all water distribution piping may be installed in accordance with pertinent codes & regulations, the original design and the applicable referenced standards. B. Examine rough -in requirements for plumbing fixtures and other equipment having water connections to verify actual locations of piping connections prig to installation. C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 'PIPING INSTALLATION: A. Refer to Division 22 for materials and methods for Installation of piping. B, Install backflow preventers on plumbing lines where contamination of domestic water may occur to include but not be limited to: Wall hydrants, hose bibbs and flush valves, C. Install shod arresters in hot and cold domestic water piping systems on each set of flush valves, quick closing'type valves and other locations where hydrostatic shod pressures could occur, 3.3 HANGERS ANL► SUPPORTS: A. Refer to division 22 for installation of supports and anchors, 3A RIDE AND TUBE JOINT CONSTRUCTION: A, Refer to Division 22 for materials and methods for pipe joints. 15 VALVE APPLICATIONS: A. General [duty Valve Applications: The drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated the following requirements apply - 1 , pply,1, Shut-off duty: Use gate, ball and butterfly valves. 2. Throttling duty:` Use globe, ball and butterfly valves. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF VALVES. A, Sectional Valves. Install sectional valves on each branch and riser, close to main, where branch or riser serves 2 or more plumbing fixtures or equipment connections, and elsewhere as indicated, For sectional valves 2" and smaller, use gate or ball valves; for sectional valves 2-12" and larger, use gate or butterfly valves., B. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valves on inlet of each plumbing equipment item, on inlet of each plumbing fixture and elsewhere as indicated. For shutoff valves 2" and smaller, use ball valves; for shutoff valves 2-1/2" and larger, use gate or butterfly valves, Brain Valves: `Install drain valves on each plumbing equipment item, located to completely drain equipment for service or repair. Install drain valves at the base of each riser, at low points of horizontal runs, and elsewhere as required to completely drain distribution piping WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING -- 04129/2015 221110-3 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177308 system. For drain valves 2" and smaller, use ball valves-, for drain valves 2-1/2" and larger, use gate or butterfly valves. D, Check Valves: Install non -slam spring loaded check valves on discharge side of each pump and elsewhere as indicated. See Division 22 for valve application. E, Balance Cocks: Install in each hot water recirculating loop, discharge side of each pump, and elsewhere as indicated. 37 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES: A, Install backflow preventers at each connection to mechanical equipment and systems, and in compliance with the plumbing code and authority having jurisdiction. Locate in same room as equipment being connected. Pipe relief outlet thru air gap and without valves, to nearest floor drain or floor sink. Provide access and required clearances to backfiow preventer as required, B� Install pressure regulating valves with inlet and outlet shutoff valves, and balance cock bypass. Install pressure gauge on valve outlet. 18 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS: X Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide hot and cold water piping runouts to fixtures of sizes indicated, but in no case smaller than required by Plumbing Code. For fixtures with hot water service, extend hot water recirculation line out to fixtures greater than 20' away from main or loop hot water line down to the fixture. B. Mechanical Equipment Connections. Connect hot and cold water piping system to mechanical equipment as indicated, Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection, provide drain valve on drain connection, Provide back-flow preventer as shown as required. For connections 2-1/2" and larger, use flanges instead of unions. 19 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: X Inspections: Inspect water distribution piping as follows: 1Do not enclose, cover, or p* into operation water distribution piping system until it h been inspected and approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Z During the progress of the installation, notify the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction, least 48 hours prior to the time such inspection must be made. Perform tests specifi below in the presence of the plumbing official. I a, Rough -in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of the piping system after the system is roughed -in but before concealing or closing in piping and prior to setting fixtures, b, Final Inspection: Arrange for a final inspection by the plumbing official to observe the tests specified below and to ensure compliance with the requirements of the plumbing code. 1 Reinspections.- Whenever the plumbing official finds that the piping system will not pass the test or inspection, make the required corrections and arrange for reinspection by the plumbing official. 4, Reports: Prepare inspection reports, signed by the plumbing official, WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING — 04/29/2015 221110-4 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177-308 B. Test water distribution piping as follows: 1. Refer to Division 22 for materials and methods for performing pipe tests. A. Clean and disinfect water distribution piping as follows. - I Purge all new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems, which have been altered, extended or repaired prior to use. 2. Use the purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by the authority having jurisdiction, or in case a method is not prescribed by that authority, the procedure described in either AWWA 0651, AWWA 0652 or as described below: a. Flush the piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at the points of outlet. b. Fill the system or part thereof, with a water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 parts per million of chlorine. Isolate (valve off) the system, or part thereof, and allow to stand for 24 hours, cDrain the system, or part thereof, of the previous solution, and refill with a water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per million of chlorine and isolate and • to stand for 3 • • ollowing the allowed standing time, flush the system with clean potable water until chlorine does not remain in the water coming from the system. e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to the authority having jurisdiction. Repeat the procedure if the biological examination made ► the authority shows •- of contamination, B. Prepare reports for all purging and disinfecting activities, 3,11 COMMISSIONING: X Fill the system, B. Check compression tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that the system is completely full of water. C. Before operating the system perform these steps: 1. Open valves to full open position, Close drains, valves, hydrants and sill cocks, 2. Remove and clean strainers. 1 Check pump for proper direction of rotation. Correct improper wiring. 4. Lubricate pump motors and bearings, WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING — 04/29/2015 221110-5 LMC: MR[ Equipment Replacement 177.308 SECTION 22 1319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 —GENERAL 11 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. This Section specifies building sanitary drainage, storm drainage, drainage specialties and vent piping systems. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Refer to Division 2/23 sections for trenching and backfilling materials and methods for underground piping installations; not work of this section. Z Refer to Division 2/23 Section for storm water drainage piping beginning from 5'- outside the building; sanitary drainage piping beginning from 5'-0" outside the building; not work of this section. 1 Refer to other Division 23 sections for piping materials & methods, sealing pipe penetrations through basement & foundation walls, fire & smoke barriers and rnechanical identification. 1.2 DEFINITIONS: A. Building Drain: That part of the lowest piping of a drainage system which receives the discharge from soil, waste and other drainage pipes inside the walls of the building and conveys it to the building sewer to a point 6-0" outside the building wall, 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for all plumbing items including the model clearly indicated, operating weights, furnished specialties & accessories and installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly type shop drawings indicating dimensions, required clearances and methods of assembly of components. CRecord Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems products-, in accordance with requirements of Division 23. SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES — 04/29/2015 221319-1 DMaintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each type of drain and � accessory, including "trouble -shooting" maintenance guide. Include this data, product data and shop drawings in maintenance manual and in accordance with requirements of Division 23. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A, Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the provisions of the following: 1 Plumbing Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of Local Plumbing Code. 2. ANSI Compliance, Comply with applicable ANSI standards pertaining to materials, products and installation of soil and waste systems. 3. ASSE Compliance: Comply with applicable ASSE Standards pertaining to materials, products and installation of soil and waste systems. 4, PDI Compliance: Comply with applicable PDI standards pertaining to products and installation of soil and waste systems. 5. PVC, CPVC and PVDF Pipe: Only Contractor's personnel which have received training in the installation of this material and meet the manufacturer's qualifications shall do the assembly of such material. 1,5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING: A. Coordinate the installation of roof drains, flashing and roof penetrations. B. Coordinate flashing materials installation of roofing, waterproofing and adjoining substrate work. C. Coordinate the installation of drains in poured -in-place concrete stabs, to include proper drain elevations, installation of flashing and slope of slab to drains. D. Coordinate with installation of sanitary and storm sewer systems as necessary to interface building drains with drainage piping systems. ECoordinate all penetrations with Structural Engineer. F. Coordinate all installations with work of other trades. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: K Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide drainage and vent systems from one of the following: 1 Drainage Piping Specialties, including drains, cleanouts and trap primers: a. Josam Manufacturing Co. b. Jay R. Smith C, Tyler Pipe d. Zurn Industries e, Wade SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES — 04/29/2015 221319-2 177,308 f. Woodford g. Precision Plumbing Products h. Mifab 2.2 SANITARY AND STORM DRAINAGE, VENT AND SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE PIPE AND FITTINGS: A. General: Provide piping and pipe fittings complying with Division 23. 2.3 BASIC SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS: A. General: Provide supports and anchors complying with Division 23. 2.4 DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES: A. Trap Seel Protection Devices: 1. Barrier Type Trap Seal Protection Devices a. Basis -of -Design Product. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide SureSeal Manufacturing; Inline Floor Drain`Trap Sealer, or a comparable product by one of the following: 1) SureSeal or ProSet (Colorado :Mate Plumbing Board approved' manufacturers only) b. Standard: ASSE 1072-2007 C. Body: ASB Plastic d. Diaphragm & Sealing Gasket: Neoprene Rubber e, Size: 2 inch (50 mm)„ 3 inch (75 mm), 3-1/2 Inch (39 mm), or 4 inch (100 mm) f, Gravity Chain Outlet Connection: Compression fit seating gasket SO duro eter B. Expansion Joints: Cast-iron bony with adjustable bronze sleeve, bronze bolts with wing nuts. 2.5 CI.EANOUTS: A. Cleanout Plugs. Cast brass, threads complying with ANSI B2.1 and local plumbing code. B. Floor Cleanout: Round, cast iron body with recessed bronze closure plug, scoriated polished bronze frame and cover plate, C. Wall Cleanout: Cleanout tee with raised head brass plug tapped for 114-20 thread; flat style chrome plated wall cover plate with holes for 1/4 -inch bolt; 114-20 threaded bolt with chrome plated flat head. C, Surface Cleanout: Cast iron body ferrule with raised head brass plug. Medium duty cast iron manhole cover and ring 12 -inch diameter to be set in concrete pad, Neenah No. -1791-A. PART" 3 - EXECUTION .1 EXAMINATION. A, General: Install piping in accordance with local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) except where more stringent requirements are indicated. SANITARYPIPING4 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177308 B, Inspect piping before installation to detect apparent defects. Mark defective materials and promptly remove from site. C. Verify all dimensions by field measurements, Verify that all drainage, vent piping and specialties may be installed in accordance with pertinent codes and regulations, the original design and referenced standards. D. Verify all existing grades, inverts, utilities, obstacles and topographical conditions prior to installations. E, Examine rough -in requirements for plumbing fixtures and other equipment having drain connections to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation. F. Examine walls, floors, roof and plumbing chases for suitable conditions where piping and specialties are to be installed. G. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected, 3,2 INSTALLATION: A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics and diagrams) indicate the general location and arrangement of the piping systems. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into account many design considerations. So far as practical, install piping as indicated. BAll floor drains are to be provided with P -trap the same size as the floor drain unless otherwise noted on mechanical drawings. C, Provide flashing membrane for all floor drains in structure above stab on grade level; see flashing detail on mechanical drawings. D. Lubricate cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Prior to building turnover remove cleanout plugs, relubricate and reinstall using only enough force to ensure permanent leakproof joint, E. Provide flashing for all floor drains, floor cleanouts in wet areas and shower drains above grade, Make watertight with understab moisture vapor barrier. Refer to Division 7 for requirements of vapor barriers. Flashing shall extend at least 24 -inches from drain rim into floor membrane or on structural floor. Fasten flashing to drain clamp device and make watertight, durable joint. Provide flashing collar extension with all drains and cleanouts installed above grade, 3.3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: A. General: Refer to Division 23 for supports and anchors. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES: X Install expansion joints on vertical risers as indicated, and as required by the installation and plumbing code. See plans for detail. B. Above Ground Cleanouts: Install in above ground piping and building drain piping as indicated, and extend cleanouts to floor or wall above. Line cleanouts are not acceptable unless otherwise noted on the drawings. SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES — 04129/2015 221319-4 1 , As required by plumbing code', 2. At each change in direction of piping greater than 135 degrees below slab; 1 At minimum intervals of 100 feet; 4. At base of each vertical soil or waste stack, - 5. At sinks and urinals on grade; 6. At egress of building (surface cleanout). T. At each toilet group. C. Cleanouts Covers: Install floor and wall cleanout covers, types as indicated, and in accessible locations. D. Flashing Flanges: Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and cleanout passing through waterproof membranes, E� Vent Flashing $leaves.- Install on stacks passing through roof, secure over stack flashing in accordance with manufacturers instructions, A, Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide drainage and vent piping runouts to plumbing fixtures and drains, with approved trap, of sizes indicated; but in no case smaller than required by the plumbing code. B. Locate piping runouts as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures or drains. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: X Piping System Test: Test drainage and vent system in accordance with the procedures of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction, or in the absence of a published procedure, as described in Division 15. B. Inspections: 1. Do not enclose, cover or put into operation drainage and vent piping system until it has been pressure tested, inspected and approved by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. 2. During the progress of the installation, notify the plumbing official having jurisdiction, at least 48 hours prior to the time such inspection must be made. Perform tests specified in Division 15 in the presence of the plumbing official. a. Rough -in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of the piping system before concealing or closing in after system is roughed -in, and prior to setting fixtures, b. Final Inspection.- Arrange for a final inspection to observe the tests specified and to ensure compliance with the requirements of the plumbing code. 3. Re -inspections: Whenever the piping system fails to pass the test or inspection, make the required corrections and arrange for re -inspection. 4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports, signed by the plumbing official, SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES -- 04/29/2015 221319-5 LMC: MRl Equipment Replacement 177.3138 3.8 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. B. Clean drain strainers., domes„ and traps. Remove dirt and debris. 3.9 PROTECTION - A. ; Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris, and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or whenever work stops, Piping shall not be left open ended during construction. C. Exposed PVC, CPUC and PVDF Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with coats of water based latex paint. Calor selection shall be by Architect: END OF SECTION 22 1318 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES — t LINK; MRI Equipment Replacement 177308 SECTION 23 0500, - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED ED O UMENTS: X All drawings associated with the entire project, including general provisions of the Contract, including The General Conditions of the Contractfor s • and Supplementary Conditions and Division -1 Conditions specification sections shall apply to the Division 23 specifications and drawings, The Contractor shall be responsible for reviewing and becoming familiar with the aforementioned and all other Contract Documents associated with . project. BRelated Sections: R6f&r to all sections in Division 23. Refer to Division 26 specification sections • Division . drawings. Where contradictions occur between this section and Division 1 the more stringent requirement shell apply. Contractor shell be defined as any and all entities involved with the construction of the project. 1.2 SUMMARY: SectionA. This specifiese basic requirements requirements. . more than one sectionof . expands an# supplements the .♦- *• in Division 1 s - • •� - s >t' • s s • .• r ss '-�a • Rrm • e r •• L 51 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC — 04/2912015 230500-1 LMC- MRI Equipment Replacement 177.303 FBefore any work is installed, determine that equipment will properly fit the space; that required piping grades can be maintained and that ductwork « be run as `i without interferences between systems, structural elements or work of other trades. Verify all dimensions by field measurements, K. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment a ease of disconnecting, minimum of interference with other installations. subjectL Make allowance for expansion and contraction for all building components and piping systems that are # A The ceiling space shall not be "layered". It is the contractor's responsibility to offset and systei as required to allow installation within the identified ceiling cavity. The contractor shall includ labor and material in the base bid to accommodate such offsets. +r GG ,, . + drawings from other Division -23 and Division 26 Contractors and shall furnish the same information involving control devices to the appropriate Division 23 Contractor. C. Coordination Drawings: 1 Coordination drawings shall be prepared by the Contractor for his utilization and are his responsibility to assure systems will be installed in a manner to allow all systems to function properly. C. Air handling unit, etc. main duct connectionsduct penetrations at shaft walls and transitions in ceiling space and to shafts or horizontal ducts, (1/4"=V-07). d. Required access for all equipment requiring cads or maintenance access. e. ;All sections and elevations necessary for clarification. f. Indicate all seismic restraint and support systems to be used for all mechanical equipment throughout the project. OMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC — 04/29/2015 230500-3 maintainingg. Indicate duct and pipe elevations, Indicate clearances for installing a insulation, h, Servicing and maintaining equipment, valve stem movement, and similar L Indicate movement and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction. Indicate pipe and duct size. Indicate equipment tags. D. Existing Conditions. 1 Carefully survey existing conditions prior to bidding work. In addition, Contractor shall complete a thorough ceiling cavity survey prior to developing 3D drawing. 2, Contractor shall be responsible for showing all existing conditions on the 3D coordination drawings. 3. Provide proper coordination of mechanical work with existing conditions. Report any issues or conflicts immediately to Engineer before commencing with work and prior to purchasing equipment and materials. E, Utility Connections; 1. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service. 2. The contract documents indicate the available information on existing utilities and services and on new services (if any) to be provided to the project by utility companies and agencies. Notify Engineer immediately if discrepancies are found. 3. Coordinate mechanical utility; interruptions one week in advance with the Owner and the Utility Company. Plan work so that duration of the interruption is kept to a minimum. 1.5 COORDINATION WITH OTHER DIVISIONS: A. General: 1, Coordinate all work to conform with the progress of the work of other trades. 2. Complete the entire installation as soon as the condition of the building will permit. No extras will be allowed for corrections of ill timed work, when such corrections are required for proper installation of other work. priority:6. Coordinate ceiling cavity spa66 carefully with all trades. In the event of conflict, install mechanical and electrical systems Within the cavity space allocation in the following order of 1. Equipment and required clearances . Plumbing waste, cooling coil drain piping :and roof drain mains and leaders. 3. Pneumatic tube systems. 4. Ductwork mains , Plumbing vent piping Medgasilab gas systems COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC — 04/29/2015 230500-4 7, Low pressure ductwork and air devices,. & Electrical and communication conduits, raceways and cabletray. 9, Domestic hot and cold water 10, Hydronic piping 11. Fire sprinkler mains, branch piping`and drops (locate as tight to structure as possible). 12. DDC control wiring and other low voltage systems. 11 Fire alarm systems. C. Chases; Inserts and Openings: 1. Provide measurements, drawings and layouts so that openings, inserts and chases in new construction can be built in as construction progresses. . Check sues and locations of openings provided. Including the access panels for equipment in hard lid ceilings and wall cavities. . Any cutting and patching made necessary by failure to provide measurements, drawings and layouts at the proper time shall be done at no additional cost in contract sum. �s e a e •� e s ♦ • s • Ma - � • se. .• • s s +� ` - w • • • it • H. Coordination with Electrical Work: Refer to Division 1 and 26. 1,E DESIGN WORK REQUIRED BY CONTRACTOR: A. The construction of this project requires the Contractor to Include the detailing and design of several systems and/or subsystems. All such design work associated with the development o the coordination drawings shall be the complete responsibility of the Contractor. B. The Contractor shall take the full responsibility to develop and complete routing strategies which will allow fully coordinated system to be installed in a fully functional manner. The Engineers contract drawings shall be for system design intent and general configurations. C. Systems or subsystems which require design responsibility by the contractor include but are not limited to: 1. Final coordinated distribution; of duct; hydronic, plumbing and other systems within the ceiling cavity, 2. Any system not fully detailed 3. Fire protection systems 4. Equipment supports, hangers, anchors and seismic systems not fully detailed nor specified in these documents, or catalogued by the manufacturer. 5. Temperature controls systems 6, Refrigeration systems COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MVAC - 04/29/2015 230500-5 177,308 D. Design Limitations: 1. The Contractor shall not modify the Engineers design intent in any way. Z The Contractor shall not change any pipe size or equipment size without prior written approval from the Engineer. 3. The Contractor shall conform to the SMACNA Duct Construction Standards when modifying the ductwork layout to avoid collisions. 4. Back to back 900 fittings on duct system shall not be installed under any circumstance. 5Bull nosed tees on piping systems shall not be installed under any circumstance. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A, The Contractor shall be required to attend a mandatory pre-bid walk-thru and shall make themselves familiar with the existing conditions, No additional costs to the Owner shall be accepted for additional work for existing condons, B, Field verify all conditions prior to submitting bids, ................. H. Coordinate all services shut -down -frith the Owner; provide temporary services. Coordinate any required disruptions with Owner, one week in advance. 1. Minimize disruptions to operation of mechanical systems in occupied areas. 1,8 SAFETY: A. Refer to Division 1, 1,9 EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY REQUIREMENTS: A, Refer to Division I and conform with the Owners requirements, 1.10 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES: A. Refer to Division 1. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC — 04/29/2015 230500-6 B. Execute and inspect all work in accordance with all Underwriters, local and state codes, rules and regulations applicable to the trade affected as a minimum, but if the plans and/or specifications call for requirements that exceed these rules and regulations, the greater requirement shall be followed. Follow recommendations of NEPA, SMACNA, EPA, OSHA and ASHRAE. C. Comply with standards in effect at the date of these Contract Documents, except where a standard or specific date or edition is indicated. D, The handling, removal and disposal of regulated refrigerants shall be in accordance with U.S. EPA, state and local regulations, E. The handling, removal and disposal of lead based paint and other lead containing materials shall comply with EPA, OSHA, and any other Federal, State, or local regulations. F. After entering into contract, Contractor will be held to complete all work necessary to meet these requirements without additional expense to the Owner. I'll REQUIREMENTS OF LOCAL UTILITY COMPANIES: A. Comply with rules and regulations of local utility companies. Include in bid the cost of all valves, valve boxes, meter boxes, meters and such accessory equipment which will be required but not provided by Local Utility Company for the project. 1.12 PERMITS AND FEES: A, Refer to Division 1, B, The Contractor shall pay all tap, development, meter, etc., fees required for connection to municipal and public utility facilities, unless directed otherwise by the General Contractor/Owner — IN WRITING, C. Contractor shall arrange for and pay for all inspections, licenses and certificates required in connection with the work. 113 PROJECT SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS: A. All systems shall be installed to meet NEPA and IBC Seismic requirements. I . Where any conflicts arise the more stringent requirements shall be applicable. 2. The design of the seismic requirements shall be the full responsibility of the Contractor. 1.14 TEMPORARY FACILITIES: A. Light, Heat, Power, Etc.: Responsibility for providing temporary electricity, heat and other facilities shall be as specified in Division 1. B. Use of Permanent Building Equipment for Temporary Heating or Cooling: Permanent building equipment shall not be used without written permission from the Owner, If this equipment is instructions 46d phit6cted�wlth filtehi-, strainers, contr6ts, reiiefs, etc. St�am and hydronic systems shall be flushed and chemically treated. (Ductwork and air moving equipment shall be cleaned to an "AS New" condition), All filters required for the construction period shall be equivalent to the filters required for the i final installation. All filters shall be replaced at the time of substantial completion. The guarantee period of all equipment used shall not start until the COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC — 04/29/2015 230500-7 LMC. MRI Equipment Replacement 177.306 equipment is turned over to the Owner for his use. A written record of maintenance„ operation and servicing shall be turned over to the owner prier to final acceptance. 1.15 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS: B, Materials d equipment of equivalentquality maybe submitted# substituted prior to bidding This may be done by submitting to the Architect/Engineer at least ten (10) working days prior to the bid date a letter in triplicate requesting prior review. This submittal shall include all data necessary for complete evaluation of the product. 1. , Substitutions shall be allowed only upon the written approval of the Architect/Engineer O EXCEPTIONS. . The Contractor shall be responsible for removal, replacement and remedy of any system or equipment which hos been installed which does not meet the specifications or which does not have prior approval. 1.16 MECHANICAL. SUBMITTALS: A. General 1. Defer to the Conditions of the Contract (General and Supplementary), division 1 2. The submittals shall be submitted as one package # _# by #. Submittals that are not complete with the required information will be sent back to be corrected. . The Contractor shall identify any "long lead time" items which may impact the overall project schedule. If these submittal requirements affect the schedule, the Contractor shall identify the impacts and confer with the Engineer within two weeks of entering into the contract. 4At least one copy of the first submittal package shall be provided in expandable, 3 post, hard back binders, sued to fit all future submittals for this job, The cover shall be identified with the job name, Owner's project number, elate, Prime Contractor's name, etc. 6, An index shell be provided which includes: a. Product b, Plan Code (if applicable) C, Specification Section d. Manufacturer and model Number 7. Fire protection and coordination drawings do not apply to the above. These drawings may be submitted in e"separate submittal. 3 The manufacturer's material or equipment listed in the schedule or identified by name on the drawings are the types to be provided for the establishment of size, capacity, grade and X a quality. -If alternates are used in lieu of the scheduled names, the cost of any changes *-9 construction required by their use shall be borne by Contractor, I ! ! ! Corrections Noted" is received, make t1`4 reqUif6di—, .,,tons for inclusion in the operation and maintenance manual. Submittals marked "Make Corrections Noted" shall not be resubmitlad4udng the submittalprocess. F. The Design Professional's review and appropriate action on all submittals and shop drawings is only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with the deign concept and the information expressed in the contract documents.This review shall not include: 1, Accuracy or completeness of details, such as quantities, dimensions, weights or gauges, fabrication processes Construction means or methods Coordination of the work with other trades 4. Construction safety precautions G� The Design Professional's review shall be conducted with reasonable promptness while allowing sufficient time in the Design Professional's judgment to permit adequate review. Review of a specific item shall not indicate that the Design Professional has reviewed the entire assembly of which the item is a component. N. The Design Professional shall not be responsible for any deviations from the contract documents not brought specifically to the attention of the Design Professional in writing by the Contractor. This shall clearly identify the design and the specific element which vary from the Design. The Contractor shall be responsible for all remedy for lack of strict conformance associated with this criteria. 1. The Design Professional shall not be required to review partial submissions or those for which submissions of correlated items have not been received.' 1.17 SPECIFIC CATEGORY SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS: X Product Data: 1. Where pre-printed data covers more than one distinct product, size, type, material, trim, accessory group or other variation, mark submitted copy with black pen to indicate which of the variations is to be provided. 2. Delete or mark -out portions of pre-printed data which are not applicable. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR Ha • 230500-9 177,3{3 Where3. operating ranges are • to show portion of .nge required for project application. For each product, include the following: a. Sizes, b. Weights. c. Speeds: d, Capacities. . Wiping and electrical connection sizes and locations. f„ Statements of compliance with the ;required >standards and regulations. Performance data. h, Manufacturer's specifications. S. Shop Drawings: 1. Shap Drawings are defined as mechanical system layout drawings prepared specifically for this project, or fabrication and assembly type drawings of system components to show more detail than, typical pre-printed materials. 2, Prepare Mechanical Shop Drawings" except diagrams, to accurate scale, min 1/8%V-0", unless otherwise noted, clearance. includingbShow dimensions of spaces required for operation and maintenance. C. Show interfaces with other work, •.• C. Test Reports; 1. Submit test reports which have been signed and dated by the accredited firm or testing agency performing the test, 2. Prepare test reports in the manner; specified in the standard or regulation governing the test procedure (if any) as indicated. 3. Submit test reports as required for 0 & M manuals. D. Product Listing: 1. Prepare listing of major mechanical equipment and materials for the project, within (2) two weeks of signing the Contract Documents and transmit to the Architect. A sample schedule is included at the end of this section to complete this requirement. a. Provideallinformation requested. b. Submit this listing as a, part of the submittal, requirement specified in Division 1, "PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTION." 2. unless otherwise specified" all materials and equipment shall be of domestic (USA) manufacture and shall be of the best quality used for the purpose in commercial practice. 3. When two or ore items of or equipment are required (plumbing COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC — 04/29/2015 230500-10 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.303 welding rods, solder, fasteners, motors for dissimilar equipment units and similar items used in work, except as otherwise indicated. a. Provide products which are compatible within systems and other connected items, E. Schedule of Values 1. Provide preliminary schedule of values with product data submittal, Within three (3) weeks from award of contract to successful bidder. Provide according to the following descriptions: a. Site Utilities b. Plumbing C, Fire Protection d. HVAC 1 ) Equipment 2) Sheet Metal 3) Piping 4) Insulation 5) Test and Balancing 6) Specialty Systems 7) Temperature Controls e. Demolition f. Miscellaneous 118 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Refer to Division 1. B. Deliver products to project property identified with names model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels and similar information needed for distinct identification$; adequately packaged and protected to prevent damage or contamination during shipment, storage, and handling. CCheck delivered equipment against contract documents and submittals, D. Store equipment and materials at the site, unless off-site storage is authorized in writing. Protect stored equipment and materials from damage, dirt, dust, freezing, heat and moisture. E, Coordinate deliveries of mechanical materials and equipment to minimize construction site congestion, Limit each shipment of materials and equipment to the items and quantities needed for the smooth and efficient flow of installations. LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 E. Provide factory -applied plastic end -caps on each length of pipe and tuba, except for concrete, corrugated metal, hub -and -spigot, clay pipe. Maintain end -caps through shipping, storage and handling to prevent pipe -end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris and moisture. C. Protect stored ductwork, pipes and tubes. Elevate above grade and enclose with durable, waterproof wrapping. When stored inside, do not exceed structural capacity of the floor. H. Protect flanges, fittings and specialties from moisture and dirt by inside storage and enclosure, or be packaging with durable, waterproof wrapping. 1. Protect sheet metal ductwork and fittings-. Elevate and store above grade and cover ends with waterproof wrapping. • DEMOLITION: & Refer to Division I . The following paragraphs supplement the requirements of Division 1. During the demolition phase of this contract#s # Contractor •carefully # remove existing equipment, piping or ductwork and either as shown on the demolition drawings as being removed, or as .. #.. the work. These items shallbe tagged, protected from damage and stored as directed by the Architect. A list of all items stored shall be turned over to the Architect. At the completion of the remodeling work or when directed by the Architect, all stored items not reused or Wanted by the Owner shall be removed from the premises. Disposition of items not reused is by the direction of the Architect/Engineer. 120 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. This Article specifies the cutting and patching of mechanical equipment, components and materials to include removal and legal disposal of selected materials, components and equipment. C. Do not endanger or damage installed work through procedures and processes of cutting and patching. D. ,Arrange for repairs required to restore other work; because of damage caused as s result of mechanical installations. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC — 04/29/2015 230500-12 LMC-. MRI Equipment Replacement 177308 Till G. Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected mechanical equipment, components, and materials as indicated, including, but not limited to removal of mechanical piping, heating units, plumbing fixtures and trim and other mechanical items made obsolete by the new work, H. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed. 1, Provide and maintain an approved type of temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas. Temporary partitions must not impede access to building egress, I Temporary partitions required for more than 2 days shall be smoke -tight and built of non-combustible materials, 2 IC RA procedures must be maintained during construction. J. Locate identify, and protect mechanical and electrical services passing through remodeling or demolition area and serving other areas required to be maintained operational. When services must be interrupted, provide temporary services for the affected areas and notify the Owner prior to changeover, Cover openings in ductwork to remain. Protect equipment and systems to remain. 1.21 ROUGH -IN: A. Verify final locations for rough -ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected. B, Refer to equipment shop drawings and manufacturer's requirements for actual provided equipment for rough -in requirements. C Work through all coordination before rough -in begins, 1,22 ACCESSIBILITY: X Install equipment and materials to provide required access for servicing and maintenance. Coordinate the final location of concealed equipment and devices requiring access with final location of required access panels and doors. Allow ample space for removal of all parts that require replacement or servicing. B. • all grease fittings to an accessible location. - C. Furnish hinged steel access doors with concealed latch, whether shown on drawings or not, in all walls and ceilings for access to all concealed valves, shock absorbers, air vents, motors, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC — 04/29/2015 230500-13 LMC: MR1 Equipment Replacement 177.306 fans, balancing cocks, and other operating devices requiring adjustment or servicing. Refer to Division 1 for access door specification and Division 23 for duct access door requirements. D. The minimum size of any access door shall not be less than the size of the equipment to be removed or 12 inches x 12 inches if used for service only. E. Furnish doors to trades performing work in which they are to be built, in ample time for building -in as the work progresses. Whenever passible group valves, cocks, etc., to permit use of minimum number of access doors within a given room or space. F. Factory manufactured doors shall be of a type compatible with the finish in which they are to be installed. In lieu of these doors, approved shop fabricated access doors with Du oDyne hinges may be used. C. Access doors in fire -rated walls and ceilings shall have equivalent U.L. label and fire rating, 1.23 BELTS, SHEAVES, IMPELLERS. A. The Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate with the "lest and Balance Contractor and supply correctly -sized drive belts, sheaves, and trimmed impellers. 1.24 NAMEPLATE DATA: A. Provide permanent operational data nameplate, refer to the section on Mechanical Identification, on each item of mechanical equipment, indicating manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and similar essential data. Locate nameplates in an accessible location, Coordinate with Owner for specific requirements. 1.25 LUBRICATION OF EQUIPMENT: A. Refer to Division 1. The following paragraphs supplement the requirements of Division 1. B. Contractor shall properly lubricate all mechanical pieces of equipment which he provided before turning the building over to the Owner. He shall attach a linen tag or heavy duty shipping tag on the piece of equipment showing the date of lubrication and the type and brand of lubricant used. C. Furnish the Engineer with a typewritten list included in the O and M manuals of each item lubricated and type of lubricant used, no later than two (2) weeks before completion of the project, or at time of acceptance by the Owner of a portion of the building and the mechanical systems involved. 1.26 CLEANING: RECORDB. Refer to Division 23, "TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING" for requirements for cleaning filters, strainers,and mechanical systems prior to final acceptance. 127 A. Refer to Division 1. The following paragraphs supplement the requirements of Division 1 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 04/29/2015 230500-14 rat"IM-1 D. Mark shop drawings to indicate approved substitutions; Change Orders; actual equipment and materials used. EMark equipment and fixture schedules on drawings to indicate manufacturer and model numbers of installed equipment and fixtures. FRevisions to the Contract Documents shall be legible and shall be prepared using the following color scheme: w w W B. The testing and balancing report shall be submitted and received by the Engineer at least fifteen calendar days prior to the contractor's request for final observation time frame requirements. Include in the 0 & M Manual after review with "No Exceptions Taken" has been accomplished. C. In addition to the information required by Division 1 for Maintenance Data, include the following information: 1 Description of mechanical equipment, function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of all replaceable parts, 2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shut -down, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. Provide any test reports and start-up •! COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC — 04/29/2015 230500-15 177.308 3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly, aligning and adjusting instructions. 4. Servicing instructions, lubrication charts and schedules, including Contractor lubrication reports. . Manufacturer's service Manuals for all mechanical equipment provide under this contract: 6. Include the valve tag list. 7. dame, Address and Telephone number of party to be contacted for 24-hour service for each item of equipment. 6. Starting, stopping, lubrication, equipment identification numbers and adjustment clearly Indicated for each piece of equipment. . Complete parts list. Provide to Owner, recommended sure parts list. 16. Mechanical warranties. 11. Final schedule of values with all mechanical change order costs included and identified. D. Healthcare Compliance Documentation to be compiled under a single section by Division 23 contractor. °I. Authority Having Jurisdiction sign off documentation 2. Fire Alarm (provided to Division 23 by Division 26 a. 100% test reports b. Monthly test criteria for temporary systems 3. Sprinkler as Above ground piping system certification b. `Pamper and flow certification c. Fire pump flow tests 4. Electrical System Documentation (provided to Division 23 by Division 26) a. Nutlet testing; tension, continuity, voltage drop testing documentation b. Isolation panel testing certification C, Low voltage switchboards d. Low voltage insulated case breakers . low voltage ground fault f. Grounding system . MVAC System Documentation a. O.R. testing certification b. Isolation room testing, certification c. Testing and certification of damper inspection and test d. Testing and certification of H PA filters e. Testing and certification of smoke control and life safety systems COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC — 04/29/2015 230500-16 LMC. MRI Equipment Replacement 177,308 5, Medical Cas System a. State certification report Backflow Devices a. Certification report , NPPA 101 Documentation (provided by Division 1 & 25 to Division 23) a. Authority Having Jurisdiction compliant drawings Documentation for ILSM, ICRA, MOPS and Hot Work. (provided by Division 1 & 25 to Division 23) E. This contract will not be considered completed near will final payment be made until all specified material, Including testing and balancing report and final schedule of values with all mechanical change order costs included and identified; is received in this operating and maintenance report and the manual is reviewed by the Architect and Engineer. 1.29 PROJECT CLOSEOUT: A. In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, complete the requirements listed below. S. The Contractor shall be responsible for the following Mechanical Checklist either by performing and/or coordinating such Items prior to applying; for certification of substantial completion, Refer to individual specification sections for additional requirements. C. Mechanical Checklist 1.30 WARRANTIES: A. Refer to the Division 1 for procedures and submittal requirements for warranties. Refer to individual equipment specifications for warranty; requirements. In any case the entire mechanical system shall be warranted no less than one year from the time of acceptance by the Owner. B. Compile and assemble the warranties specified in Division 2, into a separated set of vinyl covered, three ring binders, tabulated and indexed for easy reference I the operating and maintenance manuals, C. Provide complete warranty information for each item to include product or equipment to include date or beginning of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or bond; and names, addresses, and telephone numbers and procedures for filing a claim and obtaining warranty services. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC — 04/29/2015 230500-17 "`.. M • "`. • r SPEC ITEM REQUIREMENTS SECTION. SUBMITTALS SUPPLEMENTAL m >. O <L ujt ua uj w >c < a. 0 so I— wa u? F- ua COMMON WORK RESULTS w 2101500 FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION" X X X" X X X WATER BASED FIRE 211000 PROTECTION X X X, X X X X COMMON WORK RESULTS 220500 FOR, PLUMBING .221110 FACILIT4`WATER X X X X X DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221319 DRAINAGE & VENT ` X X' X X SYSTEMS 230500 PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE X OF VALUES FINAL SCHEDULE OF X VALUES EQUIPMENT WARRANTIES X O&M MANUALS COORDINATION X DRAWINGS RECORD DRAWINGS �x X X 230503 METHOD OF PROCEDURE 230509 MECHANICAL FIRE X X X, STOPPING 230510 BASIC PIPING MATERIALS X X X X AND METHODS 230516 PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS X 230519 METERS AND GAUGES X X X2 X 230523 VALVES X X 230529 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS X X X 230545 VIBRATION CONTROL X X X X xµ 230553 MECHANICAL. X X IDENTIFICATION 230593 TESTING ,ADJUSTING AND X X BALANCING 230700 MECHANICAL INSULATION X X 230993 SEQUENCE OF X -OPERATION 232213 STEAM & CONDENSATE X X X X HEATING PIPING COMMON . 04/29/2015 230500-18 •. •,..t. SPEC ITEM REQUIREMENTS SECTION SUBMITTALS SUPPLEMENTAL 5 Lu O Lis u_y CY_LU 0 W t= W p uB 0.. Lu oaw in i -LU F a cit cr s-- 233113 METAL DUCTWORK X X X X X 233300 DUCTWORK X X X X ACCESSORIES 33713 AIR OUTLETS & INLETS X X X :2:38413 HUIL?IFIBRS t-2 X X X X X X For Soft Starters and Variable Frequency Drives ,Requires Review & Approval from T & S Contractor -Warranty Report/Warranty 4 Kitchen Exhaust Hood `See Specific Specification Section for Test & Certification Requirements "ND OF SECTION 23 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR [HVAC — 04/29/2015 230500-19 e SECTION 23 0505 - METHOD OF PROCEDURE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY: A. Section Includes 1. Requirements for developing and implementing Method of Procedure (MOP) during the construction of this project, 2. Additional requirements and supplemental instructions.. 3, MOP Guidelines 4. Method of Procedure Outline form, 5. Welding or cutting permit. 0. Outside contractor evaluation form. 1.2 DESCRIPTION: AeDefinition: Method of Procedure (MOP) is a written plan which describes the activities and procedures to safeguard the building's occupants, hospital equipment and systems and to interface with the hospital's management, operations and security. & When an MOP is Required: 1, An MOP is required when a construction activity affects the safety of the occupants, hospital equipment or any system which supports the hospital, or essentially` affects the hospital's management, operations or security. . A MOP is required when requested or deemed necessary by the Owner or Architect.. C. Development. - 1 . evelopment:1. The Prime Contractor shall develop, submit, trade and process the MOP, Any assistance required by the Subcontractors shall be provided. All MOP"s shall be reviewed by the Prune Contractor prior to submitting the MOP" to the towner and Architect. 2. ALL MOP'S SMALL BE TYPE© - NO EXCEPTIONS. 3. Contractor shall develop the MOP in a timely fashion prior to review and approval by all required parties. 4. Contractor shall develop the MOP with input from the subcontractor, where necessary. D. Po Each MOP shall be a written document in narrative, descriptive or outline form supplemented with drawings, diagrams and schedules as necessary. The detailed format included under this section shall be utilized. E. Review and Approval: Contractor shall submit each MOP in triplicate to the architect for review and approval. All MOP's require Owner's approval. P. Implementation; Contractor shall implement the MOP when approved by the Architect and Owner in writing, No construction activity which requires a MOP shall proceed until the MOP is approved. METHOD OF PROCEDURE -- 04120/2015 230505-1 rightGCompliance: Contractor shall comply with the approyed MOP, TheOwner and Architect reserves the r stop the workfor s • e «P A cost otime delay resulting from the work stoppage shall be borne by the Contractor. 2 iii M Posting: Work shall not proceed on any facet of the work involving any MOP if an approved and signed MOP is not posted in the work area. CONSIDERATIONS.- General: ONSIDE TIONS;General: The following are considerations in developing the Method of Procedure: 1. Develop a detailed listing of MMPs which will be required as part of the project. Submit at the pre -construction meeting. All MOPS shall be included on the project 2 -week look ahead schedule. 2. Identify the construction area and its boundaries. 3. Identify access of trades and materials to location. 4. Identify the sequence of work and impact on occupants in the area. 5. Identify the protection and separation required for access to work and work area. 5, Determine the amount of materials required and availability at time of work. '. Determine the duration of the work. 3. Request temporary facilities for occupants and office equipment if necessary. 9. Notify the Owner in preestablished time frame. 10. Require the presence of the Owner's technical personnel for additional procedures in sensitive areas. 11. Develop together with the Owner's technical personnel for additional procedures in sensitive areas. MethodB. Specific Construction Activity: The following are considerations in developing a specific of Procedure: 1. [date of the activity. . "Gime of the activity. Location of the activity. 4. Brief description of the activity. 5. The length of the activity. 5. Step-by-step procedure of the activity. 7. A contingency Calan to retreat from the activity and place equipment tack in normal operating configuration. METHOD OF PROCEDURE — 04/29/2015 230505-2 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 & LIST OF THE NAME OF PERSONS, COMPANIES, AND TELEPHONE NUMBERS FOR CONTACT IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY, 1.4 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS: A. Major mechanical or electrical shutdowns and/or changeovers require two weeks notice, minor shutdowns - 72 hours. All shutdowns are required to be completed on off hours or weekends, unless prior approval is received from the Owner. BIN GENERAL, THE JOINT COMMISSION CRITERIA FOR BUILD CLEAN PROTOCOL SHALL BE STRICTLY ADHERED TO ON THIS PROJECT. CIf primary systems serving hospital system and/or equipment are taken out of service, for any reason, the Contractor shall be responsible for providing temporary systems during the period when the primary system is otAbfservice, The�Contractor shall be responsible for providing temporary power to the standby system � D, Limit construction operations to those methods and procedures which will not adversely and unduly affect the working environment of owner's occupied spaces, including noise, dust, odors, air pollUtim ambient discomfort, poor lighting, hazards and other undesirable effects and conditions, E. The Contractor shall coordinate and co-operate with Owner at all times for all new to existing connections, system shutdowns and restart -up, flushing and filling both new and existing systems, FProvide temporary ductwork and piping services where required to maintain existing areas operable� A. The following guidelines should be followed when developing MOPS. 1. All M.O.P.'s shall be typed. Handwritten M.O,P.s will not be processed. 2. Include M.O.P. checklist with M.O.P. List to be complete and filled in, including initial block. Incomplete M.O.P,s will not be processed, project schedule will not be compromised by Contractors failure to follow M.O.P. guidelines. METHOD OF PROCEDURE — 04/29/2015 230505-3 LMC; MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 . Approval/acceptance list should include phone numbers, fax numbers„ and electronic mail address for ease of M. .P. routing. 4. Step by step activities shall include the following: a. All affected systems shall be identified. If power or mechanical system support systems are de -energized, all affected systems shall be identified and addressed. b. Time frame for each step shall be identified. C. Communication with the Owner and the Architect shall be maintained at all times. d. If temporary power feeds are required, equipment affected and temporary power source shall be checked before and after de-energization of primary AC power source, This should be included in the special tenant needs/requirements section. e. prior to returning to normal power source, Contractor shall notify the Owner and shall be identified as a critical step in the MOP. Once this is done, AC power should be verified (i.e. voltage, rotation ground, etc.) and documented. f, AC power cables must be tagged/labeled prior to being worked on. 5, Affected mechanical systems and equipment - the following: Space cooling limitations should be reviewed with the Owner. (Make test of area with AC available should limitations be exceeded.) Temperature readings shall be recorded every 30 minutes without AC operating. If temperature is exceeded, AC shall be restarted. This shall be performed to determine if temporary codling is required for M.O.P. work. . 2) Critical areas to be reviewed for time constraints (i.e. how long can space be maintained withoutcooling). 3) Medical gas systems are considered a critical system and shall be included in an MOP. 6. Stop when the "unexpected" is encountered and proceed with the contingency/backout plan, If contingency/backout plan does not address the "unexpected," work shall be Stopped. The Contractor shall be responsible for:: a. anticipate problems; b. clearly identify contingency plans; c. clearly identify back out plan. METHOD OF PROCEDURE — 04/29%2015 230505-4 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 7. Verify with the Owner any affected alarms at the beginning and ending of each M.O.P. to ensure integrity is in place. & What is going to be affected by M,O.P. work? a. Evaluate if temporary cooling should be provided (i.e. fans, portable cooling units, etc.)? b. Verify if Building Automation Systems are affected in we areas and/or non- affected areas, c. Monitoring of environment for critical areas should be addressed. d. Maintain communication with the Owner for change in environment, to implement temporary or emergency measures (contingency plans), or return to normal status. 9All steps must be sequentially numbered. The check -off box for the Owner must r*! completed prior to proceeding with any construction, A When M.O.P.'s affect systems with alarms (i.e. fire alarm, temp., security, etc.), the Owner shall be notified prior to the outage and after the outage, 11Mechanical and/or AC one -line diagrams should be attached with each M.O.P. These should be a reduced set (I I x 17) with affected areas highlighted. The M.O.P. author shall contact the Engineer of Record for a copy of the appropriate one -line diagrams. 12. List any and all systems which could be affected by the work procedure. 11 Personnel/Equipment a. Include the Owners standard equipment protection measures (i.e. plastic protection, dust mats, negative air). b. One line mechanical diagrams shall be attached to the M.O.P. for any system which is affected by the work procedure (i.e. chilled water, condenser water, steam, heating, domestic hot or cold, fuel oil, supply/return air systems, medical gas, etc.). The M,O.P. author shall contact the Engineer of Record for a copy of the appropriate one -fine diagram, c. It is the Contractor's responsibility to operate switches, breakers, equipment disconnects, valves or any other devices. Above devices shall be labeled and identified. The Owner shall be notified both prior to and at the time of operation. These tasks shall be clearly identified in a signed and approved M.O.P. 14. Prior to an outage, the Contractor shall check with the National Weather Service on the morning of, and 3 hours prior to, an outage for any condition that could affect the outage. METHOD OF PROCEDURE 230505-5 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.303 15. Prior to MOP work, the Contractor and the Owner shall walk throu0h the MOP step-by- step procedure to verify each step is workable and in order. PART 2 - PRODU T a 2.1 NOT USED, PART 3 - EXECUTION .1 The contractor shall be responsible to complete the following MOP farm, per the instructions and direction outlined in this section. END OF SECTION 23 0505 METHOD OF PROCEDURE 230505-6 STEP 1: MOP DESCRIPTION MOP Number: 1. To be sequentially numbered by the Prime Contractor. MOP Title: MOP Originator/Phone Number: Gate Submitted: Date Approved: Tentative Stark Date- Month/Day/Year Tentative Finish Date: Month/Day/Year STEP : METHOD OF PROCEDURE NUMBER: STEP 3: AREA DESCRIPTION: Name of Area: Location within Hospital: STEP 4: CONTACT MST - (Indicate Emergency Phone Numbers): Hospital Project Management: Name: Office Phone Number: Pager Phone Number: E -Mail Address: Emergency Phone Number: Hospital Building Engineering. Name: Office Phone Number: Pager Phone Number: E -Mail Address: Emergency Phone Number: Hospital User Group Representative: Name: Office Phone Number: Pager Phone Number: METHOD OF PROCEDURE 230505-7 r E-Mail Address.- Emergency ddress:Emergency Phone Number: Architect: Company Name: Name: Office Phone Number: Pager Phone Number: E -Mail Address: Emergency Phone Number: Engineer: Company Name: Name Office Phone Number: Pager Phone Number: E -Mail Address: Emergency Phone Number: Contractor: Project Manager: Company Name: Name: Field Office Number; Pager Phone Number: -Mail Address. Emergency Phone Number: Superintendent: Name: Field Office Phone number: Pager Phone Number: E -Mail Address: Emergency Phone Number: Fire Department Emergency Number: STEP GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF WORK GENERAL NOTES/SYSTEMS AFFECTED BY WORK: 1. Describe general overview of procedure. Details to be described in STEP 6. Systems affected by Worm: 1. Describe hospital equipment and systems affected by shut down. Obtain specific names from the Owner. 2. Describe mechanical equipment which supports hospital equipment and systems which are affected. METHOD OF PROCEDURE 230505-8 LMC MRI Equipment Replacement 177.358 Describe electrical equipment which supports hospital equipment and systems which are affected. 4. Identify electrical panels and breakers which will be affected. . Identify major mechanical equipment which will be affected, 6, Utilize equipment plan code numbers i.e. equipment identification nomenclature) which will be affected. 1 Asterisk for each critical step, A critical step is anything which could potentially affect hospital equipment/systems.. . Owner verification/signature block. 3. Include step number for each process. 4. Step description. Include who will perform each step, specific names, trade and approximate start and stop time associated with each process. *I j 1. STEIN 7: HOISTING/HAULING Include detailed informationfor the following: 1, Identify routine to space. 2. Identify protection of walls/floors. 3: Identify weight of object. 4. Identify weight capacity of elevator if appropriate. 5. Identify the approximate time elevators will be needed. 6. If building structural system is utilized to support object, identify structural component, capacity of structural component, and method of support. STEP 6: PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS: Include detailed information for the fallowing; 1: Information "technology Equipment/Computers/Calle/Electrical Equipment a. Specifically detail protection when work occurs over IT equipment/ computers/ cable including plywood enclosures and rubber mats, attach sketch. 3. Electrical/Mechanical Equipment . Miscellaneous Equipment. METHOD OF PROCEDURE 30505 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 4VU&JOHL001101 101:11111} 0 1. Include specifics regarding methods of cutting, wet methods detailed. 2. Include specifics regarding welding/soldering. STEP 10: SAFETY REQUIREMENTS: NTS: Include specifics in regard to the following: 1. Fire Protection 2, Fire Watch 3. Gust Protection JACHO standards for build clean protocol. 4. Asbestos Containment 5. Smoke Containment Noise Containment 7. Water Containment STEP 11: DETAILED TESTING METHODS 1. Include specifics regarding testing methods and procedures required as part of this M.C.P. and procedures required prier to putting system into operation. This should be included in step by step activities. STEP 12: WEATHER PROTECTION 1. Include specifics regarding protection from weather. In particular; address water protection, humidity protection, and temperature stability.. STEP 13: SPECIAL USER GROUP AND TENANT NEEDS/REQUIREMENTS 1. This section to be completed by User Group/Tenant or Owner's Facility Personnel as applicable. STEP 14: HOSPITAL INFECTION CONTROL 1. This section to be completed by the Hospital Infection Control Manager as applicable. STEP 15: HOSPITAL SECURITY 1. This section to be completed by the Hospital Security Manager. sectionI This be completed in * of s problem associated with any aspect of the M.O.P., a contingency plan is to be developed. Identify potential problems which may arise. Include safe stop points. Include back out procedures, Spare parts, materials, etc. shall be identified for contingency plans. METHOD OF PROCEDURE 230505-10 140171 in STEP 17: M-O,P, SIGNATURE SHEET 1, if work procedure does not affect party identified, signature is not required. Procedure for obtaining signatures shall be as follows. a. Signatures shall be in the order indicated: b E -Mail processing shall be an acceptable method of confirmation of concurrence Of K .P. Originator of M.O,P. shall indicate N/A adjacent to individuals who are not involved and/or affected by the M.O.P. Cate Signature: / General Contractor Signature: Mechanical Subcontractor Signature: Electrical Subcontractor Signature: Architect Signature: Mechanical Engineer Signature. 1 Electrical Engineer Signature: /1 k6so pial Project Manager METHOD OF PROCEDURE 230505-11 Signature: Hospital Facility Manager Hospital Infection Control Manager Signature:. Hospital Security Manager Signature: / Hospital User group if affected) STEP 18: M.O.P. CHECKLIST: All items outlined must be included with the MOP. 1 This checklist is to be initialed by the AUTHOR of the MOP, indicating all sections are included and complete. M.O.P."s must include the following. STEP NUMBER REQUIREMENT INITIAL BLOC 1. Title of M.O.P. 2. Method of Procedure No. Area Description . A Contact List . general Description of the Work General Notes/Systems Affected by Work . Step -By -Step Activities 7, Heisting and Hauling Route Protection Requirements g. Tool Identification M Safety Requirements 11. Detailed Testing Methods 12, Weather Protection 1. Special Tenant Needs/Requirements !M * MRE►.��� 230505-12 LMC, MRI Equipment Replacement 14. Hospital Infection Control 15. Hospital Security 16. Contingency Plan 17. M.0,P. Signature Sheet 1& M.O.P. Checklist METHOD OF PROCEDURE 230505-13 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 SECTION 23 0509 - MECHANICAL FIRE STOPPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of firestopping required by this section is indicated on the drawings and by the requirements of this section. B. Types of firestopping systems specified in this -section include: 1. Bare metal pipe 2. Insulated metal pipe . Plastic piping . Metal conduit 5. Metal duct 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE: •a • ♦ s • r ar- •s s • • • D. On -Bite Training: The local manufacturer's representative shall conduct an on-site lands -on training seminar for all personnel involved in the installation of firestopping. The Engineer shall be invited to attend this training. E. Godes and Standards: Comply with the applicable codes pertaining to firestopping, Firest pping systems shall be tested and listed in accordance with the following: 1. Underwriter's Laboratory: a. UL 1479 test method for fire tests of through -penetration firetops. b. UL Fire Resistance Directory 2, American Society for Testing and Materials: ASTM E814-88 standard test method for fire tests of through -penetration firestops. 1,3 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data including the following: 1. Detailed specification of construction and fabrication. 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions. MECHANICAL FIRE STOPPING — 04129%2015 230509-1 t B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, description of materials and finishes, general construction, specific modifications, component connections, anchorage methods, hardware and installation procedures, plus the following specific requirements: 1 Details of each proposed assembly, for all types of fire rated construction and penetrating items encountered, identifying intended products and applicable UL System Number, or UL classified devices. 2Manufacture or manufacturer's representative shall provide qualified engineering judgments and drawings relating to non-standard applications as needed. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING.- A. ANDLINt :A. Packing and Shipping: 1. Deliver products in original, unopened packaging with legible manufacturer" identification. 2. Coordinate delivery with scheduled installation date, allow minimum storage at site. S. Storage and Protection; Store materials in a clean, dry ventilated location. Protect from soiling, abuse, moisture and freezing when required. Follow manufacturer's instructions. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS. A. Existing Conditions: 1. Verify existing conditions and substrates before starting work. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding. 2. Proceed with installation only after penetrations of the substrate and supporting brackets have been installed. Environmental Requirements: adequateI Furnish o # solvent. 2. Furnish forced air ventilation during installation if required by manufacturer. -# flammable materials away from#. or 4. Provide masking and drop cloths to prevent contamination of adjacent surfaces by firestopping�materials, 5� Comply with manufacturing recommendations for temperature and humidity conditions before, during and after installation of firestopping, PARI" 2 - PRODUCTS 21 MANUFACTURERS: A. Subject to compliance with the requirements of this specification, provide products by one of the following: 1. 3M, Fire Protection Products 2. Nelson Firestop Products . TREMCO Construction Products 4. Metalines 5. Hilti Corporation 6. Specified technologies, Inc. (STI) STOPPINGMECHANICAL FIRE 04/29/2015 23050. LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 2,2 GENERAL: X Provide fire stop systems listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory. Provide systems with fire resistance "F" ratings equal to the fire resistance rating of the wall or floor assembly for all penetrations. In addition, provide systems with a "T" rating equal to the fire resistance rating of the wall or floor assembly in the following applications. A, Provide forming and damming materials and sleeves as required by the firestopping system installation instructions. A. Review all project drawings, Owner's records and existing conditions to determine location, rating, and construction of all fire resistive construction. 13Coordinate location of penetrations to allow for the maximum and minimum annular space around the penetrating item. Allow a minimum of 1" undisturbed building material between penetrations, or provide a firestopping system listed for multiple penetrations. Penetrating items shall be centered in hole as much as practical, unless firestopping system is listed for point contact between the wall/floor assembly and the penetrating item. A. The Contractor shall determine the most appropriate firestopping system which complies with these specifications. B. All insulation shall be continued through the penetration, Provide intumescent caulk or collar firestopping systems. Where the insulation thickness specified in Section 23 07 00 exceeds the allowable insulation thickness for the firestopping system, reduce the insulation thickness 6 inches on either side of the penetration. Do not reduce insulation to less than 50 percent of the specified thickness. C. Provide collar type firestopping systems where shown on drawings, and for hot piping systems at penetrations where significant thermal movement can be expected, such as near expansion compensation loops or joints. D. Provide a firestopping system for ducts penetrating fire resistive construction without fire or fire/smoke dampers. E, Anchor wiring not within conduit on each side of a penetration to prevent it from being pulled out of the firestopping system, F. See Section 23 05 18 for sleeves. The use of sleeves may affect the "T" rating of t firestopping system, Coordinate use of sleeves with firestopping, i MECHANICAL FIRE STOPPING — 04/29/2015 230509-3 SECTION 23 0510 - BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1SUBMITTALS: A. Refer to Division 1 and 23 05 0OCommon Work Results for Mechanical for administrative and procedural requirements for submittals. B. Product Data: Submit industry standards and manufacturer's technical product data, installation instructions, and dimensioned drawings for each type of pipe and pipe fitting, Submit piping schedule showing pipe or tube weight, fitting type, and joint type for each piping system. C. Welding Certifications*r -•. as .qired for piping • - -• -• . . • s a. ... is •a -•s " «• ,�.- < _ - �«. Soldering Br • procedures Refrigeration. PART 2 PRODUCTS r- s <t* s s • -• r • a- r say- +� a• _• • s BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS — 04/29/2015 230510-1 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 comply with governing regulations and industry standards for selections, and with pipe manufacturer's recommendations where applicable. 2.2 STEEL PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS: A. Slack Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Grade B, type E, electric resistance wielded. B, Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Grade B. C. Seamless Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Grade, B, type S or A106 high temperature. D. Coal Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipe: AWWA 0203 for enamel and gape, hot applied. • .►-• • + + G. Malleable -Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.3; plain or galvanized as indicated (Class 125 and 300). H, Malleable -Iron Threaded Unions: ANSI B16.39, Class 150, 250 or 300; selected by Installer for proper piping fabrication and service requirements, including style, end connections, and metal- to -metal seats {iron, bronze or brass}, plain or galvanized as indicated (Class 150# 259 and 300). 1. Threaded Pipe Plugs` ANSI/ASME B16.14. J. Steel Flanges/Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.5, ASTM A234 (Fire Protection) including bolting and asketing of the following material group, end connection and facing, except as otherwise indicated. Material Groin: Group 1.1. End Connections: Bdttwrelding. Facings: Raised -fade Corrosion -Resistant Cast f lang- ss- MSS SP -51, including bolting and gas (threaded Where pressure is not L. Forged -Steel Socket�Weldtng and Threaded Fittings* ANSI B16.1 1, except MSS SIP -79 fo threaded reducer inserts -,a to match scheduleof s - .art •- w toA inch • •- • • •-r s s s -e • • -• • s •- e- -• ii a •- s s -r-r BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS — 04/29%2015 230510-2 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.305 2:3COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS: A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 3; Type K or Lff as indicated for each service, hard -drawn temper, except as otherwise indicated, B, DWV Copper Tube': ASTM B 305. C. ACR Capper Tube: ASTM B 230, D. Cast -Capper Solder -Joint Fittings: ANSI B15.1 E. Wrought -Copper Solder -Joint Fittings: ANSI B15.22. F. Cast -Capper Solder -Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B15:23 (drainage and vent with DWV or tube). G. Wrought -Copper Solder -Joint [drainage Fittings: ANSI B15.29. H. Cast -Copper Flared Tube Fittings: ANSI B16.26, I, Bronze Pipe Flanges/Fittings: ANSI B16,24 (Class 150 and 300). J. Copper -Tube Unions: provide standard products recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated. 2A BRASS PIPE AND FITTINGS: A. Red Bass pipe: ASTM B 43 (boiler feed pipe, 1t5 inch thru 12 inches, regular or extra strong weight). B. Cast -Bronze Threaded Fittings. ANSI B16.15, Class 125 or 250. C. Cast -Bronze `threadless Fittings: ASTM B 51 or B 52, brazed joints. 2.5 CAST-IRON PRESSURE PIPES ANIS PIPE FITTINGS: A. Ductile -Iron pipe: Class 52, ANSI A21.51 y AWWA 0151; 350 psi pressure rating. B. Cement -Mortar Lining for Ductile -Iron and pipe and Fittings for Water: ANSI A21,4, AWWA 0104. C. polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Cast -Iron piping: ANSI A21.5; AWWA 0105. C3, Cast -Iron Fittings: ANSI/AWWA C110tA1.10. E, Ductile -Iron Fittings-. ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10, F. Rubber -Gasket Joints: ANSIIAWWA 0111/ 1.11, .5 CAST-IRON SOIL. PIKES AND PIPE FITTINGS: A. Hubless Cast-iron Soil Pipe: FS WW -P-401 and CISPI Standards 301 and 310. Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the cast iron soil pipe institute or receive prior approval of the engineer. B. Cast -Iron Hub -and -Spigot Soil Pipe: ASTM A 74. Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the cast iron soil pipe institute or receive prior approval of the engineer. BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS — 04/29/2015 230510-3 LMC.- MR1 Equipment Replacement 177.308 C, Hubless Cast-iron Soil Pipe Couplings: Neoprene gasket complying with ASTM 0564, CISPI Standard 310 and stainless steel clamp holding band. D. Heavy Duty Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe Couplings: Neoprene gasket coupling with ASTM 0564. 304 stainless steel shield, minimum 0.15 inches thick, minimum 3 inches wide with 4 sealing bands up to 4 inch pipe, minimum 9 inches wide with 6 sealing bands up to 10 inch pipe, 1, Basis of Design: Husky SO 4000. E. Cast -Iron Hub -and -Spigot Soil Pipe Fittings: Match soil pipe units; complying with ASTM A 1 74, F, Neoprene Compression Gaskets- ASTM C 564, 23 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING MATERIALS/PRODUCTS: A, Welding Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide welding materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements, 1. Comply with Section 11, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials. B, Soldering Materials: All soldering materials shall be lead free. I . 95-5 Tin -Antimony: ASTM B 32, Grade 95TA. Melting Range 450-470 degrees F. 2. Silver -Tin Alloy: Fed. Spec. QQ-S-571 E, NSFC2. Melting Range 430 to 530 degrees F. 1 Flux: All flux shall be lead free, water soluble, and compatible with the solder and the materials being joined. ASTM B813-93. C. Brazing Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide brazing materials to comply with installation requirements. I Comply with AWSA 5.8, Section 11, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for brazing filler metal materials. a, Copper phosphorus -Boup-5, 15 percent solver content, melting range 1190 to 1480 degrees F. b. Silver - BAg-36, 45 percent silver, cadmium -free. Melting range 1195 to 1265 degrees F. D. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ANSI B16,21; full-faced for cast-iron flanges; raised -face for steel flanges, unless otherwise indicated. E. Piping Connectors for Dissimilar Non -Pressure Pipe: Elastomeric annular ring insert, or elastomeric flexible coupling secured at each end with stainless steel clamp$, sized for exact fit to pipe ends and subject to approval by plumbing code. 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide piping connectors of the following: a. Husky Technologies (Husky SD 4000): BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS — 04/29/2015 230510-4 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 E. Pipe Thread Sealant Material: Except as otherwise indicated; provide all pipe threads with the sealant material as recommended by the manufacturer for the service. 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide piping thread sealant material of the following: a. The Rectorseal Corporation PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION: A, Verify all dimensions by field measurements, Verify that all water distributionpiping may be installed in accordance with pertinent codes and regulations, and original design, and the referenced standards'. B, Examine rough -in requirements for plumbing fixtures and other equipment having water connections to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation. C. leo not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION: A. General: Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve permanently -leakproof piping systems„ capable of performing each indicated service without piping failure. Install each run with minimum joints and couplings, but with adequate and accessible unions for disassembly and maintenance/replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by use of reducing fittings. Align piping' accurately at connections, within 1/18 inch misalignment tolerance. 1. Comply with ANSI S31 Code for Pressure Piping: 0. lot x » « l « .!' : ♦ •... • .':• 1. . l.. ,, • 8. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, unless indicated to be exposed to view. 7. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other permanent elements of the building. Provide space to permit' insulation applications, with 1 inch clearance outside the insulation. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for panel removal. BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS — 04/29/2015 230510-5 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.303 . Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves. 9. Install drains in pressure pipe systems at all low points in mains„ risers; and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting, 3l4 inch bell valve, and short % inch threaded end nipple and cap with chain. 10. Install piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to permit proper insulation applications. 11. Fire and Smoke Wall Penetrations; Where pipes pass through fire and smoke rated walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors, maintain the fire and smoke rated integrity. Refer to Division 23; Sections 23 05 13 and 23 05 07 for materials. 12. Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals (See Section 23 05 13). Pipe sleeves smaller than 5 inch shall be steel; pipe sleeves 5 inches and larger shall be sheet metal. 13. Anchor piping to ensure proper direction of expansion and contraction. 14. Coordinate foundation and all other structural penetrations with structural engineer. B. Hydronic Piping; 1, Make reductions in hydronic pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with the level side up. 2. Install hydronic piping branch connections to mains using Tee fittings in main with take -off out the bottom of the main; except for up -feed risers which shall have take -off out the top of the main line. Install all hydronic piping levet with manual air vent at all high points in direction of flow. 3. Install hydronic piping level except for gravity flog systems such as condenser water and condensate drain piping. C. Sanitary Waste and Vent; Roof Drain and Storm Drain Piping: 1. Install plumbing drainage piping with% inch per foot (2 percent), downward lope'i direction of drain for piping 3 inches and smaller, and 1f8 inch per foot (1 percent) for piping 4 inch and lamer. Install cast iron pipe in accordance with the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Handbook. 8ASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS — 04/29/2015 230510-6 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 6. Install gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other special installation requirements, D. Condensate Drain Piping. - 1 . Condensate drain piping from air conditioning unit coil condensate drain pan shall be of the sizes shown on the drawings. E, Plastic Pipe: 1 All plastic piping installed below grade shall meet ASTM D2321-89 requirements. 3.3 PIPING SYSTEM JOINTS: X General: Provide joints of type indicated in each piping system, B. Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI B2.1; cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint compound, or pipe joint tape (Teflon) where recommended by pipe/fitting manufacturer, on male threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed. F. Weld pipe joints in accordance with recognized industry practice and as follows: I Weld pipe joints only when ambient temperature is above 0 degrees F (-18 degrees C) where possible. 2. Bevel pipe ends at a 37.5 degrees angle where possible, smooth rough cuts, and clean to remove slag, metal particles and dirt. 3. Use pipe clamps or tack -weld joints with I inch long welds; 4 welds for pipe sizes to 10 inches, 8 welds for pipe sizes 12 inch to 20 inch. 4. Build up welds with stringer -bead pass, followed by hot pass, followed by cover or filter pass. Eliminate valleys at center and edges of each weld. Weld by procedures which will ensure elimination of unsound or unfused metal, cracks, oxidation, blow -holes and non- metallic inclusions, 5. Do not weld -out piping system imperfections by tack- welding procedures; refabricate to comply with requirements. LMC. MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 H. Flanged Joints; Match flanges within piping system, and at connections with valves and equipment. Glean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to provide uniform compression of gaskets, 1. Hubless Gast -Iran Joints: Comply with coupling manufacturer's installation instructions. Use pre-set torque wrench set to 80 in -lbs on heavy duty couplings. , 3,4 PIPING APPLICATION: A. Domestic Hot and Cold Water_ Inside Building: Above grade Inside Building: a. 6 inches and Smaller: Type L, hard drawn capper tube with wrought copper or bronze fittings; 95-5 tin -antimony i silver tin alloy soldered joints. 2. Below Grade Inside and Outside Building. a. 2-112 inches and Smaller: Type K, soft copper or Type K annealed copper tube with wrought capper fittings, silver tin alloy solder joints. ��t ��- t t t t t- •tt `+.. t • ttt^^ t • • a. Provide husky series 4000 couplings for waste pipe above critical spaces including; 1) Lab 2) Electrical Rooms 3 Imaging Rooms C. Heating Water„ Chilled Water and Condenser Water Piping: 1 2 Inches and Smaller: a; Schedule 40, black steel with 125 Ib. cast iron or 150 Ib. malleable iron threaded fittings. OR "Type K copper,; hard drawn copper wrought copper or bronze fittings, silver - tin allay solder joints. 2, 2-1/2 Inches and Larger - a, Schedule 40, seamless or ERW (std. weight 12 inches and over) black steel with flanged or welded joints. BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS — 04/29/2015 230510-8 LMC-. MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 b. Fittings: Standard weight / Extra strong, seamless steel, buff weld type. C. Flanges: 150 lb. 300 lb. forged steel slip-on or welding neck type, d> Bolting: Regular square head machine bolts with heavy hexagonal nuts. e. Gaskets: Thickness, material and type suitable for fluid to be handled, and design temperature and pressures, D, Equipment Drains and Overflows: I Type "M" or "DWV" copper. 15 EXPOSED PIPING IN FINISHED AREAS: A. Plumbing piping and fittings which are exposed (and uninsulated) in finished areas generally occupied by people including, but not limited to, kitchens, animal cagewash/equipment washing rooms, hospital autoclave or sterilizing rooms shall be installed with a smooth, high polish, durable chrome plated finish. 16 PIPING TESTS: A. General: Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gauges. Test piping system before insulation is installed wherever feasible, and remove control devices before testing. Test each section of each piping system independently but do not use piping system valves to isolate sections where test pressure exceeds valve pressure rating, Fill each section with water and pressurize for indicated pressure and time. B. Test all piping systems as specified. Correct leaks by remaking joints. Remove equipment not able to withstand test procedure during test, C. Work to be installed shall remain uncovered until the required tests have been completed. D. Piping which is to be concealed shall be tested before being permanently enclosed. E. As soon as work has been completed, conduct preliminary tests to ascertain compliance with specified requirements. Make repairs or replacements as required. H. All costs involved in these tests shall be borne by Contractor. 1. System Tests I Hydrostatic Test: The test shall be accomplished by hand pumping the system to the specified water pressure, and maintaining that pressure until the entire system has been inspected for leaks, but in no case for a time period of less than four hours. BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS — 04/29/2015 230510-9 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 a, Domestic water systems: 100 psig or 150 percent of system pressure, whichever is greater. b. Heating water. 100 psig or 150 percent of operating pressure, whichever is greater. C. Chilled water: 100 psig or 150 percent of system pressure, whichever is greater. 2. Compressed Air or Nitrogen Test: Compressed air tests may be substituted for hydrostatic tests only when ambient conditions or existing building conditions prohibit safe use of hydrostatic testing and must be reviewed by the Engineer prior to any testing, For tests of this type, the piping system shall be subjected to the gas pressure indicated for that specific system. The piping capped or plugged and water -pumped with oil free air, or a nitrogen bottle shall be, introduced into the entire system to the pressure specified. The system shall maintain that pressure for the duration of a soapy water test of each joint. 3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A. General: Clean exterior surfaces of installed piping systems of superfluous materials, and prepare for application of specified coatings (if any). Flush out piping systems with clean water before proceeding with required tests. Inspect each run of each system for completion of joints, supports and accessory items. 1. Inspect pressure piping in accordance with procedures of ASME B31. B. Disinfect all potable water mains and water service piping in accordance with local and health department requirements. Submit test results report. C. Clean and flush hydronic piping systems. Remove, clean, and replace strainer screens. After cleaning and flushing hydronic piping system, but before balancing, remove disposable fine mesh strainers in pump suction diffusers. D. Chemical Treatment: Provide hydronic systems with a water analysis prepared by the chemical treatment supplier to determine the type and level of chemicals required for prevention of scale and corrosion. Perform initial treatment after completion of system testing. 1,ASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS — 04/29/2015 230510-10 18 COMMISSIONING: A, Fill system and perform initial chemical treatment, 13Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that the system is completely full of water. C, Before operating the system perform these steps: 1. Open valves to full open position, Close coil bypass valves, 2, Remove and clean strainers. 3. Check pump for proper rotation and proper wiring. 4. Set automatic fill valves for required system pressure. 5. Check air vents at high points of systems and determine if all are installed and operating freely (automatic type) or to bleed air completely (manual type). & Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. 7. Check operation of automatic bypass valve. & Check and set operating temperature of boilers, chillers, and cooling towers to design requirements. 9. Lubricate motors and bearings. BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS — 04/29/2015 230510-11 EffarAWn. A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of expansion compensation products of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfacto use in similar service for r 1. BJMA Compliance: Construct expansion compensation products in accordance with standards of the Expansion Joint Manufacturer's Association BJMA). 1. SUBMITTALS: A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1 Packless Expansion Joints Compensators: a. Flexonics Div.; UOP, Inc. b. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. C. Keflex, Inc. d. Metraflex Co. e. American BOA, Inc. . Packless Rubber Expansion Joints: a. Garlock; Mechanical Packing Div. b. Mason Industries, Inc. C. Metraflex Co. Mt a 111F# •"" r . .ms 110091ME W 3. Pipe Alignment Guides: as Hyspan Precision Products,lnc. b. Metraflex Co. c. Keflex, Inc. . Slip Joints a. Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc. , b. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. . Flexible Ball Pipe Joints a. Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc. b. Sarco Div., i' arison Industries c. Gustin-Bacon Priv.; Aeroquip Corp. 6. Grooved Piping Couplings and Nipples Expansion Joints: a. Gustin-Macon Div,, Aeroquip Corp. b. ITT Grinnell C. Victaulic Co. of America 2.2 PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS, GENERAL: A. Pipe expansion joints shall provide 200 percent absorption capacity of calculated piping expansion between anchors. 2.3 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS - A. }INTS:A. General: Provide bellows expansion joints where indicated for piping systems, with materials and pressure/temperature ratings selected by manufacturer to suit intended service: Select expansion joints to provide 200 percent absorption capacity with 30 percent safety factor. 1. Externally pressurized, bellows -type: a. ASTM A240 T304 Stainless Steel laminated bellows. b. Flanged Connections, conforming to ANSI 816.6. c. Lifting lug. d, brain part. e. 160 prig design pressure. f, Minimal warranted cycle life of 10,000 full -stroke cycles. g. Internally guided. . Bellows -type expansion joint: aASTM A240 T304 Stainless Steel laminated bellows, bFlanged connections, conforrning to ANSI B16.5. C. M psig design pressure. • a. Shouldered support of bellows to minimize stress at pipe -bellows weld. U External • R g, Minimum warranted life of 10,000 full -stroke cycles. EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS HVAC PIPING — 04/29%2015 230516-2 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 C, Expansion Compensators: Pressure rated for 125 psi for low-pressure systems and for 175 psi for high-pressure systems with a cycle life of 10,000 full -stroke cycles, Units shall have 2 -ply phosphor bronze bellows, brass shrouds, and end fiffings for copper piping systems and 2 -ply stainless steel bellows, carbon steel shrouds, and end fittings for steel piping systems. Expansion compensators shall have internal guides and anti -torque device and removable end clip for proper positioning. I . Provide Keflex series 7Q; or equal. DRubber Expansion Joints: Fabric -reinforced butyl rubber with full- faced integral flanges, external control rods and shall be Internally reinforced with steel retaining rings over entire surface of flanges, drilled to match flange bolt holes, 2.4 SLIP JOINTS: A. Slip Joints: Carbon steel slip type, designed for repacking under pressure. Slip joints shall have drip connections for steam piping systems and flanged or weld ends to mate with piping system. Packing shaWbe an asbes�e compound. 25 FLEXIBLE BALL PIPE JOINTS- Ajoints shall be designed for 360 degree rotation andwith minimurn of 30 degree angular deflection for sizes 6 inches and smaller; IS degree for sizes 8 inches and larger. B. joints shall be carbon steelarid shall comply With Section It of ASME Boilef and Pressure Vessel Code and ASME B31.9 "Building Service Piping" for materials and design of pressure containing parts and bolting. Packing shall be asbestos -free composition. 1, Each assembly shall be factory tested with steam at working pressure of piping system for zero leaks before shipment, & Combination Couplings and Nipples'. Cut grooved short ASTM A 53 steel pipe nipples and ductile iron or malleable iron couplings, with removable ties to hold joint compressed or expanded during piping fabrication. Select suitable gasket materials for piping system. 13Slip-Type Expansion Joints: Ductile iron or malleable iron housing, ASTM A 53 steel pipe body, and polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) modified polyphenylene coated steel pipe slide. Select suitable gasket material for piping system. I Ag r4M&-JNLqrQ a I r. -W4 I Ilp It IsIgmtWim I I t gwl�gI It Anti to,171 &I Lolls &11L.111#11goili Ilg KMKO!iI I I I I v1MV-1 -I I M I; MZMMEMM 2. Guides shall be equipped with factory insulation insert, thickness to match adjoinin insulation. Insulation shall be Hydrous Calcium Silicate, 1200deg F. maximum temperature, with 0.31 K -factor and vapor barrier, I EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING — 04/29/2015 230516-3 LMC; MRI Equipment Replacement 177.395 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: A. Examine areae and conditions under which expansion compensation products are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. Coordinate anchor locations & loads with Structural Engineer. 3.2 EXPANSION JOINTS: A. Install expansion joints where indicated, for adequate expansion of installed piping system. Install in accordance with manufacturer's Instructions. Provide pipe anchors and pipe alignment guides as indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Align units properly to avoid end loading and torsional stress. 3.3 EXPANSION LOOPS A. Fabricate expansion loops to dimensions Indicated, in locations indicated, for adequate expansion compensation of installed piping system. Provide pipe anchors and pipe alignment guides as indicated, to properly anchor and align piping in relationship to expansion loops. 3.4 EXPANSION COMPENSATION FOR RISERS AND TERMINALS: A. Install connection between piping mains and risers with at least 5 pipe fittings including tee in main. Install connections between piping risers and terminal units with at least 4 pipe fittings including tee in riser. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF MPF. ALIGNMENT GUIDES: A. Install pipe alignment guides on piping that adjoins expansion joints and elsewhere as indicated. S, Anchor to building substrate. END OF SECTION 23 0515 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING - 014/29/2015 230516-4 17 .308 SECTION 23 0519 - METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION CP WORK. X Extent of meters and gauges required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or specified in other Division -3 sections. B. Types of meters and gauges specified in this section include the following: 1 a Temperature Gauges and Fittings: a. Dial Type Insertion Thermometers. b. Thermometer Wells. C. Temperature Gauge Connector Plugs. . Pressure gauges and Fittings: a. Pressure Gauges. b. Pressure Gauge Cocks. c, Pressure Gauge Connector Plugs. 3. Flow Measuring Meters: a, Venturi Tube Flow Measuring Elements. b. Calibrated Balance Valves. c. Portable Plow Meter Read -cut Kits, C. Meters and gauges furnished as part of factory -fabricated equipment; are specified as part of equipment assembly in other Division -23 sections. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE. - A, Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of meters and gauges, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Codes and Standards. 1. UL Compliance- Comply with applicable 1L standards pertaining to meters and gauges. 2. ANSI and ISA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of ANSI and Instrument Society of America {ISA} standards pertaining to construction and installation of meters and gauges, C. Certification. Provide meters and gauges whose accuracies, under specified operating conditions, are certified by manufacturer. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data. Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation instructions for each type of meter and gauge. Include scale range, ratings, and calibrated performance METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING - 04/29t2015 230519-1 willif0i ff#INI I I EWE= 177.305 certified where indicated.b - and gauge scheduleshowing figure#range, location,and accessories ford gauge. B. All flow measuring devices to be provided shall be reviewed and approved by the test & balance contractor and the temperature control contractor for proper scale, rangeability and function prior to submitting shop drawings. The test & balance contractor and temperature control contractor shall provide » typed letterstating this review has been # . .# # requirementsincluded with shop drawing submittals. C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of meter and gauge. Include this data and product data in Maintenance Manual; in accordance with of • DART PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturer. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Dial Type Insertion Thermometers and Wells: a. Marsh Instrument Co.; Unit of General Signal, b, Taylor Instrument Co. c. Trerice (H.O.) Co. d. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 2. Temperature Gauge Connector plugs; q, Fairfax Company b. Peterson Equipment Co. C. Universal Lancaster d. Sisco . MG Piping Products Co. 3. Pressure Gauges: a, Ametek/U.S.. Gauge. b. Marsh Instrument Co.; Unit of General Signal. C. Marshalltown Instruments: Inc. d. Trerice;(H.O.);Co. e. Weiss Instruments, Inc. f. MG Piping Products Co. g, Versa Gauge . Pressure Gauge Connector Plugs. a, Fairfax Company b. Peterson Equipment Co. C. Universal Lancaster d. Sisco e. MG Piping Products Co, . Venturi Tube Flow Measuring Elements: METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING — 04/2912015 230519-2 a. Gerand . BarcofAeroqup Corp. C. Presso d. Flow Design Inc. 6, Calibrated Balancing Valves (Valve and Venturi Type): a. Flow Design Inc. b. Presse C. Gerand "Balvalve Indicator" d. Nexus Valve e. Griswold 2.2 DIAL TYPE INSERTION THERMOMETERS: A. General: Provide dial type insertion th&miom6t6f� of materials, capacities, and ranges indicated, designed and constructed for use in service indicated. B� Type-. Bkm4fal, stainless steel case and stem, I inch diameter dial, dust and leak proof, 1/8 inch diameter stem with nominalof C. Accuracy: 0.5 percent of dial range, D. Range: Conform to the following: 1. Hot Water, 0 degrees - 220 degrees E (-10 degrees - 110 degrees C). 2. Chilled Water: 25 degrees _ 125 degrees (-10 degrees -110 degrees ). 2.3 THERMOMETER WELLS: Ae General: Provide thermometer wells constructed of brass or stainless steel, pressure rated to match piping system design pressure. Provide 2 inch extension for insulated piping. Provide cap nut with chain fastened permanently to thermometer well. 2.4 TEMPERATURE GAUGE CONNECTOR PLUG A. General': Provide temperature gauge connector dugs pressure rated for 500 psi and 200 degrees F (93 degrees C). Construct of brass and finish in nickel -plate, equip with 112inch NPS fitting, with self-sealing valve core type neoprene Basketed orifice suitable for inserting 1J6 inch O.p, probe assembly from dial type insertion thermometer. Equip orifice with Basketed screw cap and chain. Provide extension, length equal to insulation thickness, for insulated piping. 2.5 PRESSURE GAUGE: A. general. Provide pressure gauges of materials, capacities, and ranges indicated, designed and constructed for use in service indicated. B. Type: General use, 1 percent accuracy, ANSI B4.1 grade A, phospher bronze bourdon type, bottomconnection. C. Case: prawn steel or brass, glass lens,-1l2inch diameter. D. Connector: Brass with 114inch male NPT. Provide protective syphon when used for steam service: E. Scale: White coated aluminum, with permanently etched markings. Range: Conform to the following.- METERS ollowing: M.AND GAUGES HVAC PIPING s a mum 1, Vacuum: 30 inches Ng - 15 psi, 2. Water: g -100 psi. 3. Steam. 0 - 200 psi. 2.6 PRESSURE GAUGE COCKS: A. General: Provide pressure gauge cocks between pressure gauges and gauge tees on piping systems. Gauge cock shall be'/`4 inch ferrule NPT on each end ball naive as specified in Section 23 tis 2 - Valves. B, Syphon: ' inch straight coil constructed of brass tubing with 1/4 inch male NPT on each end. C, Snubber: 'r'4 inch brass bushing with corrosion resistant porous metal disc, through which pressure fluid is filtered, Select disc material for fluid served and pressure rating. 2.7 VENTURI TUBE FLOW MEASURING ELEMENTS: ENTS: A. Primary flow measuring elements shall consist of vented tubes. Arrange piping in accordance with manufacturer's published literature. In horizontal pipes, place connections slightly above horizontal centerline of pipe. B. Provide each primary element with integral tab, or metal tag on stainless steel wire; extending outside pipe covering on which is stamped or clearly printed in plainly visible position the following information. 1. Manufacturer's name and address. 2. Serial number of meter to which element is to be connected. Name, number, or location of equipment served. 4. Specified rate of flow. 5. Multiplier (including unity, where applicable) to be applied to metier reading. C. Provide taps with Scnraeder or Manson type fittings. Provide tap extensions to accommodate insulation. METERS ♦ M GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING• f • e LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177308 2,8 CALIBRATED BALANCE VALVES: A. General: Provide as indicated, calibrated balance valves equipped with readout valves to facilitate connecting of differential pressure meter to balance valves, Equip each readout port with .• connect valve designed to minimize system fluid • during monitoring process. Provide balance valves with preformed insulation suitable for use on heating and cooling systems, and to protect • valves during • S. Design, valve and venturi type: 1. Ball or butterfly type valve, 2. Bubble -tight shut-off. 1 Fixed venturi, upstream of valve, 4, Schraeder type taps on venturi, upstream and downstream. 5. Memory stop device to allow valve to be returned to balanced position after being closed. (Note: this does not take the place of isolation valves shown on drawings) 6. Provide metal tag with flow curve for each valve. 2,9 FLOW METER READ-OUT KITS: A, Provide flow meter read-out kits with bellows type differential pressure element and minimum 5 inch 1 Bound set of descriptive bulletins, installation and operating instructions, parts list, and set of curves showing flow verses pressure differential for each orifice or venturi tube with which meter is to be used. 4. Metal instruction plate, secured inside cover, illustrating use of meter. Deliver meter with case to Owner, METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING — 04/29/2015 230519-5 3.1 INSPECTION. A. Examine areas and conditions under which meters and gauges are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 12 INSTALLATION OF T A. General: Install thermometers in vertical upright position, and tilted so as to be easily read b observer standing on floor. B. locations: Install in the following locations, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. At inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air handling wits, and built-up central systems. 2. At inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat exchanger.. 3. In discharge duct or plenum of air handling units and built-up central systems. CThermometer Wells: Install in piping tee where indicated, in vertical upright position, Fill well with oil or graphite, secure cap. D. Temperature Gauge Connector Plugs: Install in piping tee where indicated, located on pipe at most readable position. Secure cap. Provide portable temperature gauge for each plug connection. .3 INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE GAUGES: A. General: Install pressure gauges in piping tee with pressure gauge cock, located on pipe at most readable position. B. Locations- Install in the following locations, and elsewhere as indicated: 1, At suction and discharge of each pump. 2. At discharge of each pressure reducing valve. C, Pressure Gauge Cocks: Install in piping tee with snubber. Install syphon for steam pressure gauges. D� Pressure Gauge Connector Plugs: Install in piping tee where indicated, located on pipe at most readable position. Secure cap. Provide portable pressure gauge for each plug connection. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF FLOW MEASURING METERS: A. General: Install flow measuring meters on piping systems located in accessible locations at most readable position. B, Locations; Install in the following locations, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. At discharge of each pump. 2. At inlet of each hydronic coil. METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING — 04/29/2015 230519-6 IM =- C, Wafer -Type Flow Meters'. Install between 2 Class 125 pipe flanges, ANSI B16.1 (cast-iron) or ANSI 516.24 (cast- bronze). Provide minimum straight lengths of pipe upstream and downstream from meter in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. D, Calibrated Balance Valves- Install on piping with readout valves in vertical upright position. Maintain minimum length of straight unrestricted piping equivalent to 3 pipe diameters upstream of valve. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: X Adjusting,- Adjust faces of meters and gauges to proper angle for best visibility, B. Cleaning: Clean windows of meters and gauges and factory- finished surfaces. Replace cracked or broken windows, repair any scratched or marred surfaces with manufacturers touch-up paint, METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING — 04/29/2015 230519-7 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 SECTION 23 0523 — GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING FART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. This Section includes general duty valvescommon to most mechanical piping systems. B. Valves tags and charts are specified in Division 23 Section "Mechanical Identification." 1.2 SUBMITTALS- A. Product Data: including body material, value design, pressure and temperature classification, end connection details, seating materials, trim material and arrangement, dimensions and required clearances, and installation Instructions. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Single Source Responsibility: Comply with the requirements specified in Division -23 Section "Basic Mechanical Requirements," under "Product Options." B. MSS Standard Practices: Comply with the fallowing standards for valves: D. MSF Standard 61: Chinking Water System Components. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1. Ensure valves are dry and Internally protected against rusting and galvanic corrosion. 2. Protect valve ends against mechanical damage to threads, flange faces and weld end preps. 3. Set valves in best position for handling. Globe and gate valves shall be closed to prevent rattling; ball and plug valves shall be open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces; butterfly valves shall be shipped closed or slightly open; and swing check valves shall be blocked in either closed or open position. B. Storage: Use the following precautions during storage: GENERAL . DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING — 0412912016 230523-1 ., Bypassd Drain Connection Standard Z MSS SP -67., Butterfly Valves 3. MSS SP -70: Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends 4. MSS SP -71: Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends 5 MSS SP -72: Ball Valves with Flanged or Butt -Welding Ends for General Service 6 MSS SP -78: Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends 7. MSS SP -80.- Bronze Gate, Globe Angle and Check Valves & MSS SP -84: Steel Valves - Socket Welding and Threaded Ends 9 MSS SP -85: Cast Iron Globe and Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends 10. MSS SP -92: Guideser D. MSF Standard 61: Chinking Water System Components. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1. Ensure valves are dry and Internally protected against rusting and galvanic corrosion. 2. Protect valve ends against mechanical damage to threads, flange faces and weld end preps. 3. Set valves in best position for handling. Globe and gate valves shall be closed to prevent rattling; ball and plug valves shall be open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces; butterfly valves shall be shipped closed or slightly open; and swing check valves shall be blocked in either closed or open position. B. Storage: Use the following precautions during storage: GENERAL . DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING — 0412912016 230523-1 1 Valves shall be stored and protected against all dirt, debris and foreign material at all times. 2. Do not remove valve end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage. 3. Protect valves against weather, Where practical store valves indoors. <Maintain valve temperature higher than the ambient dew point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, support valves off the ground or pavement and protect in watertight enclosures. C. Handling: Valves whose size requires handling by crane or lift shall be slung or rigged to avoid damage to exposed valve parts. Handwheels and stems, in particular, shall not be used as lifting or rigging points. PARS" 2 -PRODUCTS 21 MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers listed. 1 Gate Valves: a. Stockham b, Grinnell Corp. c. Hammond d, Nibco e. Milwaukee 2. Ball Valves: a. Apollo b. Milwaukee c, Nibco d. Wafts 3, Eccentric Plug Valves: a. Keystone/Tyco b, DeZurik C. Milliken d. Homestead 4. Globe Valves: a. Anvil b. Hammond C. Nibco d. Milwaukee 5Butterfly Valves: a. Keystone/Tyco b. DeZurik GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING -- 04129/2015 230523-2 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 C. Nibco d. Bray e. AB . Milwaukee 6. Swing Greek Valves a. Apollo b. Anvil c> Nibco d. Watts (screwed) 7. Non -Slam Check Valves: a. Keystone b. Metraflex C, Nibco d, Val -Matic e. Milwaukee 8. Lift Check Valves: a. Apollo b. Metraflo C. Milwaukee d. Nibco 3. Solenoid Valves: . Asco b. General Controls C. Skinner 22 VALVE FEATURES: A. General: Comply with MSS -92 1980 "Valve Users Manual". B. Valve Design. Valves shall have rising stern, or using stern outside screw and yoke design, except, non -rising stern valves may be used where headroom prevents full operation of rising stem valves. C. Sizes: unless otherwise indicated„ provide valves of same size as upstream pipe size. (Control valves shall be sized for required flow.) D. Operators: Provide the following special operator features: 1, Handwhoels, fastened to valve stere for valves other than quarter turn. 2: Lever handle on quarter turn valves 6 inch and smaller, except plug valves. Provide a wrench for every plug valve. 3. Chainwheel operators for valves 2-112 inch and larger that are installed 96 inches or higher above finished floor elevation. Provide chains to an elevation of 64„ above finished floor elevation. GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING — 04/29/2015 230523-3 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 4. Worm deer operators of an enclosed weather-proof design shall be provided on all quarter turn valves 8 inches and larger. E. Extended Mems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems to allow full operation of the valve without interference by the insulation. F. Bypass and Drain Connections. Comply with MSS P-45 End Connections: As specified in the individual valves specifications. 1. Threads: Comply with ANSI B2.1, 2. Flanges. Comply with ANSI B16.1 for cast iron, ANSI 518.8 for steel, and ANSI 518.24 for bronze. 3 Solder -Joint: Comply with ANSI 516.18, a. Caution; Where soldered end connections are used, use solder having a melting point below 840 OF for gate, globe, and check valves and below 421 OF for ball valves. 2.3 GATE VALVES.. A. Cate Valves -- 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP -80, Class 158 Class 200/300, body and bonnet of cast bronze ASTM B62 for 150# / B61 for 200/300, threaded 'ends, solid wedge disc, union bonnet, rising steno, bronze gland, TFE impregnated packing, malleable iron handwheel. Provide stainless steel seats on all steam service valves and class 200/300 gate valves. Stockha Fig. B -120/B-124 B -132/B-145 B. Cate Valves - 2-1/2 inches and Larger: MSS SP -70, Class 125 /Class 250, iron body conforming to ASTM A126 C1 B, Bronze trim, 03 S & Y design, Flanged ends, TE impregnated packing. Provide stainless steel seats on all steam service valves and class 250 gate valves. Stockha Fig. G-623 /F-667 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 04/29/2015 23 0523- 4 stainless steel ball and stem, Carbon and graphite reinforced PTFE blowout proof stern, vinyl covered steel handle. Threaded ends. Apollo 70-140-64. D. Ball valve options/accessories: Provide the following as required or as specifically indicated: 1. Tee handle for tight fit applications (within enclosures, etc.). Z Locking handle. 3. Chain. . Stem extension. 5. Mounting pads: 2,5 BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING SYSTEMS: A, Lead Free Ball Valves: 150 WSP, 600 WOG, rated for 150 PSI at 350 degrees F, two piece end entry body style, bronze body conforming to ASTM B584, full port chrome plated brass % glass reinforced PTFE seats,packing, adjustable 'packing nut blow-out prso stem,covered steelal Provide solder•.. or `.l'• �ends to match piping system, Valves shall have a C, value of a full port ball valve, Comply with NSF -61. Apollo B. Sall valve options/accessories: Provide the following as required or as specifically indicated: 1, Tee handle for tight fit applications (within enclosures, etc.). 2. Locking handle. 3. gain. 4. Stem extension. 5. Mounting pads. Steam Systems (2 inches and smaller): MSS SP -30, Class 150/300 body, bonnet, bonnet ring cast bronze ASTM B-62 Type 420,'stainless steel disc and seat ring, union bonnet, ''non - asbestos Teflon impregnated stem packing, copper -silicon bronze stem, brass packing gland and malleable iron handle, 1. Stockham Fig. B-29113-74 C. Steam Systems (2-112 inches and larger): MSS SP -35, Class 1251259, cast iron body ASTM A-126, Class l3, bolted bonnet bronze mounted, rising stem bronze disc and seat, 1S&Y, non - asbestos Teflon impregnated stent packing and cast iron or malleable iron hand wheel. 1. Stockham Fig. %-512 2.6 ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVES: A. 2 inches and Smaller:: 125 psi, cash iron body„ straightway pattern, EPDM or C11 Encapsulated Eccentric plug, tight shut-off seals, square head, threaded ends. Provide memory stop feature. Dezurik PEC B. 2-1/2 inches l Larger Sizes: 125 psi, cast ironbody, straightwaypattern,.D Encapsulated Eccentric plug, lever actuators, except handwheels where indicated, and flanged ends. l •+memory stop GENERAL x R HVAC PIPING1 2.7 GLOBE VALVES. . A. Plumbing Systems (2-1/2 inches and smaller); MSS SP -80 Mass 150, beady, bonnet and bonnet ring, cast bronze ASTM B -2p Teflon disc, copper -silicon bronze stere; non -asbestos teflon impregnated stem packing, union bonnet and malleable iron handle. Stockham Fig. B-22/8-24 B, Steam Systems (2 inches and Smaller): MSS SP -80, Class 150/300 body, bonnet, bonnet ring cast bronze ASTM B-2 Type 420, stainless steel disc and ;seat ring, anion bonnet, non - asbestos teflon impregnated stem packing, copper -silicon bronze stem, brass packing eland and malleable iron handle, Stockham Fig. B-29/5-74 C, Steam Systems (2-1/2 inches and larger): MSS P-85, Mass 125/250, cast iron body ASTM -126, Class B, bolted bonnet bronze mounted, rising stem bronze disc and seat, O &Y, non - asbestos teflon impregnated stem packing and cast iron or malleable iron hand wheel. Stockha Fig. G-512 2.8 BUTTERFLY RFLY VALVES: A. Hydronic Service Butterfly Valves - 2-1/2 inches to 12 inches: MSS P-67, east iron body conforming to ASTM At 26 class B, aluminum bronze ASTM B148 disc, single piece or two piece 416 stainless steel stem, FPCM seat, upper and lower bane bearing, non-metallic bushing and stem seat, ANSI class 125 flange, rated for 200 psi pressure differential, 200 psi drop -tight shut off dead end service, with downstream flange removed. Provide extended deck for 2 inches thick insulation. All valves shall be factory tested to 110°f of pressure rating All butterfly valves shall be full lugged body, drifted and tapped. Keystone Fig.222 A. Swing Check Valves - 2-1/2 inch and Smaller. MSS SP -80; 200/300, cast bronze body and cap conforming to ASTM B 62, ASTM B61 for 200/300 bronze, honizontalr design, ♦. bronzellefton disc,,. d having threaded or solder ends. Class 150 valves meeting the above specifications may be used where pressure requiresor aavailable. B, Swing Check Valves - 2-1/2 to 3 Inch: MSS SP -71; Class 125 /250 (Class� 175 FM approved for - protection piping systems), cast iron body and bolted cap conforming to ASTM + 126, Class B,- horizontal swi% with a bronze • or s disc with bronzedisc ring, and flanged ends. Valve shall be capable of being refitted while the valve remains in the line. For sewage'ejector and sump pump discharge and larger, provide s- leverweightor N r• assist disc to close rapidly. 1 DRAIN A. For Hydronic and Plumbing Systems: Provide ball valve with threaded hose end and cap with GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING - 04/29/2015 230523-6 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177308 2, The actuator shall have an integral terminal strip, for wiring to power supplies. Cable entry shall be by means of two (2) 1 inch NPT threaded connections. Cable entries shall have UL recommended gland stops within the NPT hole to prevent glands from being screwed in too far and damaging cable. 11. Electric Valve Actuator Accessories a. Provide thermostatically controlled heaters for all exterior valves. b. Provide potentiometer or 4-20 MA -transmitter for providing continuous feedback of actuator position where required to meet the sequence of operations. GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING — 04/29/2015 230523-8 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 C. Provide an electronic servo amplifier and speed control module capable of accepting a 0-5K ohm, 4-2OmA DC or other Input signal for all modulating control valves. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3:1 EXAMINATION: A. Install valves in accordance with manufacturer's Instructions. B. Examine valve interior through the end ports, for cleanliness„ freedom from foreign matter and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks used which prevents disc movement during shipping and handling. C. Actuate valve through an open -close and close -open cycle, Examine functionally significant features, such as guides and seats made accessible by such actuation. Following examination, return the valve closure member to the position in which it was shipped. D. Examine threads on both the valve and the mating pipe for form (out -of -round or local indentation) and cleanliness, . Examine mating flange faces for conditions which might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Check gasket material for proper size and material, and for freedom from defects and damage. E, Prior to valve installation, examine the piping for cleanliness, freedom from foreign materials, and proper alignment. 3.2 VALVE SELECTION; A. Selection of Valve Ends (Pipe Connections): Except as otherwise indicated„ select valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections: 1 Copper Tube Size 2 Inch and Smaller: Solder ends, except in heating hot water and low pressure steam service which shall have threaded ends. 2. Steel pipe Sizes 2 Inch and Smaller: Threaded or grooved -end. 3. Steel Pipe Sizes 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: Flanged or grooved end. At all piping hot taps provide a ball valve with the hot tap and a ball valve or butterfly valve for shut-off service. Hot taps shall be provided only where approved by the Engineer. 33 VALVE INSTALLATIONS: Valve Application Table (Where sizes overlap, contractor has choice of either type) SERVICE VALVE TYPE Plumbing Water Services; 3`" or smaller Ball Valve LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 Plumbing Water -Plumbing Pressure Reducing Bypass; s Globe Valve Plumbing Balancing Service; 2" and smaller Calibrated Balancing Valve See Section 23I # Balancing Service; 2-1/2" and larger Eccentric Plua Valve HVAC Hydronic Piping; 3" and smaller Ball Valve HVAC Hydronic Piping; 2-1/2" and larger Butterfly Valve I HVAC Hydronic Pressure Reducing Valve Globe Valve Bypass;Plumbing HVAC Hydronic Balancing valve; 2" and smaller Calibrated Balancing Valve See Section 23 0619 HVAC Hydronic Balancing Valve,, 2.1/2" and Eccentric Plug Valve. ger � Valves, # smaller � HVAC & Plumbing Check # « & Plumbing Check Valves; 2-1/2" and Swing Check largerHVAC Steam and Condensate Piping Shut-off-, 2" and Steam Ball Valves smaller Steam and Condensate Piping Shut-off-, 2-1/2" Steam Butterfly largerand tea re lobe Valve Reducing Service; all sizes Steam and Condensate Piping Check Valves; all Swing Check sizes X Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. Installation of Check Valves: Install for prosper direction of flow as follows: 1. Swing Check Valves: Install in horizontal position with hinge pits level. Z. Wafer Check Valves. Install between 2 flanges,in horizontal or vertical upward flow position. 3. Lift Check Valve: Install in piping line with stem upright and plumb. GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING -- 04/29/2095 230523-10 TV= 3.4 SOLDER CONNECTIONS: X Cut tube square and to exact lengths, B, Clean end of tube to depth of valve socket, using steel wool, sand cloth, or a steel wire brush to a bright finish. Clean valve socket in same manner. C. Apply proper soldering flux in an even coat to inside of valve socket and outside of tube, D. Open gate and globe valves to fully open position. E. Remove the cap and disc holder of swing check valves with composition discs. F. Insert tube into valve socket making sure the end rests against the shoulder inside valve. Rotate tube or valve slightly to insure even distribution of the flux. G. Apply heat evenly to outside of valve around joint until solder will melt upon contact. Feed solder until it completely fills the joint around tube. Avoid hot spots or overheating the valve. Once the solder starts cooling, remove excess amounts around the joint with a cloth or brush, 3.5 BRAZED CONNECTIONS: A. Protect valves from temperatures which exceed the valve material temperature limitations as recommended by the valve manufacturer, B, Disassemble 3 piece ball valves prior to brazing. 16 THREADED CONNECTIONS: X Note the internal length of threads in valve ends, and proximity of valve internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve. B. Align threads at point of assembly. C. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads (except where dry seal threading is specified). D. Assemble joint wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the pipe is being threaded. 37 FLANGED CONNECTIONS: A. Align flanges surfaces parallel. B. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads, Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly using a torque wrench. 18 BUTTERFLY VALVE MOTORIZED ACTUATORS. - A. Coordinate with the control system installer to set up all end switches, pilot valves, and control panels. B. Provide electric valve actuator power in accordance with Division 26. GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING — 04/29/2015 230523-11 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 C. Locate pilot positioners and valve position indicators so that they will be visible from the floor or roof surface, without the need of a ladder or climbing over equipment and piping. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: Testing: After piping systems have been tasted and put into service, but before final adjusting and balancing, inspect each valve for leaks. Adjust or replace packing to stop leaks; replace valve if leak persists, GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING -- 04%2912015 230523-12 LMC-. MRI Equipment Replacement 3.10 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A. Cleaning: Clean mills le, grease, and protective coatings from exterior of valves and prepare to receive finish painting or insulation, GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING -- 04/29/2015 230523-13 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.303 SECTION SUPPORTS EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1A QUALITY ASSURANCE: k Manufacturers Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of supports and anchors, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. S. Codes and Standards: 1. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable plumbing codes pertaining to product materials and installation of supports and anchors. 2. NEPA Compliance: Hangers and supports shall comply with NEPA standard No. 1 when used as a component of a fire protection system and NFI A Standard No, 14 when used as a component of a standpipe system. NEPA 99 shall be used for medical gas systems, 3. UL and FM Compliance: Hangers, supports, and components shall be listed and labeled by UL and FM where used for fire protection piping systems. 4, Duct Hangers: SMACNA Duct Manuals . MSS Standard Compliance: a, Provide pipe hangers and supports of which materials, design, and manufacture comply with MSS SP -fag, 1.2 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation instructions for each type of support and anchor. Submit pipe hanger and support schedule showing Manufacturer's figure number, size, location, and features for each required pipe hanger and support. B. chop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly -type strop drawings for each type of support and anchor, indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components. C, Product certificates signed by the manufacturer of hangers and supports certifying that their products meet the specified requirements, D. Maintenance Data Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of support and anchor. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 23. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2A MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with 'requirements, 'provide products by one of the following: HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT - 04/29/201 230529-1 a. B -Line Systems Inc. b, ANVIL International C, PHIS Manufacturing, Inc. . Unistrut Metal Framing Systems . Hubbard Enterprises (Supports for domestic water piping) f:, Specialty Products Co (Supports for domestic wafer piping. g. Erica K Grinnell . Saddles, Shield and Thermal Shield Inserts: a. ,ANVIL International b. Pipe Shields" Inc. C. -Line; . Snapp Its e. Srico f. Value Engineered Products, Inc, g. Grinnell 3. Roof Equipment Supports: a. Custom Curb, Inc. b. Pate Co. c. Thycurb Liv.; Thybar Corp. d. Vent Products, Inc. 4. Concrete Inserts and Anchors: a. Clnistrut Metal Framing Systems b. Power -Strut c. ITW Ramset/Red Head d, Hilti e. S -Line f: Srico g. Grinnell 2.2 PIPE HANGERS & SUPPORTS. A. Hangers and support components shall be factory fabricated of materials, design, and manufacturer complying with MSS SP -69. 1. Components shall have galvanized coatings where installed for piping and equipment that will not have field -applied finish. Z Pipe attachments shall have nonmetallic coating for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. 1. Steel Pipe, size 3/3"thru 30", Type 1. . Non -Insulated Copper Pipe, size 1/2" thru 4", Type 1. (PVC Coated) . Cast Iron Pipe, size 4" thru 24", 'hype 1. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT - 04/29/2015 230529-2 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 C. Adjustable Swivel Ring for Non -insulated Pipe MSS Type. 1. Steel pipe„ size 112" thru ", Type 7; 2. Capper Pipe, size 1/2" thru 4", Type 7 (PVC Coated) Di Pipe Clamps MSS Type. 1. Steel Pipe, size 3t4" thru 24", Type 8. 2. Copper Pipe, size 112<" thru 4", Type 8 (PVC Coated). U Bolts: MSS Type. 1. Steel Pipe, size 112" thru 30" Type 2 2. Copper Pipe" size 112" thru 8", Type 24 (PVC Coated). F. Straps: MSS tr 26 O. Pipe Stanchion Saddle: MSS Type 37. H. Yoke & Roller Hanger: MSS Type 43 1. Hamer Rads: Continuous threaded steel, sizes as specified. J. Hangers: 1. Hot Pipes. a. 112" through 1-112": Adjustable wrought steel ring. b. 2" through ": Adjustable wrought steel clevis, C. " and Over: Adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll, 2. Cold Pipes; a 'ill" through 1-1/2": Adjustable wrought steel ring, b. 2" and Over: Adjustable wrought steel clevis. 3. Multiple or Trapeze: Structural steel channel (with web vertical and engineered for the specific applications), with welded spacers and hanger rads. Provide cast iron roll and base plate for hot pipe sizes six inches and over, Provide hanger rods one size larger than for largest pipe in trapeze. 1f the deflection at center of trapeze exceeds 1/3513 of the distance between the end hangers, install an additional hanger at raid -span or use larger channel, K. Wall Supports for Horizontal Steel Pipe: 1. 'lz inch through 4lnehes: Offset or straight j -hook, . 4 inches and Over: Welded steel bracket Type 31, 32 or 33 and wrought steel clamp. Provide adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll Type 44 for hot pipe 2000 E and over and for sizes six inches and over, L. Supports for Vertical Pipe: Steel riser clamp. Type 8. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT - 04/29/2015 230529-3 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177,308 M. Upper Attachments: 1, For attaching hanger rads to structural steel I -burns: a. Provide adjustable beam clamp, MSS -Type 21. Attach to bottom flange of beam. 2. For attaching hanger rads to bar joists: a: When bottom chord is constructed of structural steel angles, provide square washer. Place hanger rod between backs of the two angles and support with the washer and dual locking nuts on top of the angles.. Spot weld washer to angles. b. When bottom « d is constructed of « bars,provide Elcen N« 137 bar joint equal.washer or CONCRETE2.3 RO • X Inserts: Case shall be of galvanized carbon steel with square threaded concrete insert nut for hanger «« connection; t«« lugs forrods,« - for attaching to forms. type of upper attachment is to be used for all areas having poured in place concrete construction, 1. Size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods. ConcreteBProvide fasteners attached to concrete ceilings that are vibration and shock resistant. Provi hangers for piping attached to concrete construction with one of the following types. I « MSS SP r« Type 18. 2, Powder driven fasteners subject to approval of Architect and Structural Engineer. Each fastener shall be capable of holding a test load of 1000 pounds whereas the actual load shall not exceed 50 pounds. . Self -drilling expansion shields. The load applied shall not exceed one-fourth the proof test load required. . Machine bolt expansion anchor. The load applied shall not exceed one-fourth the proof test load required. C. Anchors; Carbon steep zinc plated and coated with a clear chromate finish. Installation shall be in holes drilled with carbide -tipped drillbitsor; by use of self -drilling anchors. 1. Provide anchors suitable for the location of Installation and designed to withstand all forces and movements acting in the anchor. Manufacture pipe anchors in accordance with MSS SP 69. Provide a safety factor of four for the anchor installation. 2.4 SADDLES AND THERMAL SHIELD INSERTS: A. Protection Saddles: MSS Type m fill interior voids with segments of insulation matching adjoining Insulation. Protection Shi« «• if degrees arc, galvanized steel, minimum 12 inches o • to prevent crushing of o HANGERS ANIS SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING ANIS EQUIPMENT - 04/29/20 230529-4 177 30 2,5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 3. S. Cement grout: Portland cement (ASTM C 150, Type I or Type Ill) and dean uniformly graded, natural sand (ASTM C 414, Size No. 2). Mix ratio shall be 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts sand, by volume, with minimum amount of grater required for placement and hydration, C. Heavy - Duty Steel Trapezes. Fabricate from steel shapes selected for loads rewired; weld steel in accordance with AWS standards, C. Ripe Alignment guides; Provide factory -fabricated guides, of cast semi -steel or heavy fabricated Steel, consisting of bolted two -section outer cylinder and base with tyro -section guiding spider bolted tight to pipe. Size guide and spiders to clear pipe and insulation (if any), and cylinder. Provide guides of length recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel. 2.6 ROOF EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS: k See details on drawings 3.1 INSPECTION: A. Examine areas and conditions under which supports and anchors are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in mariner acceptable to Installer. 3.2PREPARATION: » ! w ! !* 1.1 �' . ::! •. ! !! .'. ! l :!! • »' 1.. ! 17'7.308 - a- • - s r a e • - a - _ a• a - s - - a �°i - i a ,.- a ,. a s .. • - 1e i -,� • �. • • ai- i ii • - i 1. Use inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams wherever practicable. . Set inserts in position in advance of,concrete work. Provide reinforcement rod i concrete for inserts carrying fare over 4 inches or ducts over 60 inches wide. 8. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, finish inserts flush with slab surface. . Where inserts are omitted drill through concrete slab from below and provide read with recessed square steal plate and nutabove slab if ;construction above permits. C. Existing Construction: 1. In existing concrete construction, drill into concrete slab and insert and tighten expansion anchor bolt. Connect anchor bolt to hanger rod. Gare must be taken in existing concrete construction not to sever reinforcement rods or tension wires. A INSTALLATION OF HANGERS ANIS SUPPORTS: *- aai W • . -, a •ai i a • i aa- . • i • •^ aaa ,a +ta. - • - i ^i -. a .a- � i- is i aaa -� ii- � � .i- ,, e- a» - •. • - a a- ,. a ,, - .i . - •a• a > - • « - �. a a- Ni • - a i�, i „ -a i aai a • • : iM i aai a • i • • tlk i other13Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers ari r - .. - ..... • ». a .a.. •:.. aai i iaa-.. i a 6.. - a #^ .. • aai .aa a i a- aa- i a • • a> • ♦ •. i iia - •. i a- a a ♦ i • s • � •• i«• w a iwift— AMe- a •ai • • • • • •-«i i.a • • y YIM • IM *. • i 1jjprj1jiii• 1M Al FI, • A M I a C. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes, and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ANSI B31.9 Building Services Piping Code is not exceeded. K Insulated Piping: Comply with the fallowing installation requirements. 1. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ANSI B1. 2. Saddles: Install Protection saddles wheresupported by pipe rollers. Pill interior voids with segments of insulation that match adjoining pipe insulation. . Shields: Install galvanized steel protection shields, on all insulated piping 2 inches and less, except where required to be champed. Where necessary to prevent dislocation, strap shield to pipe with wire ties or "Zip Strips". "thermal Inserts: provide thermal shield inserts at all supports for all insulated piping over 2 inches and for all piping required to be clamped. provide 180 percent inserts at clevis and roller hangers. Provide 360 percent inserts for all trapeze and clamped supports. 1. Install horizontal hyronic and steam piping with the following minimum rod sues and maximum spacing: SIZE (NPS) MAX. SPAN IN FEET MIN, ROD SIZE -INCISES Steal Copper 1 7 6 318 1.112 g 8 318 , 2 16 8 318 3 12 10 112 4 14 12 618 J. Install medical gas piping hangers with the following maximum spacing. 1. 112" Pipe Size: 6" O.C. 2. 314" Pipe Size: _7' 0.C,; 1" pipe size: 8` 1-114" or bargee Pipe Size: g' O.C. 4. 1-112°" and larger: 10' Vertical Piping Every floor level. K. Support horizontal cast iron pipe as follows. 1. Flub & Spigot: All sizes. a, 10 ft. max spacing: min of one (1) hanger per pipe section close to joint on the barrel. Also at change of direction and branch connections, • Support+r .- • .' base.ot ipe immediately below the hub.vertical hub and ig P, sp. c. Use hanger rods same size as for steel pipe. 2. No -Hub: All sizes a. With Clamp -All and Anaheim Series 4000 stainless steel couplings and MG cast iron couplings.- one hanger to each joint. b. With all other stainless steel band type couplings: one hanger to each side of joint. cl Support all horizontal cast iron pipe within 18 inches of each joint and with 5 feet maximum spacing between hangers, except that pipe exceeding 5 feet in length shall be supported at intervals no greater than 10 feet. d. Use hanger rods same size as for steel pipe. e. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each story height and at its base. Support vertical no -hub pipe so that the weight is carried from the pipe to the support and not from the joint to the support. L Place a hanger within one foot of each horizontal elbow. M. Use hangers which are vertically adjustable 1-1/2 inch minimum after piping is erected. N. Support vertical steel and copper piping at every story height but at not more than 15 foot intervals for steel and 10 feet for copper. 0, Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide trapeze hangers, P. Where practical, support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. Q. Support steam supply and condensate return pipe runs on adjustable roller hangers. R. Each pipe drop to equipment shall be adequately supported. All supporting lugs or guides shall be securely anchored to the building structure. S. Securely anchor and support plumbing domestic water piping in chases or walls. Use factory manufactured clamps and brackets connected to fixture s, waste/vent piping or brackets connected to studs. Wires or straps will not be permitted. 1. When copper supplies are connected to flush valves, support the tubing by the studs or by a fixture, not by clamping to waste/vent piping. Z Prevent copper tubes from making contact with steel brackets using fire retardant polyethylene inserts or other dielectric insulating material. Duct tape shall not be used. T. Install anchors and fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and the following: 1. In the event a self -drilling expansion shield or machine bolt expansion shield is considered to have been installed improperly, the Contractor shall make an acceptable replacement or demonstrate the stability of the anchor by performing an on-site test under which the anchor will be subjected to a load equal to twice the actual load. 2. Powder -driven fasteners may be used only where they will be concealed after the construction is complete. Where an occasional fastener appears to be improperly HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT - 04/29/2015 230529-8 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177,308 ------------ I illx�! I � I I 111111p I g� I I ��Iip I! I1!11� I I I III I I IIIIII B. Additional Hanger Requirements: 1 2" to 24" from flexible connections of fans. 2. 2" to 24" from the outlets or flexible connections of VA V control units or mixing boxes. 1 12" to 36" from the main duct to the first hanger of long branch ducts. 4, 2" to 12" from the ends of all branch ducts and linear diffuser plenums. 5 2" to 24" from fire damper break -away joints. 6Hangers at throat and heal of round or square elbows 48" or greater in width. 3,7 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS: A. Fabricate structural steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or support equipment above floor. B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for piping and equipment, C. Concrete bases for the mechanical equipment indoors or outdoors will be provided by the General Contractor only if shown on the architectural or structural drawings. Otherwise, all bases shall be provided by this Contractor, HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT - 04/29/2015 230529-9 1. Provide rigid anchors for ducts and • ice... immediatelyafter vibration connections to equipment. See also Section 23 05 4& 3,8 PREFABRICATED ROOFTOP EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS: A. Equipment Bases: 1. Equipment Mase shall be solid top equipment base with integral duct curb and stepped cant to match roof insulation. Base shall pitch to match reef pitch and provide level unit installation, 2, Base shall be constructed of reinforced 18 gauge galvanized steel with all welded components, full mitered corners, factory installed 1-1/2 inches thick rigid fiberglass insulation, wood nailer, and galvanized steal counter- flashing. Base shall be shipped as one piece. B. Equipment Rails: 1. Equipment rail shall be constructed of 18 gauge galvanized steel shell, base plate, and counterflahing with factory installed wood nailer, fully mitered end sections„ stepped cant to match roof insulation. Rails shall pitch to match roof pitch and provide level installation. C, All supports shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, .9 METAL FABRICATION. A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for pipe anchors and equipment supports, Install and align fabricated anchors in Indicated locations. B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS 11.1 for procedures of manual shielded metal -arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, methods used in correcting welding work, and the following: HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT - 04/29/2015 230529-10 LMC: MR[ Equipment Replacement I Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Z Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap, 1 Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours at welded surfaces match adjacent contours. 3.10 ADJUSTING: X Hanger Adjustment'. Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. Cut off the bottom of threaded rods so they are no more than one rod diameter below the bottom nut. B. Touch -Up Painting: Immediately after erection of anchors and supports, clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA-1 requirements for touch-up of field -painted surfaces. 1 Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. C. For galvanized surfaces clean welds bolted connections and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. 0010W] HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT - 04/29/2015 230529-11 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 SECTION 23 0540 - VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING & EQUIPMENT FART 1 - GENERAL 1,1 DESCRIPTIO OF WORK: A. Extent of vibration control work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and/or specified in other Division -23 sections. B3 Types of vibration control products specified in this section include the following: Fiberglass Fads and Shapes. 2. Neoprene Fads. 3. Vibration Isolation Springs. All -Directional Anchors, Neoprene Mountings. . Spring Isolators,Free-Standing, 7. Spring Isolators, Vertically -Restrained 6. Seismic Snubbers. J. Equipment Rails. 16. Fabricated Equipment uses. 11. Isolation Hangers. 12. Riser Isolators. 11 Flexible Pipe Connectors. Vibration control..« e, as ... part of factory-fabridated equipmentare requirementsspecified as part of equipment assembly in other Division 23 sections. D. Refer to other Division 23 sections for equipment foundations; hangers, sealants', gaskets; requirements of electrical connections to equipment isolated on vibration control products-, of duct connectionsto air handlingequipment is• d on vibration• •, products. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE: X Manufacturers Qualification : Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of vibration control products, of type, size, and capacity required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. 1. Except as otherwise indicated, obtain vibration control products from single manufacturer, 2. Engage manufacturer to provide technical supervision of installation of support isolation units produced, and of associated inertia bases (if any). 13 SUBMITTALS: X Product Data- Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each type of vibration control product. Submit schedule showing size, type, deflection, and location for each product furnished. 1. Include data for each type and size of unit, showing isolation efficiency, stiffness, natural frequency and transmissibility at lowest operating speed of equipment. LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 . For spring units, show wire size, spring diameter, free height, solid -compression height, operating height, fatigue characteristics, ratio of horizontal to vertical stiffness and bases of spring -rated selection for range of loading weights. •• performance #from manufacturers B. ## Drawings: er's assembly -type shop drawings indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, and method of assembly components. etai ases, an show locationof equipment # r points,r# # "# with equipment shop drawings. MaintenanceSubmitdata #r each type of vibration controlproduct, requirementsInclude this data, product data and shop dravAngs in maintenance manual; in- accordance with of Divisions PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Manufacturer; Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following. 1. Vibration Control products. a. Mason Industries, Inc. b. Peabody noise Control, Inc: 2.2 VIBRATION CONTROL MATERIALS AND SUPPORT UNITS: A. Fiberglass Pads and Shapes: Clara fiber of not more than 0.18 mil diameter, produced by multiple -flame attenuation process, molded with manufacturer's standard fillers and binders through 10 compression cycles at 3 times rated load bearing capacity, to achieve natural frequency of not more than 12 Hertz, in thicknesses and shapes required for use in vibration isolation units. B. Neoprene Pads; Oil -resistant neoprene sheets of manufacturer's standard hardness and cross -ribbed or waffled pattern. I. Mason Industries Type W. VIBRATION N CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING & EQUIPMENT -- 04/29/2015 230540-2 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177,308 1 . Mason Industries Type ND. F, Spring Isolators, �Free-Standing* Except as otherwise indicated, provide vibration isolation spring Type C between top�and bottorn loading plates, and with pad -type Typo B isolator bonded to bottom of bottom loading plate, Include studs or� cups to ensure ceritering of spring on plates. Include leveling bolt with -look nuts and washers, centered in lop plate, arranged for leveling and anchoring supported equipment as indicated. ;�« .. . IRR �" # # •. R .: dti • # # is «. • .. R LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 1773()5 1. Beam depth need not exceed 14 inches provided that deflection and misalignment i rept within manufacturer's acceptable limits. 2. Mason Industries 'Type ICS. L Fabricated Equipment Bases: Where supplementary bases are indicated for use with isolator units to support equipment (base not integral with equipment), ;provide welded rectangular unit, fabricated of structural steel shapes, plates and bars complying with ASTM A36. Provide welded support brackets and anchor base to spring isolator units, Except as otherwise indicated arrange brackets to result in rawest possible mounting height for equipment, but provide minimum of 1 inch. Provide bolt holes in base matching anchor bolt holes in equipment. `l. Provide for auxiliary motor slide base under motor or motor slide rails for adjusting belt tension. Design primary base for bolting of rails or slide base in ;position. 2. Where sizes of base framing members are not indicated, fabricate base with depth of structure not less than 0.10 x. longest span of base, rigidly braced to support equipment without deflections or distortions which would be detrimental to equipment or equipment performance. 3. Beam depth need not exceed 14 inches provided that deflection and misalignment is kept within manufacturer's limits. 4. Mason Industries Type SNF. J. Roof -Curb Isolators: Fabricated frame units sized to match roof curb$, formed with, isolation springs Type�C between extruded aluminum upper And lower sections, vhich are shaped and positioned to preventmetal-totmetalcontact,Provide • s • and waterproof seal between upper and lower extrusions. Include provisions for anchorage of frame unit to roof curb, and for anchorage of equipment to unit. 1. Mason Industries Type CMAB. K Isolation Hangers: Hanger units formed with brackets and including manufacturer's standard compressionisolators of type indicated, Design brackets for 5 times rated loading of units, Fabricate units to accept misalignment of 15 degrees off center in any direction before contacting hanger box, and for use with either rod or strep type members, and including acoustical washers to prevent metal -to -metal contacts. 1. Provide vibration isolation spring Type C with cap in lower pad -type isolator rubber hanger element in bottom, securely retained in unit. 2. Provide neoprene element, with minimum deflection of 0 35inc , securely retained in hanger box. Mason • •. L. Riser Isolators- Suspend risers from, or support risers by, spring hangers Type ND or spring isolators Type F. Wherever possible, anchor risers at central point with'resilient anchors, Type D. Provide hanger or mouating deflection of 035 inches except in those expansion locations where- additional deflection is required to limit deflection or load changes to +25 percent of initial deflection. Provide sliding guides held in position by resilient anchors, local - between anchor points and end of piping, spaced as indicated. I M. Flexible Pipe • • VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING & EQUIPMENT — 04/29/2015 230540-4 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 1 For non-ferrous piping, provide bronze hose covered with bronze wire braid with copper tube ends or bronze flanged ends, braze -welded to hose. 2, Mason Industries Type BBF, 1) Mason Industries Type BSS, I I ZZI 5 ON aggs all 31 INSPECTION: A. Examine areas and conditions under which vibration control units are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Owner or his representative, 12 PERFORMANCE OF ISOLATORS: A. General: Comply with minimum static deflections recommended by ASHRAE, for selection and application of vibration isolation materials and units as indicated. B. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's recommendations for selection and application of vibration isolation materials and units to achieve minimum static deflection and displacement requirements, 33 APPLICATIONS: A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, select vibration control products in accordance with ASH RAE Handbook, 1991 HVAC Applications Volume, Chapter 42 "Sound and Vibration Control", Table 34, B. Piping: For piping connected to equipment mounted on vibration control products, install isolation hangers Type N, as indicated, and for first 3 points of support for pipe sizes 4 inches and less, for first 4 points of support for pipe sizes 6 inches through 8 inches, and for first 6 points of support for pipe sizes 10 inches and over. 1 Where applicable, apply restraint system in accordance with SMACNA GFSR 1982, A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation and load application to vibration isolation materials and units. Adjust to ensure that units do not exceed rated operating deflections or bottom out under loading, and are not short- circuited by other contacts or bearing points. Remove space blocks and similar devices (if any) intended for temporary protection against overloading during installation, & Install units between substrate and equipment as required for secure operation and to prevent displacement by • forces, C. Adjust leveling devices as required to distribute loading uniformly onto isolators. Shim units as required where substrate is not level. VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING & EQUIPMENT -- 04/29/2015 230540-5 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177308 D, For air handling equipment, install thrust restraints as indicated, and also wherever thrust exceeds 10 percent of equipment weight. F. Weld riser isolator units in place as required to prevent displacement from loading and operations. G, Flexible Pipe Connectors: Install on equipment side of shutoff valves, horizontally and parall" to equipment shafts wherever possible. I 106��*WA INIM1111OHN INQ An RIC K t HoM KY1103 #:art IN MU I 16 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: X Clean each vibration control unit, and verify that each is working freely, and that there is no dirt or debris in immediate vicinity of unit that could possibly short- circuit unit isolation. 31 DEFLECTION MEASUREMENTS: A. Upon completion of vibration isolation work, prepare report showing measured equipment deflections theoretical floor deflection and isolation efficiency for each major item of equipment. END OF SECTION 23 0540 VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING & EQUIPMENT — 04/29/2015 230540-6 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.358 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of identification devices of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Codes and Standards: 1. Existing Building Standards:. Comply with the existing lettering size, length of color field, colors and identification method as presently exists in the existing building unless other wise indicated. 1.2 SUBMITTALS. A. Product Data. Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each identification material and device required. B. Schedules. Submit valve schedule for each piping system, typewritten and reproduced on 8-1/2" x 11" bond paper, Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on tag), location of valve (room or space), size of valve, and variations for identification (if any) Only tag valves which are intended for emergency shut-off and similar special uses, such as valve to Isolate individual system risers, Individual floor branches or building system shut off valves. In addition to mounted copies, furnish extra copies for Maintenance Manuals as specified in Division 23, PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturer:' Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 1, Allen Systems, Inc. . Brady (W.H.) Co.; Sipnmark'Div. . Brimar Industries, Inc: . Industrial Safety Supply Co,, Inc. Seton Name Plate Corp. 8. PVC Specialties 7. Marking Systems, Inc. (MSI) 22 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS: A, General Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application as referenced in other Division -23 sections. Where more than single type is specified for application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single selection for each product category. IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT �- 04/29/2015 230553-1 �WKMWI 23 PAINTED IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS: X Stencils: Standard fiberboard stencils, prepared for required applications with letter sizes generally complying with recommendations of ANSI A13.1 for piping or to match existing size in existing building, but not less than 1-1/4" high letters for ductwork and not less than 3/4" high letters for access door signs and similar operational instructions. B. Stencil Paint: Standard exterior type stenciling enamel; black, except as otherwise indicated; either brushing grade or pressurized spray -can form and grade. C. Identification Paint: Standard identification enamel of colors indicated or, if not otherwise indicated comply with ANSI A13.1 for calors or to match existing building standard identification. .4 PLASTIC PIPE MARKERS: 1. Steel spring or non-metallic fasteners. 2. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color -ceded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 1-1/2inches wide, full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 3inches. 3. -Strapped-to-pipe (or insulation) application of semi- rigid type, with manufacturer's standard stainless steel bands. F. Lettering: Comply with piping system nomenclature as specified, scheduled, shown, or to match existing building lettering nomenclature system and abbreviate only as necessary for each application length. F. Arrows: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, either integrally with piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as separate unit of plastic. IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING ANIS EQUIPMENT -, 04/23/2015 230553-2 2.5 PLASTIC DUCT MARKERS: A. General- Provide manufacturers standard laminated plastic, duct markers. B. For hazardous exhausts, use colors and designs recommended by ANSI Al 3. 1, C. Nomenclature: Include the following: I Direction of air flow. 2. Duct service (supply, return, exhaust, etc.) 2.6 PLASTIC TAPE: X General: Provide manufacturer's standard color -coded pressure -sensitive (self-adhesive) vinyl tape, not less than 3 mils thick, B. Width: Provide 1-1/2inches wide tape markers on pipes with outside diameters (including insulation, if any) of less than in hes, 2-1/2inches wide tape for larger pipes. C. Color: Comply with ANSI A 13, 1, except where another color selection is indicated. 21 VALVE TAGS: A. Brass Valve Tags: Provide 19 -gage polished brass valve tags with stamp -engraved piping system abbreviation in 1/flinch high letters and sequenced valve numbers 1/2inch high, and with 5/32inch hole for fastener. 1. Provide 1-1/2inch diameter tags, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Fill tag engraving with black enamel. B. Valve Tag Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass chain (wire link or beaded type), and solid brass S- hooks of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags to valves, and manufactured specifically for that purpose. C , Access Panel Markers. Provide manufacturer's standard 1/16 inch thick engraved plastic laminate access panel markers, with abbreviations and numbers corresponding to concealed valve. Include 1/8 inch center hole to allow attachment. 2.8 VALVE SCHEDULE FRAMES: A. General: For each page of valve schedule, provide glazed display frame, with screws for removable mounting on masonry walls. Provide frames of finished hardwood or extruded aluminum, with non -glare type sheet glass. 1111 �g 111 11, 111111 im��Iligi�ipii�1111 jj�ri # LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 C. Fasteners: Self -tapping stainless steel screws, except contact -type permanent adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate. 2.10 PLASTICIZED TAGS: A. General: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed or partially pre-printed accident -prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matt fi Pill I I 1111111111111111, 1111111 III== 111hillilif 11:1111 ::i 111 10115011. A KI �:1111 Ilk :1 13 PIPING SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION: A. General: Install pipe markers of the following type on each system indicated to receive identification, and include arrows to show normal direction of flow. Existing building identification shall match the existing method which exists in the building. R Plastic pipe markers, with application system as indicated under "Materials" i LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177308 I Main building systems control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units such as gas outlets. 2Room thermostats, except gun tag labels are acceptable for room thermostats. 3. Pumps, compressors and similar motor -driven units. 4. Fans and blowers. 5. Air terminal units, 6. Water treatment systems and similar equipment. B. Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4 inch high lettering for name of unit. C. Text of Signs: In addition to the identified unit, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations. 3,6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A. Adjusting: Relocate any mechanical identification device which has become visually blocked by work of this division or other divisions. B. Cleaning: Clean face of identification devices, and glass frames of valve charts, END OF SECTION 23 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT — 04/29/2015 230553-6 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.359 SECTION 23 0593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR MVAC PART 1 _ GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION IPTION OF WORK: A, This section covers testing and balancing of environmental systems described herein and specified under Division 23. ; The testing and balancing of all environmental systems shall be the responsibility of one "Testing, Balancing and Adjusting firm. 1. "Test, adjust and balance the following mechanical systems and the mechanical equipment associated with these systems: a. GeneralSystems and Equipment Procedures, 1)Supply/Return Air Systems 2) GeneralExhaust/Supply Fans 3) Air Handling Units 4) General Exhaust Systems C. Hydronic Systems and Equipment 1) Heating/Chilled water systems 2) Hydronic coils d, Plumbing 1) general e. Electrical Components 1) Manual and magnetic starters ) Variable frequency drives f, Control Systems and Equipment 1) General g. Life Safety Systems and Equipment 1) Smoke pressurization, exhaust, and evacuation modes 2) Fire/smoke dampers and detection systems h. Steam Systems and Equipment 1)' general 2) Humidification systems and equipment 1.2 QUALIFICATIONS t7H CONTRACTOR: CTOR: A. The Mechanical Contractor shall procure the services of an independent testing and balancing agency specializing in the testing, adjusting and balancing of environmental systems to perform the above mentioned work, An independent contractor is defined as an organization TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 04/29/2015 '230593-1 LMC. MRI Equipment Replacement 177.303 balancingthat is not engaged in engineering design or is not a division of a mechanical contractor entity, which installs mechanical systems. BThe actual fieldwork shall be performed by qualified technicians who are currently certi ted by the Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Bureau (TABB), the National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB), or the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) certification agencies. C� The Testing & Balancing �Contractor shall have a minimum of three years experience in testing and volumeD, The Test & Balance Contractor shall have previous experience in testing and balancing variable air volume hospital air side systems in the last two years. Qualification submissio must include a detailed resume describing past project experience in hospital variable air of projects, t R peoples' phone numbers • address of 1.3 APPROVAL OF CONTRACTOR: followingA, The firms are preferred contractors to complete the work. Any Testing and submitBalancing firm desiring to offer their services for thisVork�and who are not listed below, shall qualifications to the Engineer,not s g days before•• date. Approval or disapproval will be given on «•.:eand this actionbe given wetting prior to bidding the work. 1. Complete Mechanical Balancing ; B, Firms who are not listed, or who have not received prior approval shall not be approved t complete work on this project. 1.4 CODES AND STANDARDS: A. ASH E: ASHRAE Handbook, Applications Volume, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Chapter. B. EBB: "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems." 1.5 PRELIMINARY SUBMITTALS: A. Within ten (10) days of award of the contact the Mechanical Contractor shall submit the name of the Test and Balance Contractor who will be performing the work. The submittal shall include a complete list of all technicians who will be performing the field work and include a photocopy of their current certification by either NEBB, AABC, or TABB certification agencies. Only those technicians included in the submittal shall perform the work. Any personnel or staff used to perform the work without prior approval of the Engineer, who are not included in the submittal, shall be grounds for rejecting the test and balance report and the project in whole. B. Meet all requirements of Section 230500 as applicable. C. Submit a list of all instrumentation to be used on an individual project and include calibration dates. Submit calibration curves. if more than one instrument of a similar type is used, a comparison of individual readings should be made. The variation between instrument readings should not exceed plus or minus 5%. TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR MVAC -- 04/29/201;5 230593-2 LINK: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 1.6 FINAL REPORTS A. Refer to Division 1 for supplemental requirements. B. The Testing and Balancing Contractor shall submit six (C) bound copies of the final testing and balancing report at least fifteen (15) calendar days prior to substantial completion, unless noted otherwise in Division I . Report contents shall be per D'art 3 of this Section. C. Meet all requirements of Section 23 05 gg as applicable, C. If more than two reports are made by the , contractor, the Owner reserves the right to charge the contractor for subsequent reviews by their consultants.. Such extra fees shall be deducted from payments by the Owner to the contractor, 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING: A. Notify Contractor/Engineer/Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper completion of the test and balance work. Provide the Contractor/Arch tectlEngineerwith a copy of the notification. B. Prepare a project schedule. Schedule shell indicate critical path of the balancing process and shall incorporate both requirements of other contractors necessary to meet test and balance commitments and process flow of test and balance work. Coordinate with general and mechanical contractors and insert critical steps into project master schedule. PART - PRODU TS 2.1 BELTS, SLEEVES, IMPELLERS: A. Refer to specific equipment sections and Section 23 05 gg for additional requirements. B. The resting & Balancing Contractor shall coordinate with the Mechanical Contractor to supply correctly sized give belts and sheeves. Impellers shall be trimmed or replaced by the mechanical contractor and shall be correctly re -sized and coordinated by the Test and Balancing Contractor per the hydropic systems and equipment portion of this section. C. The Test & Balance Contractor shell determine the fan belt and sheave replacement necessary for final balance condition for specified air quantity when the VFD is operating in the by-pass mode for final field conditions, without placing the motor over its nameplate amp rating. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES: A • and balancing shall notbegin working ord* • the followingre* • • ! .•*.determined suitable for work. Preliminary*' ♦ is Balancing Contractor requirements shallbe ascertained prior • the commencement of work through a review of the project plans and specificafions�. addition 'Visual observations at the site during construction shall be made to determin the location ion. .i. «+k balancing devices,arebeing installed properly, an accessible location for the need. Report in writing any deficiencies to the Engineel �' 0.F , _ � � ♦ � � • 1 � d: ! � - � � 177.308 G. Check keyway and setscrew tightness. Report any loose screws and notify Mechanical Contractor prior to equipment balancing. K Record and include in report all equipment nameplate data. 1. Verify that all equipment safety and operating controls are in place, tested, adjusted and set prior to balancing. 1 Verify that manufacturer start-up has occurred per specification prior to balancing. TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC — 04/2912015 230593-4 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177 30 3.4 AIR SIDE SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT PROCEDURES: A. In addition to the procedures identified under each specific heading below, provide general data required by 3.3 above. •rr r - • � r•ra _rs+e r r ,. r • •• r • : r_ ra :.r „r rr r r - � r • - .:. - r -w►s, • :..• err n• r r • - • � • r r a- r^•r r.r r r -rr- r .rr r a 3. Provide full pilot traverses at each air terminal or duct coil. For VAV systems, perforin these at zone maximum air condition. Balance and report air quantities. 4. Deport design air device inlet or outlet size, actual inlet or outlet size, design and actual velocity through the orifice, for each `terminal in the system. Balance and report the above measurements in all system operational/modes. a. Minimum outside air and 100% outside air economizer mode. r one r o• system diversity condition. c. Unoccupied mode. d. VFD bypass made and full system demand. e. general Exhaust/Supply Fans: D. Adjust CFM to system requirements. For belt drive include sheave and belt exchange to deliver airflow within limits of installed motor horsepower and mechanical stress limits of the fan. Determine the limiting fan tip speed before increasing RPM. Final fan speed setting shall allow for filter loading (as applicable) and shall establish proper duct pressures for operation of zone CFM regulators. For direct drive with speed taps: Set fan speed on tap which most closely approaches design CFM by adjusting the speed control After adjustment, check fans ability to re -start after powering down. Increase setting if required for proper starting. 1. Measure and report static pressures upstream and downstream of all fans. 2: Measure and report fan RPM. 3. Report design fan inlet or outlet size; actual inlet or outlet size, design and actual velocity through the orifice. E. General Exhaust Systems: TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC — 4/23/201 230593-5 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177:3118 1. Balance and report exhaust grille quantities. Report objectionable noise. Z Provide full pilot traverses at each individual exhaust riser and at each exhaust fan. Balance # report. 1) Door closed 2) moor open ) In labs With hoods or bio -safety cabinets: a) Hood sash complete open b); Herod sash closed c) Hood sash partially open 4) Thermostat set to its minimum set paint 5) Thermostat set to its maximum set paint ) If the correct pressure relationships cannot be demonstrated for particular room, the roam shall be retested after the problem has been corrected. .5 HYUR NIC SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT: X Heating/chilled Water systems. { 3. For 3 -way valve terminals/heat exchangers, set bypass flow to equal coil ow. 4Sample chilled and heating water and reporton freeze and burst temperatures of the glycol water solution. Report glycol percentage. TESTING, ADJUSTING ANIS BALANCING FOR HVAC -- 04/29/2015 230593-6 t S. Hydronic Coils: 1. Balance, measure and report inlet and outlet air temperatures for cooling and/or heating design air quantities, 2. Balance, measure and report coil water flow, inlet and outlet water pressure and temperature. Evaporative• • . report inlet and outlet wet bulb and dry bulb temperature. Measure and report inlet anoutlet aw 4, Calculate and report face velocities across chilled water and evaporative cooling coils. 3,6 PLUMBING SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT: A. General: 1. Check, adjust and settemperature control devices to [1 10 ] domestic hot water temperature and as Indicated on drawings. 2, Adjust pressure -reducing stations, report downstream system static pressure. 3. Verify proper location and operation of ASMS pressure and temperature relief valves. Measure and report residual pressure at full flow at most remote plumbing fixture; requiring highest operating pressure (usually flush valve water closets). Verify that most remote fixture has hot water available semi -instantaneously with recirculation system operating, Deport.. S. Refer to plumbing drawings for location of all balancing valves serving the Domestic loot Water Circulation (HWC) System and Domestic Hot Water Circulation Pumps. Adjust balancing valves to indicate flow rate. Deport flow rate for all balance valves. Measure, adjust and report flow rate for each pump, 3. " STEAM'SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT: A. General: 1. Check steam traps for correct operation with a pyrometer. 2. Check and report all steam pressures downstream of pressure reducing stations. 3. Remove, inspect and clean all stem strainers. 4. Record steam pressures upstream and downstream of all major equipment such as boilers, steam coils and heat exchangers. S. humidification Systems and Equipment: 1. Measure and report steady state relative humidity for spaces. . Measure and report humidifier outlet relative humidities, 3. Steam Dispersion Grids: a, Measure and report entering and leaving air temperature, and leaving relative humidity.. b. See steam portion of the section. C. Electric Steam Generators. 7'- r -*• ss• • COMPONENTS18 ELECTRICAL A. Manual and Magnetic Starters: Motor Control Center'Magnetic Starters: Check for correct sizing. Notify Electrical Contractor of discrepancies. 3. Two -speed Starters: In addition to the above, set time delay between changes of speeds for proper operation. a. Verify windings of motor and starter is compatible;prior to starting any equipment. B. Variable frequency drives. 1. Coordinate balance process with equipment manufacturer start-up representative. 2. Record nameplate data. 3. Record motor overload setting. . Record full lewd amps. .g CONTROL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT. A. General 1. Operate all temperature control systems with the temperature control contractor's representative for proper sequence of operation. Be responsibly: for calibration of flow measurement devices used as input to the temperature control system. All air system flow measurement stations including VAV terminals shall be calibrated against a Pitot tube traverse or air diffuser capture hood. Balancing contractor shall assure accuracy of all flow measurement devices or shall report their failure to be accurate. , Work with the Controls Contactor to set minimum outside air damper positions. 3. Work with the Controls Contractor to optimize VAV duct static pressure, VFD pump ydron c system pressure differential and building pressure. 3.10 LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT: A. Fire/ Smoke Dampers and Detection Systems, 1. Verify haat each fire/smoke damper closes when the associated duct or space detector is tripped. Verify that air handlers shut down and outside air dampers close as dictated by the control, sequence. 2. Verify that air supply units shut down when smoke is detected by the associated duct detector.: Verify that outside air dampen and system fire/smoke dampers close as dictated by the control sequence. TESTING, ADJUSTING ANIS BALANCING FOR HVAC - 04/29/2015 230593-8 LMC; MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 3. Report any detectors or dampers that are malfunctioning, Report any discrepancies from the control sequence. 3.11 SOUND AND VIBRATION: X Sound Inspection and Testing - 1 Prior to sound testing, all equipment that can potentially impact sound testing shall be put into operation. Examples include fan coil units, humidifiers, air handling units, and equipment in adjacent mechanical spaces. VFD systems shall be placed at 80% of full speed. Z —Prior to sound testing the mechanical test and balance of all systems shall be completed, 3. Report audible tonal characteristics such as whine, whistle, hum or rumble, Also report time varying sound levels or beats induced from aerodynamic instability, perform this for all BMW= 1. Prior to vibration testing, all equipment shall be put into operation. On variable spe equipment, testing shall occur at low, medium and high speeds. I 2. Prior to vibration testing, the mechanical test and balance of all systems shall be completed, 3. Report excessive vibrations from any equipment, Inspect upstream and downstream duct and piping systems and report excessive vibrations, X The Testing and Balancing Contractor shall submit six (6) bound copies of the final testing and balancing report at least fifteen (15) calendar days prior to the Mechanical Contractor's -• for final inspection. 13 A complete reduced set of mechanical contract drawings (showing each system) shall be included in the report with all equipment, flow measuring devices, terminals (outlets, inlets, coils, fan coil units, schedules, etc.) clearly marked and all equipment designated. The test and balance contractor can obtain drawing files from Cator, •. «. & Associates for development of these drawings. C. Data shall be reported per Part 3 of this Section on standard NEBB forms, Generate custom forms that contain the information in this Section when a standard NEBB form does not exist for a piece of equipment. All NEBB forms shall be fully filled out for this report, When additional information is required by this Section, it shall be provided, D. The report shall include a list of all equipment used in the testing and balancing work. EReport systems for excessive sound and vibration per the sound and vibration I inspection and testing portions of this specification. F. Substantial completion of this project will not take place until a satisfactory report is received. The Testing & Balancing Contractor shall respond and correct all deficiencies within seven (7) days of receiving the Engineer's written review of the balancing report. Failure to comply will TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC — 04/29/2015 230593-9 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.393 result in holding retainage of the final payment until all items have been corrected to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 3.13 GUARANTEE OF WORK: A. The Testing & Balancing Contractor shall guarantee the accuracy of the tests and balance for a period of 90 days from date of final acceptance of the test and balance report. During this period, the Testing & Balancing Contractor shall make personnel available at no cost to the Owner to correct deficiencies that may became apparent in the system balance. END OF SECTION 23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC -- 04/29/2015 230593-1 • SECTION 23 0700 . MVAC INSULATION PART" 1 - GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer's Qualifications Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of mechanical insulation products and systems, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 5 years successful installation experience on projects with mechanical insulations similar to that required for this project. C. Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets, coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives) with flame -spread index of 25 or less, and smoke -developed index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E 04 (NFPA 255) method, In addition, the products, when tested, shall not drip flame particles, and flame shall not be progressiva. Provide Underwriters Laboratories Inc„ label or listing, or satisfactory certified test report from an approved testing laboratory to prove that fire hazard ratings for materials proposed for use do not exceed those specified. D. Codes and Standards: 1, International Energy Conservation Code 2006/2009 1.2SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each type of mechanical insulation. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's product number, k -value, thickness, density, and furnished accessories for each mechanical system requiring insulation. Submit detail product` information and installation information for all jacketing systems specified in this section. 1:3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to site in containers with manufacturer's stamp or label, affixed showing fire hazard indexes of products. S. Protect insulation against dirt; water; and chemical and mechanical damage. Do not install damaged or wet insulation; remove from project site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the following: 1. MechanicalInsulation: a Johns Manville Corp. b. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp. C. Knauf Fiber Glass d. Menson e. CertainTeed f. Einsulation HVAC INSULATION -- 04/29/2015 230700-1 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177,305 g. Armacel h. Pittsburgh Corning Corp. i. PABCO, Inc, j. Rubatex Corp. k, Thermal Ceramics L Thermal Structures Z Jacketing & Covering Products. - a. Childers b� Ceel-Co c, Zestop d. Alpha Associates, Inc, 3. Sound Lagging/insulation a. Soundseal b, Vibro-Acoustics C. Schuller d. Owens -Coming e. Certainteed Z2 PIPING INSULATION MATERIALS: # 3, PVC Jacketing: UV resistant PVC, 30 mil thick, flame spread 25, smoke developed 50, factory cut and curled to fit O.D. of insulated pipe. Solvent weld adhesive for sealing joints and seams. D� Staples, Bands, Wires, and Cement: As recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. HVAC INSULATION -® 04/29/2015 230700-2 • # E. Equipment Insulation Compounds: Provide adhesives, cements, sealers, mastics and protective finishes as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated� SOUND #► #(dB) REOUENCY (Hz) E. All jackets shall be field measured by manufacture's representative. Manufacturer shall guarantee jacket will fit snugly without farce, folder, bending or stretching. MVAC INSULATION - 04/29/201 230700-4 PAT" 3 - EXECUTION .1 INSPECTION. K Examine areas and conditions under which mechanical insulation is to be installed, Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. B. Workmanship shall be first class and of the highest quality, poor installation or bad appearance as determined by the engineer shall be due cause to reject the entire project in whole and retainage will be withheld until corrective action is completed to the engineer's satisfaction, 3.2 PLUMBING PIPING A. Insulation Omitted: Omit insulation on chrome -plated exposed piping (except for handicapped fixtures), air chambers, unions, balance cocks, flow regulators, drain lines from water coolers, drainage piping located in crawl spaces or tunnels, fire protection piping, and pre -insulated equipment. S, Cold Piping: 1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following cold plumbing piping systems: a, Potable and non -potable cold water piping: b. Interior above -ground horizontal storm water piping including elbow up & clown. C. Roof drain bowls and roof drain leader to horizontal piping. d. Overflow roof drain bowls and first 10 feet of overflow piping. 2. Insulate each piping system specified above with the following types and thicknesses of insulation: o. Above ground Inside wilding Fiberglass,- 1/2 inch thickness. C. .got Piping. 1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following hot plumbing piping systems: a Potable hot water and tempered piping. b. Potable hot water and tempered recirculating piping, 2. Insulate each piping system specified above with the following types and thicknesses of insulation; a. Fiberglass: (IECC) 1/2 inch for runouts to individual fixtures 8'-0" or less in length, 1 inch thick for all pipe sues. b Sound Insulation: Insulate as shown on drawings, Provide 2 inch flexible fiberglass/vinyl sound insulation. Install with foil tape at all seams. Provide plastic wire ties every 18 inches around piping to fully fasten insulation to piping. Obtain a copy of manufacturer's installation requirements, .seep copy on site, and follow all instructions. HVAC INSULATION 04/2912015 230700-5 insideA. Insulation Omitted: Omit insulation on steam condensate piping between steam trap and union; and on hot piping unions, flexible connections, and expansion joints. Insulation may be omitted inside of cabinet unit heaters, convectors and fan coils for hot piping. Cold piping insulation fan coil.• s-•rs ded piping is locatedo drain pan. Hotand cold • a • routed inside air handier units shall be insulated.Omit insulationon heating water strainers operating below 200 degrees B. Heat Traced Piping: 1,. Application Requirements: Insulate the following sub -zero HVAC piping systems: . Piping exposed to freezing which is specified with heat cable. 2. Insulate each piping system specified above with the following types and thicknesses of insulation: a. Fiberglass: 1-112 inch thio for pipe sues up to and including 1-112, 2 inch thio for, pipe sues over 2 inches. b, Above Ground, Exterior - Cellular Mass: 1-1/2 inches thick for pipe sues up to and including 2 inch, 2 inches thick for pipe sizes over 2 inches. C. Cold Piping (40 degrees F (4.4 degrees C) to ambient) 1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following cold HVAC piping systems: a, Chilled water supply and return piping. b. Cold condensate drain piping. 2. Insulate each piping system specified above with the hallowing types and thicknesses of insulation: a. Fiberglass: (IFCC): 1 inch thick for pipe sues up to and including 1-112 inch, 1-112 inch thick for pipe sues over 1-112 inch, b. Exterior, Above Ground - Cellular Class: (IFCC): 1 inch thick for pipe sues up to and including 1-112 inch, 1-112 inch thick for pipe sizes over 1-112 inch. D, Heating System Piping (to 200 degrees F (90 degrees C)): 1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following heating piping systems: a. Hot water supply and return piping. b. Low pressure steam vent & relief piping. Insulate each piping system specified above with the following type and thicknesses of insulation: a: Fiberglass: (I CC): 1 inch thick for pipe sues up to and including 1-112", 2 inch thick for pipe over 1-112 inches, b, Above Ground Exterior - Cellular glass: 2 inches thick for pipe sues up to and including 8 inches, -112 inch thick for pipe sizes over 8". .MVAC INSULATION — 041291201 230700-6 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 E. Heating System Piping (to 200 degrees F (90 degrees C))-. 1 Application Requirements: Insulate the following heating piping systems: a; Hot water supply and return piping. b. Hot gas refrigerant piping (interior, exposed, less than 7feet-6inches above floor). C, Hot gas bypass refrigerant piping (interior, exposed, less than 7feet-6inces above floor). d: Low pressure steam vent & relief piping. e, Heat recovery water, f. Heat reclaim coil header, g, Boiler feedwater piping, h, Blowdown piping, Z Insulate each piping system specified above with the following type and thicknesses of insulation: a. Fiberglass: (ICC): I inch thick for pipe sizes up to and including 1-1/2", 2 inch thick for pipe over 1-1/2 inches. (ASHRAE): 1 inch thick for pipe sizes below 4", 1- 1/2 inch thick for pipe sizes 4 inch and above. b. Above Ground Exterior'- Cellular Glass: 2 inches thick for pipe sizes up to and including 8 inches, 2-1/2 inch thick for pipe sizes over 8". C. Underground Piping to Individual Terminal Units - Flexible Elastomeric: 1/2 inch thick up to 2 inch pipe size, F. High Temperature, Low Pressure Piping (200 to 250 degrees F (90 to 120 degrees C))-. I Application Requirements: Insulate the following hot low pressure HVAC piping. a. HVAC high temperature (2(t0 to 250 degrees) hot water supply and return piping. b. Low pressure steam (up to 15 psi). C. Steam condensate piping (all pressures). 2. Insulate each piping system specified above with the following type and thicknesses of insulation: a. Fiberglass(IECC): 1-1/2 inch thick for pipe sizes up to and including 1-1/2 inch, 3 inch thick for pipe siz6s�2 inchand over. (ASHRAE)1_1�2 inch thick for pipe sizes less than 1-1/2 inch, 2 inch thick for pipe sizes 1-1/2 inches ..• above. b. Above Ground, Exterior - Cellular Glass: 2-1/2 inches I" for pipe sizes up to and including 2 inch, 3 inch thick for pipe size 2-1/2 inches through 6 inches, and 5 inches thick for' pipe sizes over 8 inches, � 3.4 DUCTWORK SYSTEM INSULATION: X Insulation Omitted: Do not insulate fibrous glass ductwork, or lined ductwork. B, Application Requirements: Insulate the following ductwork: 1. HVAC supply ductwork between fan discharge, or HVAC unit discharge, and room terminal outlet unless ductwork is specified to be lined. 2. HVAC return ductwork in unconditioned spaces or exterior-, except omit insulation when ductwork is specified to be lined. HVAC INSULATION — 04/29/2015 230700-7 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 1 HVAC plenums and unit housings not pre -insulated at factory or lined. 4. rigid oval or round supply air ductwork. C. Insulate each ductwork system specified above with the following types and thicknesses of insulation: APPLICATION TYPE, THICKNESS RIGID/ FIBERGLASS FLEXIBLE FLEXIBLE see notes 1&2 FIBERGLASS ELASTOMERIC**, ,11 Interior; concealed; cold, h V min. up to 2" as 1-1/2" 1" temperature supply duct required to cover joints & reinforcements Interior„ exposed within conditioned None Not Allowed bane finished spaces; cold, hot, or dual 1„ min, up to 2" as temperature supply duct required to cover joints & reinforcements Interior; exposed within mechanical, V min. up to " as Not Allowed 1,a min. up to 2" as electrical, storage; or other service required to cover joints required to cover areas, cold, hot, or dual temperature and reinforcements joints and duct reinforcements with white finish. Provide white finish coat. Exterior; hot or dual temperature Not Allowed Not Allowed 2"with metal jacket or duct, all return duct 2" self -jacketed Edit Note #1: Use semi-rigid fiberglass insulation for round or flat oval duct 3.5 EQUIPMENT INSULATION: A. loot Equipment (Above Ambient Temperature): Application Requirements: Insulate the following hot equipment:. a. Condensate pumps. 2. Insulate each item of equipment specified above with the following types and thicknesses of insulation: a. Fiberglass: 2 inch thick, except 3 inch thick for low- pressure boilers and steam -jacketed heat exchangers, leo not use for equipment above 480 degrees F (232 degrees ). 16 INSTALLATION OF PIPING INSULATION: A. General: Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves its intended purpose: HVAC INSULATION — 04/29/2015 230700-8 •# B. Install insulation on pipe systems subsequent to installation of heat tracing, testing, a acceptance of tests. 'i C. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces, Insulate each continuous run of piping with full-length units of insulation, with single cut piece to complete run. Do not use cut pieces or scraps abutting each other. D. Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulating. Buff insulation joints firmly together to ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered. F. Maintain integrity of vapor -barrier jackets on cold pipe insulation, and protect to prevent puncture or other damage, 1. Do not use staples or tacks on vapor barrier jackets. 2. Seal vapor barrier penetrations with vapor barrier finish recommended by the manufacturer. 1 Seat fitting covers with PVC tape. 4. Cover all unions, check valves, and other in-line devices. Mark outer covering with indelible marker to identify item covered. F. Neatly bevel and seal insulation at all exposed edges. G, Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system with equivalent thickness and composition of insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded, precut or job fabricated units (at Installer's option) except where specific form or type is indicated, R Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar piping penetrations, except where otherwise indicated. 1. See equipment insulation for removable insulation on accessible piping components, J. See Section 23 05 29 for insulation inserts and shields. Butt pipe insulation against pipe hanger insulation inserts. For all piping apply wet coat of vapor barrier lap cement on butt joints and seal all joints and seams with 3 inch wide vapor barrier tape or band, K, Flexible Elastomeric Piping Insulation: I Install unslit, by slipping over piping prior to joining, or install pre -insulated softcopper tubing. 2. Seal butt ends with adhesive, L. Piping Exposed to Weather: Protect outdoor insulation from weather by aluminum rubber jacketing. 1 Jacketing shall be secured by 1/2 inch wide stainless steel bands located on 24 inch centers. All joints and seams shall be caulked with clear silicone, Locate all longitudinal seams at the bottom of piping to minimize joint exposure to weather. Contractor may propose pre -fabricated sealing and fastening systems, submit samples and product data for approval. HVAC INSULATION — 04/2912015 230700-9 2. On flexible elastomeric pipe insulation apply two (2) coats of manufacturees approved U,V. resistant finish, 33 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK INSULATION: X General: Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves its intended purpose. B. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. C. Clean and dry ductwork prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered. D. Maintain integrity of vapor -barrier on ductwork insulation, and protect it to prevent puncture and other damage. 1. Avoid the use of staples on vapor barrier jackets. 2. Seat vapor barrier penetrations with vapor barrier tape recommended by the manufacturer. EExtend ductwork insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar ductwork penetrations, except where otherwise indicated, H. Comer Angles, Except for oven and hood exhaust duct insulation, instal comer ang es on a, external corners of insulation on ductwork in exposed finished spaces fore covering with Jacketinq� 18 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT INSULATION: A. General: Install equipment thermal insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's writte instructions, and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation sery intended purpose. Complete finishes as specified. B, Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces and on clean and dry surfaces, Red poorly fitted jo00 not use mastic or joint seater as filter for gaping joints and excessive voi resulting from poor workmanship. HVAC INSULATION — 04/29/2015 230700-10 CMaintain integrity of vapor -barrier on equipment insulation and protect it to prevent puncture a other damage. `1 11111 Ili IMIN ENTIMEN1111111=1 11 EApply insulation using staggered joint method and double layer construction. Apply each layer of insulation separately. F Insulation board shall be cut and mitered to fit the contour of the vessel and shall be applied with edges tightly buffed, joints staggered where two or more layers are necessary (due to available thickness of insulation) and secured with 1/2 inch x 0.015inch galvanized steel bands on 12 inch centers or with weld pins or stick clips with washers on 18inch centers. WINOWN A # 4001 g4or, I.M01 S I AMI nall ApAtLm4w 11W IRMO IIII11001 - G. Do not insulate hot equipment ASME stamp and manufacturer's nameplate. Provide neatly beveled edge at interruptions of insulation. H. Hot equipment requiring access: Provide removable section of insulation, fabricated from rigid fiberglass insulation board, adhered to an aluminum jacket, and fastened to the equipment with stainless steel bands. At Contractors option, provide pre -fabricated, canvas jacketed, lace -up insulation blankets. oil I Steam condensate receivers and pumps. 2Steam Strainers. 1 Steam pressure regulators. 1, Equipment Exposed to Weather: Protect outdoor insulation from weather by installation of aluminum jacketing, as recommended by manufacturer. On flexible elastomeric insulation, apply two (2) coats of manufacturer's approved UY, resistant finish. Fk Repair damaged sections of existing mechanical insulation, both previously damaged or damaged during this construction period, Use insulation, install new jacket lapping and sealed over existing. 3,10 PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT: A. Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with vapor barrier damage and moisture saturated units, B. Protection: Insulation Installer shall advise Contractor of required protection for insulation work during remainder of construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration. HVAC INSULATION — 04/29/2015 230700-11 LMC- MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 SECTION 23 0993 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK X Sequence of operation is hereby defined as the manner and method by which controls function, Requirements for each type of control system operation are specified in this section. B. Operating equipment, devices, and system components required for control systems are specified in other Division 23 Controls' sections of these specifications, PART 2 -PRODUCTS 21 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS: X Provide control systems consisting of thermostats, control valves, dampers, operators, indicating devices, interface equipment, and other apparatus required to operate mechanical system and to perform functions specified. & Provide necessary materials and field work necessary toconnect control components factor] supplied as part of equipment controlled, unless specified otherwise, Generally, self -contain valves, filter gauges, liquid level controllers and similar instruments, are not to be installed under this section. C. Unless specified otherwise, provide fully proportional components. D. Provide all necessary relays and signal boosters to make the system a full and operable system as required by the sequence of operation, A. Each smoke or smoke/fire damper shall be individually controlled by a duct smoke detector, Power wiring to each damper shall be hardwired through the auxiliary contacts of the duct detector so that power is removed from the actuator, closing the damper, upon detection of smoke at that detector. In addition, the fire alarm system shall, through a control relay, signal the air handier or exhaust fan associated with the duct smoke detector in alarm to de - energize. Coordinate these requirements with those of Division 26, 12 MISCELLANEOUS CONTROL SEQUENCES, MONITORING POINTS, AND ALARIIJ POINTS: A. Provide a room pressure monitor where shown on drawings. Connect the alarm point for the monitor to the bas and indicate an alarm at the BAS when the room pressure is outside of the set point range. A. Variable Air Volume with Reheat: The thermostat shall control the damper operator on the variable volume, pressure independent terminal box. On a drop in room temperature below thermostat set point, the thermostat shall modulate the airflow minimum scheduled air quantity to satisfy thermostat cooling set point. On further drop in room temperature below thermostat heating set point, the thermostat shall modulate the reheat coil normally closed two-way control valve and increase the air flow to satisfy thermostat set point. On rise in temperature l 1111 111�� 177308 above the thermostat set point, the thermostat shall close the normally closed two-way control valve and modulate the airflow to maximum scheduled air quantity. 3.4 HUMIDIFIERS: X On call for humidity from a system humidistat, the two-way, modulating, normally closed steam control valve shall modulate open to satisfy set point, S. On high humidity, as sensed by a duct humidistat, the two-way modulating control valve shall close and an alarm sent to the Engineer's Office. 15 MISCELLANEOUS MONITORING POINTS: A. Room Pressure Monitors: Connect each room pressure monitor to the BAS. Map all available points, and alarm the BAS when the monitor is in alarm. Set up the monitor in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to allow the Owner's Staff to choose "isolation mode", where an alarm is sounded at the local device and the BAS if the room pressure falls below 0.01" wc for more than an adjustable time delay (15 sec); or "normal mode" where the alarm annunciation is disabled, S. In addition to the areas indicated on the drawings, the following rooms shall have pressure monitoring: 9. MRI C, Provide an input from each medical gas -master alarm panel alarm point to the BAJ END OF SECTION 23 0993 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS — 04/29/2015 230993-2 177.3018 SECTION 23 22 1 - STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. This section includes low to high pressure steam and condensate piping for system. Materials and equipment specified in this Section include: 1, Pipes and fittings B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1, Refer to other Division 23 sections for materials and methods for sealing pipe penetrations through basement walls and fire/smoke barriers, gauges,`thermometers, flaw meters, mechanical identification, mechanical insolation, condensate pumps and receiver sets, and temperature control valves and sensors, 1.2 SUBMITTALS. A. Shop drawings, detailing dimensions, methods of assembly of components, and location and size of each field connection for flash tanks. B. RecordDrawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems products in accordance with requirements of Division 23. C. Maintenance data, including data for steam and condensate specialties and special duty valves. Refer to Division 23. DWelders" certificates certifying that welders meet the quality requirements specified in Quality Assurance below, E. Certification of compliance with specified ASTM, ASME, and ANSI manufacturing requirements for pipe; fittings, and specialties. F. Test reports specified in Part 3 of this section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: regularlyA. Manufacturers Qualifications: Firms engaged in manufacturer of steam and condensate piping products, of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. 13Installers N • Personnel on projects with steam and condensate piping work similar i� that required for the project. I C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the provisions of the fallowing; 1, ASME B 3 ,9 "Building Services Piping: for materials, products, and installation, Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. 2. ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code," Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualification" for qualifications for welding processes and operators, 3. ,Local Mechanical Code. STEAM11 CONDENSATE HEATINGPIPING04/29/2015 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS: M • - a sw. _ _ ;� � . . „. • • • • ,. . .� B. Joints: 1. Pipe sues 2-112 inches and above: Butt -welded 2. Pipe sues 2 inches and below: Threaded, butt -welded, or socket -welded. C. Fittings. 1, Welded joints, Steel, ASTM A234, Grade B, ASME B16., same schedule as adjoining pipe, all elbows long radius. 'Threaded joints: Forged steel, ASME B1&11, 2000 psi class. Unions3, Socket -welded joints: Forged steel, ASME B1 6 11, 2000 psi, class. on •.r -e Piping: Malleableiron,#i on -piping and under. E. Flanges and Botts: Forged steel weld neck, ASME BI&5, ASTM A105,150 psi pressure class, except (300 psi) class required adjacent to 250 psi and 300 psi class valves. Bolts shall be high strength steel ASTM A193, Class 2, Grade B8. Nuts�slhau be AsTM A194, 2,3 STEAM CONDENSATE PIPING: A. Includes all gravity, drip return, pumped and vacuum systems. Coes not include piping system between boiler feed pumps and bailers. B.Pipe: Carbon steel, ASTM A53 Grade B or ASTM A166 Grade B, seamless or ERW, Schedule 80. C. Joints: 1. Pipe sizes 2-1t2 inches and above; Butt -welded. 2. ripe sizes 2 inches and below. Threaded, butt -welded or socket -welded. D) Fittings: 1. Welded joints: Steel, ASTM A234> Grade B, ASME B16.9, same schedule as adjoining pipe. STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING - 04129/2015 232213-2 LMC. MRI Equipment Replacement 177,308 . Threaded joints: Malleable iron, ASTM A47 or A197, ASME 816.3, 300 psi class. 3. Socket -welded joints; Forged steel, ASME 516.11, 2000 psi class. E. Unions on Threaded Piping: Malleable iron, 300 psi. On piping 2 inches and under. Manges: Forged steel weld neck, ASTM A15, ASME 816.5, 156 psi. 2A GASKETS: A. gaskets for flanged fittings and valves shall be spiral wound metallic type, Flexitallic or approved equal, suitably rated for not less than 150% of the system operating temperature and pressure: PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: A. general; Examine areas and conditions under which sham and condensate piping materials and products are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATIONS: A. general Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate the general location and arrangement of the piping systems. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into consideration pipe sizing and friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations: So far as practical" install piping as indicated. Refer to individual system specifications for requirements for coordination drawing submittals. 8, Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections. C. Conceal all pipe installations in wallas, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, unless indicated to be exposed to view. D. Install piping at right angles and parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not permitted, unless expressly indicated. E. Install piping tree of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to permit proper insulation applications. F. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls; and rather permanent elements of the building. Provide space to permit insulation applications, with 1 inch clearance outside the insulation. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for panel removal. G. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit, applying insulation and servicing of valves, Install drains at low points in mains, risers, and branch livres consisting of a tee fitting, %" ball valve, and short %" threaded nipple and cap. H- Wall Penetrations= Where pipes pass through fire rated walls, partitions, ceilings; and floors, maintain the fire rated integrity. Refer to Division 23 for sealers and materials. L Install steam supply piping at a uniform grade of 1 inch in forty feet downward in the direction of flow. J. Install branch connections to supply mains using 45 degree fittings in main with take -off out the top of the main. Use of 90 degree "tee" fi fiffings are not practical. Where the length of a branch takeoff is less than 10 feet, pitch branch line down toward mains, I inch per .. K Make reductions in pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with the level side down. L. Install unions in pipes 2 inches and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connections each piece of equipment, and elsewhereas s . M Unions are not_• on flanged devices, • * • •a• • ,, • e r mss• •� .. r • ♦ s Z Extend drip legs at vertical risers beyond the rise. 3, Provide an 18 inch long drip log. For steam mains smaller than 6 inches, provide line size drip leg. In steam mains 6 inches and larger, provide drip legs sized 2 pipe sizes smaller than the main, but not 4. Strainer blowdowns shall be equipped with ball valves with hose end and cap to allow removal of dirt and scale, . Install steam traps close to drip legs. .3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: A. General: Manger, supports, and anchors devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Supports and Anchors." B. Install the following pipe attachments: 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for Individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet in length . Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or longer. 3. Pipe roller complete - MSS Type 44 for multiple horizontal runs, 20 feet or longer, supported , a trapeze. • to9/2015 232213-4 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177,308 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs, 3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION: A. Welded Joints: Comply with the requirements in ASMI Code B31.9 - "Building Services Piping." B. Threaded Joints-, Conform to ANSI BI 20, 1, tapered pipe threads for field cut threads. Join pipe, fittings, and valves as follows: 1. Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint. 2. Align threads at point of assembly. 3. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads (except where dry seal threading is specified). 4. Assemble joint to appropriate thread depth. When using a wrench on valves place the wrench on the valve end into which the pipe is being threaded. 5, Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe with threads which are corroded or damaged. If a weld opens during cutting or threading operations, that portion of pipe shall not be used. C. Flanged Joints: Align flanges surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly to appropriate torque specified by the bolt manufacturer. 15 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS: X Piping size for supply and return shall be same size as the equipment connections. B. Install traps and control valves in accessible locations as close as possible to the equipment. C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. Where multiple, parallel control valves are installed, only one bypass is required. D, Install vacuum breaker downstream from the control valve and bypass, and as close as possible to the coil inlet connection, E. Install pressure gauges at coil inlet connections. F. Provide an appropriate trap, sized at 3 times the condensate load of the equipment, at'/'2 psig differential at outlet of coils and at drip leg, 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Preparation for testing: Prepare steam and condensate piping in accordance with ASME B 31.9 and as follows: 1. Leave joints including welds uninsulated and exposed for examination during the test. LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.808 2Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints which cannot sustain the reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are not practical, isolate expansion joints from testing. 3, Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers. 4. Isolate equipment that is not to be subjected to the test pressure from the piping, If a valve is used to isolate the equipment, its closure shall be capable of seating against the test, pressure without damage to the valve. Flanged joints at which blinds are inserted to isolate equipment need not be tested. W 11 11 pill', I:W1 1 11 IWILI STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING - 04/29/2015 232213-6 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of metal ductwork is indicated on drawings and in schedules, and by requirements of this section. DUCT SERVICE TYPE/CONSTRUCTION Supply air between fan and terminal boxes Galvanized steel, spiral, round or rectangular. (medium and nigh}. Rectangular supply air from discharge of terminal Galvanized sheet metal /spiral round or; box/fan to air devices (low pressure). rectangular General building exhaust. Galvanized sheet metal factory or shop fabricated. Exterior uninsulated ductwork. Aluminum or 344 SS or painted galvanized B. Exterior insulation of metal ductwork is specifiedin other Division -23 sections, and is included as work of this section C. Refer to other Division -23 sections for ductwork accessories, D. Refer to other Division -23 sections for fans and air handling units. F. Refer to other Division -23 sections for testing, adjusting, and balancing of metal ductwork systems. 1.2 DEFINITIONS: A. Low Pressure Duct: Duct required by the drawings, specifications, or referenced standards to be constructed to 2" or less, positive or negative pressure class. S. Medium or High Pressure Duct. Duct required by the drawings; specifications, or referenced standards to be constructed to greater than 2" positive or negative pressure class. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer's Qualifications; Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of metal ductwork products of types, materials; and sizes required; whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B3 Installer°s Qualifications: Firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on projects with metal ductwork systems similar to that required for protect, C. References to SACNA, ASHRAE and NEPA are minimum requirements, the Contractor shall fabricate, construct, install, seal and leak test all ductwork as described in this specification and as shown on the drawings, in addition to these minimum standard references. METAS DUCTS — 4412912015 233113-1 1. SMACNA Standards: Comply with the current SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible" for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork. Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual" for testing of duct systems, 2. NEPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" and NFPA`90 "Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems". E, SMACNA Industrial Construction Standards. F. Field Reference Martial: Have available for reference at project field office, copy of the current SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible", and the current SMACNA "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual". C. Clean Duct ProtocolProcedures* Se procedures c« • compliance clean duct protocol. DRecord Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems, in accordance witrequirementsof Divisions E. Maintenance Data- Submit maintenance data and parts lists for metal ductwork materials and «.► dethis data, product data,op drawings,e • record drawings manual; in accordance with requirements of Divisions 1 and 23. 1.5 DELIVERY',_ STORAGE, AND HANDLING. A. Protection. Protect ductwork, accessories and purchased products from damage during shipping, storage and handling. Prevent end damage and prevent dirt and moisture from entering ducts and fittings. B. Storage: Store ductwork inside elevated from floor on pallets and protected from weather, dirt, dust and debris, 1. In the shop: The inside of ductwork shall be wiped down after fabrication with an oil cutting solvent to remove fabrication oils. All ductwork 96" and less in any single dimension shall be assembled in the shop, with plastic film placed over the open ends, METAL. DUCTS — 4/29/2015 233113-2 r 1 1,! M r'" . 177.308 2. In transport: Ductwork shall be shipped in closed trucks or trailers on pallets. End covers shall be maintained at all times. 1 At the site: Minimize ductwork in storage "just in time" delivery is encouraged. Ductwork shall be stared on pallets in weather -tight enclosures.; Ductwork may be Mored on pallets in the building if the building i B. Fittings: Provide radius type fittings fabricated of multiple sections with maximum 15 deg. change of direction per section. Unless specifically detailed otherwise, use 45 deg. laterals and 45 deg. -... • ! for branch takeoffconnections. * #.... * - s. # ,. # branches are # ,. "` d provide conical type tees. C. Ductwork Support Materials, Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot -dipped galvanized steel fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim and angles for support of ductwork. I For exposed stainless steel ductwork, provide matching stainless steel support a. Flexmaster Type 3 s- s • s s -s #* # s s # e s s ss- •• s s s s s s ss s s# i- . s s. • *s.. s- •s • s# # ss- * ! s e F. Duct take off fittings to air terminals: same as for individual air inlets and outlets, less the damper. 2.4 FABRICATION: A. Fabricate ductwork in 4, 8# 10 or 12 -ft lengths, unless otherwise indicated or required to complete runs, Preassemble work in shop to greatest extent passible, so as to minimize field METAL DUCTS — 04129%2015 233113-4 s « w - BART 3 - EXECUTION 3,1 INSPECTION: A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which metal ductwork is to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF METAL DUCTWORK: A. Duct Sealing.- METAL ealing: FETAL DUCTS — 04/29/201 233113-5 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177,308 1, Seat all low pressure ducts to SMACNA Seal Class "B", 3228 a.. V General: Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve air -fight and.noiseless (no objectionable noise) systems, capable of performing each indicated service. Install each run with minimum number of joints. Align ductwork accurately at connections, within 1/8" misalignment tolerance and with internal surfaces smooth. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors of type which will hold ducts true-to.shape and to prevent buckling, popping or compressing. Support vertical ducts at every floor. METAL DUCTS -- 04/29/2015 233113-6 LMC: MRl Equipment Replacement 177306 3.3 INSTALLATION OF DUCT TAKE -OFF FITTINGS: A. Fully seal all joints. S: Sheet metal screw regulator arm to duct after balance is complete. Mark and date position of regulator arm. C. Insulation over regulator arm is not required. 3,4 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE DUCTS: A. Maximum Length: For any duct run using flexible ductwork, dei not exceed 6' - ,fi B3 Installation: Install in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible". C. Full inside diameter of flexible duct shall be maintained, Support to prevent kinking, O. Flexible duct shall not be installed above an inaccessible ceiling unless the sir device is set in a frame allowing access to both ends of the flexible duct. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A, Leakage Tests: Conduct duct leakage test in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage rest Manual. Repair leaks and repeat tests until total leakage is less than the maximum permissible leakage as specified below. S. General: 1. Ductwork pressure tests shell be observed by Architect/Engineer prior to installation of insulation. 2. Ductwork systems in ±3" W.C. pressure class and higher shall be tested in their entirety for leaks, Arbitrary sections of ductwork in +2" W.G. and lower pressure class shall be tasted as required by Architect/Engineer. . Test Failures: Duct systems shall be repaired if test pressure and leakage requirements are not met or if air noise condition is encountered. Repairs and sealing shall be done with sheet metal, tape, sealant or a combination thereof. C. Test equipment; 1. Portable rotary type blower or tank type vacuum cleaner with control damper. Equipment shall have sufficient capacity to properly test reasonably lame duct system section. Equipment shall have been calibrated within 2 years of the testing. 2, Orifice assembly consisting of straightening vanes and calibrated orifice plate mounted in a straight tube with properly located pressure taps. 3, Two (2) U-tubemanometers, one to measure drop across calibrated orifice and one to measure S.P. in duct being tested. Provide low differential pressure Dwyer magnehelic gauges for low leak testing in lieu of U-tube manometers 4, Provide Dwyer magnehelic gauge with 9-.36" W.C. range for testing 0% leakage ductwork. METAL DUCTS 04/29/2015 233113-7 LMC; MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 C. Testing Pressures and Permissible Leakage: 1. Test pressure shall be equal to the construction class. Negative pressure dint shall be tested at the equivalent positive pressure. 2, Allowable leakage shall be determined from the following equation (or figure 4-1 in the above referenced Standard); F = CL (P). Where, F = Allowable leakage factor CFM/100 Sq. Ft. L = Leakage Class P = Test pressure inches W.C. Leakage class shall be as follows: a. Seal class A, Round or oval duct, CL = 3. b. Seal class A, Rectangular duct, CL = 6. . Seal class S, Round or oval duct, CL = 6. d. Seal class B, Rectangular duct, Cr = 12. e. Seat class C, Round or oval duct, CL = 1. f. Seal class C, Rectangular duct, CL = 24. 4. Record all tests using the procedure and forms in the above referenced standard. 6. All plenums and casings shell be tested by pressuring to the pressure class indicated and visually observing leakage and panel deflection. a. No noticeable leakage shall be allowed. b. Deflection shall be less than 1/8" per foot. 3.6 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS; A � .. M if • : •: - ♦ .. � .. •. it'". i • .... N.: if •. 11 'i •. • METAL DUCTS — 04/29/2016 233113-8 Mat=_ I I fan housing, fan blades, turning vanes, filters, filter housings, reheat coils, and supply diffusers are all considered part of the HVAC system, B. Clean ductwork internally, unit byunit as it is installed, of dust and debris. 'Clean external surfaces of foreign substances. Where ductwork is to be painted clean and prepare surface for painting, C. Protection: 1 Store duct a minimum of 4" above ground or floor to avoid damage from weather or spills. 2. Cover all stored ducts to protect from moisture, dust or debris, 1 Maintain a cover on all ends of installed ductwork at all times, except when actually connecting additional sections of duct. ,16 Ductwork contaminated or damaged above "shop" or "mill" conditions shall be cleaned, repaired or replaced to the Engineer's satisfaction. Ductliner pre-installed in stored duct which has become wet may be installed if first allowed to completely dry out. 2. Ductliner in installed ductwork which has become wet must be completely removed and replaced. �MQNII r-mmum-141ism E. Strip protective paper from stainless ductwork surfaces, and repair finish wherever it has been damaged. F. Balancing: Refer to Division -23 section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for air distribution balancing of metal ductwork; not work of this section. Seal any leaks in ductwork that become apparent in balancing process. AAfter completion of the ductwork installation, and after the Test and Balancing work, a minimum of 10% of the installed length of the supply duct system shall be inspected by an independent company specializing in such work. Inspection shall be performed using fiber optic video equipment and other appropriate techniques. ME= 1. A report, including a recording on DVD of the video shall be submitted to the engineer. The report shall document the findings of the inspection, listing any areas of concern, including evidence of water, dust, dirt and construction debris. C. The report will be used to determine if the ductwork cleanliness is acceptable. The Verification of HVAC System Cleanliness provisions of National Air Duct Cleaners Association (NADCA): "Assessment, Cleaning & Restoration of HVAC Systems (ACR 2006) shall be used. A synopsis is given below: 1 The report will be used as a visual inspection. The system will be considered clean if the interior surfaces are free from non -adhered substances and debris. METAL DUCTS — 04/29/2015 233113-9 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 2, If the visual inspection in inconclusive, then a surface comparison test will be performed, A sections will be cleaned by a brush and vacuum method in accordance with NADCA ACR 2006. The system will be considered clean if there is no significant visual difference in the surface characteristics between the recently craned section and the adjacent sections. 1 If the surface comparison test is inconclusive, then the NADCA Vacuum Test will be performed to snake a final cleanliness determination. ENC} OF SECTION 23 3113 METAL. DUCTS -- 04/2912015 233113-10 177.308 SECTION 23 3300 — AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART I - GENERAL X B. C, D. E� F� 1,2 A. B. C. D. E� QUALITY ASSURANCE: similar service for not less than 5 years. UL Compliance,- Construct, test, and label fire dampers in accordance with UL Standard 555 "Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers" and U.L. Standard 565S "Motor -Driven Fire/Smoke • NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of NFPA 90A �Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems", pertaining to installation of ductwork accessories. SMACNA Compliance: All exhaust ducts comply with "Fire Damper and Heat Stop Guide". t ft - latest local building code requirements. IAw k 4 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each type of ductwork accessory, including dimensions, capacities, and materials of construction-, and installation instructions. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly -type shop drawings for each type of support, and methods of assembly of components, Include details of construction equipment and accessories being provided. net free area & the maximum air quantity which will be passing through the damper, Submittals without this information will be rejected. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems products, in accordance with requirements of Division 23, Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's maintenance data including parts lists for each type of duct accessory. Include this data, product data, -and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 23, 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1: Dampers: AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES -- 04129/2015 233300-1 177.30 a. Greenback b. AWV c. Air Balance, Inc. d. Ane o tat e. Arrow Louver and Damper; Div. of Arrow united Industries,. Inc. Louvers & Dampers, Inc. g. Fenn Ventilator Co, h. Pottoroff I. Ruskin Fire Dampers and Smoke Dampers. e. Greenheck b. Air Balance, Inc. C. Phillips Industries, Inc. Conaire Division d. Ruskin e. Pottoroff 3. Turning Vanes: e. Aero dyne Co. b. A rsan Corp. c. Barb -Aire d. Duro Dyne Corp, e. Environmental Elements Corp.; Subs. Koppers Co., Inc. f. Hart & Cooley Mfg. Co. 4. Duct. Hardware: a. Ventfabrics, Inc. b. Young Regulator Co C. Duro-Dyne Corp. 5. Duct Access Doors: Tess b, treenhek p. Flexmaster d. Cesco-Advanced Air e. Duro Dyne Corp, f, Ventfabrics, Inc, . Flexible Connections: e Duro Dyne Corp. b. Ventfabrics, Inc. e. General Rubber Corp. (Process & Exhaust Only) A. Low Pressure Rectangular Dampers (less than 2000 FPM and under 2" W.C. S.P: Differential); 1. For 12" in height or lamer, use multiple opposed blade type and close fitted to ducts. The frame and blades shall be constructed of 15 ga. galvanized steel with plated steel AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 04/2912015 233300-2 177.308 shaft mounted with synthetic bearings, Linkage shall be in -jamb fixed type located outside the airstream made of plated steel tie bar and crank plates, with stainless steel pivots. Damper panels shall not exceed 48" wide. Provide jack shafting when duct size required is greater than 48" wide. Provide notched shaft end indicating damper position, locking quadrant to fix damper position and handle. Provide stand off bracket for insulated ducts, For flat oval and round ductwork, provide type C housing, 2. For ducts less than 12" in height, frame shall be 18 ga. blade galvanized steel, steel axle with synthetic bearings locking quadrant handle and notched shaft end indicating damper position. Provide stand off bracket for insulated ducts. B. Low Pressure Round Dampers (less than 1800 FPM and under 1"W.0 S.P, differential). - I . For low pressure spin -in fitting dampers serving individual returns/diffusers, see 15891. 2. Dampers 4" diameter through 18" diameter shall be 20 ga. galvanized steel frame and blade, utilize multi -blade square dampers with transitions for ducts over 18" diameter. Axle shaft shall be plated steel with retainers mounted on synthetic bearings with notched end shaft indicating damper position, looking quadrant and handle. Provide stand off brackets for insulated ducts. a, Greenheck M8DR-50 or approved equivalent, C. Medium/High Pressure Rectangular Dampers (less than 4000 FPM and under 6" WC(48" wide or less) S.P, or 8" WC, &P. (36" wide or less)): 1, Dampers shall be opposed blade for volume control and parallel blade for isolation/shut-off service. Z Frame shall be 1/8" thick 6063-T5 alloy aluminum frame. Blades shall be .081" thick 6060-T5 extruded aluminum, airfoil shape, Blade edge seals shall be vinyl, silicone, or other approved synthetic and metallic compression seals at the jambs. Axles shall be hexagonal or square plated steel mounted on bronze oilite or synthetic (ACETAL) bearings, Linkage shall be in -jamb type located outside the airstream, Maximum damper size shall be 48" wide and 60" high. For isolation or shut-off duty, damper leakage shall not exceed 9.5 CFM/Fe at 4"W.C. S.P. differential. Provide extended shaft with notched end indicating damper position, locking quadrant and handle, Provide stand off brackets for insulated ducts. D. Medium/High Pressure Round and Flat Oval Dampers (less than 3000 FPM and under 4" W,C. S.P. differential): 1, Damper frame construction shall be galvanized steel as follows: ROUND Under 6" ...... 12 Gauge 6" to 18" dia...... .... ... 14 Gauge FLAT OVAL 6" to 12" wide. .... ........ ...... 2 x 1/2 x 14 gauge channel 13" to 48" wide... .......... x 1/2 x 1/8 channel AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES — 04/29/2015 233300-3 . Damper blades shall be galvanized steel as follows: ROL1hll3 4" to 18" diameter.,..... ... 12 Gauge FLAT OVAL. 4" to 18" Wide ........r ........ ,:., ......x ..r................«.,...r 12 Gauge 3. Axles shall be 1/2" diameter plated steel up to 18" diameter and 18" wide flat oval, and 314" diameter plated steel over 18", Stainless sleeve bearings pressed in to the frame. 4. Provide notched end shaft to indicate damper position, locking quadrant and lever handle: Provide stand off bracket for insulated duct. 5« For isolation or shut-off service dam ers shall be provided with edge seats with a leakage rate not to exceed 7 CFM/ft at V W.C. S.P. differential (based on 18" diameter). E, Dampers in stainless steel duct shall be of equivalent construction to the above dampers, with all components made of stainless steel. Type 304 or 315 as specified for the ductwork. F. Campers in aluminum duct shall be of equivalent construction to the above dampers, with all components made of either aluminum or stainless steel. 2.3 COUNTERBALANCED PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS: • - • int • ♦ •� '" ! - • ! r^ •.. l_ s !. �� e • s s +� �' • !` !. !' 1. ! .i* :.1: •.... 'At • ! .,l. .• • • 1. ..� ♦. .. ! . !# .!'" ♦ .«:. .. l • !. + '. � l ,� !^. !< :. "'• .. 2.4 FIRE DAMPERS: A. Fabricated Fire Dampers: Provide dampers constructed in accordance with SMACNA "Fire Damper and Heat Stop Guide." B. Fire Dampers: Provide dynamic rated type B or C fire dampers except as noted on drawings. Construct sleeve of galvanized steel with bonded red acrylic enamel finish, gauge as required by f All dampers shall be UL labeled, Provide fusiblerated at 160 to 165 deg. F (71 to 74 deg. C) unless otherwise indicated. See architectural drawings for the separations and listings. Provide horizontal mounted fire damper with positive lock in closed position,f • with the following additional AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 04/2912015 233300-4 1 G, tamper Blade Assembly. Curtain Type, D? Blade Material; Galvanized steel, B. Provide integral sleeve type G fire dampers for sidewall air devices terminating at fire rued walls. Ruskin iIBD20-G or equivalent, 2. Use rectangular damper with smooth square/round transitions for dampers over 18" round. Temperature Mass 2500F. Dl Factory sleeve. B. Factory mounted 24V/1 20V spring return electricactuator. F. Electric tamper Actuators. 1. Actuator shall have microprocessor based motor controller providing: a. Electronic crit off at full open so that no noise can be generated while holding open. Molding none level shall be inaudible. b: ` Shall be incapable of burning out if stalled before full rotation' is reached. 2. Housing shall be steel and gears shall be permanently lubricated. The actuators shall be direct coupled and employ a steel toothed clamp for connecting to damper shafts. Aluminum clamps or set -screw attachment are not acceptable: 4. Actuator shall have UL555S Listing by the damper manufacturer acturer for a temperature equal to the damper. , Actuators shall draw no more than .23A at 120V or 24V running, or .1A holding at 120V or 24V (27 VA and 10 VA respectively for 24V power) for 70 in-# of torque. 6. Actuator shall carry a manufacturer's 5 -year warranty and be manufactured under ISO 9001 quality control 7. Damper actuators shall be Belimo Aircontrols FSLF (30 in-#) or FSNF (70 in-##). AIR DACCESSORIES 04/29/2015 233300- LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 G. Where indicated on drawings, or where required by the sequence of controls, provide factory mounted blade position switches to Indicate fully open and fully closed. K Damper actuator shall fail close upon loss of power, L UL 8585 & Class 11. 2.6 TURNING VANES: A. Fabricated Turning Vanes: Provide fabricated 22 gauge, single blade or 24 gauge'double bladed -1/2" radius„ 3-1/4" spacing turning vanes and type 2, 4-1/2" wide runners, constructed in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards" Fig 2.3. D. Do not use trailing edge turning vanes. 2.7 DUCT HARDWARE: A. General: Provide duct hardware, manufactured by one manufacturer for all items on project, for the following: D. Test Holes: Provide in ductwork at fan inlet and outlet, and elsewhere as indicated, duct test holes, consisting of slot and cover, for instrument tests. C. Quadrant Locks: Provide for each manual volume damper, quadrant lock device on one end of shaft, and end bearing plate on other end for damper lengths over 12". Provide extended quadrant locks and end extended bearing plates for externally insulated ductwork. 2.8 DUCT ACCESS DOORS: A. Access Doors for Low Pressure Rectangular Duct: Construct of same or greater gauge a ductwork served, provide double wall insulated doors for insulated ductwork; Exposed insulation adhered to door isnot acceptable. Provide flush frames for uninsulated ductwork, extended frames for externally insulated duct. All access doom shall have gasket and will be air tight. Provide one side hinged„ other side with one handle -type latch for doors 12" high and smaller, 2 handle -type latches for larger doors. Where a hinged door can not be fully opened a removable door may be used. B. access boors for Medium and High Pressure Rectangular Duct: Insulated double wall round door and frame arranged for "Spin -in" installation, with continuous gasket in frame for door. Leakage of less than .8 cfm at " W .G: Flexmaster "Inspector Series Spin Door," or equivalent. C. Access Doors for Round Duct 20" and Less: Sandwich type door, constructed of an insulated double wall outer door connected to gaketed inner plata carriage bolts with hand knobs, and formed to fit the radius of the duct. Ductrmate "Sandwich" or equivalent. D. Access Door for Found Duct Greater Than 20": 18" round insulated double wall access door in gasketed frame, attached to duct section similar to tee fitting. F. Access Doors for Flat Oval Duct: Use door specified for medium and high pressure rectangular duct in flat portion, use door specified for round duct in curved portion. 2.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS: AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES — 04/29/201 233300-6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 31 INSPECTION: A. Examine areas and conditions under which ductwork accessories will be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to the Engineer. 12 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES: A. Install ductwork accessories in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, with applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended function. B. Install turning vanes in square or rectangular 90 deg, elbows in supply, return and exhaust air systems, and elsewhere as indicated, C. Install access doors to open against system air pressure, with latches operable from either side, except outside only where duct is too small for person to enter. C. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, as necessary to interface installation of ductwork accessories property with other work. E. Provide duct access doors whether shown or not for inspection and cleaning upstream of all coils, fans, automatic dampers, fire dampers (minimum 16" x 24" in ducts larger than 18"), fire/smoke dampers, duct smoke detectors and elsewhere as indicated. Review locations prior to fabrication. Provide multiple access doors for large ductwork to provide adequate reach to equipment. F. Install fire dampers and smoke dampers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES — 04/29/2015 233300-7 LMC. MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 G. Provide fire dampers and smoke dampers at locations shown, where ducts and outlets pass through fire rated components, and where required by authorities having jurisdiction. R. Provide balancing dampers at points on low pressure supply, return, and exhaust systems where Branches are taken from larger ducts and as required for air balancing. L Provide balancing dampers on high pressure systems where indicated. Use splitter dampers only where indicated on Drawings. J. Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and equipment subject to forced vibration. Provide matching flanged backing frame with flexible connector where flanged fan connections are provided. 33 COORDINATION: A. Coordinate with installers of other work to ensure that operators, resat devices, and fusible lurks are accessible at all fire, smoke, and fire/smoke dampers; E3. Show access space on coordination drawings. Locate over lay -in ceilings and above corridors wherever practical. C. Order right/left/top/bottom arrangement as required to minimize field modifications. A FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Operate installed ductwork accessories after installation to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test for air leakage while system is operating. Repair or replace faulty accessories, as required to obtain proper operation and leakproof performance. B. After installation, test every fire and fire/smoke damper for proper operation, provide letter to the Architect/Engineer certifying this work is complete and all dampers are functioning property. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A.Adjusting* Adjust ductwork accessories for proper settings, install fusible links in fine dampers and adjust for proper, action., B. Label access doors in accordance with Division -23 section "Mechanical Identification". C. Final positioning of manual dampers is specified in Division -23 section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" D. Cleaning: Clean factory -finished surfaces; Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint. 16 EXTRA STOCK: A. Furnish extra fusible limos to Owner, one link for every 10 installed of each temperature range; obtain receipt. END OF SECTION 23 3300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES — 04/29/201 3300.8 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 SECTION 238413 - HUMIDIFIERS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: & Extent of humidifiers Work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements bfthis section, B. Humidifiers furnished as part of factory -fabricated equipment, are specified as part of equipment assembly in other Division 23 sections, E. Refer to Division 26 sections for the following work; not work of this section, I Power supply Wiring from power source to power connection on humidifier. Include starters, disconnects, and required electrical devices, except where specified as furnished, or factory -installed, by manufacturer, 2 Interlock wiring between electrically -operated humidifiers-, and between humidifiers and field -installed control devices, 3. Interlock wiring specified as factory -installed is work of this section� FProvide the following electrical work as work of this section, complying with requirements of Division -26 sections: 1 Control wiring between field -installed controls, indicating devices, and humidifier control panels. Z Control wiring specified as work of Division 23 for Automatic Temperature Controls is work of that section. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE: • HUMIDIFIERS — 04/29/2015 238413-1 1.3 SUBMITTALS: rated& Product Data- Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including capacities of selected model clearly indicated, weights, installation and start-up instructions, and furnished specialties and accessories. '. # if 4.. =f.....f '.. _ « # ,.' i♦: i « f N # #iIng C, Wiring Diagrams* Submit manufacturees electrical requirements for power supply wiring to humidifiers. Submit manufacturees ladder -type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory -installed and portions to be field -installed. DRecord Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems products, in accordance with requirements ofbivision 23. E, Maintenance luta: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each humidifier, control, and accessory; including "trouble -shooting" maintenance guide. Install this data, product data, shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 23, FART 2 - PR D CTS 21 MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturer, Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the :.i • 1 Electric Replaceable Electrode Type Steam, Humidifiers. a. Dri-Steam b. Carnes Co. C, Norlec Industries, Inc. d, Armstrong International 2.2 -MATERIALS COMPONENTS: A, General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide packaged humidifiers and ancillary equipment with manufacturer's standard materials and components as indicated and published product information, designed and constructed by . n .. _ and as r-# a ` i for complete C. An electric dram valve shall be cabinet -mounted to allow cylinder to automatically drain periodically and at the end of a humidification season. The cylinder shall automatically and HUMIDIFIERS — 04/29/2015 238413-2 177308 E, Controls: Humidifier shall be capable of 20%-100% modulating control. Microprocessor shall control all functions, with user input for project specific setpoints and adjustments, Alphanumeric display shall indicate systett functions including setpoints, system output and system alarms. Provide relays for remote signaling of alarms a i J 101110 !!1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 31 INSPECTION: A. Examine areas and conditions under which humidifiers are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 12 INSTALLATION OF HUMIDIFIERS: A. General: Install humidifiers where indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that humidifiers comply with requirements and serve intended purposes, B. Access: Provide access space around humidifiers for service as indicated, but in no case less than that recommended by manufacturer. CSupport: Provide supports from substrate for humidifiers as indicated and in accordance with manufacturers installation instructions, D. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory -mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer. HUMIDIFIERS — 04/29/2015 238413-3 177.308 9. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements of Division -26 sections, Do not proceed with equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment Installer. B. Ductwork Installation: Refer to Division -23 section "Metal Ductwork". Provide air -tight seal at each penetration of humidifiers into ductwork. Provide duct access door for service.: . F. Steam Piping Connections: Refer to Division -2 section "Steam Piping and Condensate Heating Wiping". Provide separate valved branch to supply humidifier from top of dripped steam runout. G; Make -Up Water and Lorain Connections: Refer to Division -23 section ""Basic Piping Materials and Methods". Provide, separate valved branch to supply humidifier. Providebackflow prevention device as required by Plumbing Coda having jurisdiction. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Upon completion of Installation and prior to initial operation, test and demonstrate that air humidification equipment is leak -tight. B. Repair or replace air humidification equipment as required to eliminate Maks, and retest as specified to demonstrate compliance. 3.4 ADJUSTING ANIS CLEANING: A: Start -Up„ Start-up humidifiers: in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Adjust controls for project conditions. 2. Adjust high limit controls to prevent excessive humidity output. 3. Adjust drain cycles for unoccupied times where possible, B. Refer to Division -23 section "`besting, Adjusting, and Balancing" for humidifier balancing; not work of this section. C. Gleaning: Clean factory -finished surfaces, Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint. END OF SECTION 238413 HUMIDIFIERS -- 04/29/201 238413-4 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 AIM PART I - GENERAL: 11 RELATED DOCUMENTS: X All drawings associated with the entire project, including general provisions of the Contract, including The General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, General and Supplementary Conditions and Division -1 Conditions specification sections shall apply to the Division 26 specifications and drawings. The Contractor shall be responsible for reviewing and becoming familiar with the aforementioned and all other Contract Documents associated with the project. 13Related Sections: Refer to all sections in Division 23. Refer to Division 26 specification sections and Division 26 drawings, C. Where contradictions occur between this section and Division 1, the more stringent requirement shall apply. D, Contractor shall be defined as any and all entities involved with the construction of the project. 12 SUMMARY: A. This Section specifies the basic requirements for electrical installations and includes requirements common to more than one section of Division 26. It expands and supplements the requirements specified in sections of Division I through 23. 1.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: X Drawings are diagrammatic in character and do not necessarily indicate every required conduit, box, fitting, etc. B. Drawings and specifications are complementary, Whatever is called for in either is binding as though called for in both. Report any discrepancies to the Engineer and obtain written instructions before proceeding. Where any contradictions occur between the specifications and the drawings the more stringent requirement shall apply. The contractor shall include pricing for the more stringent and expensive requirements. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL — 04/29/2015 26 0,500-1 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177308 G� Verify all dimensions by field measurements. HArrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to accommodate electrical installations. 1 10, 'oil W xg ON, 4111IM0111111114101101111 I am g 11 n-11 tol w2l Lo m I 01MIUM11 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL — 04/29/2015 260500-2 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177,308 B, Provide proper documentation of equipment, product data and shop drawings to all entities involved in the project, Coordination shall include, but not be limited to the following: 1 , Fire Alarm Contractor shall provide shop drawings to other Contractors as required. Z Automatic Temperature Controls, Building Management and Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Contractors shall be provided With equipment product data and shop drawings from other Division 23 and Division 26 Contractors and shall furnish the sa information involving control devices to the appropriate Contractor. C. Coordination Drawings - a. Equipment connections b. Control panels C. Circuit and motor disconnects d, Feeder conduits LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 1 . Carefully survey existing conditions prior to bidding work. In addition, Contractor shall complete a thorough ceiling cavity survey prior to developing 3D drawing. 2. Contractor shall be responsible for showing all existing conditions on the 3D coordination drawings. 3. Provide proper coordination of electrical work with existing conditions. 4. Report any issues or conflicts immediately to Engineer before commencing with work and prior to purchasing equipment and materials, 1.5 COORDINATION WITH OTHER DIVISIONS: A. General. - 1, Coordinate all work to conform with the progress of the work of other trades, Z Complete the entire installation as soon as the condition of the building will permit. No extras will be allowed for corrections of ill timed work, when such corrections are required for proper installation of other work. B. Coordinate ceiling cavity space carefully with all trades. In the event of conflict, install mechanical and electrical systems within the cavity space allocation in the following order of priority: 1. Equipment and required clearances Z Plumbing waste, cooling coil drain piping and roof drain mains and leaders. 1 Pneumatic tube systems. 4. Ductwork mains 5Plumbing vent piping 6Medical gastlab gas systems 7. Low pressure ductwork and air devices, 8. Electrical and communication conduits, raceways and cable tray. 9. Domestic hot and cold water % Hydronic piping 11. Fire sprinkler mains, branch piping and drops (locate as tight to structure as possible). 1Z DDC control wiring and other low voltage systems. 13. Fire alarm systems. C.Chases, Inserts and Openings: I Provide measurements, drawings and layouts so that openings, inserts and chases in new construction can be built in as construction progresses, 2. Check sizes and locations of openings provided. Including the access panels for equipment in hard lid ceilingsand wall cavities. 3. Any cuffing and patching made necessary by failure to provide measurements, drawings and layouts at the proper time shall be done at no additional cost in contract SUM D. Support Dimensions: Provide dimensions and drawings so that concrete basis and other equipment supports to be provided under other sections of the specifications can be built at the proper time. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL — 04/29/2015 260500-4 Systems or • require design •i i by the contractor include but . not ..:.. M. 1. Final coordinated distribution systems within the ceiling cavity. Any system not fully detailed . Fire alarm shop drawings 4. Equipment supports, hangers, anchors and seismic systems not fully detailed nor specified in these documents, or catalogued by the manufacturer, Seismic restraint systems 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. The contractorshall be required to attend'a pre-bid walk-thru if required and shall make themselves familiar with the existing conditions. No additional costs to the Owner shall be accepted for additional work for existing conditions, & Field verify all conditions prior to submitting bids. I Report any damaged' equipment or systems to the towner prior to any work. D. Protect all work against theft, injury or damage from all causes until it has been tested and accepted. E. Be responsible for all damage to the property of the Owner or to the work of other contractors during the construction and guarantee period, Repair or replace any part of the work which may shrew defect during one year from the final acceptance of all work, provided such defect is, in the opinion of the Architect, due to imperfect material or workmanship and not due to the Owner's carelessness or improper use. F. The Contractor shall coordinate and co-operate with Owner at all times for all new to existing connections. C. Coordinate all services shut -down with the Owner{, provide temporary services. Coordinate any required disruptions with towner, one week in advance. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL — 04/29/2015 260500-5 1.8 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES: A, Execute and inspect all work in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories (UL), and all local • state codes,and regulations applicable to the trade affected . but if the stringentplans and/or specifications call for requirements that exceed these rules and regulations, the more requirement M followed. Follow application r and requirements standardand fosting procedures of NFPA, IEEE, NEMA, CBM, ANSI, NECA, ICEA and IETA. B. Comply with standards in effect at the date of these Contract Documents, except where a or •. date or edition is indicated, C. All material used on this project shall be UL listed and labeled and be acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the use intended. D. After entering into contract, Contractor will be held to complete all work necessary to meet these requirements without additional expense to the Owner. 1.9 PERMITS AND FEES, A. Owner or Contractor shall pay all fees required for connection to municipal and public utility facilities. B, Contractor shall arrange for and pay for all inspections, licenses and certificates required in connection with the work. 1,10 PROJECT SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS: A. All electrical and fire alarm systems shall be installed to meet NEPA and IBC Seismic requirements. 1, Where any conflicts arise the more stringent requirements shall be applicable. . The design of the seismic requirements shall be the responsibility of the contractor. 1.11 TEMPORARY FACILITIES: A, Light, Heat, Power, Etc, M ♦ i � � �M �F i � ISM 9i COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL — 04/29/2015 260500-6 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 A. The burden of proof that proposed equipment is equal in size, capacity, performance, and other pertinent criteria for this specific installation, or superior to that specified is up to the Contractor. Substituted equipment will only be allowed where specifically listed in a written addendum. If substitutions are not granted, the specified materials and equipment must be installed. Where substituted equipment is allowed, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to notify all related trades of the accepted substitution and to assume full responsibility for all costs caused as a result of the substitution. B. Unless otherwise specified, all material , s and equipment shall be of domestic (USA) manufacture, C. Product Data: 1 Where pre-printed data covers more than one distinct product, size, type, material, trim, accessory group or other variation, mark submitted copy with black pen to indicate which of the variations is to be provided. D. Product Listing: 1 Prepare a list of major electrical equipment and materials for the project. A sample schedule is included at the end of this Section to complete this requirement, Z Provide a product listing within one (1) week from award of contract to successful bidder. 1 Submit this listing as a part of the submittal requirement specified in the Division I Section on Products and Substitutions. I Refer to the Conditions of the Contract (General and Supplementary), Division I 2d The submittals shall be submitted as a fully complete package identified by the specification section. The cover shall be identified with the job name, Owner's project COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL — 04/29/2015 260500-7 IBM li via mo number, date, Prime Contractor's name, etc. Submittals that are not complete with the required information will be sent back to be corrected, I An index shall be provided which includes: a. Product b. Plan Reference (if applicable) c. Specification Section d. Manufacturer and Model Number 4. Provide electronic submittals unless it is determined that hard copies are required, 6111IN=M0 "I 1Provide Preliminary Schedule of Values to Engineer with product data submittal within four (4) weeks from award of contract to successful bidder. Provide according to the following descriptions, LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 a, General Construction (total) b. Demolition c. Distribution d, Lighting - Interior ek Lighting -- Exterior €, Lighting Controls g. Basic Materials/Devices/Equipment Connections (Mechanical) h, Eire Alarm (Material/installation) i. Security'; !. P.A./Sound/Intercom Miscellaneous LMC;. MRI Equipment Replacement 177.8 L. Submit letters certifying compliance with ANSI standards for medium or high voltage gear. These letters shall be signed by a corporate officer and shall list applicable standards. Letters signed by local representatives will not be acceptable. M, Submit proposed changes to electrical room or other equipment room layouts when revised from contract documents prior to installation. N. Mark submittals with designations as shown on the drawings and identify as required by Specification Sections.Identification ,ll contain th» information «.. required in details and each label shall be submitted in list form with disconnects, MCC%� panelboards, switchboards, overcurrent protection devices and utilization equipment. 1.14 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Refer to the Division 1, Sections on Transportation and Handling and Storage and Protection B. Deliver products to project property identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and similar information needed for distinct identifications; adequately packaged and protected to prevent damage during shipment, storage, and handling. C. More equipment and materials at the site, unless off-site storage is authorized in writing. Protect stored equipment and materials from damage and weather. D, Coordinate deliveries of electrical materials and equipment to minimize construction site congestion. Limit each shipment of materials and equipment to the items and quantities needed for the smooth and efficient flow' of installations. 1.15 DEMOLITION/REMODEL WORK: A. Refer to Division 1 Section on Summary of work for requirements on working in ?writer* occupied areas of the existing building and Division 2 section on selective demolition. The following are additions and modifications. B. The project involves renovation and remodel of the existing building. On the drawings, work may be denoted by showing items as bold or light line weight and certain renovation symbols are used. These indications and symbols are amplified as follows: 1. Bold Print (when used) Work included in this contract is denoted in bold print or line weight. . Light print (when used); Work shown lightly indicates existing conditions to remain, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL — 04/29/2016 26 0500 -IB Luminaires w leave in place. Switches - Maintain circuit continuity. Receptacle - Remove devices if required for new work and reinstall. Clock - dean and reinstall. ER - Existing item to remain in place; replace device. Contractor shall perform the following function based upon the item to remain. Luminaires Clean and install new lamps, Switches Remove and replace with new in existing box. Receptacles - Remove and replace with new in existing box, Clock - Glean and replace. RL =Existing item to be relocated. Contractor shall remove the existing item, and store in a safe place. The existing item shall be relocated to the new position as called for on the drawings. At Contractor's option, the existing wiring may be extended, or new wiring may be run from the source. Based upon the item to be relocated, the Contractor shall perform the following function. Luminaires Clean and install new tamps:` Switches Replace. Receptacles • replace. Clocks Clean and relocate. C. Existing; equipment that is removed and net scheduled to be reused shall remain the property of the Owner and be delivered for disposition unless specifically indicated otherwise and shall be stored in a location designated by the Owner. Items which are removed and not wanted by the Owner shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site. O. Existing equipment that is removed and is to be reused shall be cleaned, serviced and operable before being reinstalled. E. Devise panelboard schedules to reflect removal or relocation of equipment. <Circuit integrity of equipment in adjacent areas shall be left intact. E. Where remodeling interferes with existing circuits and equipment which are not to be removed, such circuits and equipment shall be reworked and relocated as required to complete the project. C. The Contractor shall remove all distribution equipment, conductors, etc., which are indicated to be removed or which must be removed to accommodate demolition: Equipment to be removed may require reworking conduit and wiring in order to maintain service to other equipment, H. Where remodeling interferes with circuits serving areas outside of the project or phase limits or which are remodeled in later phases of the project, circuits shall be reworked or temporary circuits provided as required`. 1. Existing equipment and circuiting shown are based on field surveyt and/or Owner furnished drawings. The Contractor shall verify conditions as t- existnecessaryadjustments being made to the drawing information. JCoordinate the routing of all conduits with the existing mechanical and plumbing systems in order to avoid conflicts with ducts, pipes, etc. Where existing electrical boxes, conduit, or equipment interfere with installation of ducts, plumbing, walls, soffits,. COMMONetc., the Contractor shall resolve the conflict with the appropriate trade. O... ELECTRICAL •/2015 260500 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177308 C. Do not endanger or damage installed Work through procedures and processes of cutting and patching. D. When caring is required or identified, an x-ray of the area is to be taken pr"ror to the performance of the work operation. X-ray work requires an MOP and protection. COMMON RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL04/29/2015 2.1 Al LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 E. Arrange for repairs required to restore other work, because of damage caused as a result of electrical installations. F. No additional compensation Will be authorized for cutting and patching Work that is necessitated by ill-timed, defective, or non-confofting installations. GPerform cuffing, fiffing, and patching of electrical equipment and materials required to: 1. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work; Z Remove and replace defective Work; 4. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing; 5. Install equipment and materials in existing structures; 6. Upon written instructions from the ArchitectiEngineer, uncover and restore Work to provide for Architect/Engineer observation of concealed Work. HCut, remove and legally dispose of selected electrical equipment, components, and materials as indicated, including, but not limited to removal of conductors, conduit, luminaires, boxes, devices and other electrical items made obsolete by the new Work. L Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed. JProvide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas. K. Locate, identify, and protect electrical services passing through remodel or demolition area and serving other areas required to be maintained operational. 1.17 ROUGH -IN: A. Verify final locations for rough -ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected. B. Refer to equipment specifications Jn Divisions 2 through 23 for roUgh-In requirements. 1.18 ACCESSIBILITY: X Install equipment and materials to provide required code clearances and access for servicing and maintenarim ' Cdordinat6the final location with piping, ducts, and equipment of other trades to insure proper access for all trades. Coordinate locations of concealed equipment, disconnects, and boxes with access panels and doors. Allow ample spac& for removal of parts, fuses, lamps, etc. that require replacement or servicing. S. Extend all conduits so that junction and pull boxes are in accessible locations. C. Provide access panel or doors where equipment or boxes are concealed behind finished surfaces. 119 TESTING: COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL — 04/29/2015 260500-13 LMC: MRD Equipment Replacement 177,308 Submit test reports as outlined in Division 1 Sections on Quality Control Services and each Division 26 Section. underBTesting as,required by these specifications shall pertain to all equipment, wiring, devices, etc. installed # and being C. General Scope 1. Perform all tests and operational checks to assure that all electrical equipment, both Contractor and Owner -supplied, is operational within industry and manufacturer's tolerances and is installed in accordance with design specifications. 2. The tests and operational checks shall determine the suitability for energizat on. .. Schedule tests and give a minimum of two weeks advance notice to the Architect. Reschedule testing for Owner convenience if required. D. Test Report:# •# of - completed report to the Architects later than fifteen days after# # # of -unless directed # e test reportabe bound # its contentscertified. The test report shall include the following:; 1 , Project information including: Building, name, address, date, and other pertinent information. List of equipment tested. Description of test. . List of test equipment used and calibration date. . Baseline, acceptable, or published target value for test with code or standard reference indicating where value was derived. 6. Test results that summarize all measured values with baseline values. 7. Conclusions and recommendations. Appendix, including appropriate test forms that show all measured values. E. Failure to Meet rest. I Any system material or workmanship which is found defective on toe basis of performance tests shall be reported directly to the Architect. 2. All Wed tests shall be sent immediately�by email to Engineer with proposed corrective action # proposed date and . Contractor shall replace the defective material or equipment as necessary, and have test repeated until test proves satisfactory without additional cost to the Owner. 4. The Contractor or testing agency shall have a calibration program which maintains all applicable test instrumentation within rated accuracy. The accuracy shall be traceable COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 04/29/201 260500-14 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177368 to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) in an unbroken chain. Instruments shall be calibrated in accordance with the following frequency schedule: a. Field Instruments. 6 months b. Laboratory Instruments. 12 months C, Leased specialty equipment. 12 months. (When accuracy is guaranteed by lessor, i.e., Cable). Gated calibration labels shall be visible on all test equipment. 1.201 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING: A. general; 1. Provide all necessary excavation and backfill for installation of electrical work in accordance with Division 2. 2. In general, follow all regulations of OSHA as specified in Part 1326, Subpart P, "`Excavations, Trenching and Shoring." Follow specifications of Division 26 as they refer specifically to the electrical work. B. Contact Owners of all underground utilities to have them located and marked, at least business days before excavation is to begin. Prior to starting excavation, brief employees on marking and color codes and train employees on excavation and safety procedures for natural gas lines. When excavation approaches gas lines, expense lines by carefully probing and hand digging. C. Backfilling shall not be started until all work has been inspected, tested and accepted. All backfill material shall be accepted by the soils engineer. In no ease shall lumber, metal or other debris be buried in with backfill. C. Trench Backfill 1. Backfill to 4 inches above top of conduits with sand, the same as used for conduit bed, compact properly. 2. Continue backfill to finish grade, using friable material free of rock and other debris. Install in 6 inch layers, each properly moistened and mechanically compacted prior to installation of ensuing layer. Compaction by hydraulic jetting is not permissible. E, After backfilling and compacting, any settling shall be refilled, tamped, and refinished at contrats expense. F. This contractor s..l repair and pay fordamage to finished G. Backfill near manholes or hand holes using sand, installing it in 6 inch layers to 4 inches above the shallowest conduit. Use suitable excavated material to complete the backfill, installed in 6 inch layers and mechanically compacted to seat against water infiltration. Compact to 95% below paving and stabs and 90% elsewhere. 1.21 NAMEPLATE DATA: A. Provide equipment with permanent operational data nameplate on each item of power operated equipment, indicating manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL — 04/29/2015 260500-1 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177308 capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and similar essential data. Install equipment so that nameplate is readily visible, B. Phase Rotation 1. New Building: Provide clockwise for] counterclockwise phase rotation on this project. Provide a label at service entrance main disconnect and the generator tap box Indicating phase rotation for the building. 2. Existing Building* Match existing phase rotation, which is clockwise/counterclockwise. 1.22 METHODS OF PROCEDURE (MOP}: A. Definition: Method of Procedure (MOP) is a written plan which describes the activities and procedures to safeguard the building's occupants and contents and to interface with the building's management, operations and security. Building occupants shall be defined as employees, patients, and visitors. B. Requirements: I . A MOP is required when a construction activity affects the safety of the occupants, equipment or valuable contents, or any supporting system; or essentially affects the building's management, operations or security. 2. A MOP is required for any shutdown or interruption of any system which affects the building occupants, including, but not limited to, infrastructure, life safety, electrical, and building management systems. S. A MOP is required when requested or deemed necessary by the Owner or Engineer. C. Development: 1. The Prime Contractor shall develop, submit, track and process the MOP. Any assistance required by the Subcontractors shall be provided. All MOP's shall be reviewed by the Prime Contractor prior to submitting the MOP to the Engineer. 2. All Mop's Shall Be Typed. 1 Contractor shall develop the MOP in a timely fashion prior to review and approval by all required parties. 4, Contractor shall develop the MOP with input from the subcontractor, where necessary. U. Form- Each MOP shall be a written document in narrative, descriptive or outline form supplemented with drawings, diagrams and schedules as necessary. The detailed format included in the appendix shall be utilized. E. Review and Approval: Contractor shall submit each MOP to the Engineer for review and approval. All MOP's require Owner's approval. F. Implementation: Contractor shall implement the MOP when approved by the Engineer and Owner in writing. No construction activity which requires a MOP shall proceed until the MOP is approved, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL — 04/29/2015 260600-16 G. Compliance: Contractor shall comply with the approved MOP, The Owner and Engineer reserve the right to stop the work for non-compliance with the MGP. Any east or time delay resulting from the work stoppage shall be borne by the Contractor. H. Posting: Cork shall not proceed on any facet of the work involving any MOP if an approved and signed MCP is not posted in the work area. 1.23 CLEANING: A. Refer to the Division 1 Section on project closeout or final cleaning for general requirements for final cleaning. S. glean all luminaires, lamps and lenses per manufacturers recommendations prior to final acceptance. Replace all inoperative lamps. 1.24 RECORD DOCUMENTS, - A. Refer to the Division 1 Section on Project Closeout or Project Record Documents for requirements. The following paragraphs supplement the requirementsof Division 1. B. Mark Drawings to indicate revisions to conduit size and location both exterior and interior; actual equipment locations, dimensioned from column limes; concealed equipment, dimensioned to column lines; distribution and branch electrical circuitry-, fuse and circuit breaker size and arrangements; support and hanger details, Change Orders, concealed control system devices, and any other relevant deviations from the Contract Documents. C. Mark shop drawings to indicate approved substitutions; Change Orders; actual equipment and materials used. D. Mark luminaire schedule on drawings to indicate manufacturer and complete catalog numbers of installed equipment. E. Mark schedules including panelboard, switchboard, motor control center, mechanical, kitchen and similar equipment schedules on drawings to indicate installed equipment and materials used, and any deviations or revisions to electrical load data and calculations: F. During construction, the contractor shall maintain at the job site a set of updated construction documents for the singular purpose of recording the above information. All record drawings shall be completed in erasable pencil. These changes small be updated weekly. G. revisions to the Contract Documents shall be legible and shall be prepared using the following color scheme. 1. red shall indicate new items, deviations and routing. 2. Green shall indicated items removed or deleted. 3. Slue shall be used for relevant notes and descriptions. At the completion of the project, submit these documents to the Architect/Engineer. This contract will not be considered completed until these record documents have been received and reviewed by the ArchitectiEngineer. 1.25 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA; A. Refer to the Division 1 Section on project closeout or operation and maintenance data for procedures and requirements for preparation and submittal of maintenance manuals. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL — 04/2912015 0500-1 177.308. t # • s t ». # ^' t #.:. • "„ � t is # » • »:. ,� t •... ». ♦` t: This contract will not be considered completed nor will final payment be made until all specified material, including test reports, and final Schedule of Values with all Electrical and Information Technology change order oasts included and identified is provided and the manual is reviewed by the Architect/Engineer. D. Healthcare Compliance documentation to be compiled under e single section by division 1 contractor. 1. Authority Having Jurisdiction sign off documentation Fire Alarm (provided to Division 15 by division 18) a: 100% test reports b: Monthly test criteria for temporary systems . Sprinkler o. Above ground piping system certification b. Tamper and flow certification c, Fire pump flow tests 4, Electrical System documentation (provided to division 15 by Division 18) '. Outlet testing; tension continuity, voltage drop testing documentation b. Isolation panel testing certification c. Low voltage switchboards d. Low voltage insulated case breakers e. Low voltage ground fault f. Grounding system COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL — 04/2912015 260500-18 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.30£3 5. MVAC System Documentation a. O.R. testing certification . Isolation room testing certification c. Testing and certification of clamper inspection and test d. 'Testing and certification of HEPA filters e. Testing and certification of smoke control and life safety systems 6. Boiler System a. State certification report 7. Medical Cas System a. State certification report , Backflow Devices a. Certification report 9. NEPA 101 Documentation (provided by Division 1 & 16 to Division 15) a. Authority Having Jurisdiction compliant drawings 10. Documentationfor IL M, ICRA, MOPS and Hot Work. (provided by Division 1 & 16 to Division 15) 1.26 PROJECT CLOSEOUT LIST: A. The contractor shall be responsible for providing the items listed on the checklist prior to final observation. Required test reports shall be included in the O & M manuals. (Checklist is located at the end of this section:) 1.27 WARRANTIES: A. Refer to the Division 1 Section on Warranties and Bonds for procedures and submittal requirements for warranties, Refer to individual equipment specifications for warranty requirements. In no case shell the warranty for the total electrical system be less than one year from date of acceptance by the Owner, B. Compile and assemble the warranties specified in Division 2, into a separated set of vinyl covered, three ring binders, tabulated and indexed for easy reference: C. Provide complete warranty information for each iters. Information to include product or equipment description, date of beginning of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or bond; and names; addresses, and telephone numbers and procedures for filing a claim and obtaining warranty services. 1.23 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS: A. The contractor shall maintain and have available at the jobsite current information ation on the following at all times: 1, Up to date record drawings: 2. Submittals 3, Site observation reports with current status of all action items. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL - 04/29/2015 260500-19 LMC. MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 4. Test results; including recorded values, procedures, and ether findings, 5. Outage information. Division 25 REQUIREMENTS SPEC ITEM SECTION REPOT/ DATA Mi "'s " a. ado u 00 I= COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR 260500 ELECTRICAL PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE OF X VALUES FINAL SCHEDULE OF VALUES X X ELECTRICAL COORDINATION DRAWINGS CONTRACTOR/EQUIPMENT WARRANTIES O&M MANUALS X X is X 260519 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL X X X POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260523 CONTROL VOLTAGE X Y ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES GROUNDING ANIS BONDING X X X FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS F HANGERS AND SUPPORTS F R X X X ELECTRICAL, SYSTEMS RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING X FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT X INTERMEDIATE METAL X' CONDUIT LIQUID -TIGHT FLEXIBLE X CONDUIT NON-METALLIC CONDUIT PVC RIGID METAL CONDUIT X SURFACE, METAL RACEWAY X X X WIREWAYS X X X COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL — 04/29/2015 260500-20 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177316 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL. --- 04/2912015 500-21 REQUIREMENTS SPCC ITEM SECTION REPORT/ DATA C -w Z U. c� c0 . a. 260534 CABIN 1"S, BOXES & FITTINGS X X X 260553 lCItwu AT1C?N OR X X ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260583 WIRING CONNECTIONS ?C 260323 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES X X X X X '' X 262726 WIRING DEVICES X X X 262600 OV RCURRENT PROTECTIVE X X X X - X X DEVICES 265000 LIGHTING X X X X x BALLASTS X X X X 263900 FIRS ALARM SYSTEMS x I X I X X x x X COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL. --- 04/2912015 500-21 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177,308 ELECTRICAL PRODUCT LISTING Page-of- Project ageofProject Name Date Contractor The following is e listing of equipment and materiels which will be used on the above -referenced project. This product listing does not remove the requirement for submittal of Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples as may be celled for elsewhere in these specifications. Provide this list to Architect/Engineer within 2 weeks of contract award: COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 04/2012015 260500-22 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 SECTION 26 0519 — LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 GENERAL 11 SUMMARY: A, This section includes wires, cables, and connectors for power, lighting, signal, control, and related systems rated 600 volts and less. 1,2 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical wire and cable products of types, sizes, and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer's Qualifications- Firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience with projects utilizing electrical wiring and cabling work similar to that required for this project, C. Conform to applicable code regulations regarding toxicity of combustion products of insulating materials. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: X Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on electrical wires, cables and connectors•, 1A DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Deliver wire and cable properly packaged in factory- fabricated type containers, or wound on NEMA -specified type wire and cable reels. B. Store wire and cable in clean dry space in original containers. Protect products from weather, damaging fumes, construction debris and traffic. C. Handle wire and cable carefully to avoid abrasing, puncturing and tearing wire and cable insulation and sheathing. Ensure that dielectric resistance integrity of wire /cable is maintained. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: X Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following (for each type of wire, cable, and connector): 1. Wire and Cable: a. American Insulated Wire b. Alcan CBelden Div; Cooper Industries. 6 Cerro e. Encore f. General Cable Corporation. g, Hhemp Wires, Inc. h. Southwire Company i, Okonite t . Superior Essex: , 1) Triangle 2) Excel 3) Royal 2. Connectors: a. O - /Gedney Co. b. AMP, Inc. c. Burndy Corporation. d. Ideal Industries, Inc. o. 3M Company f. Thomas and Betts Corp. 2.2 WIRES AND CABLES: A. General: Provide wire and cable suitable for the temperature, conditions, and location where installed. Building wire shall be insulated with THHN/THWNJXHHW insulation, rated 600 volt.. B. Conductors: Provide stranded conductors for all power, control, and lighting circuits. C. Conductor Material: Provide copper for all wires and cables, 1 Metal Clad Cable - Type MC: Sizes 14 AWQ through 10 AWG, copper conductors with 61 # thermoplastic # # r interlocked metal type covering. 2. Armored -Type HCF Cable: Sizes 14 AWG through 10 AWG, copper conductors with 600 volt thermoplastic insulation rated 90degrees C, steel interlocked metal type armor and bond wire t6 is clearly identified as an acceptable return grounding path. A green insulated equipment grounding conductor shall be includ;d in the assembly. Armor shall be galvanized steel, color coated green. Fitting shall be steel with double gnp saddle and locking nut. 3. Portable Corel: a. Type SO: Sizes 14 AWG through 2 AWG, copper conductors with 600 volt thermoset insulation 0.1 resistant insulation. b. Type G -GC: Sizes 1 AWG through 500 KCMIL, copper conductors with 600/2000 volt, 90 dereeC, ethylene -propylene insulation. 4. Gables: Provide the following types of cables in NEC approved locations and applications where permitted by the contract documents.Cables shall be U.L. listed and approved by the local building authority. All cables shall contain a green insulated equipment ground conductor of the same size as the neutral conductor. 2.3 CONNECTORS: A. Description: Provide UL -type factory -fabricated, solderless metal connectors of sizes, ampacity ratings, materials, types and classes for applications and for services indicated. Use connectors with temperatures equal to or greater than those of the wires upon which used. B. Provide 2 -hole compression lugs for all power feeder, neutral, and grounding, connections. (Including phase, neutral and grounding conductors. LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 C Provide connectors that are designed to accept stranded conductors where stranded conductors are used: PARI` 3 EXECUTION .f WIRE AND CABLE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE: A. Building Wire Install all building wire in raceway regardless of location. B. Metal Clad Cable/HCp: I . Maximum of 6 feet length for connecting luminaires in accessible ceilings to the local junction box. Maximum of 3 feet length for connecting luminaires in non -accessible ceilings to the local junction box. May not be used for branch circuit home runs, feeders, motor feeder circuits or in the following locations:. a. Emergency Systems b. Hazardous Systems . Sranch circuit conductors shall match color coding schedule within this specification section. May be used for branch circuit drops from a local junction box to underounter luminaires. C. Portable Cord: Use for flexible pendant leads to luminaires, outlets, and equipment where indicated and in compliance with codes. 12 INSTALLATION N OF WIRES AN 1 CABLES: A. General: Install electrical cables, Wires and connectors in Compliance with applicable requirements of NEC„ NEMA, UL, and NECA`s "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices, S. Coordinate wire/cable installation work, including electrical raceway and equipment connection work, with other work:. C. Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in same raceway. Use pulling Compound or lubricant, where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. N Use pulling means including, fish tape, cable, rope and basket weave Wite1cablegrips will not damage cables or - iM• not use rope hitches fore attachment to wire or cable. E. --• conduot6rsplices t6minimum,♦ •le junction boxes.s ► allowed in feeder, tontrol or fire alaft wiring. Connect unspliced wire to nuibbered terminal strips at each ar ratingsFInstallsplices and taps which possessequivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation than conductors• spliced. G. Use splice and tap connectors which are compatible with Conductor material, LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES — o4/29/2015 260519-3 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177,308 Tighten w w and terminals, includingand bolts,w wa manufacturees published torque tightening values. Wheremanufacturer'storquing requirements are notindicated, tighten connectorsand terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Std 486A for copper, ww• .w ww - ,, w x w wrw. w- w x r •• w x s ww• ,.w w - w• w r w w " w •- .wrw rt w w w w w - x - s � rt x w w w s x ,, w• •. r w x w x w w w w e w w r ,� w !' :w -w • w w x x x x• w _ +� w. x w w • w rt wr s 1� .:• x rw x w wx w i m w w w x �w w w w- � r • ,xw «w x x wwwx w w r w w x r w www- r w - rt w!• w- .wx xw w w • w w w �.w. r i w* w M. Make splices, taps and terminations to carry full arnpacity of conductors without perceptible temperature rise. N. Thoroughly tape the ends of spare conductors in boxes and cabinets. 0. Install exposed cable, parallel and perpendicular:to surfaces, or exposed structural members, and follow surface contours, where possible. P. Make all ground, neutral and line connections to receptacle and wiring device terminals as recommended by manufacturer. Provide ground jumper from outlet box to individual ground terminal of devices. Q. branch circuits whose length from panel to first outlet exceeds 100 feet for 120 volt circuits or 175 feet for 277 volt circuit shall be #10 or larger, as required to comply with the rational Electrical Code. R. Parallel conductors shall be cut to the same length: All splices in control panels, terminal junction boxes, low voltage control circuits, fire alarm, etc., conductors shall be on numbered terminal strip. T. Whereconduit is not required, plenum ".w cable shall beprovided in ceiling, floor or other plenum spaces, U. Provide wire training,• labeling, and terminalblocks rw xw in panelboards and a control rtw x including, but w xw to, lighting, transfer switch, fire alarm, and security cabinets,All w be installed neat and be labeled to match wiring diagrams, control devices, I Make temporary w x w to panelboard devices conductor to facilitate reconnections xw r• for balancing loads between phases. w• ww ww xw x .. ., rt w -w x x ww w w r+ w x w w w r w wHiM x w It.w- x w w •w w r LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 switchlegs, travelers, etc, shall be different and distinct for each voltage system. Switch legs shall be purple or pink, 33 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: X Test installed wires and cables with 1000 VDC megohm meter to determine insulation resistance levels to ensure requirements are fulfilled. Test shall be made on all feeders regardless of size and on all branch circuits with No. 4 AWG and larger conductors. The megger values obtained shall be compared to the minimum values listed in NETA. All phase conductors and cables shall be meggered after installation, and prior to termination. Submit test report. B. Prior to energization, test wires and cables for electrical continuity and for short-circuits. C. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuitry and demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements. Where necessary, correct malfunctioning units, and then retest to demonstrate compliance. 3.4 COLOR CODING SCHEDULE: 1 20/208 Volts Phase 277/480 Volts Black A Brown Red B Orange Blue C Yellow White Neutral Gray Green Ground Green B. Conductors shall be solid color for entire length, C. If solid color conductor insulation is not available and specific acceptance is given by the engineer for use of black conductor insulation, provide the following: 11 11 0 !!111,11111111111'' 111111111111 1111I•I11111,11:111oll 11 1 11 • ilI111111 p • 1111111 Z Conductors 8 AWG and larger shall have either solid color insulation as specified above for the entire length or be black with color coding at each termination and in each box or • For .. • 6 inches use half -tapped % inch plastic tape in the above specified color, Do not cover cable identification markings, Adjust tape locations to prevent covering • • PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes solid grounding of electrical systems and equipment. It includes basic requirements for grounding for protection of life„ equipment, circuits, and systems. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented in other sections of these Specifications. 12 SUBMITTALS: A. Product data for ground rods, connectors and connection materials, and grounding fittings. B. Wiring Diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams for electrical grounding and bonding work which indicates layout of ground rings, location of system grounding electrode connection, routing of grounding electrode conductors, also include diagrams for circuits and equipment grounding connections. 13 QUALITY ASSURANCE: AListing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. The terms "listed" and "labeled" shall be defined as they are in the National Electrical Code, *i. i1. & Manufacturers Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of grounding and bonding products, of types,• ratings required, and ancillary grounding • r stranded cable, copper braid and bus, grounding electrodes and plate electrodes, and bonding jumpers whose products have been th satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 C. Installers Qualifications: Firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical grounding work similar to that required for project. 2.1 MANUFACTURERS; A. Manufacturers: subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Surndy Corporation . Cadeld Div..;. Trico Products Inc. . Ideal Industries 4. OZ Gedney Div. heroweld 6. 'Thomas and Setts Corp. 22 GROUNDING AND BONDING PRODUCTS: A. Products. Of types indicated and of sizes and ratings to comply with NEC. Where types, sizes, ratings, and quantitiesindicated are in excess of NEC requirements, the more stringent requirements and the greater size, rating, and quantity indications govern. & Conductor Materials: Copper. MEN- 130=1 0431 =1 MHUMM AGeneral: Comply with Division 26 Section on Wires and Cables. Conform to NM except as otherwise indicated, for conductor properties, including stranding. B. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Green insulated. C. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Stranded cable. DBare Copper Conductors: Conform to the following: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B-3. 2. Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B-8. 3, Tinned Conductors: ASTM B-33. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS CONDUCTORS: A. Ground Bus: Bare annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section, B. Braided Bonding Jumpers: Copper tape, braided No, 30 gage bare copper wire, terminated with copper ferrules. C. Bonding Strap Conductor/Connectors: Soft copper, 0.05 inch thick and 2 inches wide, except as indicated. 2.5 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS: A. General: Listed and labeled as grounding connectors for the materials used. B, Pressure Connectors: High -conductivity -plated units. C. Bolted Clamps: Heavy-duty units listed for the application. D. Exothermic Welded Connections: Provided in kit form and selected for the specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items to be connected. A, Ground Rods: Copper -clad steel with high-strength steel core and electrolytic -grade copper outer sheath, molten welded to core. 1. Size: %" by 10 feet. PART 3 EXECUTION 31 APPLICATION: A. Equipment Grounding Conductor Application: Comply with NEC for sizes and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, except where larger sizes or more conductors are indicated. 1 Install separate insulated equipment grounding conductors with circuit conductors for the following in addition to those locations where required by Code: a. Feeders and branch circuits. GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS — 04/29/2015 260526-2 LMC: MR1 Equipment Replacement 177,308 b. Provide individual grounding and neutral conductors for each isolated ground receptacle. When individual or groups of isolated ground receptacles are on dedicated circuits, individual ground and neutral conductors for each circuit is acceptable. 1 11 1 11 1: jj� I lI C. Signal and Communications: For telephone, alarm, and communication systems, provide a #6 AWG minimum green insulated copper conductor in raceway from the grounding electrode system to each terminal cabinet or central equipment location, D. All systems shall be grounded in accordance with the NEC. 3.2 INSTALLATION: 1111111111111 lip IIIII I I'll" 111111111111111 111111 1111111111111111111111111 '111 IiI InIN 11 1 Jowl 111 I 113 LMC; MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 G. Where grounding conductors, grounding electrode conductors, or bonding conductors are hon -exposed, identify each with a 6 -inch band of green tape at each end and at 10 foot intervals. When run in conduits, provide color banding on conduit per section on Electrical Identification. 3.3 CONNECTIONS. A. general: Make connections in such a manner as to minimize possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible. 1. Use electroplated or hot -tin -coated materials to assure high conductivity and make contact points closer in order of galvanic series. 2. Make connections with clean bare metal at points of contact. 3. goat and seal connections involving dissimilar metals with inert material such as red lead paint to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces, BTerminate insulated equipment grounding c n i ifeeders and branch pressUre-type grounding lugs, Where metallic raceways terminate at metallic housings Without mechanical and electrical connection to the housing, terminate each conduit with a grounding bushing, Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to the ground bi i Bond e ! i •us conduits at both entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors. Terminate each conductor on an individual ground !. i terminal. i it . .. i. l • il.* ! -... ! •.. ! ".. i a ! !i :: • i.* ♦.. i.- i ,i �I i l.,.. i:. Vii..: • li. !* ! ., l:'" ! ': ! is i i"'.* *.!-i • •..- `• i `. i i • & Upon completion of installation of electrical grounding and bonding systems, test ground resistance with ground ! ! ! l.. ! is over 5 ohms,appropriate action i reduce resistance to 5 ohms,or ». s by driving additional ground rods-, then retest to demonstrate compliance. B. Ground Resistance 1, Grounding electrode resistance testing shall be accomplished with a ground resistance direct -reading single test meter utilizing the fall -of -potential method and two reference electrodes. Perform test prior to interconnection to other grounding systems. Orient GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS — 04/29/2015 260526- LMC. MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 the ground electrode to be tested and the two reference electrodes in a straight line spaced fifty (50) feet apart, Drive the two reference electrodes five (5) feet deep. C. Tests for patient -care areas: In addition to the test listed above, perform additional field tests and inspections for patient care areas. I After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements. Perform the following tests: a. Impedance: Measurement shall be made between the referenced point and the grounding contact of all receptacles in the patient care room. The maximum limit allowed is 0.1 ohms. bVoltage: Measurement shall be made under no-fault conditions between a reference point and all exposed fixed electrical equipment with conductive surfaces in the patient care vicinity, including but not limited to-, overbed wall - mounted fixtures, ceiling mounted exam lights, sensor faucets, etc. The maximum limit allowed is 20mV. 2. Prepare certified test reports in compliance with NFPA 99 and submit reports in conjunction with field quality control reports required in Division 26 "Wiring Devices". • mm • mss� [0101111, IF101(t] 12LIF141 lgff-g 2Prepare a written report and show temperature, humidity and condition of soil at time of tests. Report shall be certified by testing agency that identifies components checked and describes results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations and test results after remedial action. A. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and reestablish original grades except as otherwise indicated, Where sod has been removed, replace it as soon as possible after backfilling is completed, Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, Gable laying, and other Work to their original condition. Include necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, or friulching. Restore vegetation and disturbed paving to original condition, LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177396 SECTION 26 65 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FAR ELECTRICAL, SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes secure support from the building structure for electrical items by means of hangers„ supports, anchors, sleeves, inserts, seats, and associated fastenings. 11 SUBMITTALS: A. Product data for each type of product specified. 1. Hanger and support schedule showing manufacturer's figure number, size, spacing, futures, and application for each required type of hanger, support, sleeve„ seal, and fastener to be used. B. Shop drawings indicating details of fabricated products and materials. C. Engineered Design consisting of details and engineering analysis for supports for the following items: 1. Cable trays . Trapeze hangers for multipleconduit runs. PART - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:. 1. Slotted Metal Angle and U -Channel Systems: a. Allied Tube & Conduit b. B -Line Systems, Inc. c. Unistrut Diversified Products Conduit Sealing Bushings: a. O- CUedn y b: Cooper Industries, Inc: c. Killark Electric Mfg. Co. d. Madison Equipment Co. e. Raco, Inc. f. Spring City Electrical Mgf. Co. g. Thomas '& Betts Corp A, Coating: Supports, support hardware, and fasteners shall be protected with zinc coating or with treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance using approved alternative treatment, finish, or inherent material characteristic, Products for use outdoors shall be hot -dip galvanized. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 0412912015 260529-1 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 23 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICE& 1111 Jill ajilimt.-WIV41111 B. Fasteners- Types, materials, and construction features as follows: 1 Expansion Anchors* Carbon steel wedge or sleeve type. 2. Toggle Bolts: All steel springhead type. 3. Powder -Driven Threaded Studs: Heat-treated steel, designed specifically for the intended service. E. U -Channel Systems: 12 -gage steel channels, with 9/16 inch -diameter holes, at a minimum of 8 inches on center, in top surface. Provide fittings and accessories that mate and match with U -channel and are of the same manufacture. F. Supports-, Provide supporting devices of types, sizes and materials indicated; and having the following construction features: I One -Hole Conduit Straps: For supporting 1 inch and smaller rigid metal conduit; galvanized steel. Z Two -Hole Conduit Straps: For supporting 1 inch and larger rigid metal conduit, galvanized steel; -3/4 inch strap width, and 21/8 inch between center of screw holes. 2A FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICES: X General: Shop- or field -fabricated supports or manufactured supports assembled from U -channel components. B. Steel Brackets: Fabricated of angles, channels, and other standard structural shapes. Connect with welds and machine bolts to form rigid supports. C. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following: 1. Steel Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe. 2. EMT, Ill or Rigid Conduit. 2.5 FIRE SEALS: B. Flame Spread: 25 or less, ASTM E84 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS -- 04/29/2015 260529-2 • •... * •. a tF:: a -...; r # ! "` f i • jgj§1136012051•... !. (') 3 (T) 3 Time -rated floor or wall assemblies. (F) 3 (T) 3 Openings between floor slabs and curtain wall, Dg Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire seals of the following:. 1. 31x1 Company 2. Tremco 3, Hilti PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: Install supporting devices to fasten electrical components securely and permanently in accordance with NEC requirements. B. Coordinate with the building structural system and with Cather electrical installation, C. Junction Box Supports: Comply with the NEC and the following requirement: Use 1/4" all -thread rod from structure to support junction boxes. D} Raceway Supports: Comply`with the NEC and the following requirements: I Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for selection and installation of supports. . Strength of each support shall be adequate to carry present arca futureload multiplied by a safety factor of at least four. Where this determination results in a safety allowance of less than 200 lbs, provide additional strength until there as a minimum of 200 lbs safety allowance in the strength of each support. 3. Install individual and multiple (trapeze) raceway gangers and riser clamps as necessary to support raceways. provide U -bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for ganger assembly and for securing banger rods and conduits, 4. Use #fg ceiling wire to support individual conduits tap to 3%4inch with spring steel fasteners. Use of ceiling support wires is unacceptable. Support' parallel rums of horizontal raceways together on'trapeze-type hangers. Use 3/3 inch diameter or larger threaded steel rods for support, . Support individual horizontal raceways by separate pipe hangers. Spring steel fasteners may be used in lieu of hangers only for 1-1/2 inch and smaller raceways serving lighting and receptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings only. For hanger rods with spring steel fasteners, use'/4 titch -diameter or larger, threaded steel. Use spring steel fasteners that are specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing. For hanger rods supporting 1-112 inch or larger conduits provide 313 inch minimum threaded steel rods with pipe hangers. LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 7. Space supports for raceways in accordance with NEC. When there are 4 or more 2 inch conduits in a trapeze, supports shall be spaced 5 feet O.C. & In all runs, arrange support so the load produced by the weight of the raceway and the enclosed conductors is carried entirely by the conduit supports with no weight load on raceway terminals. 9. Threaded rod supports to have bottoms cut off at a maximum length equal to rod diameter below bottom nut. E. Conductor Supports: Comply with the NEC and the following requirements: 1 Support individual conductors • Gables by separate clamps with rubber or plastic grommet, fasten using a non-metallic bolt and nut, and secure clamps to unistrut supports anchored to structure (multiple clamps may be secured to a single unistrut support), Individual conductors or cables may be served utilizing a vinyl -or fiberglass • which shall be anchored to the structure. & Horizontal conductors not more than 3 feet o.c. b, Vertical conductors not more than 5 feet o.c. 3. Install simultaneously with installation of conductors. F. Miscellaneous Supports: Support miscellaneous electrical components separately and as required to produce the same structural safety factors as specified for raceway supports. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnects, control enclosures, pull boxes, junction boxes, transformers, and other devices. extent of fire rated assemblies. 1. Conduit Seals: Install seals for conduit penetrations of exterior walls below grade. Tighten sleeve seal screws until seating grommets have expanded to form watertight seal. J. Fastening: Unless otherwise indicated, fasten electrical items and their supporting hardware securely to the building structure, including but not limited to conduits, raceways, cables, cable trays, busways, cabinets, panelboards, transformers, boxes, disconnect switches, and control components in accordance with the following: I . Fasten by means of wood screws or screw-type nails on wood, toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete or solid masonry, and machine screws, welded threaded studs, or spring -tension clamps on steel. Threaded studs driven by a powder charge and provided with lock washers and nuts may be used HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS — 04/29/2015 260529-1 instead of expansion bolts and machine or wood screws, where authorized by the Owner and structural engineer. Do not weld conduit, pipe straps, or items other than threaded studs to steel structures. In partitions of light steel construction, use sheet metal screws. 2, Holes cut to depth of more than 1-1/2 inches in reinforced concrete beams or to depth of more than 3/4 inch in concrete shall not cut the main reinforcing bars, Fill holes that are not used. 1 Ensure that the load applied to any fastener does not exceed 25 percent of the proof test load, Use vibration- and shock -resistant fasteners for attachments to concrete stabs, K, Communication and Telephone Cable Supports: Use No, 9 ceiling wire to support individual or small bundles of cables run above accessible ceilings. & Where U -channel systems, angles, brackets or other standard structural metal shapes are readily accessible and exposed to personnel, provide plastic or rubber end caps. B, Where threaded rod supports are readily accessible and exposed to personnel, provide plastic or rubber end caps. FEW 2, Surface Preparation: Surface Preparation to be in contact with firestopping materials shall be free of dirt, grease, oil, loose material or other substances that may affect proper fitting or the required fire resistance. 11 ! i � i � i I i I I I i 11 ! ! 11 1! ! I I 1 1! 1 1 � 1111;II!!1111111 ilfilill 11111111I�l illi'l !1!! 111,11111 C, Cleaning: After completion of firestopping work in any area, equipment shall be reviewed a walls, ceilings and all other surfaces not to receive firestopping shall be cleaned of deposits firestop materials. -1 D. Inspection: The architect may select and the Owner will pay an independent testing laboratory to examine firestopped areas to ensure proper installation prior to concealing or enclosing the firestopped areas. LMC; MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 SECTION 26 0533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY: A. Extent of raceway work is indicated by drawings and schedules, Provide complete conduit systems for all conductors unless otherwise specified. B. Types of raceways specified in this section include the following: 1. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT). 2. Flexible metal conduit. . Intermediate metal conduit (IMC). 4. Liquid -tight flexible metal conduit. 5. Non-metallic Conduit and Ducts. . Rigid metal conduit (RGC), 7. Surface metal raceways. 8. Wirewas, 11 QUALITY ASSURANCE; A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of raceway systems of types and sues required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 yearn B. Installer'sQualifications: Firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical raceway work similar to that required for this project. 1.3 SUBMITTALS. A. Product Data; Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including specifications and installation instructions, for each type of raceway system required. Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned drawings of surface metal raceway systems showing layout of raceways and fittings, spatial relationships to associated equipment, and adjoining raceways, if any. Show connections to electrical power panels and feeders. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following.. 1. Rigid Metal Conduit: a. Allied b. Wheatland C. Triangle d. Western Tube & Conduit RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS — 04/2912015 260533-1 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 17738 2. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): a. Allied b. Triangle c. Western Tube & Conduit 3. PVC Coated: a. Rab Roy b. Perma Cote C, OCAL 4. EMT Conduit: a. Allied b. Republic C Triangle d. LTV e. Western "lube & Conduit b. Non -Metallic Conduit. a, Carlon b. MPF Can -Tex . PW 8. Steel Fittings. a, /Z Gedney b, Raco C. Appleton , EPT e. Midwest f, Picoma g, Steel City ConduitBodies. a. O/Z Gedney b. Kllark c, Regal d. Appleton e. Crouse Hinds 8. Surface Metal Raceways: a. Wiremold Co. b. Airey Thompson Co. B -Line Systems, Inc. d. Isoduct Energy Systems e. Square D. Co. f, Mono -Systems, Inc. . Wireway: . Square D. Co. . Circle AVS Products c. Erickson Electric Equipment Co. . G.S. Metals Corp. e. Hoffman Engineering Co. f. Wadsworth Electric Mfg. Co., Inc. 2,2 META. CONDUIT AND TUBING; A. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (RGC): I. Conduit: Rigid steel, zinc -coated Inside and outside, threaded ends. Fittings: Threaded galvanized steel, bushings shall have nylon insulated throat. B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMG); 1. Conduit: Rigid intermediate grade galvanized imide and outside, threaded ends. Fittings:: Threaded galvanized steel, bushings shall have nylon insulated throat. C, IVC Externally Coated Rigid Steel Conduit: Fittings:I . Conduit: Rigid steel zinc -coated with external coating of PVC. -a•-• galvanized steelcoating, bushings shall have insulatednylon throat, G. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): 1. Conduit= Galvanized steel tubing. . Fittings:; Steel compression fittings for rain -tight and concrete -tight applications. Steel set -screw for all other connections. Set -screw quick fit type for 2-1/2 inches and larger may be used. Bushings shell be threaded and have nylon insulated throat or nylon bushing: E. Rigid Aluminum Conduit, 1 . Not allowed unless otherwise noted. F. Flexible Metal Conduit; I Conduit. Continuous spiral wound, interlocked, zinc -coated steel, approved for grounding. 2. Fittings'. SteeL Straight connector shall be one-piece body, female end with clamp and deep slotted machine screw for«.... • conduit,.+ • threaded ..:. end provided with Angle connectors. be two piece iii removable upp section, female end with clamp and deep slotted irlachine screw for securing conduit, and threaded male endprovided with a locknut,it be terminated with threaded bushings having nylon insulated throats, G. Liquid -Tight Flei i i I. Conduit.Continuous spiral wound, interlocked zinc -coated steel with polyvinyl chloride ('VC) jacket, approved for grounding. _15 2. Fittings: Steel. Straight and angle connectors shall be the same as used with flexible metal conduit but shall be provided with a compression type steel ferrule and neoprene gasket sealing rings. Z3 NON-METALLIC CONDUIT AND DUCTS: A. Rigid Non -Metallic Conduit (RNC): 1. Conduit: Schedule 40 or 80 polyvinyl chloride (PVC), 9000 for direct burial or concrete encasement, 2, Fittings: Mate and match conduit type and material. Cement as recommended by manufacturer. 2A CONDUIT BODIES: A. General: Types, shapes and sizes, as required to suit individual applications and NEC requirements. Provide matching gasketed covers secured with corrosion -resistant screws. BMetallic Conduit and Tubing: Use malleable iron conduit bodies. Use bodies with threaded hubs for threaded raceways and in hazardous locations. C. Nonmetallic Conduit: Use nonmetallic conduit bodies. Z5 WIREWAYS: III i Im11111111111 ill I " EMEEM 1 Construction: 16 -gauge galvanized sheet metal parts for 4" x 4" to 6" x 6" sections, a 14 gauge parts !or 8" x 8" and larger sections. Provide knockouts only in bottom of troughs, with suitable adapters to facilitate attaching to other NEMA 3R enclosures. not use gasketing that can rip or tear during installation, or would compromise rain-tig e capability of the trough. Do not use cover screws that will protrude into the trough arl and damage wire insulation. 2, Finish- Provide 14 -gauge and 16 -gauge galvanized sheet metal parts with corrosion - resistant phosphate primer and baked enamel finish. Plate hardware to prevent corrosion. RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS -- 04/29/2015 260533-4 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.366 2.6 SURFACE METAL RACEWAYS.- A. ACEWAYS:A. General: Sizes and channels as indicated. Provide fittings that match and mate with raceway. All circuits either factory or field installed shall have a separate neutral conductor. 1. Type 1: Multi -outlet assembly with prewired outlets, -wire, multiple circuits, quantity as indicated, with single outlets on 12 inch centers. . Surface Metal Raceway. Galvanized steel with snap -on cover: Finish in manufacturer's standard prime coating suitable for field painting. Provide raceways of suitable size based on fill for circuits indicated on the drawings. Provide all necessary boxes, covers, extensions, fittings„ etc. to farm a complete assembly. B. Boxes for Surface Raceways. Designed, manufactured and supplied by raceway manufacturer for use with specified raceway. 2.7 CONDUIT SIZES: A, Conduit sizes shall be as shown on the drawings. If the conduit size is not given on the drawings, the conduit shall be sized in accordance with NEC based on the number of conductors enclosed plus a parity sized equipment ground conductor and be subject to the fallowing minimum sues. 1. Rigid, Intermediate, and EMT" Conduit: 3/4 inch for all rains except lighting switch legs, 277 volt lighting branch circuits, temperature control and fire alarm which may be 1/2inch. 2. Flexible and Liquid -might Flexible Conduit: 1/2inch for all runs. 3. MC Cable: 3/6 inch to undercounter luminaires, 1/2inch for all other runs. . Underground or Concrete Encased Nonmetallic Conduit. 3/4inch for all runs. 6. Conduits used for home runs shall contain only the conductors for the circuits indicated on the drawings. Combining multiple home runs into a single conduit will not be permitted.. 2.6 RACEWAY SEALING COMPOUND: A. Nonhardening,for .ntact, not deleterious. cable insulation, at temperatures as low as 35 deg F (1 deg C), withstands temperature of 300 deg F (149 deg without slump, and adheres to clean surfaces of plastic ducts, metallic conduits, conduit coatings, concrete, masonry, lead, cable sheaths, cablejackets, insulation materials and th common metals. I PART 3 _ EXECUTION 3,1 INSPECTION: supportAExamine areas and conditions under which raceways are to be installed, and substrate which will aceways. Notify Contractors of conditionsdetrimental to • 4•. completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.2 CONDUIT SCHEDULE: A. Buried Raceways- PVC Coated rigid steel galvanized conduit or Schedule 40 OR 80, rigid PVCplastic•4.. • LMC. MRI Equipment Replacement 177,308 B. Raceways embedded in concrete dabs or wails in contact with earth: Schedule 40, IVC plastic conduit. IVC coated rigid steel galvanized conduit, or PVC coated intermediate metal conduit. C. raceways embedded in concrete slabs above grade level: Rigid steel galvanized conduit or Schedule 40 OR 80 rigid PVC plastic conduit in slab. D. Raceways Through Foundation Walls Below Grade. One 10 foot section of IVC coated rigid steel galvanized, extending from 1 foot inside the foundation wall. E. Raceways in locations subject to mechanical injury: Rigid steel galvanized conduit OR intermediate metal conduit.: Locations subject to mechanical injury include, but are not limited to, the following.. 1. Exposed conduits outdoors. Exposed conduits in dock areas and high/medium bay locations up to 25 feet above finished floor. K. UPS Circuits- Al[ UPS circuits shall b. run in metal conduit and shall be + • separate from all'other circuits. LRework or extensions of existing conduit shall include the use of similar materials to the existing conduit type unless otherwise electricalX General: Install racewaysaccordance installation instruction, applicable - of and as follows: I Conceal all conduit unless indicated otherwise, within finished walls, ceilings, and floors. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flu" and steam or hot water pipes. ! square and at proper Raceway:Z Elevation of raceway& Where horizontal raceway is installed near water and steam piping, route above piping . ! as lis' to structure as possible n • w M"[132i HIM LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.303' b. Route raceway as close to structure as possible. 3. Complete installationof electrical raceways before starting installation of conductors within raceways. 4. Provide supports for raceways as specified elsewhere in Division 15. 5. prevent foreign matter from entering raceways by using temporary closure protection. fa. Protect stub -ups from damage where conduits rise from floor slabs. Arrange so curved portion of bend is not visible above the finished slab. Make bends and offsets so the inside diameter is not effectively reduced. Unless otherwise indicated, keep the legs of a bend in the same plane and the straight legs of offsets parallel. 3. Use raceway fittings that are types compatible with the associated raceway and suitable for the use and location, Install expansion fittings across all structural construction joints and expansion/deflection couplings across all structural expansion joints. Run raceways parallel and perpendicular to building elements and other equipment with a minimum of mends in the shortest practical distance considering the type of building construction and obstructions except as otherwise indicated. 10, raceways embedded in slabs: (Allowed only by written authorization of Structural Engineer/Architect): Install with a minimum of bends, in the shortest practical distance, in middle third of the slab thickness where practical, and leave at least 1 inch concrete cover. Tie raceways to reinforcing rads or otherwise secure them to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete placement. Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in the concrete. Run conduit lamer than 1 inch trade size, parallel with or at right angles to the main reinforcement; where at right angles to the reinforcement, the conduit shall be close to one of the supports of the slab. Where nonmetallic conduit is used, raceways must be converted to IVC coated rigid steel conduit before rising above floor. 11, Install exposed raceways parallel and perpendicular to nearby surfaces or structural members and follow the surface contours as much as practical. 12. Install vertical feeder conduits in exterior walls, core walls, or chase spaces. Cao not install in interior wall partition ,areas. 1. Ron exposed and parallel raceways together, bake beads in parallel runs from the same center line so that the bends are parallel. Factory elbows may be used only where they can be installed parallel: In other cases provide field bends for parallel raceways. 14. .Make raceway joints tight. Where joints cannot be made tight, use bonding jumpers to provide electrical continuity of the raceway system. Make raceway terminations tight. Where terminations are subject to vibration; use bonding` bushings or wedges to assure electrical continuity. Where subject to vibration or dampness, use insulating bushings to protect conductors. Joints in non-metallic conduits shall be made with solvent cement in strict accordance' with manufacturer's recommendations. 15. Tighten set screws of threadless fittings with suitable tool. 18. Provide nylon pull string with printed footage indicators having not less than 200 pounds tensile strength. Leave not less than 12 inches of slack at each end of the pull string. Identify with tags at each end the origin and destination of each empty conduit and indicate same on all empty or spare conduits on the as -built drawings. 19. Telephone and Signal System Raceways: Install raceways with maximum lengths at 100 feet and with a maximum of two, 90 degrees radiused bends or equivalent. Install 2'x 2* pull boxes where necessary to comply with these requirements. Install long sweep bends for all data and voice raceways. 20Install raceway seating fittings in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Locate fittings at suitable, approved, accessible locations and fill them with UL -listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway seating fittings at the following points and elsewhere as indicated: a. Where conduits enter or leave hazardous locations. b. Where conduits pass from warm locations to cold locations, such as the boundaries of refrigerated spaces and air-conditioned spaces. C. Where conduits enter through a foundation wall or stub -up through a stab on grade floor. d. Where required by the NEC. 111 111 SUN 7111(arnmLe UU12111WRIAMA WMA 21 PVC externally coated rigid steel conduit: Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduit. RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS — 04/29/2015 260533-8 24. Where conduits are to be installed through structural framing members, the Contractor shall provide sleeves, The Architect/Engineer's written approval must be obtained prior to cutting, notching or drilling of structural framing members, 25. Ream the ends of all cut and/or threaded conduit. Ends shall be cut square. 26. Use of running threads for rigid or intermediate metallic conduit are not permitted. When threaded couplings cannot be used, provide 3 piece union or solid coupling, 37. Provide separate raceway systems for each of the following-, a. Lighting b. Power Distribution c. Communications and Data d. Emergency (Essential) RACEWAYS AMC} BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS — 04/29/2015 260533-9 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.3€16 1) Lighting 2) Power Distribution ) Equipment branch b) Critical branch c) Life Safety branch e. UPS f. Eire Alarm . Temperature Control h. Paint new exposed conduits to match existing exposed conduits where installed in areas with existing painted conduits or where otherwise indicated. 38. Provide rebar and tie downs for all conduits and conduit rads to be installed with concrete or slurry to prevent conduit "float". B. Install buried electrical line warnings per Division 26 section - "Electrical identification". D. Install labeling as required in Division 26 section - "Electrical Identification" 3.4 INSTALLATION OF SURFACE RACEWAYS ANIS WIREWAYS; A. Surface Raceways and Wireways: Mechanically assemble metal enclosures and raceways to form continuous electrical conductor and connect to electrical boxes„ finings and cabinets a to provide effective electrical continuity and rigid mechanical assembly. 1. Where practicable, avoid use of dissimilar metals throughout system to eliminate possibility of electrolysis. Where dissimilar metals are in contact, coat all surfaces with corrosion inhibiting compound before assembling., Install expansion fittings in ,all raceways wherever structural expansion joints are crossed. 3. flake changes in direction of raceway run with proper fittings, supplied by raceway manufacturer. Field bends of raceway sections are not permitted. . Properly support and anchor raceways for their entire length by structural materials. Raceways are not to span any space unsupported. 6. Use boxes as supplied by raceway manufacturer wherever )unction„ pull or device boxes are required. Standard electrical °'handy"boxes, etc., are not permitted for use with surface raceway installations. 6. Install an insulated grounding conductor in all wireways and surface raceways. Bond grounding conductor to all wireways, and surface raceways. 7, Paint new exposed surface metal raceway to match adjacent surfaces where raceway is installed in finished areas such as lobbies, corridors, and normally occupied spaces. 6. Surface raceways and wireways are acceptable only where specifically indicated on the drawings. The proposed use of surface raceways and wireways shall be submitted for review by the Engineer prior to installation. RACEWAYS AND BOXES Et7R ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS - 04/29/2015 260533-10 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 9. Common wireways are not acceptable for convergence of multiple circuits unless specifically indicated on the drawings. The proposed use of a common wireway shall be submitted for review by the Engineer prior to installation. 10, The proposed use of wireways above or below panelboards, switchboards, motor control centers, and other electrical equipment shall be submitted along with a layout drawing for review by the Engineer prior to installation. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A. Upon completion of installation of raceways, inspect interiors of raceways; clear all blockages and remove burrs, dirt and construction debris, END OF SECTION 26 0533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS — 04129/2015 260533-11 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 SECTION 26 03534 CABINETS, BOXES, AND FITTINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY: A. This section includes cabinets, boxes, and fittings for electrical installations and certain types of electrical fittings not covered in ether sections. Types of products specified in this section include: . Cutlet and device boxes. Z pull and junction boxes. 3. Service fittings. 4. Cabinets. . dinged door enclosures, B, Conduit -body -type electrical enclosures and wiring fittings are specified in the Division 26 Section on Raceways. 1.2 DEFINITION& A. Cabinets: An enclosure designed either for surface or for flush mounting and having a frame, or trim in which a door or doors may be mounted: B. Device Box: An outlet box designed to house a`receptacle device or a wiring box designed to house a switch. C, Enclosure: A box, case, cabinet, or housing for electrical wiring or components. Di Hinged Door Enclosure: An enclosure designed for surface mounting and having swinging doors or covers secured directly to and telescoping with the walls of the box. E. Cutlet Box. A wiring enclosure where current is taken from a wiring system to supply utilization equipment: F. Wiring Box: An enclosure designed to provide access to wiring systems or for the mounting of indicating devices or of switches for controlling electrical circuits. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit product data for cabinets and enclosures with classification higher than NEMA 1. B. Shop drawings for floor boxes and boxes, enclosures and cabinets that are to be shop fabricated, (non -stock items), For shop fabricated junction and pull bones, show accurately scaled views and spatial relationships to adjacent equipment. Show box types, dimensions, and finishes. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: 1'. Cabinets: CABINETS, BOXES, AND FITTINGS - 04/29/2015 260534-1 Lite. MRI Equipment Replacement 177,306 Hoffmana. # # Co. bErickson Electrical EquipmentCo. Electric P lbo # d. Parker Electrical Mfg. Co. e, Spring City Electrical Mfg. Co. f. Square M 22 CABINETS, BOXES, AND FITTINGS, GENERAL: A. Electrical Cabinets, Boxes, and Fittings: Of indicated types, sizes, and NEMA enclosure classes. Where not indicated, provide units of types, sues, and classes appropriate for the use and location. Provide all items complete with covers and accessories required for the intended use. Provide gaskets for units in damp or wet locations. 2.3 MATERIALS AND FINISHES: A. Sheet Steel: Flat -roiled, code -gage, galvanized steel. B. Fasteners for General Use. Corrosion resistant screws and hardware including cadmium and zinc plated items. C. Fasteners for Lamp or Wet Locations-, Stainless steel screws and hardware, DGast Metal for Boxes, Enclosures, and Covers, Copper -free aluminum except as otherwise specified. E. Exterior Finish; Gray baked enamel for items exposed in finished locations except as otherwise indicated. F. Painted Interior Finish: Where Indicated, white baited enamel.Emergency system cabinets and boxes shall be red. G. Fittings for Boxes, Cabinets, and Enclosures; Conform to UL 514B. Malleable iron or zinc plated steel for conduit hubs, bushings and box connecters. 2A METAL OUTLET, DEVICE, AND SMALL WIRING BOXES: A, General: Conform to UL 514A, "Metallic Outlet Boxes, Electrical," and UL 514B, "Fittings for Conduit t Outlet Boxes,"Boxes shall be of #. shape,and depth to suit each location and application. rings& Steel Boxes: Conform to NEMA OS 1, "Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports," Boxes shall be sheet steel with stamped knockouts, threaded screw holes and accessories Suitable for each location including mounting brackets and straps, cable clamps, exterior # fixture studs. CCast-Aluminum Boxes: Copper free aluminum threaded raceway entries, and features and accessories suitable for each location including mounting ears, threaded screw holes for devices and closure plugs, NONMETALLICAND + WIRING A. General; Conform to NEMA OS 2, 'Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports" and UL 5140, "Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush Device Boxes and Covers." CABINETS, BOXES, AND FITTINGS - 04%29/2015 260534-2 •• a-« •• - • f - � .: • • • ••• ,, -• • f f. •' 1. ^{. threadedE� Cast -Aluminum Boxes: Molded of copper free aluminum, with gasketed cover and integral conduit F. Malleable or Cast -Iron Boxes: Molded of iron alloy with gasketed cover and integral threaded conduit entrances. 2.7 CABINETS: D, mocks: Combination spring catch and key lock, with all locks for cabinets of the same system keyed alike, locks may be omitted on signal, power, and lighting cabinets located within wire closets and mechanical -electrical rooms. Locks shall be of a type to permit doors to latch closest without locking. CABINETS, BOXES, AND FITTINGS - 04/29/201 260534-3 177.308 A. Comply with UL 55, "Cabinets and Enclosures" and NEMA ECS 6, "Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems." B. Construction: Sheet steel, 16 gage, minimum, with continuous welded seams. NEMA class s indicated; arranged for surface mounting. C. boors: Hinged directly to cabinet and removable, with approximately',/ inch flange around all edges, shape to cooper edge of box. Provide handle operated, key locking latch. Individual door width shall be no greeter than 24 inches. Provide multiple doors where required.. D. Mounting Panel;: Provide painted removable internal mounting panel for component installation, E. Enclosure: NEMA 1 except as indicated. Where door gasketing is required, provide neoprene gasket attached with oil -resistant adhesive, and held in place with steel retaining strips. For all enclosures of class higher than NEMA 1, use hubbed raceway entrances. 2.9 CAST METAL ENCLOSURES WITH HINGED DOORS: A. Copper free aluminum with bolted, doors. Where used at hazardous (classified) locations, enclosures shall conform to UL and shall be listed and labeled for the classification of hazard involved, PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL. ALocations. Install items where indicated and where required to suit code requirements a installation conditions. B. trap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed and plug unused conduit hubs.. C. Support and fasten items securely in accordance with Division 26 Section on Supporting Devices. X Sizes shall be adequate to meet NEC volume requirements, but in no case smaller than sizes E, Remove sharp edges where they may come in contact with wiring or personnel. 3.2 APPLICATIONS: A. Cabinets. Mush mounted, NEMA enclosure type 1 except as otherwise indicated. B. Hinged Door Enclosures Indoor. NEMA type 1 enclosure except as indicated. C. Hinged Door Enclosures Outdoors. NEMA Type 4. Install drip hood, factory tailored to individual units. D. Hinged Door Enclosures in Corrosive Locations: NEMA type 4X nonmetallic enclosure. CABINETS„ BOXES, AND FITTINGS - 04/29/2015 260534-4 LMC. MRI Equipment Replacement 177,308 E. Outlet Boxes and Fittings. Install outlet and device boxes and associated covers and fittings of materials and NEMA types suitable for each location and in conformance with the following requirements: 1. Interior Dry locations:: NEMA Type 1, sheet steel or nonmetallic as permitted by local code. 2. Locations Exposed to Weather or Dampness'. Gast metal, NEMA type 3R. 3. Wet locations; NEMA Type 4 enclosures. 4. Corrosive Locations: NEMA Type 4X enclosures. F. Pull and Junction Boxes. Install pull and junction boxes of materials and NEMA typos suitable for each location except as otherwise indicated,< 3.3 INSTALLATION OF OUTLET BOXES; A. Outlets at Windows and Doors: locate close to window trim. For outlets indicated above doors center outlets above the door opening except as otherwise indicated. Column and PilasteLocations: Loutlet boxes for switches and re*f . on columns or pilasters so the centers of the columns are clear for future installation of partitions. C. Locations in Special Finish MaterialsFor outlet boxes for receptacles and switches mounted in desks or furniture cabinets or in glazed tile, concrete block, marble, brick, stone or wood walls, use rectangular shaped boxes with square corners and ttitight sides. Install such boxes without plaster dngs� Saw cut all recesses for outlet boxes in exposed masonry walls. IJ. Gasketed Boxes. At the following locations use malleable or cast metal, threaded hub type boxes with Basketed weatherproof covers: 1. Exterior locations. . Where surface mounted on unfinished walls, columns or pilasters. (Cover gaskets may be omitted in dry locations). . Where exposed to moisture laden atmosphere. 4. Where indicated. EMounting.- Mount outlet boxes for switches with the long axis vertical or as indicated. Mount boxes for receptacles vertically, except above counter receptacles to be mounted horizontally, Three or more gang boxes shall be mounted with the fang axis horizontal. Locate box covers or device plates so they will not span different types of building finishes either vertically or horizontally, f .+ - boxes for *. near doors A fe opposite thehinges.. ♦ close to door trim, even though electrical ff plans may show them on #..« side. Provide f.*. box supports,for - « boxes . -f on -. •. and !...deaf*: stud to stud deep,support for electrical receptacle boxes installed on metal studs, FCeiling Outlets: For fixtures, where wiring is concealed, use outlet boxes 4 inches square by 1-1/2 inches G. Cover Plates for Surface Boxes: Use plates sized to box front without overlap, Protect outlet boxes to prevent entrance of plaster, and debris. Thoroughly clean foreign material from boxes before conductors are installed. CABINETS, BOXES, ANIS FITTINGS - 04/2912015 260534-5 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 1. Concrete Boxes: Use extra deep boxes to permit side conduit entrance without interfering with reinforcing, but do not use such boxes with over 6 inch depth. J. Existing Nutlet Boxes: Where extension rings are required to be installed, drill new mounting holes in the rings to align with the mounting holes on the existing boxes where existing holes are not aligned. K Back to back outlet boxes are not permitted. Separate boxes a=minimum of 6 inches Mn standard walls and 24 inches Mn acoustical walls. .4 INSTALLATION OF FULL AND JUNCTION BOXES: A. Box Selection: For boxes in main feeder conduit runs, use sues not smaller than 8 inches square by 4 inches deep. Cho not exceed 6 entering and 6 leaving raceways in a single box. Quantities of conductors (including equipment grounding conductors) Mn pull or junction box shall not exceed the following: Size of Maximum no. of Largest Conductors Conductors in in Box Box No. 410 AWG 80 250 MM 20 500 MCMC 15 Over 500 MCMC 10 B. Cable Supports. Install clamps, grids, or devices to which cables may be secured. Arrange cables so they may be readily identified. Support cable at least every 30 inches inside boxes. C. Mount, pull boxes , with the covers, DProvide pull and junction boxes a telephone, signal,• other systems at least normalpercent larger than would be required by Article 370 of NEC,,or as indicated. - Locate boxes strategically and provide shapes to permit easy pulling of future wires or cables of types s 3,5 INSTALLATION OF CABINETS AND HINGED DOOR ENCLOSURES: A. Mount with fronts straight and plumb. B. Install with tops 78 inches above floor. C. Set cabinets in finished spaces flush with walls. 3.6 € ROUNDIN A. Electrically ground metallic cabinets, boxes, and enclosures. Where wiring to item includes a grounding conductor;, provide a grounding terminal in the interior of the cabinet, box or enclosure. CABINETS, BOXES, AND FITTINGS - 04/2012015 260534-6 LMC: MR[ Equipment Replacement 177308 17 CLEANING AND FINISH REPAIR: A. Upon completion of installation, inspect components. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish including chips, scratches, abrasions and weld marks. S. Galvanized Finish- Repair damage using a zinc -rich paint recommended by the tray manufacturer, C. Painted Finish: Repair damage using matching corrosion inhibiting touch-up coating. END OF SECTION 26 0534 CABINETS, BOXES, AND FITTINGS - 04/29/2015 260534-7 LICA MRI Equipment Replacement 177,308 1.1 SUMMARY- . This Section includes identification of electrical materials, equipment, and installations, It includes requirements for electrical identification components including but not limited to the following. 1. Buried electrical line warnings. 2. Identification labeling for raceways, cables, and conductors. 1 Operational instruction signs. 4. Warning and caution signs. . Equipment labels and signs. 1,2 SUBMITTALS: X General, Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1. Product Data for each type of product specified. 2, Schedule of identification nomenclature to be used for identification suns and labels for each piece of equipment shall include, but not be limited to, the following equipment types as specified in Division 2. a, Cabinets and enclosures b, Disconnect switches c, Circuit breakers and switches d`: Starter e. Variable frequency drives f. Fire alarm system panels and all ancillary cabinets and equipment q� paging, intercom and background music system cabinets. h. Lighting controlcabinets including dimmer cabinets. 3. Samples of each color, lettering style and rather graphic representation required for identification materials; samples of labels and signs, 4. Identification required in this section shall apply to equipment furnished in Division 2 and any other applicable Divisions including Division 23. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: X ANSI Compliance: Comply with requirements of ANSI Standard A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems," with regard to type and size of lettering for raceway and cable labels. IDENTIFICATION"` 04/29/2015 LMC: MR1 Equipment Replacement 177.308 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: 1. Ideal Industries, Inc. 2. LEM Products, Inc. . Markal Corp. 4. Panduit Corp. . W.H.Brady, Co. 6, 3M Company 2.2 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS: A. Identify System Raceways with Painted Couplings & Connectors: Provide painted couplings connectors for all concealed raceways. Install painted couplings at all conduit connecting couplings including end couplings at stub outs. Apply the following colors Normal Power: Mack Life Safety Power: Yellow Critical: Red Equipment Branch: Grange UPS: Brown Ground:green B. Adhesive Larking Labels for Exposed Raceway and Busway: Pre-printed„ flexible, self-adhesive labels with legend indicating voltage and service (Emergency, Lighting, Power, Power d.c., HVAC„ Communications, Control, Fire). Mabel Size for Raceways and Busway: Kroy or Brother labels I inch high by 12 inches long (minimum) with 5f5 inch minimum height letters. , 1. 600 Volt and Below Normal: White letters on black background indicating source equipment designation, circuit number(s), and voltage. 2. 600 Volt and Below Emergency: Indicate source equipment designation, circuit number(), and voltage for each branch as follows. Lite safety: Black letters on yellow Critical: Black letters on OSHA purple Equipment and Standby: Black letters on OSHA grange 3. LIPS: White letters on brown background indicating source equipment designation, circuit number(s), and voltage . Fire Alarm: White letters on red background indicating "FIRE ALARM". . Temperature Control: White or black letters on blue background indicating "TEMP, CONTROL." 6. Ground: White or black letters on green background indicating "GROUND" and equipment and designation. 7. Building Alarms: Orange letters on white background indicating "BUILDING ALARMS." Network Fiber: Black letters on white background indicating "NETWORK FIBER." Where conduits enter or exit a panelboard, pull or junction box, switchboard, or other distribution equipment, conduit labels shall include circuit number in addition to feeder identification and voltage, L Adhesive Marking Tape for Device Cover Plates, 3/8 inch Kroy tape or Brother labels with 3/16 inch minirnurn height letters. Tape shall have black letters on clear background for normal and red letters on clear background for emergency. Embossed Dymo-Tape labels are not acceptable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - A. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used in electrical identification work with corresponding designations specified or indicated. Install numbers, lettering, and colors as approved in submittals and as required by code. B. Install identification devices in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and requirements of NEC. C. Sequence of Work: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces that require finish, install identification after completion of finish work. D. Conduit Identification: Label conduits with painted couplings & connectors concealed or with labels at 10 foot intervals (medium voltage or exposed) to identify all conduits run exposed or located above accessible ceilings. Conduits located above non -accessible ceiling or in floors and walls shall be labeled within 3 feet of becoming accessible. Labels for multiple conduits shall be aligned and read the same direction. Use the colors as identified above: E. Identify Junction, Pull and Connection Boxes: Identification of systems and circuits shall Indicate system voltage and identity of contained circuits on outside of box cover. Color code shall be same as conduits for pressure sensitive labels. Use self adhesive marking tape IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS — 04/29/2015 260553-3 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 installations.3. Match identification markings with designations used in panelboards shop drawings, Contract Documents, and similar previously established -identification schemes for the facility's electrical Apply warning, caution and instruction signs and stencils as follows: 1 Install warning, caution or instruction signs where required by NEC, where indicated, or where reasonably required to assure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems and of the items to which they connect. Install engraved plastic -laminated instruction signs with approved1egend where instructions or explanations are needed for or equipment p * $ Install butyrate signsb # for outdoor a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets and enclosures. b. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. c. Motor starters. rl. Pushbutton stations. e. Contactors, f, Remote-controlled switches. g. Dimmers. h. Control devices. i. Call system master station, j. Fire alarm master station or control panel, JApply circuit/control/item designation labels of engraved plastic laminate for disconnect switches, breakers, pushbuttons, pilot lights, motor control centers, and similar items for power distribution and control components above, except panelboards and alarm/signal components, where labeling is specified elsewhere, K, For panelboards, provide framed, typed circuit schedules (label all spares and spaces in pencil) with explicit description and identification of items controlled by each individual breaker, LTag all grounding electrode conductors, associated bonding conductors, and grounding conductors at their point of attachment to any ground bus and grounding electrode (where possible) with a 2 inch diameter round green phenolic nameplate. Lettering shall be 1/4 inch high with 1/5 inch between lines centered on the tag stating "DO NOT DISCONNECT"MAIN GROUND," Nameplate shall attach to conductor with a short length of small chain. M. Install labels at locations as required and at locations for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment, N. Provide tape labels for identification of individual receptacle and light switch wallplates. Locate tape on front of plate and identify panel/branch circuit serving the receptacle. Provide tape labels for identification of individual switches or thermal overload switches which serve as equipment disconnects. Locate the tape on the front of the coverplate and identify #» «. circuit serving the equipment, IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS — 04/29/2015 260553-5 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 SECTION 26 0583 — WIRING CONNECTIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY: electrical& Extent of connections forequipment i ed by drawings and schedules. Electrical connections are hereby defined to include connections used for providing electrical power to equipment. S. Applications of electrical power connections specified in this section include the following: 1. To resistive heaters. . From electrical source to motor starters. 3. From motor starters to motors. 4. To lighting equipment. 5. To converters, rectifiers, transformers, inverters, rheostats, and similar current adjustment features of equipment. 6. To grounds including earthing connections. 7. To master units of communication, signal, alarm,: clock, public address, sound, and video systems. 6. From push buttons 9. To equipment requiring electrical connection. 10, Cather connections as shown.. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE. A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical connectors and terminals, of types and ratings required, and ancillary connection materials, including electrical Insulating tape, soldering fluxes, and cable ties„ whose products have been in satisfactory use n similar service for not less than 5 years. S. Installer's Qualifications: Firms with at least 2 years of successful installation experience with projects utilizing electrical connections for equipment similar to that required for this project. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: 'Submit manufacturer's data on electrical connections for equipment products and materials. 1.4 DEFINITIONS: A. Load voltage wiring shall be defined as Conduit and wiring required to carry power to motors and other equipment or devices. Wiring from tn. is devices to equipment power to drive that equipment as line voltage thermostats, etc., shall be included as load voltage wiring. Wiring that provides power to control panels, control transformers, control relays, time clocks, etc., shall • be included. i.• voltage 1.5 DELIVERY; STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Deliver electrical connection products wrapped in proper factory fabricated type containers. WIRING CONNECTIONS — 04/29/2015 260583-1 LMC. MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 S, Store electrical connection products in original cartons and protect from weather, construction traffic and debris. C. Handle electrical connection products carefully to prevent breakage, denting, and scoring finish. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A, Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements; provide circuit and motor disconnects by one of the following: 1, General Electric Co, . Square D Company 3, Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc, 22 GENERAL: A. Overcurrent Protective Devices (OCPDs): Provide type, rating, and features as indicated. Comply with [division 16 Section on Overcurrent Protective Devices, With OCPDs adapted to equipment connection installation. Tandem circuit breakers shall not be used. Multiple breakers shall have common trip. B. Provide motor controllers that are horsepower rated to suit the motor controlled. C. Contacts shall open each ungrounded connection to the motor. Contacts shall be NEMA rated, 76°C. C. Overload relays shall be ambient -compensated type with inverse -time -current characteristic. Provide with heaters or sensors in each phase matched to nameplate full load current of the specific motor to which connected With appropriate adjustment for duty cycle and power factor correction supplied with the motor. 23 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS: A. General. For each electrical connection indicated, provide complete assembly of materials, including but not necessarily limited to, pressure connectors, terminals (lugs); electrical insulating tape, electrical solder, electrical soldering flux, heat -shrinkable insulating tubing, cable ties, solderless wire -nuts, disconnect, starter, contactor, relays, etc., and other items and accessories as needed to complete splices and terminations of types indicated. B. Metal Conduit, Tubing and Fittings; 1. General: Provide metal conduit, tubing and fittings of types, grades, sizes and weights (wall thicknesses) indicated for each type service. Provide products complying with Division -26 section on Raceways. C, Wires, Cables, and Connectors. I General: Provide wires, cables, and connectors complying with Division -26 section on Wires • Cables. WIRING CONNECTIONS - 04129/2016 260583-2 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177308 Z Wires/Cables: Unless otherwise indicated, provide wires/cables (conductors) for electrical connections which match, including sizes, ratings, and material of wires/cables which are supplying electrical power. 3. Connectors and Terminals.- Provide electrical connectors and terminals which mate and match, including sizes and ratings, with equipment terminals and are recommended by equipment manufacturer for intended applications. 4. Electrical Connection Accessories- Provide electrical insulating tape, heat -shrinkable insulating tubing and boots, electrical solder, electrical soldering flux, wirenuts and cable ties as recommended for use by accessories manufacturers for type services indicated. & Fusible Switches: Provide UL type "HD" 100 percent duty rated switches, with foses of classes and current ratings indicated, Comply with Division 16 section on Overcurrent Protective Devices. Where current limiting fuses are indicated, provide switches with non - interchangeable feature suitable only for current limiting type fuses, All disconnect switches shall be fusible unless otherwise noted, C. Non -fusible Disconnects: Provide UL type -HD- 100 percent duty rated switches of classes and current ratings as indicated, D. Switches for Classified (Hazardous) Locations: Provide heavy duty switches, with UL labels and listings for hazardous location classifications in which installed. Eccessories: WIRING CONNECTIONS — 04/29/2015 260583-3 LMC- MRI Equipment Replacement 177,308 I Electrical Interlocks: Provide number and arrangement of interlock contacts in switches as indicated or required, 2. Special Enclosure Material: Provide special enclosure material as follows for switches indicated: a. Stainless Steel Type 304: For NEMA Type 4. b. Molded Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic: For NEMA Type 4x. c. Heavy Cast Aluminum: For hazardous locations. NEMA Types 7 through 9. 3, Handles shall be lockable in open and closed position without modification, 2.6 AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES: PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: A. Inspect area and conditions under which electrical connections for equipment are to be installed and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in,a manner acceptable to Installer. 12 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS: A. Furnish, set in place, and wire (except as may be otherwise indicated) all heating, ventilating, air conditioning, plumbing and fire protection, elevator, etc., motors and controls in accordance with the following schedule and in accordance with equipment manufacturers written instructions and with recognized industry practices, and complying with applicable WIRING CONNECTIONS -- 04/29/2015 260583-4 requirements of UL, NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation" to ensure that products fulfill requirements. Carefully coordinate with work performed under the Mechanical Division of these Specifications, B. Coordinate with other work, including wires/cables, raceway and equipment installation, as necessary to property interface installation of electrical connections for equipment with other work, C. Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment conductors in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and wiring diagrams, Mate and match conductors of electrical connections • proper interface between electrical #♦ supplies and installed equipment. D. Maintain existing electrical service and feeders to equipment serving occupied areas and operational facilities, unless otherwise indicated, or when authorized otherwise in writing by Owner, or Architect/Engineer. Provide temporary service during interruptions to existing facilities, When necessary, schedule momentary outages for replacing existing wiring systems with new wiring systems, When that "cutting over has been successfully accomplished, remove, relocate, or abandon existing wiring as indicated � ECover splices with electrical insulating material equivalent to, or of greater insulation resistivity rating, than electrical insulation rating of those conductors being spliced, P. Prepare cables and wires, by cutting and stripping covering armor, jacket, and insulation property to ensure uniform and neat appearance where cables and wires are terminated. Exercise care to avoid cutting through tapes which will remain on conductors. Also avoid "ringing" copper conductors while skinning wire. G. Trim cables and wires as short as practicable and arrange routing to facilitate inspection, testing and maintenance, H. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturers published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Accomplish tightening by utilizing proper torquing tools, including torque screwdriver, beam -type torque wrench, and ratchet wrench with adjustable torque settings. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are nota tighten connectors and terminals to comply with torquing values contained in UL's 486A. L Install pre -finished cord set where connection with attachment plug is indicated or specified, or use attachment plug with suitable strain -relief clamps. J. Provide suitable strain relief clamps for cord connection to outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes. K Make wiring connections in control panel or in wiring compartment of pre -wired equipment in accordance with manufacturers instructions. Provide interconnecting wiring where indicated. L. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices such as limit switches and temperature switches as indicated or per manufacturer's instructions. K Provide each motor with a horsepower rated disconnect switch and external thermal overload protection. WIRING CONNECTIONS — 04/29/2015 260583-5 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.306 N. Provide circuit and motor disconnect switches as indicated and where required by Cade. Comply with switch manufacturers printed installation instructions, install within sight of motors. 0. All splices in control panelsf terminal junction boxes, r voltage control circuits and fire alar conductors shall be on numbered terminal strip� P. Each branch circuit serving dedicated, isolated or emergency receptacles, multi -outlet assemblies or equipment connections shall be furnished with a dedicated neutral conductor. Neutrals common to more than one circuit shall only be permitted where specifically noted. Q. Where conduit is not required, plenum rated cable shall be provided imcelling, floor or othe plenum spaces. .3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Upon completion of installation of electrical connections, and after circuitry has been energized with rated power source, test connections to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Ensure that direction of rotation of each motor fulfills requirement. Correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance. 3.4 EQUIPMENT CONNECTION SCHEDULES: A. Mechanical Equipment: 1. Refer to Mechanical Equipment Schedule on the drawings. 2. All load voltage wiring shall be provided under Division 26. 1 Unless otherwise indicated, it is suggested that all equipment motors and control shall be furnished, set in place, and wind in accordance with the schedule contained herein. The exact furnishing and installation of the equipment is left to the Contractors involved. Contractor should note that the intent of this schedule is to have the Contractor responsible for coordinating all wiring as outlined, whether or not specifically called for by the Division 23 or Division 26 drawings and specifications. Comply with the applicable requirements of Division 26 for all electrical work which is not otherwise specified. No extras will be allowed for contractor's failure to provide for these required items. Contractor shall refer to the Division 26 and Division 23 specifications and plans for all power and control wiring and shall advise the Architect/Engineer of any discrepancies prior to bidding. ITEM FURNISHED SET CONTROL BY BY WIRING (non -load valta e I. Mechanical Equipment Motors M ` M -- 2.Special Equipment (i.e., elevators, etc. a. Motors G G b, Magnetic Motor Starters G E* �- c. Disconnect Switches E E Thermal OL Switches Manual Operating Switches WIRING CONNECTIONS — 04/29/2015 260583-6 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 3. Motor Starters, combination motor starter/disconnect and Variable Frequency Drives a. Automatically controlled, with or without HOA M E* switches. b. Manually controlled. M E* -- c. Starters integral with motor control centers E E �- including control relays and transformers, d. Combination Starter/Disconnects M E* M 4. Pushbutton stations, pilot lights M * . 5. Disconnect switches, thermal overload switches, E* M manual operating switches. 6. Multi -speed switches M E* mm M 7.. Control relays, transformers. M M M . Load voltage control Mems such as lone voltage M M E thermostats not connected to control panel 0. Non -load voltage control items.: M M M % Electric thermostats, remote bulb thermostats, M M M motor valves, float controls, etc., which are an integral part of mechanical equipment or directly attached to ducts, popes, etc, 11. Motor valves, damper motor, solenoid valves, EP M M M** and PE switches, VAV box controls, actuators, etc. 12. Control circuit outlets E E-- 13. Fire protection controls (Including flow switches) M M M** 14. Duct smoke detectors, including relays for fan E M M** shutdown. 15. Temperature Control Panel M M M 16, Interlocks M M M G = General, Division 13 or 14 M = Mechanical, Division 23 E = Electrical, Division 26 * For factory pre -wired equipment specified under other Divisions, all wiring within the equipment shall be by the manufacturer. Connection to the equipment shall be by Division 26, as shown on electrical drawings. Manufacturer's equipment provided under other divisions which varies from what is shown on Division 26 drawings shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to complete and pay for any costs for those variations. ** Fire alarm system control modules and wiring from fire alarm contacts to fire alarm system under Division 26. See details. ** Integral control wiring under Electrical Division as manufacturer supplied equipment, Control wiring for automatic control portion under Mechanical Division, END OF SECTION 26 0583 WIRING CONNECTIONS — 04/28/2015 260583-7 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 1,5 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Occupancy Sensors: Equal to 5% of the amount installed for each type. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fighting control equipment of one of the following (for each type and rating of equipment): 1. Occupancy Sensors: a. Sensor Switch b. Levilon 0. Lutron d. Hubbell a. Watt Stopper (The) 22 OCCUPANCY SENSORS: A. Wall or ceiling -mounting, solid-state units with a separate relay unit, 1 Passive Infrared, Ultrasonic, Microphonic, or Dual Technology. Spacing and coverage per the manufacturer's recommendations, Z Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when covered area is occupied and off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 30 minutes. 3. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit, 4Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac. 5. Indicator: LED, to show when motion is being detected during testing and normal operation of the sensor, & Bypass Switch- Override the on function in case of sensor failure. 3.1 EXAMINATION: K Examine areas and conditions under which lighting control equipment is to be installed and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Co not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. 12 INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT. - A. Install lighting control system components and ancillary equipment as indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that lighting control equipment complies with requirements. Comply with requirements of NEC, and applicable portions of NECA's "Standard of Installation" pertaining to general electrical installation practices. LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES — 04/29/2015 260923-3 S. Coordinate with other electrical work, including raceways, and electrical boxes and fittings, as necessary to interface installation of lighting control equipment work with other work. C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer"s published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Stds 486A and B. 3.3 GROUNDING- A. R UNDIN -. Provide equipment grounding connections for lighting control equipment as indicated. Tighten connectors to comply with tightening torques specified in UL ;std 486Atoassure permanent and effective grounding. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Upon completion of installation and after circuitry has been energized, demonstrate capability and compliance of system with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance, otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting. Testing and retesting at no cost to Owner. R. Manufacturer's Field Service. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field -assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and assist in field testing. Report results in writing. C. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Test for circuit continuity. , Verify that the control module features are operational. 3. Check operation of local override controls. 4. Test system diagnostics by simulating improper operation of several components selected by facilities. ENC? OF SECTION 26 092 LIGHTING CONTROL [DEVICES — 04/29/2016 260923-4 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement SECTION 26 2726 . WIRING CREVICES DART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY: A. The extent of wiring device work is indicated by drawings and schedules. Wiring devices are defined as single discrete units of electrical distribution systems which are intended to carry but not utilize electric energy. S. Types of electrical wiring devices in this section include the following: 1. Receptacles. 2. Ground -fault circuit interrupters, 3. Switches. Wallplates. . Dimmers. Plugs and connectors. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical wiring devices„ of types, sizes, and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years:` S. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 2 years of successful installation experience on projects utilizing wiring devices similar to those required for this project. C. Listing and Labeling: Provide products that are listed and labeled for their applications and installation conditions and for the environments in which installed. 1. The Terms "tasted" and "L.abeledr". As defined in the "rational Electrical Code", Article 100. Z Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on electrical wiring devices. Samples of device plates for color selection and evaluation of technical features shall be submitted. C. Operation and maintenance data for materials and products specified in this Section to include in the "Operating and Maintenance Manual" specified in Division 1:' WIRING DEVICES — 04/29/2015 262726-1 177.08 1.4 COORDINATION. A. Wiring Devices for Owner Furnished Equipment:. Match devices to plug connectors for Owner -furnished equipment. B. Card and Plug sets; Match card and plug sets to equipment requirements. PART 2 - PROOt1CT 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide wiring devices of one of the following: 1. All -duplex, single,and specialreceptacles shall be minimum, specification grade commercialM"' hospital grade, listed by •-Laboratories,49a Federal Specification FS WRC -696, 20 amp, nylon face and have a metal mounting strap with self -grounding and have a hex -head green grounding screw and be side and back wired. Each device shall bear the UL /FS Label. a. Each device shall have terminal screws and clamps listed for use with stranded wire. ConvenienceColor selection shall be verified with Architect/Engineer prior to ordering, 3. _ >pChargeroutlets: Tamper 1 amp . • hospital grade rece�tacle With two 3 amp, 5VDC USB type A 210 ports, ivory nylon face, Color selection shall be verified With Architect/Engineer prior to ordering. 4Specific-use Receptacle Configuration: NEMA WD -1 and WD -6 straight blade OR WD 5 locking; as indicated on drawings, black face, 5. Tamper Resistant Receptacles: Duplex receptacle with integral switch and contacts to prevent energizationplug is inserted, Ivory fornormal,-• for6, Ground -Fault Interrupter Receptacles: Provide "local reset" ground -fault circuit interrupters. Provide unit capable of being installed in a 2-3/4" deep outlet box without adapter, grounding type, Class A, Group I per UL Standard 943. emergency. WIRING DEVICES 04129/2016 262726-2 Hubbella. Harvey b. Leviton . Co. Pass and Seymour d. Cooper Crouse -Hind s Co,e, Bryant Electric f. General Electric Co. 1. All -duplex, single,and specialreceptacles shall be minimum, specification grade commercialM"' hospital grade, listed by •-Laboratories,49a Federal Specification FS WRC -696, 20 amp, nylon face and have a metal mounting strap with self -grounding and have a hex -head green grounding screw and be side and back wired. Each device shall bear the UL /FS Label. a. Each device shall have terminal screws and clamps listed for use with stranded wire. ConvenienceColor selection shall be verified with Architect/Engineer prior to ordering, 3. _ >pChargeroutlets: Tamper 1 amp . • hospital grade rece�tacle With two 3 amp, 5VDC USB type A 210 ports, ivory nylon face, Color selection shall be verified With Architect/Engineer prior to ordering. 4Specific-use Receptacle Configuration: NEMA WD -1 and WD -6 straight blade OR WD 5 locking; as indicated on drawings, black face, 5. Tamper Resistant Receptacles: Duplex receptacle with integral switch and contacts to prevent energizationplug is inserted, Ivory fornormal,-• for6, Ground -Fault Interrupter Receptacles: Provide "local reset" ground -fault circuit interrupters. Provide unit capable of being installed in a 2-3/4" deep outlet box without adapter, grounding type, Class A, Group I per UL Standard 943. emergency. WIRING DEVICES 04129/2016 262726-2 7, Clock Cutlet: Single NEMA 5-15P side wired, mounted in a recessedfaceplate with metal hook which permits crack to be flush mounted on wall. 8. Receptacles, Industrial Heavy -Duty: Conform to NEMA Standard PK 4 "Plugs, Receptacles, and cable Connectors of the Pin and Sleeve Type for Industrial Ilse." 9. Pendant Cord/Connector Devices; Matching, locking type, plug and plug receptacle body connector, NEMA 15-20P and 1-5-20R, heavy-duty grade. a. Bodies: Nylon with screw -open cable -gripping jaws and provision for attaching external 'cable grip. b: External Cable Grip: Woven wire mesh type made of high strength galvanized - steel wire strand and matched to cable diameter and with attached provision designed for the corresponding connector. 10. Cord and Plug Sets: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of the equipment being connected. a. Cord: Rubber -insulated, stranded copper conductors, with type -SOW -A jacket. Grounding conductor has green insulation. ` Ampacity is equipment rating plus 30% minimum. b. Plug: Male configuration with nylon body and integral cable -clamping jaws. Match to cord and to receptacle type intended for connection. 1. Wall Switches for Lighting Circuits: 'NEMA W 71 and WD -5, FS W -S-898 ; AC quiet type specification grade commercial series listed by Underwritees Laboratories with toggle handle, rated 20 amperes at 120-277 volts AC, unless noted otherwise. Mounting straps shall be metal and be equipped with a green hex -head ground screw. Each switch shall bear the UUFS Label. a. Each device shall have terminal screws and clamps listed for use with stranded wire. 2. Handle; Ivory for normal power circuits, red for emergency power circuits. Verify color with Architect/Engineer prior to ordering., . . Pilot Light Type. Lighted handle lit when switch is "on." 4. Locator Type;,; Continuously lighted handle. 5. Switches in Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL Standard 894, "Switches for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations." CCombination Devices: Provide heavy-duty quiet type switch, 20 -amperes, 120-277 volts AC, with toggle switch handle,• - grounding .e - 20 amperes,!volts, in a common 4 inch • . box. ii. LF© Dimmers: Provide dimmer controls for LBC? lighting, wattage as indicated, 120 -volts, 60-H, with continuously adjustable slide dimmer, ivory nylon face, single- pale, with integral ON-OFF switch. Equip with electromagnetic filters to eliminate noise, RF and TV interference, and with -inch wire connecting leads, Dimmer shall be Lutro "Diva Series" for single pole and NTB/NTA Series for -way dimming with NTFTS-R electronic touch switch for auxiliary WIRING DEVICES a- 0412912015 262726-3 Architect/EngineerON-OFF control. Low voltage dimmer shall be NTLV Series, Verify color with prior tor• • 2.3 WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES. A. Wallplates, Provide wallplates for single and combination wiring devices, of types, sizes, and with ganging and cutouts as indicated. Select plates which mate and match wiring devices to which attached and match coverplates used in similar areas in the North Pavilion Addition. Construct with metal screws for securing dates to devices; screw heads colored to match finish of plates. Identify all wall plates used for receptacles with branch circuit number per requirements of section on Electrical Identification. Provide blank wall plates for all cable, data, telephone and junction and outlet boxes. Where cables are routed through the wallplate, provide grommets in wallplte openings to protect cables. Provide plates possessing the following additional construction features; 1. Material and Finish; 0,04" thick, type 302 satin finished stainless steel. 2. Material and Finish: Steel plate, galvanized for use in unfinished areas, mechanical, and electrical rooms. 3, Material and Finish. Nylon, smooth for plates. 4. Material and Finish; 0.04" thick brass, brushed chrome; PART 3 m EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES. A. Install wiring devices as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements. S. Coordinate with other work, including painting, electrical boxes and wiring work, as necessary to interface installation of wiring devices with other work. C. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes which are clean; free from excess building materials, dirt, and debris. D. Install wiring devices after wiring work is completed. E. Install wallplates after painting work is completed.. F, Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipme manufacturers published torque tightening values for wiring devices. Where manufacturer torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques spect6ed in LICSIdS48iiA. G. Install telephone/power service poles in accordance with final furnishing arrangement. Pales shall be plumb, true, and secure. . Provide hospital grade devices in all patient care areas and corridors. 1. provide GFCI type outlets for each above counter duplex receptacle shown within 6 feet -13 inches of sinks/lavatories. for above counter multi -outlet assemblies which do not contain WIRING DEVICES --- 04/29t2015 262726-4 duplex receptacles that can be replaced with GCI devices, provide GI circuit breakers on the branch circuit{s} feeding the assembly: J, Provide tamper resistant safety type receptacles in all pediatric patient rooms and associated waiting areas and play rooms, Provide tamper resistant, USS port receptacles in all waiting areas atlocations indicated for convenience. L. Provide GCI receptacles throughout in kitchens and at vending machines, 3.2 PROTECTION OF WALLPLATES AND RECEPTACLES: Upon installation of wallplates and receptacles, advise Contractor regarding proper and cautious use of convenience outlets. At time of Substantial Completion, replace those items which have been damaged, including those burned and scored by faulty plugs, 33 GROUNDING: A. Provide equipment grounding connections for wiring devices, unless otherwise indicated, Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Std 486A to assure permanent and effective grounds. .4 CLEANING, Internally clean devices, device outlet boxes and enclosures. Replace stained, cracked, damaged or improperly painted wall plates or devices. remove temporary markings of labels, 3,5 TESTING: A. Prior to energizing circuitry, test wiring for electrical continuity, and for short-circuits. Ensure proper polarity of connections is maintained and prepare test reports. Subsequent to energization, test wiring devices to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Operate each operable device at least six (6) times. 1. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices or similar problems. 2. Tests for Convenience Receptacles: a. Line Voltage. Acceptable range is 105 to 130 V. b. percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable c. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. d,. Molarity: 'Fest for correct neutral conduct to neutral terminal connection. e. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. WIRING DEVICES -- 04/20/2015 262726-5 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 f. GFCI Receptacles: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and Ilk 943. `lest with both local and remote fault simulations in accordance with manufacturing recommendations. g. SPD receptacle indicating lights for normal indication check. 1 Tests for patient -care areas in Healthcare Facilities: In addition to the test listed above, perform additional field tests and inspections for receptacles in patient care areas. Perform . following . The physical integrity of each receptacle shell be confirmed by visual inspection. b. "fest straight blade convenience outlets in patient -care areas for the retention force of the groundings blade according to IFP 99. Retention force shall be not less than 4 oz. 115 ). c. Test and record the impedance between the ground point of each receptacle and the reference point according to NFPA 99. impedance level shall be lass than 0.1 Ohm. 1 } The impedance measurement shall be made with an accuracy of t20 percent." 2) For New Construction:: The impedance measurement shall be made between the reference point according to NFPA 99 and the grounding contact of 10 percent of all receptacles in each patient care vicinity. The impedance measurement shell be the ratio of voltage developed (either 60 current applied' between these two points). 4. Prepare certified test reports in compliance with NFPA 99 and submit reports in conjunction with field quality control reports required in Division 1 "Grounding and Bonding" 6. `fest Instruments: a. Use instruments that comply with LIL 1436. . Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles; Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement. S. Correct deficiencies and Report: 1. Correct unsatisfactory conditions and retest to demonstrate compliance; replace devices as required to bring system into compliance. 2. Correct malfunctioninc units on-site, where possible and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest, 3. Prepare a report that identifies enclosure, units, conductors and devices checked and describe results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations and test results after remedial action. END OF SECTION 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES — 04/29/2016 262726- LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 SECTION 26 2800 - LOW -VOLTAGE CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY. A, This section includes overcurrent protective devices (OCPD's) rated 600 V and below and switching devices commonly used with them. B. Panelboards, and Switchboards. Application, installation, and tither related requirements for overcrrent protective device installations in distribution equipment are specified in other Division 26 sections. 12 DEFINITIONS: A. Gvercurrent Protective [device (OCPI ): A device operative on excessive current that causes and maintains the interruption of power in the circuit it protects.' B, Ampere -Squared -Seconds: An expression} of available thermal energy resulting from current flow. With regard to current -limiting fuses and circuit breakers, the ampere -squared -seconds during fault current interruption represents the energy allowed to flow before the fuse or breaker interrupts the fault current within its current limiting range, 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A, Product data for fuses, fusible switches, circuit breakers, and OCPI3 accessories specified in this Section, including descriptive data and time -current curves for all protective devices and let -through current curves for those with current limiting characteristics, Include coordination charts and tables and related data. "` a �- •r • a +►- • -� . -. -e • • - � « .. B. Each type of O PD shall be the product of a single manufacturer. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS: ASpare Fuses: Furnish spares of each type and rating of fuse for fusible devices amounting to one set of 3 fuses for each 9 fuses installed but not less than 3 fuses of each type, 177.308 PARS" 2 PRODUCTS: 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: °I. Cartridge: Fuses: a. Sussmann Div., Cooper Industries; Inc. b. Littelfuse Inc. 2. fusible Switches: a. General Electric Co. b. Square D Co, c. Allen-Bradley Co. d. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. Molded -Case Circuit Breakers: a. Square D Co, . General Electric Co. C. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc, Combination Circuit Breaker and ground Fault Circuit Interrupters: a. General Electric Co, b. aware D Co, C. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc„ 5. When mounting overcurrent protective devices in switchboards, switchgear, panelboards, CC's, etc., provide equipment of same manufacturer as equipment into which they are being mounted. 2.2 t VERCURREN " PROTECTIVE DEVICES (iCPDS), GENERAL: A. General, Provide OCPDs in indicated types, as integral components of panelboards, switchboards, motor control centers, and ether related equipment, and also as individually enclosed and `mounted single units. S. Enclosures. NEMA 250 "Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum)." C. Where OCPD's are to be installed in existing panelboards, switchboards, and motor control centers, they shall be of the same manufacture and type; as those existing in the equipment. If this is not possible, provide devices which are compatible with the existing equipment and when installed will not void the U.L. label or reduce the short circuit rating of the equipment. D. All overcurrent devices shall be individually rated for the available fault current unless otherwise noted. Series ratings of equipment will only be allowed where specifically called out. LOW -VOLTAGE CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES — 4/29/2015 262800-2 IN 0&. s r* N • . � s w "N N NN - - N � * N N - • N N N •- •- -• .Ns, - s •* ANN • .N N N N• "" Ns "N � N •• � To eliminate induction heating, all fuse ferrules and end caps shall be non-ferrous and shah be bronze or other alloy not subject to stress cracking. E. Class L Fuses: UL 1980, "High -interrupting Capacity Fuses, Current -Limiting Type." F. Class 1 K1 Dual dement Time -belay Fuses: UL 198E" "Class R Fuses." G. Class J Low -Peak dual Element Fuse: UL 198C 2A NGNFLISIBLE SWITCHES: A. General: UL 98 "Enclosed and bead Front Switches" and NEMA KS 1 "Enclosed Switches," quick -make, quick -break heavy-duty units. B. Rating: Load -breaking capacity in excess of the normal horsepower rating for the switch: C. Withstand Capability: In excess of the available. D� Operation: By means of external handle. E. Interlock: Prevents access to switch interior except when in "off" position. F. Enclosure for Independent Mounting: NEMA Type 1 enclosure except as otherwise indicated or required to suit environment where located. G. Contacts shall be NEMA rated 75degrees `C. H, Provideauxiliary contacts for disconnects supplied from variable frequency gives. 2.8 FUSIBLE SWITCHES: A. General: UL 9 "Enclosed and Dead Front Switches" and NEMA KS 1 "Enclosed Switches," quick -make, quick -break heavy-duty units. S. Rating: Load -breaking capacity in excess of the normal horsepower rating for the switch. LOW -VOLTAGE CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES — 4/2912015 262800-3 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 C. Withstand Capability: In excess of the let -through warrent permitted by its fuse when subject to faults up to 100,0130 RMS symmetrical amperes. D. Operation, By means of external handle. E, Interlock: Prevents access to switch interior except when in "off" position. F. Fuse Clips: Dejection type. G. Enclosure for Switchboard or Panel board Mounting: citable for parcel mounting where indicated. Enclosure for Independent Mounting: Provide NEMA Type 1 enclosure except as otherwise indicated or required to suit environment where located. L Contacts shall: be NEMA rated 75 degrees C. J. Provide fuses for safety switches and other equipment of classes, types, and rating needed to fulfill electrical requirements for services indicated. K. Provide auxiliary contacts for disconnects supplied from variable frequency drives. 2.8 MOLDED -CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS: A. General: UL 489, "Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures," and NEMA AB 1, "Molded Case Circuit Breakers." B3 Construction: Provide bolt -in type, except breakers 225 -ampere frame size and larger which may be plug-in type if held in place by positive locking device requiring mechanical release for removal, D. Tripping Device:! quick -break t•e•mechanism with inverse -time delay and instantaneousovercurrent trip protection f• each pole, Trip unit to be interchangeable frame sizes for breakers 200 amperes orlarger. Breakers 150 amperes and above shall have adjustable trip selection for trip units, All 120/208rbreakersbe -r and labeled "High Magnetie, R Adjustable Instantaneous• li-vices: Factory adjusted to s • current values. Provide a,• . instantaneous• devices foreach circuit breaker •• • individual motor loads andwhere indicated. E. Enclosure for Switchboard or Panelboard Mounting: Suitable for panel mounting in switchboard or •►. • • -a • - • •a.1!1 1 1 1 1• I I i I I i i I P i i• t- 4 • 11 - • • G. Enclosure for Independent Mounting: NEMA Type 1 enclosure, except as otherwise indicated or required to suit environment where located. LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177308 23 COMBINATION CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTERS: A, General: UL 943 "Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters," arranged for sensing and tripping for ground fault current in addition to overcurrent and short-circuit current. Provide features as follows: B. Match features and module size of panelboard breakers and provide clear identification of ground fault trip function. C. Trip Setting for Ground Fault: 4 to 6 milliamperes, listed and labeled as a class A, type I device. 2.8 CIRCUIT BREAKERS WITH SOLID-STATE TRIP DEVICES: A. General: Provide 250 amp frame size and larger circuit breakers with solid-state trip devices having the following features: I Ambient Compensation: Trip device insensitive to temperature changes between minus 20 degrees C and plus 55 degrees C. 2, Adjustability: Breaker ratings and trip settings shall be changeable by operation of controls on front panel of breaker and by change of plug-in element without removing the breaker. a. The trip device sensor shall have the same rating as the frame amperage of the circuit breaker unless noted otherwise. 1 Ground -Fault Tripping: Provide adjustable pick-up and time -delay on circuit breakers indicated with {AFI. 4. Provide zone -selective interlocking capability with both short -time and ground -fault interlock on circuit breakers indicated with Z. 2,9 OCPD ACCESSORIES: A. Provide shunt -trip devices for Circuit breakers unless otherwise indicated. Arrange to trip breaker from an external source of power through a control switch or relay contact. B. Lock -Out Devices: Provide padlocking provisions on each overcurrent protective device, lockable in the open or closed position. Provide 3 sets of lockout/tagout devices for each type of breaker or switch provided. Include tags, locks and all accessories necessary. PART 3 - EXECUTION: 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. Independently Mounted OCPDs: Locate as indicated and install in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install OCPDs level and plumb. B. OCPDs in new distribution and branch circuit equipment shall be factory installed. OCPD's in existing distribution and branch circuit equipment shall match existing for type and be provided with features as listed herein. C. Install fuses in fusible devices as indicated. Arrange fuses so that fuse ratings are readable without removing fuse. LMC. MRI Equipment Replacement 177348 All fuses for new disconnect switches or MCC's feeding motors or motor starters shall be provided with Class J fuses. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION: A. Identify components in accordance with Division 26 Section on electrical identification,. 3.3 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION: A. Install wiring between CCP as and control/indication devices, 3.4 CONNECTIONS: X Check connectors, terminals, bus joints„ and mountings for tightness. Tighten field -connected connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer's torquing'' requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A and UL. 4665. .6 GROUNDING: A. Provide equipment grounding connections for individually mounted O PD units as indicated and as required by NEC, Tighten connectors to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 46A to assure permanent and effective grounding. 3,6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: inspectionsA� Reports- Prepare written reports on t4sts�And observations. Report defective materials and workmanship and unsatisfactory test results. Include complete records of repairs and adjustments made. Tests shall be made on all new and existing OCPD's provided and/or connected under this project in accordance with' this 'section. 13Labeling: Upon satisfactory completion of tests and related effort, apply a label to tested components indicating test results, date, and responsible orgatrii6fion and person. C� Schedule visual and mechanical one week's advance notification. M Upon completing installation of perform - following 1Visual and mechanical inspection: Include the following inspections and related work 2 • - _ •s- -_ Ratings and • .mss ratings and settings to be appropriate for final system arrangement and parameters. b. Inspect for defects and physical damage, NRTL labeling, and nameplate compliance with current single line diagram. c. Exercise and perform operational tests of all mechanical components and other operable devices in accordance with manufacturer"s instruction manual, d. Check tightness of electrical connections of {CPC's with calibrated torque wrench. Refer to manufacturer's instructions for proper torque values, . Clean C PD's using manufacturer's approved methods and materials', LOW -VOLTAGE CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE . 6811 f: Verify installation of proper fuse types and ratings in fusible OCPD's. 2Electrical Tests: Perform the following tests in accordance with manufacturer's instructions: a. Insulation resistance test of fused power circuit devices, insulated -case, and molded -case circuit breakers, 600 -ampere frame size and over at 1000 degree V d.c. for one minute from pole to pole and from each pole to ground with breaker closed and across open contacts of each phase. Insulation resistance less than 100 megohms is not acceptable. •Make insulation resistance tests of OCPD buses, components, and connecting supply, feeder, and control circuits. • 82= d. Provide full rated primary current tests conforming to IETA testing standards of all new and existing breakers 100 amperes and greater, connected under this project, Inspect breakers and provide test report. Set breakers to previous or new settings as directed prior to test. e. Verify relay operation by introduction of accurately metered currents into overcurrent/ground fault/ and other circuitry at values which will enable accura determination of the tripping or activation values. 111FIT19111511 FINFIRIM! III! iiiil!l� 1 !1! == FActivate auxiliary protective devices such as ground fault or under -voltage relays, to verify operation of shunt -trip devices. G. Check stored -energy charging motors for proper operation of motor, mechanism, and limit switches. H. Check operation of electrically operated OCPDs in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, L Check key and other interlock and safety devices for operation and sequence. Make closing attempts on locked -open and opening attempts on locked -closed devices including moveable barriers and shutters. J. , Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and provide retesting of OCPDs by testing organization. Verify by the system tests that specified requirements are met. 3.7 CLEANING: X Training: Arrange and pay for the services of factory -authorized service representatives to demonstrate OCPD's and train Owner's maintenance personnel. Mom B. Conduct a minimum of one day of training in operation and maintenance as specified under in the Project Closeout Section of these specifications. Include both classroom training and hands-on equipment operation and maintenance procedures. C. Schedule training with at least seven days' advance notification. END OF SECTION 26 2800 LOW -VOLTAGE CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES — 4/29/2015 262800-8 Is= SECTION 26 5000 - LIGHTING PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY; X Extent, location, and details of fighting work are indicated on drawings and in schedules, 13, Types of fighting in this section include the following: 1 . Fluorescent. 2. Light Emitting Diode (LED) CARWR W D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each luminaire and accessory; including "trouble -shooting" maintenance guide, Include that data, product data, and shop drawings in a maintenance manual; in accordance with general requirements of Division 1 E. Illumination Data: Submit fighting calculations identified below for all projects not listed first in the luminaire schedule and where otherwise noted. 1. Interior: Provide isofootcandle(isolux) plot diagram of footcandles on horizontal workplane surface which shows composite values of illuminance projected from the arrangement of light sources from indicated luminaire locations and heights. Show on the graphic plots the locations, spacings and heights of luminaires. Indicate values of maximum, average, minimum, max/min ratios, and Lumen Maintenance factor utilized. 13 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of lighting of sizes, types and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on projects with lighting work similar to that required for this project, LIGHTING — 04/29/2015 265000-1 177,308 A. Deliver lighting in factory -fabricated containers or wrappings, which properly protect luminaires from damage. B. Store lighting in original packaging. Store inside well -ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, sailing, extreme temperatures, humidity, laid flat and blocked off ground. C. Handle lighting carefully to prevent damage, breaking, and scoring of finishes. Do not install damaged units or components; replace with new. A. Coordinate with other work including wires/cables, electrical boxes and fittings, and raceways, to properly interlace installation of lighting with other work. B. Sequence lighting installation with other work to minimize possibility of damage and soiling during remainder of construction. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS: A. Lamps: Furnish stock or replacement lamps amounting, to 10%, but not less than 4 lamps in each case, of each type and, size lamp used in each type luminaire except no spares lamps are required for 32W T8 lamps. Ballasts: None. C. Lenses/decorative trim rings: Furnish stock or replacement lenses and trim rings amounting to 2%, but not less than one, of each type and size used in each type luminaire. D, LED Modules: Furnish replacement modules mounting to 3% of each type. EDeliver replacement stock as directed to Owner's storage space. PANT 2 - PRODUCTS A. Luminaire Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide luminaires as listed in the luminaire schedule or, elsewhere on the drawings or specification: B. Lamp Manufacturers: 1. G F Lighting 2. Osram Sylvania Philips Lighting Company C. LED Manufactures: 1. Philips Lighting Co: 2. Lumiled . CRFI 4. Nichia Gsram Sylvania LIGHTING — 04/29/2015 265000-2 D. Fluorescent Ballast Manufacturers: 1. Osram Sylvania 2, Advance 3. All other manufacturers shall request prior approval and supply test data from an independent testing laboratory and comparison report to substantiate compliance with specifications and specified equipment. 2,2 EQUIPMENT: A, General: Provide lighting of sizes, types and ratings indicated; complete with, but not limited to, housings, energy-efficient lamps, lamp holders, reflectors, energy efficient ballasts, starters and wiring. Ship luminaires factory -assembled, with those components required for a complete installation. Design luminaire with concealed hinges and catches, with metal parts grounded as common unit, and so constructed as to dampen ballast generated noise and as to disconnect ballast when door is opened for HOPI lamps. B. Wiring: Provide electrical wiring within luminaire suitable for connecting to branch circuit wiring as follows: I NEC Type TFN for 120 and 277 volt and shall be minimum No. 18 AWG C. Lamps: I Fluorescent: Provide fluorescent lamp types as specified in the luminaire schedule and types compatible with luminaires. Lamps shall be low mercury type. Provide 3 00O color temperature lamps unless otherwise noted in schedules or on drawings. 2. Incandescent: Provide incandescent lamp types as specified in the luminaire schedule and types compatible with luminaires. Provide frosted lamps unless otherwise noted. 1 Provide LED's that retain 70% of lamp life after 50,000 hours. LED's shall be binned to NEMA standard SSL 3-2010. *Indoor luminaires shall have remote phosphors. The LED light assembly shall be replaceable separate fforn the luminaire housing. The LED driver shall be dimming where indicated on the dra%vings. The dimmer switch shall be compatible with the driver, unless otherwise noted.* a. *Indoor luminaires shall have remote phosphor technology for "white" LED's. b. *All LED products to be in accordance with IES Standards LM79 & LM80, D� Exterior Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts: Provide high power factor, rapid start, Type I Class P, sound rated A or B for minus 20 degrees C, with 80 percent light output within 5 minutes of starting and listed for use in outdoor luminaires. LIGHTING - 04/29/2015 265000-3 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 3. The ballast total harmonic distortion shall be leas than 10% with the number of lamps as identified per luminaire type or as indicated in the luminaire schedule. 4. The ballast shall have a crest factor 1.7 maximum shall have transient protection which meets IEEE 587, Category A (ANSI 082.41) requirements. 8. The ballast shall have a power factor of 0,98 or higher, and shall have a ballast efficiency of 90% or higher. The ballast shall be UL listed Class p and shall have a sound rating better than A. 7. The ballast electromagnetic interference and radia frequency interference shall comply with FCC CFR 47, part 18 requirements for both conducted and radiated EMI/REI. 8. The ballast shall contain no PCB's, 9. Minimum lamp starting temperature of 9 degrees F. 10provide ballast with color aided integral leads per ANSI C82.1 1. 11. provide ballast disconnect switch per NEC. 3.1 EXAMINATION: A. Examine areas and conditions under which lighting is to be installed, and substrate for supporting lighting: Notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. leo not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. INSTALLATION:3.2 A. Install lighting at locations and heights as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NECKs "Standard of installation", NEMA standards, ! with recognized industry practices R ensure a, lighting fulfills requirements. BProvide luminaires and/or outlet boxes with hangers to properly support luminaire weight. Submit design of hangers, method of fastening, other than indicated or specified ,,ecce R. review by Architect, attachment device shall have a capacity of 100 of the luminaire weight acting in any direction. LIGHTING 04/29/20115 265000-4 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 ------------- 1. Pendant hung luminaires shall be supported directly from the structure above with No, 9 gauge wire or approved alternate support without using the ceiling suspension system for direct support, 2. Luminaires mounted in areas of high seismic activity shall be mounted from a rigia stem to restrain sway. If mounted from a non-rigia stem, luminaires to be mounted such that their sway under seismic conditions does not impact another luminaire within 45' swing from nadir. F. Tighten connectors and terminats, including screws and b6fts, in accordance with equipment manufacturees published torque tightening values for equiothent connedibirs.Where manufactureft torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to I comply with figlilening torques specified in ULStds 486A and B, and the National Electrical Code, GSupport surface mounted luminaires greater than 2 feet in length at a point in addition to the outlet box stud. I H. Set units plumb, square, level and secure according to manufacturer's written instructions and shop drawings. Refer to specification section 265613, "Poles and Standards" for other requirements. Refer to Division -I sections for the replacement/ restoration of lamps in lighting where used for temporary lighting prior to Date of Substantial Completion. A. Clean lighting of dirt and construction debris upon completion of installation, Clean fingerprints and smudges from lenses and reflectors. C, Adjust aimable luminaires to provide required light intensities and in compliance with design intent. LIGHTING — 04/29/2015 265000-5 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 3.5 GROUNDING: X Provide equipment grounding connections for lighting as indicated. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Std 45A to assure permanent and effective grounds. B. Ground luminaires according to Section 250526, "Grounding," and Section 2615813, "Poles and Standards." 3.6 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall guarantee all equipment including ballasts; lamps" luminaires, wiring, etc. free from inherent mechanical and electrical defects. Warranty period shall be from date of acceptance as set north in the general conditions with periods as follows: 1. Lamps - Per Paragraph 3.3 . Luminaires, wiring, etc. - 1 year 3. Ballasts - The manufacturer shall provide a full five year warranty beginning at time of substantial completion. The manufacturer shall replace any and all failed ballasts within 48 fours of notification. The manufacturer shall provide the labor for warranty replacements. 4. LES} and Driver — Five year manufacturer's warranty. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION: A. Upon completion of inslattation of lighting and after building circuitry has been energized, apply eieciricovenergy to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, corract� malfunctioning units at site, then retest to d0nonstrate compli4rice*, otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting.� END OF SECTION 28 50 00 LIGHTING — 04%2912015 265000-6 SECTION 28 3111 - FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM - EXPANSION OR REMODEL OF ADDRESSABLE SYSTEMS DART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY.. A. Extent of fire alarm systems work is indicated by drawings, schedules, and riser diagrams. Control panels are existing. Any references to the existing control operation equipment, etc., are for information on system operation. All existing devices such as call boxes, connections, shall remain as existing U.O.N. on drawings. B. Provide system component devices compatible with the existing system. Ce Provide additions and modifications to existing system suitable for type occupancy as defined by local wilding Code and as approved by local Fire Marshall and as approved by the Director of Facilities Management l and local authority having jurisdiction, 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of fire alarm systems of types, sizes, and electrical characteristics required, and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B, Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least5 years of successful installation experience on projects with fire alarm systems work similar to that required for this project. 1, Firm with manufacturer's factory trained personnel. Firm with factory authorized service 'organization and spare parts stock within 50 miles of the project and with a 24 hour response time. C. Codes and Standards': 1. The complete installation shall conform to the applicable sections of iFPA-72, Local Code Requirements and the National Electrical Code with particular attention to article 750. All control equipment must have transient protection to comply with UL 554 requirements or Standard #497B as "applicable. UL Compliance and Labeling: Comply with provisions of UL safety standards pertaining to fire alarm systems; and provide products and components which are UL -listed and labeled. 3k FM Compliance: Provide fire alarm components and accessories which are "l -approved. 4. The fire alarm system and devices shall comply with ADA 1000 and UL 1971 requirements. 5. International Building Code and other applicable local cosies and standards, FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM As 04/29/2015 283111-1 13 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data- Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including specifications, data sheets, wiring diagrams, equipment ratings, dimensions, finishes and descriptions of system operation. ## • Provide ## drawings # g complete list of # ## locations and partial This information shall be submitted on 1/8" = 1 *4' scale building floor plans. No other systems shall be included on these plans. Reproduction of contractArawing will not be acceptable. The following information shall be included in the shop drawings: C� Submit manufacturer"s installation instructions, including,outlet or back box requirements for each puce of equipment. D. Submit manufacturer`s certificate that system meets or exceeds specified requirements. E. Submit sequence of operation and verification of system operation by manufacturer or his authorized representative. E. Submit back-up battery calculations. G. All shop drawings, battery and voltage drop calculations shall be submitted to the authority having jurisdiction for review after review by the. Architect/Engineer. Submit three copies of test results and data to Architect/Engineer no later than seven days after conclusion of tests described in this section. I. Submit graphic annunciator and/or map layouts for review by the Architect/Engineer prior to fabrication. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM — 04/29/2015 283111-2 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177308 K Include brief description of scope of work, L. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each type of fire alarm equipment installed, including furnished specialties and accessories, Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 1, 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: X Handle fire alarm equipment carefully to prevent damage, breaking, and scoring. Do not install damaged equipment or components-, replace with new, B. Store fire alarm equipment in clean, dry place. Protect from weather, dart, fumes, water, construction debris, and physical damage. 1.5 OPERATION: A. The system alarm operation subsequent to the alarm activation of any manual station, or automatic detection device shall be unchanged from the existing system operation. F. Firtil M A N I I a Or, M I 3. All doors normally held open by door control devices shall release. 1 4 A supervised signal to notify the monitoring center shall be activate4.1 5. Activation of a duct detector shall alarm the system and shut down the associated air handling unit. 6. The control panel shall provide "OPEN/CLOSE/AUTO" switches for all smoke dampers. In the automatic mode, local duct detectors shall operate the dampers through the FACP. The control panel shall indicate "OPEN" or "CLOSE" status of the dampers via separate and distinct LED indicators. Manual control shall override the automatic function. a. A "positive feedback" input shall be provided to indicate true "OPEN" or "CLOSE" status from a contact closure (end switches) on each damper. 7. A pulsing alarm tone shall occur within the control panel until the event has been acknowledged. i., The alarm activation of any elevator lobby, top of shaft, bottom of shaft, or elevator equipment room smoke detector shall, in addition to the operations listed above, cau the elevator cabs to be recalled according to the following sequence: a. If the alarmtectr is n any flr ther than the main level f ress, the elevator cabs shall be recalled to the main level of egress. I'4 deooooooeg FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM — 04/29/2015 283111-3 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 . If the alarmed detector is on the maim egress level, the elevator cabs shall be recalled to the predetermined alternate recall level as determined by tate local authority having jurisdiction. c. If the alarmed detector is located in the elevator shaft it shall cause the shaft ventilation damper to open in addition to recalling the elevator. . Fire Alarm (provided to Division 15 by Division 1 ) a. 100% test reports b. Monthly test criteria for temporary systems Sprinkler FIRE DETECTION AND i• • 2 LMC: MR[ Equipment Replacement 177.308 a. Above ground piping'system certification b. Tamper and flaw certification c. Fire pump flaw tests 4. Electrical System Documentation (provided to Division 15 by Division 16) a. Outlet testing; tension, continuity, voltage drop testing documentation b. Low voltage switchboards C. Low voltage Insulated case breakers d. Low voltage ground fault e. Grounding system 5. HVAC: System Documentation Isolation17 .. • Testing and certification of damper inspection c Testing • certification of HEPA filters 4. Testing • certification. .- control. life,. 6. Medical Gas System a. State certifications report 7. Backflow Devices a. Certification report . NFPA 101 Documentation (provided by Division 1 & 16 to Division 15) ga Documentation for ILSM, IC:RA, MODS and Hot Work. (provided by Division 1 & 16 to Division 15) 1.6 SUPERVISION: X Supervision shall be unchanged from the existingsystem. Supervision of additional devices shall be as follows: 1Provide ind sed endently fused indicating appliance circuits for alarm s g al�=l . Disarrangement conditions of any circuit shall not operation of other 2. Auxiliary manual control shall be supervised so that an "off normal" position of any switch shall cause an "off normal"• b independently3. Each r. • circuit shall include a discrete LCD readout to indicate disarrangement conditions per circuit. The incoming power to the system shall be supervised so that any power failure must be audibly and visually indicated at the control panel and the remote annunciator. green "power n" LED shall be displayed continuously while incoming power is present. 5. The system batteries shall be supervised so that a low battery conditions or disconnection of the battery shall be audibly and visually indicated at the control panel. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM — 04/29t2015 28 3111 -5 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177308 6. The System Modules shall be electrically supervised for module placement. Should a module become disconnected the system trouble indicator shall illuminate and the audible trouble signal shall sound. 7. The system shall have provisions for disabling and enabling all circuits `individually for maintenance or testing purposes.; PART 2 PRODUCTS 21 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturers: Provide materials that mate and match with existing system components.. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire alarm system components manufactured by the same manufacturer of the existing system. 1. Notifier. B. Fire Alarm Cable 1. West Penn 2. Belden 3. Annixter 2.2 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS: General:. •e complete fire alarm products of types,. capacities comply with manufacturers standard design, materials, components; construct in accordance with published product information, and as required for complete installation. Provide fire alarm and detection systems for applications indicated. B. Wiring System Materials: Provide basic wring materialswhich comply with Division -26 "Raceways", "Wires and Cables" and "Electrical Boxes and Fittings". 1. Provide wire and cable in accordance with requirements of manufacturer. Wire insulation shall comply with NEC Article 760, 2, Provide individual solid copper conductor sizes AWG ##14, or larger. 3. Provide multiconductor cables for wire sizes smaller than AWG f#16. 4. Provide conductors which are UL listed for the installation and location, and approved for fire alarm usage. . Initiating circuits shall be color coded red for positive, black for negative. Indicating circuits shall be color coded yellow for positive, brawn for negative. 6, All conductors shall be numbered and their numbers shall correspond to the terminal block numbering they are connected to. Provide conductor wiring and terminal block numbering. C. Power` Supplies: Existing system operates on 120 VAC ,power supply. Provide additional dower supplies and other equipment necessary to accommodate new or modified existing devices. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM — 14129%2015 283111-6 T HOR♦mmuasm= 1. Provide battery back -cep and increase battery back-up to system as required. twig battery back-up to take over supply to system within 30 seconds of loss of primary system to 85 percent voltage. Provide battery system capable of operation of system for -hours under normal conditions and then for 15 minutes under alarm conditions.. D. Provide Control of additional auxiliary services as follows: 1. Fan shut down relays. 2. Magnetic door release. Exterior flashing lights. 4: Interior flashing strobe lights: . Smoke door releases. 6. Fire door releases. 7. Remote annunciators. 8. Alarm initiationfrom smoke detector operated doors and smoke hatches. 9. Interlace with elevators (fire fighter's recall; etc.). 23 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL: A. Connect additional devices to existing fire alarm control panel. Modify and upgrade panel for compatibility with current codes and current UL requirements and as required for the additional features or equipment. 2.4 ADDRESSABLE COMMUNICATION NETWORK: A. Extend or modify existing communications network as required for the additional equipment. 2.5 ADDRESSABLE DEVICE TYPES:' A. general: Crevices will be located as shown on the drawings. The location of addressable devices will be' elected to optimize the system layout in order to provide the level of protection, zone identification and control as shown on the drawings. Environmental Compensation Analog Sensors: • l:^ • • •.. :.. !` «...i ! «:.:M .: 1. '!: «. 4 ♦ i,. .. FIRE. DETECTION AND ALARM — 64/29/2015 283111-7 177.308 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM - 04/29/2015 283111-8 control functions. Adapter Modules will be capable of mounting in a standard electric outlet box. Adapter Modules will include cover plates to allow surface or flush mounting. Adapter Modules will receive their 24VDC power from a separate two wire pair running from an appropriate power supply. There shall be two types of devices: Type 1; Monitor Adapter Modules ., for conventional -wire thermal detector and/or contact device monitoringwith Class B or Class A wiring supervision. Type 2; Control Adapter Modules - for signals, speakers, fire fighter phone jacks and other device control with Class S or Class A wiring supervision. 1.. Provide modules as required for monitor of air sampling smoke detection points as follows:. a. Fire Alarm b. Alert/Action C. Trouble 2. provide modules as required for monitor and control of AC units such that the AC unit shall shut down upon detection of smoke at the unit. Provide relays as required, 2:5 ALARM SIGNAL DEVICES: A. Fire Alarm Speaker /Strobe Combination: Provide high impact resistant red LEXAN speaker /strobe combination devices as shown on the plans. Each assembly shall consist of two independent devices which are manufactured as compatible with each other and with the control equipment. Each assembly shall provide a terminal strip or wire leads for true in -out wiring connections. The strobe unit shall have a candela -second rating in compliance with ADA requirements and be rated at 24 VC. Strobes shalt be clear with red letters "FIRE" on two sides. 1 Provide wall mounting as shown on the plans. Verify manufacturer mounting' requirements prior to rough in. B. Individual Strobe Unit: Provide strobe units mounted where shown. Units shall match those used in the combination speaker horn/strobe specified. C. Where multiple strobe units are visible from a single location and the potential visible flash rate is 5 hz or more, provide synchronizing modules and strobes compatible for synchronizing a required. Provide additional wiring, conduit, and pourer supplies as necessary. D. Speakers have been located on the drawings. It is the Contractor's responsibility to provide adequate coverage to achieve 70 dBA and intelligibility at all locations throughout the building. If locations shown are inadequate, show additional speakers on shop drawing submittal. Additional speakers will be added at no additional cost to the contract including conduit wiring, power supplies, etc. E. Sells. Provide vibrating, direct current, 5"15710" gong with strobe, suitable for exterior mounting. Provide manufacturers' standard bells at sprinkler entries. 27 AUXILIARY DEVICES/EQUIPMENT: A. Magnetic Door Holder Devices: Provide door holders as shown on the plans and separate power supplies for new and relocated devices. Release of doors occur on a verified alarm or after a general AC power failure in the building, 2.5 GRAPHIC MAP: DETECTIONFIRE 04 /2912015 LMC. MRI Equipment Replacement 177.08 A. Replace or modify the existing graphic map as required by cede. The, graphic map shall be a full color image on a white background mounted on a rigid backing and shall have an ultraviolet inhibitor laminated on the front. Provide a char, anti -glare, LEXAN, panel cover and mount map within a black anodized aluminum frame. Provide a concealed secured hanging system. Location of reap shall be approved by the local Fire Marshall or the authority having jurisdiction. The graphic map shall Include, but not be limited to, the following information: I. Building outline, including address and adjacent streets. 2. All exterior doors. Fire alarm control panel. 4. Sprinkler control valves. 6. Utility controls (electrical, natural gas„ water). Fire department connection, 7, Main area separations. Compass direction reference (orient the map). 9. Map location ("YOU ARE HERE" with arrow). 10. Map location, fire alarm control panel, sprinkler valves and Eire Department connections must be highlighted in RED. 11. Zone area separations and designations. 12. Each duct detector; Indicate HVAC unit designation and function (i.e. supply or return). 13. Legend of devices and other symbology. 14. Location of all individual devices. 16. Addresses at each addressable device. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION: IN: A. Examine areas and conditions under which fire alarm systems are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 12 IDENTIFICATION: A. Provide electrical identification in accordance with Division -26 "Electrical Identification". 33 INSTALLATION OF BASIC WIRING SYSTEM MATERIALS; A. Provide raceways and supports per code and to match existing. B. Install airing, raceways, and electrical boxes and fittings in accordance with Division -26 sections; "Raceways"" 'Wires and tables", and '"Electrical Boxes and Fittings'". C. Install wiring in exposed ivory colored surface metal raceway only where specifically noted as allowed on wall or ceilings. D. Install wires and cables without splices. Make connections at terminal strips in cabinets or at equipment terminals. Dake Soldered splices in electronic circuits in control cabinets. E. Protect all Notification (NAC) circuits necessary for the operation of notification devices by a - hour rated cable system or a 2 -hour rated enclosure until they enter the signaling zone that they serve, F. Install all wiring for smoke control system in concealed raceway or exposed surface metal raceway where specifically noted as allowed. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM — 04129/2016 283111-10 LMC-. MRI Equipment Replacement 177308 3A INSTALLATION OF FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS: A. Install fire alarm system components as indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and complying with applicable portions of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation." & Wiring: Wiring of fire alarm system is work of this section, but is not specifically detailed on drawings. Refer to the manufacturer's shop drawings for detailed wiring and connection information. 1 Complete wiring in accordance with manufacturees requirements. Color code wiring and install per manufacturer's point-to-point wiring diagram. Determine exact number of wires for each fire area zone from number and types of devices installed. Connect each device with sufficient wiring to complete its intended operation. 2Where there are a number of additional power requiring devices such as smoke detectors, fan relays, door holders and smoke damper operators installed in a circuit, group in numbers so power required does not exceed 80 percent of manufacturer's power supply rating. Provide extra wiring, or extra power supplies required to fulfill that requirement. In addition, provide extra or larger size wiring to alleviate voltage drops which makes device operate beyond voltage limits for which it was designed. Determine above with manufacturers representative while equipment is being installed. C, Mount audible and visual devices per Americans with disabilities Act (ADA) 1990 requirements. D. The existing system shall remain in operation while the new devices are being installed, tested, and accepted. 15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Connection and Supervision: Make connections to panel under manufacturer's supervision. Complete connections from this cabinet to panel utilizing Manufacturer's technicians. B. Prior to starting work, establish that the existing system is in proper working order. If condition exists which prevents normal operation of specified additions and extensions, bring this fact to Architect/Engineer's attention prior to doing work affecting existing system. Where work is done without such notification, it is assumed that connections have been made to a working system, and performance requirements and guarantee will apply to entire system. C. System Test and Approval: Submit shop drawings for function and operation only, pre -approved by authority having local jurisdiction, 'I. Prior to final acceptance of system, manufacturer shall, in presence of Contractor, Owner's Representative, and Architect's/Engineer's representative, test each additional sensing or detection and alarm device including devices and equipment interlocks such as equipment shutdown and smoke dampers. Schedule test with Architect/Engineer. 2. The completed fire alarm system shall be fully tested in accordance with NFPA-72 by the contractor in the presence of the Owner's representative and the Local Fire Marshal. The contractor shalt coordinate the testing of each fire alarm detector added or relocated under this project with the fire department and forward A completed checklist showing each detector operated properly and that proper indication of detector operation occurred at all control panels, annunciator panels, remote indicators, remote test switches, etc. In addition, proper interlocks, door release, etc. shall be documented FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM — • 283111-11 LMC: MRI Equipment Replacement 177.308 with specific equipment affected listed by identifier. Upon completion of a successful test, the contractor shall so certify in writing to the Owner and General Contractor. 1 Submit copy of test results in duplicate after signed by Owner's Representative to Architect/Engineer, Owner, and local Fire Protection Authority. Mount copy of inspection record in lexan enclosed frame assembly on control panel. 3.6 MAINTENANCE CONTRACT. - A, Where a maintenance contract exists, the maintenance contractor shall make available to the owner a maintenance contract proposal to increase the scope of the maintenance agreement to provide a minimum of two (2) inspections and tests per year in compliance with NFPA-72 guidelines, 3.7 WARRANTY: A. The Contractor shall guarantee all equipment and wiring provided under this contract free from inherent mechanical and electrical defects for a period of one year from the date of acceptance as set forth in the general conditions, 3.8 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS: A. Provide three (3) copies of Operating and Maintenance Instructions in hardback, three-ring binders covering all equipment furnished. Manuals shall include the following informatiow 1 Name, address and telephone number of authorized service organization to be contacted for each equipment item. The local fire alarm supplier shall have a 24 hour telephone response service. An answering machine shall not be considered acceptable. 2. Parts list and wiring diagram, operating and maintenance instructions for each piece of equipment. 1 Shop drawings corrected to show as -built conditions. 4. Record of voltage sensitivity for each ionization detector head as recorded during final calibration, 5, All wiring diagrams shall show color coding of all connections and mounting dimensions of equipment. 3,9 DEMOLITION: X Upon completion of new fire alarm system, after final connections have been made, this contractor shall carefully remove all existing fire alarm apparatus where indicated, including fire alarm control panel, manual stations, audible signals, etc., and turn all such equipment over to Owner, 110 PAINTING AND PATCHING: A. Contractor shall paint all exposed conduit to match adjacent surfaces. All surfaces or finishes damaged as as result of this work shall be properly patched, painted and/or repaired by trained craftsmen of the trade involved. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM — 04/29/2015 28 3111 - 12 W=-- HWAM B. Contractor shall patch and paint where old devices are removed unless the old devices are in block walls or in concrete, where the Contractor shall provide blank plates on boxes. Blank plates shall be painted to match adjacent surfaces. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM -- 04/29/2015 283111-13 OR OFFICE USE ONLY City of Crete: ._....� _., COMMU i DEvr t r= 1 'r PlanlPermit# Building & Inspection Services Division 7500 W.29 h Ave., Wheat Ridge, CO 30033 Plan Review Pee: Oce; 303-,235-2355 * Fax: 303-237-3929 Inspection Line: 303-234-5933 Building Permit Application PAID.'il Address: Ci!y, State, Zip: Arth tens Ery inner E-mail: ? .t e t Phone: • as Electrical: W.R. City License�t Plurnbing: i W.R. City License Other City licensed Scab: City license Mechanical: W.R, City License # 2. Complete all information on BOTH sides of this form NEW COMMERCIAL STRUCTURE ELECTRICAL SERVICE UPGRADE RESIDENTIALNEW COMMERCIAL ADDITION RESIDENTIAL ROOFING RESDENTIAL COMMERCIAL shed, RESIDENTIAL ACCESSORY STRUCTURE (Garage, shed, deck, SYSTEM/APPLIANCEMECHANICAL REPAIR • SYSTEM/APPLIANCELACEMENT PLUMBING .. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM/APPLIANCE REPAIR or REPLACEMENT Sq, FULF Stu's Caimans Amps Squares Other NNHF-4 flit Lut nerdn ilding r - Wheat idge 87uRding Department MEDICAL CENTER 1 SCL Health P: r Sisters of Charity Leavenworth Health System N I L —4 , (,c RUILDIN6 O)FIf WLAL DATE Validity of peortit TIte tsuance of a penmft or approval of plans, specifications and cowuta,;ons staff not be a permit for, or an approval of, any violalion to any of the Provisions of the building cue or of any r—'Iv ordinances. Permits presuming to give authority to violate or cancel the provisons of the Wilding codes or other ordinances of City, shall or be valid, Lutheran Medical Center' 8300 West 38th Avenue Wheat Ridge, CO 80033 CATH LAB #2 Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement H+L Project Number: 177.307 Project Manual May 01, 2015 — CD APPROVED St.,.-hbject to F-ieId lnspecfi--,", WheatfRidae Budding 0 Y4 Date -4W H1 ARCHITECTURE } +� F, 5 i Lutheran Whe MEDICAL CENTER ISCL Health Sisters of Charity Leavenworth Health S stem H., ----- y �. Validity of ppuT The Of t and computations sta,42 �� w�_ . €�y i it rstsiras ��.. m,,,.,. Permits presuming to grve 't, hOr -Ler bul'Ung codes or c)rd Lutheran Med'cal Cent 8300 West 38tn Avenue Wheat midge, CO 80033 'ATH LAts 0"1 ipment:Kepla- IE bi-Plane Equ' N+L. Project Number. 177.307 Mjec : C') 4 Wheat Project Manual Dat May 01, 2015 -- CD ;3 t 3 AV Y V t LINK: Cath Lab ##2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177,307 OWNER:; LUTHERAN MEDICAL. CENTER 83901 WEST 38TH AVENUE WHEAT RIDGE, COLORADO 80033 PH: 3013-425-8685 ATTN: ANNE LUTZ ARCHITECT: H+L. ARCHITECTURE 1758 BLAKE S. SUITE 4010 DENVER, COLORADO 802012 PH: 3013-298-4700 ATTN: MICHAEL HAGAN MECHANICAL ENGINEER: CATOR, RUMA & ASSOCIATES, INC.. 896 TAB03R STREET LAKEWOOD, CO 801401 PH: 3013-232-620101 ATTN: MIKE CLIFT ELECTRICAL ENGINEER: CATOR, RUMA & ASSOCIATES, INC. 896 TO)BOR STREET LAKEWOOD, CO 894011 PH: 303.232-6200 ATTN: JACKIE RUDKO KYLE O LSO N PROJECT DIRECTORY 1 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 DIVISION I - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011000 Summary 01 1400 Work Restrictions 012100 Allowances 012300 Alternates 012600 Contract Modification Procedures 012900 Payment Procedures 01 3100 Project Management & Coordination License Waiver, Release & Indemnity Agreement for Electronic File Transfer 013200 Construction Progress Documentation 013300 Submittal Procedures 013500 Special Procedures 014000 01 5000 Quality Requirements Temporary ()f Coto 016000 Facilities and Controls Product Requirements 016000,01 Substitution Request Form CO PATRICK 01 7300 Execution Requirements DOUGLAS 01 7329 Cutting and Patching JOHNSON 017330 Selective Demolition for Interiors 20 075 017700 01 7839 Closeout Procedures Project Record Documents TABLE OF CONTENTS — 05/01/2015 1001�11 11111111 1 i ii I I I I I ii F I I F11111! 11 ii I! I I I I I I iiljii�� 210500 Common Work Results for Fire Suppression 21 1000 Water Based Fire Protection DIVISION 22 — PLUMBING 220500 Common Work Results for Plumbing 2211 10 Water Distribution Piping 221319 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties 230500 Common Work Results for Mechanical 230505 Method of Procedure 230509 Mechanical Fire Stopping 230510 Basic Piping Materials and Methods 230516 Expansion Fittings and Loops for Mechanical Piping 230518 Piping Specialties 230519 Meters and Gauges for Mechanical Piping 230523 General Duty Valves for Mechanical Piping 230529 Hangers and Supports for Mechanical Piping & Equipment 230540 Vibration Control for Mechanical Piping and Equipment 230553 Identification for HVAC Piping & Equipment 230593 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 230700 HVAC Insulation 230993 Sequence of Operation for HVAC Controls 232213 Steam and Condensate Heating Piping 2331 13 Metal Ducts 233300 Air Duct Accessories 238413 Humidifiers 260500 260519 Common Work Results for Electrical Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables Y/ 0 260526 260529 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 1*0 ,O E, 0 Oz 260533 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 260534 Cabinets, Boxes and Fittings 260553 Identification for Electrical Systems 260583 Wiring Connections 9 2015 260923 Lighting Control Devices 262726 Wiring Devices L 262800 Low Voltage Circuit Protective Devices 265000 Lighting DIVISION 28 — ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 2831 11 Fire Detection and Alarm Expansion or Remodel of Addressable Systems TABLE OF CONTENTS — 05/01/2015 LMC; Cath Lab #2 —Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 977,307 SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY PARI` 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Project Identification: Project consists of Si -Plane equipment replacement in Cath Lab #2 provided by GE, and required infrastructure to support new equipment at Lutheran Medical Cen- ter as indicated in the Construction Documents dated February 8, 2015. 1. Project Location: Lutheran Medical Center 8300 West 38h Avenue Wheat Ridge, Colorado 80033 2. Owner- Sisters of Charity Leavenworth Health System S. Architect identification: H+L Architecture C, Contractor Identification: Kiewit Building Group D� Project Coordinator: Owner will appoint a project coordinator. E, The Work consists of remodeling and installation of new equipment as shown on plans and specifications:' 1.2 CONTRACT A. Project will be constructed under a construction contract (Master Agreement). 13 USE OF PREMISES A. General: The Contractor shall have partial use of premises for construction operations, includ- ing partial use of Project site, during construction period. Owner's right to perform work or to re- tain other contractors on portions of Project limits the Contractor's use of premises. The follow- ing existing facilities may not be used by construction personnel:' Parking Public2. entrances approved in writing by the Owner, Toilet outside current phase construction. 4 ••• service facilities unless as approved in writing by Owner. 5. Elevators unless as approved in writing by the Owner. 1.4 PRODUCTS ORDERED IN ADVANCE A. General: Owner has negotiated Purchase Orders with suppliers of material and equipment to be incorporated into the Work. The Owner will assign these Purchase Orders to the Contractor, Costs for receiving, handling, storage if required, and installation of material and equipment are included in the Contract Sum. SUMMARY — 05/01/2015 01 1000-1 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 1 Contractor's responsibilities are the same as if Contractor had negotiated Purchase Or- ders, including responsibility to renegotiate purchase and to execute final Purchase - Order agreements. Z The Schedule of Products Ordered in Advance is as follows'. a. No products are anticipated to be ordered in advance. PART 3 - EXECUTION 31 PRE -CONSTRUCTION MEETING: A, A pre -construction meeting will be held at a time and place designated by the architect, for the purpose of identifying responsibilities of the owner's and the architect's personnel and explana tion of administrative procedures. B. The contractor shall also use this meeting for the following minimum agenda: I Construction schedule 2. Use of areas of the site. 3. Parking SUMMARY — 05/01/2015 011000-2 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 4. Delivery and storage. 5. Safety. 6. Security. 7. Cleaning up. 8. Subcontractor procedures relating to: a. Submittals. b, Change orders. C. Applications for payment. d. Record documents. C. Attendees shall include: 1, The owner. . The constructions manager - advisor. 3. The architect and any consultants: 4. The contractor and its superintendent. 5. Major subcontractors, suppliers, and fabricators. 6. Others interested in the work. 3.2 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS i • * �� N a � �w �rR w w* t� w w Y •� alt . A r^ �w ifi_lC1y] E. When the following must be modified, provide alternate facilities acceptable to the owner: 1. Emergency means of egress• 2. Entrances which must remain open, . utilities which must remain in operation. 4. Informational signage, 3.3 SECURITY PROCEDURES A. Limit access to the site to parsons involved in the work. B. Provide secure storage for materials for which the owner has made payment and which are stored on site. , C. Secure completed work as required to prevent lass. SUMMARY -- 05/01/2015 t s►we LMC: Gatto Lab ##2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 D. CONT CTORS' PERSONNEL. WILL. BE REQUIRED TO WEAR BADGES ANY TIME THEY ARE WITHIN THE EXISTING HOSPITAL. AND LEG BAND AT ANY TIME THEY ARE DOING ABOVE CEILING WORK OUTSIDE THE CURRENT CONSTRUCTION AREA. CONTRACTOR IS REQUIRED TO COORDINATE WITH OWNER'S SECURITY FORCES. 3.4 COORDINATION A. If necessary, contractor shall inform each party involved, in writing, of procedures required for coordination; include requirements for giving notice, submitting reports, and attending meetings. 1. Inform the owner when coordination of his work is required; B. See other requirements in other portions of the contract documents. C. Conduct meetings for the specific purpose of coordination, at least every week. 1. Attendees shall include: a, Contractor, b. Subcontractors currently working at the site. C, OWNER. D. Prepare coordinationdrawings where limited space available may cause conflicts in the loca- tions of installed products, and where required to coordinate installation of products. 1. In particular, prepare the following coordination drawings: . Drawings showing all piping, duct, cable trays, electrical ductbanks,'and similar items, but not individual electrical conduit less than 4 inches in diameter. b. COMPLETE PIPING AND DUCT LAYOUTS WITH MAJOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND THEIR ROUTING, TO %" — INCH SCALE. . Where space is limited, show planned cross-section dimensions of space available, in- cluding structural obstructions on ceilings as applicable. 3. Coordinate shop drawings prepared by separate entities. Show installation sequence when necessary for proper installation.. 3.5 MECHANICAL: AND ELECTRICAL. COORDINATOR A, Provide a staff member or members to perform mechanical and electrical' coordination. 1. Qualifications. a, Experienced in coordination of mechanical and electrical work on projects of this type and scale, including administration and supervision, b, Approved by construction manager, owner, and architect. B. Coordinate all mechanical, plumbing, and electrical work, and coordinate that work with the oth- er work of the project. 1. Where space is limited, coordinate arrangement of mechanical, electrical, and either work to fit. 2. Coordinate cutting and patching activities and sequencing. SUMMARY — 05/01/2015 011000-4 LMC: Cath .• #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177,307 1 Coordinate use of temporary facilities, C. Prepare coordination drawings where required and where indicated. D. Prepare and maintain a separate schedule of activities in the contract which relate to this work; include: 1. Submittals. 2. Temporary utilities. E. Participate in progress meetings; report progress, changes required in schedules, and unre- solved problems. R Review substitution proposals and recommend action. G. Review submittals for compliance with the contract documents and for coordination with other work. 1. Check field dimensions, clearances, relationships to available space, and anchors. 2. Check compatibility with equipment, other work, electrical characteristics, and operational control requirements. 3. Check motor voltages and control characteristics. 4. Coordinate controls, interlocks, wiring of pneumatic switches, and relays. 5. Coordinate wiring and control diagrams. 6. Review the effect of changes on other work, K Obtain and distribute installation data on each item of equipment requiring mechanical or elec- trical connections; include: 1. Electrical power characteristics, Z Control wiring requirements. L Observe and maintain record of tests and inspections, i I L J. Observe work for compliance with contract documents and notify the applicable contractor in writing of observed defects in the work. K, Coordinate and observe startup and demonstration of equipment and systems. L, Coordinate maintenance of record documents. K Assist the architect with final inspections. A. Interim Life Safety Measures (ILSM) are a series of eleven administrative actions required to be taken to temporarily compensate for the hazards posed by existing • 101 -1997 Life Safety Code (LSC) deficiencies or construction activities, B. Implementation of ILSM is required in or adjacent to all construction areas and throughout build- ings with existing LSC deficiencies. ISLM apply to all personnel, including construction workers, SUMMARY — 05/01/2015 011000-5 LMC: Cath Lab #2 – Si -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 must be implemented upon project development, and be continuously enforced through proj completion. ..is *. C. ILSM are intended to provide a level of life safety comparable to that described in chaptem 1 31 and the applicable occupancy chapters of the LSC. Each ILSM action must be documen through written policies and procedures. Except as stated below, frequencies for inspection, testing, training, and monitoring and evaluation must be established by the organization. D. ILSM consistsof # # iactions: END OF SECTION 01 1000 SUMMARY- 05/01/2015 01 1000-6 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 SECTION 01 1400 - WORK RESTRICTIONS PART I -GENERAL 1.1 USE OF PREMISES 1 Before partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully ope tional, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupa cy, Owner will provide, operate, and maintain mechanical and electrical systems servin occupied portions of building. 2. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial servic for occupied portions of building, WORK RESTRICTIONS —05/0Y/2015 011400-1 -1 M-W.Mr-mirmaz Mg. MEMM Eck, 14 WA 111der-11• HUMENIMEMEM 177.307 1. Lump sura allowances. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders, 1.2 SELECTION AND PURCHASE A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when find selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be complet- ed to avoid delaying the Work. B. At Architect's 'request obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work. C. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit invoices or delivery Mips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance. PART _ PRODUCTS (Piot Used) s A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement. ALLOWANCES — 05/01/2015 r01 2100-1 "M M11111 HIM= .2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installa- tions to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work. 3,3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES X bone at this time. ENCS OF SECTION 012100 & 05/01/2015 012100-2 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 977.307 SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1'1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. WINEEMNiffffrom A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount,if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. I The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Con- tract Sum. A. Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted, rejected or deferred at Owner's option. Owner will have a minimum of 2 weeks to decide once presented with all the necessary information including the date(s) deferred decisions need to be made to avoid changes in cost or schedule. B. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. 1 . Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. CNotification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, o deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates. D. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. ESchedule: A Schedule of Alternates is included at the end of this Section, Specification Sec- tions referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. ALTERNATES — 05/01/2015 012300-1 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 31 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES — Please submit one bid document with full estimate amount, and another bid document that includes Alternates with a separate line for each item. Alternates: 1. None at this time. END OF SECTION 012300 0111111•— 05/01/2015 012300-2 mrmrrammum. M= SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES REENEIREEMM 177,307 X This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. I Division I Section "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures for handling re- quests for substitutions made after Contract award. JIM X Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involv- ing adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G71 0, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." MINION "No 1411 1 1 11-101, IN Vi N if I Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them in- structions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. Z Within fourteen (14) days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimat- ing cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. B. Contractor -initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change, The Contrac- tor shall submit a written Change Order Request (CDR) to the Owner and Architect within ten (10) days of the event giving rise to the change. 1 Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time, in terms of "not to ex- ceed". 2. Comply with requirements in Division I Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests, n i agagm CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES — 05/01/2015 012600-1 A. • : •wner's approval of Proposal Request,Architect will issue a Change Order forsignature of - . • Contractor on AIA Document G701. 1.5 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with,a change in the Work; for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. I . Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sura or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Chaise Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract, PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Plot used) PANT 3 _ EXECUTION (Not Used) CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES — 05/0112015 012600-2 LMC.- Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART I -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY X This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division I Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract, 2. Division I Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative require- ments governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals Schedule. X Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applica- tions for Payment. 1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES X Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contrac- tor's Construction Schedule. 1 Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b. Submittals Schedule. 2, Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than five days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. 8. If revisions are required by the Owner or Architect, resubmit corrected Schedule of Values within 5 days of receipt of revisions. B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. I Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d, Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. PAYMENT PROCEDURES — 05/01/2015 012900-1 t . Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the fol- lowing for each item listed: a. belated Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. C, blame of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value, g. Dollar value. 1 } percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 1 Provide;a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evalua- tion of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the ProjectMan- ual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. . Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. . Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site, Include evi- dence of insurance or bonded warehousing if required. . Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 7. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. In- clude total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. 3. schedule Updating: update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Appli- cations for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.4 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A, Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. I . Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. , B. Payment Application 'limes. The date for each Application for Payment is the 30th day of each month. The period covered by each Application for Payment starts on tate day following the end of the preceding period. C. Payment Application Forms. Use AIA Document G702 and AIADocument G703 Continuation Sheets as form for Applications for Payment. D. Application Preparation. Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person au- thorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete appli- cations without action. PAYMENT PROCEDURES — 05/01/2015 012900-2 ll a - 1 1 1 1 Qs kilir Iiill! I iii!, i I: ili 1 11111111 lili'1: •110111 a . 161210mocalar Logl NMI 1, List of subcontractors. 2. Approved Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final), 4. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). 5List of Contractor's principal consultants, subcontractors, principal sponsors and fabrica- tors. 6. Copies of building permits. 7. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 8. Report of pre -construction conference. 9. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 10. Performance and payment bonds. 11, Data needed to acquire Owners insurance. 12. Tax Exempt Certificate H, Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. PAYMENT PROCEDURES — 05/0112015 012900-3 1 Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. L Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the follow- ing: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 1 Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES — 05/01/2015 012900-4 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177,307 SECTION 013100 — PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART "I -GENE L 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Pro- ject including, but not limited to, the following: 1. General project coordination procedures. 2. Coordination Drawings. 3. Requests for Information (RFI) 4. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 5. Project meetings, K Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility will be assigned to a specific contractor, C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: I Division I Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting the Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Division I Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating Contract closeout, 12 COORDINATION A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of the Specifica- tions to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construc- tion operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation, k Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative proce-- dures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not ited to, the following: I Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2Preparation of the Schedule of Values, 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5Progress meetings. 6Preinstallation conferences. 7, Project closeout activities. X Coordination Drawings.- Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION — 05/01/2015 013100-1 1. Indicate relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings. 2Indicate required installation sequences. 1 Refer to Mechanical and Electrical Divisions for specific Coordination Drawing require - for electricalinstallations. B. Stafi`Names: Within 10 working days of starting construction operations ' submit a list of princi- pat staff assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site, Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and tele- phone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absenceof individuals assigned to • # 1. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each tempo - telephone. ION — 05/01/2015 013100-2 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION - 05/01/2015 013100-3 LMC: Cath Lab ##2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 1. The following RFls will be returned without action: a, Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions, c. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. d. Requests to revise the Contract, e. Requests for interpretation of the Architect's actions can submittals. f, Requests to confirm information or resolutions already noted in Cather documents, such as meeting minutes, field observation reports or the like. g. Incomplete RFls or RFIs with numerous errors. Vit. Requests that pertain to Contractor's means and methods. i, Requests that document and/or solicit corrections or repairs required due to con- struction deficiencies or construction errors. I . Project name. 2, Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI description. b. Date the RFI was submitted. Date Architects response was received. 7. Identification of related Minor Change in the Werk, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 16 ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY i PERSONNEL X General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory personnel as required for proper performance of the Work. I . Include special personnel required for coordination of operations with other contractors. *wry A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise in- dicated. LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement I Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting, Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. Z Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 1 Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meet- ing minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within 5 days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construc- tion, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 5 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. I Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Construction Manger, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; manufactur- ers; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relat- ing to the Work. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. C. Critical work sequencing. d. Designation of responsible personnel. e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. f. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. g. Distribution of the Contract Documents. K Submittal procedures, L Preparation of Record Documents. j. Use of the premises. k. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. L Parking availability, M Office, work, and storage areas. n. Equipment deliveries and priorities. 0. First aid. p. Security. q. Progress cleaning. r. Working hours. C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. ------------ a. Contract Documents. b. Options. C, Related Change Orders, d. Purchases. e. Deliveries. f. Submittals. g. Review of mockups. 1 11 111111 1111 1111 211 11 [a h, Possible conflicts. L Compatibility problems. j. Time schedules. k. Weather limitations. L Manufacturer's written recommendations. M Warranty requirements, M Compatibility of materials. 0� Acceptability of substrates. p. Temporary facilities and controls. q. Space and access limitations. r. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction, s. Testing and inspecting requirements. t. Required performance results, U. Protection of construction and personnel. 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements. 4Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. tiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. Coordinate dates of meet- ings with preparation of payment requests. 1 Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Construction Manager, and Architect, contractor and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coor- dination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relati g tot Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project, I ) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries, 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access, 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls, 9) Work hours. 10) Hazards and risks. 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Change Orders. 14) Documentation of information for payment requests. 15) Contract modification documents, LMC; Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. Include a brief summary, in narrative farm, of progress since the previous meeting and report. a. Schedule updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each pro- gress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. FART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not used) END OF SECTION 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION - 05/01/2015 013100-7 HL- ARCHTECTURE LICENSE WAIVER, RELEASE AND INDEMNITY AGREEMENT FOR ELECTRONIC FILE TRANSFER TO CONTRACTOR fl+L Architecture, hereinafter referred to as "Architect"' has utilized electronic CADD files (Electronic Media) in preparation of drawings for "The Project" on behalf of hereinafter referred to as "Owner"; and hereinafter referred to as "Contractor' desires to obtain copies of Electronic Media, and The Architect is willing and mile to provide copies of the Electronic Media to the Contractor pursuant to a limited license and cinder certain express conditions of understanding, acknowledgement and covenants of protection, which Contractor accepts without reservation and covenants as herein provided without qu, ArIcation. The Contractor agrees to the following: Donvef Colorado springs 1. ova CO80202 C, .3c ad p - gs Co 80903 H'L- ARCHRECTURE 3. REUSE: The Electronic Media is not reusable for any other project or for additions or extensions of The Project identified in this agreement, Architect does not authorize release of the Electronic Media to any person or party other than the Owner and Contractor agrees and covenants not to release the Electronic Mto any other party other than the Contractor's subcontractors for use on The Project, Contractorshall edia tain "Waiver, Release and Indemnity Agreement" from each subcontractor and submit copy of said Release to Architect prior to release of the Electronic Media. 4INDEMNIFICATION � Under no circumstances shall delivery of the Electronic Media for use by Contractor be deemed a sale by Architect Architect merchantability and fitness for any particular purpose. In no event shall we be liable for any loss of profit or any consequential damages as a result of Contractor's use or reuse of these Electronic Media, Contractor agrees to make no claim and furthermore, the Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by law, indemnify and hold harmless, the Owner, Architect successorsconsultants, employees and • reasonable defenseattorneys'fees and •out ofor ifrom its use of these Electronic 5. The maximum right or interest conveyed to it with the transmission of these files is a restricted, non - s purpose# other purpose whatsoever, The license hereby granted may not be transferred, sold or assigned. It is a material term of 6. This agreement is governed by and shall be construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Colorado and where applicable, the copyright laws of the Untied States of America. i. If any term or provision hereof shall be unlawful, void, or for any reason unenforceable, then such provision shall be deemed severable from this agreement and shall not affect the validity and enforceability of any remaining provision; The parties have acknowledged and accepted this Release, Waiver and Indemnity Agreement and the above conditions by signing belo .i CONTRACTOR ARCHITECT Denver� Cta4c ado Spw ngs De..0 i CO80202 sbteavag. C10 80903 +L Architecture (Print name) (Print name) Signature Signature Title Title Date Cate Denver� Cta4c ado Spw ngs De..0 i CO80202 sbteavag. C10 80903 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1 Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Submittals Schedule. 3. Field condition reports, B. Related Sections include the following: I Division I Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of Values, 2. Division I Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports. 1 Division I Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and inspec- tions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demon- strate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information speci- fied. 13Submittals Schedule- Submit three copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a tabular format* 1. Scheduled date for first submittal. 2. Specification Section number and title. 1 Submittal category (action or informational), 4. Name of subcontractor, & Description of the Work covered. 6Scheduled date for Architecfs final release or approval. 7. Include schedule of owner-fumished contractor -installed items. C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit two printed copies of initial schedule, one a repro- ducible print and onea blue- or black -line print, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period. D. Field Condition Reports* Submit two copies at time of discovery of differing conditions, 1,3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construc- tion activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. t B, Coordinate Contractors Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcon- tracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules d reports. in- volved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates re- quired by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manu- facturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. 1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule., 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL. A. Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in AGC°s "Construction Planning &Schedul- ing." B. Time Frame. Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of Final Completion. �. '"# '".•t !." •i.. • iii i'" •' �« � '.i � is • �°" !.. : .i • : • is CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 05/01/2015 013200-2 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177307 D. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its sub- mission, prepare a time -impact analysis using fragments to demonstrate the effect of the pro- posed change on the overall project schedule. 23 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GAN TT CHART) A. Gantt -Chart Schedule* Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt -chart -type, ContractorJs Construction Schedule within 10 days of date established for the Notice of Award. Base schedule on the Preliminary Construction Schedule and whatever updating and feedback was received since the start of Project. & Preparation: Indicate each 'significant construction activity separately, Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. I . For construction activities that require 3 months or longer to complete, indicate an esti- mated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar. ffl��* � A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following inf] mation concerning events at Project site: I . List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 3. Accidents. 4. Meetings and significant decisions. 5Unusual events (refer to special reports). 6. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 7Meter readings and similar recordings, * Emergency procedures. * Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 10. Change Orders received and implemented. 11. Construction Change Directives received, 12. Services connected and disconnected. 13. Equipment or system tests and startups. 14Partial Completions and occupancies, 15Substantial Completions authorized. B. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare a detailed report, Submit with a request for information. In- clude a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. A. Contractors Construction Schedule Updating: At weekly intervals, update schedule to refleo actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule before each regularly schedu progress meeting. I LMC-. Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177307 Reviseschedule.r r or other activity where revisions been •r -• or .ate ar. »r schedule concurrently.r of meeting.such Include a reportupdated schedule♦ r- including, but • limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity. Distribution: Distrir rr eof approved schedule to.separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies,r other parties identified by r •r with a need -to -know sched -r r • • ♦r r *r copies in Project r rooms and temporary field offices. revisions- made, distribute ad. .r schedulesto the same parties and post in the same locations. Deleteparties fromdistribution when they have cr • .r as- signed portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of r r e.. a •I11111F#TJrJJ&J#J=; # i ^« # « •-« ^ SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Draw- ings, Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals, 1,2 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals; Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action. B. Informational Submittals. Written information that does not requireArchitect's approval. Submit- tals may be rejected for not complying with requirements:. 13 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. . Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches on label or beside title block to record Con- tractor's review and approval markings and section taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken.- a. aken;a. Project name. b. Hate. C. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 05/01/2015 013300-1 LMC1- Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177307 fName and address of supplier, g. Name of manufacturer. h. Number d title of appropriate s^ #Section. i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. j. Submittal number consisting of #_ « r section « submittal•• fied followed by a sequence number for submittals for that specification section (06 Other necessary identification, D. Deviations: encircle, or otherwise identifydeviations # the Contract Documents on submittals. submittal.E. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions of the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final copiesI . Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of # submittalF. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each # a transmittal form.Architect#without received from sourcesother than Contractor. I On an attached separate sheet, prepared,on Contractors letterhead, record relevant in- formation, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previ- ous submittals, and deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include the same label information as the related sub- mittal 2. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form Tor the following information, a. Project name. , b. Cate. c, Destination (To:). d. Source (From:). e. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. f. Category and type of submittal. g. Submittal purpose and description. h. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. I. Remarks. j. Signature of transmitter. k. Submittal number consisting of specification section where the submittal is speci- fied followed by a sequence number for submittals for that specification section (06 4000-1, 06 4000-2, etc.). 1. Other necessary identification. G� Distribution, Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fab- ricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for; performance of construction activities: Show distribution on transmittal forms. H. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect in connection with construction. PART 2 -PRODUCTS SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 05/01/2015 013300-2 LMC: Cath Lab ##2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. 1. number of Copies: Submit digital (PDF) files of each submittal, as follows, unless other- wise indicated: a. Submittal: Submit one (1) copy of each submittal where selection of options, color, pattern, :texture, or similar characteristics is required. Architect will return one (1) copy and digital file with options selected. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:. a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b, Manufacturer's product specifications. C. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Standard color charts. e. Manufacturers catalog cuts. f. Wiring diagrams showing factory -installed wiring. g. Printed performance curves, h. Operational range diagrams. i. Standard product operating and maintenance manuals. t. Compliance with recognized trade association standards. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. I. Application of testing agency labels and seals. . notation of coordination requirements. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project -specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Include the following Information, as applicable: a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. C. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing -in and setting; diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field -installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions: g. Templates and patterns. fir. Schedules. i. Design calculations. j. Compliance with specified standards, k, notation of coordination requirements, 1. notation of dimensions established by field measurement. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer -installed and field -installed wiring: 3. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES — 05/01/2015 013300-3 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177307 4. Number of Copies: Submit copies of each submittal, as follows: a. Initial Submittal: Submit one correctable, translucent, reproducible print and two blue- or black -line prints. Architect will return the reproducible print. D. Samples: Prepare physical units of materials or products, including the fallowing: 1. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for mockups. 2. Samples for Initial Selection: submit manufacturers color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractors letter- head, provide the following: a. Size limitations. b. Compliance with recognized standards. C. Availability. . Delivery time. 4. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a final check of these characteristics with other elements and for comparison of these characteristics between final submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. a, If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the prod- uct represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of the variations. b. Refer to individual Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illus- trate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, oper- ation, and similar construction characteristics. E. Contractor's Construction Schedule. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construc- tion Progress Documentation" for Construction Manager's action. F. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." C. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Payment Proce- dures." ScheduleComply .. . . Procedures," 1. Subcontract tet.. •` AF individuals or proposed for each specialportion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a •n. Include the following information in tabular• I . Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTORS REVIEW SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 41•ii{ i ii • 013300-4 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi-Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 A. Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note correc- tions and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractors approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents, 12 ARCHITECT'S ACTION K General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractors approval stamp and will return them without action, B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows: C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will reject and return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to ap- propriate party. D, Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded, END OF SECTION 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES — 05/01/2015 013300-5 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 SECTION 01 3600 — SPECIAL PROCEDURES (INFECTION CONTROL, METHOD OF PROCEDURE AND NOISE PERMIT) PART 1'- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for Infection Control, Methods of Procedure and Noise Per- mits as follows: I Infection Control: a. Requirements for Infection Control Permit (ICP) b, Temporary partitions. 2. Methods of Procedure: a. Requirements for developing and implementing Method of Procedure (MOP) dur- ing building system shut downs b. Additional requirements and supplemental instructions. C. MOP Guidelines d. Method of Procedure Outline form. e. Welding or cuffing permit. f. Outside contractor evaluation form. a. Requirements for developing and implementing Noise Permits during the construc- tion of this project. b. Additional requirements and supplemental instructions. C, Noise permit Guidelines d. Noise Permit Outline form. MGM= 1 Division I Section "Summary". 2. Divon I Section "Submittal Procedures". 3. Division I Section "Project Management and Coordination". 4, Division I Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls". B. Prior to beginning construction, Owner will schedule an Infection Control Risk Assessment meeting. From this meeting a Risk Assessment Checklist will be provided to the Contractor. hospitalC. Prior to beginning construction, contractor to submit a proposed Method of Procedure (MOP) schedule using the procedures as established by the Attachment MOP schedule is not satisfactory, it must be revised to the satisfaction of the Owner for signed approval. D. Prior to beginning construction, contractor to submit a proposed Noise Permit schedule using the procedures as established by the hospital (see Attachment D). If the initial noise permit ap- proval, PART 2 _ INFECTION CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS, CONSIDERATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS 2.1 INFECTION CONTROL DESCRIPTION: A. Submit an infection control plan in any area occupied by patientsor staff, unless directed to the contrary by the owner. 1. Locate construction and dust control barriers in plan view. 2. Indicate types of barrier, (plastic, drywall, melamine -faced panels, etc.), . Indicate types of seals to be provided with each barrier type. 4. Document methods to seep surfaces clean at all times in patient, staff and public areas. 5. Show traffic patterns to be used during demolition and construction phases. Indicate dupster locations in plan, and routes of travel to dumpsters. . Establish and maintain negative air pressure within construction areas. . Document negative air pressure by using owner furnished recording instrumentation. a. Attach recorded tapes to corresponding superintendent's daily report and give to project manager. b. Contractor to supply negative air pressure recording instruments. g. Protect air -handling equipment. % Weatherstrip openings. PART 3 - MOP DESCRIPTIONS, CONSIDERATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS SPECIAL PROCEDURES -- IC, MOPS; NOISE PERMITS 05/01/2015 013500-2 I 11,11111MI 11111 1111 1111111mrivil I 177.307 C. Development: 1The Prime Contractor shall develop, submit, track and process the MOP. Any assistance required by the Subcontractors shall be provided. All MOP's shall be reviewed by the Prime Contractor prior to submitting the MOP to the Owner and Engineer. 2. ALL MOP'S SHALL BE TYPED — hand written submittals will be rejected, 3, Contractor shall develop the MOP in a timely fashion prior to review and approval by all required parties. 4. Contractor shall develop the MOP with input from the subcontractor, where necessary. 5. Project schedule will not be compromised by Contractors failure to follow MOP. guide- lines. D. Form: Each MOP shall be a written document in narrative, descriptive or outline form supple- mented with drawings, diagrams and schedules as necessary. The detailed format included under this section shall be utilized. E. Review and Approval: Contractor shall submit each MOP to the Engineer for review and ap- proval. All MOP's require Owners approval, Incomplete MOP's will not be processed. FImplementation: Contractor shall implement the MOP when approved by the Engineer and Owner in writing. No construction activity which requires a MOP shall proceed until the MOP is approved. G. Compliance: Contractor shall comply with the approved MOP. The Owner and Engineer re- serve the right to stop the work for non-compliance with the MOP. Any cost or time delay result- ing from the work stoppage shall be borne by the Contractor. H. Posting: Work shall not proceed on any facet of the work involving any MOP if an approved and signed MOP is not posted in the work area. 12 MOP CONSIDERATIONS: A. General: The following are considerations in developing the Method of Procedure: I Develop a detailed listing of MOPs which will be required as part of the project. Submit at the preconstruction meeting, included on the project schedule. 2. Identify the construction area and its boundaries. SPECIAL PROCEDURES — IC, MOPs, NOISE PERMITS — 05/01/2015 013500-3 r11111 111111■lilimill !1 k'21 *.' I �[*:!* •M'3MZMUM1*M2= I CIf primary systems serving critical areas as determined by the Owners representative are taken out of service, for any reason, the Contractor shall be responsible for providing temporary sys- tems during the period when the primary system is out of service. The Contractor shall be re- sponsible for providing temporary power to the standby system, D, Limit construction operations to those methods and procedures which will not adversely and unduly affect the working environment of Owners occupied spaces, including noise, dust, odors, air pollution, ambient discomfort, poor lighting, hazards and other undesirable effects and conditions. E. The Contractor shall coordinate and co-operate with Owner at all times for all new to existing connections, system shutdowns and restart -up, flushing and filling both new and existing sys- tems. F. Provide temporary dUctw6tk and piping services where required to maintain existing areas op- erable. G. Coordinate all services shut -down with the Owner, provide temporary services as required, T Contractor shall not operate any valve, switch, mechanical equipment, electrical equipment, without prior approval from the Owner or authorized O�vnees Representative. All mechani e� and electrical service shut -downs shall be identified as a critical step in the MOP. n H. The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance operation and servicing of all new m I chanical systems which are to be used by the Owner during the time of any occupancy and u of any areas within the construction limitations before final completion or acceptance of the sy_ tems. A written record of maintenance, operation and servicing shall be turned over to t Owner prior to final acceptance. i # • !. #.: ".# ..# ...fir �.. iden- tified2. If affected areas and syste s are identified, the following should be addressed. in the M.O.P. re- quired1) Space cooling requirements should be reviewed with Facilities Management and User Groups. Temperature readings shall be recorded every 30 minutes without AC operating. If temperature is exceeded, AC shall be re- # +. work. bCritical areas: ie. how long can space be maintained without cooling. C. Pressurizatiom Room pressurization requirements of affected areas shall be veri- fied with the Owner, no exceptions. It is mandatory that requirements for pressuri- zation, whether negative or positive, are maintained. The contractor shall be re- sponsible for providing temporary means. Testing of temporary means shall be completed prior to taking any system out of service. . , Stop when the "unexpected" is encountered and proceed with the contingency/backout plan. If contingency/backout plan does not address the "unexpected," work shall be stopped - NO EXCEPTIONS. 1t is to everybody's advantage to: a. Anticipate problems; b. {dearly identify contingency plans; c. Clearly identify back out plan. . 4, Verify with Building Operations any affected alarms at the beginning and ending of each M.O.P. to ensure integrity is in place. What is going to be affected by M.O.P. work? LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane EquipmentReplacement Evaluate if temporary cooling should be provided (i.e. fans, portable cooling units, non- affecteda. Monitoring of environmentJor critical areas should be addressed. d, Maintain communication with Facilities Mangement for change in environment, to temporaryc implement or t- (contingency i or # normal e. Evaluate which mechanical/electrical subcontractors need to be involved. f. Critical steps should be identified on left side of • number for Owner represerttative� review and Contractor check off. All individuals included in the signature block - we r - for identifying critical steps. 6. All steps must be sequentially numbered. 7When ! * r ., security, etc.), Facilities co- ordinated # s d i Operations. 9. List any and all systems that could be affected by the work procedure, Managementa. This should include the Owners standard protection measures, Review with Facili- bOne line mechanical diagrams shall be attached to the M.O.P, for�any system that is affected by the work procedure (i.e. chilled water, condenser water, steam, heat- ing, domestic hot or cold, fuel oil, supply/return air systems, etc.), The M.O.P. au- di- agram. C. It is the Contractor's responsibility to operate switches, breakers, equipment dis- connects, valves or any other devices. Above devices shall be labeled and identi- fied. Facilities Management shall be notified both prior to and at the time of opera- tion, These tasks shall be clearly identified in a signed and approvedN.O.P. #` '# '..M � '# #. is •• LMC: Cath Lab ##2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 3) Transformer «. and 4) Motor and switching control center testing and cleaning. 5) Utility company « « and 6) Clamp -on AC/DC voltage and amperage readings on any power leads connected to fuses or breakers. 7) Performing any physical contact work inside a power board, control bay, distribution center/unit or x# Battery strap cleaning andlor replacement. b. Visual and infrared inspections W switchgear, load centers, transformers, panels, motor and switching control centers, batteries, fuses, etc., may be performed at any time. These inspections # « be coordinated with Building Ope«. PART 4 -PRODUCTS 4.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide new materials. Undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condi- tion may be used if approved by Architect. Provide materiels suitable for use intended. 13, Paint. Comply with requirements in Division 9 Section "Painting." C, Water: Potable. D. Tarpaulins: Fire -resistive labeled with flame -spread rating of 15 or less.. 4.2 EQUIPMENT A. For core drilling: Contractor to use Hilt! corebrill, Hemmer drills will not be allowed. PART 5 - EXECUTION 5.1 INFECTION CONTROL « « # SPECIAL PROCEDURES — IC, MOPS, NOISE PERMITS — 0510112015 013500-7 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177307 B. MOP instructions: 1. MOP number: Number is to be sequentially numbered by Prime Contractor 2. Contact List: Indicate all numbers for emergency contacts 1 Description of Work: Describe each step in detail. Provide an asterisk for each critical step. A critical step is defined as anything which could potentially affect medical equip- ment or infrastructure systems which affect medical equipment, as defined by Facilities Management or the Design Team. 4. Area Affected: describe area of building, department and major pieces of equipment af- fected 5. Hoisting & Hauling: Include detailed information on the following: a. Identify route b. Identify floor/wall protection c. Identify weight of object d. Identify weight capacity of elevator if appropriate e. If a structural system is used to support object, identify component, capacity and method of support. 6. Safety/Infection Control: Include detailed information on the following: a. Fire Protection b. Fire watch C. Dust protection (Infection Control Permit as required) d, Asbestos Containment e. Smoke containment f, Noise containment (Permit as required) g. Water Containment K Personal Protection Equipment 7. Tool/Equipment Identification a. Identify types of tools: Hydraulic tools, such as, conduit benders, crimpers, shears, cable pullers, lifts, hoists, and other devices that may be conductive, b. Include specifics regarding methods of cuffing, wet methods detailed. C. Include specifics regarding welding/soldering. Execute a Cutting & welding Permit (Attachment D) LMC; Cath Lab ##2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.3017 ,,a _• •. • ! "" a • • .� .. .• -• • • • • a - ♦ arm »e•- a• • a a a- • a a- »a • •^ a . a •^ •� � •a�• •� •• - o as - r- ♦ ^a a. Procedure for obtaining signatures shall be as follows= 1) Signatures shall be in tate order indicated. 2) Originator of M,O.P, shall indicate "N/ °' adjacent to individuals who are not involved and/or affected by the M.O.P. 5.3 NOISE PERMIT A. Noise Permits: See Attachment E included in this section for Noise Permit Notification and Au- thorization. B. Noise Permit Instructions: 1. Complete Scheduled Noise Permit (Attachrnent E) 2. Post executed permit at each Impacted department 3. Provide copy of executed permit to Facilites Management Office END OF SECTION 013500 SPECIAL PROCEDURES -- IC, MOPS, NOISE PERMITS 0/5/01/20015 013500-9 LMC1- Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177307 SECTION 014000 _ QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL f «r t' it' # 1 t* t t •t C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for developing a schedule of required tests and inspections. . Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for repair and restoration of construction dis- turbed by testing and inspecting activities. . Divisions 2 through 33 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements. 1.2 DEFINITION$ A. Quality -Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and ensure that proposed con- struction complies with requirements. B. Quality -Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that completed construction complies with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C, Mockups: Full-size, physical example assemblies to illustrate finishes and materials. Mockups are used to verify selectionsmade tinder Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction„ coordina- tion, testing, or operation; they are not Samples, Mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. D. Testing Agency: Ars entity engaged to perforin specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing la- boratory shall mean the same as testing agency. 1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS QUALITY REQUIREMENTS05/01/2015 014000-1 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 A. Copies of Regulations: Obtain copies of the following regulations and retain at Project site to be available for reference by parties who have a reasonable need: a. Comply with edition of standard indicated; if data is not indicated, comply with edi- tion in effect as of: A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following: 1, Date of issue. 2, Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. . Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. . Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 5. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. . Complete test or inspection data. 7� Ambient conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 8. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 9. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 10. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, ; jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compli- ance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient produc- tion capacity to produce required units. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS -- 05/01/2015 014000-2 '.MC-, Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 # # # # # x ## # # # # i k QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality -control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS — 0510112015 014000-3 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 1 Testing agency will notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficien- cies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Testing agencywill submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality -control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authores having juris- diction. COU��Irt IREMENTS — 05/01/2015 014000-4 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 3. Testing agency will submit a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of Unresolved deficiencies. 4Testing agency will interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether test- ed and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents, 5. Testing agency will retest and reinspect corrected work. D. Manufacturer's Field Services- Where indicated, engage a factory -authorized service repr sentative to inspect field -assembled components and equipment installation, including servi connections. Report results in writing. E. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractol responsibility, provide quality -control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for constru tion that revised or replaced Work that failed to comply with requirements established by t 17, Contract Documents. # on Iiiiiijiiiiiiiiii 0=0 = I IM no I Access to the "TT'ork. Z Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and in- specting. Assist agency in obtaining samples, 4Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies, • Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. �-ilillfill'illiw,W* W mill; Ill 11, A 11 L Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality - control services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 5 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS — 05/01/2015 014000-5 LMC: Cath Lab ##2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Werk where tests and inspections are required.. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Riot Used) PARS` 3 - EXECUTION .1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample tatting, and similar services, repair dam- aged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply'with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching. 2. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division'I Section "Cutting and Patching." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality -control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsi- bility for quality -control services. END OF SECTION 014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS — 05/01/2015 014000-6 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177,307 SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Temporary utilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1: Water service and distribution. Z Sanitary facilities, including toilets, wash facilities, and drinking -water facilities. . Heating and cooling facilities. 4. Ventilation, 5. Electricpower service: . Lighting. 7. Telephone service. 1. Project identification and temporary signs. . Waste disposal facilities. . Field offices. 4. Temporary elevator usage. 5. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities. D. Security, infection control and protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Barricades, warning signs, and lights. 2. Temporary partitions. 3. Fire protection. 4. Site clean-up E. Related Sections include the following. 1. Division l Section "Submittal Procedures" for procedures for submitting copies of imple- mentation and termination schedule and utility reports. 2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements. 3. Division 1 Section "Special Procedures" for infection control, method of procedure and noise permit requirements. 4. Divisions 2 through 33 for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements for products in those Sections. 1.2 USE CHARGES A. Water Service: Use water from Owner's existing water system without metering and without payment of use charges. B. Electric Power Service. Use electric power from Owner's existing system without metering and without payment of use charges. TEMPORARY FACILITIES 1.CONTROLS f 015000-1 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177307 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Implementation and Termination Schedule: Within 15 days of date established for submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule, submit a schedule indicating implementation and termina- tion of each temporary utility. Prior to beginning construction, contractor to submit a proposed Infection Control Plan (ICP) us ing the procedures as established by the hospital, If the initial ICP is not satisfactory, it must be revised to the satisfaction of the Owner for signed approval. Refer to Division 1 "Special Proce- dures7. 1A QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6, NECAs"Temporary Electrical Facilities," and NFPA 241. 1 Trade Jurisdictions: Assigned responsibilities for installation and operation of temporary utilities are not intended to interfere with trade regulations and union jurisdictions. Z Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for tem- porary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each tem- porary utility before use, Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Utilities.- At earliest feasible time, when acceptable to Owner, change over from use of temporary service to use of permanent service. I Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities, Installer of each permanent service shall as- sume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent ser- vice during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. B. Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary services and facilities by all parties engaged in the Work: 1. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat. Z Relocate temporary services and facilities as required by progress of the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS B. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 9 Section "Painting." C. Water: Potable. D. Tarpaulins: Fire -resistive labeled with flame -spread rating of 15 or less. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS — 05/01 /2015 015000-2 j..MC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177307 2.2 EQUIPMENT A, General: Provide equipment suitable for use intended. B. Fire Extinguishers: Hand carried, portable, UL rated. Provide class and extinguishing agent as indicated or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for exposures. 1. Comply with NEPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing want, and size re- quired by location and class of fire exposure. C. Field Office: Coordinate location of field office and telephone with the Hospital Facilitiesmanag- er, Q. Staging Areas: No on-site Staging Areas are available. Minimal on-site storage areas should be coordinated with the Hospital Facilities Manager and/or Construction Manager -Advisor, ifappli- cable. PART 3 - EXECUTION' 31 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required. B, Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay.. Maintain and modify as re- quired. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Engage appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to ex- isting service." Where utility company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with utility company recommenda- tions. 1, Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be in- terrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.. . Provide' adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Before temporary utility is available, provide trucked -in services. 3. Obtain easements to bring temporary utilities to Project site where Owner's easements cannot be used for that purpose. B, Water Service:: Use of Owner's existing water service facilities will be permittees, as long as fa- cilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Comple- tion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. Provide rubber hosesto serve Project Z Where spillage or leakage might damage installations below an outlet, provide a drip pan of suitable size to minimize water damage, Drain accumulated water promptly from pans. C. Sanitary Facilities: Coordinate use of existing facilities with the Hospital Facilities Manager. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS — 05/0112015 015000-3 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177307 i W 0 able to bwner, G. Electric Distribution: Provide receptacle outlets adequate for connection of power tools and equipment, MINN a. Police and fire departments. b. Contractor's home office. c. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices. 2Provide an answering machine, voice -mail service, or messaging service on superinten- dent's telephone. LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.3017 3. Provide a portable cellular telephone for superintendent's use In making and receiving telephone calls when away from field office. i f i `• �f f iiw f « "' "'w. f f « f w.. 'w f •. „ � i#:.. f f 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION i .i'`♦ f,r wi^ Ma «ff ff ff #.i f f i # f" f'. ♦ • i #.. f i#.. f '" w.f «iifi: • "♦"`i fi B. Temporary Partitions:Refer to Division 1 "Special Procedures" for barrier construction and re- moval requirements. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS — 05/01/2015 015000-5 LIVIC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 C. Temporary Sheeting Partitions- Small, short duration (8 hours or less) projects may use fire - rated plastic sheeting barrier wall construction, with approval of the Owner. Refer to Division 1 "Special Procedures" for barrier construction and removal requirements. D. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire -protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities, in� reason- ably predictable and controllable ce losses. Comply • i 241. 1 . Provide fire extinguishers, installed on walls on mounting bfacl�ets, visible and accessible ## • # f- • t s t ## � .s • #f ## # # r C. Temporary Facility ChangeoverExcept for using permanent fire protection as soon as it is available, do not change over from Using temporary security andprotecfion facilities to perma- Substantial f i D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need r its service as end- ed, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Sub - Completion. • # or, • permanent construction that may have I . Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification suns. 2. At Substantial Completion, cyan and renovate permanent facilities used during construc- tion period. Comply with final cleaning requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Pro- cedures," END OF SECTION 015000 MEMEMON mo III F I III III I'll' 1Rw11#T9*M�.*3z2MKw41M#1RM2rk =� SECTION 016000.01 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FOR USE DURING BIDDING OR AFTER AWARD OF CONTRACT PROJECT NAME: ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NO: Bid or Construction Package: Uffism To: (Contractor's Company) (Street Address) (City State Zip) (Phone Fax Email) (Contact Name) From: (Subcontractor Company) (Street Address) (City State Zip) (Phone Fax Email) (Contact Name) It so I ff-M.10021 a I VA ISO 10-an.-I'A a X*1111 on WIM 110 M.9211 I Iiiiiii 11 IIIIIIIIIIIIIrIll a. If applicable, non-availability due to: (circle one) Discontinuation of Production Unable to meet Construction Schedule Labor Dispute (strike or lockout) Bankruptcy Proven Shortage Proposed Cost Savings B. Specified Product or System: SUBSTITUTION REQUEST — 05/01/2015 016000.01-1 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 1. Product Name; 2. Specification Section: Article(s)/Paragraphs: C. Requested Substitution: 1. Product Name/Number: 2. Maintenance service Available? (circle one) Yes No 1 Maintenance Company Name and Location: 4. Parts Source Available? (circle cane) Yes No 5. Parts Source Name and Location: 6. Attach product description, specifications, drawings, photographs, performance data, test data, warranty information and any additional data or information for evaluation of the proposed substitution in accordance with requirements of Specifications section 01600. 7. sample is attached? (circle one) Yes No . Sample is available on request" (circle orae) Yes No History: (circle cane) New Product less than 5 years old 5 years old or older D. Product Comparison. Specified Product Proposed substitution 1. Product Name . Manufacturer 1 Catalog No: 4. Variation(s) 5. After Bidding, Unit Cost 6. After Bidding, Total Cost B. Effect of the Substitution: I . Proposed substitution affects other parts of the Work? (circle one) Yes No 2. If yes, explain: 3. Substitution requires dimensional revision or redesign of Architectural, Structural, Mechanical or Electrical work? (circle one) Yea No SUBSTITUTION REQUEST — 05/01/201 01 60W01-2 LMC. Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 4. If yes, explain: E, After Bidding only, Time and Gast Implications, including cost of effect on rather work: 1. Total cost implications; (circle one) Add Amount Deduct Amount 2, Total time implications: (circle one) Add Days Deduct Bays G. List a minimum of 3 previous installations below, similar to use identified in the Construction Documents, where the proposed substitution has been used, Provide other data indicated. 1. Project Name: a. Address: b. Owner: c. Architect: d, General Contractor: . Date Installed: f, Approximate Value ($): 2. Project Name: a. Address: b. towner; c. Architect; d. General Contractor: e. mate Installed: f. Approximate Value ($): 3. Project Name: a. Address: b. Owner: SUBSTITUTION REQUEST — 05/01/2015 016000.01-3 LMC: hath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 c. architect: . General Contractor: 1 Printed Name: 4. Firm: . Auer Bidding: mate Bent to Contractor 6. During Bidding: Crate Sent to architect After Bidding, For use by Contractor (Attach additional information as required to document review and additional comments) 1 Crate received by Contractor: . Testament: Contractor hereby attests that to the best of their knowledge the substitution proposed is equivalent or necessary according to the requirements of this specification section: a. By (Signature): Crate: b. Print Name and Title:. 3. Contractor's Recommendation: (circle one )Accept Substitution Reject Substitution SUBSTITUTION REQUEST — 05/0112015 016000.0141 LMC: Cath Lab #2 - Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 a. By (Signature): Cate: . Print blame and Title: 4. Comments (include any anticipated adjustments to work, project sum or schedule): 5. Additional Information requested (date): 5. late forwarded to Architect; J. For use by Architect; 1. bate Received by Architect. 2. Architect's Recommendation. (circle one) Accept Substitution Reject Substitution 3. By (Signature): Date: 4, Print Name and Title: . Comments (include any anticipated adjustments to documents or additional compensation): 5. Additional Information requested (date): 7. Cate forwarded to Owner: K. For use by Owner: 1. bate Received by Owner: 2. Owner's Decision: (circle one) Accept Recommendation Reject Recommendation SUBSTITUTION REQUEST 60M 01 -M LMC: Cath Lab ##2 - Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 3. By (Signature): Date: . Print Name and Title: . Comments: 6, Gate returned to Architect: L. If accepted by Owner, Architect will issue Change Order or Addendum. END OF SUBSTITUTION REQUEST SUBSTITUTION REQUEST - 05/01/2015 016000.01-6 177.307 PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY X This Section includes the following administrative and procedural requirements: selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products. B. Related Sections include the following: I - Division 1 Section "Alternates" for products selected Under an alternate. 2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for contract Closeout. 3. Divisions 2 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and installations specified to be warranted. awnnnl�� PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS — 05/01/2015 016000-1 N i ! t give -S-11001 d i ! - tl #- R s R• R ! sR a R a rt is • • # ! ! !.- t ! t PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS - 05/01/2015 016000-2 LMC: Cath Lab # Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING situationsI Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard ProdUds: If available; and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar on other projects. requirements1 Ownerreserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with of # li« 4Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make ,7RODUCT REQUIREMENTS016000-3 5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Architeefs. 6, Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish "salient characteristics" of products. 7. Or EqualWhere products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal" or "or approved equal" or "or�approved," comply with provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product, III III IIIII!I IIII F IIII III 111 11111 1 1111 1111 1 11111 I. Product: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Product" name a single product and manufacturer, provide the product named. a. Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Manufacturer/Source- Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Manufacturer" or "Source" name single manufacturers or sources, provide a product by the manufacturer or from the source named that complies with requirements. a. Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Basis -of -Design Products: Where Specation paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Basis -of -Design Product" are included and also introduce or refer to a list of manufacturers' names, provide either the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. a, Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated. A, Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received prior to submission of 0 proposals. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at Architect. B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: I Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations, 2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 1 Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. 4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. Use the "Substitution Request Form" included at the end of this section. 5Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 6Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS — 05/01/2015 016000-3- 7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 8. Requested substitution has been coordinated ' with other portions of the Work. 9Requested substitution provides specified warranty. 10. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 016000 016000-5 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY 1. Construction layout. . Field engineering and surveying. . General installation of products. 4. Coordination of Owner -installed products. 5. Progress cleaning. 6. Starting and adjusting.' 7. Protection of installed construction. 3. Correction of the Work. .. w .- « -Mm I Division I Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting survey& 2. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for procedural requirements for cutting and patching necessary for. or performance of other componentsof PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used} PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A, Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, ,utilities, and other con- struction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and veri- fy the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affect - ng the Work. 1, Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services. EXECUTIONREQUIREMENTS i017300-1 # #M211=4 1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 2Examine roughing -in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 1 Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed, 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Pro- ceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances lo- cated in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B, Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: I Notify Owner not less than 72 hours in advance of proposed utility interruptions. Do not proceed permission. diagrammati- callyC. Field Measurements,- Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. -Where portions of the Work are Jndicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction byfield measurements before fabri- cation. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. on # EReview of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect, Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verificatlow Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Draw- ings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discov- ered, notify Architect promptly. B. Lay -out: Review ley -out of interior partitions with Architect for owner review and sign -off prior to framing partitions. I . Schedule chalked lay -out review of project at least 24 -hours prior to scheduled start time of partition framing installation. Provide Architect and Owner at least three days advance notice of meeting for chalked lay -out review. C. Record Log. Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS MENTS — 05/0112015 017300-2 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 3A INSTALLATION X General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and el- evation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. Z Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated, B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that Will ensure the best possible results, Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion, D. Conduct construction operations sono part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. F. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. 1. rTounting Heights: TThere mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion a4conliaction. G. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. H. Hazardous Materials, Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 15 OWNER -INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction forces. B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction forces. 1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreea- ble timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in ac- tual construction progress. Z Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction forces at preinstallation con- ferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend prein- stallation conferences conducted by Owners construction forces if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction, 16 OWNER FURNISHED CONTRACTOR INSTALLED PRODUCTS A, Contractor to store products until ready for installation M 177.307 1. Products will be stored in a bonded warehouse until delivery. 2. Delivery will be coordinated with owner. # # in M -M-3 1100-MiNTMOMMUCUUM MUM B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. .......... ----------------- ---------- rNTRITINJIFF .1 In#* - lot 1111,11 1 1 1 W i F. Exposed Surfaces: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Cutting and Patching: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, • and similar materials. J. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary throu• the remainder • the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensu operability without damaging effects. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS — 05/01/2015 017300-4 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement K. Limiting Exposures- Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construc- tion, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise delete- rious exposure during the construction period. 18 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunction- ing units, replace with new units, and retest. B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding� Adjust equipment for proper operation. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties, Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. DManufacturers Field Service: If a factory -authorized service representative is required to inspect field -assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division I Section "Quality kertuirements." I IIIIIIII!ffl! III �, 1111 "1 1 111 111r; III & Comply with manufacturers written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. 3.10 CORRECTION OF THE WORK A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finish- es. Comply with requirements in Division I Section "Cutting and Patching." 1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment, B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair, D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired, E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces. END OF SECTION 017300 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS — 05/01/2015 017300-5 1 -MC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 SECTION 017329 — CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 11 SUMMARY X This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B. Related Sections include the following: I 1. Division i Section "Selective Demolition for IntenoW' for demolition of selected portions of the building for alterations. 2. Division 7 Section 'Through -Penetration Firestop Systems" for patching fire -rated con- struction. 3Divisions 2 through 33 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work� 1l;1lipli i'llillillillilili'llillilliligilI 11111111111 11•will 11,11111illirlill1l JILi'i Li:1 I , - I I ME== 12 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of existing construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after instal- lation of other Work. 13 SUBMITTALS X Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit to the Architect or Construction Manager and Owners Representative, a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days before the time cuffing and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information: 1 Changes to Existing Construction: Describe' anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well�as changes in building's appear- ance and other significant visual elements. 2. Products- List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. 1 Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 4Utilities: List utilities that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List utili- ties that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long service will i® disrupted. 5. Architect and Owner's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and re- placement of unsatisfactory work. A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load -carrying capacity or load -deflection ratio. CUTTING AND PATCHING — 05101/2015 017329-1 Operational Ms not cut and e.tch op s elements and related components manner that results in reducing their capacityto perform as intended or -r maintenance or decreased operational life or safety, 1. Primary operational systems and equipment. 2. Air or smoke barriers. 3. Fire -protection systems. 4.. Control systems. . Communication systems. . Conveying systems: 7. Electrical wiring systems. C. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cuffing and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades, Review areas of potential interference and conflict Coordinateprocedures ana resolve potential• before p • e• 1.5 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or am - aged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties, PANT 2 - PRODUCT 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. B. Existing Materials: Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use ma- terials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when in- stalled, will match the visual and functional performance of existing materials, PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. 1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibilitywith and suitability of substrates, in- cluding compatibility with existing finishes or primers. Z Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been cor- rected. _ 3.2 PREPARATION CUTTING AND PATCHING —05/01/2015 017329-2 LMC. (Nath Lab ##2 -Bi-Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 A. Temporary Support, Provide po •.. of Workto •- B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Pro- vide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cuffing and patching operations. CAdjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage o adjoining D. Existing Services: Where existing services are required to be removed, relocated, or aban- doned, bypass such services before cuffing to avoid interruption of services to occupied areas, 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. I Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their origi- condition. 1 For core drilling, contractor provided HIM core drills shall be used, Hammer drills or other types of core drilling will be allowed only with prior written approval by owner before commencing core drill work. 1Cutting-, Cut • construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or a joining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply wit original recommendations. 1 In cieneral, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammer- ing and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in 2. Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed 1 Concrete* Cut using�a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond -core drill. 4. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent en - of moistureor other foreigncutting. 5Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cuffing are complete. CPatching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possi- ble. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. integrity1 Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched, areas after completion to demon - of installation. patch- ing2. Exposed Finishes. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restora- and refinishing. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall ,AV -3101-01101! t ! 017329-3 LMC: hath Lab #2 -- Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and ap- t» Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface con- taining the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfac- 4. Ceilings; Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even - plane surface of uniform appearance. END 4F SECTION 017329 GUTTING AND PATCHING -- 05/01/2015 a 017329-4 SECTION 017330 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY X This Section includes the following: I . Demolition and removal of selected interior,portions of a building. 2. Repair procedures for selective demolition operations. 3MMEBEESM 1 . Division I Section "Summary of Work" for use of the building and phasing requirements. 2, Division I Section 'Work Restrictions" for restrictions on use of the premises due to Owner or tenant occupancy. 1 Division I Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preconstruction photo- graphs taken before selective demolition. 4. Division I Section "Cutting and Patching" for cuffing and patching procedures for selec- tive demolition operations. 5Division I Section "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls" for temporary utili- ties, temporary construction and support facilities, temporary security and protection facil- ities, and environmental protection measures for selective demolition operations. 6. Division I Section "Contract Closeout" for record document requirements. 7Division I Segtioa "PLoject Record Qocuments" for Lecord 4ogument Leguirements, 8. Qivisi2n 6 §j�ction "Rgggh Carpentry" for material and constru.,tion reguirempnts for tem - a & Remove-, Remove and legally dispose of items except those indicated to be reinstalled, sal- vaged, or to remain the Owner's property. B. Remove and Salvage: Items indicated to be removed and salvaged remain the Owner's proper- ty. Remove, clean, and pack or crate items to protect against damage, Identify contents of containers and deliver to Owner's designated storage area. C. Remove and Reinstall: Remove items indicated; clean, service, and otherwise prepare them for reuse; store and protect against damage. Reinstall items in the same locations or in locations indicated. DExisting to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted, by the Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, pro- tected storage location during selective demolition and then cleaned and reinstalled in their orig- inal locations. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION — 05/01/2015 017330-1 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177307 13 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicat- ed to remain the Owner's property, demolished materials shall become the Contractors proper- • shall be removed from the site with further disposition at the C# r option. relics,I Contractor shall schedule a salvage walk through with the Owner and Architect to verify items to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled and relocated. B. Historic items, e similar objects including, -but not=t to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, antiques, and other items of interest or value to Owner that maybe encountered during selective demolition remain Owner's property. Carefully remove and salvage each item or object in a manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to 1 Coordinate with Owner's representative, who will establish special procedures for remov- # salvage. �r ' rr• -t 1r t r • # # e • # r • w e # # �_ .�; .e a r. # r • # # # # 's e w t- w! w e e .t- r• - - r wt- # • # # w r# e. r w # �# # # 'r t Inventory: After selective demolition is complete, submit -a list of items that have been removed and salvaged. F. Inventory of items to be removed by Owner. G. Pred molition Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition operations. Submit before Work begins. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION LITION — 05/01/2015 017330-2 LMC. Cath Lab ## — BI -Plane Equipment Replacement " 177.367 H. Record drawings at Project closeout according to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout." 1, Identify and accurately locate capped utilities and other structural; electrical, or mechani- cal conditions. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Demolition Firm Qualifications; Engage an experienced firm that has successfully completed selective demolition Work similar to that indicated for this Project. B. Regulatory Requirements: Complywith governing FPA notification regulations before starting selective demolition. ' Comply with hauling and disposal' regulations of authorities having juris- diction. C, Standards; Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241. D. Predemolition Conference. Conduct conference at Project site to comply with preinstallation conference requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings," F. Demolition Discovery Conference: Conduct conference at project site after completion of parti- tion and ceiling demolition and abatement for review of scope of mechanical and electrical work and discovery of any unforeseen conditions. Comply with preinstallation conference require- ments of division 1; section "Project Meetings." 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of the building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so thatOwner's operations will not be disrupted. Provide not less than 72 hours" notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owners operations. B. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction. C. Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of areas to be selectively demolished. 1. towner will maintain conditions existing at time of inspections for bidding purpose as far as practical. D. Asbestos: It expected that asbestos will be encountered in the Work. If any materials sus- pected of containing asbestos are encountered, do not disturb the materials. Immediately notify the Architect and the Owner. Anticipatedasbestos inclu.. but may notlimited toasbestosmastic, caulk sealant, ! pipe fitting insulation. 2. Owner will remove asbestos before start of Work. Hazardous materials will be removed by •"r a separate contract. E, Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted. F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION — 05/01/2015 017330-3 LMC: Cath Lab Equipment .« A. Schedule selective demolition so as not to interfere withOwner's, building manager's, and other tenants' on-site operations. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Existing Special Warranty: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties, 1. If possible, renin original Installer or fabricator to patch the exposed Work listed below that is damaged during selective demolition. If it is impossible to engage original Installer or fabricator, engage another recognized experienced and specialized firm. a. Processed concrete finishes. b. Stonework and stone masonry. Ornamental metal. d. Matched -veneer woodwork. e. Preformed metal panels. f. Roofing. g. Firestoppin.. h, Window wall system. i. Stucco and ornamental plaster, j. Terrazzo. k. Finished wood flooring. 1. Fluid -applied flooring. Aggregate wall coating, n. Wall covering. o, Swimming pool finishes. p. HVAC enclosures, cabinets, or covers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 REPAIR MATERIALS A, Use repair materials identical to existing materials. 1. Where identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match «_«. « the fullest extent possible. 2Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing materi- als B. Comply with material and installation requirements specified in individual Specification Sections. PART 3 - EXECUTION i ELECTIVE DEMOLITION — 05/01/2015 01 783€ 4 LMC: Cath Lab ##2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. E. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of se- lective demolition required. C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be re- moved and salvaged. C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with the intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of the con- flict. Promptly submit a written report to the Architect. E� Survey the condition of the building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of the structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition. F Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. 3.2 UTILITY" SERVICES A. Existing Utilities: Maintain services indicated to remain and protect then against damage dur- ing selective demolition operations. S. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities, except when authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction: Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and to governing authorities. 1. Provide not less than 72 hours" notice to Owner if shutdown of service is required during changeover. . Do not proceed with utility interruption without owner written permission. C. Utility Requirements: Locate, identify, shut off, disconnect, and seal or cap Gaff indicated utility services serving space to be selectively demolished. 1. Where utility services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide by- pass connections to maintain continuity of service to other parts of the building before proceeding with selective demolition. 2. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal the remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing. Utility Requirements: Refer to Division 15 and 16 Sections for shutting off, disconnecting, re- s - connecting and sealing have been completed .♦ ♦ verified in writing. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Crain, purge, or otherwise remove, collect, and dispose of chemicals, gases, explosives, acids, flammables, or other dangerous materials before proceeding with selective demolition opera- tions. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION — 05/0112015 017330-5 SELECTIVE __- 5 017330-6 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 d, Protect air -handling equipment: G. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. .4 POLLUTION CONTROL A. Dust Control: Use waiter mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental -protection regulations. 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. General; Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new con- struction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete Work within limitations of govern- ing regulations and as follows: DEMOLITION111111161IN-6111IM-1 010.0. 05101/2015 017330-7 6. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. im- pose excessive loadson supporting walls, floors,or • 8. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly, On-site storage or sale of removed items is prohibited. 9. Return elements of construction• surfaces that are to remain to condition existing •* • * selective demolition operations began, B. Comply with building manager's regulations for using and protecting elevators, stairs, walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other building facilities during selective demolition opera- • "I Removed and Salvaged Items: Comply with the following: *•-• 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contentsof containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4 Transport items to Owner's storage area on site, designated by owner & Protect items from damage during transport and storage, D. Removed and Reinstalled Items: Comply with the following: I Concrete Slabs -on -Grade: Saw -cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and re - J, Remove resilient floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations of the Resilient Floor Covering Institute's (RFCI) "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings" and its Addendum. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION — €5/01/201 01 7330-8 1. Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings by one of the methods recommended by RFCI. K. Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than can be covered in one day by new roofing. Re- fer to ,applicable Division 7 Section for new roofing requirements. L Air -Conditioning Equipment: Remove equipment without releasing refrigerants. 3.8 PATCHING AND REPAIRS A. General: Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by selective demolition op- erations. B, Patching is specified in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching." C. Disposal; Transport demolished materials off the Project site and legally dispose of thein. 3.8 CLEANING SELECTIVE DEMOLITION — 0510112015 017330-9 LMC: Cath Lab #2 -- Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 A. Sweep the Project site broom clean on completion of selective demolition operations. B. Change filters on air -handling equipment on completion of selective demolition operations, ENC? OF SECTION 017330 SELECTIVE • s 05/01/2015 017330-10 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES i a a A welcli H X; "M BEENEIRIMM AThis Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, includ- ing, but not limited to, the following: I . Inspection procedures. 2. Project Record Documents. 1 Operation and maintenance manua 4. Warranties. 5. Instruction of Owner's personnel. 6. Final cleaning. I ,203Z= I Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion. Z Division I Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting Final Comple- tion construction photographs and negatives. 3. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning of Project site. 4Division I Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 5Divisions 2 through 33 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for products of those Sections. IN: I 11L"J11INQdKM12J1;aJ11�0 I Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents, 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar re- leases. 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final Completion, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final rec- ord information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturers name and model number where applicable. Provide Architect and Construction Manager with transmittal record signed by Owner's Repre- sentative of items delivered. 7Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner, Advise Owners personnel of changeover in security provisions. & Complete startup testing of systems. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES — 05/01/2015 017700-1 LMC: Cath Lab Bi -Plane EquipmentReplacement p Submit test/adjust/balancerecords. con- struction##... and similar elements. defects.11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12, Submit changeover information related to Owner*s occupancy, use, operation, and 13, Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14, Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual B, Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled require- ments. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before Certificate will be issued. I . Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. 1.3 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Com- pletion, complete the following: 1 Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division I Section "Payment Proce- # 2Submit certified copy of Architecrs Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for ac - .i 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance re # 4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, • C Inspection.- # -# for ♦- # for -# On - • of • Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractorcif Unfulfilled requirements. chitect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or Will notify Contractor construction be completed or corrected before certificate will be Reinspection: Request #' # when of identified in previous insp i incomplete # #.: .# or # ..p (PUNCH1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS CLOSEOUTA. Preparation: General Contractor shall submit three copies of the list of incomplete items. In- clude name and idientification of each space and area affected by construction operations for in- complete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Con- tractor that are outside the limits of construction, I . Organize list of spaces in sequential order. PROCEDURES i! LMC: Cath Lab Equipment Replacement . Organize items applying to each space by major element„ including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 1 Include the following information at the top at each page. a. Project name. ; b. Date. C, Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENT X General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect Project Record Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for ,architect's reference during normal working hours. B. Refer to Section 01 7539 -- Project Record Documents for specific requirements. 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS X Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation an maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows: 1 Operation data: a. Emergency instructionsand procedures. b. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions, including operating standards. C. Operating procedures, including startup, shutdown, seasonal, and weekend opera- tions. cd. Description of controls and sequence of operations. e. Piping diagrams. Maintenance Data: a� Manufacture(s information, including list of Vera parts� b. Name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier. cMaintenance procedures. d. Maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance. eMaintenance recordforms. Sources of «. parts « maintenance materials. #. Copiesof agreements. Copiesof # bonds. CLOSEOUTI . Distribute approved operation and maintenance manuals to Owner. PROCEDURES 05/01/2015 017700-3 LMC: Cath Lab #2 -- Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177307 1.7 WARRANTIES k Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicat- «# B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of desi nated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during constru tion period by separate agreement with Contractor. C, Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project I . Bind warranties and bonds into Operation & Maintenance Manual. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic -covered tabs for each separate warranty, Ma .# to identify the product or installation.Provide a typed description of « product or stallation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone nu ber of Installer, I D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. FART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents. Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabrica- tor of the surface to be cleaned. Igo not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Instruction. Instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. I . Provide instructors experienced in operationand maintenance procedures. 2. Provide instruction at mutually agreed -on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at the start of each season. 3. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days" advance notice, 4. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruc- tion; and course content. B. Program Structure. Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sec- tions. For each training module, develop a learning objective and teaching outline. Include in- struction for the following: 1. System design and operational philosophy. Review of documentation. 1 Operations, CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES — 05/01/2015 017700-4 4. Adjustments. 5. Troubleshooting. , Maintenance. 7. Repair. waste-removalHumm 3.2 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regula o Cleaning:# ." -# workers or professional cleaners f#cleaning. Clean each mainte- nance # # t . Comply I . Complete Ahe following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project. nameplates.1 Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electri- m. Wipe surfaces or mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment. i n excess lubrication,paint# mortar dR #»R. # d other# `. R.substances. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES — 05101/2015 017700-5 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed sur- faces of diffusers, registers, and grills. q. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during con- struction. r. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned -out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and de- fective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. S. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not bum waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owners property, Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materi- als into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. END OF SECTION 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES — 05/01/2015 017700-6 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY X This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Docu- ments, including the following: 1, Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3, Record Product Data. I Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures and mainte- nance manual requirements. 2. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 3. Divisions 2 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents of products in those Sections. 1.2 SUBMITTALS a. Initial Submittal: Submit one set of marked -up Record Prints. Architect will initial and date each plot and mark whether general scope of changes, additional infor- mation recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable. Architect will return plots and prints for organizing • sets, printing, binding, and final submittal. bFinal Submittal: Submit one set of marked -up Record Prints. Print each Drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded. BRecord Specifications: Submit one copy of Projects Specifications, including addenda and con- tract modifications. 1 Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manual% submit marked -up Product Data as an insert in the manual instead of submittal as Record Product Data. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS — 05/01/2015 017839-1 LMC: Cath Lab ## —131 -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black -line white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, 1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, wheth- er individual or entity is installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked - up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be diffi- cult to identify or measure and record later.. b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.. C. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 2. Content; Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a, Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. G. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry, . Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities, J� Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k, Sealant types noted on rated partitions. 1. Changes made following Architect's written orders. M. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. n. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. o. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. p. Lead shielding thickness, in millimeters, for each wall, where installed, m: -. i i. . ! � ! i i .. i. i .: .. # • i i • i i1 '" ii .i::..• i :i i i • -i i i • � .. • i • i i- l i- •- i- • i- i; M i » i i i �. •- ii • i; - i • • i -i BFormat: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT REC61 DRAWING" in - prominent location. Record Organize - l i Prints i newly prepared • i Drawings i ma ageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification cover sheets. Record Transparencies- Organize i unbound sets matching Record Prints. Pla transparencies in durable tube -type drawing containers with end caps. Mark end .♦ • PROJECT•'D DO05/01/2015 017839-2 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement each container with identification. If container does not include a complete set, identify Drawings included. 3. Identification: As follows: a. Project name. h. Date. C. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. dame of Architect. e. dame of Contractor.: 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. 'reparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contractmodifications. •.-... •.. ! #. • • # ""• a #•. • M PART 3 - EXECUTION RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE k Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Rec- ord Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they # •w not wait until the end oProject. PROJECT RECORD• 05/01/2015 017839-3 LMC: Cath Lab #2 -- BI -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 Maintenanceof Record Documents Samples: StoreRecord Documents . Samples fieldthe office apart fromthe Contract Documents `s for construction, Ds not use Project Record Documents forconstruction purposes. i • Documents in isit order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Pro- Ject Record Documents for Architect's reference and Construction Managees review during normal working hours, END OF SECTION 017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS — 05/01/2015 017839-4 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 SECTION 210500 b COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATEDDOCUMENTS: A. Refer to Section 23 0500. All work of Division 21 shall be in accordance with the corresponding section of Division 23, unless otherwise addressed in this Division. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION — 0510112015 210500-1 MC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 SECTION 211000 — WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION PART I - GENERAL 11 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. This Sections specifies automatic sprinkler systems for buildings and structures, Materials and equipment specified in this Section include: Pipe, fittings, valves and specialties. Sprinklers and accessories. B� Products furnished but not installed include sprinkler head cabinet with spare sprinkler heads, Furnish to the Owner's maintenance personnel. CThe work of this section includes engineering by the Contractor. The Contractor shall act as Engineer of record for all fire protection work. D, The fire protection system work is an extension of the existing fire protection System. Provide all modifications to the existing system as required to complete the new work. Provide hydraulic calculations and shop drawings where required by the extent Of the work or by the authority having jurisdiction. 12 DEFINITIONS: A. Pipe sizes used in this Specification are Nominal Pipe Size (NPS). B. Other definitions for fire protection systems are listed in NFPA Standards 13 and 14. CWorking plans as used in this Section means those documents (including drawings and calculations) prepared pursuant to the requirements contained in NFPA 13 and 14 for obtaining approval of the authority having jurisdiction, 1,3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: A. Provide a complete fire sprinkler system for the entire project area (including, but not limited to, electrical rooms, mechanical rooms and accessible sections of air handling units,) except designated areas as shown on the drawings which will not require fire sprinkler coverage will be specifically noted with "No A/S" B. Fire protection system is a "wet -pipe" system employing automatic sprinklers attached to a piping system containing water and connected to a water supply so that water discharges immediately from sprinklers opened by fire. 1.4 PROJECT SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS: A. All fire protection systems shall be installed to meet NEPA and IBC Seismic Design Category B requirements. 1. Where any conflicts arise the more stringent requirements shall be applicable, 1,5 SUBMITTALS: WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION — 05/01/2015 21 1000-1 A. Product data for each type sprinkler head, valve, piping and piping specialty, fire protection specialty, fire department connection and any equipment installed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Index per specification chapter and item number. B. Shop drawings prepared in accordance with NFPA 13 identified as "working plans," includi detailed riser schematics indicating pipe sizes and lengths; and hydraulic calculations wher applicable, which have been approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Do not proceed with the installation of the work until the Architect/Engineer review of shop drawings is received. C, Contractor shall stamp shop drawings indicating compliance with applicable codes and contract drawings. Contractor shall stamp drawing "Approved for Construction." DIf more than two submittals (either for shop drawings or for record drawings) are made by t contractor, the Owner reserves the right to charge the contractor for subsequent reviews b their consultants. Such extra fees shall be deducted from payments by the Owner to the contractor. E. Maintenance data for each type sprinkler head, valve, piping specialty, fire protection specialty, fire department connection and hose valve specified, for inclusion in operating anj maintenance manual specified in Division I and Division -23 Section "Basic Mechanical Requirements." F. Welder's qualification certificate. B. The wet pipe fire sprinkler system for the building shall be hydraulically calculated to comply with NFPA-13. C. The final fire protection system demand shall be a minimum of 10 PSI below the water supply curve. D. Velocities in pipes shall be shown on hydraulic calculations. Velocities in overhead piping shall not exceed 32 feet per second. Velocities in underground piping shall not exceed 16 feet persecond. WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION — 05/01/2015 21 1003-2 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177307 E. Allow 10 feet of loss for electric water flow switches and note on hydraulic calculations, F. The Fire Protection Contractor shall provide as many sets of hydraulic calculations as necessary, performed and submitted to prove that the most remote and demanding areas are calculated. G. Design information shall be permanently affixed to the main riser as described in NFPA Pamphlet 13. H. The Fire Protection Contractor shall be responsible for water flow data from the appropriate water department. A copy of the water flow test data from the water department shall accompany the hydraulic calculations before hydraulically calculating equipment fire sprinkler system. I NFPA 13 - Standard for the installation of Sprinkler System, including applicable seismic requirements. 2. NFPA 1963 - Screw Threads and Gaskets for Fire Hose Connections. 3. UL and FM Compliance: All fire protection system materials and components shall be Underwriters Laboratories and Factory Mutual listed as well as labeled for the application anticipated, 4, National Electrical Code 5. Uniform Building Codes, including applicable seismic requirements. 6. Requirements of the local Building Department and Fire Department. D. Reference and standards listed are minimum requirements, Where more stringent requirements are specified or noted on the drawings, this shall be applicable. 11.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING: A. Schedule rough -in installations with installations of other building components. B. Minimum time frame for notice of inspections, tests and meetings is five (5) days and list the persons to be notified. WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION — 05/01/2015 21 1000-3 1.9 EXTRA STOCK. A. Meads: For each stye and temperature range (and length for dry heads) required, furnish additional sprinkler heads per NEPA-13. 1. Obtain receipt from towner that extra stock has been received, B, Wrenches: Furnish 2 spanner wrenches for each type and size of valve connection and fire hose coupling. PANT 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS ANIS PRODUCTS: A. General: Provide piping materials and factory -fabricated piping'products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated„ provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in fire protection systems. B: All equipment used on this project shall be new and UL listed unless noted or specified otherwise. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS: A. , Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire protection system products from one of the following: 1. Gate Valves: a. Nibct b. Kennedy Valve, Div. of ITT Grinnell Valve Co., Inc. c. Mueller d. Stockham e. Grinnell f. Milwaukee 2. Swing Check Valves: a. Central b. Mueller c, Kennedy Valve, Div. of ITT Grinnell Valve Co., Inc d. Star Sprinkler Corp. e. Viking f. Victaulic g, Globe h. 'otter Roemer 3, Butterfly and Ball Valves: a. Grinnell b. Mueller c. Victaulic d. Milwaukee e. Kennedy WATER BASEL► FIRE PROTECTION — 05/01/2015 21 1000-4 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 4, Grooved Mechanical Couplings: - a. Gruvlolc b. V ictaulic Company of America C. Central Sprink, Inc. . Fire Protection Specialty Valves a. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. b. Star Sprinkler Corporation c. Viking Corporation d. Central e. Globe f. Grinnell/Gem 5. Sprinkler Heads: a, Automatic Sprinkler Corp. of America. b. Central Sprinkler Corp. C. ITT Grinnell d. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc: e. Star Sprinkler Corp. f. Viking Corp. gA Globe 7. Fire Protection Specialties; a. Croker-Standard Div.,„ Fire -End & Croker Corp. b. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc. c. Grinnell Fire Protection Systems Co., Inc. d. Grunau Sprinkler Mfr, Co., Inc. e. Potter Roemer, Inc. Inspector's Test and Drain Module a, Victaulic b. A.G.F. C. Grinnell/Gem 2.3 BASIC IDENTIFICATION: A, General: Provide identification complying with Division -23 "Mechanical Identification", in accordance with the following listing: 1. Fire Protection Piping: Pipe markers. 2. Fire Protection Valves: Valve tags. 3. Fire Protection Signs: Provide the following signs; a. At each sprinkler valve, sign indicating what portion of system valve controls. b. At each outside alarm device, sign indicating what authority to call if device is activated. c, At door to each sprinkler control valves or at ceiling access points, sign reading "FIRE CONTROL". WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION — 05/01/2015 21 1000.5 LMC: Cath Lab ##2 -- Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.30 d. At each drain or teat, sign indicating its purpose. B, Attach to the riser a metal sign indicating the name, address and telephone number of the fire protection contractor. Also indicate the date of installation. 2.4 BASIC PIPING SPECIALTIES; A. General. Provide piping specialties complying with Division -23 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods section "Piping Specialties", in accordance with the following listing;. 1. Pipe escutcheons. 2. Dielectric unions. 3. Drip pans. 4. Pipe sleeves. 5. Sleeve seals. 6. Fire Barrier Penetration Seals. .5 BASIC SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS. A. General: Provide supports and anchors complying with Division -2 "Supports and Anchors" in accordance with the following listing: 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers, adjustable steel band hangers, or adjustable band hangers, for horizontal -piping hangers and supports. 2. Two -bolt riser clamps for vertical piping supports. . Steel turnbuckles and malleable iron sockets for hanger- rod attachments. 4. Concrete inserts, top -beam C -clamps, side beam or channel clamps or center beam clamps for building attachments. 5. Concrete inserts and other type hangers penetrating into or through structural members shall be submitted (by the Fire Protection Contractor) to and have the approval of the structural engineer contracted for this project. 6. Powder driven studs shall not be allowed. 7. Hangers (which are acceptable for project) and hanger spacing shall be in accordance with NEPA-13, 2.6 PIPE AND TUBINGMATERIALS (INSIDE BUILDING): A. General: Refer to Part 3 Article "Pipe Applications" for identification of systems where the below specified pipe and fitting materials are used. B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, A795 or A13 , Schedule 40 or Schedule 10, U.S. manufacture, black steel pipe, plain ends. C. American Tube Company "'Dyna -Thread -40" and "Dyna -Flow" and Allied "Tube and Conduit Corporation "Super Flo" are acceptable to Schedule 40 pipe. Installation shall be per manufacturer's recommendations. D. Schedule 5 pipe shall not be allowed. WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION — 05/01/2015 211000-6 LMC: Cath Lab ##2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 E. The Corrosion Resistance Ratio of the pipe shall be 1.00 or greater. Documentation shall be presented with product submittal. F. Schedule 10 pipe shall only be allowed for pipe sizes-112inches and larger. G. Provide galvanized, schedule 40, piping system for preaction system and drain risers. 2.7 FITTINGS (INSIDE BUILDING): A. Cast -Iron Threaded fittings: ANSI BI 6A, Class 125 standard pattern, for threaded joints. Threads shall conform to ANSI B1,20.1. B. Malleable -Iron Threaded Fittings. ANSI B16., Class 300„ standard pattern, for threaded joints. Threads shall conform to ANSI B1.20.1, Install steel pipe with threaded joints and fittings for 2inches and smaller and where shown on drawings; C. Steel Fittings; ASTM A234, seamless or welded, for welded jousts. D. Grooved Mechanical Fittings: ASTM A 536, tirade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A 47 Grade 32510 malleable iron; or ASTM A53, Type F or Types E or S. E. Grooved Mechanical Couplings: Consist of ductile or malleable iron housing, a synthetic rubber gasket of a central cavity pressure -responsive design, with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure roll- grooved pipe and fittings. Grooved mechanical couplings including gaskets used on dry -pipe systems shall be listed for dry -pipe service, F. Grooved Mechanical Fittings and Couplings for the entire fire protection system shall be of the same manufacturer as submitted in shop drawing equipment review. G. Cast -Iron Threaded Flanges: ANSI B16.1, Class 250; raised ground face, bolt spot faced. H. Cast Bronze Flanges: ANSI B16.24, Class 300; raised ground face, bolt holes spot faced. L Plain end, hooker type, or push -on fittings or couplings shall not be allowed. J. Bushings and reducing couplings shall not be allowed. K. UL listed and Factory Mutual approved segmentally welded fittings are acceptable. Friction loss and flow data shall accompany hydraulic calculations. 2.3 JOINING MATERIALS: A, Welding Materiatv Comply with Section 11, Part 0, ASIME Boilerand Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials appropriate for the wall thickness and chemical analysis of the pipe being welded. B. Gasket Materials. Thickness, materials and type suitable for fluid or gas to be handled, and design temperatures and pressures. 2.9 GENERAL DUTY VALVES'. A. Gate Valves - 2 Inch and Smaller: Body and bonnet of cast bronze, 175 pound cold water working pressure - non -shock, threaded ends, solid wedge, outside screw and yoke, rising stem, screw-in bonnet, and malleable iron handwheel. Valves shall be capable of being repacked under pressure, with valve wide open. WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION — 05/01/2015 21 1000-7 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177,307 C. Butterfly Valves: 2-1/2inches to 12inches, grooved, ductile iron body and disc ASTM -536, disc EPDM coated, listed and approved minimum 175 psi service, actuator, self-contained supervisory switch, weatherproof approved for indoor or outdoor use. DBall Valves: 1-1/2inches and smaller shall be threaded, forged brass construction, with Teflon seats and blow out proof stem. Ball shall be full port with chrome plated ball. E. Ball Valves: 2inches to 3inches shall be listed to 300 p�si. with optional internal tamper switch. Body shall be ductile iron with corrosion resistant coating. Ball shall be 316 stainless steel, standard port design, F. Swing Check Valves: MSS SP -71; Class 175, cast iron body and bolted cap conforming to ASTM A 126, Class B; horizontal swing, with a bronze disc or cast iron disc with bronze disc ring, and flanged ends. Valve shall be capable of being refitted while the valve remains in the line. 2.10 BASIC METERS AND GAUGES: X General: Provide meters and gauges complying With Division- 23 "Meters and Gauges", in accordance with the following listing 1 Pressure gauges, 0-250 psi range. 2.11 ALARM DEVICE AND FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES: A, General: Provide fire protection specialties, UL -listed, in accordance with the listing. Provide sizes and types which mate and match piping and equipment connections. B. Water Flow Indicators: Vane type water flow detector, rated to 250 pig ; designed for horizontal or vertical installation; have 2-SPDT circuit switches to provide isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 ampere 125 volts AC and 0.25 ampere 24 volts DC; complete with factory -set field -adjustable retard element to prevent false signals, tamper -proof cover which sends a signal when cover is removed, and with activation time retarding capability set at 30 seconds. The setting shall be verified through the inspectors test prior to final inspection. C. Supervisory Switches: Provide products recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated, SPST, normally closed contacts, designed to signal valve in other than full open position. D. Pressure Switch: Indicating low pressure trouble in sprinkler system. E. Pressure switch* Indicating flow in sprinkler system. F. Low Air Pressure Horn: Provide low air pressure horn as indicated. WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION — 05/01/2015 21 1000-8 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment 2.12 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS:: Sprinkler.s All sprinklerxi be "Quick Respons&"4ype heads.• - link or frangible « i type,and style as indicated or x• x« by application. indicated, provide a i discharge o x for "ordinary!temperature Authorityrange with a minimum temperature of 155 degrees F. Provide Intermediate" temperature heads in Electrical rooms, where required as noted in NFPA 13, and as required by the « jurisdictiom 8, Sprinkler Head Finishes: Provide heads with the following finishes - 1. Upright, Pendent and Sidewall Styles: Factory brae, rough bronze finish for heads in unfinished spaces. Heads shall be stainless steel where installed exposed to acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes. 2. Concealed Style: Rough brass, adjustable, with painted white cover plate in finished spaces. (GEM Models FR94 and F946 dean Line Sprinklers are not acceptable.) 3. Recessed Style: Bright chrome, with bright chrome escutcheon plate. (GEM Models FR948 and F948 recessed sprinklers are not acceptable). 4. See drawings for additional sprinkler type requirements. C. Sprinkler Head Cabinet and Wrench: Finished steel cabinet, suitable for wall mounting, with hinged cover and space for spare sprinkler heads plus sprinkler head wrench, Provide amounts of each style per NFPA-13. Locate head cabinet on shop drawing submittal. D. Plastic fire sprinkler escutcheons are not acceptable. 2.13 INSPECTOR'S TEST AND DRAIN ASSEMBLY: A. Provide an alarm test module of a manufacturer listed in paragraph 2.2. B. Comply with NFPA-14, Section 5-11, for draining and testing of wet standpipe system. C. Test and drain piping shall be routed to exterior. Location shall meet Owner's approval. PART 3 - EXECUTION .1 EXAMINATION: A. Examine rough -in for fire hose valves and cabinet$ to verify actual Jocations of piping connections . to installing cabinets. B. Examine walls for suitable conditions where cabinets are to be installed. C. leo not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PIPE APPLICATIONS: B. Install Schedule 40 steel pipe with roll -grooved ends and grooved mechanical coupling or with threaded joints and fittings. WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION — 05/01/2015 21 1000-9 Bi -Plane Equipment Replacementi 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS: largerX Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams)t'ndicate the general location and arrangement of piping systems. So far as practical, install piping as indicated. Drawings are diagrammatic in character and do not necessarily indicate every required offset, valve, fitting, etc� I . Deviations from approved "working plans" for sprinkler piping require written approval of the authority having jurisdiction. Written approval shall be on file with the Engineer prior to deviating from the approved "working plans." C. Use approved fittings to make all changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes. Welded outlet branch pipe fittings are acceptable. D. Install unions in pipe 2 inch and smaller, adjacent to each v6lvii�� Unions are not required on flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved mechanical couplings, E. Install flanges or flange -adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2-1/2 inch and • F. For welded pipe, all cutouts (coupons) shall be removed prior to installation. GHangers and Supports: Comply with the requirements of NFPA 13. Hanger and support spacing and locations for piping joined with grooved mechanical couplings shall be in accordance with the grooved mechanical coupling manufacturers written instructions, r rigi systems. Provide protection from damage where subject to earthquake in accordance with w All piping penetrating walls to structure shall be sleeved «. • seated ♦«.. specification # 230510. 1. Install test connections sized and located in accordance with NFPA 13 complete with shutoff valve. Test connections may also serve as drain pipes, J. Install pressure gauge on or '# main at or # # Provide gauge with a connection not less than %" and having a soft metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gauge and valve. Install gauges to permit removal, and where they will not be g to freezing. K. The fire protection contractor shall be responsible for the coordination of his installation with all other contractors. See Section 23 05 00 for prioritized components. L. Protect adjacent area where pipe cutting and threading takes place (eg. floors, ceilings, walls, K There shall be no fire sprinkler piping in electrical rooms or IT rooms (other than piping serving sprinklers directly in that room)or "`i over panels. N. Provide spring-loaded check valve at top of drain risers. O, Install pressure gauges on city and system sides of fire entry valve assembly. P. Install hangers straight and true and piping parallel to building lines. 1 -MC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 3A PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION: A. Welded Joints: AWS D1 , Level AR -3: B, ThreadedJoints: Conform to ANSI 131.20.1, tapered pipe threads for field cut threads. Join • •- fittings,and valves as follows-, Note the Internal length of threads In fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded Into joint. Align threads at point of assembly. 3. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads. 4Assemble joint to appropriate thread depth. When using a wrench on valves place the wrench on a into which the pipe being threaded. 5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe with threads which are corroded or damaged, If a weld opens during cutting or threading operations, that portion of pipe shall not be used. CFlanged Joints- Align flange surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contactof w_ and w.skets as flat anw parallel as possjbble lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly to appropriate torque specified by bolt manufacturer. D. Mechanical Grooved Joints: Roll grooves on pipe ends dimensionally compatible with the couplings, 3.5 VALVE INSTALLATIONS: A. General: Install fire protection specialty valves, fittings and specialties in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, NFPA 13 w the authority! jurisdiction. B. ..Valves:electronically supervised -open w aw valves w located to control all sources of water supply except fire department and roof manifolds connections. Where there is more than one control valve, provide permanently marked identification signs indicating the portion of w i 'M by ! !Section Identification" for valve tagsand signs. 3.6 SPRINKLER a Sg w B. Sprinkler.! be positioned so« ! complyNFPA-13 i t any obstructions. includes,but w w! offits, surface mounted lights and indirect lighting arrangements, The Fire Protection Contractor is responsible for identifying these obstructions and designing the system accordingly. C. Run piping concealed above heated furred ceilings and in joists to minimize obstructions. Expose only .w WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION — 05/01/2015 211000-11 D. Protect exposed sprinkler heads against mechanical injury with standard guards. Provide sprinkler head guards in all mechanical, electrical or storage rooms as well as exposed pendant heads which are installed less than 8feet-Oinches A.F.F. E. Provide I inch diameter nipple and I inch x 1/2 inch reducing fitting for each upright head. (Excluding mechanical equipment rooms.) F. Provide heads in "pocketed" areas caused by exposed duct, piping or beams. G. Sprinkler head deflector distance from face of finished ceiling shall not exceed flinches. K Sprinkler heads shall be located in the center of all 2 foot x 2 foot ceiling tiles and quarter points, along the center line lengthwise of 2 foot x 4 foot ceiling tiles. L Use proper tools to prevent damage during installations. 1 Install sprinkler piping in a manner such that mechanical equipment, ceiling tiles or lights can be accessed and easily removed. The sprinkler piping shall be installed to provide a minimum of 6inches above the top of a finished ceiling. K Minimum fire sprinkler head temperature rating for sprinklers in electrical rooms shall be 212 degrees F. Keep sprinklers as far from transformers and/or panels as spacing allows. 37 INSTALLATION OF BASIC IDENTIFICATION: A. General: Install mechanical identification in accordance with Division -23 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods section "Mechanical Identification". r.1111111TIE '171111174ir A. Install meters and gauges in accordance with Division -23 "Meters and Gauges". 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: X Flush, test and inspect sprinkler piping systems in accordance with NFPA 13� Standard fo installation of sprinkler systems, Edition 1991 . Chapter 8. B. The Fire Protection Contractor shall conduct and bear the costs of all necessary tests of t fire protection work, furnish all labor, power and equipment. All piping shall be tested wit water as required, the tests witnessed by the authority having jurlsdlction� I C. The fire protection piping shall be tested under a hydrostatic pressure of not less than 200 psig, for a duration of not less than 2 hours, D. Replace piping system components which do not pass the test procedures specified, and retest repaired portion of the system at Fire Protection Contractor's expense. EAll piping tests (pneumatic and hydrostatic) shall be conducted prior to the application of an painting materials. This will prevent hidden leaks and/or repainting of repaired/altered pipin WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION — 05/0112015 21 1000-12 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 3.10 SYSTEM CERTIFICATION: A. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with written certification prior to final inspection, that all new equipment: limitations1. Has been visually inspected and functionally tested as required by the Specifications. 2. Is installed entirely in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations within the of listings and NFPA 3. Is in proper working order. A. , ; Wiring of all water tow switches and tamper switches on valves to central alarm panel are by Division 26. WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION — 05/01/2015 21 1000-13 LMC; Cath Lab ## — Bi -Flare Equipment Replacement 177307 3.13 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL.; A. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with a lease -leaf manual containing: 1. A detailed description of the systems. 2. A detailed description of routine maintenance required or recommended or which would be provided under a maintenance contract including a maintenance schedule and detailed maintenance instructions for each type of device installed. 3. One copy of NFPA-, 4. Manufacturers" data sheets and installation manuals/instructions for all equipment installed. 5. A list of recommended spare parts. 6. Service directory, listing the specific equipment items and where parts can be obtained, with name, address and telephone number: 7, Full size copies of the record drawings (stamped and signed per section 1.6). 6. Hydraulic calculations (stamped and signed per section 1.6). g. Test certificates. B. Refer to Division 1 and Section 23 05 00 "OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE" for additional requirements. C. Within 15 days of the completion of the work, six (6) copies of the manual shall be submitted for approval. 3.14 RECORD DRAWINGS: A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain on the site an up-to-date record set of approved shop drawing prints which shall be marked to show each and every change made to the sprinkler system from the original approved shop drawings. This shall not be construed as authorizationto deviate from or make changes to the shop drawings approved by the Owner without written instruction from the Owner in each case. This set of drawings shall be used only as a record set. B. Upon completion of the work, the record set of prints shall be used to prepare complete, accurate final record drawings reflecting any and all changes and deviations made to the sprinkler system. calculationsThe Owner, at his option and at the Contracto(s expense, may require revised hydraulic depending on . nature of -changes. D. The ♦ • Drawings and Hydraulic Calculations• • stamp of professional • •r in the State of • • .M• certifying the Record Drawings and Hydraulicthe sns accurately represent the completed fire protection system. E. Upo • - • • • ♦ s of s two sets of - N • drawings shall besubmitted to the Owner for WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION •- 05/01/2015 21 1000 -14 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement F. Upon review of the record drawings, before final approval, one (1) set of reproducible record drawings and four (4) additional sets of record drawings shall be delivered to the Owner. 3.15 GUARANTEE PERIOD: I AGuarantee: The Contractor shall guarantee all materials and workmanship for a period of one year beginning with the date of final acceptance by the Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible during the design, installation, testing and guarantee periods for any damage caused by him (or his subcontractors) or by defects in his (or his subcontractors') work, materials, or equipment. BEmergency Service: During the installation and warranty period, the Contractor shall provide emergency repair service for the sprinkler system within four hours of a request by the Owner for such service. This service shall be provided on a 24 hour per day, seven days per week basis. A. The Contractor shall conduct two (2) training sessions of four (4) hours each to familiarize the building personnel with the features, operation and maintenance of the sprinkler systems. Training sessions shall be scheduled by the Owner at a time mutually agreeable to the Contractor and the Owner, X The Fire Protection Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to the work of others, to building and property/ materials of others caused by leaks in automatic sprinkler equipment, unplugged or disconnected pipes or fittings, and shall pay for necessary replacement or repair of work or items so damaged during the installation, testing or guarantee periods of the automatic sprinkler work, WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION — 05/01/2015 211000-15 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement SECTION 22 0500 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING PART 1 - GENERAL 11 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Refer to Section 23 0500, All work of Division 22 shall be in accordance with the corresponding section of Division 23, unless otherwise addressed in this Division. END OF SECTION 22 0500 LMC: Cath Lab ##2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 SECTION 22 1110 — WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A, This Section specifies the water distribution piping system, including potable cold, heat, and recirculated hot water piping, fittings, and specialties within the building to a point 5 feet outside the building. B, Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this section. 1. Refer to other Division 22 sections for piping materials; methods for seating; pipe penetrations through basement walls and fire and smoke barriers; thermometers, flow meters and pressure gauges; mechanical identification; plumbing pumps; dielectric unions, strainers and pressure regulating valves. 1.2 DEFINITIONS: A. Water Distribution Piping: A pipe within the building or on the premises which conveys water from the water service pipe or meter to the points of usage. B. Water Service Piping: The pipe from the water main or other source of potable water supply to the water distributing system of the building served: C, Pipe sizes used in this specification are Nominal Pipe Size (NPS). 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Refer to Division 1 and Basic Mechanical Requirements for administrative and procedural requirements for submittals. B. Provide data for each piping specialty and valve specified. C. Certification of Compliance with ASME and UL fabrication requirements. D. Test reports as specified in Part 3 of this section. E. Manufacturer and product data for lead free solder with material breakdown, F, Maintenance data for each piping specialty and valve specified for inclusion in operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 22. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Regulatory Requirements; Comply with the provisions of the following: 1. 2006 International Plumbing Code, 2, NSF Standard 61: "Drinking Water System Components." 3. ASME B 31.9 "Building Services Piping" for materials, products and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING — 05/01/2015 221110-1 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Pyne Equipment Replacement 177.307 4. ASSE Compliance: Comply with applicable A SE Standards pertaining to materials, products and installation of water distribution systems. . Local Utility Department requirements. 6. Local Cross Connection Control Manual. 7. Latest edition of the Engineering Standards of the Denver Board of Water Commissioners. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING. A. Stare pipe in a manner to prevent sagging and bending: B. Cap ends of piping when being stored. C. Store all materials per the manufacturer's recommendations, 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING: A. Coordinate the size and location of concrete equipment pads. Cast anchor bolt inserts into pad. Concrete, reinforcement and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3. B. Coordinate the installation of pipe sleeves for foundation wall penetrations. 1.7 EXTRA STOCK: A. Maintenance Stock: Furnish one valve key for each key operated wall hydrant, hose bibb or faucet installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS .1 MANUFACTURERS: A, Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1, Vacuum Breakers for dose Connections: . Woodford Manufacturing Co, b. Apollo G. Nidel d, Watts Regulator Co. 2.2 PIPE AND TUBE MATERIALS: A. General: Provide pipe material and pipe fittings complying with Division 22. 2.3 BASIC SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS: A. General: Provide supports and anchors complying with Division 22, 2.4 GENERAL DUTY VALVES: A. General: Provide valves complying with Division 22. WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING — 05/01/2015 221110-2 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. Verify that all water distribution piping may be installed in accordance with pertinent codes & regulations, the original design and the applicable referenced standards. B. Examine rough -in requirements for plumbing fixtures and other equipment having water connections to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation. C, Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION: A. Refer to Division 22 for materials and methods for installation of piping.. B. Install backflow preventers on plumbing lines where contamination of domestic water may occur to include but not be limited to: Wall hydrants, hose bibbs and flush valves. C. Install shock arresters in hot and cold domestic water piping systems on each set of flush valves, quick closing type valves and other locations where hydrostatic shock pressures could occur: 3.3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: A, Refer to Division 22 for installationofsupports and anchors. A PIPE AND TUBE JOINT CONSTRUCTION: A. Refer to Division 22 for materials and methods for pipe joints. 3.5 VALVE APPLICATIONS: A. General Duty Valve Applications: The drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated the following requirements apply: 1. Shut-off duty: Use gate, ball and butterfly valves. 2. Throttling duty: Use globe, ball and butterfly valves. 3.6 INSTALLATION GP VALVES: OTMI JQA*Mtffi��* 05/01/2015 22 1110 -M D. E. 3.7 X B. 3.8 A. •I I I I I I I I I I I i F I I I I 1; 1111 11111 11 1 1111; 1• 1 1 11 !1 11 1111- •� system. For drain valves 2" and smaller, use ball valves; for drain valves 2-1/2" and larger, use gate or butterfly valves. Check Valvesi Install non -slam spring loaded check valves on discharge side of each pum and elsewhere as indicated. See Division 22 r va ve app ication. Balance Cocks: Install in each hot water recirculating loop, discharge side of each pump, al elsewhere as indicated. INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES: w # i RAMON ill 4rain or floor sink. Provide access and required clearances to backflow preventer as required - Install pressure regulating valves with inlet and outlet shutolf valves, and balance cock bypass. Install pressure gauge on valve outlet. EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS: Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide hot and cold water piping runouts to fixtures of sizes indicated, but in no case smaller than required by Plumbing Code. For fixtures with hot water service, extend hot water recirculation line out to fixtures greater than 20 away from main or loop hot water line down to the fixture. BMechanical Equipment Connections, Connect hot and cold water piping system to mechanical equipment as indicated. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection, provide drain valve on drain connection. Provide back-flow preventer as shown as required. For connections 2-1/2" and larger, use flanges instead of unions. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Inspections: Inspect water distribution piping as follows: I . Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation water distribution piping system until it has been inspected and approved by the authority having jurisdiction, 2, During the progress of the installation, notify the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction, at least 48 hours prior to the time such inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in the presence of the plumbing official. a. Rough -in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of the piping system after the system is roughed -in but before concealing or closing in piping and prior to setting fixtures. b, Final Inspection: Arrange for a final inspection by the plumbing official to observe the tests specified below and to ensure compliance with the requirements of the plumbing code. 1 Reinspections: Whenever the plumbing official finds that the piping system will not pass the test or inspection, make the required corrections and arrange for reinspection by the plumbing official. 4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports, signed by the plumbing official. WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING — 05/01/2015 221110-4 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement B. Test water distribution piping as follows: 1. Refer to Division 22 for materials and methods for performing pipe tests. 3.10 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A. Clean and disinfect water distribution piping as follows - I Purge all new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems, which have been altered, extended or- repaired prior to use. 2. Use the purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by the authority having jurisdiction, or in case a method is not prescribed by thatauthority� the procedu described in either AWWA C651, AWWA C652 or as described below: & Flush the piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does n appear at the points of outlet. I b. Fill the system or part thereof, with a water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 parts per million of chlorine. Isolate (valve off) the system, or part thereof, and allow to stand for 24 hours. C. Drain the system, or part thereof, of the previous solution, and refill with a water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per million of chlorine and isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours. d. Following the allowed standing time, flush the system with clean potable water until chlorine does not remain in the water coming from the system. e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to the authority having jurisdiction. Repeat the procedure if the biological examination made by the authority shows evidence of contamination, & Prepare reports for all purging and disinfecting activities. 111 COMMISSIONING: A. Fill the system. B. Check compression tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that the system is completely full of water, C. Before operating the system perform these steps: 1. Open valves to full open position. Close drains, valves, hydrants and sill cocks. 2. Remove and clean strainers. END OF SECTION 221110 WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING — 05/01/2015 221110-5 LMC: Cath Lab ##2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 PARI" 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. This Section specifies building sanitary drainage, storm drainage, drainage specialties and vent piping systems. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: I Refer to Division 2/23 sections for trenching and backfilling material s and methods for underground w w w installations,not w of w Referw Division w wr storm water drainage piping w -w • from 64' outside the building; sanitary drainage piping wew w from 6-0"outside the building; not • of w 1 Refer to other Division + for piping matertals « methods,www- penetrations w w basement « foundation_« smoke barriers and mechanical identification. 1.2 DEFINITIONS: A. Building gain: That part of the lowest piping of a drainage system which receives the discharge from soil„ waste and other drainage pipes inside the walls of the building and conveys it to the building sewer to a point '-0„ outside the building wall. B. Building Sewer: That part of the horizontal piping of a drainage system which extends from the end of the building drain and conveys its discharge to a public sewer, private sewer, individual sewage disposal system or other point of disposal. C. Drainage System: Includes all the piping within a public or private premises which conveys sewage, rain water or other liquid wastes to a point of disposal. It does not include the mains of public sewer systems, private or public sewage treatment or disposal plant. D. Vent System: A pipe or pipes installed to provide a flow of air to or from a drainage system, or to provide a circulation of air within such system to protect trap seals from siphonage and knack pressure. E. See legend on drawings for additional information. 1.3 SUBMITTALS. A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for all plumbing items including the model clearly indicated, operating weights, furnished specialties & accessories and installation instructions, B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly type shop drawings indicating dimensions, required clearances and methods of assembly of components. C. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems products; in accordance with requirements of Division 23. SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES — 0510112015 221319-1 D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each type of drain and accessory, including "trouble -shooting" maintenance guide. Include this data, product data and shop drawings in maintenance manual and in accordance with requirements of Division 21 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: X Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the provisions of the following: I Plumbing Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of Local Plumbing Code. 2. ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable ANSI standards pertaining to materials, products and installation of soil and waste systems. 3. ASSN Compliance: Comply with applicable ASSE Standards pertaining to materials, products and installation of soil and waste systems. 4. PDI Compliance: Comply with applicable PDI standards pertaining to products and installation of soil and waste systems. 5. PVC, CPUC and PVDF Pipe: Only Contractoes personnel which have received training in the installation of this material and meet the manufacturers qualifications shall do the assembly of such material. 1,5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING: A. Coordinate the installation of roof drains, flashing and roof penetrations. 13Coordinate flashing materials installation of roofing, waterproofing and adjoining substrate work. C. Coordinate the installation of drains in poured -in-place concrete slabs, to include proper drain elevations, installation of flashing and slope of slab to drains, D. Coordinate with installation of sanitary and storm sewer systems as necessary to interface building drains with drainage piping systems, E. Coordinate all penetrations with Structural Engineer. F. Coordinate all installations with work of other trades. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 21 MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide drainage and vent systems from one of the following a. Josam Manufacturing Co. bJay R. Smith C. Tyler Pipe d. Zurn Industries e. .«- x r de ARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES — 05/01/2015 221319-2 LMC: Cath Lab ##2 —Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 l" Woodford g. Precision Plumbing Products h. Mifab' 2.2 SANITARY AND STORM DRAINAGE, VENT AND SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE PIPE AND FITTINGS X General: Provide piping and pipe fittings complying with Division 23. 2.3 BASIC SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS: A. General: Provide supports and anchors complying with Division 23, 2.4 DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES: A. Trap Seal Protection Devices: 1. Barrier Type Trap Seal Protection Devices a. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Sure Seal Manufacturing; Inline Floor Crain Trap Sealer; or a comparable product by one of the following: I SureSeal or ProSet (Colorado State Plumbing Beard approved manufacturers only) 4Standard-ASSE 1072-2007 Body: Seatingd. Diaphragm & * or !1 mm f. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: Compression fit seating gasket 80 duromete B. Expansion Joints: Cast-iron body with adjustable bronze sleeve, bronze bolts with wing nul 2.5 CLEANOUTS: A. Cleanout Plugs: Cast brass, threads complying with ANSI 82.1 and local plumbing code. B. Floor Cleanout: Round, cast iron body with recessed bronze closure plug, scoriated polished bronze frame and cover plate. chromeC, Wall Cleanout: Cleanout tee with -# x4 4 . .ppe i .. plated wall cover plate«- «. -.de. bolt with chrome plated .. i - 4.. . -# « # SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES — 05/01/2015 221319-3 LMC: Cath Lab # — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 .6 FLOOR SINK: A. Floor sink type designations and sues are indicated on drawings, 1. FS -1 See plumbing fixture schedule PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION: A. General: Install piping in accordance with local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), except where more stringent requirements are Indicated. B. Inspect piping before installation to detect apparent defects. Mark defective materials and promptly remove from site.. C. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. Verify that all drainage, vent piping and specialties may be installed in accordance with pertinent cosies and regulations, the original design and referenced standards. D, Verify all existing grades, inverts, utilities, obstacles and topographical conditions prior to installations. E. Examine rough -in requirements for plumbing fixtures and other equipment having drain connections to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation. F. Examine walls, floors, roof and plumbing chases for suitable conditions where piping and specialties are to be installed. G, Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION: A. General Locations .Arrangements:Drawings .. • diagrams) • the general location and arrangement of the piping systems. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into account many design considerations. So far as practical, install piping as indicated. B. All floor sinks are to be provided with P -trap the same size as the floor drain unless otherwise noted on mechanical drawings, C. Provide flashing membrane forii drainsin structure .aw slab'on grade level; see flashing detail on drawings, D. Lubricate cleanoutplugs - of graphite w linseed oil. Prior w building turnover i.e cleani. plugs, w.ricate anw reinstall using only enough forceto ensure permanent leakproof w E. Provide flashing for all floor drains, floor cleanouts in wet areas �and shower drains above grade. Make watertight with underslab moisture vapor barrier, Refer to Division 7 for requirements of vapor barriers. Flashing shall extend at least 24 -inches from drain rim into floor membrane or on f! w to• w device • make SANITARY' . 05/01/2015 22131• LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 777.307 watertight, durable joint. Provide flashing collar extension with all drains and cleanouts installed above grade. 3.3 HANGERS ANDSUPPORTS: A. General: Refer to Division 23 for supports and anchors. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES: A. Install expansion joints on vertical risers as indicated, and as required by the installation and plumbing code. See plans for detail. B. Above Ground Cleanouts: Installinabove ground piping and building drain piping as indicated, and extend cleanouts to floor or wall above. Line cleanouts are not acceptable unless otherwise noted on the drawings. i. As required by plumbing code; . At each change in direction of piping greater than 135 degrees below slab; 3. At minimum intervals of 100 feet, 4. At base of each vertical soil or waste stack; 5. At sinks and urinals on grade; 6. At egress of building (surface cleanout). 7. At each toilet group. C. C€eanouts Covers: Install floor and wall cleanout covers, types as indicated, and in accessible locations. D. Flashing Flanges; Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and cleanout passing through waterproof membranes. E. Vent Flashing Sleeves: Install on stacks passing through roof, secure over stack flashing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions* 15 .. n TUBE JOINT• A. Install pipes and pipe joints in accordance with Division 23. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF FLOOR DRAINS: A. Install floor sinks in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in locations indicated. S. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained, or as indicated. Set tops of drains flush with finished floor. Coordinate floor slopes and exact drain locations with Architectural drawings. connected.C. Trap all drains connected to the sanitary sewer with minimum trap size that of drain E. Position drains so that they are accessible and easy to maintain- LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 3.7 CONNECTIONS. - A. Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide drainage and vent piping runouts to plumbing fixtures and drains, with approved trap, of sizes indicated; but in no case smaller than required by the plu ONN CTIONS.- Ml. # n# code. S. Locate piping runouts as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures or drains. 15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Piping System Test: Test drainage and vent system in accordance with the procedures of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction, or in the absence of a published procedure, as described in Division 1. S. Inspections: 1. Do not enclose, cover or put into operation drainage and vent piping system until it has been pressure tested, inspected and approved by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. Division2. During the progress of the installation, notify the plumbing official having jurisdiction, at least 48 hours prior to the time such inspection must be made. Perform tests specified in 15 in the presence of plumbing official. a. Rough -in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of the piping system before concealing or closing in after system is roughed -in, and prior to setting fixtures. b. Final Inspection: Arrange for a final inspection to observe the tests specified and to ensure compliance with the requirements of the plumbing code. 3. Re -inspections: Wheneverthe piping system fails to pass the test or inspection, make the required corrections and arrange for re -inspection, 4. reports; Prepare inspection reports, signed by the plumbing official. .9 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: G: A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. & Clean drain strainers, domes, and traps. remove dirt and debris. 310 PROTECTION: A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris, and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or whenever work steps. Piping shall END CP SECTION 22 1319 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment >« ! SECTION 23 0500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART 1 . GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUM NTS: A. All drawings associated with the entire project, including general provisions of the Contract, including The General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, General and Supplementary Conditions and Division -I Conditions specification sections shall apply to the Division 23 specifications and drawings. The Contractor shall be responsible for reviewing and becoming familiar with the aforementioned and all other Contract Documents associated with the ! • BRelated Sections: Refer to all sections in Division 23. Refer to Division 26 specification sections and Division 26 drawings. Where contradictions occur between this section and Division 1, the more stringent requirement shall apply. D. Contractor shall be defined as any and all entities involved with the construction of the project.. 1.2 SUMMARY. A. This Section specifies the basic requirements for mechanical installations and includes requirements common to more than one section of [division e. It expands and supplements the requirements specified in Division 1. 1.3 MECHANICAL • COMMONX The Contract Documents are diagrammatic, showing certain physical relationships which must be established within the mechanical work and its interface with all other work. Such establishment is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. Drawings shall not be scaled for the purpose of establishing material quantities. B. Drawings and specifications are complementary. Whatever is called for in either is binding as though called for in both. Report any discrepancies to the Engineer and obtain written instructions before proceeding. Where any contradictions occur between the specifications and the drawings the more stringent requirement shall apply. The contractor shall include pricing for the more stringent and expensive requirements, CDrawings shall not be scaled for rough -in measurements or used as shop drawings. Where drawings are required for these purposes or have to be made from field measurement, Contractor shall take the necessary measurements and prepare the drawings. D. The exact location for some items in this specification may not be� shown on the drawings. The location of such items may be established by the Engineer during t he progress of the work. EThe contract documents indicate required size and points of terminations Of pipes, and suggest proper routes to conform to structure, avoid obstructions and preserve clearances. It is not intended that drawings indicate necessary offsets. The contractor shall make the installation in such a manner as to conform to the structure, avoid obstructions, preserve headroom and keep openings and passageways clear, without further instructions or costs to the Owner. All equipment shall be installed so access is maintained for serviceability, f. a i 230500-1 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 F. Before any work is installed, determine that equipment will properly fit the space; that required piping grades can be maintained and that :ductwork can be run as intended without interferences between systems, structural elements or work of other trades. G. Verify all dimensions by field measurements, K Coordinate installation in chases, slots and openings with all other building components to allow for proper mechanical installations. « 0. The Contractor shall provide all labor and materiel necessary but not limited to the starting/stopping of all mechanical equipment, opening/closing of all valves, draining/refilling all mechanical systems and operating/verifying the operation, of all mechanical systems controls as required to accomplish all work necessary to meet construction document requirements. Contractor shall submit records of such activities to engineer and include in the 0 & M manuals. 1A COORDINATION: E!5�41 111111111 111111 1 111 P1111 IN 1111111111119 t drawings from other Division 23 and Division 26 Contractors and shall furnish the same information involving control devices to the appropriate Division 23 Contractor. C. Coordination Drawings: 9 . Coordination drawings shall be prepared by the Contractor for his utilization and are his responsibility to assure systems will be installed in a manner to allow all systems to function properly. 5Clearly indicate solutions to space problems. Identification of space problems without solutions is not acceptable. Only areas clearly ldentified will be reviewed. # # # # � # # • # # # . a d. "Required access for all equipment requiring code or maintenance access. e. All sections and elevations necessary for clarification. f. Indicate all seismic restraint and support systems to be used for all mechanical equipment throughout the project. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC — 05/01/2015 230500-3 LMC; Cath Lab ##2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177,307 . Indicate duct and pipe elevations, Indicate clearances for installing and maintaining Insulation. h. Servicing and maintaining equipment, valve stem movement, and similar requirements. L Indicate movement and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction. Indicate pipe and duct size, Indicate equipment tags. D. Existing Conditions: 1. Carefully survey existing conditions prior to bidding work. In addition, Contractor shall complete a thorough ceiling cavity survey prior to developing 3D drawing. 2. Contractor shall be responsible for showing all existing conditions on the 3D coordination drawings. 1 Provide proper coordination of mechanical work with existing conditions, « 3. Coordinate mechanical utility interruptions one week in advance with the Owner and the Utility Company. Plan work so that duration of the interruption is kept to a minimum. 1.5 COORDINATION WITH OTHER DIVISIONS. A. General: 1. Coordinate all work to conform with the progress of the work of tither trades. 2. Complete the entire installation as soon as the condition of the building will permit.. No extras will be allowed for corrections of ill timed work, when such corrections are required For proper installation of other work, Coordinate« cavity spacetrades. mechanical and electrical systems within the cavity space allocation in the following order of priority. 1. Equipment and required clearances 2, Plumbing waste, cooling coil drain piping and roof drain mains and leaders. 3. Pneumatic tube systems. 4. Ductwork mains 5. Plumbing vent piping 6. Medgastlab gas systems COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC — 05/01/2015 230500-11 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 7. Low pressure ductwork and air devices. 8. Electrical and communication conduits, raceways and cabletray. 9. Domestic hot and cold water 1 t), Hydronic piping 11. Fire sprinkler mains, branch piping and drops (locate as tight to structure as possible), 12. DDC control wiring and ether low voltage systems. 13. Fire alarm systems. C. Chases, Inserts and Openings: 1. Provide measurements, drawings and layouts so that openings, inserts and chases in new construction can be built in as construction progresses. 2. Check sizes and locations of openings provided. Including the access panels for equipment in hard lid ceilings and wall cavities. 3. Any cutting and patching made necessary by failure to provide measurements, drawings and layouts at the proper time shall be done at no additional cost In contract sum. -dimensio rid dtawin s so that concrete basis and other — VP Support Dimensions, Provide n$ a 9 equipment supports to be provided under other sections of the specifications can be built at the proper E. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured in place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. F. Coordinate the cutting and patching 6f building components 6�ccommodate the installation of mechanical equipment • materials. Refer to Division I and Division smg I LOA w ` «« • ` « « #I01#1 • H. Coordination with Electrical Work Refer to Division 1 and 26. 1.6 DESIGN WORK REQUIRED BY CONTRACTOR: A. The construction of this project requires the Contractor to include the detailing and design of several systems and/or subsystems. All such design work associated with the development of the coordination drawings shall be the complete responsibility of the Contractor. BThe Contractor shall take the full responsibility to develop and complete routing strategies which will allow fully coordinated system to be installed in a fully functional manner. The Engineers contract drawings shall be for system design intent and genetitconfigurations, C. Systems or subsystems which require design responsibility by the contractor include but are not limited to; 1. Final coordinated distribution of duct, hydropic, plumbing and other systems within the ceiling cavity. 2. Any system not fully detailed 3. Fire protection systems 4. Equipment supports, hangers, anchors and seismic systems not fully detailed nor specified in these documents, or catalogued by the manufacturer. 5. Temperature controls systems 6. Refrigeration systems 1 D. Design Limitations: 1. The Contractor shall not modify the Engineers design intent in any way. The Contractor shall not change any pipe size or equipment size without prior written approval from the Engineer. The Contractor shall conform to the SMACNA Duct Construction Standards when modifying the ductwork layout to avoid collisions. . Back to back 900 fittings on duct system shall not be installed under any circumstance. 5. Bull nosed tees on piping systems shall not be installed under any circumstance. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS. A. The Contractor shall be required to attend a mandatory pre-bid walk-thru and shall make themselves familiar with the existing conditions. No additional costs to the Owner shall be accepted for additional work for existing conditions. B. Field verify all conditions prior to submitting bids. C. Report any damaged equipment or systems to the Owner prior to any work. D. Protect all mechanical and electrical work against theft, injury or damage from all causes until it has been tested and accepted. E. Be responsible for all damage to the property of the Owner or to the work of other contractors during the construction R guarantee i."'. RM Repair R. replace any part of the work may show defect during one year from the final acceptance of all work, provided such defect is, in . opinion of r Architect,due to imperfect material R • s. i and not due to the Owner's carelessness or improper FThe Contractor shall coordinate and co-operate with Owner at all times for all new to existing connections, system shutdowns and start-ups, flushing and filling both new and existing G. Provide temporary ductwork and piping services, where required, to maintain existing areas operable. H- Coordinate all services shat -down with theOwner; provide temporary services. Coordinate any required disruptions with Owner, one week in advance. 1. Minimize disruptions to operation of mechanical systems in occupied areas. 1.8 SAFETY; A. Refer to Division 1. 1.9 EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OP'P'ORTUNITY REQUIREMENTS; A. Defer to Division 1 and conform with the Owners requirements. 1.10 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES: A. Refer to Division 1. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC — 05/01/2015 230500-6 LMC: Cath Lab Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement B. Execute and inspect all work in accordance with all Underwriters, local and state codes, rules and regulations applicable to the trade affected as a minimum, but if the plans and/or specifications call for requirements that exceed these rules and regulations, the greater requirement shall be followed. Follow recommendations of NFPA, SMA NA EPA, OSHA and ASHRAE. C. Comply with standards in effect att e date of these Contract Documents, except where a standard or specific date or edition is indicated. C. The handling, removal and disposal of regulated refrigerants shell be in accordance with U.S. EPA, state and local regulations. E. The handling, removal and disposal of lead based paint and other lead containing materials shall comply with EPA, OSHA, and any other Federal, Mate, or local regulations. F. After entering into contract, Contractor will be held to complete all work necessary to meet these requirements without additional expense to the Owner. 1.11 REQUIREMENTS OF LOCAL UTILITY COMPANIES: A. Comply with rules and regulations of local utility companies. Include in bid the cost of all valves, valve boxes, meter boxes, meters and such accessory equipment which will be required but not provided by Local Utility Company for the project.. 1A2 PERMITS AND PEES: A. Refer to Division 1. B. The Contractor shall pay all tap, development, meter„ etc., fees required for connection to municipal and public utility facilities, unless directed otherwise by the General Contractor/fawner - IN WRITING, C. Contractor shall arrange for and pay for all inspections, licenses and certificates required in connection with the work. 1,13 PROJECT SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS. A. All systems shall be installed to meet NFPA and IBC Seismic requirements. 1. Where any conflicts arise the more stringent requirements shall be applicable, 2. The design of the seismic requirements shall be the full responsibility of the Contractor, 1.14 TEMPORARY FACILITIES: A. Light, Heat, Power, Etc.: Responsibility for providing temporary electricity, heat and other facilities shall be as specified in Division B. Use of Permanent Building Equipment for Temporary Heating or Cooling: Permanent building equipment shall not be used without writtert permission from the Ownen If this equipment is used for temporary# or o## #. it shall be adequately maintained per instructions# protected filters,controls, and hydronic systems shall be flushed and chemically treated.(Ductwork R air moving equipment shall be cleaned to an "AS New"condition).All required for the construction period shall be COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC — 05/01/2015 230500-7 115 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS - A. Refer to the Instructions to Bidders and Division 1. B. Materials and equipment of equivalent quality may be submitted for substituted prior to bidding. This may be done by submitting to the Architect/Engineer at least ten (10) working days prior to the bid date a letter in triplicate requesting prior review. This submittal shall include all data necessary for complete evaluation of the product, 1. Substitutions shall be allowed only upon the written approval of the Architect/Engineer NO EXCEPTIONS. , The Contractor shall be responsible for removal, replacement and remedy of any system or equipment which has been installed which does not meet the specifications or which does not have prior approval. 1.16 MECHANICAL- SUBMITTALS: A. General An index shall be provided which includes. a. Product b. Plan Code (if applicable) C. Specification Section d, Manufacturer and Model Number 7, Fire protection and coordination drawings do not apply to the above. These drawings may be submitted in a sepa ra te submittal. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC — 05/01/2015 230500-8 CAll equipment shall conform to the State and/or local Energy conservation Standards. 1.17 SPECIFIC CATEGORY SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS: A. Product Data: 1. " Where pre-printed data covers more than one distinct product„ size, type, material, trim, accessory group or other variation, mark submitted copy with black pen to indicate which of the variations is to be provided. . Deleteor mark -out portions of pre-printed data which are not applicable. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 05/0112015 230500-9 1 Where operating ranges are shown, mark data to show portion of range required for project application. a. Sizes. b. Weights. C. Speeds. d. Capacities. e. Piping and electrical connection sizes and locations. f. Statements of compliance with the required standards and regulations. g. Performance data. h. Manufacturer's specifications. 1 Shop Drawings are defined as mechanical system layout drawings prepared specifically for this project, or fabrication and assembly type drawings of system components to show more detail than typical pre-printed materials. 2, Prepare Mechanical Shop Drawings, except diagrams, to accurate scale, min 118%1'_g°', unless otherwise noted, a. Show clearance dimensions at critical locations. b. Show dimensions of spaces required for operation and maintenance. C. Show interfaces with other work, including structural support. CTest Reports: I Submit test reports which have been signed and dated by the accredited firm or testing agency performing the test. 2. Prepare test reports in the manner specified in the standard or regulation governing the test procedure (if any) as indicated. 3. Submit test reports as required for 0 & M manuals. D. Product Listing: 1. Prepare listing of major mechanical equipment and materials for the project, within (2) two weeks of signing the Contract Documents and transmit to the Architect. A sample schedule is included at the end of this section to complete this requirement. a. Provide all information requested. b. Submit this listing as a part of the submittal requirement specified in Division 1, "PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTION." 2. Unless otherwise specified, all materials and equipment shall be of domestic (USA) manufacture and shall be of the best quality used for the purpose in commercial practice. 3. When two or more items of same material or equipment are required (plumbing fixtures, pumps, valves, air conditioning units, etc,) they shall be of the same manufacturer. Product manufacturer uniformity does not apply to raw materials, bulk materials, pipe, tube, fittings (except flanged and grooved types), sheet metal, wire, steel bar stock, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC — 05/0112015 230500-10 LMC- Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 welding rods, solder, fasteners, motors for dissimilar equipment units and similar items used in work, except as otherwise indicated. a. Provide products which are compatible within systems and other connected items. E. Schedule of Values I Provide preliminary schedule of values with product data submittal, within three (3) weeks from award of contract to successful bidder. Provide according to the following descriptions: a. Site Utilities b. Plumbing C. Fire Protection & HVAC 1) Equipment 2) Sheet Metal 3) Piping 4) Insulation 5) Test and Balancing 6) Specialty Systems 7) Temperature Controls e. Demolition f. Miscellaneous Z Provide a final Schedule of Values at close-out of project including updated values based on actual installation. FCoordination Drawings, See section 1.4 of this specification section. G. Required Submittals: Provide submittals for each item of equipment specified or scheduled in the contract documents. See table at the end of this section. H. If more than two submittals (either for product data, shop drawings, record drawings, or test and balance reports) are made by the Contractor, the Owner reserves the right to charge the Contractor for subsequent reviews by their consultants, Such extra fees shall be deducted from payments by the Owner to the Contractor. 1.98 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Refer to Division 1. 04 M-1 1111ILMOJEISPIR10115 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC — 05/01/2015 230500-11 i Provide # .## -# plastic end -caps on each ^ p of pipe # tube, exceptp corrugated metal, hub -and -spigot, clay pipe. Maintain end -caps through shipping, storage and handling to prevent pipe -end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris and moisture. G. Protect stored ductwork, pipes and tubes. Elevate above grade and enclose with durable, waterproof wrapping. When stored inside, do not exceed structural capacity of the floor. Protect fl^ '#^s ' fittings and specialtiesfrom # or be packaging with durable, waterproof wrapping, 1. Protect sheet metal ductwork and fittings. Elevate and store above grade and cover ends with waterproof .•p 1.19 DEMOLITION: X Refer to Division 1. The followingparagraphs supplement the requirements of Division 1, & During the demolition phase of this contract it is the responsibility of this Contractor to carefully remove existing equipment, piping or ductwork and related items either as shown on the demolition drawings as being removed, or as required for the work. These items shall be tagged, protected from damage and stored as directed by the Architect, A list of all items stored ....p^ turned over to the Architect.... the completionof ,.. pt` «. work or when directed by the Architect, all stored items not reused or wanted by the Owner shall be removed from the premises, Disposition of items not reused is by the direction of the Architect/Engineer. 110 CUTTING AND PATCHING: A. This Article specifies the cutting and patching of mechanical equipment, components and materials to include removal and legal disposal of selected materials, components and equipment, B. Refer to Division 1. C. Do not endanger or damage installed work through procedures and processes of cutting and patching. 1. Arrange for repairs required to restore other work, because of damage caused as a result of mechanical installations. +� • •' •• d � t r f �w LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 H. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed. L Provide and maintain an approved type of temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas. Temporary partitions must not impede access to building egress. I Temporary partitions required for more than 2 days shall be smoke -tight and built of non-combustible materials. 2. ICA procedures must be maintained during construction. J. Locate identify, and protect mechanical and electrical services passing through remodeling or demolition area and serving other areas required to be maintained operational. When services must be interrupted, provide temporary services for the affected areas and notify the Owner prior to changeover. Cover openings in ductwork to remain. Protect equipment and systems to remain, 121 ROUGH -IN: A. Verify final locations for rough -ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected. B. Refer to equipment shop drawings and manufacturer's requirements for actual provided equipment for rough -in requirements. CWork through all coordination before rough -in begins. 122 ACCESSIBILITY: A. Install equipment and materials to provide required access for servicing and maintenance. Coordinate the final location of concealed equipment and devices requiring access with final location of required access panels and doors. Allow ample space for removal of all parts that require replacement or servicing, B. Extend all grease fittings to an accessible location, C. Furnish hinged steel access doors with concealed latch, whether shown on drawings or not, in all walls and ceilings for access to all concealed valves, shock absorbers, air vents, motors, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC — 05/01/2015 230500-13 LMC. Cath Lab #2 -- Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 fans, balancing cocks, and other operating devices requiring adjustment or servicing. Refer to Division 'I for access door specification and division 23 for duct access door requirements. D, —The minimum size of any access door shall not be less than the size of the equipment to be removed or 12 inches x 12 inches if used for service only. E. Furnish doors to trades performing work in which they are to be built, in ample time for building -in as the work progresses. Whenever possible, group valves, cocks, etc., to permit use of minimum number of access doors Within a given room or space. FFactory manufactured doors shall be of a type compatible with the finish in which they are to be installed� In IieU of these doors, approved shop fabricated access doors with DuroDyne hinges may be used, G, Access doors in fire -rated walls and ceilings shall have equivalent U.L. label and fire rating. 123 BELTS, , HEAVES, IMPELLERS: A, The Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate with the Test and Balance Contractor and supply correctly -sized drive belts, sheaves, and trimmed impellers. 1.24 NAMEPLATE DATA. C, Furnish the Engineer with a typewritten list included in the 0 and M manuals of each item lubricated and type of lubricant used, no later than two (2) weeks before completion of the project, or at time of acceptance by the Owner of a portion of'the building and the mechanical systems involved, «CLEANING: A. Refer to division 1. B. Refer to division 23, "TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING" for requirements for cleaning filters, strainers, and mechanical systems prior to final acceptance. 1.27 RECORD DOCUMENTS: A. Refer to Division 1. The following paragraphs supplement the requirements of Division 1. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC -- 05101/2015 23 0500 -14 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177307 B. Keep a complete set of record document prints in custody during entire period of construction at the construction site. Documents shall be updated on a weekly basis. !! ! ^.! i i« •4.: ! . fes. •.! # # .! # ! # #! X • . r to Division 1. B. The testing and balancing report shall be submitted and received by the Engineer at least fifteen calendar days prior to the contractoes request for final observation time frame requirements, Include in the 0 & M Manual after review with "No Exceptions Taken" has been accomplished. information:C. In addition to the information required by Division 1 for Maintenance Data, include the following I . Description of mechanical equipment, function, normal operating c aract n cs an limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of all replaceable parts. 2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions, regulation, control, stopping, shut -down, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. Provide any test reports and start-up documents. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC — 05/01/201 230500-15 LMC. Cath Lab ##2 _ Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly„ repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions. 4. Servicing instructions, lubrication charts and schedules, including Contractor lubrication reports. 5. Manufacturer's service manuals for all mechanical equipment provide under this contract. 6. Include the valve tag list: 7. Name, Address and Telephone number of party to be contacted for 24-hour service for each item of equipment. Starting, stopping, lubrication, equipment identification numbers and adjustment clearly indicated for each piece of equipment. g. Complete parts list. Provide to Owner, recommended spare parts list. 10. Mechanical warranties. 11. Final schedule of values with all mechanical change order costs included and identified. D. Healthcare Compliance Documentation to be compiled under a single section by Division 23 contractor, 1, Authority Having Jurisdiction sign off documentation 2Fire Alarm (provided to Division 23 by Division 26) a. 100% test reports b. Monthly test criteria for temporary systems . Sprinkler a, Above ground piping system certification b. Tamper and flow certification c. Fire pump flow tests 4. Electrical System Documentation (provided to Division 23 by Division 26) a. Outlet testing; tension, continuity, voltage drop testing documentation b. Isolation panel testing certification c. Low voltage switchboards d. Low voltage insulated ease breakers e. Low voltage ground fault f. Grounding system a. O.R. testing certification b. Isolation room testing certification C. Testing and certification of stamper inspection and test d. Testing and certification of NEPA filters e. Testing and certification of smoke control and life safety systems COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC — 05/0112015 230500-16 LMC: Cath Lab #2 - Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 6. _ Medical Cas System a. State certification report 7. Backflow devices a. Certification report 6. LAPPA 101 documentation (provided by division 'I & 26 to division 23) a. Authority Having Jurisdiction compliant drawings . documentation for II..SM, ICRA, MOPS and Mot Work. (provided by division 'I & 26 to Division 2) This contract will not be considered completed nor will final payment be made until all specified material, including testing and balancing report and final schedule of values with all mechanical change order costs included and identified is received in this operating and maintenance report and the manual is reviewed by the Architect and Engineer. f PROJECTiS ! A. In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, complete the requirements listed below. & The Contractor shall be responsible for the following Mechanical Checklist either by performing and/or coordinating such items prior to applying for certification of substantial completion. Refer to individual specification sections for additional requirements. C. Mechanical Checklist w .-•. A. Refer to the Division 1 for procedures and submittal requirements for warranties. Refer to Compileindividual equipment specifications for warranty requirements. In any case the entire mechanical system shall be warranted no less than one year from the time of acceptance by the Owner. B. d assemble the warranties specified in Division «. separated set of vinyl covered, three ring binders, tabulated and indexed for easy reference I the operating and maintenance manuals. C, Provide complete warranty information for each item to include product or equipment to include date or beginning of warranty or bond, duration of warranty or bond; and names, addresses, and telephone numbers and procedures for filing a claim and obtaining warranty COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MVAC -- 05/01/2015 230500-17 I �0111111 -,ll, �11 0 ill!' SPEC ITEM REQUIREMENTS SECTION SUBMITTALS SUPPLEMENTAL a. zCi w 0 ul tti uJ 23 2 oLu a. < to as a. 0 .50 LL W COMMON WORK RESULTS 210500 FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION X I X X I X x X x WATER BASED FIRE 211000 PROTECTION X x x I x x X X COMMON WORK RESULTST 220500 FOR PLUMBING 221110 FACILITY WATER X x x X X DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221319 DRAINAGE & VENT X X X X SYSTEMS 230500 PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE X OF VALUES FINAL SCHEDULE OFX T x VALUES EQUIPMENT WARRANTIES X O&M MANUALS COORDINATION X DRAWINGS RECORD DRAWIINGS x X x 230503 METHOD OF PROCEDURE 230509 MECHANICAL FIRE X X X X STOPPING ---, ..... 230510 BASIC PIPING MATERIALS X X7 x x AND METHODS 230516 PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS x x 230518 PIPING SPECIALTIES X I X 230519 METERS AND GAUGES X X X2 X, 230523 VALVES X X 230529 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS X X X 230548 VIBRATION CONTROL XX . ... ........... .. x X X 230553 MECHANICAL X x x IDENTIFICATION 230593 TESTING „ADJUSTING AND x X BALANCING 230700 MECHANICAL INSULATION X x 230993 SEQUENCE OF x OPERATION LMC: Cath Lab #t2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 SPEC ITEM REQUIREMENTS SECTION SUBMITTALS SUPPLEMENTAL a z L caaLU C. 232213 STEAM & CONDENSATE X X X HEATING PIPING; 233913 METAL DUCTWORK X X X X ;; 233300 DUCTWORK X X X X ACCESSORIES 23$413 1H UMI DIFfERS X X X X X X X 2 Requires Review & Approval from T & B Contractor Warranty Report/Warranty 'Kitchen Exhaust Hood s See Specific Specification Section for Test & Certification Requirements END OF SECTION 23 0500 COMMON•' FOR HVAC — 05/01/2015 23t it • LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177307 SECTION 23 0505 - METHOD OF PROCEDURE PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY: K Section Includes: 1, Requirements for developing and implementing Method of Procedure (MOP) during the construction of this project. 2. Additional requirements and supplemental instructions, 1 MOP Guidelines 4. Method of Procedure Outline form. 5. Welding or cuffing permit. 6. Outside contractor evaluation form, 11 DESCRIPTION. - A. Definition: Method of Procedure (MOP) is a written plan which describes the activities and procedures to safeguard the building's occupants, hospital equipment and systems and to interface with the hospital's management, operations and security, B. When an MOP is Required: 1 An MOP is required when a construction activity affects the safety of the occupants, hospital equipment or any system which supports the hospital, or essentially affects the hospital's management, operations or security, 2. A MOP is required when requested or deemed necessary by the Owner or Architect, C. Development: 1 The Prime Contractor shall develop, submit, track and process the MOP. Any assistance required by the Subcontractors shall be provided. All MOP's shall be reviewed by the Prime Contractor prior to submitting the MOP to the Owner and Architect. Z ALL MOP'S SHALL BE TYPED -RIO EXCEPTIONS, 3. Contractor shall develop the MOP in a timely fashion prior to review and approval by all required parties. 4. Contractor shall develop the MOP with input from the subcontractor, where necessary, DForm: Each MOP shall be a written document in narrative, descriptive or outline form supplemented with drawings, diagrams and schedules as necessary. The detailed format included under this section shall be utilized. E. Review and Approval: Contractor shall submit each MOP in triplicate to the Architect for review and approval. All MOP's require Owner's approval. F. Implementation: Contractor shall implement the MOP when approved by the Architect and Owner in writing. No construction activity which requires a MOP shall proceed until the MOP is approved. METHOD OF PROCEDURE — 05/01/2015 230505-1 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177,307 G, Compliance: Contractor shall comply with the approved MOP. The Owner and Architect reserves the right to stop the work for non-compliance with the MOP, Any cost or time delay resulting from the work stoppage shall be borne by the Contractor. K Posting: Work shall not proceed on any facet of the work involving any MOP if an approved and signed MOP is not posted in the work area, 1.3 CONSIDERATIONS: A. General: The following are considerations in developing the Method of Procedure: 1 Develop a detailed listing of MOPS which will be required as part of the project, Submit at the pre -construction meeting. All MOPS shall be included on the project 2 -week took ahead schedule. Z Identify the construction area and its boundaries. 1 Identify access of trades and materials to location. 4. Identify the sequence of work and impact on occupants in the area. & Identify the protection and separation required for access to work and work area. 6, Determine the amount of materials required and availability at time of work. 7. Determine the duration of the work. & Request temporary facilities for occupants and office equipment if necessary. 9. Notify the Owner in pre -established time frame. 10. Require the presence of the Owner's technical personnel for additional procedures in sensitive areas, 11. Develop together with the Owner's technical personnel for additional procedures in sensitive areas, B. Specific Construction Activity: The following are considerations in developing a specific Method of Procedure: 1. Date of the activity. 2. Time of the activity. 3. Location of the activity. 4. Brief description of the activity. & The length of the activity. 6, Step-by-step procedure of the activity. 7. A contingency plan to retreat from the activity and place equipment back in normal operating configuration. METHOD OF PROCEDURE --05/01/2015 230505-2 AMajor mechanical or electrical shutdowns and/or changeovers require two weeks notice, mini ashours,All .. required to- completed on off hoursor .. _ , unless prior approval .d from !e. GENERAL, r. A JOINT IY CRITERIA ay. R BUILD CLEAN PROTOCOL rli 1.. SHALL BE STRICTLY ADHERED TO ON THIS PROJECT. CIf primary systems serving hospital system and/or equipment are taken out of service, for any reason, • r ar shall be responsible • providing temporary systems during the period when the primary system is out of service. The Contractor4. responsible a providing temporarypower to the standby D. Limit construction operations t• those.. a4 • procedures o4 adversely t unduly affect the working environment of Owner's occupied spaces, including noise, dust, odors, pollution, • discomfort, poor lighting, hazards and other undesirable" and conditions. E. The Contractor shall coordinate and co-operate with Owner at all times for all new to existing connections, system shutdowns and restart -sap, flushing and filling both new and existing systems. F. Provide temporary ductwork and piping services where required to maintain existing areas operable. -4. 4 ., a a a .a4 a ,, ,► �, a Y 4 «a � .. «.4 . - a 4a a- a� �♦ -• 44 a. 4 ♦� •• a - • - aa� • • 4 • "" a • • 4a r • •^ a ^a 1.5 MOP GUIDELINES: A. The following guidelines should be followed when developing MQPs. " • a- •-a 4 M" 4 4- a a -s 2, Include M.Q.P. checklist with M.Q.P. List to be complete and filled in, including initial block. Incomplete M.Q.P.s will not be processed, project schedule will not be compromised by Contractors failure to follow M.Q.P. guidelines. METHOD OF PROCEDURE -- 05/01/2015 230505-3 LMC. Cath Lab # — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 . Approval/acceptance list should include phone numbers, fax numbers, and electronic mail address for ease of M.O.P. routine. 4. Step by step activities shall include the following, a, All affected systems shall be identified: If power or mechanical system support systems are de -energized, all affected systems shall be identified and addressed. • •* identified. sourceC. Communication with the Owner and the Architect shall be maintained at all times. d. if temporary power feeds are required, equipment affected and temporary power shall be checked before and afterde-energization of '.# power source. This should be included in the special tenant needs/requirements e. Prior to returning to normal power ! Contractor1. .. Owner and shall be identified as a critical step in the :.gym Once this is done,a. power should be verified (ie. voltage, rotation ground, etc.) and documented. f. AC power cables must be taggedllabeled prior to being worked on. 5, Affected mechanical systems and equipment shall include the following, a. Affected areas and systems shall be identified. Emergency backup/backout provisions (contingency plans) should be clearly identified in the M.O.P. 1 } Space cooling limitations should be reviewed with the Owner, (Make test of area with AC available should limitations be exceeded.) Temperature readings shall be recorded every 30 minutes without AC operating, If temperature is exceeded, AC shall be restarted. This shall be performed to determine if temporary cooling is required for M.O.P. work. 2) Critical areas to be reviewed for time constraints (i.e. how long can space be maintained without cooling). ) Medical gas systems are considered a critical system and shall be included in an MOP. Stop when the "unexpected" is encountered and proceed with the contingency/backout plan. if contigencylackout plan does not address the "unexpected," work shall be stopped, The Contractor shall be responsible for: a. anticipate problems; b, clearly identify contingency plans, c. clearly identify back out plan. METHOD OF PROCEDURE - 05/01/2015 230505-4 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — BI -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 7, Verify with the Owner any affected alarms at the beginning and ending of each M,O,P. to ensure integrity is in place, 8. What is going to be affected by M.O,P. work? a. Evaluate if temporary cooling should be provided (i,e, fans, portable cooling units, etc.)? b. Verify if Building Automation Systems are affected in work areas and/or non- affected areas, I C. Monitoring of environment for critical areas should be addressed, dMaintain communication with the Owner for change in environment, to impleme temporary or emergency measures (contingency plans), or return to normal statusI !p!IIIIIIIII 1111111iIIII , ir!rllr� lj!1�11 M-W*IWW'W'IWIN'-i"",iiiiallilliwilli i ' 0 1- I* Is r411 wwaoloj jr. I VAIMMU, W1 MVMMZVT I I . .0 9. All steps must be sequentially numbered, The check -off box for the Owner must be completed prior to proceeding with any construction. 10, When M.O.P.'s affect systems with alarms (i.e. fire alarm, temp,, security, etc.), the Owner shall be notified prior to the outage and after the outage. 11, Mechanical and/or AC one -fine diagrams should be attached with each M.O.P. These should be a reduced set (I I x 17) with affected areas highlighted. The MO.P. author shall contact the Engineer of Record for a copy of the appropriate one -fine diagrams, 1Z List any and all systems which could be affected by the work procedure. 13. Personnel/Equipment bOne line mechanical diagrams shall be attached to the M.O.P. for any system which is affected by the work procedure (i.e. chilled water, condenser water, steam, heating, domestic hot or cold, fuel oil, supplyfreturn air systems, medical gas, etc.). The M.O.P. author shall contact the Engineer of Record for a copy of the appropriate one -fine diagram. 14. Prior to an outage, the Contractor shall check with the National Weather Service on the morning of, and 3 hours prior to, an outage for any condition that could affect the outage. METHOD OF PROCEDURE 230505-5 r 15. Prior to MOP work, the Contractor and the Owner shall walk through the MOP step -by - stop procedure to verify each step is workable and in order. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NOT USED. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 The contractor shall be responsible to complete the following MOP form, per the Instructions and direction outlined in this section, END OF SECTION 23 0505 230505-6 LMC: Cath Lab ##2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 HOSPITAL. MOP OUTLINE STEP 1: MOP DESCRIPTION MOP Dumber: 1, To be sequentially numbered by the Prime Contractor. MOP Title: MOP Originator/Phone Dumber: Gate Submitted: Date Approved: Tentative Start Gate: Month/Day/Year Tentative Finish Date: Month/Day/Year STEP 2: METHOD OF PROCEDURE NUMBER: STEP 3: AREA DESCRIPTION Dame of Area: Location within Hospital: STEP 4: CONTACT LIST - (Indicate Emergency Phone Numbers): Hospital Project Management: Dame: Office Phone Number: Pager Phone Number - E -Mail Address: Emergency Phone Number: Hospital Building Engineering: Name: Office Phone Number: Pager Phone Number: E -Mail Address: Emergency Phone Number: Hospital User Group Representative: Name: Office Phone Number: Pager Phone Number,- METHOD umber: METHOD OF PROCEDURE 230505-7 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 E -Mail Address: Emergency Phone Number: Architect: Company Name: Name: Office Phone Number: Pager Phone Number: E -Mail Address: Emergency Phone Number: Engineer: Company Name: Name: Office Phone Number: Pager Phone Number: E -Mail Address: Emergency Phone Number: Contractor: Project Manager: Company Name: Name: Field Office Number: Pager Phone Number: E -Mail Address: Emergency Phone Number: Superintendent* Name: Field Office Phone Number: Pager Phone Number: E -Mail Address: Emergency Phone Number: Fire Department Emergency Number: STEP 5: GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF WORK GENERAL NOTES/SYSTEMS AFFECTED BY WORK: 1 Describe general overview of procedure. Details to be described in STEP 6. Systems affected by Work: 1 Describe hospital equipment and systems affected by shut down. Obtain specific names from the Owner. 2. Describe mechanical equipment which supports hospital equipment and systems which are affected. METHOD OF PROCEDURE 230505-8 LMC: Cath Lab #2 -- Si -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 . Describe electrical equipment which supports hospital equipment and systems which aro affected. 4. Identify electrical panels and breakers which will be affected. 5. Identify major mechanical equipment which will be affected. Utilize equipment plan code numbers (i.e. equipment identification nomenclature) which will be affected. 1. Asterisk for each critical step. , A critical step is anything which could potentially affect hospital equipment/systems. 2. Owner verification/signature block. , Include step number for each process. 4. Step description. Include who will perform each step, specific names, trade and approximate start and stop time associated with each process. STEP 7: HOISTING/HAULING Include detailed information for the following: 1. Identify routing to space. 2. Identify protection of walls/floors. 3. Identify weight of object. 4. Identify weight capacity of elevator if appropriate. 5. Identify the approximate time elevators will be needed, . If building structural system is utilized to support object, identify structural component, capacity of structural component, and method of support. TEP 8: PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS: Include detailed information for the following: 1. Information Technology quipmentIComputers/Cable/E lectrical Equipment a. Specifically detail protection when work occurs over IT equipment/ computers/ cable including plywood enclosures and rubber mats. Attach sketch. . Electrical/Mechanical Equipment 4. Miscellaneous Equipment. METHOD OF PROCEDURE 230505-9 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 1. Include specifics regarding methods of cutting, wet methods detailed. Z Include specifics regarding welding/soldering. STEP 10: SAFETY REQUIREMENTS: Include specifics in regard to the following: 1, Fire Protection 2. Fire Watch . Dust Protection -- JACHO standards for build clean protocol. 4. Asbestos Containment . Smoke Containment 6. Noise Containment 7. Water Containment STEP 11: DETAILED TESTING METHODS 1. Include specifics regarding testing methods and procedures required as pert of this M.O.P. and procedures required prior to putting system into operation. This should be included in step by step activities. STEP 12: WEATHER PROTECTION 1. Include specifics regarding protection from weather. In particular, address water protection, humidity protection, and temperature stability. STEP 13: SPECIAL USER GROUP AND TENANT NEEDS/REQUIREMENTS 1, This section to be completed by User GrouplTenant or Owner's Facility Personnel as applicable. STEP 14: HOSPITAL INFECTION CONTROL 1. this section to be completed by the Hospital Infection Control Manager as applicable. STEP 15: HOSPITAL SECURITY 1. This section to; be completed by the Hospital Security Manager. STEP 16: CONTINGENCY PLANS 1, This section must be completed in detail. In the event of an unforeseen problem associated with any aspect of the M.O.P., a contingency plan is to be developed. Identify potential problems which may arise. Include safe stop points. Include back out procedures. Spare parts, materials, etc. shall be identified for contingency plans. Potential Problems: METHOD OF PROCEDURE 230505.10 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 Contingency Plans Backout Plans: STEP 17: M.O.P. SIGNATURE SHEET 1. If work procedure does not affect party identified, signature is not required. 2. Procedure for obtaining signatures shall be as follows: a. Signatures shall be in the order indicated; b. E -Mail processing shall be acceptable method of confirmation of concurrence Of M.O? P. c. Originator of M.O.P.. shall indicate N/A adjacent to individuals who are not involved and/or affected by the M.O.P. Date Signature: 1 / General Contractor Signature: Mechanical Subcontractor Signature:T I Electrical Subcontractor Signature: 1/ Architect Signature: �! / Mechanical Engineer Signature: Electrical Engineer Signature: Hospital Project Manager METHOD OF PROCEDURE 230505.11 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 Signature: 1 / Hospital Facility Manager Signature: 1 l Hospital Infection Control Manager Signature. B / Hospital Security Manager Signature: f! Hospital User Group (If affected) STEP 18: M.O.P. CHECKLIST: All items outlined must be included with the MOP. 1, This checklist is to be initialed by the AUTHOR of the MOP, 'indicating all sections are included and complete. M.O.P.'s must include the following: STEP NUMBED REQUIREMENT INITIAL BLOCK 1. Title of M.O.P. . Method of Procedure No. 1 Area Description 4. A Contact List 5. General Description of the Work General Notes/Systems Affected by Work 5. Step -By -Step Activities 7, Hoisting and Hauling Route 8. Protection Requirements 9. Tool Identification 10. Safety Requirements 11. Detailed "Testing Methods 12. Weather Protection 13. Special Tenant Needs/Requirements METHOD OF PROCEDURE 230505-12 14. Hospital Infection Control 16. Hospital Security 1. Contingency flan 17. M.C.P. Signature Sheet 18, M.Q.P. Checklist METHOD OF PROCEDURE URR 230505-13 Z a ZZ** , , a 1111 IRM , - SECTION 23 0509 - MECHANICAL FIRE STOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 177,307 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: X Extent of firestopping required by this section is indicated on the drawings and by the requirements of this section. B. Types of firestopping systems specified in this section include: 1. Bare metal pipe Z Insulated metal pipe 1 Plastic piping 4. Metal conduit 5. Metal duct 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE. - A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacturing of firestopping systems for mechanical/electrical penetrations, whose products have been in satisfactory use for not less than 5 years, with published application data for all types of penetrations to be encountered on this job, and with local representation capable of providing training and technical assistance at the job site. & Installer's Qualifications: Personnel installing firestopping systems shall have been specifically trained by the manufacturer in the application of the materials to comply with the listing of the tested assembly. C. Mock -Up: Build a mock-up of each type of fire rated wall floor and ceiling system, and install each type of penetrating item with the properly installed firestopping system. Leave on site throughout the construction period for use as a quality control reference. D, On -Site Training: The local manufacturer's representative shall conduct an on-site hands-on training seminar for all personnel involved in the installation of firestopping. The Engineer shall be invited to attend this training. E. Codes and Standards: Comply with the applicable codes pertaining to firestopping. Firestopping systems shall be tested and listed in accordance with the following: 1. Underwriter's Laboratory'. a. UL 1479 test method for fire tests of through -penetration firestops. b. UL Fire Resistance Directory Z American Society for Testing and Materials: ASTM E814-88 standard test method for fire tests of through -penetration firestops, 13 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data including the following: 1Detailed specification of construction and fabrication. 2Manufacturer's installation instructions. MECHANICAL FIRE STOPPING — 05/01/2015 230509-1 T 1111111 ill �il1111 111!1 MM!,lili Pill I Em Ili 1 11111 B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, description of materials and finishes, general construction, specific modifications, component connections, anchorage methods, hardware and installation procedures, plus the following specific requirements: 1 Details of each proposed assembly, for all types of fire rated construction and penetrating items encountered, identifying intended products and applicable UL System Number, or UL classified devices. Z Manufacture or manufacturer's representative shall provide qualified engineering judgments and drawings relating to non-standard applications as needed. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: I Deliver products in original, unopened packaging with legible manufacturers identification. Z Coordinate delivery with scheduled installation date, allow minimum storage at site. B. Storage and Protection: Store materials in a clean, dry ventilated location. Protect from soiling, abuse, moisture and freezing when required. Follow manufacturer's instructions. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Existing Conditions: 1, Verify existing conditions and substrates before starting work. Correct Unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding. 2. Proceed with installation only after penetrations of the substrate and supporting brackets have been installed, B. Environmental Requirements: 1. Furnish adequate ventilation if using solvent. 2. Furnish forced air ventilation during installation if required by manufacturer, 1 Keep flammable materials away from sparks or flame. 4. Provide masking and drop cloths to prevent contamination of adjacent surfaces by firestopping materials, 5. Comply with manufacturing recommendations for temperature and humidity conditions before, during and after installation of firestopping. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. Subject to compliance with the requirements of this specification, provide products by one of the following: 1. 3M, Fire Protection Products 21, Nelson Firestop Products 3. TREMCO Construction Products 4. Mel 5. Hifti Corporation 6. Specified technologies, Inc. (STI) MECHANICAL FIRE STOPPING — 05/01/2015 230509-2 22 GENERAL: A. Provide fire stop systems listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory, Provide systems with fire resistance "F" ratings equal to the fire resistance rating of the well or floor assembly for all penetrations. In addition,provide systems with a'T" rating equal to the fire resistance rating of the wall or floor assembly in the following applications. 1. All floor penetrations not within the cavity of a wall. 2.3 ACCESSORIES. A. Provide forming and damming materials and sleeves as required by the firestopping system installation instructions. r a . .1 GENERAL. A. Review all project drawings, Owner's records and existing conditions to determine location, rating, and construction of all fire resistive construction. B. Coordinate location of penetrations' to allow for the maximum and minimum annular space around the penetrating item. Allow a minimum of I" undisturbed building material between penetrations, or provide a firestopping system listed for multiple penetrations. Penetrating items shall be centered in hole as much as practical, unless firestopping system is listed for point contact between the wall/floor assembly and the penetrating item. C. Neatly form, saw cut, hole saw or core drill openings. Size openings to conform with the maximum and minimum annular space requirements of the firestopping system. .2 APPLICATION: A. The Contractor shall determine the most appropriate firestopping system which complies with these specifications. B. All insulation shall be continued through the penetration. ;Provide inturnescent caulk or collar firestopping systems. Where the insulations thickness specified in Section 23 07 00 exceeds the allowable` insulation thickness for the firestopping system, reduce the insulation thickness 8 inches on either side of the penetration. Do not reduce' insulation to less than 50 percent of the specified thickness. C. Provide collar type firestopping systems where shown on drawings, and for hot piping systems at penetrations where significant thermal movement can be expected" such as near expansion compensation loops or joints. D? Provide a firestopping system for ducts penetrating fire resistive construction without fire or fire/oke dampers. 1. Do not provide firestopping between fire or fire/smoke damper sleeves and the opening. E, Anchor wiring not within conduit on each side of a penetration to prevent it from being pulled out of the firestopping system. F. See Section 23 0518 for sleeves.. The use of sleeves may affect te'"T" rating of the firestopping system. Coordinate use of sleeves with firestopping.. ERIC? OF SECTION 23 0509 MECHANICAL FIRE STOPPING -- 05/01/2015 230509-3 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement1 SECTIONa BASIC 1.1 SUBMITTALS - A. Refer to Division I and 23 05 0OCommon Work Results for Mechanical for administrative and procedural requirements for submittals. Product Data: b dstandardsproductdata, installation instructions, and dimensioned drawings for each type of pipe and pipe fitting. Submit piping schedule showing pipe or tube weight, fitting type, and joint type for each piping "" t.. M ,, • 0. ..ill -: ,.0 ...• • Of � 6. D. Brazing Certifications: Submit reports as required for piping work, �• i .as "MAt •a IN • • • -• • i 1 • * i ♦-i i- i • •' i - is -• • • • • • i -• LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177,307 comply with governing regulations and industry standards for selections, and with pipe recommendations • .. 2.2 STEEL PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS: A. Slack Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Grade B, type E, electric resistance welded. B. Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A 5„ Grade B. C. Seamless Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Grade B, type S or A106 high temperature. DCoal Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipe: AWWA 0203 for enamel and tape, hot applied. E, Cast -Iron Flanged Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.1, including bolting (Class 125 and 250). F. Cast -Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.4 (Class 125 and 250). G. Malleable -Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.3; plain or galvanized as indicated (Class 125 and 300). H. Malleable -Iron Threaded Unions: ANSI B16.39, Class 150, 250 or 300, selected by Installer for proper piping fabrication and service requirements, including style, end connections, and metal- to -metal seats (iron, bronze or brass); plain or galvanized as indicated (Class 150, 250 and 300). L Threaded Pipe Plugs: ANSI/ASME B16.14. J. Steel Flanges/Fitting: ANSI/ASME B16.5, ASTM A24 (Fire Protection) including bolting and gasketing of the following material group, end connection and facing, except as, otherwise indicated, Material Group: Group 1.1. End Connections: Buttwelding. Facings: Raised -face, Corrosion -Resistant Cast FlangesfFittings: MSS SP -51, including bolting and gasket ng (threaded where pressure is not critical). L. Forged -Steel Socket -Welding and Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.11, except MSS SP -79 for threaded reducer inserts; rated to match schedule of connected pipe (up to 4 inch pipe size). M. Wrought -Steel Buttwelding Fittings. ANSI B16.9, except ANSI B16.28 for short -radius elbows and returns; rated to match connected pipe. N. Cast-iron Threaded Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.12. 0. Forged Branch -Connection Fittings: Except as otherwise indicated, provide type a determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. P. Pipe Nipples: Fabricated from same pipe as used for connected pipet except do not use less than Schedule 80 pipe where length remaining unthreaded is less than 1-112 inches, and where pipe size is less than 1-112 inches, and do not thread nipples full length (no close -nipples). BASIC PIPING MATERIALS ANIS METHODS — 0510912015 230510-2 2._ COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS. A. Capper Tube: ASTM B 66; Type K or L as indicated for each service; hard -drawn temper, except aotherwise indicated. B. DWV Copper Tube: ASTM B 306. C, ACR Copper Tube: ASTM B 260. D. Cast -Capper Solder -Joint Fittings: ANSI 816.16. E. Wrought -Copper Solder -Joint Fittings: ANSI 516.22. F. Cast -Copper Solder -Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI 816.23 (drainage and vent with DWV or tube). G. Wrought -Capper Solder -Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI 816.29. H. Cast -Copper Flared Tube Pittings: ANSI 816.26. I. Bronze Pipe Flanges/Finings: ANSI 816.24 (Class 150 and 300). J. Copper -Tube Unions: Provide standard products recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated. 2.4 BRASS PIPE AND FITTINGS: A. Red Brass Pipe: ASTM B 43 (bailer feed pipe, 1/8 inch thru 12 inches„ regular or extra strong weight). B. Cast -Bronze Threaded Fittings: ANSI 816.15, Class 125 or 250. C. Cast -Bronze Threadless Fittings: ASTM B 61 or B tit, brazed joints. .5 CAST-IRON PRESSURE PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS: A, Ductile -Iron Ripe: Class 52, ANSI A21.51 AWWA 0151; 350 psi pressure rating. B. Cement -Mortar Lining for Ductile -Iron and Pipe and Finings for Water: ANSI A21 A AWWA 0104. C. Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Cast -Iron Piping: ANSI A21,5; A WA 0105. D. Cast -Iron Fittings: ANSI/AWWA 0110/ 1.10; E. Ductile -Iron Fittings: ANSI/A A C110/A21.10. F. Rubber -Gasket Joints: ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. 2.6 CAST-IRON SOIL PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS' A. Hubless Cast -Iron Soil Pipe; FS W -P-01 and CISPI Standards 301 and 310. Pipe and finings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the cast iron soil pipe institute or receive prior approval of the engineer. B. Cast -Iron Hub -and -Spigot Soil Pipe: ASTM A 74. Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the cast ironsoil pipe institute or receive prior approval of the engineer. BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS — 05/0112015 230510-3 LMC: Cath Lab Bi -Plane EquipmentReplacement C. Hubless Cast-iron Soil Pipe Couplings: Neoprene gasket complying with ASTM 0564, CISP1 Standard 310 and stainless steel clamp holding band. D. Heavy Duty Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe Couplings: Neoprene gasket coupling with ASTM 0564. 304 stainless steel shield, minimum 0.15 inches thick, minimum 3 inches wide with 4 sealing bands up to 4 inch pipe, minimum 9 inches wide with 6 sealing bands up to 10 inch pipe.. 1. Basis of resign: Husky SD 40003 E. Cast -Iron Hub -and -Spigot Soil Pipe Fittings: Match sail pipe units; complying with ASTM A 74, F. Neoprene Compression Gaskets: ASTM C 564. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING MATERIALSIPRODUCTS: X Welding Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide welding materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. 1, Comply with Section11, Part C, A ME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials. B. Soldering Materials: All soldering materials shall be lead free. 1. 95-5 Tin -Antimony: ASTM B 32, Gracie 95TA, Melting Range 450-470 degrees F. 2. Silver -Tin Alloy: Fed. Spec00-S-571 E, NSFC2. Melting Range 430 to 530 degrees F. 3, Flux: All flux shall be lead free, water soluble, r compatible with the solder materials being joined. ASTM B813-93. C. Brazing Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide brazing materials to comply with installation requirements. 1. Comply with AWSA 5.8, Section 11„ ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for brazing filler metal materials. . Copper phosphorus -Bcup- , 15 percent solver content, melting range 1190 to 1480 degrees F. b. Silver - BAg-36, 45 percent silver, cadmium -free. Melting range 1.195 to 1265 degrees F. D. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ANSI B16.21; full-faced for cast-iron flanges; raised -face for steel flanges, unless otherwise indicated. EPiping Connectors for Dissimilar Non -Pressure Pipe: Elastomeric annular ring insert, or elastomeric flexible coupling secured at each end with stainless steel clamps, sized for exact fit to pipe.ends and subject to approval by plumbing code. I . Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide piping Connectors of the oll • a. Husky Technologies (Husky SD 4000): BASIC PIPING MATERIALSAND METHODS05/01/2015 23i ! LMC: Cath Lata #2 — Bi -Pyne Equipment Replacement 177.307" F - Pipe Thread Sealant Material. Except as otherwise indicated, provide all pipe threads with the sealant material as recommended by the manufacturer for the service. 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide piping thread sealant material of the followings a. The Rectorseal Corporation PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION: A. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. Verify that all water distribution piping may be installed in accordance with pertinent codes and regulations, and original design, and the referenced standards. B. Examine rough -in requirements for plumbing fixtures and other equipment having water connections to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation. C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION: A. General: Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achievepermanently-leakproof piping systems, capable of performing each indicated service without piping failure. Install each run with minimum joints and couplings, but with adequate and accessible unions for disassembly and maintenance/replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by use of reducing fittings. Align piping accurately at connections, within 1116 inch misalignment tolerance. 1. Comply with ANSI B31 Code for Pressure Piping. 2. Electrical Equipment Spaces. Do not run piping through transformer vaults and ether electrical or electronic equipment spaces and enclosures. Only piping serving this type of equipment space shall be allowed. 3. Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate the general location and arrangement of piping systems. Locations and arrangements of piping take into consideration pipe sizing and friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and outer design; considerations. So far as practical, install piping as indicated. 4. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections. 6. Install piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not permitted, unless expressly indicated. 6. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, unless indicated to be exposed to view. 7. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other permanent elements of the building. Provide space to permit insulation applications, with 1 inch clearance outside the insulation. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for panel removal. LMC: Cath Lab # --Bi-Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 8. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves. 9. Install drains in pressure pipe systems at all low points in mains, risers, and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting, -3/4 inch ball valve, and short 11/4 inch threaded end nipple • cap with chain. i piping - of .a or bends # with ample space between piping # permit proper « applications. 11. dire and Smoke Wall Penetrations: Where pipes pass through fire and smoke rated walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors, maintain the fire and smoke rated integrity. Refer to Division 23 Sections 23 05 and 23 Cls Cil for materials. 12. Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals (See Section 23 05 18). Pipe sleeves smaller than 6 inch shall be steel; pipe sleeves 6 inches and larger; shall be sheet metal. 13. Anchor piping to ensure proper direction of expansion and contraction. 14. Coordinate foundation and all other structural penetrations with structural engineer. B. Hydronic Piping. 1. Make reductions in hydronic pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with the level side up: . Install hydronic piping branch connections to mains using "lee fittings in main with take -off out the bottom of the main; except for up -feed risers which shall have take -off out the top of the main line. Install all hydronic piping level with manual air vent at all high points in direction of flaw. 1 Make changes in direction for drainage and vent piping using appropriate 45 degree wyes, half-wyes, or long sweep quarter, sixth, eighth, or sixteenth bends, SANITARY CROSSES OR SHORT QUARTER BENDS SHALL NOT BE USED IN DRAIN PIPING. 4Provide thrust restraints (bracing to structure or rodded joints) at branches and changes in direction for cast iron pipe 5 inches and larger suspended within the building. 5, Where cast iron piping is suspended in excess of 18 inches on single rod hangers, sway bracing shall be provided to prevent shear at the joints. A #� i A • A A 1111 Ai / i M R i LMC: Cath Lab #2 —Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 1773{)7 6. Install gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other special installation requirements. D. Condensate Crain Piping: 1. Condensate drain piping from air conditioning unit coil condensate drain pan shall be of the sizes shown on the drawings. B, Plastic Pipe: 1, All plastic piping installed below grade shall meet ASTM 02321-89 requirements. .. s General, Provide j« of «. indicated in each piping Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI B21 - out threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint compound, or pipe joint tape (Tefion) where recommended by pipelfitting manufacturer, on male threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed. CBraze copper tube-and,�fifting joints in accordance with ASME B31. D. Solder copper tube -and -fitting joints With silver solder or 95-5 tin -antimony, Out tube ends squarely, ream to full inside diameter, and cleanoutside of tube ends and inside of fittings. Apply solder flux to joint areas of both tubes and fittings, Insert tube full depth into fiffing, and solder in manner which will draw solder full depth and circumference ofjoint. Wipe excess solder from jointbefore it hardens. E. Weld pipe joints in accordance with ASME Code for Pressure Piping, B31 � Provide weld -o -let fittings for two pipe sizes less than main pipe size� F. Weld pipe joints in accordance with recognized industry practice and as follows: 1. Weld pipe joints only when ambient temperature is above 0 degrees F (-18 degrees C) where possible. 2, Bevel pipe ends at a 37.5 degrees angle where possible,smooth rough cuts, and clean to remove slag, metal particles and dirt, 3. Use pipe clamps or tack -weld joints with 1 inch long welds; 4 welds for pipe sizes to 10 inches, 8 welds for pipe sues 12 inch to 20 inch. 4� Build « welds with stringer -bead pass,! ! -« by ! pass,« ! -1 by cover or filler pass. Eliminate valleys at center and edges of each weld. Weld by procedures will ensure elimination of unsound or unfused metal, cracks, oxidation, blow -holes and non- metallic inclusions. 5. Do not weld -out piping system imperfections by tack- welding procedures; refabricate to comply '« LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 H. Flanged Joints: Match flanges within piping system, and at connections with valves and equipment. Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to provide uniform compression of gaskets. L Hubless Cast -Iron Joints: Comply with coupling manufacturers installation instructions. Use pre-set torque wrench set to 80 in -lbs on heavy duty couplings. 3.4 PIPING APPLICATION: A. Domestic Hot and Cold Water - Inside Building: 1 Above Grade Inside Building: a. 6 inches and Smaller: Type L, hard drawn copper tube with wrought copper or bronze fittings, 95-5 tin -antimony / silver tin alloy soldered joints, 2. Below Grade Inside and Outside Building: a. 2-1/2 inches and Smaller: Type K, soft copper or Type K annealed copper tube with wrought copper fittings, silver tin alloy solder joints. b. Larger than 2-1/2 inches- � Ductile iron, tar coated outside, cement mortar lined inside. Full lengths of pipe shall be utilized to the greatest extent possible. • for ductile iron pipe shall •- 350 psi pressure, tar coated outside and cement • Inside. Rubber gasket joints. BSanitary Drainage and Vents - Inside Building - I Above Grade: Service weight cast iron, no -hub type with neoprene gaskets; service weight cast iron, hub and spigot type with neoprene gaskets-, or DWV copper with wrought copper of cast brass fittings. a. Provide husky series 4000 couplings for waste pipe above critical spaces including: I ) Lab 2) Electrical Rooms 3) Imaging Rooms C, Heating Water, Chilled Water and Condenser Water Piping: 1. 2 Inches and Smaller: a. Schedule 40, black steel with 1251b. cast iron or 150 lb. malleable iron threaded fittings. OR Type K copper, hard drawn copper wrought copper or bronze fittings, silver - tin alloy solder joints, 2. 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: a. Schedule 40, seamless or ERW (std. weight 12 inches and over) black steel with flanged or welded joints. i LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 b. Fiffings: Standard weight / Extra strong, seamless steel, butt weld type. C, Flanges: 150 Ib, 300 lb. forged steel slip -can or welding neck type. d. Bolting; Regular square head machine bolts with heavy hexagonal nuts. e. Gaskets: Thickness; material and type suitable for fluid to be handled; and design temperature and pressures: D. Equipment brains and Overflows: 3. Type V" or " WV" dapper,' 3.5 EXPOSED PIPING IN FINISHED AREAS: # r r EAs soon as work has been completed, conduct preliminary tests to ascertain compliance with specified requirements, Make repairs or replacements as required. FGive a minimum of twenty-f6ur hours notice to Engineer of dates when acceptance test will be conducted. Conduct tests as specified for each system in presence of representative of owner, agency having jurisdiction or _. Submit three copies of tests to the Engineerfor `R# -# and date of G. Contractor shall obtain certificates of approval, acceptance and compliance with regulations of agencies having jurisdiction. Work shall not be considered complete until such certificates have been delivered by the Engineer to the OwneK H. All costs involved in these tests shall be borne by Contractor. 1. System Tests `I . Hydrostatic Test: The test shall be accomplished by hand pumping the system to the specified water pressure, and maintaining that pressure until the entire system has been inspected for leaks, but in no case for a time period of less than four hours. BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS — 05/01/2015 230510-9 LMC: Cath Lab #2 —Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 a. Domestic water systems: 100 prig or 150 percent of system pressure, whichever is greater. b. Heating water: 100 prig or 150 percent of operating pressure, whichever is greater, C. Chilled water., 100 psig or 150 percent of system pressure, whichever is greater.. Z Compressed Air or Nitrogen Test: Compressed air tests may be substituted for hydrostatic tests only when ambient conditions or existing building conditions prohibit safe use of hydrostatic testing and must be reviewed by the Engineer prior to any testing. For tests of this type, the piping system shall be subjected to the gas pressure indicated for that specific system, The piping capped or plugged and water -pumped with oil free air, or a nitrogen bottle shall be introduced into the entire system to the pressure specified, The system shall maintain that pressure for the duration of a soapy water test of each joint. 6, Drain test water from piping systems after testing and repair work has been completed, # ^lar« # .•r # # •- -# •< # # • # # LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 3.5 COMMISSIONING: A, Fill system and perform initial chemical treatment. B. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that the system is completely full of water. C. Before operating the system perform these steps: 1. Open valves to full open position, Close coil bypass values. Remove and clean strainers. 3. Check pump for proper rotation and proper wiring.. 4. Set automatic fill valves for required system pressure, 5, Check air vents at high points of systems and determine if all are installed and operating freely (automatic type) or to bleed air completely (manual type). . Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. 7. Check operation of automatic bypass valve, 8. Check and set operating temperature of boilers, chillers, and cooling towers to design requirements. 9. Lubricate motors and bearings. END OF SECTION 23 0510 BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS -- 05/01/2015 230510-11 1 913�Mi 1111 111! ONE W I um«� 11 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of expansion compensation products of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Codes and Standards: 1.. EJMA Compliance: Construct expansion compensation products in accordance with standards of the Expansion Joint Manufacturer's Association (EJMA). 1.2 SUBMITTALS: X Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation instructions for each type of expansion compensation product. Submit expansion compensation schedule showing Manufacturer's figure number, size, location, and features for each required expansion compensation product. B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturers assembly -type shop drawings for each type of expansion compensation product, indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances and methods of assembly of components. C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabricated expansion loops indicating location, dimensions, pipe sizes, and location and method of attachment of anchors. D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of expansion compensation product. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in Maintenance Manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 23. A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Packless Expansion Joints Compensators'. aFlexonics Div.; UOP, Inc. bHyspan Precision Products, Inc, C. Keflex, Inc. dMetraflex Co. a. American BOA, Inc. ammmgnvmwmlmng��� a. Garlock; Mechanical Packing Div, b. Mason Industries, Inc. C. Metraflex Co. LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 3. Pipe Alignment Guides: a. Hyspan Precision Products,lnc. b. Metraflex Co, c. Keflex, Inc. 4. Slip Joints a. Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc. b. Nyspan Precision Products, Inc. 5. Flexible Sall Pipe Joints a. Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc. b. Barco Div., Marison Industries c. Gustin-BaconDiv.; Aeroquip Corp: 6. Grooved Piping Couplings and Nipples Expansion Joints. a. Mustin -Bacon Div.; Aeroquip Corp. b. ITT Grinnell c. Victaulic Co. of America 2.2 PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS, GENERAL: A. Pipe expansion joints shall provide 200 percent absorption capacity of calculated piping expansion betweenanchors. 23 PACT LESS EXPANSION JOINTS: A, General: Provide bellows expansion joints where indicated for piping systems, with materials and pressure/temperature ratings selected by manufacturer to suit Interacted service. Select expansion joints to provide 200 percent absorption capacity with 30 percent safety factor. B. Bellows -Type Expansion Joints; 1. Externally pressurized, bellows -type: a. ASTM A240 T304 Stainless Steel laminated bellows, b. Flanged Connections, conforming to ANSI B16.5. c. Lifting lug. d. Coram port. e. 150 psig design pressure. f. Minimal warranted cycle life of 10,000 full -strobe cycles, g. Internally guided. 2. Bellows -type expansion joint, a. ASTM }. Stainless Steel laminated •« • s Flanged connections, to ANSI Bi 6 0 psigs« • pressure. d. Internal stainless steel liner. e. Shouldered s•• of bellows to minimize stress at pipe -bellows w- s f. External • r EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING — 05/01/2015 230516-2 CExpansion Compensators: Pressure rated for 125 psi for low-pressure systems and for 175 psi for high-pressure systems with a cycle life of 10,000 full -stroke cycles. Units shall have 2 -ply phosphor bronze bellows, brass shrouds, and end fittings for copper piping systems and 2 -ply stainless steel bellows, carbon steel shrouds, and end fittings for steel piping systems. Expansion compensators shall have internal guides and anti -torque device and removable end clip for proper positioning. 1. Provide Keflex series 7Q; or equal. D. Rubber Expansion Joints: Fabric -reinforced butyl rubber with full- faced integral flanges, external control rods and shall be internally reinforced with steel retaining rings over entire surface of flanges, drilled to match flange bolt holes. 2.4 SLIP JOINTS: A. Slip Joints: Carbon steel slip type, designed for repacking under pressure. Slip joints shall have drip connections for steam piping systems and flanged or weld ends to mate with piping system. Packing shall be an asbestos -free compound. 2,5 FLEXIBLE BALL PIPE JOINTS: A. Joints shall be designed for 360 degree rotation and with minimum of 30 degree angular deflection for sizes 6 inches and smaller; 15 degree for sizes 8 inches and larger. B. Joints shall be carbon steel and shall comply with Section If of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and ASME B31.9 "Building Service Piping" for materials and design of pressure containing parts and bolting. Packing shall be asbestos -free composition, 1. Grinnell Fig. 256 2. Guides shall be equipped with factory insulation insert, thickness to match adjoining insulation. Insulation shall be Hydrous Calcium Silicate, 1200deg F. maximum temperature, with 0,31 Mactor and vapor barrier. EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING — 05/01/2015 230516-3 A. Examine areas and conditions under which expansion compensation products are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. Coordinate anchor locations & loads with Structural Engineer.. 3.2 EXPANSION JOINTS: A. Install expansion joints where indicated, for adequate expansion of installed piping system. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide pipe anchors and pipe alignment guides as indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Align units properly to avoid end loading and torsional stress, 3.3 EXPANSION LOOPS: A. Fabricate expansion loops to dimensions indicated, in locations indicated, for adequate expansion compensation of installed piping system. Provide pipe anchors and pipe alignment guides as indicated, to properly anchor and align piping in relationship to expansion loops. 4 EXPANSION COMPENSATION FOR RISERS AND TERMINALS: A. Install connection between piping mains and risers with at least 5 pipe fittings including tee in main. Install connections between piping risers and terminal units with at least 4 pipe fittings including tee in riser. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDES A. Install pipe alignment guides on piping that adjoins expansion joints and elsewhere as indicated. B. Anchor to building substrate. END OF SECTION 23 0515 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177307 iWING SPECIALTIES PARS` 1 r GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of piping specialties work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules and by requirements of this section. B, Piping specialties furnished as park of factory -fabricated equipment, are specified as part of equipment assembly in other Division -23 sections'. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer's {qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of piping specialties of types and sues required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Codas and Standards: 1. FCI Compliance. Test and rate "Y" type strainers in accordance with FCI 73-1 "Pressure Rating Standard for "Y" "hype Strainers" Test and rate other type strainers in accordance with FCI 7-1 "Pressure Rating Standard for Pipeline Strainers Cather than "Y" Type". 2. ASME B 31.9 "Building Services Piping" for materials, products; and installation. 3. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASMF label. . Fabricate and stamp air separators and compression tanks to comply with ASMF Bailer and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1. 5. ASMF "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code", Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualification" for qualifications for welding processes and operators. 13 SUBMITTALS, X Product Data: . product data, including installation scheduleinstructions, and dimensioned drawings for each type of manufactured piping specialty. Include pressure drop curve or chart for each type and size of pipeline strainer. Submit • • manufacturer's figure number,• • and features forrequired piping a- r♦ i •s: Submit forfabricated specialties,r • details of .• • • method of •pr C. Maintenance Data: Submit - data • spare parts lists for•` of manufactured piping specialty. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance wit*• of • PIPING * . 05/01/2015 1 LMC. Cath Lab # — Si -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements,_ provide products by one of the following; 1. Air Vents: a. Armstrong Machine Works. b. Edell & Gossett ITT, Fluid Handling Div. C. Hoffman Specialty ITT; Fluid Handling Div, . Sprax Sarco. e. Amtrol, Inc. 2. Automatic Flaw Control Valves: a. Griswold 1 Pipe Escutcheons; a. Chicago Specialty Mfg. Co. b. Producers Specialty & Mfg, Corp. C. Sanitary -Dash Mfg. Co. 4, Low Pressure Strainers: a. Armstrong Machine Works. b. Hoffman Specialty ITT; Fluid Handling Div. C. Metraflex Co. d. R-P&C'Valve; Liv, White Consolidated Industries, Inc. e. Spirax Sarco. f. Trane Co. g. Victaulic Co. of America. h. Watts Regulator Co. 5. Dielectric Waterways a. Victaulic Co. b. Perfection Corp. C. Flow Design Inc. d. Precision Plumbing Products e. Rockford -Eclipse Div, 8. Mechanical Sleeve Seal: a. Thundrline Corp. b. Metra Flex, 2.2 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES: A. general: Provide factory -fabricated piping specialties recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated. Provide piping specialties of types and pressure ratings indicated for PIPING SPECIALTIES — 05/01/2015 230518-2 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177307 each service, or if not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements, Provide sizes as indicated, and connections, which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment connections. Where more than one type is indicated, selection is Installer's option, Coin Operated Manual Air Vent: Bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; 150 psig working pressure, 212 degrees F operating temperature; manually coin operated and having discharge outlet connection and 1/8 inch NPT mate connection. CManual Air Vent: Provide ball valves as specified in Part 3. D. Automatic Air Vent: 100 psi working pressure, 240 degrees working temperature, stamped brass body and non-metallic float, with threaded outlet connector for "safe waste" discharge pipe. 1. Amtrol 703 or approved equivalent. I , Amtrol 720 or approved equivalent. F. Automatic Flow Control Valves: Class 150, cast iron housing, stainless steel operating parts; threaded connections for 2 inch and smaller, flanged connections for 2-1/2 inch and larger, Factory set to automatically control flow rates within plus or minus 5 percent design, while compensating for system operating pressure differential. Provide quick disconnect valves for flow measuring equipment. Provide a metal identification tag with chain for each valve, factory marked with the zone identification, valve model number, and rate flow in GPM. 23 PIPE ESCUTCHEONS: A. General: Provide pipe escutcheons as specified herein with inside diameter closely i ting pipe outside diameter, or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Select outside diameter of escutcheon to completely cover pipe penetration hole in floors, walls, or ceilings; and pipe sleeve extension, if any, Furnish pipe escutcheons with nickel or chrome finish for occupied areas, prime paint finish for unoccupied areas, B. Pipe Escutcheons for Moist Areas: For waterproof floors, and areas where water and condensation can be expected to accumulate, provide cast brass or sheet brass escutcheons, solid or split hinged. C. Pipe Escutcheons for Dry Areas: Provide sheet steel escutcheons, solid or split hinged. 2.4 LOW PRESSURE PIPELINE STRAINERS: AGeneral: Provide strainers full line size of connecting piping, with ends matching piping system materials. Select strainers for 125 psi working pressure, with Type 304 stainless steel screen, Two inches and smaller steam and liquid strainers $hall have 20 mesh screens. Provide 3/64 inch perforations for 2-1/2 inch and 3 inch steam and liquid strainers. Provide 1/8 inch mesh perforations for 4 inches and larger liquid strainers. Provide 1/16 inch mesh perforations for 4 inches and larger steam strainers. BThreaded Ends, 2 inch and Smaller: Bronze or Cast-iron body, screwed screen retainer with centered blowdown fitted with pipe plug. �NPING SPECIALTIES — 05/01/2015 230518-3 i C. 'Threaded Ends, 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: Cast-iron body, bolted screen retainer with off -center blowdown fitted with pipe plug. D, Flanged Ends, 2-112 inches and Larger: Cast-iron body, bolted screen retainer with off -center blowdown fitted with pipe; plug, w Butt Welded Ends, 2.1/2 inches and Larger: Schedule 40 cast carbon steel body, bolted screen retainer with off -center blowdown fitted with pipe plug. P, Grooved Ends, 2-112 inches and Larger: 'Tee pattern, ductile -iron or malleable -iron body and access end cap, access couplingwith EDPM gasket. 2,5 DIELECTRIC WATERWAY: A. General: Zinc electroplated nipple with non metallic lining for use in service indicated, which effectively Isolate ferrous from non-ferrous piping (electrical conductance), prevent galvanic action, and stop corrosion. Union style not acceptable. 2,6 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS: insulation,X GeneralModular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between pipe and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates which cause rubber seating elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seat and electrical manufactured by or equal. B. Sleeve Seats: Provide sleeve seals for sleeves located in foundation walls below grade, or in exterior walls, of ... of the following: InstalledI . Mechanical Sleeve Seals: between sleeve and!p 2.7 FABRICATED PIPING SPECIALTIES: # 4. Sleeves for use with firestoplaing shall be fabricated in accordance with the installation instructions of the firetopping system. PIPING SPECIALTIES — 05/01/2015 230518-4 r Mg. 3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES: A. Pipe Escutcheons: Install pipe escutcheons on each pipe penetration thru floors, walls, partitions, and ceilings where penetration is exposed to view; and on exterior of building. Secure escutcheon to -pipe or insulation so escutcheon covers penetration hole, and is flu with adjoining surface. I B. Strainers: Install strainers full size'of pipeline, in accordance with manufacturees installatioi instructions. Install pipe nipple and shutWfull port ball valve with Y4 inch hose end and cap strainer blow down connection. Where indicated, provide drain line from shutoff valve to plumbing drain, full size of blow down connection. 1. Provide strainers in supply line ahead of the following equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. a. Temperature or pressure regulating valves b. Control valves C. Dielectric piping joint between# and non-ferrous piping. bronzeComply with manufacturer's installation instructions, I Not required in closed hydronic'systems treated with corrosion inhibitors, where there body between DMechanical Sleeve Seats: Loosely assemble rubber links around pipe with bolts and pressull plates located under each bolt head and nut. Push into sleeve and center, Tighten bolts un links have expandedto form watertight SPECIALTIES3.2 HYDRONIC 1 c 33 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED PIPING SPECIALTIES, A. Drip Pans: Locate drip paras under piping as indicated. Nang from structure with rods and building attachments, weld rods to sides of drip pang Brace to prevent sagging or swaying. Connect V drain live to drain connection, and run to nearest plumbing drain or elsewhere as indicated. PIPING SPECIALTIES — 05101/2015 230518-5 !I innirl 5. For care drilled solid concrete or precast concrete with blockouts, no sleeve is required, except provide sheet metal "collar" fastened and caulked to floors required to have extended sleeves. C. See Section 23 Cis 43 for acoustical sleeve requirements; END OF SECTION 23 051 PIPING SPECIALTIES -- 05/01/2015 230518-6 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 SECTION 23 0519 - METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A: Extent of meters and gauges required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or specified in other Division -23 sections. B. Types of meters and gauges specified in this section include the following: 1. Temperature Gauges and Fittings: a. Dial Type Insertion Thermometers. b, Thermometer Wells. c. Temperature Gauge Connector Plugs. 2. Pressure Gauges and Fittings'. a. Pressure Gauges. b. Pressure Gauge Cocks. C. Pressure Gauge Connector Plugs. 3, Flow Measuring Meters: a. Venturi Tube Flow Measuring Elements. b, Calibrated Balance Valves. c. Portable Flow Meter Read-out Kits. C. Meters and gauges furnished as part of factory -fabricated equipment, are specified as part of equipment assembly in other Division -23 sections. A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of meters and gauges, of types and sizes required, • products have been in satisfactory use in similar service • not less than 5 years. I UL Compliance: Comply with applicable UL standards pertaining to meters and gauges. 2 • and ISA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of ANSI and Instrument Society of America (ISA) standards pertaining to construction and installation of meters and gauges. CCertification: Provide meters and gauges whose accuracies, under specified operating conditions, are certified by manufacturer. ORNNMMRT's y A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation instructions for each type of meter and gauge. Include scale range, ratings, and calibrated performance METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING -- 05/01/2015 230519-1 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 curves, certified where indicated. Submit meter and gauge schedule showing manufacturers figure number, scale range, location, and accessories for each meter and gauge, B. All flow measuring devices to be provided shall be reviewed and approved by the test & balance contractor and the temperature control contractor for proper scale, rangeability and function prior to submitting shop drawings, The test & balance contractor and temperature control contractor shall provide a typed letter stating this review has been completed and included with shop drawing submittals. C, Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of meter and gauge. Include this data and product data in Maintenance Manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 23. PART 2 -PRODUCTS A, Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Marsh Instrument Co.; Unit of General Signal. b. Taylor Instrument Co. C. Trance (H.0) Co. d. Weiss Instruments, Inc. Z Temperature Gauge Connector Plugs: a. Fairfax Company b. Peterson Equipment Co. C. Universal Lancaster rl. Sisco a, MG Piping Products Co. 3. Pressure Gauges: a. Ametek/U.S. Gauge, b. Marsh Instrument Co.; Unit of General Signal, C, Marshalltown Instruments, Inc. d. Trerice (H.O.) Co. e. Weiss Instruments, Inc. f. MG Piping Products Co. g. Versa Gauge 4. Pressure Gauge Connector Plugs: a. Fairfax Company b. Peterson Equipment Co. c. Universal Lancaster d. Sisco e. MG Piping Products Co. METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING — 06/01/2015 230519-2 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 & Venturi Tube Flow Measuring Elements: a. Gerand b. Barco/Aeroquip Corp. C. Presso d. Flow Design Inc. & Calibrated Balancing Valves (Valve and Venturi Type): a. Flow Design Inc. b. Presso C. Gerand "Balvalve Indicator d. Nexus Valve e. Griswold 2.2 DIAL TYPE INSERTION THERMOMETERS: X General: Provide dial type insertion thermometers of materials, capacities, and ranges indicated, designed and constructed for use in service indicated. B. Type: Bi -metal, stainless steel case and stem, I inch diameter dial, dust and leak proof, 1/8 inch diameter stem with nominal length of 5 inch. C. Accuracy: 0,5 percent of dial range. DRange: Conform to the following: 1. Hot Water: 0 degrees - 220 degrees F (-10 degrees - 110 degrees C). 2. Chilled Water: 25 degrees - 125 degrees (-10 degrees -110 degrees C). 23 THERMOMETER WELLS: X General: Provide thermometer wells constructed of brass or stainless steel, pressure rated to match piping system design pressure. Provide 2 inch extension for insulated piping, Provide cap nut with chain fastened permanently to thermometer well. 2A TEMPERATURE GAUGE CONNECTOR PLUGS: A. General: Provide temperature gauge connector plugs pressure rated for 500 psi and 200 degrees F (93 degrees C), Construct of brass and finish in nickel -plate, equip with 1/2inch NPS fitting, with self-sealing valve core type neoprene gasketed orifice suitable for inserting 1/8 inch O.D. probe assembly from dial type insertion thertnometer. Equip orifice with gasketed screw cap and chain. Provide extension, length equal to insulation thickness, for insulated piping. & General: Provide pressure gauges of materials, capacities, and ranges indicated, designed and constructed for use in service indicated. & Type: General use, I percent accuracy, ANSI B40.1 grade A, phospher bronze bourdon type, bottom connection. C. Case: Drawn steel or brass, glass lens, 4-1/2inch diameter. D. Connector. it with 1/4inch male NPT. Provide protective syphon when used for steam service. EScale: White coated aluminum, with permanently etched markings. METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING — 05/01/2015 230519-3 FRange: Conform to the following: 1. Vacuum: 30 inches Hg - 15 psi. 2. Water: 0 - 100 psi. 3. Steam: 0 - 200 psi. 2,6 PRESSURE GAUGE COCKS: A. General: Provide pressure gauge cooks between pressure gauges and gauge tees on piping systems, Gauge cock shall be Y4 inch female NPT on each end ball valve as specified in Section 23 05 23 - Valves. B. Syphon:1/4 inch straight coil constructed of brass tubing with %inch male NPT on each end. C. Snubber: '/4 inch brass bushing with corrosion resistant porous metal disc, through which pressure fluid is filtered. Select disc material for fluid served and pressure rating. 2.7 VENTURI TUBE FLOW MEASURING ELEMENTS: CProvide taps with Schraeder or Hanson type fiffings. Provide tap extensions to accommodate insulation. D. Manufacturer shall certify ventud tubes for actual piping configuration, Any necessary piping changes required for certification shall be provided without cost to Owner. Insert type tubes may be furnished, provided they meet specification requirements in other respects. E. Provide venturi with throat diameter such that specified rate of flow will register scale reading of between 20 percent and 80 percent of full scale value. F. Venturi sizes and beta ratios shall be selected so that design flow rates shalf'read between 20 percent and the full scale range on a linear meter (e,g. between 10inches and 50 inches on a 0-50 inches meter), with permanent pressure loss of not more than -25 percent of indicated flow rate differential pressure. G. Provide venturi tubes of solid brass or bronze. Tubes larger than 2 inches shall have flanges or butt weld connections and may be cast iron or steel. Steel tubes may be fabricated or cast with cadmium or zinc -plating. Line throats of cast iron tubes with bronze and plate cast iron portion with cadmium. H. Tubes shall be calibrated and tested by independent testing laboratory and performance data furnished with shop drawings. METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING — 05/01/2015 230519-4 a N .e ♦ 1 s iso • • • •� .se ^^s •s •• � ♦ ♦- a -.♦ e � # • � • • • - • ! • •-.�• -•' 11 s a 1 s • • • � DJ Engineer and manufacture in accordance with ASME recommendations for flowmeters. Provide portable meters with overall accuracy of + S percent. E. Provide flow meter with factory -fabricated carrying case with integral carrying handle. Case shall be fitted to hold meter and following accessories. 1. Two 10 feet lengths of connecting hose with suitable female connectors for connecting to venturi tube pressure tap nipples. Design hose for operating pressure of minimum of 150 percent of maximum system operating pressure. 2. Completely assembled 3 -value manifold with 2 block valves and vent and drain valves shall be piped and mounted on base, which shall be designed for use laying flat on stationary base. 3. Bound set of descriptive bulletins, installation and operating instructions, parts list, and set of curves showing flow verses pressure differential for each orifice or venturi tube with which meter is to be used. 4. Metal instruction plate, secured inside cover, illustrating use of ureter. Deliver meter with ease to Owner. PART 3;- EXECUTION .1 INSPECTION: A. Examine areas and conditions under which meters and gauges are to be installed. Do not proceed with, work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF THERMOMETERS: A. General: Install thermometers in vertical upright position, and tilted so as to be easily read by observer standing on floor. B. Locations: Install in the following locations, and elsewhere as indicated: 1 At inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air handling units, and built-up central systems, 2. At inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat exchanger. 3. In discharge duct or plenum of air handling units and built-up central systems. C, Thermometer Wells'. Install in piping tee where indicated, in vertical upright position, Fill well with oil or graphite, secure cap. D. Temperature Gauge Connector Plugs.- Install in piping tee where indicated, located on pipe al most readable position. Secure cap. Provide portable temperature gauge for each plug connection. 3.3 A. B. C, D. 3,4 B. 99 13 Is General: Install pressure gauges in piping tee with pressure gauge cock, located on pipe at most readable position. Locations: Install in the following locations, and elsewhere as indicated: 1. At suction and discharge of each pump. 2, At discharge of each pressure reducing valve. Pressure Gauge Cocks: Install in piping tee with snubber. Install syphon for steam pressure gauges. Pressure Gauge Connector Plugs: Install in piping tee where indicated, located on pipe at most readable position. Secure cap. Provide portable pressure gauge for each plug connection. INSTALLATION OF FLOW MEASURING METERS. - General: Install flow measuring meters on piping systems located in accessible locations at most readable position. Locations: Install in the following locations, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. At discharge of each pump. Z At inlet of each hydronic coil. Wafer -Type Flow Meters: Install between 2 Class 125 pipe flanges, ANSI B16.1 (cast-iron) or ANSI B16.24 (cast- bronze). Provide minimum straight lengths of pipe upstream and downstream from meter in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. DCalibrated Balance Valves: Install on piping with readout valves in vertical upright positi Maintain minimum length of straight unrestricted piping equivalent to 3 pipe diameters upstream of valve, I FIRE !111 1111111 !111 1 1 yj B. CleanI Clean windows of meters and gauges and factory- finished surfaces. Repla cracked or broken windows, repair any scratched or marred surfaces with manufacture touch-up paint, I END OF SECTION 23 0519 SECTION 23 0523 — GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING PARI" 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. This Section includes general duty valves common to most mechanical piping systems. B. Valves tags and charts are specified in Division 23 Section "Mechanical Identification," 1.2 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Including body material, valve design, pressure and temperature classification, end connection details, seating materials, trim material and arrangement, dimensions and required clearances, and installation instructions. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Single Source Responsibility: Comply with the requirements specified in Division -23 Section "Basic Mechanical Requirements," under "Product Options," B. MSS Standard Practices: Comply with the following standards for valves: 1. Mas SP -45. Bypass and Drain Connection Standard . MSS SP -67. Butterfly Valves 3. MSS SP -70: Cast Iron Cate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends 4. MSS SP -71: Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends 5. MSS P-72: Ball Valves with Flanged or Butt -Welding Ends for General Service 6. MSS P-78: Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends 7. MSS SP -80: Bronze Cate, Globe Angle and Check Valves 8, MSS P-84: Steel Valves - Socket Welding and Threaded Ends g, MSS SP -85: Cast Iron Globe and Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends % MSS SP -92: MSS Valve User Guide Solenoid valves shall be UL listed, FM i AGA t ANSI and CSA approved. D. NSF Standard 61: Drinking Water System Components. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1. Ensure valves are dry and internally protected against rusting and galvanic corrosion. 2. Protect valve ends against mechanical damage to threads, flange faces and weld end preps. 1 Set valves in best position for handling. Globe and gate valves shall be closed to prevent rattling; ball and plug valves shall be open to minimize exposure of functional butterfly valves shall be shipped closed or ! !!^ and swing check valves shall be blocked ! -! or open position. GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING — 05/01/201 23 0523 -1 LMC, Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 1 Valves shall be stored and protected against all dirt, debris and foreign material at all times. 2. Do not remove valve end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage. 1 Protect valves against weather. Where practical, store valves indoors, Maintain valve temperature higher than the ambient dew point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, support valves off the ground or pavement and protect in watertight enclosures. CHandling: Valves whose size requires handling by crane or lift shall be slung or rigged to avoid damage to exposed valve parts. Handwheels and stems, in particular, shall not be used as lifting or rigging points. 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers listed. 1. Gate Valves: a, Stockharn b. Grinnell Corp. C. Hammond d. Nibco e. Milwaukee 2. Ball Valves: a, Apollo b. Milwaukee c. Nibco d, Wafts 3, Eccentric Plug Valves: a, Keystonefryco b. DeZurik c. Milliken d. Homestead 4. Globe Valves: a. Anvil b. Hammond C. Nibco d. Milwaukee 5. Butterfly Valves: a. Keystone/Tyco b. DeZurik GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING — 05/01/2015 230623-2 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Pyne Equipment Replacement 177307 c. Nibco d. Bray e. ASZ f. Milwaukee 6. Swing Cheek Valves a. Apollo b. Anvil C. Nibco . Watts (screwed) 7. Non -Slam Check Valves: a. Keystone b. Metraflex C, Nibco d. Val -Matic e. Milwaukee Lift Check Valves: a. Apollo b. Metraflex C. Milwaukee d. Nibco 9. Solenoid Valves: a. Asco b. General Controls c, Skinner 2,2 VALVE FEATURES: X General: Comply with MSS -92 •0 "Valve Users Manual". B. Valve Design: Valves shall have rising stern, or rising stem outside screw and yoke design; except, non -rising stem valves may be used where headroom prevents full operation of rising stem valves. C. Sizes: Unless otherwise indicated,,provide valves of same size as upstream pipe size. (Control valves shall be sized for required flow.) D. Operators: Provide the following special operator features: 1. Handwheels,; fastened to valve sterni for valves other than quarter turn. 2. Lever handle on quarter turn valves 6 inch and smaller, except plug valves. provide a wrench for every plug ;valve. ; , Chainwheel operators for valves 2-112 inch and larger that are installed 96 inches or higher above finished door elevation. Provide chains to an elevation of 6'-0" above finished floor elevation. GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING -- 05/01/2015 230523-3 LMC: Cath Lab ##2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 4. Warm gear operators of an enclosed weather-proof design shall be provided on all quarter turn valves 8 Inches and larger. E. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems to allow full operation of the valve without interference by the insulation, F, Bypass and [gain Connections. Comply with MSS P-4.. G. End Connections. As specified in the individual valves specifications. 1. Threads: Comply with ANSI 82.1. 2. Flanges; Comply with ANSI B16.1 for cast iron, ANSI B16.5 for steel, and ANSI B16.24 for bronze. , Solder -Joint: Comply with ANSI B16,18. a. Caution: Where soldered end connections are used, use solder having a melting point below 840 OF for gate, globe, and check valves and below 421 OF for ball valves, 23 GATE VALVES: A. Gate Valves — 2 inches t :0 Class 150 Class 200/300, body and bonnet of cast bronze ASTM B62 for 150# / B61 for 200/300, threaded ends, Solid wedge disc, union bonnet, rising stem, bronze gland, TFE impregnated packing, malleable iron handwheel. Provide stainlesson • class 200/300 gate valves, Stockham Fig.t B. Gate Valves - 2-1/2 inches # +- ! iron #at conforming to ASTM A126 C1 B, Bronze trim, 0 S & Y design, Flanged ends, TFE impregnated packing, Provide stainless steel seats on all steam service valves and class 250 gate valves. LMC: Cath Lab Bi -Plane Equipment • stainless steel bail and stem, Carbon and graphite reinforced PTFE blowout proof stern, vinyl covered steel handle. Threaded ends. Apollo 70-140-4.. D. Sall valve options/accessories: Provide the following as required or as specifically indicated: 1. Tee handle for tight fit applications (within enclosures, etc.). Locking handle. 3. grain. 4. Stem extension. . Mounting pails. 2.5 BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING SYSTEMS. a � � it w.« . t•. # « .. #: ". •. # #" * • # i .. «'# `.# # «. #'* ... • «.."".♦ « u # 1. Stockham Fig. 13-20/13-74 D. Steam Systems (2-1/2 inches and larger), MSS SP -85, Class 125/250, cast iron body ASTM A-126, Class B, bolted bonnet bronze mounted, rising stem bronze disc 4seat,Mnon- asbestos 2.6 ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVES: A. 2 inches and Smaller: 125 psi, cast iron body, straightway pattern, EPI' M or C11R Encapsulated Eccentric plug, tight shut-off seals, square head, threaded ends. Provide memory stop feature. lezurik PEC & -1/2 inches and Larger Sues: 125 psi, cast iron body, straightway pattern, EPDM or C11R Encapsulated Eccentric plug, lever actuators, except handwheels where indicated, and flanged ends. Provide memory stop feature. ?ezurik PEC GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 05/01/2015 230523-5 t 2,7 GLOBE VALVES: A. Plumbing Systems (2-1/2 inches and smaller): MSS SP -66 Class 150, body, bonnet and bonnet ring, cast bronze ASTM B-62, Teflon disc, copper -silicon bronze stem, non -asbestos teflon impregnated stem packing, union bonnet and malleable Iron handle. Stockharn Pig. B-22/13'24 B. Stearn Systems (2 inches and Smaller): MSS P-66, Class 150/300 body, bonnet, bonnet ring cast bronze ASTM B-62 Type 420, stainless steel disc and seat ring, unman bonnet, non asbestos teflon impregnated stem packing, copper -silicon bronze stem, brass packing gland and malleable iron handle. # : # f f , ' ! • :i i ii ii B. Swing Check Valves - 2-1/2 to 3 Inch: MSS SP -71; Class 125 /250 (Class 176 FM approved rotection piping systems), cast iron body and bolted cap conforming to ASTM A 126, horizontal swing, With a bronze disc or cast iron disc with bronze disc ring, and flanged ends� Valve shall be capable of being refitted While the valve remains in the line. For sewage ejector and sump pump discharge swing check valves 2-1/2 inches and larger, provide outside lever with weight or spring to assist disc to close rapidly. 2.10 DRAIN VALVES. A. For Hydronic and Plumbing Systems: Provide ball valve with threaded hose end and cap with chain. Apollo Fig.. 73-165-01 GENERAL. DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING — 05/01/2015 230523-6 LMC: Cath Late ##2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.3017 PART 3 - EXECUTION .1 EXAMINATION: jInstall ..instructions. B. Examine valve interior through the end ports, for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter • corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks used which prevents disc movement during shipping and handling. CActuate valve through an open-pbse a� close -open cycle, Examine functionally significant features, such as guides and seats made accessible by such actuation. Following examination, return the valve cloture rfi6tnber to the position in which it was shipped, D. Examine threads on both the valve and the mating pipe for form (out -of -round or local_ indentation) and cleanliness. E. Examine mating flange fads for conditions which might cause leakage," Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Check gasket material for proper size and material, and for freedom from defects and damage. F. Prior to valve installation" examine the piping for cleanliness, freedom from foreign materials and proper alignment. 3.2 VALVE SELECTION: A. Selection of Valve Ends (Pipe Connections); Except as otherwise indicated, select valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections. 1. Copper Tube Size 2 Inch and Smaller: Solder ends„ except in heating hot water and low pressure steam service which shall have threaded ends 2. Steel Pipe Sizes 2 Inch and Smaller: Threaded or grooved -end. 3. Steel Pipe Sizes 2112 Inch and Larger: Flanged or grooved end. 4. At all piping hot taps provide a ball valve with the hot tap and a ball valve or butterfly valve for shut-off service. Piot taps shall be provided only where approved by the Engineer, 3.3 VALVE INSTALLATIONS: Valve Application Table (Where sizes overlap, contractor has choice of either type) SERVICE VALVE TYPE Plumbing Water Services; " or smaller Ball Valve Plumbing Water Services; 2-112" and larger Butterfly Valves Plumbing Pressure Reducing Bypass; all sizes Globe Valve GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING — 05/01/2015 230523-7 LMC: Cath Lab #2 —Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 « • ! i • it ... #:, 'i • "' t' ! ti # «.. • • i #N i i' i #i t GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING — 0510112015 230523-8 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 3A SOLDER CONNECTIONS: X Cut tube square and to exact lengths. B. Clean end of tube to depth of valve socket, using steel wool, sand cloth, or a steel wire brush to a bright finish. Clean valve socket in same manner, C. Apply proper soldering flux in an even coat to inside of valve socket and outside of tube. DOpen gate and globe valves to fully open position. E. Remove the cap and disc holder of swing check valves with composition discs, F. Insert tube into valve socket making sure the end rests against the shoulder inside valve. Rotate tube or valve slightly to insure even distribution of the flux. G. Apply heat evenly to outside of valve around joint until solder will melt upon contact. Feed solder until it completely fills the joint around tube. Avoid hot spots or overheating the valve. • the solder starts cooling, remove excess amounts around the joint with a cloth or brushi X Protect valves from temperatures which exceed the valve material temperature limitations as recommended by the valve manufacturer. B. Disassemble 3 piece ball valves prior to brazing. 16 THREADED CONNECTIONS: rv� 11 = AM11 Los mal at =-pL'7y! 0 111 Ltayr, I LT' I ii ; ; or4 IQ a It I It r-1 a 101ya r-.1 a! I I 1 -11 1111, F 1 � INIFFN B. Align threads at point of assembly, C. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads (except where dry seat threading is specified). DAssemble joint wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the pipe is being threaded. 3.7 FLANGED CONNECTIONS: X Align flanges surfaces parallel. B. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly using a torque wrench. 18 BUTTERFLY VALVE MOTORIZED ACTUATORS. - A. Coordinate with the control system installer to set up all end switches, pilot valves, and control panels. B. Provide electric valve actuator power in accordance with Division 26. GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING — 05/01/2015 230523-9 LAIC. Cath Lab ##2 -- Si -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 C. Locate pilot positioners and valve position indicators so that they will be visible from the flour or roof surface, without the need of a ladder or climbing over equipment and piping. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Testing: After piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before final adjusting and balancing, inspect each valve for leaks. Adjust or replace packing to stop leaks, replace valve if leak persists. 310 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:. X Cleaning: Clean mill scale, grease, and protective coatings from exterior of valves and prepare to receive finish painting or insulation. END OF SECTION 23 0523 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING - 0510112015 23 0523 -10 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement1 PART 1 - GENERAL 11 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of supports and anchors, of types and sizes rewired, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B, Codes and Standards: I Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable plumbing codes pertaining to product materials and installation of supports and anchors. 2. NFPA Compliance: Hangers and supports shall comply with NFPA standard No. 13 when used as a componentof e. fire protection « ,,. y Standard when used as a component of a standpipe system. NFPA 99 shall be used for medical gas systems. and FM Compliance:Hangers,a•a and components shall be listed and labeled by UL and FM where used for fire protection piping systems. 4. Duct Hangers: SMACNA Duct Manuals . MSS Standard Compliance: a. Provide pipe hangers and supports of which materials, design, and manufacture comply with MSS P-69. 1.2 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation instructions for each type of support and anchor. Submit pipe hanger and support schedule showing Manufacturer's figure number, size, location, and features for each required pipe hanger and support. B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly -type shop drawings for each type of support and anchor, indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components. C. Product certificates signed by the manufacturer of hangers and supports certifying that their products meet the specified requirements. D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of support and anchor. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual: in accordance with requirements of Division 23. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following r 1. Pipe Hangers . f.f a. B -Line Systems Inc. b. ANVIL International C. PND Manufacturing, Inc. d. Unistrut Metal Framing Systems e. Hubbard Enterprises (Supports for domestic water piping) f. Specialty Products Co. (Supports for domestic water piping. g. Erica h. Grinnell 2. Saddles, Shield and Thermal Shield Inserts: a. ANVIL International b. Pipe Shields, Inc. C. B -Line d. Snapp Itz e. Erica f. Value Engineered Products, Inc. g.. Grinnell , Roof Equipment Supports: a. Custom Curb, Inc. b. Pate Co. c. Thycurb Div.; Thybar Corp d, Vent Products, Inc. 4. Concrete Inserts and Anchors; a. Uistrut Metal Framing Systems b, Power -Strut C. ITW amset/Red Head d. Hilti e. B -Line f. Erica g. Grinnell 2.2 PIPE HANGERS & SUPPORTS: A. Hangers and support components shall be factory fabricated of materials, design, and manufacturer complying with MSS,SP-% "I. Components shall have galvanized coatings where installed for piping and equipment that will not have field -applied finish. . Pipe attachments shall have nonmetallic coating for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. it A4 r•.:. f*.. 2. Non -insulated Copper • f` A fe ate 3. Cast Iron Pipe, r.*,. e r Type 1. LMC: Cath Lata X12 -- Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 C. Adjustable Swivel Ring for Non -insulated Pipe: MSS Type , 1. Steel Pipe, size 112" thru 8", Type 7. . Copper Pipe, size 112" thru 4", Type 7 (PVC Coated) D} Pipe Clamps= MSS Type 1. Steel Pipe, size 314" thru 4", Type 8. 2. Copper Pipe; size 1/2" thru 4", Type 8 (PVC Coated). E. U Salts: MSS Type. 1. Steel Pipe, size 112" thru 30"" Type 24 2. Copper Pipe, size 912" thru 8", Type 24 (PVC Coated). F. Straps: MSS Type 26. C. Pipe Stanchion Saddle: MSS Type 37. H. Yoke ,& Roller Hanger: MSS Type 43 1. Hanger Reads: Continuous threaded steel, sizes as specified. J. Hangers. 1. Hot Pipes: as 112" through 1-112", Adjustable wrought steel ring. b. 2" through 5": Adjustable wrought steel clevs. c. 6" and Over: Adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll. 2. Cold Pipes: throughAdjustable wrought Adjustable wrought WIN W117 1WHOW, Wo, 106111 L. Supports for Vertical Pipe. ; Steel riser clamp. Type 8. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPINGS AND EQUIPMENT - 0510112015 230529-3 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177307 K Upper Attachments: I For attaching hanger rods to structural steel 1 -beams: a. Provide adjustable beam clamp, MSS -Type 21. Attach to bottom flange of beam. Z For attaching hanger rods to bar joists'. a. When bottom chord is constructed of structural steel angles, provide square washer. Place hanger rod between backs of the two angles and support with the washer and dual locking nuts on top of the angles, Spot weld washer to angles. b. When bottom chord is constructed of round bars, provide Eicen No. 137 bar joint washer or equal. A, Inserts: Case shall be of galvanized carbon steel with square threaded concrete insert nut for hanger rod connection; top lugs for reinforcing rods, nail holes for attaching to forms. This type of upper attachment is to be used for all areas having poured in place concrete construction. 1. Size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods. BProvide fasteners attached to concrete ceilings that are vibration and shock resistant. Provide hangers for piping attached to concrete construction with one of the following types. 1. Concrete insert per MSS SP 69, Type 18. 2. Powder driven fasteners subject to approval of Architect and Structural Engineer. Each fastener shall be capable of holding a test load of 1000 pounds whereas the actual load shall not exceed 50 pounds. 1 Self -drilling expansion shields. The load applied shall not exceed one-fourth the proof test load required, 4, Machine bolt expansion anchor. The load applied shall not exceed one-fourth the proof test load required, C. Anchors: Carbon steel, zinc plated and coated with a clear chromate finish. Installation shall be in holes drilled with carbide -tipped drill bits or by use of self -drilling anchors. I Provide anchors suitable for the location of installation and designed to withstand all forces and movements acting in the anchor. Manufacture pipe anchors in accordance with MSS SP 69. Provide a safety factor of four for the anchor installation. 2.4 SADDLES AND THERMAL SHIELD INSERTS: X Protection Saddles: MSS Type 39; fill interior voids with segments of insulation matching adjoining insulation. BProtection Shields: MSS Type 40; 180 degrees arc, galvanized steel, minimum 12 inches long, to prevent crushing of insulation. C, Thermal Shield Inserts: Provide 100 -psi minimum compressive strength, waterproof, asbestos .. calcium- encased with a sheet metal enclosure. Insert M shield shall cover the entire circumference or the bottom half circumference of the pipe as required by Part 3 of this Specification, and shall be of length recommended by the manufacturer for pipe size and thickness of insulation.For # # piping, • beyond shield to allow overlap of the vapor barrierWhere piping 4 inches and larger is supported on trapeze or pipe rollers, provide double thickness shields. For piping 12 inches and over, provide 600 psi calcium silicate structural insert. Z5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIAL& A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars* ASTM A 36. Cement Grout; Portland cement (ASTM C 150, Type I or Type fit) and clean uniformly graded, natural sand (ASTM C 404, Size No. ). Mix ratio shall be 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts sand, by volume, with minimum amount of water required for placement and hydration. C. Heavy -Duty steel Trapezes: Fabricate from steel shapes selected for loads required, weld steel in accordance with AWS standards. Dripe Alignment Guides: Provide factory -fabricated guides, of cast semi -steel or heavy fabricated steel, consisting of bolted two -section outer cylinder and base with two -section guiding spider bolted tight to pipe. size guide and spiders to clear pipe and insulation (if any), and cylinder. Provide guides of length recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel.. PART 3 _ EXECUTION 3.1 INSP CTION: A. Examine areas and conditions under which supports and anchors are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. .2 PREPARATION- LMC-. Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane EquipmentReplacement to farms. Where concrete with compressive strength less than 2500 psi is indicated, install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. S. New Construction: 1. Use inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concretebeams wherever practicable. 2Set inserts in position in advance oiwork.Provide ,.. ,, in concrete for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches or ducts over 60 inches wide. •+.. # iii « ! "" i« ii C. Support fire -water piping independently from other piping systems. D� Prevent electrolysis and abrasion in support of copper tubing by use of hangers and supports which are plastic coated, or with l PDM isolation strips. Duct tape or copper coated hangers are not acceptable. F. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bonds and similar units and within 1"-0" of each horizontal elbow. F. Load Distribution:' Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. G, pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes, and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ANSI 531,9 Building Services Piping Code is not exceeded. SMC: Cath Lab ##2 — Bi -Mane Equipment Replacement 177.307 H. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements, I. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any); to piping with clamps projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ANSI B31. 2. Saddles: Install Protection saddles where supported by pipe rollers. Fill interior voids with segments of « adjoining ««. insulation. 3. Shields. Install galvanized steel protection shields, on all insulated piping 2 inches and less, -except where required to be clamped. Where necessary to prevent dislocation, strap shield to pipe With wire ties or "Zip Strips", 4. Thermal Inserts: Provide thermal shield inserts at all supports for all insulated piping over 2 inches « for all piping „« .« to be «-• Provide 180 percent inserts at clevis • roller hangers.Provide 360 percent inserts for- r-• supports. 1. Install horizontal hydronic and steam piping with the following minimum rod sizes and maximum spacing: SIZE (NPS) MAX, SPAN IN FEET MIN. ROD SIZE -INCHES Steel Copper 1 7 6 318 1.112 g 8 318 10 8 318 3 12 10 _ , 1/2 4 14 12 518 J. Install medical gas piping hangers with the following maximum spacing, 1, 112" Pipe Size. i" O.C. 2, 314" Pipe Size: ' t3.C., 1" pipe size. 8' 3. 1-114" or Larger Pipe Size: ' O.C. 4. 1-112" and larger; 10' . Vertical Piping: Every floor level: K, Support horizontal cast iron pipe as follows; 1. Hub & Spigot: All sizes. "a. 10 ft. max spacing. min of one (1) hanger per pipe section close to joint on the barrel. Also at change of direction and branch connections. b. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each story height and at its base. Secure vertical hub and spigot pipe immediately below the hub, c. Use hanger rods same size as for steel pipe. HANGERS ANIS SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT - 05/01/2015 230529-7 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177307 2, No -Hub: All sizes a. With Clamp -All and Anaheim Series 4000 stainless steel couplings and MG cast iron couplings: one hanger to each joint. b, With all other stainless steel band type couplings: one hanger to each side of joint. cSupport all horizontal cast iron pipe within 18 inches of each joint and with 5 feet maximum spacing between hangers, except that pipe exceeding 5 feet in length shall be supported at intervals no greater than 10 feet. d. Use hanger rods same size as for steel pipe. e. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each story height and at its base. Support vertical no -hub pipe so that the weight is carried from the pipe to the support and not from the joint to the support. L. Place a hanger within one foot of each horizontal elbow. M. Use hangers which are vertically adjustable 1-1/2 inch minimum after piping is erected. N. Support vertical steel and copper piping at every story height but at not more than 15 foot intervals for steel and 10 feet for copper. 0. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide trapeze hangers. P. Where practical, support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. Q. Support steam supply and condensate return pipe runs on adjustable roller hangers. R. Each pipe drop to equipment shall be adequately supported. All supporting lugs or guides shall be securely anchored to the building structure. S. Securely anchor and support plumbing domestic water piping in chases or walls. Use factory manufactured clamps and brackets connected to fixture s, waste/vent piping or brackets connected to studs. Wires or straps will not be permitted. I When copper supplies are connected to flush valves, support the tubing by the studs or by a fixture, not by clamping to waste/vent piping. 2. Prevent copper tubes from making contact with steel brackets using fire retardant polyethylene inserts or other dielectric insulating material. Duct tape shall not be used. T. Install anchors and fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and the following: I . In the event a self-dfliling expansion shield or machine bolt expansion shield is considered to have been installed improperly, the Contractor shall make an acceptable replacement or demonstrate the stability of the anchor by pe6eming an on-site test under which the anchor will be subjected to a load equaf to, twice the actual load. 2. Powder -driven fasteners may be used only where they will be concealed after the construction is complete. Where an occasional fastener appears to be improperly HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT - 05/01/2015 230529-8 # • !"' #.# *# #« • #. ^` 111E •• 3,5 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS: B. Fabricate! install anchorby welding steel shapes,plates ". ! bars to piping « • to ComplyANSI B31.9 # with AWS Standards C. Where expansion compensators�are indicated, install anchors in accordance with expansion unit manufacturers written instructions, to control movement to compensators. D. Anchor Spacings: W* ,. not otherwise indicated, install anchorsat ends of principal pipe -runs, at intermediate points in pipe -runs between expansion loops and bends. Make provisions for preset of anchors as required to accommodate #...##+:. !# expansionand contraction of piping. Provide shop drawing for review by Engineer. A. Provide in accordance with SMACNA HVAC duct construction standards. B. Additional Hanger Requirements: 1. 2" to 4" from flexible connections of fans. . " to 24" from the outlets or flexible connections of VAV control units or mixing boxes. 3. 12" to 36" from the main duct to the first hanger of long branch ducts. 4. 2" to 12" from the ends of all branch ducts and linear diffuser plenums. 5. 2" to 4" from fire damper break -away joints. 6. Handers at throat and heal of round or square elbows 48" or greater in width. 3.7 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS: A. Fabricate structural steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or support equipment above floor. B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for piping and equipment. Concrete bases for the mechanical equipment indoors or outdoors will be provided by the General Contractor only if shown on the architectural or structural drawings. Otherwise, all bases shall be provided by this Contractor. LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment -• 177307 L Provide rigid anchors for ducts and pipes immediately after vibration connections to equipment. See also Section 23 05 48. 18 METAL FABRICATION: A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for pipe anchors and equipment supports. Install and align fabricated anchors in indicated locations. B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D 1.1 for procedures of manual shielded metal -arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, methods used in correcting welding work, and the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3, Remove welding flux immediately. 4, Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours at welded surfaces match adjacent contours, 3,9 ADJUSTING: A, Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. Cut off the bottom of threaded rods so they are no more than one rod diameter below the bottom nut. B. Touch -Up Painting: Immediately after erection of anchors and supports, clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA-1 requirements for touch-up of field -painted surfaces. I . Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT - 05101/2015 230529-10 LMC: Cath Lab # — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 C. For galvanized surfaces clean welds bolted connections and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A 7W END OF SECTION 23 0529 HANGERS ACV ► SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT - 05/01/2015 230529-11 SECTION 23 0540 - VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING & EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL X Extent of vibration control work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and/or specified in other Division -23 sections. ii 151 IWIT I I !III III I __ . 1 . Fiberglass Pads and Shapes. Z Neoprene Pads. 3. Vibration Isolation Springs, 4. All -Directional Anchors. 5, Neoprene Mountings. T� Spring Isolators, Free -Standing. 7. Spring Isolators, Vertically -Restrained. ,V. Seismic Snubbers, S. EquipMei ment Rails. W Fabricated Equipment Bases. 11Isolation Hangers, 12, Riser Isolators. 13. Flexible Pipe Connectors. D, Refer to other Division 23 sections for equipment foundations; hangers; sealants; gaskets; requirements of electrical connections to equipment isolated on vibration control products; requirements of duct connections to air handling equipment isolated on vibration control products. X Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of vibration control products, of type, size, and capacity required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. 1Except as otherwise indicated, obtain vibration control products from single manufacturer. 2, Engage manufacturer to provide technical supervision of installation of support isolation units produced, and of associated inertia bases (if any). X Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each type of vibration control product. Submit schedule showing size, type, deflection, and location for each product furnished, 1 Include data for each type and size of unit, showing isolation efficiency, stiffness, natural frequency and transmissibility at lowest operating speed of equipment. VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING & EQUIPMENT — 06/01/2015 230540-1 LMC: Cath Lab ##2 — Bi -Plana Equipment Replacement 177.307 2. For spring units, show wire size, spring diameter, tree height, solid -compression height, operating height, fatigue characteristics, ratio of horizontal to vertical stiffness and bases of spring -rated selection for range of loading weights. . Include performance certifications from manufacturers. B. Shop Drawings, Submit manufacturer's assembly -type shop drawings indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, and method of assembly of components. Detail bases, and show locationof equipment anchoring po ## # * # with equipment ## drawings. 1 . Shop drawings showing structural design and details of inertia bases, steel beam bases and other custom -fabricated work not covered by manufacturees submitted data. aFurnish templates, anchor bolts and sleeve for equipment bases, foundations and other support systems for coordination of vibration isolation units with other Z Submit shop drawings indicating scope of vibration isolation work and locations of units and .. IR * connections. Incl#` support isolationpoints forpiping and ductwork including risers, airftusings and inertia bases, a. Include schedule of units, showing size or manufacturer's part number, and weight supported and resulting deflection of each unit. C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data for each type of vibration control product, Include this data, product data and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Divisions 23. PARI" 2 - PRODUCT 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following; 1. Vibration Control Products: a. Mason Industries, Inc. b. Peabody Noise Control, Inc. 22 VIBRATION CONTROL MATERIALS AND SUPPORT UNITS: A. Fiberglass Pads and Shapes: {class fiber of not more than 0.18 mil diameter, produced by multiple -flame attenuation process, molded with manufacturer's standard fillers and binders through 10 compression cycles at 3 times rated load bearing capacity, to achieve natural frequency of not more than 12 Mertz, in thicknesses and shapes required for use in vibration isolation units. B. Neoprene Pacts: Oil -resistant neoprene sheets of manufacturer's standard hardness and cross -ribbed or waffled pattern. 1, Mason Industries Type W. ma -m -Timm own. MEE= E. Neoprene Mounfings, Provide neoprene mountings consisting of neoprene element bonded between 2 steel plates that are neoprene -covered to preventcorroslon. Provide minimum rated deflection of 0.35 inches. Provide threaded hole in upper plate and 2 holes in base plate for securing to equipment and to substrate. I Mason Industries Type ND. F. Spring Isolators, Free-Standingl- Except as otherwise indicated, provide vibration isolation 9 1 spring Type C between top and bottom loadin plates and with pad7type Type 8 isolator bonded to bottom of bottom loading plate. Include studs or cups to ensure centering of spring on plates. Include leveling bolt with lock nuts and washers, centered in top plate, arranged for leveling and anchoring supported equipment as indicated. I . Include holes in bottom plate for bolting unit to substrate as Indicated. 2. Mason Industries Type SLFH. 1. Beam depth need not exceed 14 inches provided that deflection and misalignment is -. acceptable 2. Mason da Fabricated Equipment Bases: Where supplementary bases are indicated for use with isolator supportunits to equipment (base not integralequipment),provide welded rectangular fabricated of a steel shapes, plates and bars complying with ASTM A36. Provide welded support brackets and anchor base to spring isolator units. Except as otherwise indicated arrange brackets td. result in lowestpossible . g height forequipment,but provide of 1 inch. Provide .. . base matching anchor bolt holes wt I Provide for auxiliary motor slide base under motor or motor slide rails for adjusting belt tension. Design primary base for bolting of rails or slide base in position. 2. Where sizes of base framing members are notindicated, fabricate base with depth o structure not less than 0.10 x longestspan of base, rigidly braced d support equipment without deflections or distortions which would be detrimental to equipment or equipment performance. 3. Beam depth need not exceed 14 inches provided that deflection and misalignment i kept within manufacturer's limits. . Mason Industries Type WF. J. Roof -Curb Isolators: Fabricated frame units sized to match roof curbs, formed with isolation springs Type C between extruded aluminum upper and lower sections, which are shaped and positioned to prevent metal -to -metal contact. Provide continuous airtight and waterproof seat between upper and lower extrusions. Include provisions for anchorage of frame unit to roof curb, and for anchorage of equipment to unit. 1. Mason Industries Type CMAB, Isolation Hangers: danger units farmed with brackets and including manufacturer's standard compression isolators of type indicated. Design brackets for b times rated loading of units. Fabricate units to accept misalignment of 15 degrees oft center in any direction before contacting hanger box, and for use with either rod or strap type members, and including acoustical washers to prevent metal -to -metal contacts. 1. Provide vibration isolation spring Type C with cap in lower pad -type isolator rubber hanger element in bottom, securely retained in unit. . Provide neoprene element, with minimum deflection of 0.3 inch, securely retained in hanger box. 3. Mason Industries Type 300. L Riser Isolators* Suspend risers from, or support risers by, spring hangers Type ND or spring isolators .- F. Wherever possible, anchor risers at central point TYPe D. Provide hanger or mounting deflection of 0,75 inches exqep�in those expansion locations additional deflection w. -• to limit deflection or load changes percent of initial deflection, Provide sliding guides held in position by resilient anchors, located between anchorpoints and • • of piping, ow • as • •o LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 1 M. Flexible Pipe Connectors: I For non-ferrous piping, provide bronze hose covered with bronze wire braid with copper tube ends or bronze flanged ends, braze -welded to hose. 2. Mason Industries "Type BBF. a. For ferrous piping, provide stainless steel hose covered with stainless steel wire braid with NPT steel nipples or 150 psi ANSI flanges, welded to hose. 1) Mason Industries Type BSS. PART EXECUTION .1 INSPECTION: A. Examine areas and conditions under which vibration control units are to be installed. leo not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Owner or his representative. 3.2 PERFORMANCE OF ISOLATORS: A,General: Comply with minimum static deflections recommended b. xSHR for selection and application of vibration isolation materials and units as indicated B, Manufacturees Recommendations.- Except as otherwise indicated, comply with recommendations for 4 and application of Vibration isolation materials and units to achieve minimum static deflection and displacement requirements. 33 APPLICATIONS: C. Earthquake 'Restraint- Where indicated, install Type H seismic snubber: 3.4 INSTALLATION: A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation and load application to vibration isolation materials and units. Adjust to ensure that units do not exceed rated operating deflections or bottom out under loading, and are not short- .♦ by otheir contactsor e ♦ points. Remove4 blocks and similar devices any) intended for temporary protection against oVefloading during instaflation� B. Install units between substrate and equipment as required for secure operation and to prevent displacement by •' forces. LMC- Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement fluim C. Adjust leveling devices as required to distribute loading uniformly onto isolators. Shim units as required where substrate is not level. DFor air handling equipment, install thrust restraints as indicated, and also wherever thrust exceeds 10 percent of equipment weight, E. Locate isolation hangers as near overhead support structure as possible. F. Weld riser isolator units in place as required to prevent displacement from loading and operations. GFlexible Pipe Connectors: Install on equipment side of shutoff valves, horizontally and parallel to equipment shafts wherever possible. 3.5 EXAMINATION OF RELATED WORK: I Equipment installations (performed as work of other sections) on vibration isolators, 2 Piping connections including flexible connections. 3. Ductwork connections including provisions for flexible connections. 4. Passage of piping and ductwork which is to be isolated through walls and floors, B. Do not start-up equipment until inadequacies have been corrected in manner acceptable to vibration isolation installer. A. Clean each vibration control unit, and verify that each is working freely, and that there is no dirt or debris in immediate vicinity of unit that could possibly short- circuit unit isolation, 3.7 DEFLECTION MEASUREMENTS: A. Upon completion of vibration isolation work, prepare report showing measured equipment deflections theoretical floor deflection and isolation efficiency for each major item of equipment. END OF SECTION 23 0540 P ENT — 05/01/2015 230540-6 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177,307 SECTION 23 0553 -- IDENTIFICATION FOR HVACPIPING AND EQUIPMENT PARI` 1 - GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of identification devices of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years, B. Codes and Standards; 1. Existing Building Standards: Comply with the existing lettering size, length of color field, colors and identification method as presently exists in the existing building unless other wise indicated. • • «� 4 ♦ r 44 4 s« « 4 r • • 4- • • • • • 4 • 44 4 « a • r e 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturer; Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following. Allen Brady2. 4 r Industries,3. Brimar Industrial44 Seton5. e Plate Corp. Specialties6. PVC 7. Marking Systems, Inc, (MSI) A. General: Provide standard products M. categories and types required for each application «4 in otherD, •,-23 sections. Where moresingle type specified f4!.. application,it option,but provide sin• - selection for product -44 11MC: Cath Lab #2 — 131 -Plane Equipment Replacement 177307 23 PAINTED IDENTIFICATIONMATERIALS: AStencils: Standard fiberboard stencils, prepared for required applications with letter sizes generally complying with recommendations of ANSI Al 11 for piping or to match existing size in existing building, but not less than 1-1/47 high letters for ductwork and not less than 3/4" high letters for access door signs and similar operational instructions. B. Stencil Paint: Standard exterior type stenciling enamel; black, except as otherwise indicated; either brushing grade or pressurized spray -can form and grade. CIdentification Paint, Standard identification enamel of colors indicated or, if not otherwise indicated comply with ANSI A13.1 for colors or to match existing building standard identification. .4 PLASTIC PIPE MARKERS: A. Snap-On Type. Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi-rigid snap -on, color -coded pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1. B. Insulation: Furnish 1 inch thick molded fiberglass insulation with jacket for each plastic pipe marker to be installed on uninsulated pipes subjected to fluid temperatures of 125 degrees P. (52 degrees C.) or greater. Cut length to extend 2inches beyond each end of plastic pipe marker, C. Small Pipes, For external diameters less than 5 inches (including insulation if any), provide full -band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location, fastened by one of the following methods: 1. Snap -on application of pre -tensioned semi-rigid plastic pipe marker. E� Lettering: Comply with piping system nomenclature as specified, scheduled, shown, or to match existing building lettering nomenclature system and abbreviate only as necessary for each application length. F. Arrows: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, either integrally with piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as separate unit of plastic. LMC: Cath LabEquipment Replacement Z5 PLASTIC DUCT MARKERS: A. General: Provide manufacturers standard laminated plastic, duct markers. B; For hazardous exhausts, use calors and designs recommended by ANSI A131. C. Nomenclature: Include the following: 1. Direction of air flow: 2, duct service (supply, return, exhaust, etc.) 2.6 PLASTIC TAPE: A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard color -coded pressure -sensitive (self-adhesive) vinyl tape, not less than 3 mils thick. B. Width: Provide 1-112inches wide tape markers on pipes with outside diameters (including Insulation, if any) of less than 6inches,-112inches wide tape for larger pipes. C. Color: Comply with ANSI A13.1, except where another calor selection is indicated, 2.7 VALVE TAGS: A. Brass Valve Tags: Provide 19 -gage polished brass valve tags with stamp -engraved piping system abbreviation in 1C41nch high letters and sequenced valve numbers 112inch high, and with 5132inch hole for fastener. 1. Provide 1-112inch diameter tags, except as otherwise indicated. Fill tag engraving with black enamel: BValve .• Fasteners, Provide a. • solid w or .-.•-. manufacturedtype), and solid brass S. hooks of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags to valves, and specifically C. Access Panel Markers- Provide manufacturer's standard 1116 inch thick engraved plastic laminate access .. abbreviations a r -corresponding . -. Include ; inch center holeto allow 2.8 VALVE SCHEDULE FRAMES: A. General: For each page of valve schedule, provide glazed display frame, with screws for removable mounting on masonry walls. Provide frames of finished hardwood or extruded aluminum, with non -glare type sheet glass. 2.9 ENGRAVED PLASTIC -LAMINATE SIGNS: A. General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, complying with FS L -P-387, in the sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engravers standard letter style of the sizes and wording indicated, black with white core (letter color) except as otherwise indicated, punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of substrate. B. Thickness: 1116 inch, except as otherwise indicated. IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT — 05/01/2015 230553-3 C. Fasteners: Self -tapping stainless steel screws, except contact -type permanent adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate. 2.10 PLASTICIZED TAGS: A. General: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed or partially pre-printed accident -prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matt finish suitable for writing, approximately-114inch x 5-5/8 inch, with brass grommets and wire fasteners, and with appropriate pre-printed wording including large- size primary wording (as examples; DANGER, CAUTION, DO NOT OPERATE). 2.11 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS: A. General: Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in mechanical identification work, with corresponding designations shown, specified, scheduled and approved by the Owner/Engineer. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated and approved by the Owner/Engineer for proper identification and operation/ maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment. B. Multiple Systems: Where multiple systems of same generic name are shown and specified, provide identification which indicates individual system number as designated on the drawings or ^# PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL y y !REQUIREMENTS: A. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, painting or other covering or finish including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, insta identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to installati of #ustical ceilings and similar removable ConcealedCAccess Doors: Provide duct markers or stenciled signs on each access door in ductwork and housings, indicating purpose of access (to what equipment), other maintenance and operating instructions, and appropriate safety and procedural information. i## doors are concealed above acoustical# or concealment, plasticized tags may be installed for identificationof #e -# signs, Installers option. IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT — 05101/2015 230553-4 ';,.MC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177307 3.3 PIPING SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION: A. General: Install pipe markers of the following type on each system indicated to receive identification, and include arrows to show normal direction of flow. Existing building identification shall match the existing method which exists in the building. B. Plastic pipe markers, with application system as indicated under "Materials" in this section. Install on pipe insulation segment where required for hot non- insulated pipes. C. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to view in occupied spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels, plenum and exterior non -concealed locations, I D. Near each valve and control device. E. Near each branch, excluding short take -offs for fixtures and terminal units; mark each pipe at branch, where there could be question of flow pattern. F. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings, or enter non -accessible enclosures. G, At access doors, manholes and similar access points which permit view of concealed piping. H. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 1. Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 25 feet along each piping run, except reduce spacing to 1' in congested areas of piping and equipment. J. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. 3.4 UNDERGROUND PIPING IDENTIFICATION: 1. Building services main shut-off valves. 2, Each individual system main shut-off valves. 3. Each individual system riser shut-off valves. 4. Each individual system floor shut-off valves. 5. Each individual system major branch shut-off valves. B. Mount valve schedule frames and schedules in mechanical equipment rooms where directed by Architect/Owner/Engineer. C. Where more than one major mechanical equipment room is shown for project, install mounted valve schedule in each major mechanical equipment room, and repeat only main valves which IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT — 05/01/2015 230553-5 LMC.* Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 are to be operated in conjunction with operations of more than single mechanical equipment room. 3.6 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION: A. General: Install minimum 2 inch x 4 inch engraved plastic laminate equipment marker on each individual items of mechanical equipment. Provide marker for the following general categories of equipment, I Main building systems control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units such as gas outlets. 2. Room thermostats, except gun tag labels are acceptable for room thermostats. 1 Pumps, compressors and similar motor -driven units. 4. Fans and blowers. 5. Air terminal units. 6. Water treatment systems and similar equipment. B. Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4 inch high lettering for name of unit. C. Text of Signs: In addition to the identified unit, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations. 3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A. Adjusting: Relocate any mechanical identification device which has become visually blocked by work of this division or other divisions. B. Cleaning: Clean face of identification devices, and glass frames of valve charts. END OF SECTION 23 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT — 05/01/2015 230563-6 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 SECTION 23 0593 _ TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. This section covers testing and balancing of environmental systems described herein and specified under Division 23. The testing and balancing of all environmental systems shall be the responsibility of one Testing, Balancing and Adjusting firm. 1. Test, adjust and balance the following mechanical systems and the mechanical equipment associated with these systems: a. General Systems and Equipment Procedures. b. Air Side Systems and Equipment 1) Supply/Return Air Systems 2) General Exhaust/Supply Fans 3) Air Handling Units ) General Exhaust Systems C. Hydronic Systems and Equipment 1) Heating/Chilled water systems ) Hydronic coils d, Plumbing 1) General e. Electrical Components 1) Manual and magnetic starters 2) Variable frequency drives f. Control Systems and Equipment 1) General . Life Safety Systems and Equipment 1) Smoke pressurization, exhaust, and evacuation modes 2) Fire/smoke dampers and detection systems . Steam Systems and Equipment 1) General ) Steam Coils ) Boilers 4) Humidification systems and equipment 1.2 QUALIFICATIONS OF CONTRACTOR - A. The Mechanical Contractor shall procure the services of an independent testing and balancing agency specializing in the testing, adjusting and balancing of environmental systems to TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC— 05/01/2015 230593-1 111T 11 *-# fluagm perform the above mentioned work, An independent contractor is defined as an organization that is not engaged in engineering design or is not a division of a mechanical contractor entity, which installs mechanical systems. B, The actual fieldwork shall be performed by qualified technicians who are currently certified by the Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Bureau (TABB), the National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB), or the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) certification agencies. C. The Testing & Balancing Contractor shall have a minimum of three years experience in testing anM balancing mechanical systems. D� The Test & Balance Contractor shall have previous experience in testing and balancing variable air volume hospital air side systems in the last two years� Qualification submission must include a detailed resume describing past project experience in hospital variable air volume systems, a list of projects, including peoples' names, phone numbers and addresses of references, 1.3 APPROVAL OF CONTRACTOR• A. The following firms are preferred contractors to complete the work. Any Testing and Balancing firm desiring to offer their services for this work and who are not listed below, shall submit their qualifications to the Engineer, not less than [seven (7) working days before the bid date. <Approval or disapproval will be given on each request and this action will be given in writing prior to bidding the work. 1. Complete Mechanical Balancing B. Firms who are not listed, or who have not received prior approval shall not be approved to complete work on this project. 1.4 CODES AMC} STANDARDS: A. ASHRAE: ASHRAE Handbook, Applications Volume, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Chapter. B. NEB. "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems." C. SMACNA: 'HVAC Systems -Testing, Adjusting & Balancing." 1.5 PRELIMINARY SUBMITTALS: i �IYI oil Itt"Im -*As Mo 111 B. Meet all requirements of Section 230500 as applicable. CSubmit a list of all instrumentation to be used on an individual project and include calibration dates. Submit calibration curves. If more than one instrument of a similartype is used, a comparison of individual- readings should be made, The variation between instrument readings should not exceed • • minus 5%. LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 1.6 FINAL REPORTS: A. Refer to Division I for supplemental requirements. B. The Testing and Balancing Contractor shall submit six (6) bound copies of the final testing and balancing report at least fifteen (15) calendar days prior to substantial completion, unless noted otherwise in Division 1. Report contents shall be per Part 3 of this Section. C. Meet all requirements of Section 23 05 00 as applicable. D. If more than two reports are made by the contractor, the Owner reserves the night to charge the contractor for subsequent reviews by their consultants. Such extra fees shall be deducted from payments by the Owner to the contractor. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING: ANotify Contractor/Engineer/Architect in writing of conditions • to the proper completion of the test and balance work. Provide the Contractor/Architect/Engineer with a copy of the notification, BPrepare a project schedule. Schedule shall indicate critical path of the balancing process and shall incorporate both requirements of other contractors necessary to meet test and balance commitments and process flow of test and balance work. Coordinate with general and mechanical contractors and insert critical steps into project master schedule. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 21 BELTS, SHEEVES, IMPELLERS: A. Refer to specific equipment sections and Section 23 05 00 for additional requirements. I BThe Testing & Balancing Contractor shall coordinate with the Mechanical Contractor to supply correctly sized drive belts and sheaves. Impellers shall be trimmed or replaced by the mechanical contractor and shall be correctly re -sized and coordinated by the Test and Balancing Contractor per the hydronic systems and equipment portion of this section. C. The Test & Balance Contractor shall determine the fan belt and sheeve replacement necessary for final balance condition for specified air quantity when the VFD; is operating in the by-pass mode for final field conditions, without placing the motor over its nameplate amp rating. PART 3 - EXECUTION 31 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES - A. Testing and balancing shall not begin until the system has been completed and is in full working order and the following project conditions have been determined suitable for start of work. 1. Preliminary Testing & Balancing Contractor requirements shall be ascertained prior to the commencement of work through a review of the project plans and specifications. In addition, visual observations at the site during construction shall be made to determine the location of required balancing devices,' that they are being installed properly, and in an accessible location for the need, Report in writing any deficiencies to the Engineer immediately. TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC — 05/01/2015 230593-3 �'�Replacement 177.307 2. Before any air balance work is done, the system shall be checked for duct leakage (obtain pressure test results), assure filters are installed, verify filters are changed if they are dirty, check for correct fan rotation, equipment vibration, and check automatic dampers for proper operation. All volume control dampers and outlets shall be wide open at this time. 1 Before any Hydronic, domestic water or applicable system balancing work is done, the systems shall be checked for plugged strainer% proper pump rotation, proper control valve installation and operation, air locks, proper system static pressure to assure a full system, prss_ vflow meter and check -valve installation. All throttling devices and control valves shall be open at this time. 4. Verify systems do not exhibit excessive sound and/or vibration levels. Report in writing any deficiencies to the Engineer immediately. 3.2 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES — REMODEL WORK. - A. In remodel area, a complete preliminary test and balance report shall be accomplished prior to any work. Any obvious deficiencies shall be identified at that time. A complete report of all readings, recommendations, etc. shall be submitted to the Engineer, 3,3 GENERAL SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENT PROCEDURES: A. Balance all air and water flows at terminals within +10% to -5% of design flow quantities. Notify Contractor/Engineer/Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper completion of the test and balance work. Provide the Contractor/Architect/Engineer with a copy of the notification. B, Pressure relationships indicated on drawings shall take priority over air quantities. C. Mark equipment settings with paint, including damper control positions, balancing cocks, circuit setters, valve indicators, fan speed control settings and similar controls and devices, to show final settings at completion of test -adjust -balance work. D� Patch holes in insulation, ductwork and housings, which have been cut or drilled for test purposes, in a manner recommend by the original installer. E. Measure, adjust and report equipment running motor amps and power factor, KW, rated motor amperage, listed motor power factor, voltage, and all nameplate data. Perform these measurements for all equipment operational modes. F. Check and adjust equipment belt tensioning. G, Check keyway and setscrew tightness. Report any loose screws and notify Mechanical Contractor prior to equipment balancing. H. Record and include in report all equipment nameplate data. 1. Verify that all equipment safety and operating controls are in place, tested, adjusted and set prior to balancing. J. Verify that manufacturer start-up has occurred per specification prior to balancing, LMC. Cath Lab ##2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 3.4 AIR SIDE SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT PROCEDURES: A. In addition to the procedures identified under each specific heading below, provide general data required by 3.3 above. Ba Filters shall be restricted to increase pressure drop to 50% of span between Initial pressure drop and final recommended pressure drop for setting final airflows for funs, Check fan motor amps with clean filters and simulated loaded filters, and report for each piece of equipment. Equipment shall be supplied with clean filters upon completion of balance. Balance and report air quantities. C. Supply/Return Air Systems: Report.1 On outdoor units, verify that positively or negatively pressurized curbs are free of leaks. supply2. For units with integral outside air intake and relief dampers, measure, adjust, set and report outside air, return air and relief air quantities. Perform this as specified under 3. Balance and report supply and return fan CFM, upstream static pressure and downstream static pressure. 4 Measure and report static pressure upstreamand downstream of « p such as is and simulateddirty),dampers, LMC: Cath LabBi-Plane Equipment Replacement ! * d.i • i it i!' i x id "` !�'� ♦i* i i • i Q. Room Pressurization Control System performance Evaluation: The Balancing Contractor shall demonstrate with amore that the correct relative pressure relationship; is being maintained in each area. Every room for which a relative pressure value was assigned on the mechanical plans shall be tested. The testing shall be performed in each room under the following conditions. 1) Door closed 2) boor open ) In labs with hoods or bio -safety cabinets: a) Hood sash complete open b) Hood sash closed c) Hood sash partially open 4) Thermostat set to its minimum set point 5) Thermostat set to its maximum set point 6) If the correct pressure relationships cannot be demonstrated fora particular room; the room shall be retested after the {problem has been corrected. 3.5 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS ANIS EQUIPMENT: A. Heating/chilled water systems: I Hydronic Systems with Meters: The system shall be balanced proportionally using the flow meters. On completion of the balance, the following information shall be recorded in the iiirt: Flow meter size and brand, required flow rate and pressure drop, LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177 307 # # s w s. a i 1Check, adjust and set temperature control devices to [11 01,F] domestic hot water temperature and as indicated on drawings. 2. Adjust pressure -reducing stations, report downstream system static pressure. 3. Verify proper location and operation of A$ME pressure and temperature relief valves. 4. Measure and report residual pressure at full flow at most remote plumbing fixture; requiring highest operating pressure (usually flush valve water closets), 5. Verify that most remoWfixture has hot water available semi -instantaneously with recirculation system operating. Report., & Refer to plumbing drawings for location of all balancing valves serving the Domestic Hot Water Circulation (HWC) System and Domestic Hot Water Circulation Pumps. Adjust balancing valves to indicate flow rate. Report flow rate for all balance valves. Measure, adjust and report flow rate for each pump. C7 STEAM SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT: traps& General: I . Check steam ar correct operation pyrometer. 2. Check and report all steam pressures downstream of pressure reducing stations. Remove,#» and clean all stem strainers. 4Record steam pressures upstream and downstream of all major equipment such as boilers, steam coilsand heat exchangers, B� Steam Calls: 1. Measure and report entering and leaving air temperatures at full heating. C. Humidification Systems and Equipment: 1. Measure and report steady state relative humidity for spaces. JL�r • quipment Replacementquip . Measure and report humidifier outlet relative humidities. . Steam Dispersion Grids: a. Measure and report entering and leaving air temperature, and leaving relative humidity. b. See steam portion of the section, D. Electric Stearn Generators: a. Measure and report operating amps. 3.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS .ASSOCIATED WITH MECHANICAL SYSTEMS: A. Manual and Magnetic Starters: 1. Check all new and existing thermal overloads. Identify improperly protected equipment in report. Furnish and exchange thermals as required for proper motor protection. . Motor Control Center Magnetic Starters: Check for correct sizing. Notify Electrical Contractor of discrepancies. 3. Two -speed Starters: 1n addition to the above, set time delay between changes of speeds for proper operation. . Verify windings of motor and starter is compatible prior to starting any equipment. S. Variable frequency drives. 1. Coordinate balance process with equipment manufacturer start-up representative. . Record nameplate data.. 3. Record motor overload setting. 4. Record full load amps. .g CONTROL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT: A. General. 1. Operate all temperature control systems with the temperature control contractor's representative for proper sequence of operation, Be responsible for calibration of flow measurement devices used as input to the temperature control system: All air system flow; measurement stations including VAV terminals shall be calibrated against a Pitot tube traverse or air diffuser capture hood. `Balancing Contractor shall assure; accuracy of all flaw measurement devices or shall report their failure to be accurate. 2. Work with the Controls Contractor to set minimum outside air damper positions.. . Work with the Controls Contractor to optimize VAV duct static pressure, VFD pump hydropic system pressure differential and building pressure. 3.10 LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT: Fire/Smoke «- Detection Systems: I . Verify that each fire/Smoke damper closes when the associated duct or space detector is tripped. Verify that air handlers shut down and outside air dampers close as dictated by « « sequence. LMC; Cath Lab ##2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 . Report any detectors or dampers that are malfunctioning. Report any discrepancies from the control sequence. 3.11 SOUND AND VIBRATION. A, Bound Inspection and Testing: 1. Prior to sound testing, all equipment that can potentially impact sound testing shall be put into operation. Examples include fan coil units, humidifiers, air handling units, and equipment in adjacent mechanical spaces. VFD systems shall be placed at 30% of full speed. 2. Prior to sound testing the mechanical test and balance of all systems shall be completed. 3. Report audible tonal characteristics such as whine, whistle, hum or rumble. Also report time varying sound levels or beats induced from aerodynamic instability, perform this for all rooms. B. Vibration Inspection and resting: 1. Prior to vibration testing, all equipment shall be put into operation. On variable speed equipment, testing shall occur at low, medium and high speeds. 2. Prior to vibration testing, the mechanical test and balance of all systems shall be completed. 3. Report excessive vibrations from any equipment. Inspect upstream and downstream duct and piping systems and report excessive vibrations. 3.12 REPORT OF WORK: A. The Testing and Balancing Contractor shall submit six (5)bound copies of the final testing and balancing report at least fifteen (15) calendar days prior to the Mechanical Contractor's request for final inspection. B. A complete reduced set of mechanical contract drawings (showing each system) shall be included in the report with all equipment, flow measuring devices, terminals (outlets, inlets, coils,: fan coil units, schedules, etc.) clearly marked and all equipment designated. The test and balance contractor can obtain drawing files from Cator, Rua, & Associates for development of these drawings, C. Data shall be reported per Part 3 of this Section on standard NEBB forms, generate custom forms that contain the information in this Section when a standard NEBB form does not exist for a piece of equipment. All NEBB`forms shall be fully filled out for this report. When additional information is required by this Section, it shall be provided. D. The report shall include a list of all equipment used in the testing and balancing work. E. Report systems for excessive sound and vibration per the sound and vibration inspection and testing portions of this specification, F. Substantial completion of this project will not take place until a satisfactory report is received. The Testing '& Balancing Contractor shall respond and correct all deficiencies within seven (7) days of receiving the Engineer's written review of the balancing report, 'Failure to comply will result in holding retainage of the final payment until all items have been corrected to the satisfaction of the Engineer. TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC — 05/01/2015 230593-9 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177,307 313 GUARANTEE OF WORK: A. The Testing & Balancing Contractor shall guarantee the accuracy of the tests and balance for a period of 90 days from date of final acceptance of the test and balance report. During this period, the Testing & Balancing Contractor shall make personnel available at no cost to the Owner to correct deficiencies that may become apparent in the system balance. END OF SECTION 23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC — 05101%2015 230593-10 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 M *J"LE011 W_*VY111I VU01 I IM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of mechanical insulation products and systems, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years. BInstaller's Qualifications: Firm with at least 5 years successful installation experience on projeci with mechanical insulations similar to that required for this project. CFlame/Smoke Ratings'. Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets, coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives) with flame -spread index of 25 or less, and smoke -developed index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E 84 (NFPA 255) method. In addition, the products, when tested, shall not drip flame particles, and flame shall not be progressive. Provide Underwriters Laboratories Inc., label or listing, or satisfactory certified test report from an approved testing laboratory to prove that fire hazard ratings for materials proposed for use do not exceed those specified. A, Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each type of mechanical insulation, Submit schedule showing manufacturers product number, k -value, thickness, density, and furnished accessories for each mechanical system requiring insulation. Submit detail product information and installation information for all jacketing systems specified in this section. X Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to site in containers with manufacturees stamp or label, affixed showing fire hazard indexes of products. B. Protect insulation against dirt, water, and chemical and mechanical damage. Do not install damaged or wet insulation-, remove from project site. I I IN I ililiffliffili PONT 1 11! � I «I i - 0 3_001#�M b. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp. C. Knauf Fiber Glass d. Manson e. CertainTeed f. Einsulation HVAC INSULATION -- 05/01/2015 230700-1 g. Armacl . Pittsburgh Corning Corp. L PABCO, Inc. j. Rubatex Corp, k. Thermal Ceramics 1. "Thermal Structures 2. Jacketing & Covering Products: a. Childers b. el -Co c. Zeston d. Alpha Associates, Inc, 3. Sound Lagging/Insulation a. Soundseal b. Vibro-Acoustics C. Schuller d1 Owens-Corning e. Certainteed 2.2 PIPING INSULATION MATERIALS: A. Fiberglass Pring Insulation: ASTM C 547, Class 1 unless otherwise indicated* "K" factor shall be maximum 0.24 at 75 degrees F. mean temperature, jacket with tensile strength of 35 lbs/in, mullen:burst 70 psi, beach puncture 50 oz. in/in, permeability .02 perm factory applied vapor barrier jacket and adhesive self-sealing lap joint. B. Flexible Closed Cell Piping Insulation*: ASTM C 534, Type 1. "K" factor shall be maximum 0.27 at 5 degrees F. mean temperature, with a water vapor permeability of 0.10 perm inches or less. Insulation shall be pre-installed on piping, or un -slit to be slipped over piping as a single piece. C. Jackets for Piping Insulation: ASTM C 921, Type I for piping with temperatures below ambient, Type It for piping with temperatures above ambient. Type I may be used for all piping at Installers option. 1, Fitting Covers: UV resistant PVC, pre -molded fitting covers, flame spread 25, smoke developed 50. PVC tape for cold systems, serrated tacks or PVC tape for hot systems. a. !^ #.• •. �.. 1. a. �,. ...* •:. Ma la ^• !. s • + •a r • N r -• • a- • a .• • • a • HVAC INSULATION — 0510112015 230700-2 E. Adhesives, • Protective As • •^'! by ! for applications indicated and additional finishes as specified. 23 DUCTWORK INSULATION a a A, Rigid f". ! !.. Insulation: ASTM C 612, Class 450 degrees F temperature density of 3 pcf. "K" value shall be maximum 0.23 at 75 degrees F. mean temperature, facing 7 mil, foil reinforced with glass mesh and laminated to 40 lb kraft. Round Surface Semi-Rigid ,rt t Fiberglass Blanket » �, !. t » 1, 450 degrees temperature limit, 2.5 PCF density "K" value of .25 max at 75 degrees F mean temp, foil-skrim- kraft facing. Orientation of fibers shall be perpendicular to facing to facilitate application on rou CFlexible Fiberglass Ductwork Insulation: ASTM C 553, Type 1, 3/4 lbs per cu. ft. density. "K" value shall be maximum 0.25 at 75 degrees F. mean temperature, 250 degreed F temperature limit, vapor transmission rating shall not exceed 0.02 perms, facing of .7 mil foil reinforced with glass mesh t laminated to 40 lb Jackets for Ductwork Insulation: ASTM C 921, !+ for ductwork temperatures f +..l ambient; Type 11 for ductwork with temperatures above ambient. � * � ♦^f t` R � is -t !» M ^f HVAC INSULATION — 05/01/201 230700-3 - LMC.- Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177307 F. Equipment Insulation Accessories: Provide staple, bands, wire, wire netting, tape, corner angles, anchors and stud pins as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. 2.5 SOUND LAGGING/INSULATION: barrier,A. Flexible Fiberglass & Vinyl Sound Insulation: I O PSF, .090 inch thick mylar feed vinyl loaded .s to 400psi tensile strength. Absorber • # - as fiberglass laminated on vinyl barrier, .40 PSF� 2 inch nominal thickness insulating value of R-8.0. Assembly flame/smoke index of 12.5/19.5 tested per Class A ASTME-84, Assembly sound tested per ASTME-90 for a 5TIof 30 or greater. Rated for temperature between -20 degrees F & 350 degrees F. Provide soundseal B-10LAG/AFA-9 or approved equal. 13. C. Sound lagging foil tape: 4" x 200' rolls of matching foil tape by Soundseal. Insulation for application over duct, piping & equipment, FIXED AND REMOVABLE VALVE INSULATION COVERS: A. Valves, strainers and other equipment on steam, condensate and hot water lines shall be B. Steam and hot water valves, 3 inches and larger, shall be insulated with a removable insulation jacket Valves 2-1/2 inches and smaller shall not be insulated unless removable type is shown to be cost effective or effect of heat loss is shown to be detrimental, # # a. - � # #. # � . # • .. # - a ' # • # it "' *m D. Core unit shall be fabricated in one piece wherever possible and shall fit over adjacent insulation flanges, etc., a minimum of 2 inches, E. All jackets shall be field measured by manufacture's representative. Manufacturer shall guarantee jacket will fit snugly without force, folder, bending or stretching. HVAC INSULATION — 5/01/201 230700-4 LMC: Cath Lab #2 -- Bi -Pyne Equipment Replacement 177.307 PART 3 m EXECUTION 3.1 _ _ INSPECTION: A. Examine areas and conditions under which mechanical insulation is to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. B. Workmanship shall be first class and of the highest quality, poor installation or bad appearance as determined by the engineer shall be due cause to reject the entire project in whole and retainage will be withheld until corrective action is completed to the engineer's satisfaction. 3.2 PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION: A. Insulation Omitted: Omit insulation on chrome -plated exposed piping (except for handicapped fixtures), air chambers, unions, balance cracks, flow regulators, drain lines from water coolers, drainage piping located in crawl spaces or tunnels, fire protection piping, and pre -insulated equipment. B. Cold Piping: 1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following cold plumbing piping systems: a. Potable and non -potable cold water piping: b. Interior above -ground horizontal storm water piping including elbow up & down. C. Roof drain bowls and roof drain leader to horizontal piping'. d. Overflow roof drain bowls and first 10 feet of overflow piping.. 2. Insulate each piping system specified above with the following types and thicknesses of insulation: a. Above Ground Inside Building Fiberglass; f2 inch thickness. C: Hot Piping: 1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following hot plumbing piping systems: a. Potable hot water and tempered piping. b. Potable hot water and tempered recirculating piping. 2. Insulate each piping system specified above with the following types and thicknesses of insulation: a. Fiberglass: (IECC) 112 inch for runouts to individual fixtures 8"-0" or less in length, 1 inch thick for all pipe sizes, b. Sound Insulation: Insulate as shown on drawings. Provide 2 inch flexible fiberglass/vinyl sound Insulation. Install with foil tape at all seams. Provide plastic wire ties every 18 inches around piping to fully fasten insulation to piping. Obtain a copy of manufacturer's installation requirements, keep copy on site, and follow all Instructions. HVAC INSULATION 05101/2015 230700-5 LIC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 3.3 HVAC PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION: A. InsulationOmitted: Omit insulation on sham condensate piping between steam trap and unman; and on hot piping unmans, flexible connections, and expansion joints. Insulation may be omitted inside of cabinet unit heaters, convectors and fan coils for hot piping. Cold piping insulation inside fan coil unit cabinet may be omittedprovidedpiping is located over drain pan. Hot and cold piping routed inside air handler units shall be insulated. Omit insulation on strainers in heating water strainers operating below 200 degrees F. B. Heat Traced Piping; 1. Application Requirements. Insulate the following sub -zero HVAC piping systems: a. Piping exposed to freezing which is specified with heat cable. 2. Insulate each piping system: specified above with the following types and thicknesses of insulation: Fiberglass:a. . pipe sizes up to and including 1-1/2, 2 inch thick for • .- sizes over 2 inches. 4, Above Ground, Exterior - Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inches thick for pipe sizes up to and including 2 inch, 2 inches thick for ..r sizes over 2 inches. C. Cold Piping (40 degrees F (4.4 degrees C) to ambient). 1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following cold HVAC piping systems: a: Chilled water supply and return piping. b. Cold condensate drain piping. 2. Insulate each piping system specified above with the following types and thicknesses of insulation; a. Fiberglass: (IECC): 'I inch thick for pipe sizes up to and including 1-1/2 inch, 1-1/2 inch thick for pipe sizes over 1-1/2 inch. la. Exterior, Above Ground - Cellular Glens. (IEC): 1 inch thick for pipe sizes up to and including 1-1/2 inch, 1-1/2 inch thick for pipe sizes over 1-1/2 inch.'' DJ Heating System Piping (to 200 degrees F (BO degrees C)); 1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following heating piping systems: a. Hot water supply and return piping. 2. Insulate each piping system specified above with the following type and thicknesses of insulation. a. Fiberglass: (IFCC): 1 inch thick for pipe sizes up to and including 1-1/2", 2 inch thick for pipe over 1-1/2 inches. b. Above Ground Exterior - Cellular Glass: 2 inches thick for pipe sizes up to and including 8 inches, 2-1/2 inch thick for pipe sizes over 8". HVAC INSULATION — 05101/2015 230700-6 LMC: Cath Lab #2 —1i -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 EHigh Temperature, Low Pressure Piping (200 to 250 degrees F (90 to 120 degrees C)); I Application Requirements: Insulate the following hot low pressure HVAC piping: a. HVAC high temperature (200 to 250 degrees) hot water supply and return piping. b. Low pressure steam (up to 15 psig), C, Steam condensate piping (all pressures). Z Insulate each piping system specified above with the following type and thicknesses of insulation: aFiberglass- (IECC): 1-1/2 inch thick for pipe sizes up to and including 1-1/2 inch, 3 inch thick for pipe sizes 2 inch and over, (ASHRAE): 1-1/2 inch thick for pipe sizes less than 1-1/2 inch, 2 inch thick for pipe sizes 1-1/2 inches and above. • Above Ground, Exterior — Cellular Glass: 2-1/2 inches thick for pipe sizes up to and including 2 inch, 3 inch thick for pipe size 2-1/2 inches through • inches, and 5 inches thick • pipe sizes over 8 inches. 3A DUCTWORK SYSTEM INSULATION: A. Insulation Omitted: Do not insulate fibrous glass ductwork, or lined ductwork. 13. Application Requirements: Insulate the following ductwork: 1 HVAC supply ductwork between fan discharge, or HVAC unit discharge, and room terminal outlet unless ductwork is specified to be lined. Z HVAC return ductwork in unconditioned spaces or exterior; except omit insulation when ductwork is specified to be lined, 1 HVAC plenums and unit housings not pre -insulated at factory or lined. A. Rigid oval or round supply air ductwork. HVAC INSULATION -- 05/01/2015 230700-7 LMC: Cath Lab #2 _ Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 Interior; exposed within mechanical„ 1" min. up to 2" as Not Allowed 1" min. up to " as electrical, storage, or Cather service required to cover joints required to cover areas; cold, hot, or dual temperature and reinforcements joints and duct reinforcements with white finish.. Provide white finish coat. Exterior; hot or dual temperature Not Allowed Not Allowed 2" with metal jacket or duct, all return duct 2" self jacketed ,....,... ......,... ... ... ,... ww.,.. .,�.... ,..,. .�........ .,.w,.....,. w.. .w+ :ww.,... w. .,�:+. w.ar. wrwvw 3.5 EQUIPMENT INSULATION: A, Hot Equipment (Above Ambient Temperature): 1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following hot equipment: a. Condensate humps. insulation:2. Insulate each item of equipment specified above with the following types and thicknesses of . Fiberglass: 2 inch thick, except 3 inch thick for low- pressure boilers and steam -jacketed heat exchangers. iso not use for equipment above 4501 degrees F (232 degrees C). 3:5 INSTALLATION OF PIPING INSULATION A. General: Install insulation products In accordancewith manufacturer's written Instructions, and In accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves' Its Intended purpose, B. Install Insulation on pipe systems subsequent to Installation of heat tracing, testing, and acceptance of tests. C. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of piping with full-length units of Insulation, with single cut piece to complete run, Do not use cut pieces or scraps` abutting each other. D. Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulating. Butt Insulation joints firmly together to ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered. E. Maintain integrity of vapor -barrier jackets on cold pipe insulation, and protect to prevent puncture or other damage, I. «- 1, Do not use staples or tacks on vapor barrier jackets. 2, Seal vapor barrier penetrations with vapor barrier finish recommended by the manufacturer. 3. Seal fitting covers with PVC tape. HVAC INSULATION -- 05101120115 230700-8 . Cover all unions, check valve, and other in-line devices. Mark tauter covering with indelible marker to identify item covered. F. Neatly bevel and seat insulation at all exposed edges. G. Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system with equivalent thickness and composition of insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run, ` Install factory molded, precut or job fabricated units (at Installer's option) except where specific form or type is indicated. H. Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar piping penetrations, except where otherwise indicated. 1. See equipment insulation for removable insulation on accessible piping components. J. See Section 23 05 29 for insulation inserts and shields. Butt pipe insulation against pipe hanger insulation inserts. For all piping apply wet coat of vapor barrier lap cement on butt joints and seat all joints and seams with 3 inch wide vapor barrier tape or band. , Flexible Elastomeric Piping Insulation: 1. Install unslit, by slipping over piping prior to joining, or install pre -insulated soft copper tubing. . Seal butt ends with adhesive. L. Piping Exposed to Weather-, Protect outdoor insulation from weather by aluminum rubber jacketing. 1. Jacketing shall be secured by 1/2 inch wide stainless steel bands located on 24 inch centers. All joints and seams shall be caulked with clear silicone. Locate all longitudinal seams at the bottom of piping to minimize joint exposure to weather. Contractor may propose prefabricated sealing and fastening systems, submit samples and product data for approval. 2. On flexible elastomeric pipe insulation apply two () coats of manufacturer's approved U,V. resistant finish. 3.7 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK INSULATION: A. General: Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves its intended purpose. B. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. C. Clean and dry ductwork prior to insulating.Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered. D. Maintain integrity of vapor -barrier on ductwork insulation, and protect it to prevent puncture and other damage. 1. Avoid the use of staples on vapor barrier jackets. 2. Seat vapor barrier penetrations with vapor barrier tape recommended by the manufacturer. HVAC INSULATION -- 05101/2015 230700-9 [XiTILOAM -to W.1 amgn gasi 1. Adhere flexible elastomeric sheets to clean oil4ree metal surface by compression fit method and full coverage of adhesive. Seal buff joints with same adhesive. For exterior ductwork, notch insulation at reinforcements and joint flanges to provide a smooth surface, unless the reinforcements or joints would penetrate the insulation. Provide a minimum Y2 inch cap over any penetrating item. Stagger all joints and seams on multi -layer insulation. 3.8 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT INSULATION: AGeneral: Install equipment thermal insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves intended purpose� Complete finishes as specified. B, Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces and on clean and dry surfaces. Redo poorly fitted joints. To not use mastic or joint sealer as filler for gaping joints and excessive voids resulting from poor workmanship. C. Maintain integrity of vapor -barrier on equipment insulation and protect it to prevent puncture and other damage. D. Do not apply insulation to equipment, mufflers, breechings, or stacks while hot. E. Apply insulation using staggered joint method and double layer construction. Apply each layer of insulation separately. I Wall Influelis" G. Do not insulate hot equipment ABM E stamp and manufacturers nameplate. Provide neatly beveled edge at interruptions of insulation. HVAC INSULATION — 05/01/2015 23 0700 -10 LMC. Cath Lab ##2 —Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 H. Hot equipment requiring access, Provide removable section of insulation, fabricated from rigid fiberglass insulation board, adhered to an aluminum jacket, and fastened to the equipment with stainless steel bands. At Contractors option, provide pre -fabricated, canvas jacketed, face -up insulation blankets. Provide removable insulation for hot equipment requiring access with accessible components over 100 square inches or any component operating over 200 degrees including; 1. Steam condensate receivers and pumps. . Steam Strainers. 3. Steam pressure regulators. 1. Equipment Exposed to Weather: Protect outdoor insulation from weather by installation of aluminum jacketing, as recommended by manufacturer. On flexible elasto eric insulation, apply two (2) coats of manufacturer's approved U.V. resistant finish. �l:�IC rZWIX":1[9721112 Repair damaged sections of existing mechanical insulation,both previouslydamaged or damaged during this construction period. Use insulation, install newjacket lapping and sealed over existing 110 PROTECTION s a REPLACEMENT, A, Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with vapor barrier damage and moisture saturated Units. B. Protection- Insulation »'. ,.. shall advise Contractor of '«u. .« protection .oe..«.. for insulation«. during remainder of construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration. END OF SECTION 23 0700 HVAC INSULATION — 0510112015 23 0700 -11 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 SECTION 23 0993 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS PART I -GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Sequence of operation is hereby defined as the manner and method by which controls function, Requirements for each type of control system operation are specified in this section. B. Operating equipment, devices, and system components required for control systems are specified in other Division 23 Controls' sections of these specifications. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS. - A. Provide control systems consisting of thermostats, control valves, dampers, operators, indicating devices, interface equipment, and other apparatus required to operate mechanical system and to perform functions specified. BProvide necessary materials and field work necessary to connect control components factory supplied as part of equipment controlled, unless specified otherwise. Generally, self-contained valves, filter gauges, liquid level controllers and similar instruments, are not to be installed under this section, C. Unless specified otherwise, provide fully proportional components, DProvide all necessary relays and signal boosters to make the system a full and operable system as required by the sequence of operation. PART 3 - EXECUTION AVariable Air Volume with Reheat: The thermostat shall control the damper operator on the variable volume, pressure independent terminal box, On a drop in room temperature below thermostat set point, the thermostat shall modulate the airflow minimum scheduled air quantity to satisfy thermostat cooling set point. On further drop in room temperature below thermostat heating set point, the thermostat shall modulate the reheat coil normally closed two-way control valve and increase the air flow to satisfy thermostat set point, On rise in temperature above the thermostat set point, the thermostat shall close the normally closed two-way control valve and modulate the airflow to maximum scheduled air quantity, 3,2 MISCELLANEOUS CONTROL SEQUENCES, MONITORING POINTS, AND ALARM POINTS: A, Provide a room pressure monitor where shown on drawings, Connect the alarm point for the monitor to the bas and indicate an alarm at the BAS when the room pressure is outside of the set point range. A. On call for humidity from a system humidistat, the two-way, modulating, normally closed steam control valve shall modulate open to satisfy set point. B. On high humidity, as sensed by a duct humidistat, the two-way modulating control valve shall close and an alarm sent to the Engineer's Office, LMC: Cath Lab #2 Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177307 3.4 MISCELLANEOUS MONITORING POINTS: A. Room Pressure Monitors; Connect each room pressure monitor to the BAS. Map all available paints, and alarm the BAS when the monitor is in alarm. Set up the monitor in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to allow the Owner's Staff to choose "isolation mode", where an alarm is sounded at the local device and the BAS if the room pressure falls below 0.01 "", we for more than an adjustable time delay (15 sec): or "normal mode" where the alarm annunciation is disabled. B. In addition to the areas indicated on the drawings, the following rooms shall have pressure monitoring; 1. Cath Lab # C. Provide an input from each medical gas -master alarm panel alarm point to the BAS, END OF SECTION 23 0993 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR MVAC CONTROLS - 05/0112015 230993-2 Equipment Replacement SECTION 23 2213 _ STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING FART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. This section includes low to high pressure steam and condensate piping for system. Materials and equipment specified in this Section include: I. Pipes and fittings B. Related Sections. The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Refer to other Division 23 sections for materials and methods for sealing pipe penetrations through basement walls and fire/smoke barriers, gauges, thermometers, flow meters, mechanical identification, mechanical insulation, condensate pumps and receiver sets, and temperature control valves and sensors, 1.2 SUBMITTALS: X Shop drawings, detailing dimensions, methods of assembly of components, and location and size of each field connection for flash tanks. B. Record Drawings At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems products in accordance with requirements of Division 23, C. Maintenance data, including data for steam and condensate specialties and special duty valves. Refer to Division 23. D. Welders' certificates certifying that welders meet the quality requirements specified in Quality Assurance below. E. Certification of compliance with specified ASTM, ASME, and ANSI manufacturing requirements for pipe, fittings, and specialties, F _ Test reports specified in Part 3 of this section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of steam and condensate piping products, of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been: in satisfactory use in similar_ service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer's Qualifications: Personnel with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on projects with steam and condensate piping work similar to that required for the project. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the provisions of the following: 1. ASME B 31.9 "Building Services Piping: for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. 2. ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code," Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualification" for qualifications « welding processes a operators. . Local Mechanical Code. STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING- 05/01/2015 232213-1 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177307 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS: B. Joints: 1. Pipe sizes 2-1/2 inches and above: Butt -welded 2. Pipe sizes 2 inches and below: Threaded, butt -welded, or socket -welded. C. Fittings: I Welded joints: Steel, ASTM A234, Grade B, ASMI B16.9, same schedule as adjoining pipe, all elbows long radius. 2. Threaded joints,- Forged steel, ASME BI 6,11, 2000 psi class. 3. Socket -welded joints: Forged steel, ASME BI 6,11, 2000 psi class. DUnions on Threaded Piping: Malleable iron, (300 psi) on piping (2 inches) and under. EFlanges and Bolts: Forged steel weld neck, ASME 1316A ASTM A105,150 psi pressure class, except (300 psi) class required adjacent to 250 psi and 300 psi class valves. Bolts shall be high strength steel ASTIVI A193, Class 2, Grade B8. Nuts shall be ASTM Alg4, 2.3 STEAM CONDENSATE PIPING: A. Includes all gravity, drip return, pumped and vacuum systems. Does not include piping system between boiler feed pumps and boilers. B. Pipe: Carbon steel, ASTM A53 Grade B or ASTM Al 06 Grade B, seamless or ERW, Schedule 80 C. Joints: 1. Pipe sizes 2-1/2 inches and above: Butt -welded. 2. Pipe sizes 2 inches and below: Threaded, butt -welded or socket -welded. D. Fittings: 1. Welded joints: Steel, ASTM A234, Grade B, ASME B 16.9, same schedule as adjoining pipe. STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING- 05/01/2015 232213-2 LMC.* Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 2, Threaded joints: Malleable iron, ASTM A47 or A197, ASME 1316.3, 300 psi class. & Socket -welded joints: Forged steel, ASME B1 611, 2000 psi class. E. Unions on Threaded Piping: Malleable iron, 300 psi. On piping 2 inches and under. F, Flanges: Forged steel weld neck, ASTM A105, AM E B16.5,150 psi. 2,4 GASKETS: A. Gaskets for flanged fittings and valves shall be spiral wound metallic type, Flexitallic or approved equal, suitably rated for not less than 150% of the system operating temperature and pressure, PART 3 - EXECUTION 31 INSPECTION: A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which steam and condensate piping materials and products are to be installed, Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATIONS: A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate the general location and arrangement of the piping systems. tocation and arrangement of piping layout take into consideration pipe sizing and friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. So far as practical, install piping as indicated. Refer to individual system spa6ifications for requirements for coordination drawing submittals, B. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connectiona. C. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, unless indicated to be exposed to view. D. Install piping at right angles and parallel to building walls, Diagonal runs are not permitted, unless expressly indicated. E. Install piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to permit prop-" insulation applications. I F. Install piping tight to stabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other permanent elements Of the building. Provide space to permit insulation applications, with I inch clearance outside the insulation. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for panel removal. G. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves, Install drains at low points in mains, risers, and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting, %" ball valve, and short Y4" threaded nipple and cap, H. Wall Penetrations: Where pipes pass through fire rated walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors, maintain the fire rated integrity. Refer to Division 23 for sealers and materials. I. Install steam supply piping at a uniform grade of I inch in forty feet downward in the direction of flow. J. install branch connections to supply mains using 45 degree fittings in main with take -off out the top of the main. Use of •n #•« "tee" fittings is permissible, where use of 45 degree 2. -Extend driplegs at vertical risers beyond the rise. 3. Provide an 18 inch long drip leg. For steam mains smaller than 6 inches, provide line size drip leg. In steam mains 6 inches and larger, provide drip legs sized 2 pipe sizes smaller than the main, but not less than 4 inches. 4Strainer blowdowns shall be equipped with ball valves with hose end and cap to allow removal of dirt and scale. 5. Install steam traps close to drip legs. 33 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: A. General: Hanger, supports, and anchors devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Supports and Anchors." & Install the following pipe attachments: 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet in length. 2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or longer. 3. Pipe roller complete . MSS Type 44 for multiple horizontal runs, 20 feet or longer, supported on a trapeze. STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING- 05/01/2015 232213-4 LMC: Cath .♦Replacement 177.307 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. A. Welded Joints: Comply with the requirements in ASME Code B31.9 - ",wilding Services Piping." B. Threaded Joints: Conform to ANSI €31.211:1, tapered pipe threads for field cut threads. Jain pipe, fittings, and valves as follows; 1. Note the internal length of threads in fittings or value ends; and proximity of internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint. . .Align threads at point of assembly. 3. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads (except where dry seal threading is specified). 4. Assemble joint to appropriate thread depth. When using a wrench on valves place the wrench on the valve end into which the pipe is being threaded. 5, Damaged Threads, Do not use pipe with threads which are corroded or damaged. If a weld opens during cutting or threading operations, that portion of pipe shall not be used, C. Flanged Joints: Align flanges surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly to appropriate torque specified by the bolt manufacturer. .5 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS: A. Piping size for supply and return shall be same size as the equipment connections, B. Install traps and control valves in accessible locations as close as possible to the equipment. C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. Where multiple, parallel control valves are installed, only one bypass is required, r Install vacuum breaker downstream from the control. bypass, as close as possible to the coil inlet connection, E. Install pressure gauges at coil inlet connections. F. Provide an appropriate trap, sized at 3 times the condensate load of the equipment, at % psig differential at outlet of coils and at drip leg, .6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL. A. Preparation for testing: Prepare steam and condensate piping in accordance with ASME B 31.9 and as follows: 1. Leave joints including welds uninsulated and exposed for examination during the test. LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 1 Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints which cannot sustain the reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are not practical, isolate expansion joints from testing. 1 Flush system with clean water, Clean strainers. 4Isolate equipment that is not to be subjected to the test pressure from the piping. If a valve is used to isolate the equipment, its closure shall be capable of seating against the test pressure without damage to the valve. Flanged joints at which blinds are inserted to isolate equipment need not be tested. Install relief valve set at a pressure not more than 1/3 higher than the test pressure, to protect against damage by expansion of liquid or other source of overpressure during the test, + r+... R.R. R •«: ♦R». t - .;. t•. .. .. t R R t. R: t. t •• R: • t^ • r "' t R t R s r R a. Steam and Condensate Systems: 100 psig or 150 percent of system pressure, Whichever is • r After the hydrostaticpressure has been applied for at least + hours,piping joints and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components as appropriate, and repeat hydrostatic test Until there are no leaks. 3,7 CLEANING: ImmediatelyX After testing a hydronic system for proper operation of all automatic devices and controls, operate the entire system for one week, then drain and wash out with caustic soda. baskets and refill the system with system media and leave in proper working order, After the system has been in operation for one tthoroughlyR M r for or «R"and where necessary, clean r repair END OF • PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of metal ductwork is indicated on drawings and in schedules, and by requirements of this section. B. Exterior insulation of metal ductwork is specified in other Division -23 sections, and is included as work of this section. C. Refer to other Division -23 sections for ductwork accessories. D. Refer to other Division -23 sections for fans and air handling units. E. Refer to other Division -23 sections for testing, adjusting, and balancing of metal ductwork systems. 12 DEFINITIONS; A. Low Pressure Duct: Duct required by the drawings, specifications, or referenced standards to be constructed to 2" or less, positive or negative pressure class. C Medium or g - 1 Duct required by drawings,a- • or -• standards • be constructed to w positive or e•« - pressure ASSURANCE:1.3 QUALITY AManufacturers Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of metal ductwork products of s- and sizes required, whose products have been • in similar service for • B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on projects ductwork • that required for • t. C. References to SMACNA, ASHRAE and NPPA are minimum requirements, the Contractor shall fabricate, construct, install, seal and leak test all ductwork as described in this specification and as shown on the drawings, in addition to these minimum standard references. METAL DUCTS — 05101/2015 233113-1 LMC: Cath wiBi-Plane Equipment Replacement D. Codes and Standards: 1, SMACNA Standards: Comply with the current SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible" for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork.. Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual" for testing of duct systems. . NFPA Compliance: Comply with NEPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and VentilatingSystems" and NFPA 90B "Standard for the Installation of Warm► Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems" F. SMACNA Industrial Construction Standards. F. Field Reference Manual: Have available for reference at project field office, copy of the current SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible", and the current SMACNA "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual". x «« « « CClean Duct Protocol Procedures: Submit written procedures confirming compliance with the clean duct protocol. D. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems, in accordance with requirementsof Divisions E. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data « parts lists forductwork materials and products. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and record drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Divisions I and 23. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Protection: Protect ductwork, accessories and purchased products from damage during shipping, storage and handling.. Prevent end damage and prevent dirt and moisture from entering ducts and fittings. B. Storage: Store ductwork inside elevated from floor on pallets and protected from weather, dirt, dust and debris. METAL DUCTS -- 05/01/2015 233113-2 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane EquipmentReplacement 177307 2. In transport: Ductwork shalt be shipped in closed trucks or trailers on pallets. End covers shall be maintained at all times. 3. At the site: Minimize ductwork in storage —' just in time" delivery is encouraged. Ductwork shall be stored on pallets in weathertight enclosures. Ductwork may be stored on pallets in the building if the building is weather -tight, in a dedicated location separated from the rest of the construction area by dust tight partitions. End covers shall be maintained at all times. 4. During installation: Duct sections shall be staged at the Installation location only a needed for installation within 4 hours. Any field assembly of ducts over 96" shall be made only in dedicated dust -free areas, or where other construction activities in the vicinity have ceased to produce dust, dirt or debris. lend caps shall be maintained on all openings except one being actively joined. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements„ provide products by one of the following: 1. Flexible Ducts: a, Flexmaster b. Theraflex 2. Duct Take Off Fittings a. Hercules Industries b. Flexmaster C, Thermeflex d. Ominair 2.2 DUCTWORK MATERIALS: A. sheet Metal: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate ductwork from galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527, lockfprming quality; with g 90 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A 525; and mill phosphatized for exposed locations. Provide flat seam construction where standing seams area hazard to the Owner's operation personnel, B. Stainless Steel Sheet: Where indicated, provide stainless steel complying with ASTM A 157; Type 304 or 316; with No. 4 finish where exposed to view in occupied spaces, No. 'I finish elsewhere. Protect finished surfaces with mill -applied adhesive protective paper, maintained through fabrication and installation, C. Aluminum Sheet; Where indicated„ provide aluminum sheet complying with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS. A. general: Provide miscellaneous materials and products of types and sizes indicated and, where not otherwise indicated, provide type and size required to comply with ductwork system requirements including proper connection of ductwork and equipment. METAL DUCTS — 0510112015 233113-3 INSERTION LOSS, PER W SECTION, FLOW LESS THAN 2500 FPM - ------- - - - dia. a. Flexmaster Type 8M F. Duct take off fittings to air terminals: same as for individual air inlets and outlets, less the damper. 111111111piip!� iv�1111 p 11111 2A FABRICATION: A. Fabricate ductwork in 4, 8, 10 or 12 -ft lengths, unless otherwise indicated or required to complete runs. Preassemble work in shop to greatest extent possible, so as to minimize field METAL DUCTS — 05/01/2015 233113-4 flangeassembly of systems, Disassemble systems only to extent necessary for shipping and handling. Match (-) mark sections for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Fabricate ductwork of gauges and reinforcement complying with the latest SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards". Minimum 26 GA where ducts are within corridors. CWhere the standard allows the choice of external reinforcing or internal tie rods, only the external reinforcing options shall be used. D. If manufacturer joining systems are used as •:.rt of the reinforcing, the El rating and rigidity class shall be equivalent tothe reinforcing requirements of the standard. Submit product data. E, Aluminum duct shall be fabricated using the aluminum thickness equivalence table in the standard. Simply increasing the thickness by two gauges is not acceptable. " Fabricate duct fittings to match adjoining ducts, and to damply with duct requirements as applicable to fittings.. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate elbows and offsets with center -line radius equal to 1.5 times the associated duct width, and fabricate to include turning vanes in elbows where shorter radius is necessary. 900 mitered elbows with darning vanes may be used where specifically shown on drawings. Mitered elbows or offsets of other than 90" shall not be used. Two 900 mitered elbows shall be separated by a minimum of 2 equivalent duct diameters. Use radiused "Ogee" for offsets less than 900. Limit angular tapers to 30 deg. for contracting tapers and 20 deg, for expanding tapers. Divided flow fittings shall be 45" inlet branches, stationary splitters and elbows, or as shown on drawings. G. Fabricate ductwork with accessories, installed during fabrication to the greatest extent possible. Refer to Division -23 section "Ductwork Accessories" for accessary requirements. Z5 ROUND DUCTWORK: A. Material. galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527, lockforing quality„ with ASTM A 525, G90 zinc coating, mill phosphatized. Spiral lockseam construction. Individual runouts to air devices may be longitudinal seam. B, gauge: In accordance with the SMACNA"HVAC Duct Construction Standards", minimum 25 gauge. C. Elbows. One piececonstruction for 90 deg. and 45 deg. elbows 14" and smaller. Provide multiple gore construction' for larger diameters with standing seam circumferential joint. Radius to centerline shall be 1.5 times duct diameter. Slot welded and bonded construction, Elbows on runouts to individual air devices' may be pleated or adjustable. D. Divided Flow Fittings: 90 deg. tees, constructed with branch spot welded and banded to duct fitting body, with minimum " flange shaped to fit main duct. PART 3 _ EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION; A. general: Examine areas and conditions under which metal ductwork is to be installed. Cho not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF METAL DUCTWORK: A. Duct Sealing. METAL DUCTS — 0510112015 233113-5 MOURN 1. Seat all low pressure ducts to SMACNA Seat Class "B". Z Seat all medium and high pressure ducts to SMACNA Seal Class "A". B. General: Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve air -tight and noiseless (no objectionable noise) systems, capable of performing each indicated service. Install each run with minimum number of joints. Align ductwork accurately at connections, within 1/8" misalignment tolerance and with internal surfaces smooth.' Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors of type which will hold ducts true -to -shape and to prevent buckling, popping or compressing, Support vertical ducts at every floor. H. Penetrations: Where ducts pass through fire rated walls and do not contain fire or smoke dampers, protect with fire stop material installed in accordance with its listing, Where ducts pass through interior partitions or exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct 6r duct insulationwith sheet metal flanges of same gauge as duct. Overlap opening on all four sides by at least 1-1/2". Fasten to duct only. Where ducts penetrate non -fire rated, mechanical, electrical or acoustically sensitive walls, provide 1/2 " to %11 annular space between duct and wall, pack annular space with mineral wood insulation, and caulk both sides with non -hardening acoustical sealant. Coordination: Coordinate duct installations with installation of accessories, dampers coil frames, equipment, controls and other associated work of ductwork system. J. Installation: Install metal ductwork in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards and Industrial Construction Standards. K Temporary Closure: At ends of ducts which are not connected to equipment or air distributio devices at time of ductwork installation, provide temporary closure of polyethylene film or oth covering which will prevent entrance of dust and debris until time connections are to be completed. I METAL DUCTS — 05/01/2015 233113-6 LMC: Cath Lala #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 3.3 INSTALLATION OF DUCT TAKE -OFF FITTINGS: A. Fully seal all joints. B. Sheet metal screw regulator arm to duct after balance is complete. Marr and date position of regulator arm. C. Insulation over regulator arm is not required. 3A INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE DUCTS: A. Maximum Length: For any duct run using flexible ductwork, do not exceed 6'- 0". B. Installation: Install in accordance with S ACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible".. C. Full inside diameter of flexible duct shall be maintained. Support to prevent kinking. D. Flexible duct shall not be installed above an inaccessible ceiling unless the air device is set in a frame allowing access to both ends of the flexible duct. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: & Leakage "Tests: Conduct duct leakage test in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. Repair leaks and repeat tests until total leakage is less than the maximum permissible leakage as specified below. B. General: 1. Ductwork pressure tests shall be observed by Architect/Engineer prior to installation of insulation. . Ductwork systems in ±3" W.G. pressure class and higher shall be tested in their entirety for leaks. Arbitrary sections of ductwork in ±2" W.G. and lower pressure class shall be tested as required by Architect/Engineer. . rest Failures; Duct systems shall be repaired if test pressure and leakage requirements are not met or if air noise condition is encountered. Repairs and sealing shall be done with sheet metal, tape, sealant or a combination thereof. C. Test Equipment. 1, Portable rotary type blower or tank type vacuum cleaner with control damper, Equipment shell have sufficient capacity to properly test reasonably larger duct system section. Equipment shall have been calibrated within 2 years of the testing: Z Orifice assembly consisting of straightening vanes and calibrated` orifice plate mounted in a straight tube with properly located pressure taps. 3. Two (2) U-tube manometers, one to measure drop across calibrated orifice and one to measure S.P. in duct being tested. ` Provide low differential pressure Dwyer mgnehelic gauges for low leak testing in lieu of U-tube manometers, 4. Provide Dwyer magnehelic gauge with 0-.25" W.C. range for testing 0% leakage ductwork. METAL DUCTS — 05/0112015 233113-7 LMC: Cath Lab #2 - Bi -Pyne Equipment Replacement 177.367 D. Testing Pressures and Permissible Leakage: 1. Test pressure shall be equal to the construction class. Negative pressure duct shall be tested at the equivalent positive pressure. 2. Allowable leakage shall be determined from the following equation (or figure 4-1 in the above referenced Standard): F =CL (P),ss Where: F = Allowable leakage factor CFM/100 Sq. Ft. CL - Leakage Class P = Test pressure inches W.C. . Leakage class shall be as follows: a. Seal class A, Round or oval duct, CL = 3. b. Seal class A„ Rectangular duct, CL = 6- c. Seal class B, Round or oval duct, CL = 6. d. Seal class B, Rectangular duct, CL = 12. e. Seal class C, Round or oval duct, CL =12. f. Seal class C, Rectangular duct, CL = 24, 4Recor&alt tests using the procedure and forms in the above referenced standard. 5All plenums and casings shall be tested by pressuring to the pressure class indicated and visually observing leakage and panel deflection. a.. No noticeable leakage shall be allowed. b. Deflection shall be less than 1/8" per foot: ! EQUIPMENT O A. General-, Connect metal ductwork to equipment as indicated. Provide -flexible connection for each ductwork connection to equipment mounted on vibration isolators, and/or equipment containingrotatingmachinery. Provide # #" doors# ! for service, maintenance and inspection of ductwork accessories. See section 23 33 0. 3.7 ADJUSTING AND s 233113`8 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement fan housing, fan blades, turning vanes, filters, filter housings, reheat coils, and supply diffusers are all considered part of the HVAC system. B. Clean ductwork Internally, unit by unit as it is installed, of dust and debris. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances. Where ductwork is to be painted clean and prepare surface for painting. C. Protection. - 1 Store duct a minimum of 4" above ground or floor to avoid damage from weather or spills. Z Cover all stored ducts to protect from moisture, dust or debris. 1 Maintain a cover on all ends of installed ductwork at all times, except when actually connecting additional sections of duct. D� Strip protective paper from stainless ductwork surfaces, and repair finish wherever it has been damaged. E. Balancing: Refer to Division -23 section 'Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for air distribution balancing of metal ductwork; not work of this section. Seal any leaks in ductwork that become apparent in balancing process. 3.8 INSPECTION: C. The report will be used to determine if the ductwork cleanliness is acceptable, The Verification of HVAC System Cleanliness provisions of National Air Duct Cleaners Association (NADCA): "Assessment, Cleaning & Restoration of HVAC Systems (ACR 2006) shall be used. A synopsis is given below: I The report will be used as a visual inspection. The system will be considered clean if the interior surfaces are free from non -adhered substances and debris, Z If the visual inspection in inconclusive, thena surface comparison test will be performed. A section will be cleaned by a brush and vacuum method in accordance with NADCA ACR 2006, The system will be considered clean if there is no significant visual difference in the surface characteristics between the recently cleaned section and the adjacent sections. 3. If the surface comparison test is inconclusive, then the NADCA Vacuum Test will be performed to make a final cleanliness determination. END OF SECTION 23 3113 METAL DUCTS — 05/01/2015 233113-9 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 SECTION 23 3300 _ AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A - ans: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of ductwork accessories, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Industry Standards: Comply with ASHRAE recommendations pertaining to construction of ductwork accessories, except as otherwise indicated. C. UL Compliance: Construct, test, and label fire dampers in accordance with UL Standard 5 oFire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers" and U.L. Standard 555S "Motor -Driven Fire/Smoke Dampers." VentilatingD. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of NFPA 90A "Air Conditioning and pertaining # installation of ductwork i compliance:E. sMAcNA ducts complyDamper # Heat Stop #' F. All fire dampers, smoke dampers, fire/smoke dampers and radiation dampers shall meet th latest local building code requirements. 1.2 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each type of ductwork accessory, including dimensions, capacities, and materials of construction; and installation instructions. D. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems products, in accordance with requirementsof Division -M.ta: Submit manufacturers maintenance#ata including pafor each #- of duct accessory.♦. this data, r# data, # shop drawings manual; in accordance .# of a PART lr A r PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES — 05/01/2015 233300-1 LMC. Cath Lab #2 m Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 a. Greenheck b, AWV C, Air Balance; Inc, d. Anemostat e. Arrow Louver and Damper„ Div. of Arrow United Industries; Inca f. Louvers & Dampers,. Inc, g. Penn Ventilator Co. h. Pottoroff i, Ruskin 2. Fire Dampers and Smoke Dampers: a. Greenheck b. Air Balance, Inc. C. Phillips Industries, Inc: Conaire Division d. Ruskin e, Pottoroff Turning Vanes: a. Aero Clyne Co, b. Airsan Corp. c. Barb -Aire d. Duro Dyne Corp. e. Environmental Elements Corp.; Subs. Koppers Co., Inc. f. Hart & Cooley Mfg. Co. Q. Duct Hardware: as Ventfabrics„ Inc. b. Young Regulator Co. G. Duro-Dyne Corp. , Duct Access Doors. a. Kess b. Greenheck C. Flexmaster d. Ceco-Advanced Air e. Duro Clyne Corp. f. Ventfabrics, Inc. 6. Flexible Connections; a. Duro Dyne Corp. b, Ventfabrics, Inc, C. General Rubber Corp. (Process & Exhaust Only) 2,2 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS: A. Low Pressure Rectangular Dampers (less than 2000 FPM and under 2" W,C. S.P. Differential); 1. For 12" in height or larger, use multiple opposed blade type and close fitted to ducts. The frame and blades shall be constructed of 16 ga. galvanized steel with plated steel AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES — 05/01/2015 233300-2 ,177.307 shaft mounted with synthetic bearings. Linkage shall be in -jamb fixed type located outside the airstream made of plated steel tie bar and crank plates, with stainless steel pivots. Damper panels shall not exceed 48"wide, Provide jack shafting w en uct size required is greater than 48" wide. Provide notched shaft end indicating damper position, locking quadrant to fix damper position and handle, Provide stand off bracket for insulated ducts, For flat oval and round ductwork, provide type C housing. Z For ducts less than 12" in height, frame shall be 18 ga. blade galvanized steel, steel axle with synthetic bearings locking quadrant handle and notched shaft end indicating damper position. Provide stand off bracket for insulated ducts. B. Low Pressure Round Dampers (less than, 1800 FPM and under V W.C. S.P. differential): 1 For low pressure spin -in fitting dampers serving individual returns/diffusers, see 15891 Z Dampers 4" diameter through 18" diameter shall be 20 ga. galvanized steel frame and blade, utilize multi -blade square dampers with transitions for ducts over 18" diameter, Axle shaft shall be plated steel with retainers mounted on synthetic bearings with notched end shaft indicating damper position, locking quadrant and handle. Provide stand off brackets for insulated ducts. a, Greenheck M8DR-50 or approved equivalent. C. Medium/High Pressure Rectangular Dampers (less than 4000 FPM and under 6" WC, (48" wide or less) S.P. or 8" W.C. S.P. {36" wide or less)): 1. Dampers shall be opposed blade for volume control and parallel blade for isolation/shut-off service. 2. Frame shall be 1/8" thick 6063-T5 alloy aluminum frame. Vades shall be .081 " thick 6060-T5 extruded aluminum, airfoil shape. Blade edge seats shall be vinyl, silicone, or other approved synthetic and metallic compression seals at the iambs. Axles shall be hexagonal or square plated steel mounted on bronze oilite or synthetic (ACETAL) bearings. Linkage shall be in -jamb type located outside the airstream, Maximum damper size shall be 48" wide and 60" high. For isolation or shut-off duty, damper leakage shall not exceed 9.5 CFM/Ft2 at 4" W.C. S,P. differential. Provide extended shaft with notched end indicating damper position, locking quadrant and handle. Provide stand off brackets for insulated ducts. D. Medium/High Pressure Round and Flat Oval Dampers (less than 3000 FPM and under 4" WCS.P. differential): ROUND Under 6" dia........ ....... 12 Gauge 6" to 18" dia................................... .. ......... ....................„......14 Gauge FLAT OVAL 6” to 12" wide. . ...... ...... 2 x 1/2 x 14 gauge channel 13" to 48" wide. .... ......... ...... x 1/2 x 1/8 channel AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES — 05/01/2015 23 3300.:3 2. Damper blades shall be galvanized steel as follows: 0 ROUND 4"" to 15" diameter ............. 12 Gauge FLAT" OVAL WideGauge Axlesbe diameterplated steel up to i diameter # r wide flat oval, and 3/47 diameter plated steel over 18". Stainless sleeve bearings pressed in to the frame. 5. For isolation or shut-off service damers shall he provided with edge seals with a leakage rate not to exceed -7 CFM/ft at V W.G. S.P. differential (lased on 18" diameter). B. Fire Dampers: Provide dynamic rated type B or C fire dampers except as noted on drawings, Construct sleeve of galvanized steel with bonded red acrylic enamel finish, gauge as require by the listing. All fire dampers shall be UL labeled. Provide fusible link rated at 160 to 165 degF (71 to 74 deg� C) unless otherwise indicated, See architectural drawings for the separations and listings. Provide horizontal mounted fire damper with positive lock in closed position, r with the following additional AIR ! 05/01/2015 2333it LMC. Cath Lab Bi -Plane EquipmentReplacement C. Damper Blade Assembly.- Curtain Type: DMade Material Galvanized steel. B. Provide integral sleeve type G fire dampers for sidewall air devices terminating at fire rated walls. Ruskin DIBD20-G or equivalent. 2.5 TURNING VANES: A. Fabricated "Turning Vanes: Provide fabricated 22 gauge, single blade or 24 gauge double bladed 4.1/2" radius; 3-1f4" spacing turning vanes and type 2, 4'-1/2" wide runners, constructed in accordance with SMACNA'"HVAC Duct Construction Standards" Fig 2.3. B. Do not use trailing edge turning vanes. 2.6 DUCT HARDWARE: A. General. Provide duct hardware, manufactured by one manufacturer for all items on project, for the following: BTest Holes: Provide in ductwork at fan inlet and outlet, and elsewhere'as indicated, duct test holes, consisting of slot and cover, for instrument tests. DAccess Door for Round Duct Greater Than 20": 18" round insulated double wall access door in #» .# frame, attached to duct sectionto tee fifting. rectangularE. Access Doors for Flat Oval DoctUse door specified for medium and high pressure duct in flat portion; use door specified for round duct in curved portion. AIR DUCT . 05/01/2015 3300 • «- w « • • •w r w w w w- .•-w « r ••. " « w M M«i. «^' « ". .ice. r w « w «. w w. w � • . ww• 'w w .w • www w w w w w � - w« ^w « -. - .: w -. w .; .« wa ! «x `• 1, r# ., � w w w w .w w, w. w w- w w w w• a x wl w www . • •«- +w w :w 3.1 INSPECTION: A. Examine areas and conditions under which ductwork accessories will be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to the Engineer; 12 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES: A. Install ductwork accessories in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, with applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMA NA standards, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended function. t3. Install turning vanes in square or rectangular JCI deg. elbows in supply, return and exhaust air systems, and elsewhere as indicated. C. Install access doors to open against system air pressure, with latches operable from either side, except outside only where duct is too small for person to enter. D, Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, as necessary to interface installation of ductwork accessories properly with other work. E. Provide duct access doors whether shown or not for inspection and cleaning upstream of all coils, fans, automatic dampers, fire dampers (minimum 16" x 24" in ducts larger than 18"), fire/smoke dampers, duct smoke detectors and elsewhere as indicated. Review locations prior to fabrication. Provide multiple access doors for large ductwork to provide adequate reach to equipment. P. Install fire dampers and smoke dampers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES — 0510112015 233300-6 LMC. Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 G. Provide fire dampers and smoke dampers at locations shown, where ducts and outlets pass through fire rated components, and where required by authorities having jurisdiction. H. Provide balancing dampers at points on low pressure supply, return, and exhaust systems when; branches are taken from larger ducts and as required for air balancing. 1. Provide balancing dampers on high pressure systems where indicated. Use splitter dampers only where indicated on Drawings. J. Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment inducts associated with fans and equipment subject to forced vibration. Provide matching flanged backing frame with flexible connector where flanged fan connections are provided. 33 COORDINATION: A. Coordinate with installers of other work to ensure that operators, reset devices, and fusible links are accessible at all fire, smoke, and fire/smoke dampers. B. Show access space on coordination drawings. Locate over lay -in ceilings and above corridors wherever practical: C. Order'raght/leftttop/bottom arrangement as required to minimize field modifications. 3A FIELD QUALITY CONTROL. A. Operate installed ductwork accessories after installation to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test for air leakage while systema is operating. Repair or replace faulty accessories, as required to obtain proper operation and leakproof performance. B: After installation, test every fire and fire/smoke damper for proper operation, provide letter to the Architect/Engineer certifying this work is complete and all dampers are functioning properly. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A. Adjusting: Adjust ductwork accessories for proper settings, install fusible links in fire dampers and adjust for proper action: B. Label access doors in accordance with Division -23 section "Mechanical Identification". C. Final positioning of manual dampers is specified in Division -3 section ""Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing". D. Cleaning: Clean factory -finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint. 3.6 EXTRA STOCK: A. Furnish extra fusible links to Owner, one link for every 10 installed of each temperature range; obtain receipt. END OF SECTION 23 3300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES -- 05/01/2015 233300-7 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 SECTION 23 8413 - HUMIDIFIERS PART I - GENERAL 11 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: B. Humidifiers furnished as part of factory -fabricated equipment, are specified as part of equipment assembly in other Division 23 sections. C. Refer to Division 3 for concrete pads, 1 0.... M.. annoiNamawalt - ga E. Refer to Division 26 sections for the following work,* not work of this section. I . Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on humidifier. Include starters, disconnects, and required electrical devices, except where specified as furnished, or factory -installed, by manufacturer. 2. Interlock wiring between electrically -operated humidifiers; and between humidifiers a field -installed control devices. 3. Interlock wiring specified as factory -installed is work of this section. F. Provide the following electrical work as work of this section, complying with requirements of Division -26 sections: I Control wiring between field -installed controls, indicating devices, and humidifier control panels. Z Control wiring specified as work of Division 23 for Automatic Temperature Controls is work of that section. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE: X Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of humidifiers, of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Codes and Standards: I ARI Compliance: Test and rate humidifiers in accordance with ARI 610 "Standard for Central System Humidifiers". 2, ARI Compliance: Test and rate humidifiers in accordance with ARI 620 "Standard for Self -Contained Humidifiers". 3. ARI Compliance: Install humidifiers in accordance with ARI 630 "Standard for Selection, Installation, and Servicing of Humidifiers". 4. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electrical components required as part of humidifiers, which are listed and labeled by UL and comply with NEMA Standards. 5. NEC Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Code {NEPA 70) as applicable to installation and electrical connections of ancillary electrical components of humidifiers, HUMIDIFIERS — 05101/2015 238413-1 1.3 SUBMITTALS: ..uct Data: imit manufacturer's technical product data, including rated capacities specialtiesselected model clearly indicated, weights, installation andstart-up instructions, and fumished ! accessories. weightShop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly -type shop drawings indicating dimensions, •... t. i required clearances, and methods of bly of components. Wiring Diagrams: Sut « n a >. . electrical ,,. • „ for power supplyi to humidifiers. Submit manufacturer's ladder -type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate i ^.. portions of i that are factory -installed and portions to be field -installed. D. Record Drawings'. At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems products, in accordance with requirements of Division 23. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each humidifier; control, and accessary; including "trouble -shooting" maintenance guide. Install this data, product data, shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 23. PART 2 -- PRODU TS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: following:AManufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 1. Electric Replaceable Electrode Type Steam Humidifiers: ; . tri -Stearn b, Nortec Industries, Inc. c. Armstrong International installation.22 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS: A. General- Except as otherwise indicated, provide packaged humidifiers and ancillary equipme with manufacturer's standard materials and components as indicated and published product information, designed and constructed by manufacturer, and as required for complete j • i w � is M' .• ii #' •. ^M viii ai "' •.. •^ i i i • ai i. i. f i • •^ • i •^ • • MONSOON ,.•i* i iIM i i • r • • - • i!- • • • t • • • • •� • 238413-2 tempering of drain to prevent temperature of water going to drain from exceeding 140 deg F. Humidifier shall be compatible with potable unsoftened or softened water. Humidifier shall have an integral V air gap. 2. Airflow Proving Switch, Sail Type: Airflow proving switch shall be a sail operated electr switch for field installation. Switch makes @ 250 Ipm, break$ @75 fpm. Maximum operating temperature r sail: 1700 F. Maximum operating temperature for mAtitch: 12 R 1 Duct High Humidity Limit.* Provide sensor to trim humidifier output if ducthumidity rises above setpoint (90%)� Humidifier shall continue to operate to meet the room humidity transmitter signal with a reduced output to avoid exceeding the high limit sensor. PART 3 - EXECUTION I 3.1 INSPECTION: X Examine areas and conditions under which humidifiers are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 12 INSTALLATION OF HUMIDIFIERS: A. General: Install humidifiers where indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that humidifiers comply with requirements and serve intended purposes, B. Access: Provide access space around humidifiers for service as indicated, but in no case less than that recommended by manufacturer, C. Support: Provide supports from substrate for humidifiers as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. D. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory -mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer. HUMIDIFIERS -- 05/01/2015 238413-3 LMC, Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177307 1 Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements of Division -26 sections. Do not proceed With equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment Installer. E. Ductwork Installation: Refer to Division -23 section "Metal Ductwork". Provide air -tight seat at each penetration of humidifiers into ductwork. Provide duct access door for service. F, Steam Piping Connections: Refer to Division -23 section "Steam Piping and Condensate Heating Piping". Provide separate valved branch to supply humidifier from top of dripped steam runout. G, Make -Up Water and Drain Connections: Refer to Division -23 section "Basic Piping Materials and Methods". Provide separate valved branch to supply humidifier. Provide backflow prevention device as required by Plumbing Code having jurisdiction. 33 FIELD OUALITY CONTROL: A. Upon completion of installation and prior to initial operation, test and demonstrate that air humidification equipment is leak -tight, B. Repair or replace air humidification equipment as required to eliminate leaks, and retest as specified to demonstrate compliance. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A, Start -Up: Start-up humidifiers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Adjust controls for project conditions. 2. Adjust high limit controls to prevent excessive humidity output, 3. Adjust drain cycles for unoccupied times where possible. & Refer to Division -23 section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for humidifier balancing; not work of this section. C. Cleaning: Clean factory -finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint. END OF SECTION 23-8413 HUMIDIFIERS — 05/01/2015 238413-4 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 SECTION 26 0500 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL PANT 1 - GENERAL. 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. All drawings associated with the entire project, including general provisions of the Contract„ including The General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, General and Supplementary Conditions and Division -1 Conditions specification sections shall apply to the Division 26 specifications and drawings. The Contractor shall be responsible for reviewing and becoming familiar with the aforementioned and all other Contract Documents associated with the project. B. related Sections. Defer to all sections in Division 23. Refer to Division 26 specification sections and Division 26 drawings. C. Where contradictions occur between this section and Division 1, the more stringent requirement shall apply. D. Contractor shall be defined as any and all entities involved with the construction of the project. 1.2 SUMMARY.- A. U MARY,A. This Section specifies the basic requirements for electrical installations and includes requirements common to more than one section of Division 26, It expands and supplements the requirements specified in sections of Division 1 through 23. 1.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: A. Drawings are diagrammatic in character and do not necessarily indicate every required conduit, box, fitting, etc. B. Drawings and specifications are complementary.Whatever is called for in either is binding a though called for in both. report any discrepancies to the Engineer and obtain written instructions before proceeding. Where any contradictions occur between the specifications and the drawings the more stringent requirement shall apply. The contractor shall include pricing for the more stringent and expensive requirements. G. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. R Arrange for chases, slats, and openings in other building components to accommodate electrical installations. L Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the work. give particular attention to large equipment requiring an access path for positioning prior to closing -in the building or space. J. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install electrical conduits, boxes, and overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. ' In general„ keep installations tight to structure. LMC: Cath Lab #2 —Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 B. Provide proper documentation of equipment, product data and shop drawings to all entities involved in the project. Coordination shall include:, but not be limited to; the: following: Eli • #.# # LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 1. Carefully survey existing conditions prior to bidding work, In addition, Contractor shall complete a thorough ceiling cavity survey prior to developing 3D drawing. 2, Contractor shall be responsible for showing all existing conditions on the 3D coordination drawings, 1 Provide proper coordination of electrical work with existing conditions. 4, Report any issues or conflicts immediately to Engineer before commencing with work and prior to purchasing equipment and materials. 1,5 COORDINATION WITH OTHER DIVISIONS: A. General - I , Coordinate all work to conform with the progress of the work of other trades. Z Complete the entire installation as soon as the condition of the building will permit. No extras will be allowed for corrections of ill timed work, when such corrections are required for proper installation of other work. B. Coordinate ceiling cavity space carefully with all trades. In the event of conflict, install mechanical and electrical systems within the cavity space allocation in the following order of priority: 1. Equipment and required clearances 2. Plumbing waste, cooling coil drain piping and roof drain mains and leaders. & Pneumatic tube systems. 4. Ductwork mains 5. Plumbing vent piping 6Medical gas/lab gas systems 7. Low pressure ductwork and air devices. 8. Electrical and communication conduits, raceways and cable tray. 9. Domestic hot and cold water 10. Hydronic piping 11. Fire sprinkler mains, branch piping and drops (locate as tight to structure as possible). 12. DDC control wiring and other low voltage systems. 13. Fire alarm systems, C� Chases, Inserts and Openings: I Provide measurements, drawings and layouts so that openings, inserts and chases in new construction can be built in as construction progresses. 2. Check sizes and locations of openings provided. Including the access panels for equipment in hard lid ceilings and wall cavities. 3. Any cutting and patching made necessary by failure to provide measurements, drawings and layouts at the proper time shall be done at no additional cost in contract SUM. D. Support Dimensions: Provide dimensions and drawings so that concrete basis and other equipment supports to be provided under other sections of the specifications can be built at the proper time. LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 E. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured in place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. F. Coordinate the cuffing and patching of building components to accommodate the installation of equipment G.Modifications '# d as result of # resolveprovide # . # # drawings or . attentions i changes required in otherwork as resultof ## . #ns shall be #...R for by M# i..# .. Contractor/Subcontractor 1.6 DESIGN WORK REQUIRED BY CONTRACTOR: 10. onstruction of project « # Contractor M include the detailing ,. # design # several systems and/or subsystems. All such design work associated with the development of the coordination drawings be the complete responsibility of # #. B. The Contractor shall take the full responsibility to develop and complete routing strategies which will allow fully coordinated system to be installed in a fully functional manner. The Engineers contract drawings shall be for system design intent and general configurations. CSystems or subsystems which require design responsibility by the contractor include but are not limited to: 1: Final coordinated distribution systems within the ceiling cavity. 2. Any system not fully detailed 3.. Fire alarm shop drawings 4. Equipment supports, hangers, anchors and seismic systems not fully detailed nor specified in these documents, or catalogued by the manufacturer. a. Seismic restraint systems 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS - A, The contractor shall be required to attend a pre-bid walk-thru if required and shall make themselves familiar with the existing conditions, No additional costs to the Owner shall be accepted for additional work for existing conditions. B. Meld verify all conditions prior to submitting bids. LMC: Cath Lab ##2 — Bi -Plana Equipment Replacement 177.07 1.6 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES: A. Execute and inspect all work in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories (UL), and all local and state codes, rules and regulations applicable to the trade affected as a minimum, but if the plans and/or specifications call for requirements that exceed these rules and regulations, the more stringent requirement shall be followed. Follow application sections and requirements and tasting procedures of NFPA, IEEE, NEMA, CBM, ANSI, NECA, IDEA and ZETA. B. Comply with standards in effect at the date of these Contract Documents, except where a standard or specific date or edition is indicated. C. All material used on this project shall be UL listedandlabeled and be acceptable to the authority haying jurisdiction as suitable for the use intended. U. After entering into contract, Contractor will be held to complete all work necessary to meet these requirements without additional expense to the Owner. 1.9 PERMITS AND FEES: A. Owner or Contractor shall pay all fees required for connection to municipal and public utility facilities. B. Contractor shall arrange for and pay for all inspections, licenses and certificates required in connection with the work. 1.10 PROJECT SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS: A. All electrical and fire alarm systems shall be installed to meet NEPA and IBC Seismic requirements. 1. Where any conflicts arise the more stringent requirements shall be applicable. 2. The design of the seismic requirements shall be the responsibility of the contractor: 1.11 TEMPORARY FACILITIES: A. Light, Feat„ Power, Etc. 1. Responsibility for providing temporary electricity, heat and other facilities shall be as identified in these specifications, as shown on the drawings and as specified in Division 1. B. Building distribution equipment and devices (existing or new) shall not be used without written permission of the Owner. If used for temporary power, the equipment shall be properly maintained and any damage resulting from use shall be repaired by the Contractor. The guarantee period for new equipment shall not begin until the equipment is turned over to the Owner. C. If AC power systems or their backup systems serving telecommunications, computer equipment, or their associated HVAC equipment and controls are taken out of service, for any reason, the Contractor shall be responsible for providing temporary systems during the period when the AC power systems or their backup systems are out of service. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing temporary power to all loads being interrupted. 1.12 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS: COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL - 05/01/2015 260500-6 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Si -Plane Equipment replacement 177.307 AThe burden of proof that proposed equipment is equal in size, capacity, performance, • other pertinent criteria for this specific installation, or superior to that specified is up to the Contractor, Substituted equipment will only be allowed where specifically listed in a written addendum.• « not granted, the specified materials and equipment must be costsinstalled. Where substituted equipment is allowed, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to notify all related trades of the accepted substitution and to assume full responsibility for all `• as a result of • • B. Unless otherwise specified, all materials and equipment shall be of domestic (USA) C. Product Data: 1, Where pre-printed data covers more than one distinct product, size, type, material, trim, accessory group or variation, mark submitted copy with black pen to indicate which of the variations is to be provided. D. Product Listing: I . Prepare a list of major electrical equipment and materials for the project. A sample schedule is included at the end of this Section to complete this requirement. 2. Provide a product listing within one (1) week from award of contract to successful bidder. 3, Submit this listing as a part of the submittal requirement specified in the Division I Section on Products I . Refer to the Conditions of the Contract (General and Supplementary), Division 1, Z The submittals shall be submitted as a fully complete package identified by the specification section. The cover shall be identified with the job name, Owner's project COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL — 05/01/2015 260500-7 LMC; Cath Lab #2 —Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.3()7 number, date; Prime Contractor's name, etc: "Submittals that are not complete with the required information will be sent back to be corrected. 3. ,An index shall be provided whish includes: a. Product b. Plan Reference (if applicable)' C. Specification Section d. Manufacturer and Abdel Number 4. Provide electronic submittals unless it is determined that hard copies are required. 5. Provide two full size (2) hard copy sets of fire alarm shop drawings, coordination drawings" O&M manuals, as -built documents and samples required for the project. +6. If it is determined that hard copy submittals are required, at least two copies of the first submittal package shall be provided in expandable, 3 post, hard back binders, sized to fit all future submittals for this job. Each submittal shall be tabbed by the electrical specification section it is specified in. 7. The Contractor shall identify any "long lead time" items which may impact the overall project schedule, If these submittal requirements affect the schedule,: the Contractor shall identify the impacts and confer with the Engineer within two weeks of entering into the contract. 8, Submittals shall be provided for review within four (4) working weeks from award of contract to successful bidder, # # # # # #« # ## # # # F. Schedule of Values: i. Provide Preliminary Schedule of Values to Engineer with product data submittal within four (4) weeks from award of contract to successful bidder, Provide according to the following descriptions: COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL — 05/01/2015 260500-8 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 a. General Construction (total) b. Demolition C. Distribution Lighting - Interior e. Lighting -- Exterior . Lighting Controls g. Basic Materials/Devices/Equipment Connections (Mechanical) h. Fire Ala (Material/Installation) i. Security jt P.A./cunei/Intercom k. Miscellaneous K. The Design Professional shall not be required to review partial submissions or those for which submissions of M '# items have notbeen received. LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 LSubmit letters certifying compliance with ANSI standards for medium or high voltage gear, These letters shall be signed by a corporate officer and shall list applicable standards. Letters signed by local representatives will not be acceptable. M. Submit proposed changes to electrical room or other equipment room layouts when revised from contract documents prior to installation. N. Mark submittals with designations as shown on the drawings and identify as required by Specification Sections. Identification shall contain the information as required in details and each label shall be submitted in list form with disconnects, MC C's, panelboards, switchboards, overcurrent protection devices and utilization equipment, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL — 05/01/2015 260500-10 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177307 Luminaires - Leave in place. Switches Maintain circuit continuity. Receptacle - Remove devices if required for new work and reinstall. Clock - Clean and reinstall. R = Existing item to remain in place; replace device. Contractor shall perform the following function based upon the item to remain Luminaires Glean and install new lamps. Switches Remove and replace with new in existing box. Receptacles - Remove and replace with new in existing box. Clock - Clean and replace. RL =Existing item to be relocated. Contractor shall remove the existing item, and store in a safe place. `T"h€: existing item shall be relocated to the new position as called for on the drawings. At Contractor's option, the existing wiring may be extended, or new wiring may be run from the source. Based upon the item to be relocated, the Contractor shall perform the fallowing function: Luminaires Glean and install new lamps. Switches Replace. Receptacles - Replace. Clocks - Clean and relocate. C. Existing equipment that is removed and not scheduled to be reused shall remain the property of the Owner and be delivered for disposition unless specifically indicated otherwise and shall be stored in a location designated by the Owner. Items which are removed and not wanted by the Owner shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site. D. Existing equipment that is removed and is to be reused shall be cleaned, serviced and operable before being reinstalled. E� Revise panelboard schedules to reflect removal or relocation of equipment. Circuit integrity of equipment in adjacent areas shall be left intact. F. Where remodeling interferes with existing circuits and equipment which are not to be removed, such circuits and equipment shall be reworked and relocated as required to complete the project. G. The Contractor shall remove all distribution equipment, conductors, etc., which are Indicated to be removed or which must be removed to accommodate demolition. Equipment to be removed may require reworking conduit and wiring in order to maintain service to other equipment. H. Where remodeling interferes with circuits serving areas outside of the project or phase limits or which are remodeled in later phases of the project, circuits shall be reworked or temporary circuits provided as required. 1, Existing equipment i circuiting shown arebased on -. surveys and/orOwner -« drawings. The Contractor shall verify conditions adjustments being made to the drawing information. J. Coordinate the routing of . the existing mechanical and plumbing systems order i avoid conflicts ducts, • i» etc,Where existing electrical boxes, i. • or equipment _ installationof etc., the Contractor shall resolve! appropriate ,.d zzm��"; • i .N. C. Do not endanger or damage installed Work through procedures and processes of cutting and patching. D. When coring is required or identified, an xray of the area is to be taken prior to the performance of the work operation, X-ray work requires an MCP and protection. ; LMC: Cath Lab #2 — BI -Plane Equipment Replacement 977.307 E. , Arrange for repairs required to restore other work, because of damage caused as a result of electrical installations. 1. Uncover Werk to provide for installation of ill-timed Work; 2. Remove and replace defective Work; 211 4. Remove samples of Installed Work as specified for testing; Install equipment and materials in existing structures; 6. Upon written Instructions from the Architect/Engineer, uncover and restore Work to provide for Architect/Engineer observation of concealedWork. H. Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected electrical equipment, components, and materials as indicated, including, but not limited to removal of conductors, conduit, luminaires, boxes, devices and other electrical items made obsolete by the new Work. L Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduleV, to be J. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas. K. Locate, identify, and protect electrical services passing through remodel or demolition area and serving other areas required to be maintained operational. 1.97 ROUGH -IN: A. Verify final locations for rough -ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected. B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 2 through 23 for rough -in requirements. 1.18 ACCESSIBILITY: CoordinateA. Install equipment andmaterials to provide required code clearances and access for servicing and maintenance. piping,d equipment of other trades to insure proper access for all trades. Coordinate locations of concealed equipment, disconnects, • boxes panels and doors.Allow ample space for removalof parts,•s, etc. that require replacementor servicing. B. Extend all conduits so that junction and pull boxes are in accessible locations, C. Provide access panel or doors where equipment or boxes are concealed behind finished surfaces, 119 TESTING: COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL — 05/01/2015 260500-13 LMC: Cath Lab # — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.507 A. Submit test reports as outlined in Division 1 Sections on Quality Control Services and each Division 26 Section. installedB, Testing as required by these specifications shall pertain to all equipment, wiring, devices, "i under this contract: R being reused. C. General Scope; Perform w operational • assure that all electrical equipment,both Contractor and Owner -supplied, operational within industryand manufacturees tolerancess is installed in accordancedesign •* r R iR»!!IIIi 11 •- • .• r • • 3. Schedule tests and give a minimum of two weeks advance notice to the Architect. Reschedule t w.. .0 * rrOwner convenience if required. D, Test Report: Submit three copies of the completed report to the Architect no later than fifteen (15) days after completion of test unless directed otherwise. The -test report shall be bound ! its contentscertified. The test report shall include the following:; I. Project Information Including: Building, name, address, date, and other pertinent information.. List of equipment tested. . Description of test: , 4. List of test equipment used and calibration date. 5. Baseline, acceptable, or published -target value for test with code or standard reference indicating where value was derived. f. Test results that summarize all measured values with baseline values. 7. Conclusions and recommendations. E. Failure to Meet Test: I Any system material or workmanship which is found defective on the basis of performance tests shall be reported directly to the Architect. Z All failed tests shall be sent immediately by email to Engineer with, proposed corrective action and proposed re -test date and tinI Contractor " r . defective or equipment M have test repeated until test proves satisfactory without additional cost to the Owner. 4. The Contractor or testing agency R i program which maintains all applicable test instrumentation within rated accuracy, The accuracy shall be traceable COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL — 0510112015 260500-14 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177,307 to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) in an unbroken chain, Instruments shall be calibrated in accordance with the following frequency schedule: a. Field Instruments: 6 months b. Laboratory Instruments: 12 months C. Leased specialty equipment: 12 months. (Where accuracy is guaranteed by Lessor, i.e., Doble). Dated calibration labels shall be visible on all test equipment. 1.20 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING: A, General: 1. Provide all necessary excavation and backfill for installation of electrical work in accordance with Division 2. 2, In general, follow all regulations of OSHA as specified in Part 1926, Subpart P, "Excavations, Trenching and Shoring." Follow specifications of Division 26 as they refer specifically to the electrical work. B, Contact Owners of all underground utilities to have them located and marked, at least 2 business days before excavation is to begin. Prior to starting excavation, brief employees on marking and color codes and train employees on excavation and safety procedures for natural gas lines. When excavation approaches gas lines, expose lines by carefully probing and hand digging, C. Backfilling shall not be started until all work has been inspected, tested and accepted. All backfill material shall be accepted by the soils engineer. In no case shall lumber, metal or other debris be buried in with backfill, D. Trench Backfill 1 Backfill to 4 inches above top of conduits with sand, the same as used for conduit bed, compact property. Z Continue backfill to finish grade, using friable material free of rock and other debris. Install in 6 inch layers, each properly moistened and mechanically compacted prior to installation of ensuing layer. Compaction by hydraulic jetting is not permissible, E. After backfilling and compacting, any settling shall be refilled, tamped, and refinished at contractor's expense. LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and similar essential data. Install equipment so that nameplate is readily visible. B. Phase Rotation 1, New Building: Provide clockwise [or] counterclockwise phase rotation on this project. Provide a label at service entrance main disconnect and the generator tap box indicating phase rotation for the building. 2. Existing Building: Match existing phase rotation, which is clockwise/counterclockwise. 1.22 METHODS OF PROCEDURE (MOP): A. Definition: Method of Procedure (MOP) is a written plan which describes the activities and procedures to safeguard the building's occupants and contents and to interface with the building's management, operations and security. Building occupants shall be defined a employees, patients, and visitors. B. Requirements: 1, A MOP is required when a construction activity affects the safety of the occupants, equipment or valuable contents, or any supporting system; or essentially affects the building's management, operations or security. 2. A MOP is required for any shutdown or interruption of any system which affects the building occupants, including, but not limited to, infrastructure, life safety, electrical, and building management systems. . A MOP is required when requested or deemed necessary by the Owner or Engineer. C. Development: I . The Prime Contractor shall develop, submit, track and process the MOP, Any assistance required by the Subcontractors shall be provided, All MOP's shall be reviewed by the Prime Contractor prior « submitting• the Engineer. 2. All Mop's ; Shall Be Typed. 3. Contractor shall develop the MOP in a timely fashion prior to review and approval by all required parties. . Contractor shall develop the MOP with input from the subcontractor, where necessary. r s • s « rw �• « • ,a •` COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL -- 05/01/2015 260500-16 G, Compliance: Contractor shall comply with the approved MOP. The fawner and Engineer reserve the right to stop the work for non-compliance with the MCP. Any cost or time delay resulting from the work stoppage shall be borne by the Contractor. H� Pasting. Work shall not proceed on any facet of the work involving any MOP if an approved and signed MCP is not posted in the work area. 1.23 CLEANING: • C. Mark shop drawings to indicate approved substitutions; Change Girders; actual equipment and materials used. D. Mark luminaire schedule on drawings to indicate manufacturer and complete catalog numbers of installed equipment.. E. Mark schedules including panlboar, switchboard, motor control center, mechanical, kitchen and similar equipment schedules on drawings to indicate installed equipment and materials used, and any deviations or revisions to electrical load data and calculations. F. During construction, the contractor shall maintain at the job site a set of updated construction documents for the singular purpose of recording the above information. All record drawings shall be completed in erasable pencil. These changes shall be updated weekly. G. Revisions to the Contract Documents shall be legible and shall be prepared using the following color scheme. 1. Red shall indicate new items, deviations and routing. 2. Green shall indicated items removed or deleted. Blue shall be used for relevant notes and descriptions, H. At the completion of the project, submit these documents to the Architect/Engineer, This contract will not be considered completed until these record documents have been received and reviewed by the Architect/Engineer. 1.25 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA`.. A. Refer to the Division 1 Section on project closeout or operation and maintenance data for procedures and requirements for preparation and submittal of maintenance manuals. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL. -- 05/01/201 260500-17 LMC: Cath Lab Equipment Replacement is .rr r a • a ^a •r a w ♦ • �, •- �- r r a a w ra- a • a w a r< • w s w- a w r •- a' a rw� r a -r ♦ a • arr a as r » ., a. a a r r•- w r: • r �r. a • a • r .r a r a r r a a a ^w a w» a •. r a• ^a a• a ^ea, w» r -a • a °a a a • aa- a -a a a.a- • r r• w^ »s .a a a CThis contract will not be considered completed nor will final payment be made until all specified material,• r test reports,and final Scheduleof < »s with all Electrical and Information a as a- order a a'a and identified is provided reviewedis by Architect/Engineer. D. Healthcare Compliance Mw »a r be compiled under a singlesection by Division contractor. Authority w Jurisdiction signoff documentation 2. Fire Ala (provided to Division 15 by Division 1 ) a, 100%, test reports b. Monthly test criteria for temporary systems . Sprinkler a. Above ground piping system certification b. Tamper and flow certification C. Fire pump flow tests 4. Electrical System Documentation (provided to Division 15 by Division 16) a. Outlet testing; tension, continuity, voltage drop testing documentation b. Isolation panel testing certification C. Low voltage switchboards d. Low voltage insulated case breaker e. Low voltage ground fault f. grounding system COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL — 05/01/2015 260500-18 LMC: Cath Lab #2 -- Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 HVAC System documentation a. Q.R. testing certification . Isolation room testing certification C. Testing and certification of damper inspection and test d: Testing and certification of NEPA filters e. Testing and certification of smoke control and life safety systems . Boiler System a. estate certification report 7. Medical Gas System a. State certification report 8. Backflow devices a. Certification report . NFPA 101 documentation (provided by division 1 & 16 to division 16) a. Authority Having Jurisdiction compliant drawings 10. documentation for ILSM, ICRA, MOPS and Hot Work. (provided by division 1 & 16 to Division 1 ) 1.26 PROJECT CLOSEOUT LIST: A. The contractor shall be responsible for providing the items listed on the checklist prior to final observation: Required test reports shall be included in the O & M manuals. (Checklist is located at the end of this section.) 1.27 WARRANTIES: A. Refer to the division 1 Section on Warranties and Bonds for procedures and submittal requirements for warranties.Refer to individual equipment specifications for warranty requirements. In no case shall the warranty for the total electrical system be less than one year from date of acceptance by the Owner. B. Compile and assemble the warranties specified in division 26, into a separated set of vinyl covered, three ring binders, tabulated and indexed for easy reference. C. Provide complete warranty information for each item. information to include product or equipment description, date of beginning of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or bond, and names, addresses, and telephone numbers and procedures for filing a claim and obtaining warranty services. 1.28 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS. A. The contractor shall maintain and have available at the jobsite current information on the following at all times: 1. Lip to date record drawings. 2. Submittals 3. Site observation reports with current status of all action items. N • ! • li � i ri i « � t t ' e 4. Test results; including recorded values, procedures, and other findings. . Outage information. Division 26 REQUIREMENTS SPEC ITEM SECTION REPORT/ DATA o US eC. w w t� U_ u # c 0 CL COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR 260500 ELECTR€CAL. PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE OF X VALUES FINAL SCHEDULE OF VALUES X X ELECTRICAL. COORDINATION X DRAWINGS CONTRACTORIEQUIPMENT X WARRANTIES O&M MANUALS X X X X 260519 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL X X X X POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260523 CONTROL VOLTAGE X X X X ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES` 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING X X X X X FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR X X X ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 RACEWAY AMC? BOXES FOR X ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING X FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT X INTERMEDIATE METAL X CONDUIT LIQUID -TIGHT FLEXIBLE X CONDUIT NON-METALLIC CONDUIT PVC X RIGID METAL CONDUIT SURFACE FETAL. RACEWAY X X X WIREWAYS X X X LMC: Cath Lab ##2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 977.307 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL �� 05/01/2015 260500-21 REQUIREMENTS SPEC ITEM SECTION REPORT/ DATA UJ CO ! w -j 0: w F 0 qq t� r w 66 c oCL � ca w U w LL o v 08 'a. 260534 CABINETS, BOXES & FITTINGS X X X 76-0553 II ENTIFICATION FOR X ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260583 WIRING CONNECTIONS X X M03 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES X X X X X 262726 WIRING DEVICES X -,, X X 262800 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE X X X X X x X DEVICES 265000 LIGHTING X X X X X BALLASTS X X X X M100 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS X I X X X X X X COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL �� 05/01/2015 260500-21 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177307 ELECTRICAL PRODUCT LISTING Page—of— Project age fProject Name Bate Contractor The following is a luting of equipment and materials which will be used on the above -referenced project. This product listing does not remove the requirement for submittal of Shap Drawings, Product Data or Samples as may be called for elsewhere in these specifications, Provide this list to Architect/Engineer within 2 weeks of contract award: SPEC ITEM MANUFACTURER LEAD SECTION PROPOSED TIME (WKS) COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL — 05/01%2095 260500-22 SECTION 26 0519 — LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART I GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY: A. This section includes wires, cables, and connectors for power, lighting, signal, control, and related systems rated 600 volts and less. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical wire and cable products of types, sizes, and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience with projects utilizing electrical wiring and cabling work similar to that required for this project. C. Conform to applicable code regulations regarding toxicity of combustion products of insulating materials. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: X Product Data: Submit manufacturees data on electrical wires, cables and connectors. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: X Deliver wire and cable properly packaged in factory- fabricated type containers, or wound on NEMA -specified type wire and cable reels. B. Store wire and cable in clean dry space in original containers. Protect products from weather, damaging fumes, construction debris and traffic. C. Handle wire and cable carefully to avoid abrasing, puncturing and tearing wire and cable insulation and sheathing. Ensure that dielectric resistance integrity of wires/cables is maintained. PART 2 PRODUCTS 21 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: X Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following (for each type of wire, cable, and connector): 1 Wire and Cable: a. American Insulated Wire b. Alcan c. Belden Div; Cooper Industries. d. Cerro e. Encore f. General Cable Corporation. g. Hitemp Wires, Inc. h. Southwire Company i. Okonite 177,307 14 Superior Essex: 1) Triangle 2) Excel ) Royal a, O-Z/Gedney Co. b. AMP, Inc. C. Burndy Corporation. d. Ideal Industries, Inc. e. 3M Company f. Thomas and Betts Corp. 2.2 WIRES AND CABLES: A. General: Provide wire and cable suitable for the temperature, conditions, and location where installed. Building wire shall be insulated with THHN/TMWN/JC1- HW insulation,. rated 600 volt. B. Conductors: Provide stranded conductors for all power, control, and lighting circuits. ��per for all wires and cables. Metal «a Cable - Type ` es 14 AWG throughi AWG, coppera s • 600 volt•• w a -d "!' C, steel interlocked metal type• a 2. Armored -Type Hwale.. Sizes 14 AWG through 10 AWG, copperi s •.. with at0 volt thermoplastica wa 90degrees C, steel interlocked metal type armor and bond wire that is clearly identified as acceptable return grounding aw:,. a greenw.a equipment grounding c# .• ! be includedal Armor be galvanized steel, colorcoated green. Fitting shall be steel with double grip sea l d locking 3. Portable Cord: a. Type SCJ: Sizes 14 AWG through 2 AWG, copper conductors with 600 volt thermoset insulation 0.1 resistant insulation. b, "type G -GC: Sues 1 AWG through 500 KCMIL, napper conductors with 600/2000 volt, 90 degreesC, ethylene -propylene insulation. 4. Cables: Provide the following types of cables in NEC approved locations and applications where permitted by the contract documents. Cables shall be U.L. listed and approved by the local building authority. All cables shall contain a green insulated equipment ground conductor of the same size as the neutral conductor. .3 CONNECTORS: A. Description: Provide UL -type factory -fabricated, solderles metal connectors; of sizes, ampacity ratings, materials, types and classes for applications and for services indicated. Use connectors with temperatures equal to or greater than those of the wires upon which used. B. Provide 2 -hole compression lugs for all power feeder, neutral, and grounding connections. {including phase, neutral and grounding conductors. LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES-- 05/01/2015 260519-2 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 C. Provide connectors that are designed to accept stranded conductors where stranded conductors are used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 WIRE ANIS CABLE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE: A. Building Wire: Install all building wire in raceway regardless of location. B. Metal Clad Cable/HCF: 1. Maximum of B feet length for connecting luminaires in accessible ceilings to the local junction box. . Maximum of 3 feet length for connecting luminaires in non -accessible ceilings to the local junction box. . May not be used for branch circuit home runs, feeders, motor feeder circuits or in the following locations: a. Emergency Systems b. Hazardous Systems _ Branch circuit conductorscolor ». specification section. 5, May be used for branch circuit drops from a local junction box to undercounter C. Portable Cord: Use for flexible pendant leads to luminaires, outlets, and equipment where indicated and in compliance with codes, 3.2 INSTALLATION OF WIRES AND CABLES: A. General: Install electrical cables, wires and connectors in compliance with applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, UL, and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices.; B. Coordinate wire/cable installation work, including electrical raceway and equipment connection work, with other work. C. Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in same raceway. Use pulling compound or lubricant, where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. cable.DUse putting means including, fish tape, cable, rope and basket weave wire/cable grips which will not damage cables or raceway. Do not use rope hitches for pulling attachment to wire or E, Keep conductor splices to minimum. Splice only in accessible junction boxes� No splices are allowed in feeder,• a or «. Connect unspliced wire to numbered terminal stripsR F. Install splices and taps which possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than conductors being spliced. G. Use splice and tap connectors which are compatible with conductor r ♦ -a SEEM Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with published .torquing torquesrequirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening •_ -r in UL Std 486A for pp supportSupport cables above accessible ceilings, Independent from the ceiling suspension system to .+ - from - +e not rest on r JProvide adequate length of conductors within electrical enclosures and train the conductors to terminal points with no excess. Bundle multiple conductors, with conductors larger than No. 10 AWG cabled to individual circuits. Make terminations so there is no bare conductor at the K. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper wire splices and taps, 8 AWG + larger.For t AWG and smaller, use insulated screw on s= spring wire connectors with plastic caps,push on r not acceptable. insulationL Use copper compression connectors for copper wire splices and taps, 1/0 AWG and larger. Tape uninsulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape to 150 percent of the - of • • s M. Make splices; taps and terminations to Garry full <ampecity of conductors without perceptible temperature rise. N. Thoroughly tape the ends of spare conductors in boxes and cabinets. Q. Install exposed cable, parallel and perpendicular to surfaces, or exposed structural members, and follow surface contours, where possible. P. Make all ground, neutral and line connections to receptacle and wiring device terminals as recommended by manufacturer. Provide ground jumper from outlet box to Individual ground terminal of devices: Q, Branch circuits whose length from panel to first outlet exceeds 100 feet for 120 volt circuits or 175 feet for 277 volt circuit shall be #10 or larger, as required to comply with the National Electrical Mode, R Parallel conductors shall be cut to the same length. S. All splices in control panels, terminal junction boxes, low voltage control circuits, fire alarm, etc., conductors shall be on numbered terminal strip, T. Where conduit is not =r =r plenum rated cable shall be provided ► floor or other plenum spaces. U. Provide wire training, facing, labeling, and terminal blocks as required in panelboards and all control .r r • but r _• to, lighting, transfer switch, fire alarm, and security devices,cabinets. All Wiring shall be installed neat and be labeled to match wiring diagrams, control temporary1. Make r r to panelboard devices with sufficient stack conductorto facilitate reconnections required for balancing loads between phases. r r ++ + r .r r• r r• r • • LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement switchlegs, travelers, etc. shall be different each 4 ,. system. Switch legs shall be purple or pink. A. Test installed wires and cables with 1000 VDC megohm meter to determine insulation resistance levels to ensure requirements are fulfilled. Test shall be made on all feeders regardless of size and on all branch circuits with No. 4 AWG and larger conductors. The megger values bt "'4 shall be compared to the minimum values listed in NETA, All .. report,conductors and cables shall be meggered after installation, and prior to terminatiom Subm test B. Prior to energizat on, test wires and cables for electrical continuity and for short-circuits. C. subsequent to wire and cable hookups, energize circuitry and demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements. Where necessary, correct malfunctioning units, and then retest to demonstrate compliance, 3.4 COLOR CODING SCHEDULE: A. Color code secondary service„ feeder, and branch circuit conductors as follows: 120/208 Volts Phase 2771480 Volts Mack A Brown Red B grange Blue C Yellow Whig Neutral Grey Green Ground Green B. Conductors shall be solid color for entire length. 2. Conductors 8 AWG and larger shall have either solid color insulation as specified above for • or be black• r d r 4 at each terminationand in each box or enclosure,r distance of • .44'4 plastic tape in the ..4•.. specified color, Do not cover cable identification markings. Adjust tape locations to prevent • • of • LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS ANIS CABLES — 05101/2015 260519-5 177.307 SECTION 26 0526 — GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes solid grounding of electrical systems and equipment. It includes basic requirements for grounding for protection of life, equipment, circuits, and systems. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented in other sections of these Specifications. 1.2 SUBMITTALS: A. Product data for ground rods, connectors and connection materials, and grounding fittings. B. Wiring Diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams for electrical grounding and bonding work which indicates layout of ground rings, location of system grounding electrode connection, routing of grounding electrode conductors, also include diagrams for circuits and equipment grounding connections. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A, Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. The terms "listed" and "labeled" shall be defined as they are in the National Electrical Code, Article 100. B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of grounding and bonding products, of types, and ratings required, and ancillary grounding materials, including stranded cable, copper braid and bus, grounding electrodes and plate electrode% and bonding jumpers whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. C. Installers Qualifications* Firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical grounding work similar to that required for project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: X Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Bumdy Corporation 2. Cadweld Div.; Erico Products Inc, 3. Ideal Industries 4. OZ Gedney Div. 5. Thermoweld 6. Thomas and Betts Corp. GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS — 05/01/2015 26 0526 -1 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 2.3 WIRE AND CABLE CONDUCTORS: A. General: Comply with Division 25 Section on Wires and Cables, Conform to NEC, except a otherwise indicated, for conductor properties, including stranding, & Equipment Grounding Conductor: Green insulated, C. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Stranded cable. D. Bare Copper Conductors: 'Conform to the following: 1. Solid Conductors:: ASTM B-3. . Assembly of Stranded Conductors„ ASTM B-8. 1 Tinned Conductors: ASTM B-33. 2,4 MISCELLANEOUS CONDUCTORS: AGround s ,•.t copper bars of 11ular cross section. B. Braided Bonding Jumpers: Copper tape, braided No, 30 gage bare capper wire, terminated with copper ferrules. C: Bonding Strap Conductor/Connectors: Soft copper, 0.05 inch thick and 2 inches wide, except as indicated. 2,5 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS: A. General: Listed and labeled as grounding connectors for the materials used. B. Pressure Connectors: High -conductivity -plated units. C, Bolted Clamps: Heavy-duty units listed for the application. D. Exothermic Welded Connections: Provided in kit Form and selected for the specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items to be connected, Z6 GROUNDING ELECTRODES: A, Ground Rods: Copper -clad steel with high-strength steel core and electrolytic -grade copper outer sheath, molten welded to core. 1. Size: %" by 10 feet. FART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION: FeedersAEquipment Grounding Conductor Applicatiow Comply with NEC for sizes and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, except where larger sizes or more conductors are indicated. 1 . Install separate insulated equipment grounding conductors with circuit conductors for the following in addition to those locations where required by Code: a. and branch LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177307 b. Provide individual grounding and neutral conductors for each isolated ground receptacle. When individual or groups of isolated ground receptacles are on dedicated circuits, individual ground and neutral conductors for each circuit is acceptable. 2. Nonmetallic Raceways: Install an insulated equipment ground conductor in nonmetal raceways unless they are designated for telephone or data cables. 1 Air Duct Equipment Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct -mounted electrical devices operating at 120-V and above including air cleaners and heaters, on the conductor to each such unit. 4Water Heater, Heat Tracing, and Anti -Frost Heater Circuits* Install separate insulated, equipment ground conductor to each electric water heater, heat tracing, and surface anti -frost heating cable. Bond this conductor to heater units, piping, and connected equipment and components. I III IIIIIIIp 11111111 CGround Rods: Locate a minimum of two -rod lengths from each other and at least the same distance from any other grounding electrode. Interconnect ground rods with bare conductors buried at leasfN inches b616wgrade. Conn6dbare-cable ground conductors to ground rods by means of exothermic welds except as otherwise indicated. Make these connections without damaging the copper coating or exposing the steel. Drive rods until tops are 6 inches below finished floor or final grade except as otherwise indicated. D. Braided -Type Bonding Jumpers: Install to connect ground clamps on water meter piping to bypass water meters electrically. Use elsewhere for flexible bonding and grounding connections. ERoute grounding conductors along the shortest and straightest paths possible without obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, damage, except as indicated. F. Labeling: Provide a phenolic tag for all grounding electrode conductors as described in section on Electrical Identification. I LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement G, Where grounding conductors, grounding electrode conductors, or bonding conductors are non -exposed, identify each with a 6 -inch band of green tape at each end and at 10 foot intervals. When run in conduits, provide color banding on conduit per section on Electrical Identification. 3.3 CONNECTIONS: A. General: Make connections in such a manner as to minimize possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible. I. Use electroplated or hot -tin -coated materials to assure high conductivity and make contact points closer in order of galvanic series, 2. Make connections with clean bare metal at points of contact. & Coat and seat connections involving dissimilar metals with inert material such as red lead paint to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces. 14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Upon completion of installation of electrical grounding and bonding systems, test ground resistance with ground resistance tester. Where tests show resistance -to -ground is over 5 ohms, take appropriate action to reduce resistance to 5 ohms, or less, by driving additional ground rods; then retest to demonstrate compliance. B, Ground Resistance Test: 11006111101161 W-WWWWO111101661 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 the ground electrode to be tested and the two reference electrodes in a straight line spaced fifty (50) feet apart. Drive the two reference electrodes five (5) feet deep. C, Tests for patient -care areas: In addition to the test listed above, perform additional field tests and inspections for patient care areas, 1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements. Perform the following tests: a. Impedance: Measurement shall be made between the referenced point and the grounding contact of all receptacles in the patient care room. The maximum limit allowed is 0.1 ohms, b. Voltage: Measurement shall be made under no-fault conditions between a reference point and all exposed fixed electrical equipment with conductive surfaces in the patient care vicinity, Including but not limited to; overbed wall - mounted fixtures, ceiling mounted exam lights, sensor faucets, etc. The maximum limit allowed is 20mV. Z Prepare certified test reports in compliance with NFPA 99 and submit reports in conjunction with field quality control reports required in Division 26 'Wiring Devices". D. • Deficiencies, Retest and -s• 1. • unsatisfactory conditions and retest to demonstrate compliance-, replace conductors, units and •a as required to bring system into compliance. Z Prepare a written report and show temperature, humidity and condition of soil at time of tests. Report shall be certified by testing agency that identifies components checked and describes results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations and test results after remedial action. 3,5 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING: A. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and reestablish original grades except as otherwise indicated. Where sod has been removed, replace it as soon as possible after backfilling is completed. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other Work to their original condition. Include necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, or mulching. Restore vegetation and disturbed paving to original condition. END OF SECTION 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS — 05/01/2015 260526-5 Equipment • Replacement 177.307 PART 1 GENERAL _ 1.1 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes secure support from the building structure for electrical items by mems of hangers, supports, anchors, sleeves, inserts, seals, and associated fastenings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS. A. Product data for each type of product specified. 1. Manger and support schedule showing manufacturer's figure number, size, spacing,. features, and application for each required type of hanger, support, sleeve, seal, and fastener to be used, S. Sheep drawings indicating details of fabricated products and materials. C. Engineered Design consisting of details and engineering analysis for supports for the following items: - 1. Cable trays 2. Trapeze hangers for multiple conduit runs. PART 2 PRODUCTS .1 MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Slotted Metal Angle and U -Channel Systems: a. Allied Tube & Conduit b. S -Line Systems, Inc. c. Unistrut Diversified Products a. Q -Z/ edney b. Cooper Industries, Inc. C. Killark Electric Mfg, Co. d. Madison Equipment Co. e, Raco, Inc. f. Spring City Electrical Mgf. Co. g. Thomas & Setts Corp. X Coating: Supports, support hardware, and fasteners shall be protected with zinc coating or with treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance using approved alternative treatment, finish, or inherent material characteristic. Products for use outdoors shall•.' hot -dip i. '"i LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Pune Equipment Replacement 477.307 2.3 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING ARaceway Supports: Clevis hangers, riser clamps, conduit straps, threaded C -clamps with Types,retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring steel clamps. B. Fasteners: w construction features as follows- 1 Expansion Anchors: b x##x or sleeve type, intended2. Toggle Botts: All steel springhead type. 1 Powder -Driven Threaded Studs: Heat-treated steel, designed specifically for the ConstructCConduit Seating Bushings: Factory -fabricated watertight conduit sealing bushing assemblies suitable for sealing around conduit, or tubing passing through concrete floors and walls. # - iron body, neoprene# grommets or # metal pressure rings, pressure clamps, and cap screws. D. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory -fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug for nonarmored electrical cables conduits, # #x plugs with number w size of conductor gripping w • .w to suit individual Constructbody of x bl # w with hot -dip galvanized E. U -Channel Systems: 12 -gage steel channels, with 9/16 inch -diameter holes at a minimum of 8 inches on ## surface. Provide fittings and accessoriesand match with # are of Supports:F. Provide p w devicesof •x and materials indicated; and having the following construction features: 1, Cine -Hale Conduit Straps: For supporting 1 inch and smaller rigid metal conduit; galvanized steel. 2. Two -Hole Conduit Straps: For supporting 4 inch and larger rigid metal conduit, galvanized steel; a inch strap width; and 2-415 inch between center of screw holes. 2,4 FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICES: A. General: Shop- or field -fabricated supports or manufacturers supports assembled from U -channel components. B. Steel Brackets: Fabricated of angles, channels, and other standard structural shapes. Connect with welds and machine bolts to form rigid supports. C. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following: 4 , Steel Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe. 2. EMT, IMC, or Rigid Conduit, 2.5 FIRE SEALS: A. Material: Firestopping material shall be asbestos free, 100 percent inturnescent, have code approval under BOCA, IC I, SSBC, NFPA 404, NFPA 70, and be capable of maintaining an effective barrier against flame and eases in compliance with the following requirements. B, Flame Spread: 25 or less, ASTM E84 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS — 05/0112015 260529-2 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Si -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 C. Fire Resistance and Hose Stream Tests: Firestopping materials shall be rated "F" and '"T" in accordance with ASTM F 814 or U[. 1479. Rating periods shall conform to the following: (F) 3 (T) 3 Time -rated floor or wall assemblies. (F) 3 (T) 3 Openings between floor slabs and curtain wall. Q. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire seals of the fallowing: 1. 3M Company Tremco . Hilo PART 3 EXECUTION A. Install supporting devices to fasten electrical components securely and permanently in accordance with NEC requirements. B. Coordinate with the building structural system and with other electrical installation. C. Junction Sox Supports:: Comply with the NEC and the fallowing requirement: 1. Use r4" all -thread rod from structureto support junction boxes. D. Raceway Supports: Comply with the NEC and the following requirements: LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 7. Space supports for raceways in accordance with NEC, When there are 4 or more 2 inch conduits in a trapeze, supports shall be spaced 5 feet O.C, 8. In all runs, arrange support so the load produced by the weight of the raceway and the enclosed conductors is carried entirely by the conduit supports with no weight load on raceway terminals. 9. Threaded rod supports to have bottoms cut off at a maximum length equal to rod diameter below bottom nut. Conductor Supports: Comply with the NEC and the following requirements: I Support individual conductors or cables by separate clamps with rubber or plastic grommet, fasten using a non-metallic bolt and nut, and secure clamps to unistrut supports anchored to structure (multiple clamps may be secured to a single unistrut support). Individual conductors or cables may be served utilizing a vinyl or fiberglass clamp which shall be anchored to the structure. a. Horizontal conductors not more than 3 feet o.c. b. Vertical conductors not more than 5 feet o.c. 3. Install simultaneously with installation of conductors. F. Miscellaneous Supports: Support miscellaneous electrical components separately and as required to produce the same structural safety factors as specified for raceway supports. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnects, control enclosures, pull boxes, junction boxes, transformers, and other devices. LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177307 instead of expansion bolts and machine or wood screws, where authorized by the Owner and structural engineer, Do not weld conduit, pipe straps, or items other than threaded studs to steel structures, In partitions of light steel construction, use sheet metal screws. Z Holes cut to depth of more than 1-1/2 inches in reinforced concrete beams or to depth of more than 3/4 inch in concrete shall not cut the main reinforcing bars, Fill holes that are not used. 3, Ensure that the load applied to any fastener does not exceed 25 percent of the proof test load. Use vibration- and shock -resistant fasteners for attachments to concrete slabs. K. Communication and Telephone Cable Supports: Use No. 9 ceiling wire to support individual or small bundles of cables run above accessible ceilings, 3.2 PERSONNEL PROTECTION: K Where U -channel systems, angles, brackets or other standard structural metal shapes are readily accessible and exposed to personnel, provide plastic or rubber end caps. B. Where threaded rod supports are readily accessible and exposed to personnel, provide plastic or rubber end caps. 33 FIRESTOPPING LOCATIONS: A. Preparation: 1Coordination., Coordinate the work with other trades. Firestopping materials at penetrations of insulated pipes and ducts can be applied after insulation is in place. If insulatiM n is composed of combustible material, the thickness of firestIlii ing materials must be equivalent to that of the insulation. If the insulation is composed of non- combustible material, it may be considered as part of the penetrating item. 2. Surface Preparation: Surface Preparation 10 be in contact with firestopping materials shall be free of dirt, grease, oil, loose material or other substances that may affect proper fitting or the required fire resistance. B. Installation: Install firestopping materials in accordance with therrtanufacturer's instructions. C. Cleaning: After completion of firestopping work in any area, equipment shall be reviewed and walls, ceilings and all other surfaces not to receive firestopping shall be cleaned of deposits of firestop materials, D. Inspection- The architect may select and the Owner will pay an independent testing laborato to examine firestopped areas to ensure proper installation prior to concealing or enclosing th firestopped areas. I END OF SECTION 26 0529 t SECTION 26 0533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY: A. Extent of raceway work is indicated by drawings and schedules. Provide complete conduit systems for all conductors unless otherwise specified. B. Types of raceways specified in this section include the following: 1. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT). . Flexible meatal conduit. 3. Intermediate metal conduit (IMC). 4. Liquid -tight flexible metal conduit. 5. Dion -metallic Conduit and Ducts. 6. Rigid metal conduit (RUC). 7. Surface metal raceways. Wireways. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of raceway systems of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical raceway work similar to that required for this project. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including specifications and installation instructions, for each type of raceway system required. Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned drawings of surface metal raceway systems showing layout of raceways and fittings, spatial relationships to associated equipment, and adjoining raceways, if any. Show connections to electrical power panels and feeders. PART 2 : PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A, Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Rigid Metal Conduit: .d r r C. Triangle r be & Cond] RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS — 0510112015 26 0533 -1 LMC. Cath Lab ##2 .m. Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 2. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC); . Allied b. Triangle c. Western Tube & Conduit . PVC Coated: a. Rob Roy b. Pera Cote c. OCAL 4. EMT Conduit: a. Allied b. Republic C, Triangle d. LTV e. Western Tube & Conduit 5, ikon -Metallic Conduit. a.. Carlon b.. MPF C. Can -Tex d, P . Steel Pittings: a. O/Z Gedney b. Raco C. Appleton d. EPT e. Midwest f. Pioa g. Steel City . Conduit Bodies. a. O/Z Gedney b. Killark C. Regal d. Appleton e. Crouse Hinds 5. Surface Metal Raceways. a. Wiremold Co,' b. Airey Thompson Co. C, B -Line Systems, Inc. d, Isoduct Energy Systems e. Square D. Co. f. Mono -Systems, Inc. RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS — 05/01/2015 260533-2 177.307 9. Wireway: a. Square D. Co. b. Circle AW Products c. Erickson Electric Equipment Co. d. G.S. Metals Corp. e. Hoffman Engineering Co. f. Wadsworth Electric Mfg. Co., Inc. 2.2 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING: A. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (RGC): 1. Conduit.. Rigid steel, zinc -coated inside and outside, threader! ends. Fittings: Threaded galvanized steel, bushings shall have nylon insulated throat, B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): 1. Conduit: Rigid intermediate grade galvanized inside and outside, threaded ends. . Fittings: Threaded galvanized steel, bushings shall have nylon insulated throat.. C. PVC Externally Coated Rigid Steel Conduit: 1 o Conduit: Rigid steel zinc -coated with external coating of PVC. . Fittings: Threaded galvanized steel with external PVC coating, bushings shall have nylon insulated throat. D. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): 1. Conduit: Galvanized steel tubing. 2, Fittings: Steel compression fittings for rain -tight and concrete -tight applications. Steel set -screw for all other connections. Setscrew quick fit type for -112 inches and larger may be used. Bushings shall be threaded and have nylon insulated throat or nylon bushing. E. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: F. Flexible Metal Conduit: 1. Conduit: Continuous spiral wound, interlocked, zinc -coated steel, approved for grounding, 2. Fittings: Steel. Straight connector shall be one-piece body, female end with clamp and deep slotted machine screw for securing conduit, and threaded reale end provided with a locknut. Angle connectors shall be two piece body with removable upper section, female end with clamp and deep slotted machine screw for securing conduit, and threaded male end provided with a locknut. All fittings shall be terminated with threaded bushings having nylon insulated throats, G, Liquid -Tight Flexible Metal Conduit: 1. Conduit: Continuous spiral wound, interlocked zinc -coated steel with polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacket, approved for grounding, LMC: Cath Lab Equipment # 1 1 Fittings: Steel. Straight and angle connectors shall be the same as used with flexible metal conduit but shall be provided with a compression type steel ferrule and neoprene gasket sealing rings. 2,3 NON-METALLIC CONDUIT AND DUCTS: A. Rigid Non -Metallic Conduit (RNC); 1. Conduit: Schedule 40 or 80 polyvinyl chloride (PVC), 0*C for direct burial or concrete encasement. Z Fittings: Mate and match conduit type and material. Cement as recommended by manufacturer. 2,4 CONDUIT BODIES: A. General: Types, shapes and sizes, as required to suit individual applications and NEC requirements. Provide matching gketed covers secured with corrosion -resistant screws. B. Metallic Conduit and Tubing: Use malleable iron conduit bodies: Use bodies with threaded hubs for threaded raceways and in hazardous locations. C. Nonmetallic Conduit: Use nonmetallic conduit bodies. LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Pyne Equipment Replacement 177.307 2.6 SURFACE METALRACEWAYS: A. General: Sizes and channels as indicated. Provide fittings that match and mate with raceway. All circuits either factory or fieri installed shall have a separate neutral conductor. 1. Type 1: Multi -outlet assembly with prewired outlets, 3 -wire„ multiple circuits, quantity as indicated, with single outlets on 12 inch centers. 2. Surface Metal Raceway: Galvanized steel with snap -on cover. Finish in manufacturer's standard prime coating suitable for field painting. Provide raceways of suitable size based on fill for circuits indicated on the drawings. Provide all necessary bones, covers, extensions, fittings, etc. to farm a complete assembly. B. Boxes for Surface Raceways: Designed, manufactured and supplied by raceway manufacturer for use with specified raceway. .7 CONDUIT SIZES: A. Conduit sizes shall be as shown on the drawings. If the conduit size is not given on the drawings, the conduit shall be sized in accordance with NEC based on the number of conductors enclosed plus a parity sized equipment ground conductor and be subject to the following minimum sizes: 1, Rigid, Intermediate, and BMT Conduit: 3/4 inch for all runs except lighting switch legs, 277 volt lighting branch circuits, temperature control and fire alarm which may be 1 /2inch. 2. Flexible and Liquid -Tight Flexible Conduit: 1/2inch for all runs. . MC Cable: 316 inch to undercounter luminaires, 1121nch for all other runs: 4. Underground or Concrete Encased Nonmetallic Conduit.; 3/4inch for all runs. 5. Conduits used for home runs shall contain only the conductors for the circuits indicated on the drawings. Combining multiple home runs into a single conduit will not be permitted. 2.8 RACEWAY SEALING COMPOUND: A. Nonhardeni g, safe for human skin contact, not deleterious to cable insulations, workable at temperatures as low as 35 deg F (1 deg C), withstands temperature of 300 deg F (149 deg C) without slump, and adheres to clean surfaces of plastic ducts, metallic conduits, conduit coatings, concrete, masonry, lead, cable sheaths, cable jackets, insulation materials and the common metals. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: + Examine areas and conditions underto •- -# and substrate which w 01 s pport raceways. Notify Co tractor in writing of conditions detrimebtat to proper completion # the woDo not proceed #rk until unsatisfactory conditions.. been corrected ' pta • 12 CONDUIT SCHEDULE: A. Buried Raceways. PVC Coated rigid steel galvanized conduit or Schedule 40 OR 80, rigid PVC plastic conduit. RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS — 05/01/2015 260533-5 LMC: Gear Lab #2 -- Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177. 07 E, Raceways embedded in concrete slabs or walls in contact with earthy Schedule 40, PVC plastic conduit. PVC coated rigid steel galvanized conduit, or PVC coated intermediate metal conduit. C. Raceways embedded in concrete slabs above grade level: Rigid steel galvanized conduit or Schedule 40 OR 80 right IVC plastic conduit in slab. ; D� Raceways Through Foundation Walls Below Grade: One 10 foot section of PVC coated rigid steel galvanized, extending from 1 foot imide the foundation wall. E. Raceways in locations subject to mechanical injury. Rigid steel galvanized conduit OR intermediate metal conduit. Locations subject to mechanical injury include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Exposed conduits outdoors. 2. Exposed conduits in dock areas and high/medium bay locations up to 25 feet above finished floor, F. Motor and equipment connections: < Flexible metal conduit OR PVC jacketed liquid -tight flexible metallic conduit with liquid tight connectors. G. Motor and equipment connections: Flexible metal conduit OR PVC jacketed liquid -tight flexible metallic conduit with liquid tight connectors. Intermediate metal conduit OR rigid steel galvanized conduit shall be used for motor homeruns from the flexible connection at the motor to its source: H. Raceways in all other areas shall be electrical metallic tubing unless otherwise noted. I. Use flexible metal conduit inside movable partition wireways, from junction boxes to devices and between devices in casework, from outlet boxes to recessed luminaires, and for fishing" of existing walls. J. Emergency Circuits: All emergency circuits shall be run totally in metal conduit and shall be in a completely separate raceway system from non -emergency circuits. . UPS Circuits: All UPS circuits shall be run in metal conduit and shall be a completely separate raceway system from all other circuits. L. Rework or extensions of existing conduit shall include the use of similar materials to the existing conduit type unless otherwise noted, 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUITS: A, General: Install electrical raceways in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instruction, applicable requirements of NEC, and as follows: 1. Conceal all conduit unless indicated otherwise, within finished walls, ceilings, and floors. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot grater pipes. Install raceways level and square and at proper elevations. 2, Elevation of Raceway: a. Where horizontal raceway is installed near water and steam piping, route raceway above piping and as close to structure as possible and practical, RACEWAYS ANIS BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS -- 05/01/2015 260533-6 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 b. Route raceway as close to structure as possible. Complete installation of electrical raceways before starting Installation of conductors within raceways. 4. Provide supports for raceways as specified elsewhere in Division 16. 16. Tighten set screws of threadless fittings with suitable tool.,; 16 . «. with locknuts. bushings, raceway o enter squarely# dished paagainst the box. RGC and IMC shall be secured with double locknutsinsulated bushing. EMT shall be secured with one locknut and shall have nylon insulated throats or threaded nylon bushings from 1/2" to V. 1-1/4" and above shall be metal with nylon insulated throats. Use grounding type bushings for feeder conduits at s%4tchboards, panelboards, pull boxes, transformers, motor control centers, VFD's, etc. 17. Where terminating in threaded hubs, screw the raceway or fitting tight into the hub so the i bears againstprotection sh# .• - nipples are used, align the raceway so the coupling is square to the box, and tighten the chase nipple so • threads are exposed. # . # # # •• . ! «# LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 # EVEN I III a. Lighting b. Power Distribution C, Communications and Data d, Emergency (Essential) LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 1) Lighting 2) Power Distribution a) Equipment branch b) Critical branch c) Life Safety branch e. UPS f. Fire Alarm g, Temperature Control h. Paint new exposed conduits to match existing exposed conduits where installed in areas with existing painted conduits or where otherwise indicated, 38. Provide rebar and tie downs for all conduits and conduit racks to be installed with concrete or slurry to prevent conduit "float". B. Install buried electrical line warnings per Division 26 section -'"Electrical identification". C. Install labeling as required in Division 26 section - "Electrical Identification". A. Surface Raceways and Wireways: Mechanically assemble metal enclosures and raceways4ir, form continuous electrical conductor and connect to electrical boxes, fittings and cabinets as to provide effective electrical continuity and rigid mechanical assembly, I Where practicable, avoid use of dissimilar metals throughout system to eliminate possibility of electrolysis. Where dissimilar metals are in contact, coat all surfaces with corrosion inhibiting compound before assembling, 2. Install expansion fittings in all raceways wherever structural expansion joints are crossed, 3. Make changes in direction of raceway run with proper fittings, supplied by raceway manufacturer. Field bends of raceway sections are not permitted, 4, Properly support and anchor raceways for their entire length by structural materials. Raceways are not to span any space unsupported, 5. Use boxes as supplied by raceway manufacturer wherever junction, pull or device boxes are required. Standard electrical "handy" boxes, etc., are not permitted for use with surface raceway installations, 6, Install an insulated grounding conductor in all wireways and surface raceways. Bond grounding conductor to all wireways and surface raceways. 7. Paint new exposed surface metal raceway to match adjacent surfaces where raceway is installed in finished areas such as lobbies, corridors, and normally occupied spaces. & Surface raceways and wireways are acceptable only where specifically indicated on the drawings. The proposed use of surface raceways and wireways shall be submitted for review by the Engineer prior to installation. RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS — 05/01/2015 26 0533 -10 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 9. Common wireways are not acceptable for convergence of multiple circuits unless specifically indicated on the drawings. The proposed use of a common wireway shall be submitted for review by the Engineer prior to installation, 10. The proposed use of wireways above or below panelboards, switchboards, motor control centers, and other electrical equipment shall be submitted along with a layout drawing for review by the Engineer prior to installation. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A. Upon completion of installation of raceways, inspect interiors of raceways-, clear all blockages and remove burrs, dirt and construction debris. END OF SECTION 26 0533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS — 05/01/2015 260533-11 LMC: Cath Lab ##2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 SECTION 26 0534 CABINETS, BOXES, AND FITTINGS FART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY: A. This section includes cabinets, boxes, and fittings for electrical installations and certain types of electrical fittings not covered in other sections. Types of products specified in this section include: 1. Outlet and device boxes. 2. Pull and junction boxes. 3. Service fittings 4. Cabinets, 5. dinged door enclosures. B. Conduit -body -type electrical enclosures and wiring fittings are specified in the Division 26 Section on Raceways. 12 DEFINITIONS; A. Cabinets: An enclosure designed either for surface or for flush mounting and having a frame, or trim in which a door or doors may be mounted, & Device Box; > An outlet box designed to house a receptacle device or a wiring box designed to house a switch. . .. - .,a «11111 111111il D. Hinged Door Enclosure:An enclosuredesigned for surface mounting and having swinging doors or o _ -a directly to and telescoping with the walls of - ra Outlet :• " wiring enclosure where current is taken froma system to supply utilizationa a Wiring Box: An enclosure designed to provide access to wiring systems or for the mounting of indicating devices or of ar controlling electrical cfrcuits� 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit product data for cabinets and enclosures with classification higher than NEMA 1. B. Shop drawings for floor boxes and boxes, enclosuresand cabinets that are to be shop fabricated, a a For as fabricated junction and pull boxes, show scaled views and spatial relationshipsto adjk6ht _a •ment. ' Show box typedimensions, a PART 2 - PRODUCTS' 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: + a- a a a -• a s a- a as a a s a I; Cabinets: CABINETS, BOXES, AND FITTINGS - 05101%2015 26 0534- 1 a. Hoffman Engineering Co. b. Erickson Electrical Equipment Co. c. Electric Panelboard, Inc. d, Parker Electrical Mfg. Co. e. Spring City Electrical Mfg. Co. f. Square D Co. g. Circle AW AElectrical Cabinets, Boxes, and Fittings: Of indicated types, sizes, and NEMA enclosure classes. Where not indicated, provide units of types, sizes, and classes appropriate for the use and location. Provide all items complete with covers and accessories required for the intended use, Provide gaskets for units in damp or wet locations. 2.3 MATERIALS AND FINISHES: K Sheet Steel: Flat -rolled, code -gage, galvanized steel. B. Fasteners for General Use: Corrosion resistant screws and hardware including cadmium and zinc plated items. C. Fasteners for Damp or Wet Locations: Stainless steel screws and hardware. D. Cast Metal for Boxes, Enclosures, and Covers; Copper -free aluminum except as otherwise specified. E. Exterior Finish: Gray baked enamel for items exposed in finished locations except as otherwise indicated. F. Painted Interior Finish: Where indicated, white baked enamel. Emergency system cabinets and boxes shall be red. G. Fittings for Boxes, Cabinets, and Enclosures: Conform to UL 514B. Malleable iron or zinc plated steel for conduit hubs, bushings and box connecters. 2.4 METAL OUTLET, DEVICE, AND SMALL WIRING BOXES: A. General, Conform to UL 514A, "Metallic Outlet Boxes, Electrical," and UL 514B, "Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes." Boxes shall be of type, shape, size, and depth to suit each location and application. B. Steel Boxes: Conform to NEMA OS 1, "Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports." Boxes shall be sheet steel with stamped knockouts, threaded screw holes and accessories suitable for each location including mounting brackets and straps, cable clamps, exterior rings and fixture studs. CCast-Aluminum Boxes: Copper free aluminum threaded raceway entries, and features and accessories suitable for each location including mounting ears, threaded screw holes for R- vices and closure plugs. A. General: Conform to NEMA OS 2, "Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports" and UL 5140, "Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush Device Boxes and Covers," CABINETS, BOXES, AND FITTINGS - 05/01/2015 260534-2 LMC. Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 Boxes shall be molded PVC units of type, shape, size, and depth to suit location and application. B. Boxes for Concealed Work: Mounting provisions and wiring entrances to suit installation conditions and wiring method used. C. Boxes for Exposed Work: Ultra -violet stabilized, nonconductive, high impact -resistant boxes with integrally molded raceway entrance hubs and removable mounting flanges. Boxes shall be equipped with threaded screw holes for, device and cover plate mounting. Each box shall have a molded cover of matching PVC material suitable for the application. 2.6 PULL. AND JUNCTION BOXES: A. General. Comply with UL 50, "Electrical Cabinets and Boxes", for boxes over 100 cubic inches volume. Boxes shall have screwed or bolted on covers of material same as box and shall be of size and shape;to suit application„ B, Steel Boxes: Sheet steel with welded seams. Where necessary to provide a rigid assembly, construct with internal structural steel bracing. C. Hot -Dipped Galvanized Steel Boxes: Sheet steel with welded seams. Where necessary to provide a rigid assembly, construct with internal structural steel bracing. Hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. Cover shrill be gasketed. D. Stainless -Steel Boxes: Fabricate of stainless steel conforming to Type 302 of ASTM A 167, "Specification for Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip." Where necessary to provide a rigid assembly, construct with internal structural stainless steel bracing. Cover shall be Basketed. E. Cast -Aluminum Boxes: Molded of copper free aluminum, with gasketed cover and integral threaded conduit entrances, F. Malleable or Cast-iron BoxesMolded of iron alloy with gasketed cover and integral threaded conduit 2.7 CABINETS: A Comply.t t :a B. Construction: Sheet steel, NEMA I class exceptotherwise indicated, Cabinet shall consist of box and a front# .. n. t of . one piece frame 4 ,. hinged door. Arrange door to close against a rabbetplaced all around the inside edge of aclose fit between door and frame. Provide # -# fasteners, notover • inches apart,# hold fronts# cabinet boxes and provide a adjustment,a t- flush or a .4 door hinges not over apart and not over t inches fromto and bottom of o cabinets, make the front approximately 3/4" larger than the box all around, For surface mounted cabinets make frontheight # width as box. D. Locks: Combination spring catch and key lock, with all locks for cabinets of the same system keyed alike. Locks may be omitted on signal, power, and lighting cabinets located within wire closets and mechanical -electrical rooms. Locks shall be of a type to permit doors to latch closed without locking. CABINETS, BOXES, AND FITTINGS - 05/01/2015 260534-3 LMC. Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Pyne Equipment Replacement 177.307 2.8 STEEL ENCLOSURES WITH HINGED DOORS: A. Comply with UL 50, "Cabinets and Enclosures" and NEMA ICS 6, "Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems." B. Construction: Sheet steel, 16 gage, minimum, with continuous welded seams. NEMA class as indicated; arranged for surface mounting. C. Doors: Hinged directly to cabinet and removable, with approximately inch flange around all edges, shaped to ower edge of box. Provide handle operated, key locking latch. Individual dour width shall be no greater than 24 inches. Provide multiple doors where required. D. Mounting Panel: Provide painted removable internal mounting panel for component installation, E. Enclosure: NEMA 1 except as indicated. Where door gasketing is required, provide neoprene gasket attached with oil -resistant adhesive, and held in place with steel retaining strips. For all enclosures of class higher than NEMA 1, use hubbed raceway entrances. 2.9 CAST METAL ENCLOSURES WITH HINGED DOORS: A. Copper free aluminum with bolted, hinged doors. Where used at hazardous (classified) locations, enclosures shall conform to UL and shall be listed and labeled for the classification of hazard involved. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL: A. Locations: Install items where indicated and where required to suit code requirements and installation conditions. B. Cap unused knockout hales where blanks have been removed and plug unused conduit hubs. C. Support and fasten items securely in accordance with Division 26 Section on Supporting Devices, D. Sizes shall be adequate to meet NEC volume requirements; but in no case smaller than sizes indicated. E. Remove sharp edges where they may come in contact with wiring or personnel. 3.2 APPLICATIONS. A, Cabinets: Flush mounted, NEMA enclosure type 1 except as otherwise indicated. B, Hinged Door Enclosures Indoor: NEMA type 1 enclosure except as indicated. HingedC. Door ..« .- * p hood, factory tailored to individual D. Hinged Door Enclosures in Corrosive Locations. NEMA type 4X nonmetallic enclosure. CABINETS, BOXES, AND FITTINGS - 05/01/201 260534-4 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 E. Outlet Boxes and Fittings: Install outlet and device boxes and associated covers and fittings of materials and NEMA types suitable for each location and in conformance with the following requirements: 1. Interior Dry Locations: NEMA Type 1, sheet steel or nonmetallic as permitted by local code. 2. Locations Exposed to Weather or Dampness: Cast metal, NEMA type 3R. 1 Wet Locations: NEMA Type 4 enclosures, 4. Corrosive Locations: NEMA Type 4X enclosures, F. Pull and Junction Boxes: Install pull and junction boxes of materials and NEMA types suitable for each location except as otherwise indicated. AOutlets at Windows and Doors: Locate close to window trim. For outlets indicated above doors center outlets above the door opening except as otherwise indicated. B. Column and Pilaster Locations: Locate outlet boxes for switches and receptacles on columns or pilasters so the centers of the columns are clear for future installation of partitions. C. Locations in Special Finish Materials: For outlet boxes for receptacles and switches mounted in desks or furniture cabinets or in glazed tile, concrete block, marble, brick, stone or wood walls, use rectangular shaped boxes with square corners and straight sides. Install such boxes without plaster rings. Saw cut all recesses for outlet boxes in exposed masonry walls. D. Gasketed Boxes: At the following locations use malleable or cast metal, threaded hub type boxes with gasketed weatherproof covers: 1. Exterior locations. Z Where surface mounted on unfinished walls, columns or pilasters. (Cover gaskets may be omitted in dry locations), 3. Where exposed to moisture laden atmosphere. 4. Where indicated. E. Mounting: Mount outlet boxes for switches with the long axis vertical or as indicated, Mount boxes for receptacles vertically, except above counter receptacles to be mounted horizontally. Three or more gang boxes shall be mounted with the long axis horizontal. Locate box covers or device plates so they will not span different types of building finishes either vertically or horizontally, Locate boxes for switches near doors on the side op4osite4he hinges and close to door trim, even though electrical floor plans may show them on hinge side, Provide far side box supports, for electrical switch boxes installed on metal studs and provide stud to stud support for electrical receptacle boxes installed on metal studs. F. Ceiling Outlets* Forfixtures, where wiring is concealed, use outlet boxes 4 inches square by 1-1/2 inches deep, minimum. G. Cover Plates for Surface Boxes: Use plates sized to box front without overlap. K Protect outlet boxes to prevent entrance of plaster, and debris. Thoroughly clean foreign material from boxes before conductors are installed. CABINETS, BOXES, AND FITTINGS - 05/01/2015 260534-5 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 L Concrete Boxes: Use extra deep boxes to permit side conduit entrance without interfering with reinforcing, but do not use such boxes with over 6 inch depth. J. Existing Outlet Boxes: Where extension rings are required to be installed, drill new mounting holes in the rings to align with the mounting holes on the existing boxes where existing holes are not aligned. K Back to back outlet boxes are not permitted. Separate boxes a minimum of 6 inches in standard walls and 24 inches in acoustical walls. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES: A. Box Selection: For boxes in main feeder conduit runs, use sizes not smaller than 8 inches square by 4 inches deep. Do not exceed 6 entering and 6 leaving raceways in a single box. Quantities of conductors (including equipment grounding conductors) in pull or junction box shall not exceed the following: Size of Maximum no. of Largest Conductors Conductors in in Box Box No. 4/0 AWG 30 250 MCM 20 500 MCM 15 Over 500 MCM 10 B. Cable Supports: Install clamps, grids, or devices to which cables may be secured. Arrange cables so they may be readily identified. Support cable at least every 30 inches inside boxes. CMount pull boxes in inaccessible ceilings with the covers flush with the finished ceiling. DSize: Provide pull and junction boxes for telephone, signal, and other systems at least 50 percent larger than would be required by Article 370 of NEC, or as indicated, Locate boxes strategically and provide shapes to permit easy pulling of future wires or cables of types normal for such systems. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF CABINETS AND HINGED DOOR ENCLOSURES - A, Mount with fronts straight and plumb. B. Install with tops 78 inches above floor. C. Set cabinets in finished spaces flush with walls. 3,6 GROUNDING: A. Electrically ground metallic cabinets, boxes, and enclosures. Where wiring to item includes a grounding conductor, provide a grounding terminal in the interior of the cabinet, box or enclosure. CABINETS, BOXES, AND FITTINGS - 05/01/2015 260534-6 LMC: Cath Lab ##2 -- Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177307 3.7 CLEANING ANC► FINISH REPAIR: A. Upon completion of installation, inspect components. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish including chips, scratches, abrasions and weld marks. B. Galvanized Finish: Repair damage using a zinc -rich paint recommended by the tray manufacturer. C. Fainted Finish: Repair damage using matching corrosion inhibiting touch-up coating, ENL} OF SECTION 25 05 34 CABINET'S, BOXES, AND FITTINGS - 05/01/2015 260534-7 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177,307 SECTION 26 0553 — IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes identification of electrical materials, equipment, and installations. It includes requirements for electrical identification components including but not limited to the following: 1. Buried electrical line warnings. 2. Identification labeling for raceways, cables, and conductors, 1 Operational instruction signs. 4. Warning and caution signs. 5, Equipment labels and signs. 1.2 SUBMITTALS: X General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division I Specification Sections, 1. Product Data for each type of product specified. 2. Schedule of identification nomenclature to be used for identification signs and labels fl each piece of equipment shall include, but not be limited to, the following equipment types as specified in Division 26. a. Cabinets and enclosures b. Disconnect switches C. Circuit breakers and switches d. Starters e. Variable frequency drives f. Fire alarm system panels and all ancillary cabinets and equipment g. Paging, intercom and background music system cabinets. hLighting control cabinets including dimmer cabinets, 1 Samples of each color, lettering style and other graphic representation required for identification materials; samples of labels and signs. 4Identification required in this section shall apply to equipment furnished in Division 26 and any other applicable Divisions including Division 23. A. ANSI Compliance: Comply with requirements of ANSI Standard A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems," with regard to type and size of lettering for raceway and cable labels. LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS; A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. IdealIndustries, Inc. 2. LEM Products, Inc. 3. Markal Corp. . Panduit Corp. 5. W.H.Brady, Co. 6. 3M Company 2.2 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS: A. Identify System Raceways with Painted Couplings & Connectors: Provide painted couplings & connectors for all concealed raceways. Install painted couplings at all conduit connecting couplings including end couplings at stub outs. Apply the following colors; Normal Power: Black Life Safety Power: Yellow; Critical: Red Equipment Branch: Orange UPS: Brown Ground: Creep B. Adhesive Marking Labels for Exposed Raceway and Busway: Pre-printed, flexible, self-adhesive labels with legend indicating voltage and service (Emergency, Lighting, Power, Power dc., HVAC, Communications, Control, Eire). Label Size for Raceways and Busway troy or Brother labels 1 inch high by 12 inches long (minimum) with 518 inch minimum height letters, 1. 600 Volt and Below Normal: White letters on black background indicating source equipment designation, circuit number(s), and voltage. 2. 600 Volt and Below Emergency: Indicate source equipment designation, circuit number(s), and voltage for each branch as follows. Life safety: Black letters on yellow Critical: Black letters on OSHA purple Equipment and Standby: Black letters on OSHA Orange: 3; UPS: White letters on brown background indicating source equipment designation, circuit number(s), and voltage 4. Eire Alarm: White letters on red background indicating "EIRE ALARM". 5, Temperature Control: White or black letters on blue background indicating "TEMP. CONTROL." 6. Ground: White or black letters on green background indicating "GROUND" and equipment and designation. 7. Building Alarms. Orange letters on white background indicating "BUILDING ALARMS." 8. Network Fiber:; Blab letters on white background indicating "NETWORK FIBER." 9. Where conduits enter or exit a panelboard, pull or junction box, switchboard, or other distribution equipment, conduit labels shall include circuit number in addition to feeder identification and voltage. Bill 111111111!11 .;iiiiiiiiiiii all WoU. �*. I SM N .. lj]ujzj�� prilill IIIIIIIIIIII III 111111111111111 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 2Emergency Operating Signs: Install, where required by NEC, where indicated, or where reasonably required to assure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems and of the items to which they connect, engraved laminate signs with white legend on red background with minimum 3/8 inch high lettering for emergency instructions on power transfer, load shedding, or other emergency operations. A electrical equipment in building, including central • master unit of each electrical system. This includes communication/signal/alarm systems, unless unit is specified with its own self-explanatory identification. Text shall match terminology and numbed• of the Contract Documents and shop drawings. Apply labels for each unit of the following categories of electrical equipment. LMC.- Cath Lab Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 1 a.. Panelboards; electrical cabinets and enclosures. b. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. C. Motor starters. d. Pushbutton stations. e. Contactors. f. Remote-controlled switches. . Dimmers. h. Control devices. i. Call system master station. 1• Fire alarm master station or control panel. J. Apply cdreuit/controd/item designation labels of engraved plastic laminate for disconnect switches, breakers, pushbuttons, pilot lights, motor control centers, and similar items for power distribution and control components above, except panelboards and ala /signal components, where labeling is specified elsewhere. IC. For panelboards, provide framed, typed circuit schedules Mabel all spares and spaces in pencil) with explicit description and identification of items controlled by each individual breaker. « «_ -« « : « a A N it M • IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS — 05/0112015 260553-5 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY; A, Extent of electrical connections for equipment is indicated by drawings and schedules. Electrical connections are hereby defined to include connections used for providing electrical power to equipment. B. Applications of electrical power connections specified in this section include the following: 1. To resistive heaters. Z From electrical source to motor starters. 3. From motor starters to motors. 4, To lighting equipment, .. To converters, rectifiers, transformers, inverters, rheostats, and similar current adjustment features of equipment. 6. To grounds including earthing connections. . To master units of communication, signal, alarm, clock; public address, sound, and video Systems. 8. From push batons g. To equipment requiring electrical connection. 10. Other connections as shown. 1,2 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical connectors and terminals, of types and ratings required, and ancillary connection materials, including electrical insulating tape, soldering fluxes, and cable ties, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years: B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms with at least 2 years of Successful installation experience with projects utilizing electrical connections for equipment similar to that required for this project. 1.3 SUBMIT"T"ALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on electrical connections for equipment products and materials. 1A DEFINITIONS; A. Load voltage wiring shall be defined as; Conduit and wiring required to carry power to motors and other equipment or devices, Wiring from control devices to equipment that carry power to drive that equipment such as line voltage thermostats, etc., shall be included as load voltage wiring. Wiring that provides power to control panels, control transformers, control relays, time clocks, etc., shall also be included as load voltage wiring. 1a5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING. A. Deliver electrical connection products wrapped in proper factory fabricated type containers. WIRING CONNECTIONS — 05/01/2015 260583-1 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 B. Store electrical connection products in original cartons and protect from weather, construction traffic and debris. C. dandle electrical connection products carefully to prevent breakage, denting, and scoring finish. PART 2 - PRODUCTS .1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. , Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide circuit and motor disconnects by one of the following: 1. General Electric Co. 2. Square D Company 1 Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 2.2 GENERAL: A. Overcurrent'Protective Devices (OCPDs): Provide type, rating, and features as indicated. Comply with Division 16 Section on Overcurrent Protective Devices, with OCPDs adapted to equipment connection installation. Tandem circuit breakers shall not be used. Multiple breakers shall have common trip, B. Provide motor controllers that are horsepower rated to suit the motor controlled. C. Contacts shall open each ungrounded connection to the motor. Contacts shall be NEMA rated, 7°C. D. Overload relays shell be ambient -compensated type with inverse -time -current characteristic. Provide with heaters or sensors in each phase matched to nameplate Rill load current of the specific motor to which connected with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle and power factor correction supplied with the motor. 2.3 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS: A. General: For each electrical connection indicated, provide complete assembly of materials, including but not necessarily limited to, pressure connectors, terminals (lugs), electrical insulating tape, electrical solder, electrical soldering flux, heat -shrinkable insulating tubing, cable ties, solderless wire -nuts, disconnect, starter, contactor, relays, etc., and other items and accessories as needed to complete splices and terminations of types indicated. B. Metal Conduit, Tubing and Fittings: 1. General: Provide metal conduit, tubing and fittings of types, grades, sizes and weights (wall thicknesses) indicated for each type service. Provide products complying with Division -26 section on Raceways. C. Wires, Cables, and Connectors: 1. General: Provide wires, cables, and connectors complying with Division -26 section on Wires and Cables. WIRING CONNECTIONS 05/01/2015 260583-2 LMC: Cath Lab »Equipment Replacement 2. Wires/Cables: Unless otherwise indicated, provide wiresIcables (conductors) for electrical connections { # sizes, ratings,and material of wires/cables which are supplying electrical power. 1 Connectors and Terminals: Provide electrical connectors and terminals which mate and matchi including sizes and ratings, with equipment terminals # are recommended by equipment manufacturer for intended applications. 4. Electrical Connection Accessories: Provide electrical insulating tape, heat -shrinkable insulatingAubing and boots, electrical solder� electrical soldering flux, wirenuts and cable ties as recommended for Use by accessories manufacturers for type services indicated. 5, Cord and Plug Connected Equipment: Where indicated, contractors shall provide a length of SO cord complete with a straight blade or twist -lock receptacle for connection of equipment Cord and plug rating shall be suitable for the connected equipment load and rating of the branch circuit o"rcurrent protective device. Plug shall match receptacle configuration included on the plans and cord length shall be as required. Contractor shall connect cord to equipment. # # W_ 111111111126 1"WON, M_11101611�11M'1111 C. Non -fusible Disconnects: Provide UL type "HD" 100 per cent duty rated switches of classes ! currentratings as indicated� D. Switches for Classified (Hazardous) Locations: Provide heavy duty switches, with UL labels and listings for hazardous location classifications in which installed. WIRING CONNECTIONS -- 05/01/2015 260583-3 E. Accessories: 1. Electrical Interlocks: Provide number and arrangement of interlock contacts in switches s indicated or required. 2. Special Enclosure Material: Provide special enclosure material as follows for switches indicated: a. Stainless Steel Type 304: For NEMA Type 4. b. Molded Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic. For NEMA Type 4x C. Heavy`Cast Aluminum: For hazardous locations. NEMA Types 7 through 9. . Handles shall be lockable in open and closed position without modification. 2.6 AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES: A. General: Provide the following factory installed in controller enclosure except as otherwise indicated. Where separately mounted, provide NEMA 1 enclosure except as otherwise indicated. A. Inspect area and conditions under which electrical connections for equipment are to be installed and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to C2 INSTALLATION ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS: A. Furnish, set in place, and wire (except as may be otherwise indicated) all heating, ventilating, air conditioning, plumbing and fire protection, elevator, etc., motors and controls in accordance WIRING CONNECTIONS — 05/01/2015 260583-4 i • '�. x11 `• • •'• ... fl.. ♦ � • #. '" •. a s xe • «e♦ x'• rax _ • • s r« • • t s }M •- • • a A. Inspect area and conditions under which electrical connections for equipment are to be installed and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to C2 INSTALLATION ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS: A. Furnish, set in place, and wire (except as may be otherwise indicated) all heating, ventilating, air conditioning, plumbing and fire protection, elevator, etc., motors and controls in accordance WIRING CONNECTIONS — 05/01/2015 260583-4 i LMQ Cath Lab Equipment 'i with the following schedule and in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practice% and complying with applicable requirements of UL, NEC and NECA!s "Standard of Installation" to ensure that products requirements. Carefully coordinate with work performed under the Mechanical Division of these Specifications. 13Coordinate with other # including wires/cables, racewayand equipment installati work.necessary to properly interface installation of electrical connections for equipment with other installedCConnect electrical power supply conductors to equipment conductors in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and wiring diagrams, Mate and match conductors of electrical connections for proper interface between electrical power supplies and equipment. wiringDMaintain existing electrical service and feeders to equipment serving occupied areas and operational facilitiesi unless otherwise indicated, or when authorized otherwise in writing by Owner, or Architect/Engineer. Provide temporary service during interruptions to existing facilities. When necessary, schedule momentary outagesfor replacing existing wiring systems with new "cutting ovee has been rating,accomplished, remove, relocate, or abandon existing wiring as indicated, E. Cover splices with electrical insulating material equivalent to, or of greater insulation resistivity # # of those conductorsbeing spliced, L. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices such as limit switches and temperature switches as indicated or per manufacturer's instructions,' M. Provide each motor with a horsepower rated disconnect switch and external thermal overload protection. e .. 1MV27,11-110PROM111 RM 13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL* A. Upon completion of installation of electrical connections, and after circuitry has been energized with rated power source, test connections to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Ensure that direction of rotation of each motor fulfills requirement. Correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance. 3.4 EQUIPMENT CONFECTION SCHEDULES; A. Mechanical Equipment: ITEM FURNISHED SET CONTROL BY BY WIRING (non -load volts e 1. Mechanical Equipment Motors M M -- 2. Special Equipment (i.e., elevators, etc.) a. Motors G G -- b. Magnetic Motor Starters G E* c. Disconnect Switches E E -- Thermal OL Switches Manual Operating Switches WIRING CONNECTIONS — 05/01/2015 260583-6 LMC; Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Pyne Equipment Replacement 177.317 . Motor Starters, combination motor starter/disconnect and Variable Frequency Drives a. Automatically controlled, with or without FICA M E* M switches. b. Manually controlled. M E* -- c. Starters integral with motor control centers E E -- including control relays and transformers. d. Combination Starter/Disconnects M E* M 4. Pushbutton stations, pilot,lights _ M E* M . disconnect switches, thermal overload Switches, E * M manual operating switches. 6. Multi -speed switches M E* M 7. Control relays, transformers. M M M 8. Load voltage control items such as line voltage M M E thermostats not connected to control panel S Stems. Non -load voltage control Items. M M M 10, Electric thermostats, remote bulb thermostats, M M M motor valves, float controls, etc., which are an integral part of mechanical equipment or directly attached to ducts, pipes, etc. 11. Motor valves, damper motor, solenoid valves, EP M M M** and PE switches, VAV box controls, actuators, etc. 12. Control circuit outlets E E -- 13. Fire protection controls (including flow switches) M M ** 14. duct smoke detectors, including relays for fan E M M** shutdown. 15. Temperature Control Panel M M M 16. Interlocks < M M M General, division 13 or 14 M = Mechanical; division 23 E = Electrical, division 26 WIRING CONNECTION — 05/01/2015 260583-7 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane EquipmentReplacement SECTION 26 0923 . LIGHTING CONTROL. DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY: A. Extent of lighting control equipment work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and is hereby defined to include, but not by way of limitation, programmable controllers, data equipment, relays, switches, and control wiring, and ancillary equipment. B. 'Types of lighting control equipment specified in this section include the following: 1. Occupancy Sensors C. refer to other Division -20 sections for wires/cables, electrical boxes and fittingsand wiring devices which are required in conjunction with lighting control equipment work; not work of this section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on lighting control equipment and components. B. Shop Drawings: Submit layout drawings of lighting control equipment and components including, but not necessarily limited to, programmable controllers, transceivers, printers, relays and switches. In addition, show spatial relationship of lighting control equipment to other electrical equipment in proximity. C. Submit lists of ballast and lamp combinations compatible with dimmer systems, by manufacturer and catalog number. D. Wiring Diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams for lighting control equipment and components showing control and interconnection wiring, including connections to equipment components and electrical power feeders. Differentiate between portions of wiring that are manufacturer -installed and portions that are field -installed. Provide a voltage drop calculation for network cabling to verify EOL. voltage compliance. E. Coordination Drawings: Submit evidence that lighting controls are compatible with connected monitoring and control devices. Show interconnecting signal and control wiring and interfacing devices that prove compatibility of inputs and outputs. For networked controls, list network protocols and provide statements from manufacturers that input and output devices meet interoperability requirements of the network protocol. 26 0923 -1 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177307 1.3 QUALITY" ASSURANCE: AManufacturers Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of lighting control equipment and ancillary equipment, of types, ratings and capacities required, whose products have been # BInstallers Qualifications:leastyears of successful projects with lighting control equipment work similar to that required for this project, C. Agreement to Maintain: Engage Installer who is willing to execute with the Owner, required agreement for continued maintenance of lighting control equipment. U. FCC Compliance: Comply with Fart 68 of Federal Communications Commission Rules pertaining to telephone equipment registration by manufacturer. 1. Provide telephone equipment with FCC labels indicating applicable FCC registration and numbering of equipment. E. Codes and Standards: 1. Electrical Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local electrical code requirements of the authority having jurisdiction and NEC as applicable to construction, installation of lighting control and communications equipment. . Control wiring shall be in accordance with the NEC requirements for Class 2 remote control systems, Article 725 and manufacturer specification. 3. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL Std 486A, "Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors."" Provide lighting control equipment and components which are UL -listed and labeled. 'Lighting control panels shall be UL 916 and UL 924 Listed. 4. NEMA Compliance:Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA"s Stds Pub No. 250, "Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 -Volts Maximum)." 5. EIA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of Electronic Industries Association standards pertaining to telephone and electronic systems: 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING X Deliver lighting control equipment and components in factory -fabricated type containers or wrappings, which properly protect equipment from damage. B. Store lighting control equipment original packaging and protect from weather an« construction traffic. Wherever possible, store indoors-, where necessary to store outdoors, store above grade and enclose with watertight wrapping. C. Handle lighting control equipment carefully to prevent physical damage to equipment and components, Do not install damaged equipment remove from site and replace damaged equipment with new., LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES — 05/01/201 260923-2 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Si -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Occupancy Sensors. Equal to % of the amount installed for each type. PART 2 - PRODUCTS .1 MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide lighting control equipment of one of the following (for each type and rating of equipment): 1. Occupancy Sensors: a. Sensor Switch b. Leviton c. Ltron d. Hubbell e. Watttopper (The) 22 OCCUPANCY SENSORS - PART NSORS: PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION: A. Examine areas and conditions under which lighting: control equipment is to be installed and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. 3.2 INSTALLATION O! CONTROL EQUIPMENT: installationA. Install lighting control system components and ancillary equipment as indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that lighting control equipment complies with requirements. Comply with requirements of NEC, and applicable portions of NECA!s "Standard of Installation" pertaining to general electrical • LIGHTING CONTROL. DEVICES -- 0510112015 260923-3 B. Coordinate with other electrical work, including raceways, and electrical boxes and fittings, as necessary to interface installation of lighting control equipment work with other work, C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturers torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Stds 486A and B. 13 GROUNDING: X Provide equipment grounding connections for lighting control equipment as indicated. Tighten connectors to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Sid 486A to assure permanent and effective grounding. A. Upon completion of installation and after circuitry has been energized, demonstrate capability and compliance of system with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting. Testing and retesting at no cost to Owner, B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field -assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and assist in field testing. Report results in writing. C, Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: I . Test for circuit continuity. 2. Verify that the control module features are operational, 3. Check operation of local override controls. 4. =m diagnostics by simulating improper operation of several components y facilities. END OF SECTION 26 0923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES — 05/01/2015 260923-4 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177307 SECTION 26 2726 - WIRING DEVICES PART I - GENERAL 11 SUMMARY: A. The extent of wiring device work is indicated by drawings and schedules. Wiring devices are defined as single discrete units of electrical distribution systems which are intended to carry but not utilize electric energy. B. Types of electrical wiring devices in this section include the following: 1. Receptacles M= 3. Switches 4. Wallplates 5. Dimmers 6. Plugs and connectors 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical wiring devices, of types, sizes, and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years. B. Installer's Qualifications* Firm with at least 2 years of successful installation experience on projects utilizing wiring devices similar to those required for this project. CListing and LabelingProvide products that are listed and labeled for their applications and installation conditions and for the environments in which installed. I I The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the "National Electrical Code", Article 100, 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on electrical wiring devices. & Samples of device plates for color selection and evaluation of technical features shall be submitted. COperation and maintenance data for materials and products specified in this Section to include in the "Operating and Maintenance Manual" specified in Division I WIRING DEVICES — 05/01/2015 26 2726 -1 LMC: Cath LabBi-Plane Equipment •-► 1.4 CO ORDINATION,- A. Wiring Devices for Owner Furnished Equipment: Match devices to plug connectors for Owner -furnished equipment. S. Cord and plug sets: Match coni and plug sets to equipment requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide wiring devices of one of the following: 1. Devices: a. Harvey Hubbell Inc. b. Leviton Mfg Co. C. Pass and Seymour Inc. d. Cooper Crouse -Funds Co. e. Bryant Electric Co. f. General Electric Co, 2.2 WIRING DEVICES: A. Receptacles. WIRING DEVICES — 05/01/2015 262726-2 7, Clock Outlet: Single NEMA 5-15P side wired, mounted in a recessed faceplate with w. Receptacles, ..strial Heavy -Duty: Conform to NEMA Standard r. s "Plugs, Receptacles, and cable Connectors of the Pin and Sleeve Type for Industrial Use," 9, Pendant Cord/Connector Devices: Matching, locking type, plug and plug receptacle body connector, NEMA 15-20P and L5 -20R, heavy-duty grade. aBodies: Nylon with screw -open cable -gripping jaws and provision for attaching external able grip. bExternal Cable Grip: Woven wire mesh type made of high strength galvanized - steel wire strand and matched to cable diameter and with attached provision designed for the corresponding connector. 10. Cord and Plug Sets: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of the equipment being connected. a. Cord: RRubber-insulated, stranded copper conductors, #. Grounding conductor has green insulation. Ampacity is equipment rating plus 30% minimum. 'i Plug: Mate configurationnylon body and integralcable-clamping jaws. Match to cord and to receptacle type intended for connection. i t Pilot Light Type: Lighted handle lit when switch is "on." 4. Locator Type: Continuously lighted handle. . Switches in Hazardous (Classified) Locations, Comply with UL Standard 894, "Switches for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations." LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement ON-OFF control. Low voltage dimmer shall be NTLV Series, Verify color with Architect/EngineerArchitect/Engineer prior to ordering. 23 WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES: A. Wallplates: Provide wallplates for single and combination wiring devices, of types, sizes, and with ganging and cutouts as indicated. Select plates which mate and match wiring devices to which attached and match coverplates used in similar areas in the North Pavilion Addition. Construct with metal screws for securing plates to devices; screw heads colored to match finish of plates. Identify all wall plates used for receptacles with branch circuit number per requirements of section on Electrical Identification. Provide blank wall plates for all cable, data, telephone and junction and outlet boxes� Where cables are routed through the wallplate, provide grommets in wallplate openings to protect cables, Provide plates possessing the following additional r « i' Iii «I I 111 R11 s #•`.: ^:• . Material and Finish: Steel plate, galvanized for use in unfinished areas, mechanical, and electrical rooms. 3. Material and Finish, Nylon,; smooth for plates. 4. Material and Finish 0.04" thick brass, brushed chrome. PANT 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES: projectA, Install wiring devices as indicated, in accordance with manufacturees written Instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill -• B. Coordinate with other «rk, including painting, electrical boxes « wiring work, to interface installationof « devices with other C. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes which are clean, free from excess building materials, dirt, and debris. D. Install wiring devices after wiring work is completed. E, Install wallplates after painting work is completed, F. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for wiring devices. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Stds 486A. C. Install telephoneIcier service poles in accordance with final furnishing arrangement. Poles shall be plumb, true, and secure. H. Provide hospital grade devices in all patient care areas and corridors. 1, Provide CFM type outlets for each above counter duplex receptacle shown within 6 feet -0 inches of sinks/lavatories. For above counter multi -outlet assemblies which do not contain WILING DEVICES — 0610102015 262726-4 LMC: Cath Lab ##2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177307 duplex receptacles that can be replaced with GFCI devices, provide GFl circuit breakers on the branch circuit(s) feeding the assembly. J. Provide tamper resistant safety type receptacles in all pediatric patient rooms and associated waiting areas and play rooms. K, Provide tamper resistant, USB port receptacles in all waiting areas at locations indicated for convenience; L. Provide GFCI receptacles throughout in kitchens and at vending machines. 3.2 PROTECTION OF WALLPLATES AND RECEPTACLES: A. Upon installation of wallplates and receptacles, advise Contractor regarding proper and cautious use of convenience outlets. At time of Substantial Completion, replace those items which have been damaged, including those burned and scored by faulty plugs. .3 GROUNDING: A. Provide equipment grounding connections for wiring devices, unless otherwise indicated. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Std 486A to assure permanent and effective grounds. 3A CLEANING: A. Internally clean devices, device outlet boxes and enclosures. Replace stained, cracked, damaged or improperly painted wall plates or devices, Remove temporary markings of labels. 3,5 TESTING* A. Prior renergizing - electrical . and for short-circuits. Ensure proper polarity of connections is maintained and prepare test reports. Subsequent to energization, test• devices to demonstrate compliance with requirements.Operate each operable device at least six ) 1. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices or similar problems. 2. Tests for Convenience Receptacles: a. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 130 V. b. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable. c. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. d. Polarity: Test for correct neutral conduct to neutral terminal connection. e. Using the test plug, verify that the device outlet box are secure y mounted. WIRING DEVICES -- 0510112015 262726-5 LMC. Cath Lab #2 — Si -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.397 f, GFCI Receptacles, Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 941 Test with both local and remote fault simulations in accordance with manufacturing recommendations. I 3. Tests for patient -care areas in Healthcare Facilities: In addition to the test listed above, perform additional field tests and inspections for receptacles in patient care areas,. Perform the following tests: a. The physical integrity of each receptacle shall be confirmed by visual inspection. b, Test straight blade convenience outlets in patient -care areas for the retention force of the grounding blade according to NFP 99. Retention force shall be not less than 4 oz. (115 g). c. Test and record the impedance between the ground point of each receptacle and the reference point according to NFIA 99, Impedance level shall be less than 9.1 Ohm. 1) The impedance measurement shall be made with an accuracy of 20 percent. 2) For New Construction.. The impedance measurement shall be made between the reference point according to NFPA 99 and the grounding contact of 10 percent of all receptacles in each patient care vicinity. The impedance measurement shall be the ratio of voltage developed (either 60 current; applied between these two points). . Prepare certified test reports in compliance with NFPA 99 and submit reportsin conjunction with field quality control reports required in Division 16 "Grounding and Bonding" 5. Test Instruments: a. Use instruments that comply with UL 1436, b. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement. B. Correct Deficiencies and Report. whereI Correct unsatisfactory conditions and retest to demonstrate compliance; repla devices as required to bring system into compliance. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, possible « retest to demonstrate cdmpllance,otherwise, replace 3. Prepare a report that identifies enclosure, units, conductors and devices checked and describe results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations and test results after remedial action. END OF SECTION 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES — 05/01/2015 262726-6 LMC: Cath Lab ##2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 SECTION.t0 LOW—VOLTAGE GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY; • a ! !• ! - 1. « ! _ - _ • • ! » •- ^! « M ..!". 1. # •` ! : . • • !! ". ! • '" • :• » .. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of overcurrent protective devices of types; sizes, and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Each type of OCP© shall be the product of a single manufacturer. 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS: A. Spare Fuses. Furnish spares of each type and rating of fuse for fusible devices amounting to one set of 3 fuses for each 9 fuses installed but not less than 3 fuses of each type. LOW -VOLTAGE CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES — 05/01/2015 262800-1 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 PARI' 2 - PRODUCTS: 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the fallowing; 1. Cartridge Fuses: a. Bussm nn Div., Cooper Industries, Inc. b. Llttelfuse Inc: 2. Fusible Switches; a. General Electric Co. b. Square <a Co. c. Allen-Bradley Co. d. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. . Molded -Case Circuit Breakers: a. Square 13 Co. b. General Electric Co. C. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4, Combination Circuit Breaker and Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters: a. General Electric Co. b. Square D Co. C. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. When mounting overcurrent protective devices in switchboards switchgear, panelboards, MCC's, etc., provide equipment of same manufacturer as equipment Into which they are being mounted, 2.2 OVERCURR NT PROTECTIVE DEVICES (OCPDS), GENERAL: A. General: Provide tOCPDs in indicated types, as integral components of panelboards, switchboards, motor control centers, and other related equipment; and also as individually enclosed and mounted single units. B. Enclosures., NEMA 250 "Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum)." C. Where tOCPD's are to be installed in existing panelboards, switchboards, and motor control centers, they shall be of the same manufacture and type as those existing in the equipment. If this is not possible, provide devices which are compatible with the existing equipment and when installed will not void the U.L. label or reduce the short circuit rating: of the equipment. D. All ov rcurrent devices shall be individually rated for the available fault current unless otherwise noted. Series ratings of equipment will only be allowed where specifically called out. LOW -VOLTAGE CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES — 05%0112015 262800-2 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 A. General: NEMA Standard FU1, "Low -Voltage Cartridge Fuses," Unless indicated otherwise, provide nonrenewable cartridge fuses of indicated types, classes, and current ratings that have voltage ratings consistent with the circuits on which used. B. All fuses used for main, feeder, or branch -circuit protection shall be Underwriters Laboratories listed, current -limiting fuses with 200,000 ampere interrupting rating and shall be so labeled. Fuses used for supplementary protection (other than branch circuit protection) shall be as specified above or shall be U.L, approved or component recognized for such purposes, All fuses provided shall be furnished by the same manufacturer, Should equipment provided -• a ♦ U.L. Class • size • fuse, the engineer shall •^ furnished sufficient data to ascertain that system function will not be .• affected. CIn order to simplify fuse replacement, reduce spare fuse inventory and insumadequate thermal protection, all fuses 600 amperes and below shall be true dual -element time -delay fuses with separate spring-loaded thermal overload elements in all ampere ratings. All ampere ratings shall be designed to open at 400 degrees F or less when subjected to a non - load oven test, D. To eliminate induction heating, all fuse ferrules and end caps shall be non-ferrous and shall be bronze or other alloy not subject to stress cracking. E. Class L Fuses: UL 1980, "High -interrupting Capacity Fuses, Current -Limiting Type." F. Class RK1 Dual Element Time -Delay Fuses: UL 198E, "Class R Fuses," G. Class J Low -Peak dual Element Fuse: UL 198C 2A NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES: A. General: UL 98 "Enclosed and Dead Front Switches" and NEMA KS I "Enclosed Switches," quick -make, quick -break heavy-duty units. INII 11101PITIMIN13,1111MI I III I C. Withstand Capability: In excess of the available. D. Operation: By means of external handle. F. Enclosure for Independent Mounting: NEMA Type 1 enclosure except as otherwise indicated or required to suit environment where located. G. Contacts shall be NEMA rated 75 degrees C. K Provide auxiliary contacts for disconnects supplied from variable frequency drives. 2.5 FUSIBLE SWITCHES: A. General: UL 98 "Enclosed and Dead Front Switchee'and NEMA KS I "Enclosed Switches," quick -make, quick -break heavy-duty units. B, Rating: Load -breaking capacity in excess of the normal horsepower rating for the switch, LOW -VOLTAGE CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES — 05/01/2015 262800-3 .• *' • . - . C. Withstand Capability: In excess of the let -through current permitted by its fuse when subject to faults up to 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes. D.Operation: By means of external handle: E. Interlock: Prevents access to switch interior except when in "off' position. F. Fuse Clips: Rejection type, indicated.GEnclosure for Switchboard or Panel board Mounting' Suitable for panel mounting where H. Enclosure for Independent Mounting: Provide NEMA Type 1 enclosure except'as otherwise indicated or required to suit environment where located. I. Contacts shall be NEMA rated 75 degrees C. requirementsJ. Provide fuses for safety switches and other equipment of classes, types� and rating needed to fulfill electrical . indicated. K. Provide auxiliary contacts for disconnects supplied from variable frequency drives. .6 MOLDED -CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS: A. General: UL +:•"Molded :*.• Case Circuit Breakers." removal.BConstruction: Provide bolt -in type, except breakers 225 -ampere frame size and larger which may be plug-in type if held in place by positive locking device requiring mechanical release for IndicatedC, Characteristics: frame size, trip r6fingberof poles, ♦ a short-circuit interrupting capacity rating as indicated or required to match existing devices or equipment. D. Tripping Device: Quick -make, quick -break toggle mechanism with inverse -time defy and instantaneous overcurrent trip protection for each pole. Trip unit to be interchangeable within frame sizes for breakers 200 amperes or larger. Breakers 150 amperes and above shall have adjustable trip selection for trip units. All 120/208 volt rated breakers shall be rated and labeled "High Magnetic" D. Adjustable Instantaneous Trip Devices: Factory adjusted to low -trip -setting current values. Provide adjustable instantaneous trip devices for each circuit breaker supplying individual motor loads and where indicated.. E. Enclosure for Switchboard or Panelboard Mounting: Suitable for panel mounting in switchboard or panelboards where indicated. F. Enclosure for Switchboard Mounting: Provide individual mounting where indicated. C. Enclosure for Independent Mounting: NEMA Type 1 enclosure, except as otherwise indicated or required to suit environment where located. LOW -VOLTAGE CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES -- 0510112015 262800-4 2J COMBINATION CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTERS: A. General: UL 943 "Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters," arranged for sensing and tripping for ground fault current in addition to overcrrent and short-circuit current. Provide features as follows: B. Match features and module size of paneloard breakers and provide clear identification of ground fault trip function. C. Trip Setting for Ground Fault: 4 to 6 milliamperes, listed and labeled as a class A, type 1 device. 2,8 CIRCUIT BREAKERS WITH SOLID-STATE TRIP DEVICES: A. general: Provide 250 amp frame size and larger circuit breakers with solid-state trip devices having the following features: 1. Ambient Compensation: Trip device insensitive to temperature changes between minus 20 degrees C and plus 55 degrees C. 2, Adjustability: ;Breaker ratings and trip settings shall be changeable by operation of controls on front panel of breaker and by change of plug-in element without removing the breaker. a. The trip device sensor shall have the same rating as the frame amperage of the circuit breaker unless noted otherwise. 3.. Ground -Fault; Tripping: Provide adjustable pick-up and time -delay on circuit breakers indicated with GFI. 4. Provide zone -selective interlocking capability with both short -time and ground -fault interlock on circuit breakers indicated with Z. 2,9 OCPD ACCESSORIES: A. Provide shunt -trip devices for Circuit breakers unless otherwise indicated. Arrange to trip breaker from an external source of power through a control switch or relay contact. B. Lock -Out Devices: Provide padlocking provisions on each overcurrent protective device, lockable in the open or closed position. Provide 3 sets of lockoutltagout devices for each type of breaker or switch provided. Include tags, locks and all accessories necessary. PART 3 - EXECUTION: 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. Independently Mounted OCPDs: Locate as indicated and install in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install OCPDs level and plumb. OCPDs• • and branch circuit equipmentbe • -a OCPD's in existing distribution anw branch circuit equipment shall match existing forlype and be provided with features as listed C, Install fuses in fusible devices as indicated. Arrange fuses so that fuse ratings are readable without removing fuse. LOW -VOLTAGE CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES — 0510112015 262800-5 LMC: Cath Lab ##2 _ Si -Pune Equipment Replacement 177.307 D. All fines for new disconnect switches or MCC's feeding motors or motor starters shall be provided with Class J fuses. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION X Identify components in accordance with Division 26 Section on electrical identification.. 3.3 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION: A. Install wiring between OCPDs and controlAndication devices. 3.4 CONNECTIONS: A. Check connectors, terminals, bus joints, and mountings for tightness, Tighten field -connected connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.5 GROUNDING: X Provide equipment grounding connections for individually mounted OCPD units as indicated R as required R NEC. TightenM ,. M rw comply with tightening torques specified in Standard 486A to assure permanent and effective grounding. I s 1 11 +: ! f M A. Reports* Prepare written reports on tests and observations. Report �defective Materials and workmanship and unsatisfactoryR. complete •• of repairs adjustments made. Tests shall be made on all new and existing OCPD's provided and/or connected under this M • ordance with this section. B. Labeling: R• •ry completion of tests and related effort, apply a label to tested components i• M testdate, and responsible organization an• person. Scheduleand mechanical inspectionsM electrical» R week's advance t • D. Upon completing installation of perform following 1 Visual d mechanical Inspection:•- the following inspections and related work. a. Overcurrent-Protective-Device Ratings and Settings: Verify indicated ratings and settings to be appropriate for final system arrangement and parameters, b. Inspect for defects and physical damage, NRTL labeling, and nameplate M. Mliance with current single line diagram, C. Exercise and perform operational tests of all mechanical components and other operable devices in accordance with manufacturer's instruction manual. d. Check tightness of electrical connections of OCPD's with calibrated torque wrench. Refer to manufacturer's instructions for proper torque values. e. Clean OCPD"s using manufacturer"s approved methods and materials, LOW -VOLTAGE CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES — 05/01/2015 262800-6 LMC: Cant Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 f. Verify installation of proper fuse types and ratings in fusible OCPD's. 2, Electrical Tests: Perform the fallowing tests in accordance with manufacturer"s instructions. a. Insulation resistance test of fused power circuit devices, insulated -case, and molded -case circuit breakers, 600 -ampere frame size and over at 1000 degree V d.c. for one minute from pole to pole and from each ;pole to ground with breaker closed and across open contacts of each phase. Insulations resistance less than 100 megohms is not acceptable. b, Make insulation resistance tests of OCPD buses, components, and connecting supply, feeder, and control circuits. c. Make continuity tests of circuits. d. Provide full rated primary current tests conforming to ZETA testing: standards of all new and existing breakers 100 amperes and greater, connected under this project. Inspect breakers and provide test report. Set breakers to previous or new settings as directed prior to test. e, Verify relay operation by introduction of accurately metered currents into overcurrentlground fault/ and other circuitry at values which will enable accurate determination of the tripping or activation values. E. bake adjustments for final settings of adjustable -trip devices. F Activate auxiliary protective devices such as ground fault or under -voltage relays, to verify operation of shunt -trip devices, G. Cheek stored -energy charging motors for proper operation of motor, mechanism, and limit switches. H. Check operation of electrically operated OCPDs in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Check key and other interlock and safety devices for operation and sequence. ,Make closing attempts on locked -open and opening attempts on locked -closed devices including moveable barriers and shutters. J. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and provide retesting of OCPDs by testing organization, Verify by the system tests that specified requirements are meta 3.7 CLEANING: A. Upon completion of installation, inspect OCPD's. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris.. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish. 3.8 DEMONSTRATION: A. Training: Arrange and pay for the services of factory -authorized service representatives to demonstrate OCPD's and train Owner's maintenance personnel. ws. • •-s s� rs � r� .��s B, Conduct a minimum of one day of training in operation and maintenance as specified under in the Project Closeout Section of these specifications. Include both classroom training and hands-on equipment operation and maintenance procedures. C. Schedule training with at least seven days' advance notification. END OF SECTION 26 2800 LOW -VOLTAGE CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES — 05/01/2015 262800-8 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 SECTION 26 5000 - LIGHTING PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY: X Extent, location, and details of lighting work are indicated on drawings and in schedules, B. Types of lighting in this section include the following: 10 X Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions on each type of luminaire and component. BShop Drawings: Submit layout drawings of lighting and their spatial relationship to each other. In addition, submit luminaire cut sheets from the manufacturer *lor standard products submit shop drawings; for non-standard products in booklet form with separate sheet for each luminaire, assembled by "luminaire type" with proposed luminaire and accessories clearly indicated on each sheet. Submit details indicating compatibility with ceiling grid system, Shop drawings shall detail luminaire dimensions, weights, methods of field assembly, mounting components, features and accessories. All features and accessories shall be clearly defined. CWiring Diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams for lighting showing connections to electrical power panels, switches, dimmers, controllers, and feeders. Differentiate between portions of wiring which are manufacturer -installed and portions which are field- installed. D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each luminaire and accessory; including "trouble -shooting" maintenance guide. Include that data, product data, and shop drawings in a maintenance manual; in accordance with general requirements of Division 1 E. Illumination Data: Submit lighting calculations identified below for all projects not listed first in the luminaire schedule and where otherwise noted. AManufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of lighting of sizes, types and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. & Installers Qualifications: Firms with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on projects with lighting work similar to that required for this project. LIGHTING — 05/01/2015 265000-1 LMC: Cath Lab #2 _ Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Deliver lighting in factory -fabricated containers or wrappings, which properly protect luminaires from damage. B. Store lighting in original packaging. Store inside well -ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, humidity, laid flat and blocked off ground. C. Handle lighting carefully to prevent damage, breaking, and scoring of finishes. Do not install damaged units or components, replace with new: 1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING - A. Coordinate with other work including wires/cables, electrical boxes and fittings, and raceways, to properly interface installation of lighting with other work, B. Sequence lighting installation with other work to minimize possibility of damage and soiling during remainder of construction, 1 .6 EXTRA MATERIALS: A, Lamps: Furnish stock or replacement lamps amounting to 10%, but not less than 4 lamps in each case, of each type and size lamp used in each type luminaire except no spares lamps are required for 32W Tia lamps, B. Ballasts: None. D. LED Modules: Furnish replacement modules mounting to % of each type, E. Deliver replacement stock as directed to Owner's storage space. PART -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A, Luminaire Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide luminaires as listed in the luminaire schedule or elsewhere on the drawings or specification. B. Lamp Manufacturers: 1. G E Lighting 2, Osram Sylvania . Philips Lighting Company C. LEC} Manufactures. 1. Philips Lighting Co, 2. Lumileci 3. CREE 4. Nichia 5. Osram Sylvania LIGHTING — 05/01/2015 265000-2 LMC- Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 zgmz= 1. Osrarn Sylvania 2. Advance 3. All other manufacturers shall request prior approval and supply test data from an independent testing laboratory and comparison report to substantiate compliance with specifications and specified equipment. 2,2 EQUIPMENT: A. General: Provide lighting of sizes, types and ratings indicated; complete with, butrtot limited to, housings, energy-efficient lamps, lamp holders, reflectors, energy efficient ballasts, starters and wiring. Ship luminaires factory -assembled, with those components required for a complete installation, Design luminaire with concealed hinges and catches, with metal parts grounded as common unit, and so constructed as to dampen ballast generated noise and as to disconnect ballast when door is opened for HQl 'lamps. B. Wiring: Provide electrical wiring within luminaire suitable for connecting to branch circuit wiring as follows: 1. NEC Type TN for 120 and 277 volt and shall be minimum No. 18 AWG, C. Lamps: I Fluorescent: Provide fluorescent lamp types as specified in the luminaire schedule and types compatible with luminaires. Lamps shall be low mercury type. Provide 3500'K color temperature lamps unless otherwise noted in schedules or on drawings. 2. Incandescent: � Provide incandescent lamp types as specified in the luminaire schedule and types compatible with luminaires. Provide frosted lamps unless otherwise noted. 1 1 I'd 1 11 1 b. *All LED products to be in accordance with IES Standards LM79 & LM80 D, Exterior Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts: Provide high power factor, rapid start, Type 1 Class P, sound rated A or B for minus 20 degrees C, with 80 percent light output within 5 minutes of starting and listed for use in outdoor luminaires. 1 Provide high frequency programmed rapid start electronic ballasts for all fluorescent lamps with voltage as indicated on the plans and luminalre schedule. The ballast sha deliver normal lamp life and must be interchangeable with electromagnetic ballasts. The light output shall not vary in response to an input voltage variance of less than 10 rated voltage, Drive output shall be greater than 42 KHz with lamp flicker less than 20 Provide a minimum 0.88 ballast factor. Z Super T-8 Applications: Provide ballast similar to above with ballast factor of 0.78. LIGHTING — 05/01/2015 265000-3 LMC: Cath Lab #2 —13i -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 1 The ballast total harmonic distortion shall be less than 10% with the number of lamps as identified per luminaire type or as indicated in the luminaire schedule. 4. The ballast shall have a crest factor 1.7 maximum shall have transient protection which meets IEEE 587, Category A (ANSI 062.41) requirements. 5. The ballast shall have a power factor of 0.98 or higher, and shall have a ballast efficiency of 90% or higher. & The ballast shall be UL listed Class P and shall have a sound rating better than A. 7. The ballast electromagnetic interference and radiofrequency interference shall comply with FCC CFR 47, Part 18 requirements for both conducted and radiated EMI/RFL & The ballast shall contain no PCBs. 9. Minimum lamp starting temperature of 0 degrees F. 10. Provide ballast with color coded integral leads per ANSI 082.11. 11. Provide ballast disconnect switch per NEC. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION: 1. Luminaires shall be positively attached to the suspended ceiling system. The attachment device shall have a capacity of 100% V the luminaire weight acting in any direction, 2. When intermediate systems are Used, No. 12 gauge hangers shall be attached to the grid members within 3" of each comer of each luminaire, 1 When heavy-duty systems are used, supplemental hangers are not required if a 48" modular hanger pattern is followed. When crossrunners are used without supplemental hangers to support luminaires, these cross runners shall provide the same carrying capacity as the main runner. 4. Luminaires weighing less than 56 pounds shall have, in addition to the requirements above, two No. 12 gauge hangers connected from the luminaire housing to the structure above, These wires may be slack. LIGHTING -- 05/01/2015 265000-4 LMC- Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 5. Luminaires weighing 56 pounds or more shall be supported directly from the structure above by four No, 12 gauge hangers connected from the luminaire housing to the structure above, These wires may be CInstall flush mounted luminaires properly to eliminate light leakage between frame and finished D. Provide plaster frames for recessed luminaires installed in other than suspended grid type acoustical ceiling systems, Brace frames temporarily to prevent distortion during handling. EFasten luminaires securely to structural supports;and ensurelhat pendant plumb and level.Provide individually mounted pendant « is •.• ... __ adjustment,stem hangers, Provide stem hanger with ball aligners and provisions for minimum one inch vertical i continuous i of additional i^ greater than numberof i I . Pendant hung luminaires shall be supported directly from the structure above with No, 9 gauge wire or approved alternate support without using the ceiling suspension system for direct support. Z Luminaires mounted in areas of high seismic activity shall be mounted from a rigla stem to restrain sway. If mounted from a non-rigia stem, luminaires to be mounted such that their sway under seismic conditions does not impact another luminaire within 45' swing from .• F. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL. Stds 466A and B, and the National Electrical Code. C. Support surface mounted luminaires greater than 2 feet in length at a point in addition to the outlet box stud. K Set units plumb, square, level and secure according to manufacturer's written _instructions and shop drawings. Defer to specification section 265613, "Pops and Standards" for other requirements. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. At Date of Substantial Completion„ replace lamps in lighting which are observed to be noticeably dimmed after Contractor's use and testing, as judged by Architect. 1. Refer to Division -1 sections for the replacement/ restoration of lamps in lighting where used for temporary lighting prior to Date of Substantial Completion. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A. Clean lighting of dirt and construction debris upon completion of installation. Clean fingerprints and smudges from lenses and reflectors. B. Protect installed luminaires from damage during remainder of construction period. C. Adjust aimable luminaires to provide required light intensities and in compliance with design intent. LIGHTING — 05/01/2015 265000-5 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Pyne Equipment Replacement 177.307 3.5 GROUNDING: A. Provide equipment grounding connections for lighting as indicated. Tighten connections to comply * tightening 4g *,*'" specified "`:."".* UL Std M ! F assure permanent ..r and M. e ..e grounds. B. Ground luminaires according to Section 260526, "Grounding, and Section 265613, "Poles and Standards." 3.6 WARRANTY wiring,A, The Contractor shall guarantee all equipment including ballasts, lamps, luminaires, wiring, etc. free from inherent mechanical and electrical defects, Warranty period shall be from date of acceptance as set forth in the general conditions with periods as follows: 1 . Lamps - Per Paragraph 3.3 2. Luminaires, ai. provide yearwarranty..« * at time of replacements.substantial completion. The manufacturer shall replace any and all failed ballasts within 48 hours of notification. The manufacturer shall provide the labor for warranty t LED and . year manufacturer's 3.7 DEMONSTRATION: X Upon completion of installation of lighting and after building circuitry has been energized, apply electrical energy to demonstrate capability and compliance with, requirements, Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstratecompliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting, END OF SECTION 26 5000 LIGHTING -- 05101/2015 265000-6 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 SECTION 28 3111 - FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM - EXPANSION OR REMODEL OF ADDRESSABLE SYSTEMS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY: A. Extent of fire alarm systems work is indicated by drawings, schedules, and riser diagrams. Control panels are existing. Any references to the existing control operation equipment, etc., are for information on system operation. All existing devices such as call boxes, connections, shall remain as existing • on drawings. PROFIT B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with fire alarm systems work similar to that required for this project. 1. Firm with manufacturer's factory trained personnel. 2. Firm with factory authorized service organization and spare parts stock within 50 miles of the project and with a 24 hour response time. C. Codes and Standards: I The complete installation shall conform to the applicable sections of NFPA-72, Local Code Requirements and the National Electrical Code with particular attention to article 760. All control equipment must have transient protection to comply with UL 864 requirements or Standard #4978 as applicable. 2. UL Compliance and Labeling: Comply With provisions of UL safety standards pertaining to fire alarm systems; and provide products and components which are UL -listed and labeled. 3, FM Compliance: Provide fire alarm components and accessories which are FM -approved. 4. The fire alarm system and devices shall comply with ADA 1990 and UL 1971 requirements. 5, International Building Code and other applicable local codes and standards, FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM — 05/01/2015 283111-1 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 13 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including specifications, data sheets, wiring diagrams, equipment ratings, dimensions, finishes and descriptions of system operation. B. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings showing complete list of system components, locations and partial schematic of system wiring. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions, including outlet or back box requirements for each piece of equipment. D. Submit manufacturer's certificate that system meets or exceeds specified requirements. E. Submit sequence of operation and verification of system operation by manufacturer or his authorized representative. F. Submit back-up battery calculations. GAll shop drawings, battery and voltage drop calculations shall be submitted to the authority having jurisdiction for review after review by the Architect/Engineer. K Submit three copies of test results and data to Architect/Engineer no later than seven days after conclusion of tests described in this section. 1. Submit graphic annunciator and/or map layouts for review by the Architect/Engineer prior to fabrication. J. List all variances and attach as required. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM — 05/01/2015 283111-2 LMC- Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 K Include brief description of scope of work, L. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each type of fire alarm equipment installed, including furnished specialties and accessories, Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 1. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Handle fire alarm equipment carefully to prevent damage, breaking, and scoring. Do not install damaged equipment or components; replace with new. B. Store fire alarm equipment in clean, dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris, and physical damage. 1.5 OPERATION: A. The system alarm operation subsequent to the alarm activation of any manual station, or automatic detection device shall be unchanged from the existing system operation, B, Provide additions and alterations to the existing systems that provide the following - 1. All audible alarm indicating appliances shall sound a distinctive and continuous fire alarm signal until silenced by the alarm silence switch at the control panel or at the remote annunciator. 2. All visible alarm indicating appliances shall flash continuously until the system is reset. Visual alarm devices shall continue to operate when audible devices are silenced. Any subsequent zone alarm shall reactivate the alarm indicating appliances, 1 All doors normally held open by door control devices shall release. 4. A supervised signal to notify the monitoring center shall be activated. 5. Activation of'a duct detector shall alarm the system and shut down the associated air handling unit. a. If the alarmed detector is on any floor other than the main level of egress, the elevator cabs shall be recalled to the main level of egress. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM — 05/0112015 283111-3 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 b. If the alarmed detector is on the main egress level, the elevator cabs shall be recalled to the predetermined alternate recall level as determined by the local authority having jurisdiction, c. If the alarmed detector is located in the elevator shaft it shall cause the shaft ventilation damper to open in addition to recalling the elevator, 9. The activation of any thermal detector located in the elevator equipment room, top of shaft, or bottom of shaft shall cause the power to the elevator equipment and power to all lighting and receptacles in the equipment room to be disconnected from their source. 10, The activation of any system smoke detector shall initiate an Alarm Verification operation whereby the panel will reset the activated detector and wait for a second alarm activation. If within one (1) minute after resetting, a second alarm is reported from the same or any other smoke detector, the system shall process the alarm as described previously, If no second alarm occurs within one minute the system shall resume normal operation. The Alarm Verification shall operate only on smoke detector alarms, Other activated initiating devices shall be processed immediately. The alarm verification operation shall be selectable by zone. a. The control panel shall have the capability to display the number of times (tally) a zone has gone into a verification mode, Should this mode verification tally reach a pre-programmed number, a trouble condition shall occur. 11. A manual evacuation (drill) switch shall operate the alarm indicating appliances without causing other control circuits to be activated. However, should a true alarm occur, all alarm functions would occur as described previously. 12. All doors normally held open by door control devices shall release upon AC power failure. 11 The actuation of the "enable walk test" program at the control panel shall activate the 'Walk TesV mode of the system which shall cause the following to occur: a. The city circuit connection shall be bypassed. b. Control relay functions shall be bypassed, c. The control panel shall show a trouble condition. d. The alarm activation of any initiation device shall cause the audible signals to code a number pulses to match the zone number. a. The panel shall automatically reset itself after signaling is complete, f. Any momentary opening of an initiating or indicating appliance circuit wiring shall cause the audible signals to sound for 4 seconds indicating'a trouble condition. g. The system shall have the capacity of 8 distinctive walk test groups. Such that only a portion of the system need be disabled during testing. CHealthcare Compliance Documentation to be compiled under a single section by Division 15 contractor. I Authority Having Jurisdiction sign off documentation Z Fire Alarm (provided to Division 15 by Division 16) 8. 100% test reports b. Monthly test criteria for temporary systems 3. Sprinkler FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM — 05/01/2015 283111-4 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 a. Above ground piping system certification b. Tamper and flow certification c. Fire pump flow tests 4. Electrical System Documentation (provided to Division 15 by Division 16) a. Outlet testing; tension, continuity, voltage drop testing documentation b. Low voltage switchboards C. Low voltage insulated case breakers d. Low voltage ground fault e. Grounding system 5. HVAC System Documentation & Isolation room testing certification b. Testing and certification of damper inspection and test C. Testingand certification of HEPA filters d. Testing and certification of smoke control and life safety systems 6. Medical Gas System a. State certification report 7, Backflow Devices a. Certification report 8. NFPA 101 Documentation (provided by Division I & 16 to Division 15) a. Authority Having Jurisdiction compliant drawings 9. Documentation for ILSM, ICRA, MOPS and Hot Work, (provided by Division I & 16 to Division 15) 1,6 SUPERVISION.- & Supervision shall be unchanged from the existing system. Supervision of additional devices shall be as follows: 1. Provide independently supervised and independently fused indicating appliance circuits for alarm speakers and flashing alarm lamps. Disarrangement conditions of any circuit shall not affect the operation of other circuits. 2. Auxiliary manual control shall be supervised so that an "off normal" position of any switch shall cause an "off normal" system trouble. 3. Each independently supervised circuit shall include a discrete LCD readout to indicate disarrangement conditions per circuit. 4. The incoming power to the system shall be supervised so that any power failure must be audibly and visually indicated at the control panel and the remote annunciator. A green "power on" LED shall be displayed continuously while incoming power is present. 5. The system batteries shall be supervised so that a low battery condition or disconnection of the battery shall be audibly and visually indicated at the control panel. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM — 05/01/2015 283111-5 e 6. The System Modules shall be electrically supervised for module placement. Should a module become disconnected the system trouble indicator shall illuminate and the audible trouble signal shall sound. T The system shall have provisions for disabling and enabling all circuits individually for maintenance or • purposes, PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturers: Provide materials that mate and match with existing system components, Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire alarm system components manufactured by the same manufacturer of the existing system. 1. Notifier. 1. West Penn 2. Belden Annixter 2.2 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS; complyA. General, Provide complete fire alarm products of types, sizes and capacities indicated, which standard design,materials,o «o ents; construct in accordance with published « «« « • and as required for complete• Provide alarm and detection systems for applications indicated. 1, Wiring System Materials: Provide basic Wiring materials which comply with Division -26 sections; "Raceways", "Wires and Cables" and "Electrical Boxes and Fittings". 1. Provide wire and cable in accordance with requirements of manufacturer. Wire insulation shall comply with NEC Article 760. 2. Provide individual solid copper conductor sues AWG #14, or larger. Provide multiconductor cables for wire sues smaller than AWG #16. 4, Provide conductors which are UL listed for the installation and location* and approved for fire alarm usage. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 05/01/2015 283111-s LMC: Cath Lab ##2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 1. Provide battery back-up and increase battery back-up to system as required. Design battery back-up to take over supply to system within 30 seconds of loss of primary system to 55 percent voltage. Provide battery system capable of operation of system for 4 -hours under normal conditions and then for 15 minutes under alarm conditions. D. Provide Control of additional auxiliary services as follows: 1. Pan shut down relays. . Magnetic door release. 1 Exterior flashing lights. 4. Interior flashing strobe lights. 5, Smoke door releases Fire door releases. 7. Remote annunciators. * Alarm initiation from smoke detector operated doors and smoke hatches. . Interface with elevators (fire fighter's recall, etc.). X Connect additional devices to existing fire alarm control panel, Modify and upgrade panel fl compatibility with current codes and current UL requirements and as required for the additional or equipment. �Ni" A: ! • X Extend or modify existing communications network as required for the additional equipment. 2.5 ADDRESSABLE Ila. TYPES: smokeX General: Devices will be located as shown on the drawings. The location of addressable devices will be selected to optimize the system layout in order to provide the level of protection, zone identification and 'control as shown on the drawings BEnvironmental Compensation Analog Sensors: I Smoke sensors shall be a smoke density measuring device having no self contained alarm set point. The alarm decision for each sensor shall be determined by the control panel. The control panel shall determine the condition of each sensor by comparing the sensor value to stored values. The control panel shall maintain a moving average of the sensors smoke chamber value. Systems that do not automatically maintain a constant obscuratiort sensitivity for# by # #- • for DETECTIONenvironmental factors are deemed unacceptable. FIRE ALARM 05/01/2015 LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane EquipmentReplacement initiatedAbnormal" trouble condition at the control paneL A sensor self -test which must be manually by the operator # be acceptable, alarm,CAddressable Detector Bases: All addressable smoke and heat detector heads will plug into their bases. The base will contain'electronics that communicate the detector status (normal, # #1 # control panel over two wires, The » # Wires shall also provide power to the base and detector, Detector heads (smoke or heat) must be interchangeable. Upon removalof *'a# a troublesignal be transmitted to the controlRa D. Photoelectric Detector Head* Photoelectric type detectors shall be of the solid state photoelectric type and shall contain no radioactive material, They will use » Pulsed infrared LED light source and be sealed against rear air flow entry, The detector shall fit into an addressable base that is commonboth the heat and ionization type detectors, E. Thermal Detector Head'. Thermal detector heads must be UL listed. They will be a combination rate -of -rise and fixed temperature (135 degrees F) type, automatically restorable unless�fixed temperature (190 degrees F.) type are specifically required. The detector shall fit into an addressable base that is common With both the photoelectric and ionization type detectors,Provide w# #,.. addressable module for automatic » # # detectors ., are #. addressable. #a � # .. gip., _ # #. # #- # ## . _# * #.. • #. # # PlatesI Each duct detector shall be provided with a remote alarm LED indicator and a key test be labeled nameof device/equipmentserved, Interlock# eR duct detector, 3. Provide .#.Ra access door(s)for in-ductduct detectors, 4, Interlock duct detector to associated smoke damper where indicated. I. Adaptor Module: Adapter Modules shall be used for monitoring of water flow, valve tamper, non -addressable detectors, and for control of smoke dampers, door holders, and other output FIRE DETECTION ANIS ALARM — 05101/201 283111-8 LMC- Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177.307 control functions. Adapter Modules will be capable of mounting in a standard electric outlet box. Adapter Modules will Include cover plates to allow surface or flush mounting. Adapter Modules will receive their 24VDC power from a separate two wire pair running from an appropriate power supply. There shall be two types of devices. Type 1; Monitor Adapter Modules - for conventional 2 -wire thermal detector and/or contact device monitoring with Class B or +wiring supervision. «# p Control AdapterModules for signals, speakers, r. # phone # other device controlie or + wiring supervision. 1. Provide modules as required for monitor of air sampling smoke detection points a follows: a. Fire Alarm . Alert/Action C. Trouble 2. Provide modules as required for monitor and control of AC units such that the AC unit shall shut down upon detection of smoke at the unit. Provide relays as required. 2.8 ALARM SIGNAL. DEVICES: 21 AUXILIARY D A. Magnetic Door Holder Devices. Provide door holders as shown on the plans and separate power supplies for new and relocated devices. Release of doors occur on a verified alarm or after a general AC power failure in 4he building, 2.8 GRAPHIC MAF: FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM — 0510112015 283111-9 LING: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement - • • t; .♦ «.. •^" Mil{..=t t • .'. •• « • •.. .. t PART 3 EXECUTION 31EXAMINATION: A. Examine areas and conditions under which fire alarm systems are to be installed, iso not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION. A. Provide electrical identification in accordance withDivision-26 "Electrical Identification". 3.3 INSTALLATION OF BASIC WIRING SYSTEM MATERIALS: A. Provide raceways and supports per code and to match existing. B. Install wiring, raceways, and electrical boxes and fittings in accordance with Division -26 sections; "Raceways", "Wires and Cables" and "Electrical Boxes and Fittings" FIRE DETECTION AND 0 • '_t r ' t -r .rt • a •- # t tm t r t- • +t t # rt• r t -! 4 t t�. r •. r- c+ r t+ FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM LMC: Cath Lab #2 — Bi -Plane Equipment Replacement 177307 with specific equipment affected listed by identifier, Upon completion of a successful test, the contractor shall so certify in writing to the Owner and General Contractor, 1 Submit copy of test results in duplicate after signed by Owner's Representative to Architect/Engineer, Owner, and local Fire Protection Authority. Mount copy of inspection record in lexan enclosed frame assembly on control panel. X Where a maintenance,contract exists, the maintenance contractor shall make available to the owner a maintenance contract proposal to increase the scope of the maintenance agreement to provide a minimum of two (2) inspections and tests per year in compliance with NFPA-72 guidelines. REINNEBNy s w k� A. Provide three (3) copies of Operating and Maintenance Instructions in hardback, three-ring binders covering all equipment furnished. Manuals shall include the following information: 1 Name, address and telephone number of authorized service organization to be contacted for each equipment item. The local fire alarm supplier shall have a 24 hour telephone response service. An answering machine shall not be considered acceptable. 2. Parts list and wiring diagram, operating and maintenance instructions for each piece of equipment. 4. Record of voltage sensitivity for each ionization detector head as recorded during final calibration. 5. All wiring diagrams shall show color coding of all connections and mounting dimensions of equipment. X Upon completion of new fire alarm system, after final connections have been made, this contractor shall carefully remove all existing fire alarm apparatus where indicated, including fire alarm control panel, manual stations, audible signals, etc., and turn all such equipment over to Owner. A. Contractor shall paint all exposed conduit to match adjacent surfaces. All surfaces or finishes damaged as a result of this work shall be properly patched, painted and/or repaired by trained craftsmen of the trade involved, FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM — 05/0112015 283111-12 B, Contractor shall patch and paint when: old devices are removed unless the old devices are in block walls or in concrete, where the Contactor shall provide blank plates on boxes. Blank plates shall be painted to match adjacent surfaces. END OF SECTION 23 3111 DETECTIONFIRE AND A 05/01/2015 283111-13 City of' �e I COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT' 0 Proper�Addr�s-.—S30-0 �\&4 3W —A—Vi�-- . FOR OFFICE USE ONLY Date: Plan/Pennit ", I 5 Plan Review Fee: �.c contra*ii 04 u6onte Sub Electrical: t4/4 W,R, City License # rofflm- W*M12W;7-7M1W"* City License # NIA Phone: I Vq IN6 'Is Plumbing: Mechanicak W.R. City License # NIA WA, City License# Y4 Complete all information on BOTH sides of this form M (Check all that apply) 0 NEW COMMERCIAL y� • A. i s' ELECTRICAL SERVICE AyLL UPGRADE El NEW RESIDENTIAL #� IR A r r COMMERCIAL A ROOFINGEl RESDENTIAL iR El COMMERCIAL ADDITION E] RESIDENTIAL ROOFING iii WINDOW REPLACEMENT COMMERCIAL i Cw STRUCTURE (Garage, shed, deck, etc,) RESIDENTIAL ACCESSORY STRUCTURE (Garage, shed, deck, etc.) ®MECHANICAL SYSTEM/APPLIANCE SYSTEM/APPLIANCEREPAIR oREPLACEMENT A� r ir.SYSTEM/APPLIANCE REPAIR oREPLACMENT i ELECTRICAL A Y r 'w F REPAIR o r Aw* REPLACEMENT r 6 (o LL projects, please provide a cletalleg description of work to be performed, including current use of areas, pr posed uses, square footage, existing condition and proposed new condition, appliance size and efficiency, type and amount of materials to be used, etc.) 4CA Sq. Ft LF Btu's Gallons Amps Squares other AL CENT ERL I NI'E 16361 �tain Pk Golden. C* 8j��03 301991320 W1500074 December 30, 2014 17*Y Ms. Danielle flan xtable Sprint RE: Sprint 2.5 Project DN73XC094 "Crown Hill" Antenna Mount Analysis Dear Ms. flu xtable: Centerline Solutions performed as struc tural re, view of the existing antenna mounts at the above referenced site. The existing antenna mounts can safely support the new Sprint 2,5 panel antennas, The existing antenna frame located next to the roof -mounted shelter will have as reduced antenna load with the new 2.5 panel, NV panel and dish antennas as compared with the original construction drawings issued in 10/1909, "I"he new configuration is acceptable by inspection. All existing CDMA and iDEN antennas shall he removed. The existing wall niounts have been reviewed on the attached calculation page and can safely support the new 2.5 antennas. 14 4 All new antennas and equipment shall be placed as shown in the drawn " lssll'. s office V Please contact us with any questions. Sincerely, tv r: L41culations lei V6 - Wheat Ridge Building DePartment Approved APPROVED Sul*ct,to Field Inspections Wheat Rdge E.iuNM,,,)g Dept, 'PA465 I -q- Date_/)g//� OCENTERLINE $0 L UT40Ni ERACIMS-es, Standards - TIA-222-G CODES -1 2012 ASCE7-10 Wind Load Factor: WE 1,6 TI A 2.3.2 Wind 3 -sec gust: V —= 105 mph Elevation (centerfine): z=-65 ft Structure Class: Class—="11" Exposure: Exp =— 11B " Topographic Factor, Kzt:k,j, —= 1.0 Topographic category 1, Wind Direction Factor, Kd;kd, =—.85 TIA 'Table 2-2 Importance Factor, 1: I= 1, Velocity Pressure Coefficient, Kz: kz = 0.874 TTA 2,6.5x2 Gust Effect Factor: G =-.8fir TIA 2.6,7 Appart 1: h, :=61 in Antenna: KMW-ET-X-WM-18-65-8P wi= 12 in dl:=4,3 in Profile,„ 44r Profile Round or Flat (r/f) tv t I = 7Zi 1 bf Appurt 2: h2 15,5 in RRU: V3 11)2 1" 'n d2 T5 in FlroiU2 .= 41" Profile Round or Flat (r/f) Wt2 — 54 lbf A2 = ""aX (h,, - w. , h,,, - d2) = 2.002 ft2 pp rt 3: 1.1ia = 0 ft Rvt,jj,,j, = 0 1b (7d,,q, 1.6 1 /out radarn e, TIA-222-G table C-1 ,jig, 0.25 -,ir -Dia' = 31 ft` Number of appurt 1: 1 Number of pp rt 2: 0 ,OC E NTE R L I IN E cUeft. CO CaLailklums-11 yvin rgjw[g, Velocity Pressure: q, 0x00256 - k,, - k,t - kd, - V2 - I - paf = 20.962 psf Appurt 1 Pressure. Total Length; 72 in Appurt 2 Pressure: Outer Diameter: OL)7A,PCt=2.375 in, Dish Pressure: Section Modulus: — 528 n Spit,,= � -i 3 6nMnaa_W.aILBAuaLCb=L, Steel Yield Strength-, fv F 36000 psi Check bending of pipe Free length of pipe: if, =_i 2 in (total combined top/bottom Standoff distance: d,,,, 12 in free length of pipe) Number for Brackets: nbr,,*.,= 2 Appurt, Wind Loads: Bracket Vertical Spacing: db,,,.:,k= 8in (distance from c/c of brackets) Anchor Diameter: ODn,jwr_=o,,r> in Anchor Number per bracket: n, _= 2 Anchor Horizontal Spacing: darer =-4 in (distance from centerline of pipe) All Thread Thru-Bolt Anchor {y/n): BoItjt,,,, E 'In " CaLailklums-11 yvin rgjw[g, Velocity Pressure: q, 0x00256 - k,, - k,t - kd, - V2 - I - paf = 20.962 psf Appurt 1 Pressure. 1" ='q, - G - C = 35.636 psf Appurt 2 Pressure: P?.:= qz - G - C2 = 2 1382 psf Dish Pressure: I'd, - q, - G - ('d.4 2965 1, A, f" 6nMnaa_W.aILBAuaLCb=L, Check bending of pipe Cantilevered Length of 1-1.= IMIX -, d,�,,,A, 1fn,,c if antenna has a mount Pipe (top),. 1,, = 62 in within the bracket spacing Appurt, Wind Loads: F", ;=,nj -A P� = 181.1,51 Ibf use 1/2 of antenna load only n2 . A,, 1'2 = 0 Of and assume RRU mounted IF I,:= between supports r -)Il -411-1a ='rl.,i,4,,h*Ad,,,h'Pd.=() Ibf 2429-21,1m,cheak- Q.7cg* bist?,I Lfad mj t4im jkf 'U, A" -0-0 ail Moment Arm: Factored Moment: Resistance Factor: Bending Stress: Allowable Stress: Stress Check: h, - Al _=17.292 ksi S, PIPr o-,,-=O-f,,,=32�4 ksi 1.0,"1,.dK",56NG"1="6.dK'I gra N OCENTERLINE 16360 Table Mountain Pkwy, Golden, CO 80403 303.9913293 Dead load check for structuri Dead Load Factor: D= 1.4 D - (wt, -n� 4-'p'rt2 - 712 + 1a tp> Dead Load per Bolt: BOUI)l'; -= 26 5 1bf natc. nbrn,.,k Calculate OTM on mount from side - assume full antenna and RRU load Factored Moment: 077,4-,fn,O,nt, ro WF'2 + )ishi) c� - ,,, = 3.478 kip - in OTAI Bolt Load (tension); Tloadtjj,,= 434.76 Of 2 da, * nbrack Bolt Load (shear): Sload -- F,+BoUDL=98.71 1bf r1ane ' nbrack 11 11 , I �illill 1111111111111 111 V, W (F,, + F,�, + Fhshp) - Olffknn +, dbre,,k), = 431 . ()3) j)f Reaction t r - aBacket: R--- -1--- — -1--- ,--- ---- (1- dbrork R Bolt Load (tension): T1oad2&,, 715.546 1bf Conservative check for 1/2" sleeve anchors in concrete S1ee,vet,,,.,,,,j,,,=0.925 kip > Tioad2bolt=715),546 Of ,51eevet,,,,j,,,=0.925 kip > Timidbolt = 434,762 Of 1.325 kip > S1()adb,,jj=9&71 lbf Sloodbolt 2 ( max (TlowQ�,,,, + 44OK' Check,,,lt ifsrtr 51re Ve 2e The existing mounts are adequate to support the Sprint 2.5 antennas. E MMMMEEMEM Ms, Danielle Huxtable Sprint Atecs, Our Professional Services Division MC2, Our Construction Division L I N E 16360 Table Mountain Pkwy SOLUTIONS Golden, CO 80403 P 303-993-3293 / F; 303-993-3019 RE: DN73XCO94 "CROWN HILL" Equipment Room Structural Revil Dear Ms. Huxtable: &%on \v 3g7m A\145* ZO IS OOCP X Centedine Solutions performed a structural review of the existing Sprint equipment room, Our review assumes the equipment room was property analyzed for the existing Network Vision equipment during the previous site upgrade. All new equipment shall be placed as shown in the construction drawings issued by this office. Please contact us with any questions. Ryan Guerrero, PE is Wheat Ridge Building Department Approved 11 L UILD i'a`IidltY Of Permit The issuance of a pe ,nit o, 9ppr of plat,$" I , an aa oy vioat nd computations shall not be a permft fo r, or I ion to pprovf, anSpec lkations any of the PrOvM`nq of fhF hwt,rr q C of of any City 0rd,nAM$, the nmvisions Of the ,I Fiubie4,:-, lei Fjc;,�cj,1F�4specflons f xA/heM R�d9e,1',"3Ufl1dnng AYS MPARDR 2.5 EQUIPMENT DEPLOYMENT CROWN HILL Sprint" 6100 SPRM PARKWAY 3300 WEST 38TH AVE OW PARK, K"+ 66251 ri nt SEAT RIDGE, CO 83033 S D JEFFERSON COUNTY NITS. -105.0905790 Work shall c�Nt`���. with � 2 ��"t LATITUDE' 39.3 0650 t Know Wi� t" any applicable "�i�� o Wheat ROOFTOP - '-€ " 1/0/15 FINAL CONST J COLORADO MARKET Call before you dig.Ls 7 L <: o12/9/14— 1OOX CONST ML 8/26/14 9OX CONST MCL f NFC?&MAT1N 1. iii € $6 I t arca ALL WORK MATERIALS LL RF N7 C INSTALLEDS ARE, OWN HILL Tf „ ,, , IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE RE Ed7MONS ITN` THE FOLL TNTC S EE( S,: „r" REV �A,� ��S�R¢P x� v CODES AS ADOPTED EI L GOVERNING AUT MES. S DN73XCO9 SP8 # Si�ECiFIC T&it�S _ _ ADDRESS' . 36TH A � ��€�� SP �sFN T CONSTRUCTION NOTHING 131E THESE S 8 TC CONSTRUCTED TO PERMITPERMIT, �0';�T„ �, CITY, STATE &ZIP: EAT RI CO 80033 At OVERALLSITE E' WORK NOT C AddtR TO rNE`.SE CODESArvada CQCNPii'T'. JEFFERSON COUNTY #iJtLt NG, �aE%iiNG CODE 18C 200EA2 STTE PLAN A3 E .& .. NEW EOUTMIPMENT PLANS STRUCTURAL C I 7 4 E, N N PLANS, A ,a.w E t RRLSPEC MECHANICAL IMC 2006 E HEALTHCARE E IONS 01E NEC rr 7ERLINE CENT EfLIFE EN CODE #FC200 �„w WAYi " T, ADD RE"SSr AS EQUIPMENT A3i SOLUTIONS ACCESS€S€L#TY REaIkREMENT Pot i� a A7 RF4?S Ntf a�,�; ir„� Ft✓trel�*sc' >1�aeram�krN;t FACILITY IS UNMANNED AND T FOR HU ITAPON, � � PHONE: A6 COLOR CODING HANDICAPPED CESS REQUIREMENTS ARE NOT REQUIRED IN A9 EQUIPMENTDETAILS 16460 k°WC MOUN,AIN PARKWAYF T f N ,A dden. CO 8140Y ACCORDANCE N THE e9 N6C P¢1L7FNG EI EXISTING AC & a€ COARP SPRItV7 -ata t k ta.,. CONTACT., BRANDON 7x E9 GROUNDING Aa#5 Ws W. cN _z :NsSO taa,rc�N,e t a(" Wheat Ridge' EMAIL, RAN I R SPRINTCO PHONE(303) 505—5750 _aP_R1NTPR0jEQ7. MANAGER., COMPANY., SPRINT CONTACT, DAN L. X TABL SPRINT PROPOSES TO MODIFY AN EKIS77NO UNMANNED W 8th ICHUXTENTOM La mw. �a � «��TELECOMMUNICATIONS FACILITY PHONE,(70) 47-69s • INSTALL (3) NEW PANT ANTENNAS (I PER SE"CTOR)„ ��TE__?� i G P � INSTALL• ( RR�N�S (I PER SECTOR) ,�. ,,..�.,,a, COMPAI CENTERLINE SOLUTIONS, LLC INSTALL (3) NEW FIBER JUNCTION CYLINDERS (I PER SECTOR) CONTACT: AMANDA BERNARO INSTALL (3) NEW POWER JUNCTION CYLINDERS (I PER SECTOR) E L ABERNARDOCENTERLINESOLUTtONEC a INSTALL (N) NEW 98U CYT IN EXISTING NARKS CABINET PHONE. (AOA) 304-3066 FF-MI, fR V Ff,\ T 9 CC EP I CEAs SOLUTIONS, LLC CONTACT: JEFF” NOSEWORTHY IG; J E RL wsoLU77 S. At PHONE: (303) 993-3293 X 414 ificabons CROWN HILL Xi94 ..,aa 83W W. 38TH AVE � THEAT RIDGE, CO SM33 ID NIS JEFFERSON COUNTY APPROVAL SIGNATURE DATE FROM IN7E RSEC17ON OF 1-25 & 1-7d7:` ��a�v�t na �e: � APPROVED itis' MIL JF S S ACCs, 44` ON 3-7d� FROM I-9 iLt Ekli 69A N! �'Ca# ALL b�tdT Spr� s^m�.«� �,.,�,�,�, SCS (TURN RIGHT) ON TO OR'N. THEN N Rt ��, SHFExIMF CONSTRUCTION mG TO 3 AVE" AND SITE LL E ON THE LEFT` AT LUTHERANTITLE g g SHEET PKWY` W, � C " . , SLS t TIONS S e € ASE" r7fject a„ g y NN. CONS " t 100 SPAIN S PARKWAY "1 AEN E. htfr.i tTril� s�Ai�Kt�+Au a' : `'r ,; OVERLAND FAM KS G62k 'I Cidden St2403 Pita:" Na.)M63rk. -A T E TEL I as)Nz " Jf r L . 303 99 �aEa1Rich, RN 0I*ONSCOM r ENGINEER �ati I x Da1_�/ " 1 T1 ROPEfBTY O 21"n.a � � ,�e � _, „,.e.... .... ANT . THESE OU UNE SPECIFICATIONS IN CONJUNC77ON WITH THE SPRINTSTANDARD CONSTRUCRON SPECIFICADONS, INCLUDING CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND THE CONSMUC77ON DRAWINGS DESCRIBE THE WORK TO BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR, WITH L! CE NATIONAL CODES AND STANDARDS, LATEST EDITION, AND ZOE BETWEEN THE STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECFXA77ONS FOR THE STANDARD CONS7RX770N DETAILS FOR WIRELESS BITES AND TS, INFORMATION ON THC CONSMUC77ON ORAVNOS SNAU, TAKE' BE RESPONSIBLE FOR FAMILIARIZING HAHTELF WITH ALL CONTRACT CON0117ONS AND DIMENSIONS PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH CONSTRUCTION. E AND DIRECT THE WORK AND SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR TECHNIQUES, SEQUENCES, AND PROCEDURES IN ACCOR04NCE COWMCMN CONTRACTOR SHALL MAINTAIN A . FULL SET OF THE CONSTRUr77ON DRAWINGS rNE JOSSITE FROM JOSSMORIUZOVION PfROUGH CONSTRUC77ON COMPLETION, DETAILS ARE INTENDED TO SHOW DESIGN INTENT; PROVIDE ALL MATER14LS AND LABOR A55 REQUIRED TO PROVIDE .A COMPLETE O FUNCTIONING SYSTEM, MODIFIC477ONS MAY BE REQUIRED TO SUIT JOB DIMENSIONS OR CONDITIONS, AND SUCH MODIFICATIONS S BE INCLUDED AS PART OF THE WORK. CONTRACTOR SHAU monry spRiNT coNsmucrIoN MANAGER OF ANY VARIATIONS PIWOR TO PROCEEDWG IYITH THE P`ORK.01 ENSIONS SHOWN ARC TO FINISH SURFACES UNLESS Nt'7TELT OTHERWISE. MODIFICATIONS MAY BE REQUIRED TO SUIT JOB DIMENSIONS OR CONDITIONS, AND SUCH MODIFICATIONS SHALL BE INCLUDED AS PART OF THE WORK. MARK THE F7EL O SET OF' t7tuAWLVGS IN RED, DOCUUMNO ANY CI GES FROM THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS RACTOR SHALL PE 'At WORK AS DESCRIBED IN ?FIE:` MNG INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING MOPS, TOP HAT 4Y TO INSTALL A NEW CABINET BASE BAND U EXISTING UNIT INSTALLATION OF SATTERJES ZTAL, ATION OF HYBRID CABLE INSTALLATION OF RRU'S CABLING TS -0200 REV 4 — ANTENNA LINE. ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS SPRINT CELL SITE ENGINEERING NOTICE - EN 2012-001, REV t, COMMISSIONING MOPS GROUNDING NE -352-201 SPRINT INTEGRATED CONST ON STA14DARDS VERSION 4,0 AT FURNISHED MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT IS IDEN77FIED ON THE' RF DATA IN THE CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS, WTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR SPRINT PROVIDED 947DRAL AND EQUIPMENT NSURE fT IS PROTECTED AND HANDLED PROPERLY THROUGHOUT THE IlRUCT"DURAvON. RACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR RECEIPT SPRINTFURNISHED IP ENT AT SRE OR CONTRACTORS LOCATION CONTRACTOR TO COMPLETE SHIPPING RECEIPT DOCUMENTATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH COMPANY PRACTICE, PRIOR 7O CO S WRITTEN N077CE TO PROCEED AND TI IE ISSUANCE ALTERNATWS TO THE MATERIALS OR METHODS SPECIFIED CONSTRUCTION FOR APPROVAL SPRINT WILL REQUESTS MADE IN WRITING, NO VERSAL APPROVALS WILL IS AND INSPECTIONS THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL CONSTRUC77ON TESTS INSPECTIONS AND PROJECT DOCUMENTATION. CONTRACTOR SHALL ACCOMPLISH TESTING INCLUDING OUT NOT LIMITED ICJ THE FOLLOWING: 1, COAX SWEEPS D FBBER TS' PER TS -0200 REV 4 ANTENNA LINE CE ACCEPTANCE ST DS, 2, AGL, ASWVM AND DOWN77LT PROVIDE AN AUTOMATED REPORT UPLOADED TO SITERRA USING A COMMADE-FOR THE PURPOSE ELECTRONIC ANTENNA GNB 7 T (A4T). INSTALLEDAVAIUTK CENTERUNE AND DO LT MUST CONFORM WnN RF CONFIGURA71ON DATA J. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY AND ALL CORREC77ONS TO ANY RK IDENTIFIED AS UNACCEPTABLE IN SITE INSPECTION ACTWRIES DIOR AS A RESULT OF TESTING. 4, ALL TESTING REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE INSTALLADON MOPS, C. REQUIRED CLOSEOUT DOCUMEWTA77ON INCLUDES, BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO THE FOUL)WING, 1.. AZINUM, DOW LL AID, FROM SUNSIGHT INSTRUMENTS _ ANTENNALIGN ALIGNMENT TOOL (AAT) 2. SWEEP AND FIBER TESTS 3, SCAW&E BARCODEPHOTOGRAPHS OF TOWER TOP AND INACCESSIBLE S ALIZED EQUIPMENT' 4, ALL AVAILABLE JURISDIC77ONAL INFORMA77ON 5, PDFS REDLINES PRODUCED IN F7ELD S. A POF SCAN OF REDLINE --UPS SUITABLE FOR USE its ELECTRONIC As--E?tlIL DRAWING 7700 i. I,1EN WANERS S. FINAL PAYMENT ENTAPPUCA77ON 9- REQUIRED FINAL CONSTRUCTION PHOTOS IO. CONSIRUC77ON AND COMMISSIONING C ®CKUST COMPLETE WITH NO DEFICIENT ITEMS IT, ALL POST Nib° TASKS INCLUDING DOCUMENT UPLOADS COMPLETED IN Sf EPRA (SPRINTS DOCUMENT REPOSITORY OF RECORD), 12. CLOSEOUT PHOTOGRAPHS: o PFI DE PHOTOGRAPHS Or FINAL PROJECT PER THE FOLLOWING LIST`, AODMONAL PHOTOGRAPHS MAY BE REQUIRED TO SUPPORT ACCEPTANCE. PROCESSES ('s) MAIN HYBRID CABLE RC (MINIMUM TWO PHOTOS) (ii) PHOTOS OF EACH ANTENNA AND RR (iii) MANUFACTURERS NAME TAG FOR ALL SERIALIZED EOU P NT (iv) PULLD DI aTRIBUPON BOXES I RM TE BETWEEN RRW S AND A NS ( OPEN) N) (u)MMEIS CABINET WITH DOOR OPEN SHOWING M DIFPCAT ONS (vI) POWER CABINET„ DOORS OPEN, BA RIES INSTALLED (vii) BREAK OUT CYLINDERS (viii) ASR SIGNAGE FOR SPRINT OWNED TOWERS (Ix) RADIATION EXPOSURE. WARNING SIGNS (x) PHOTOGRAPH FROM EACH SECTOR FROM APPROXIMATELY RAD CENTER OF ANY NEW ANTENNA AT HORIZO& La LOAD PHOTOS TO SrrERRA PROJECT LIBRARY 6, IN 15 CREATE NEW CATEGORY; 2.5 DEPLOYMENT, AND SECTION, PERMANENT CONSTRUCTION, LABEL PHOTOS WITH SITE CASCADE AND VIEW BEING DEPICTED, CAMERAS USED TO TAKE PHOTOGRAPHS SHALL GFS ENABLED SUCH THAT THE GPS COORDINATES ARE INCLUDED IN THE PHOTO MEDLA-FILE NFORMATION. LUMMO t PERFORM ALL COMMISSIONING AS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE MOPS PER ALL I G ON ACTIAMES AS REQUIRED BY APPLY' ABLE MORI 1,4 SUBMITTALS: ACOMPL. M, A ROOF INSPECTION PRIOR TO TIRE AT A MINIMUM WSPECT AND PHOTOGRAPH (MINIMUM 3 EA) ALL AREAS IMPACTED BY THE ADDITION OF THE SPRINT EQUIPMENT B PROVIDE SIMILAR PHOTOGRAPHS SHOWING ROOF' CONDITIONS AFTER CONSIRUC" (MINIMUM 3 EA) C ROOF INSPEC17ON PHOTOGRAPHS SHOULD BE UPLOADED WITH CLOSEOUT QLAUTY ASSURANCD, A. COMPLY WITH GOVERNING CODES AND RECULA7ONS. PROVIDE PRODUCTS OF ACCEPTABLE MANUFAC7URSRS WHICH HAVE BEEN IN SA77SFACTORY USE IN SIMILAR SERWITE FOR THREE YF S, USE' EXPERIENCED INSTALLERS DELIVER HANDLE, AND STORE MATERIALS IN ACCORDANCE UFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. 8 COMPLY WITH ALL ENTIRONMENTAL REGULATIONS FOR VOL477LE ORGANIC COMPOUND& MATERIALS: A. UF"ACTUR S. BENJAMIN MOORE, NJ DEVOE COATINGS PPG SHERWIN KILUAMS OR APPROVED EQUAL PROVIDE PREMIUM GRADE, PROFESSIONAL-QUAL17Y PRODUCTS EGR COA77NO SYSTEMS, PAINT SCHEDULE., A EXTERIOR ANTENNAE D ANTENNA O NG HARDWARE, ONE COAT OF PRIMER AND TWO FINISH COATS. PAINT FOR ANTENNAE S14AU BE NON-METALLIC is AND CONTAIN NO METALLIC PARTICLES VIDE` COLORS G3 PATTERNS AS REQUIRED TO MASK APPEARANCE OF ANTENNAE ON ADJACENT BUILDING SURFACES AND AS ACCEPTABLE TO THE OWNER. REFER TO ANTENNA N1FACTUR "S iNSTRUC77ONS WHENEVERPOSSIBLE B. TOUCH UP - PREPARE SURFACES TO BE RFRNREV, FOLLOW INDUSTRY ST DS AND REQUIREMENTS OF OWNER 'rO MATCH EXISTING C04TING AND FINISH, PAtNTING APPLICATION, 1, INSPECT SURFACES, REPORT UNSATISFACTORY CONDITIONS IN WRITING,, BEGINNING' WORK NEWS ACCEPTANCE OF SUBSTRATE 2, COMPLY WffH MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCVONS DCOM ENDATIO�N+ a FOR PREPARATION, PRIMI ANDCOA77 K. COORDINATE G1 IN TF OF 077IER SECRONS. 3. MATCH APPROVED MOCK-UPS FOR COLOR, TEXTURE, AND PATTERN. RE -COAT OR REMOVE AND REPLACE WORK WHICH DOES NOT MATCH OR SHOWS LOSS OF ADHESION, 4, CLIAN IJP, TOUCH UP AND PROTE"C"T WORKy TOUCHUP PAINTING: I. GALVANIZING CAM" AND ALL BOLTS AND NUTS SHALL BE TOUCHED UP AFTER TOWER EREC77ON WITH , V OX",` 'ORY GALV„" OR 'ZINC --IT." 2. HELI? TOUCHUP PANT SH4U. BE DONE IN ACCORDANCE ROM THE M4NUFACTURERS WRMFN INSTRUCTIONS 3. ALL MFTAL COMPONENTS SHALL BE HANDLED WON CARE TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE COMPONENTS, THEIR PRESERLATNE TRIATMENT OR THEIR OTEC77VE CO4RNCS THIS SEC17ON SPECIFIES INSTALLATION OF ANTENNAS, RRU'S. AND CABLE EQUIPMENT INS1ALL417ON AND TESTING OF COAKIAL FIBER 048LE THE NUMBER AND TYPE OF ANTENNAS AND RRUS TO BE INSTALLED IS OCTA&ED ON THE CONSTRUCTION ORAWINGE ,, = HYBRID CABLE WILL BE DG/FIBER AND FURNISHED FOR INSTALLAPON AT EACH SITE CABLE SHALL BE INSTALLED PER THE CONSTRUCPON DRAWINGS AND 774E APPLICABLE MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMEMTS FURNISH AND INSTALL 112` COAX JUMPER CABLES BETWEEN THE RRWS AND ANTENNAS. JUMPERS SHALL BE TYPE LDF 4, FLO 12-50, OR SAO, OR FXL 540, SUPER-FLEK CABLES ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE JUMPERS BETWEEN THE RRU S AND ANTENNAS OR TO*fR TOP AMPLIFIERS SHALL CONSIST OF f12 INCH FOAM ON INSTALL SPUTTERS, COMBINERS, Flt ' S PER FEF DATA SHEET, FURNfSHE0 BY SPRINT. Sprintg)k £100 PRINT PARKWAY OVERLAND PARK, Kai AA151. 1/9/15 FINALCO JN 12/9Jt4 TOO CO SL CONST XML MUM CONSTRUCTION SOLUTION s"aavanarr,A i4t,k dc,'a `Reflaa :3'.K 16.360 I»:P},.r I»4ttUNTAN PARKWAY G� ld'vn 0 60403 303_%_3 3I33 wYv �� k.�.c�aPAs.iras 3_,L �Ts��v� t3.ar :.... Af xS.'M VE a 9 CROWN HILL DN73XCO94 83 . 38TH AVE HEAT RIDGE, CO $0033 JEFFERSON COUNTY 1, :11Y L :]:JN K5 SPRINT SPECIFICATIONS A, THE CONTRACTOR SMALL POSITION THE ANTENNA ON TOWER PIPE MOUNTS SO THAT THE BOTTOM STRUT IS LEVEL, THE PIPE' MOUNTS SHALL BE PIUMB 'TO WITHIN I DEGREE, S. ANTENNA MOUNTING REQUIREVENTS: PROVIDE ANTENNA MOLE NG HARDWARE AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS HYBRID CABLES �NSTALLA-I­10N: A THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ROUTE, TEST, AND INSTALL ALL CABLES AS INDICATED ON THE CONSTRUCT70N DRAWINGS AND IN ACCORDANCE W" THE MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS B, BID INSTALLED MADius OF InE CABLES SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN THE MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICA17ONS FOR SENDING RADN C. EXTREME CARE SHALL BE GIVEN TO AVOID ~GE TO THE CABLES DURING ",R)LING AND INSTALLATION, F. FASTENING AWN HYBRID CABLES, ALL CABLES SHALL BE PERMANENTLY FASTENED TO THE SOAK L40DER AT 4'-C' GO USING NON-MAGNETIC STAINLESS STEEL CUPS 2, FASTENING INDIVIDUAL FIBER AND Or CABLES ABOVE BREAKOUT' ENCLOSURE (MEDUSA), WITHIN THE )RUBS CABINET AND ANY INTERMEDIATE DISTRIBUTION BOXES� a FIBER, SUPPORT F78ER BUNDLES USING M' VELCRO STRAPS OF THE REQUIRED LENGTH 0 18' OC, STRAPS SHALL BE UK OIL AND WATER RESISTANT AND SUITABLE FOR INDUSTRIAL INSTALLATIONS AS MANUFACTURED BY TEXTOL OR APPROVED EQUAL b, OC SUPPORT SO BUNGLES WITH ZIP 77ES OF THE ADEQUATE LENGTH, ZIP TIES TO BE UV STABILIZED, BLACK NYLON, WITH TENSILE STRENGTH AT IZOOO PSI AS MANUFACTURED BY NE .CO PRODUCTS OR EQUAL, J. FASTENING JUMPERS° SECURE JUMPERS TO THE SIDE ARMS OR HEAD FRAMES USING STAINLESS STEEL 77E WRAPS OR STAJNLESS STEEL BUTTERFLY CUPS 4CABLE INSTAUATITIM INSPECT CABLE PRIOR TO USE FOR SHIPPING DAMAGE, N077FY THE CONSTRUC77ON M4NAGER, b, CA&Z ROUBNO: CABLE INSTAUATION Sh'LL OF PLANNED TO ENSURE THAT THE ONES WILL BE PROPERLY ROUTED IN THE CABLE ENVELOP AS INDICATED ON THE IBIAWINGS. AVOID TWISTING AND CROSSOVERS, HOIST CABLE USING PROPER HOIS17NG GRIPS, 00 NOT EXCEED MANUrACTURES RECOMMENDED MAXIMUM SEND RADIUS 5, GROUNDING OF TRANSWISSION LINES: ALL TRANSMISSION LINES SHALL BE GROUNDED AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS, & HYBRID CABLE COLOR CODING ALL COLOR CODING SHALL, BE AS REQUIRED IN TS 0200 REV 4, 7 HYRRID CABLE LABELING- INDIVIDUAL HYBRID AND DO BUNGLES SHALL BE LABELED ALPHA-NOWERICALLY ACCORDING TO SPRINT CELL SITE ENGINEERING N077CE - EN 2012-001. REV t A. ALL FIBER & COAX CONNECTORS AND GROUND KITS SHALL BE WEATHERPROLNED, B. WEATHERPROOFED USING ONE OF THE FOLLOWING METHODS. ALL INSTALLATIONS MUST BE DOME IN ACCORDANCE wnw THE MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS AND INDUSTRY BEST PRACTICES 1, COLD SHRINK, ENCOMPASS CONNECTOR IN COLD SHRINK I!I D TUBIG, LE WRAOSECONWOUSIX WRAP OF 2' AIDE ELECrRICAL TAPE E)OFAIDING 2' BEYOND THE SELF-AMALGAM4nNo TAPE 3JAt SUM LOCK CLOSURE 716z SUSSDIVTIONS WILL NOT BE ALLOWEM 4 Mr-mm SUMMARY. • TMS SECTION SPECIFIES MM8S CABINETS, POWER CABINETS, AND INTERNAI EQUIPMENT INCLUDING BY NOT UM"D To REcTims, POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS, BASE WHIT UNITS, SURGE ARRESTORS, BATTERIES, AND SIMILAR EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY THE' COMPANY FOR INSTALLATION BY THE CONTRACTOR (OFID), • CONTRACTOR SHALL PROWDE AND INSTALL ALL MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND PROVIDE ALL LABOR REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION EQUIPMENT IN EXISPNG CABINET OR NEW CABINET AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS AND A$ REQUIRE BY THE APPLICABLE INSTAUATION, MOPS. C COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURERS INSTALLA77ON AND START-UP REQUIREMENTS A LABEL CIRCUff BREAKERS ACCORDING TO SPRINT CELL SITE' ENGINEERING NOTICE - EN 2012-001, REV In SUMMARY - A, THIS SEC71ON SPECIFIES MMS CABINETS, POWER CABINETS, AND INTERNAL EQUIPMENT INCLUDING BY NOT LIMITED TO RECTIFIERS, POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS, BASE BAND UNITS, SURGE ARRESTORS, BATTERIES, AND SIMILAR EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY T14E COMPANY FOR INSTALLATION BY THE CONTRACTOR (OF'Cl), B. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL ALL MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND PROVIDE ALL LABOR REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION EQUIPMENT IN EXISTING CABINET OR NEW CABINET' AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS AND AS REQUIRE BY THE APPLICABLE INSTALLATION MOPS, C, COMPLY WITH MANIJFAC TURERS INSTALLATION AND START-UP REQUIREMENTS SUPPORTING DEVICES: A MANUFACTURED STRUCTURAL SUPPORT MATERIALS, SU6UFC`T TOCOMPLUANCE WIN RECUIREMENTS� PR DE PRODUCTS BY THE FOUVOINS, 1, ALLIED 'TUBE AND CONDUIT Z 6 -LINE SYSTEM 3, SUNISTRUT DWRSIFIED PRODUCTS 4, THOMAS & BETTS B. FASTENERS. TYPES, TE LS, AND CONSTRUCTION FEATURES AS FOLLOWS: t EXPANSION ANCHORS: CARBON STEEL WFOCE OR SLEEVE TYPE, 2, POWER-ORWN THREADED STUDS, MEAT-TREArED STEEL. DESIGNED SPECIFICALLY FOR THE INTENDED SERVICE. 3, fASTEN BY MEANS Or WOOD SCREWS ON WOOD, 4, TU LE" BOLTS ON HOLLOW MASONRY ONUS, 5, CONCRETE INSERTS OR EXPANSION ROLLS ON CONCRETE OR SOLID MASONRY, 6, M4GNjNf SCREWS, WELDED THREADED STUDS, OR SPRING -TENSION CLAMPS ON STEEL, 7 EXPLOSW DEVICES FOR ATTACHING HANGERS TO STRUCTURE SHALL NOT BE' PERMITTED, IT DO NOT WELD CONDUIT, PIPE STRAPS, OR ITEMS CITIES THAN THREADED STUDS 'TO STEEL STRUCTWES, 9. IN PAR7777ONS OF' LIGHT STEEL CONSTRUCTION, USE SHEET METAL SCREWS, SUPPORTING DEVICES: A INSTALL. SUPPOR77NO DEVICES TO FASTEN ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS SECURELY AND PERMANENTLY IN ACCORDANCE 41IN NEC, 8, COORDINATE WITH THE BUILDING STRUCTURAL SYSTEM AND WITH OTHER TRADES C, UNLESS OTHERWISE INOICATED ON THE ORAMNGS, FASTEN ELECTRICAL ITEMS AND THEIR SUPPOR77MG HARDWARE SECURELY TO THE STRUCTURE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOOING, A. ENSURE THAT THE LOAD APPLIED BY ANY FASTENER DOES BUT EXCEED 25 PERCENT OF ME PROOF TEST LOAfl E, USE WOR47ION AND SHOCK -RESISTANT FASTENERS FOR ATTACHMENTS TO CONCRETE SLABS, ELECTRICAL NXN77FICA77ON: A UPDATE AND PROWDE TYPED CIRCUIT BREAKER SCHEDULES IN THE MOUN77NC KET, INSIDE DOORS OF AD PANEL 90ARDS WITH ANY CHANGES MADE TO THE AC SYSTEM 8, BRANCH CIRCUITS FEEDING AV4477ON OBSTRUC17ON UG NG EQUIPMENT' SHALL BE GL&4RLY K)M,F7ED AS SUCH AT THE sRANcH cwcurr PANELewa CONDUIT A. RIGID GALVANIZED STEEL (TICS) CONDUIT SHALL BE USED FOR EXTERIOR LOCATIONS ABOVE GROUND AND IN EAP NTERIOR LOCATIONS AND FOR ENCASED RUNS IN CONCRETE RIGID CONDUIT AND FITTINGS SHALL BE STEEL, COATED WIN ZINC FA7ERIOR AND INTERIOR BY THE HOT DIP GALVANIZING PROCESS. CONDUIT StALL BE PRODUCED TO ANSI SPECIFICATIONS CSOA, FEDERAL SPECIFICATION WW -C-581 AND SHALL BE LISTED WOTI THE UNDERWRITERS' (A TORI FM7NGS SHALL BE THREADED --SET SCREW OR COMPRESSION SITTINGS WU NOT BE ACCEPTABLE RGS CONDUITS SHALL BE MANUFACTURED BY ALUED, REPUBLIC ORAHEATLAND. 8, UNDERGROUND CONDUIT IN CONCRETE SMALL BE POLYWMnCHL ORIDE IPVC) SUITABLE FOR DIRECT BURIAL AS APPLICABLE, JOINTS SMALL BE BELLED, AND FLUSH SOLVENT WELDED IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S IN UC77ONSn CONDUIT SHALL BE CARLON ELECTRICAL PRODUCTS OR APPROVED EQUAL C TRANSITIONS BETWEEN PVC AND RIGID (RGS) SHALL BE MADE )VITH PVC COATED METALLIC LONG SWEEP RADIUS ELBOWS. F, MINIMUM SIZE CONDUIT GRAIL BE 314 INCH (21MM), HUBS AND BOXES: A AT ENTRANCES TO C48INE TS OR OTHER EQUIPMENT NOT HAVING FRAL THREADED RUSS PROVIDE METALLIC THREADED HUBS OF THE SIZE AND comnGURATION REQUIRED, HUB 944 INCLUDE LOCM" NUT AND NEOPRENE O-RING SEAL. PROVIDE IMPACT RESWANT IDS DEGREE P BUSHINGS TO PROTECT CABLE INSULATION B. CABLE TERMJON FITTINGS FOR CONDUIT 1, CAME TERMINATORS FOR RGS CONOUIIS $HALL BE TYPE CRC BY O-ZICEDNEY OR EQUAL Z CABLE TERMINATORS FOR LFMC S SE VC0 - CL2075, OR MADE FOR THE PURPOS PRODUCTS BY ROXTEC, C, EXTERIOR PULL BOXES AND PULL BOXES IN INTERIOR INDUSTRIAL AREAS WLL BE PLATED CAST ALLOY, HEAVYDUTY WEATHERPROOF, DUST PROOF, WITH CASKET, PLATED TIM ALLOY COVER AND STAINLESS STEEL COVER SCREWS, CROUSE -HINDS WA8 SERIES OR EQUAL, A. CONDUIT OUTLET BODIES SHALL BE PLATED CAST ALLOY WITH SIMILAR G4SKETED COVERS. OUTLET BODIES SHALL BE OF THE CONFIGURATION AND SIZE SUITABLE FOR THE APPLICA" PROVIDE CROUSE -HINDS FORM 8 OR EQUAL, E MANUFACTURER FOR BOXES AND COVERS SHALL RF HOFFMAN SQUARE V, CROUSE -HINDS, COOPER. ACALET, APPLETON, O -Z OEONEY, AACa OR APPROVED EQUAL, SUPPLEMENIAL GROUNDINO SYSTEM A, FURNISH AND INSTALL A SUPPLEMENTAL GROUNDING SYSTEM AS INDICATED ON ',THE DRAWINGS SUPPORT SYSTEM W714 NON-94GNEVC ST LESS STEEL CLAPS WITH RUBBER GROMMETS GROUNDING CONNECTORS SMALL BE 77NNED COOKER WIRE SIZES AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS PROME STRANDED OR SOLD) BARE' OR INSULATED CONDUCTORS AS INDICATED. S SUPPLEMENTAL GROUNDING SYSTEM: ALL CONNEC77ONS TO BE MOE WIN CAD WELDS. EXCEPT AT EQUIPMENT USE LUGS OR OTHER AVAILABLE GROUNOING ME-4NS AS REQUIRED B`y MANUFACTURER, ATGROUND BARS USE TWO HOLE SPADES WITH NO OX C, STOLEN GROUND -BARS: IN THE EVENT OF STOLEN GROUND BARS, CONTACT SPRINT OR FOR REPIAC EMENT INSTRUCTION USING THREADED ROD KITS. EXISTING STRUC71ARE A. EXISTING EXPOSED WRING AND ALL EXPOSED OUTLETS RECEPTACLES S ITCHE xI CES BOXES, AND OTHER EQUIPMENT THAT ARE NOT TO BE UTILIZED IN THE COMPLETEEDP ECT SHAU BE RE MOM OR DE-ENERCIZED AND CAPPED IN THE WALL,, COLING, OR FLOOR SO THAT 'THEY ARE CONCEALED AND SAFE WAU, CEIIJRG, OR FLOOR SHALL BE PAICHED TO MATCH THE ADJACENT CONSTRUCTRIM. 4 (�T Sprint':)o 64005PRNT PARKWAY OVERLAND PARK KS 66751 1/9/15 FINAL CONST 12/9/14 100% CONST 8/26/14 90% CONST REIN DATF ISVED 0 OR CONSTRUCTION ANN PROKKID M - CENTERLINE SOLUTIONS 4dvamrf�7 HAveless Neftwws 163607ABU MOUNIAN PARKWAY Gokkm co 8W3 315.3'ft3 xZ43 WWWCENTfRUNEU)LL;"FR)NS,C0M D'2AXX� Sl*.Ly ,1ROX, CT WFORMATON CROWN HILL DN73XCO94 8300 W, 3STH AVE HEAT RIDGE, GO 80013 JEFFERSON COUNTY �AAWN DY QkECKED 8�' AFPRO�%,� "y SIL �JN�KG� SHEET 'il SPRINT SPECIFICATIONS WEFT NUVeeR SP2— a Sprinf)k b100 SP M i, PARKWAY OVERI+'^1YD PARK, KS 6625:. A KE", I/q/15 FI � ,3 12,/9 °4 100 CONST ML ey 9 C CFt L REV DA -1 E RE7W DESCRUIDON 3 a1,7CY1 k'4�i2', CONSTRUCTION Roc NTE B W. L IN E SOLUTIONS GOW"n, CO 80403 J01 993 329:3 : � ME A'I..,Rf 11, PYA PROJECT M-ORMNTRVI CROWN FALL DN7 XC 9 $300 W. 38TH AVE HEAT RIDGE, CO BOD33 JEFFERSON COUNTY L lw KS OVERALL AL SITE PLAN ss 6100S,PWNT PARKWAY OVEWAND PARK KS 66251 1/9/15 FINAL CONST J 32/9/74 10OX CONST ML 8/265%74 9OX COMT ML P ;acaw *- v DAIEDESOWPM4 eY P co FOR CONSTRUCTION I SOLUTIONS C3uWen co 80403 3ET,2 993,3291 ., ,. c5 •, 1A '+sa 'CA3,.E"a Artk 3tv rtWtA 61�':fi ��"x?b 'P IF.��i` PROJECT NFORMAMN... CROWN NIL 79 , 3M AVE HEAT RIDGE, CO 80033 JEFFERSON OOVNTY um am SHEET T�rU, SITE PLAN A2 Sprint')OP 6101 SPNNT PARKWAY OVt-,Rt AND PARK, KS 662 511 LIN O SIN I % 116 � j f O CONST Mii.. 1a��a DA1� 4a�¢iz.�P�iiat sr CONSTRUCTION E NTE RL IN E SOLUTIONS NS Goklv-� CO 8040A 303,993 3293 @A"4°�'uk' C' 1:+�iT f:Fd.EPSa 54'1;'v,aR'tt:PV3 G':ti4'A h� YF ALL KAA,ESAW'SV 50RASIZE R`RWf S:T i!` rOkMA''f' CROWN HILL 734 8300 W. 38TH AVE HEAT RIDGE, CO 80033 JEFFERSON COUNTY DRAWN. BY CRIE:CKED f}1': Aa'c*�'w' 47SD 3v.. . ML JN Ks t���rmsrse "'�[[�y�� EISTI NEW EQUIPMENT PANS r i [ANYfN4E'S7E SPRT A rE NOT SHOWN ECTVE£ . PAR�E� � Y cn a s � (1) NEIN SPRINT 2.5 TERGA PER SECTOR EX, SPRfiT L1YRL r LES TRAY TYP. PER SECTOR } EX. SPRINT HY5RLELEX K /./rEX, :S IN CABLE TRAY ., .° TYP. PER SECTOR w (4) NEW SPRINT 2.5 a RRU ON EX, MOUNT BIRDS PER SECTS fi (1) EX. SLED MOO RRUS PER SECTOR ? ` EX. BUILDINGfi ON EX. OU EX. BUILDING (2 EX, SPRINT SPR R ROOFTOP " (1) E . D MOUN ROOFTOP A TENNAS . X (2) EX, SPRINT LSV a RRUE PER SECTOR (2) E�+X�p.�, 'ANTENNAS PRINTS NV GPC i f4 J A2tA#UT44277 ; { A?LA� g 277"` ., ,.._ (1) EX. SPRINT NV PER SECTOR 4 i# } E SPRINT 2 5 ­ ANTENNA 1 (1) EX. SPRINT MICROWAVE , RRi7 LTA EX. MOUNT , { (1) EX. SPRINT MICROWAVE---_'_ t (1) EX, SPRINT NV ANT-ENN ....,..w � § �..(1) . SPRINT" V ANTENNA PER SECTOR x ( URLs PER SECTOR (2) EX. SPRINT V� N '�' --"A .. RRUS PER SECTOR tA CSS EX, MOUNTQt .... (1) NEW SPRINT 2.5�. TQC w ANTENNAPER ECTC?R (1) EX. SPR3NT NV ANTENNA" ff " () RRUS PER SECTOR 1) NEW SPRINT 2.5 ANTENNA va lT, M RRLN PER SECTORSCALL � IST ANfENNA PLAN SCALE. 114"-l' ' W ANTENNA PLAN SCALE ANTENNA WVGFU. 36.4 LBS BRACKET WEIGHT: 41.6 LBS pp FREQUENCY GE. 2496-2690 NEL7 "5.3 1 f3 RRL1 WE#GL1To 59.5 LESS . .ra ... RRH BRACKET WELGKT. 12.32 LRS ... , .. FREQUENCY GE. 2500 MHZ 79* 9 15 „ 4 t 3 K' 'R .1 a xz3x ta, 3kt ((} w A i . xi 3141 §c s Ore+Aar j rJ ranx,rsr�; 3 t } i ° 1 { ,.. SCALE 1w -1e -0w SML 1°31310+ 0+ A � y,PORTLAYOUTSCALE. 1,.-1°-0'° Sprinf�)lp 000 SPRNT PARKW�ApY 2 5 1/9/15 FINAL CONST JN 12/9/14 10C CONST ML 8/26/14 REX CONST ML REV ff3A=E:R6kr s6i By '.. �. WPOIN SSOEO � CONSTRUCTION CENTE SOLUTIONS Aak,Rn,:i3TS MMM5 /1+'eta VfkS ?.6a360 #AbL ES�kCxY4WAN PARKWAY Golden, co 80003 t6'u4"LV i"`EFti YF 8&'t.dSVFSe,! k.'�fYi"}iV`i,i`43Po" y 2 e' �A " LP x A..T A E "AtBF bF REQ li S�.<F Y7 a"A"R tb 5�..:FT CROWN Hlk..€ SIX 300 Wf 38TFL AVE HEAT RIDGE, CO $0033 JEFFERSON COUNTY a.6",a�tppb@Tti g19' k`PfiE`t`.KE:&T 03Y APYRt,ktIX; By N64i. JN KS X. & NEW ANTENNA ..ANS, ANTENNA S'S (T) EX. SPRINT MICROWAVE (2) EX, SPRINT EIV GPS ANTENNAS (ON SLED MOUNT IN GAMMA SECTOR) EX, SPRINT EQUIPMENT SHELTER ON ROOFTOP E (T) EX, SPRINT NV ANTENNA PER SECT EX, SPRINT NV ANTENNA & (2) RRUS PER SECTOR (2) EX, SPRINT NV RRUS PER SECT i p 111 C.L.NV ANTENNAS C L 2 ANTENNAS ELEV. e CS If`W7t}Au M , Sprinto)�* 611 SARNI PARKWAY OVERLAND PARK, KS 6651 1/9/15 FINAL COIN T' JN 41 2/9/14 IDTIX CONST SRL 8/26/14 9OX CONST ML EEEVIV REN DATE DESCRIPTION By g �7-h_ CONSTRUCTION SOLUTIONS .Ai, vw,;rB SE Af*nE ,vM£A10,'*s 163601AELE MOUNTAIN PAiiA'Uh"AY Gdde' Co NA13 303 5.63 3Z93 WWW,CFN TERUNESOL PONS COM, P3 ,EP Rc, b,GA!.%"2 ANCE Ss:.a FOR A'A2E 1X 2CKW $FtF. P#3€JJECI MdrORMAatGN:.. CROWN HILL DN C $300 IN 38TH AVE HEAT RIDGE, CO 033 JEFFERSON COUNTY SIL .iTi ICS ELEVATIONS 8-HEEIT NaaMN SCALE: 3132"-1'-0" L IES 3I. THE SWE. T#EiGt6T ANO DIRCC N 0 � LE9t� ' CONTRACT' i CCWFTRM THAT THE SITE I TALE ANTENNA SHALL RE ADJUST"ELD TO is CC?A3PL#A4+T IYiTFP RT i ARPidN SIGNAGE ¢ MEET 3} 3£ R E tE teIT i ! ? tsRla k COR ENd E WITHOUT T[iE EMERGENCY :SIO GC AS REQUIRED BY = 2. CCA�ITtwACTs3R TIAL tERO tlEiGif7 C?F AFI�RO�EO TRdI €a9RAd THE FEDERAL GUIDEU AS PER i AN'. T SPRINT REE'RE`.SE' A... o � TO ,�' Ai AIOLI I.S REPORT spw,$ �_ .. ,. .. 3. TEN AZIMUTHS E TO � SIGi� EI?) 1G E PROVIDED TAKEN FROM TRUE NORTH CINDER SEPARATF COI R. CONTRACTOR e ...... a..... -, PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTnNR THE APPROVED TOWRIANTENNAIMOUNT ANALYSIS REPORT SUPPLIED 8YSPRINT 4A & (2) RRUS PER SECTOR O !EYIF REQUIRED AL ALI E IE EX, & NEW SPRINT RRUS EMBERS AS WOCATED IN CERUPED TOP STRUCTURAL RENT PRIOR TO 11,.(T) EDI, SPRINT NV ANTENNA PER SECTOR INSTAUATION ON STRUCTURE, C L 2 ANTENNAS ELEV. e CS If`W7t}Au M , Sprinto)�* 611 SARNI PARKWAY OVERLAND PARK, KS 6651 1/9/15 FINAL COIN T' JN 41 2/9/14 IDTIX CONST SRL 8/26/14 9OX CONST ML EEEVIV REN DATE DESCRIPTION By g �7-h_ CONSTRUCTION SOLUTIONS .Ai, vw,;rB SE Af*nE ,vM£A10,'*s 163601AELE MOUNTAIN PAiiA'Uh"AY Gdde' Co NA13 303 5.63 3Z93 WWW,CFN TERUNESOL PONS COM, P3 ,EP Rc, b,GA!.%"2 ANCE Ss:.a FOR A'A2E 1X 2CKW $FtF. P#3€JJECI MdrORMAatGN:.. CROWN HILL DN C $300 IN 38TH AVE HEAT RIDGE, CO 033 JEFFERSON COUNTY SIL .iTi ICS ELEVATIONS 8-HEEIT NaaMN RFDS NOT AVAILABLE XT TIME OF ISSUE, CONTRACTOR TO OBTAIN MOST RECENT RFDS FROM SPRINT PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION ..... ...... -7-7—_ � w�.M r� , ...�, __.w..___i V'Aw�mPAW06OR Sprint"�')'k 6100 SPMN T € ARK AY OVERLAND PARK K" 66251 1/9/15 nNAL CONST JN 12/9/14 10OX CONST ML 9/'26/14 90CONST ML REV DATE Rt"sn6M3c?ha�.. B m -v FOP CONSTRUCTION aANS PREPARED Kw:, SOLUTIONS Arr°vwi arsQ iVrWese fvphtvrAs 6 3SLl A f MM)WAN P+ RK,>l°•.Att r.AWem co 8030:3 3W} 993-3293 4N°sMltdi`£N'3ERUNC333i°,!i ON'3,COM l ryh ;t 1�0AA � AL SCALES ARE SEI VOR A WT 'V ;�lr X20 V�CEI x µ, CROWN HILL DN73XCO94 8300 W, 39TH AVE HEAT RIDGE, CO SDO33 JEFFERSON COUNN caA � L r w apcqu Eo ey K RFDS A7�ara<�a siWf�tts€ v Holm RRUS & FILTERS TO BE RRUS & FILTERS TO BE WALL INSTALLED PER MFG, 'S WSTALI.ED PER MFG.'S POLE SPECIFICATIONS TO BE SPECWICATIONS TO BE PR DED PRIOR TO PROM ED PRIOR, To iNSTALIAIION OF THE �NSTALLATION OF THE APPROVED COWPMENT PER APPROVED EWPNIENT PER LATEST REDS PROVIDED BY LATEST RFDS PRO ED BY SPRINT, SPRINT. a 0 c' a Ei Sprint poQoAa, Ri, i5l bli,'510 RRU 6100 SPRNT PARKWAY �o qU a 0 OVERLAND PARK, KS 662S! �12 J RRU ............ EXTERNAL FiLTER 1/9/15 FiNAL CONST 12/9/14 IOOX CONST ML 8/26/14 9OX CONST AIL RE"v DATE REV7810N By DESLMPTiON ISSJUDFOR T1111 "Am, ........ . . CONSTRUCTION EX7,RNAL FlTER 3PAw wpm o &V� SOLUTIONS AdvNxo'ecq tViml^� Ivenwrks SCALE� KTLS1 1631,0 TABLE MOUN"'AN PARKWAY TYPICAL RRU & RF FILTER ONE SECTOR WALL MOUNT SCALE: KI'l, YPICAL RRU & RF FILTER ONE SECTOR POLE MOUNT Golden, CO 8040,� ,1033-3293 FILTER & BRACXFT WEIGHT! <10KG FREQUENCY RANGE: 2500 MHz 0 BOX 3, ap 0 mm OPTIC JUNCTION CYUNDER MPO CONNECTOR FIBER 1 . ...... = I . . ... ...... ... .. .... .. ... ...... ........ . . ..... .. . _4 . ... .. ... ... . .. .. ER El F9 I LF E 0 "Po 0, Al I A f 1 11 . ........... .. o E 9BER E F ALL SCALES ARF, SET POP, A WET2AW36 SHEET E PROJECI NfKANATON EF �+j CROWN FflLL SINGLE ROUTE SEP (X6) DN73XCO94 POWER 118300 W, 38TH AVE HEAT RIDGE, DO 60033 _tl T"l!"'; ER JEFFERSON COUNlY ""'t P Zg:A'. ML POWER JUNCTION CYLINDER JN KS STSR RRU SHEV TITLC JCONTRACTOR TO INSTALL APPROVED RF FILTER AT SITES REQUIRING RADAR FILTER PER LATEST RF`DS PROVOED BY SPRINT --------- DETAILS CYLINDER SCHEMATIC DETAIL A9 Spr*int"':)k.* 6100 SPRWI PARKWAY C.tY+k'.RI,AND PARK, U 06251. 1/9/15 i ONST J 12/9/14 1 CONST L 8/26/34 O CON L REV $iC 42`v'6t{SM Ay D S ePTON ASUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CENTERLINE SOLUTIONS �w+�sn aa2 6^v�,°�sa2zss oti`�ta+�+ras Cioid�n, CO 60403 303 9A3..3293 'vL��'u5';£ A�"LPnS.PRYE,4,?k i.S7"tC1dd5 as":�,p?9 AP 3 lee _ EI kt x SCALE S AQE- `SET @'OR A Sk 4; P' 74"k !f' SHEET EfipOXC:T,WCk'kMAI K) CROWN i HILL 8300 OWn MTH AVE HEAT RIDGE, GO W033 JEFFERSON C+iA�his1'p`. a."$&gg:.��yyF.ECi ?3Y: FA Faw "C3 P'YLV#E EXISTING AC & DC POWER 1 S w r amt f QE NO -OX GREASE AT F.0,NTACT SURFACE BETWEEN LUG AND G OURS FKR NOW�W VMFY BUSS G To E OONDIRNNT TOWER OR R& INSP ("TtON E FOR SUIT CONDUCTOR C &A TSE E)l I 'OR IN UP TOOV c NEGTGR RRU GROUNDS STRANDED DO WIR gtun ED GROUND FROM ANTENNA/RRU 3/8 -Ox 1 1/2- R, I IN R�ENN. THH NVNG PIPE WTTH G S16PEOVAS SPE elFVD" INSULA S/S NUT - R ZRlNDDCt&lj G S R D U NO A TRNA .. 3HEAT LHEAT' SHRINK 0 0 0 0, 6) 0 —EXISTING 4"xl2'xl 4" THK, INLS vs 0 0 0 0 PININNtEFC�ROVND EIAR & k-1 -S/S SOLT (I OF C ON 1 - OU7DO0`R­S'G`E'S,-`O,S`E 8'LAC,K_­HEAT`­SH'RI_Nl 1 *DO NOT— 0 0 0 0 2, INDOOR SITES USE CLEAR HEAT SHRINK DISCONNEV' TAG ON ALL G OUND 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 I �DR INTUERC P;6ECTS A ED ALI? TWO -HOLE LUG, BOLTED TO GROUND BAR USING 3 8'-16 x I 1/4'STAIIIL&S &�EL HEX HEAD D HARDWARE. !CALE, t_T S, SECTOR GROUND BAR CONNECTIONS SCALE. NT. S- N ANTENA MOUNTING-,,, PIPE (TYP, PER SECTOR) NEW 2,5 ANTENNA (TYP, PER SECTOR)-,, NEW 2,5 ANTENNA ON EX, OR --,- ANG STRANDED NEW MOUNTING PIPE AS NEEDED PIPE MOUNT GROUNDED TO EX, NEN 2.5 RRU'S (TYP. PER S=R)--" INSULATED 04D RE (TYP,) (TYP. PER SECTOR) SECTOR GROUND BAR #6 AIRS STRANDED JUMPER CABLES (TYP, Xg PER SECGO) N, INSULATED LINO *RE (IYP.) NEW FIDES juNcnON (TYP. PER SECTOR) 9, NEW POWER JUNCTION CYLINDER ('TYP, PER SECTOR) ....... ... . . CABLES N PE PIPES TO BE CONNECTED .. .. ...... ... EXISTING SPRINT-\ (2) EX, SPARE FIBER & GO POWER �umZ MMSS CABINET NEW 2.5 RRU (TSP. PER SFCT0R)w TO NEW POWER & FIBER JUNCTION lee CYLINDERS C,,YP, PER SECTOR) EXISTING SPRINT 9ATTERB, CHETUISTING MEDUSA ORWOUT' 2.5 RRU GROUNDED TO 0C CYLINDER (TYP, PER SECTOR) SECTOR GROUND BAR COSTING HYRRIR" CABLE-, (TYR, PER SECTOR) N-1 1­­--­­-EXIVING GROUND BAR 4 GROUNDING RISER DIAGRAM SCALE z NT.S, Sprinto:)11� 6100 SPRiNT PARKWAY OVIKAND PARK, KS 66251 1/9/15 FINAL CONST 12/9/14 100% CONST 8/26/14 90% CONST REN DATE REWSION CONSTRUCTION CENTERLINE SOLUTIONS Advww sry 1,41, lqvss NAfolork, 16360 TABLE MOLIN i AIN PARK&,Av GvIden, CO 80403 3,03 493 3293 MNW CENT(KINESOLUTIONS Cam -1- SCALH, AASET FOR A &ZV 'TT'Z4'%X 3"fl !!:38NKS "f, I WLE GROUNDING DETAILS K E 1 0 *1 - 11 0 4(m WUNW19 "TT EQUARXM�� W BRANCH OF WORK: Section: 230593 — Test and Balance P 94," , 7— A 0 1,; e) / I ;? '7 PARA # EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER ACTION TAKEN Phase 4 TAB Report 4/2015 Complete Balancing PLEASE RETURN ONE (1) ELECTRONIC SUBMITTAL COPY (THIS SPACE FOR ARCHITECT'S/ENGINEER'S REMARKS) The above drawings/submittals are returned with action as designated above in accordance with the following legend: A - No Exceptions Taken C - Amend and Resubmit B - Make Corrections Noted D - Rejected - See Remarks ELMC EMERGENCY DEPARTMENT REMODEL PHASE 4 8 300 2. 38TH AVENUE WHEAT RIDGE, CO APRIL 2015 TESTING Complete ADJUSTING Mechanical Balancing, .: °� r SYSTEM BALANCING PO BOX 27706 DENVER, CO. 80227 FAX 672-7 PHONE 29 k''At, Z I V i o f TESTING COWLEM P.O. BOX 27706 ADJUSTING MECHAMM DENVER, CO. 80227 SYSTEM BALANCING EALMONG, INC. FAX 303-972-7453 TABB CERTIFIED PHONE 303-945-5420 WN119m, 011 PROJECT ELMC EMERGENCY DEP .ME MODEL. — PHASE 4 LOCATION 8300 W.3 AVENUE, WHEAT RIDGE, CO GHITECT MECHANICAL ENGINEER SHE AL CONTRACTOR TRAUTMAN & SHREVE, INC. BALANCING CREW C.CATLETrA. RUBLE J.CATLETT DATE APRIL 2015 FLOW HOOD ALNOR / -SH.ORTRIDGE ANEMOMETER DAVIS TYPE LCA 6000 SPEED INDICATOR BIDDLE TYPE 9915 AMMETER / VOL R AMPROBE TYPE DIGITAL INCLINED DRAFT GE D ER 0-0.25" 0-0.50" 400" GNEHELIC GAME 0-0.50" 0-1.0" 0-2.0" 0-4.0" 0-8.0" PRESSURE GAGE -30--+30 PSI 0-60 PSI 0-100 PSI PRESSURE GAGE DIFFERENTIAL B CO 0-50" 0-100" 300" 500" 0-100' PYROMETER ALNOR THERMOMETERS FLUKE TYPE 5 MICROMANOMETER . ..,,.._ .�«.�....®�..�....,,. TYPE 530 .,..».. ._:. ..,_,_gym m.««�...m,..._,......_..,.m,,,.,,.,,...,..,......�,_.....,....w.� .......�..,..,«®,... „�.,........�..,... «®...,_..._, „ate,. w TABBITechalclan 488"151T . r PROJECT T DE 5200'l— FLOWHOODCORRECT 1.10 APPLIED (K FA QR) X VELOCITY STATIC PRESSURE CORRECTION 1.21 t�: iI:ISti _:ifrTi)ialt.i�i1;TT. IiRi#1CORRECTED NOTES JOB: ELMC EFS REMODEL - PHASE, 4 GENERAL EXHAUST - E REDESIGNED, WILL HAVE ITS OWN FAN AT A IATER DATE. 'AGE 4 AIR aM RECAP SHEEr JOB: ELMC ED REMODEL - PHASE 4 NE OR REQ'D ACTL % 0)F FUN N UNIT NO. MAIN CFM CFM 'D OSA REMARKS PAGE SUPPLY -1-25 1-7 1400 1414 101 2 SUPPLY —1-26 —11 65O 071 103 2 SUPPLY TB -1.27 12-15 650 644 99 2 SUPPLY -1-28 16- 17 800 825 108 2 SUPPLY -1-2 18-21 605 600 99 3 SUPPLY -1-30 2-29 1305 1331 102 3 SUPPLY -1-32 30-33 470 47:3 101 3 TOTAL 5880 5958 101 EXHAUST GENERAL El -ES 900 8015 67 SEE NOTE PAGE 4 TOTAL 900 605 67 CO MECHANICAL BALANCING, INC. WAIER-SYSTEM RECAP JOB: DEPARTMENT REMODEL- PHASE 4 ELMG EMERGENCY DEP p7�-�j REQ' }}'�''�; FUNCTION UNIT NO. GPM GPM REQD OSA REMARKS PAGE HOTVvrTR T -25 RU VAV°-14� 11.8 11.93 101 S TOTAL11.8 11.93 101 DMST'. XVTIR 1-3 1.5 1.47 98 6 TOTAL1.5 1.47 98 PROJECTMECHANICAL ELMC Eli REMODEL - PHASE 4 PAGE NO 10187-2 BALANCING LOCAn0N 8300 W. 38TH AVENUE DATE 04-07-15 FAN M 'S aAAN R J.C. & M.B. pp„„ SHREVE SIZE REQUIRED TEST I TEST 2 TEST 3 FINAL OPENING PLAN kCTI AREA VEL CFM VEL % E %% _224,. _.a_..._1�a VEL CFM ,. _. % REMARKS _._.,.., _2,5_ 124/24 TB -1-25-1 1.14 1 444 204 42 24/24 1.10 182 200 490 270 190 209 105 24/24 1.10 182 200 470 259 190 209 145 4 24/241.10 . 182 244 470 259 185 204 142 5 24%24 1.10 182 200 465 256 180 198 99 6 24/24 1.10 182 200 110 61 180 198 99 MIN 1115 __.__.._._.. .... 7 24/24 .._ . _ 1 14 ._...182 ._. 2 3_ 165 �. _ 1'75 -y� 111�4 96 _. 1000/6 OPEN _._ .. TOTAL 14 14„_. KF 1.42 _.......,�_ .........._,..._._,__.. ..,..__.._ TB - 1-26-8 24/24 .......,,.,.,,.... 1.10 .._ 91 Mme..._.,_, 140 .e, 94 ..,._...�..,. __... ...._.._.. .,... 99 ....._....,».-,,. 95 .....,. 105 .,.,m_mM._.._...._.,......»...,.......,. 105 9 24/24 1.10 91 104 130 143 95 165 105 10 24/241.10 -, _.11, _. ... 91 1 1'70 18'7 �63 95 145 105 rv102 5 _0% 24/24. 1.14 318 :354. 200 325 358 OPEN TOTAL 654 671 KF 4.54 TB -1-2-12 24/24. ......_..._�13 ._. ..1.14 ..... 159 1"75 _ W 154 .*.134 ... 94 . .��..... _ . .82 _ .._._ 164 __._.....w__....._._ 1'76 ...16 a.�_.....m_.�__..._w......_. 101 �._...., 24/24 1.10 159 175 ._.__ 160 141 14 24/24. 1.10 91 100 135 149 90 99 99 MIN 325 15 24/24 11.14 182 2 134 M72 175 193 96 1000/6 OPEN TOTAL 650 644 KF 0.46 -1 28-16 24/24 1.14 364 444 485 133 380 418 145 MIN 795 17 24/24 _ 1.10364 400 4"75 131 3"70 40'7 102 144%o OPEN ---TOTAL�.._ __.. _ 8f ..� . __... 825 _ KF a �_..2051 PZEMARKS PAGE DAIE 04-07-15 *.M.B. SIZE REgUERED TEST 1 TES OPENING P L CFM VEL % VEL % VEL % VEL C % REMAPM TB -1-29-18 24/24 1.10 123 135 145 118...._ 125 138 102 _ ........_ 19 24/24 1.10 123 M12 135 _..135 _. 0 ... .,.._ 125 138 �.. 102 _ .,....._._... 20 24•%24 1.10 190 155 1��. 0 132 8 _ N 595 21 24/24 1.10 182 2 200 110 175 193 96 100° UPON TOTAL 605 6 0.50 -1-30-22 24/24 1.10 182 200 285 15"7 190 20'9 105 23 24/24 1.10 182 200 275 151 190 209 105 24 24/24 1.10 182 200 90 50 185 204 102 2524/24 _._ . ,.�_.._..__...,._.. _26 1.10 91 ....._ 100 330 36390 99 99 24/24 1.10 123 135 330 269 125 1 _ _.. 138 1t}2 w ... _.�...,_._...w....�.� ..,._ ....., .�....., 27 24/24 1.10 123 135 410 334 125 138 102 ... _.. _.._....__......_ ._..__ 2_8_4/24..__ _ 1.10 123 _ 1.35 310 253 _ � . 125 �38 02 102 �99 N 1190 29 24/24 1..10 182 200 300 � 165 180 198 _... 100%OPEN TOTAL 1305 1331 KF 0.93 TB -1-32-30 24/24 T1..10 123 135 170 139 125 138 102 31 24/24 1.10 123 1.35 150 122 125 138 102 32 24/24 1.10 91 100 60 66 90 99 99 MIN 450 33 24/24 1..10 91 100 60 66 90 99 99 100% OPEN TOTAL 470 473 KF 0.50 KOkylizipoik m A j.. DATE 0 BALANCER SIZE REQLTHWD TEST 1 TEST 2 TEST 3 FlNAL OPENING PLAN kCTIAREA VEL CFM VEL o VEL cad VEL % VEL G % itEWAYM E1 __..w-.:2 8/8 1.10 91 100 090 99 m _....._ 8/8 _ ....__. ------------ 1..10 2'73 3 0 _ - SEE N PAGE E3 8/8 1.10 273 301 460 169 280 308 103 8/8 1.10 91 100 460 506 90 99 99 E5 8/8 1.10 91 100 150 165 90 99 99 TOTAL 900 6015 REMARKS COMPLETE MECHANICAL BALANCING, INC. PAGE 10187-5 DATE 02-26 CONT. HOT PROJECT EI} REMODEL - PHASE 4 SYSTE, WATER FLOW RE 'D RATING BY-PASS FINALRK STATION MEMR SIZE Piz IN GPM PD IN GPM % PI) IN GPM -25 FDI (4) 18.40 2.00 19.00 2.03 102 _20 FIJI (3) 30.50 1.2037.00 1.21 101 -27 FEDI (3) 1+6.+60 0.80 17.00 0._81 101 -28 FDI (4) 31.40 2.60 32.00 2.62 101 -29 FDI (3) 36.50 1.20 37.00 1.21 101 -30 FDI (4) 22.30 2.20 23.00 2.23 102 -32 I (3) 16.60 0.30 17. 0.31 101 VA"V"-149 FDI () 25.60 1.00 26.00 1.01 101 TOTAL 11.8011.93 101 REMAS RK COMPLETE wl+ BALANCING, PAGE 10187-6 DATE 03-02-15 TRAUTMAN DOMESTIC PRCXJECT ELMC; Ela - PHASE 4 SYSM, WATER FLOW Q'D RATING BY -PA _..... _ _ _ n._.m.._.REMARKS..__. _....w.. FINAL ..... STATION METER SIZE PD IN CPM PI) IN CPM % PD IN GPM I FDI (2) 32.00 0.50 26,00 0.5 50 10(3%C)PEN 2 FIJI �O 32.00 0.50 .... w.._ ,... 33.00 . 0.51 10..�...�_._� . 3 FDI (2) 32.00 0.50 33.00 ...rv__.� 0.51 102 TOTAL 1.50 1.47 93 RK #i FOR OFFICE USE ONLY Date: �� _, u_ Man /next NOTI • p add ress) Address: Cl !y , State, Zi Contractor: # 1 Sq. FUL.F Btu's Gallons Amps Squares Other IF 01 Transmittal , n PR,JEt,,'T. 177310,00 Switch Gear DA 3127/2015 Replacement 177.310.00 S'LJBJEC ? : Package #2 - Permit Documents TRANSM)TTAL UD. 00001 PURPO For your use and distribution WA Hand FROM k Michael Hagan 4 1755 Blake Street Suite 400 H +L Architecture i mhagan@hlarch.com % 303 - 298 -4745 Denver, CO 80202 �. .., ... ...... TO --J ,. .... _ .. ,..,, _. _ ..... ... .., ,_ ,�.. .. ....... .... . e.,....e _.. , .. __ .._ .. , ..,._.. . _,...._....... ,...., _------ .. ....... � .............. �... .. }..,,..., ,..,.., ..... , ......... ,.... _ ..,... ..,._ ,,.... . _.. .. ...._ .._ � .... ....,_. ....._..,,,,.. 6 { Ryan May ...__ ....,_, . _.. .a ,�...,.,....... . .., ... .. 1521 18th Street Mortensen Suite 400 Construction ° Ryan.Maya mortenson.com (393) 421 -2999 Denver, CO 80202 Y r REMARKS: Ryan, Attached are the (4) sets for permit of Package #2 Thanks Alike DESCWi' OF CONTENTS 1 7 . . ........ ..... . . ......... ... ..._..... _ .. 4 -- ; Package # - Permit Documents DRAWINGS i 4 : -- ; Package #2 Permit Documents SPECS A L "I City of �J�;Or'Wh6atf ic g COMMUNITY DEVEIopMENT W . 3 00 AW, WILLi 5 U H S tj 6T Address: Q! y, Stag, Zip:, hUiLbiNo 0 q5 Date: PlanlPenrnif # r C 1 J, Plan Review Fee: Z Electrical: W.R. Citv License # Plumbing: 4 'S" W.R. City License# 0' Mechanical: - TIZALrr"N 4 t3tWv(,-. W.R. City License# 2,l go WHIM # 94-MOL OF LAg Amps Squares Other W a rK: itig CITY OF WHEAT RIDGE BUILDING AND INSPE.,CTION SERVICES DIVISION 7500 W 29th Ave Wheat Ridge, CO 80033-8001 p. 303,235.2855.f 303,237,8929 A copy of this form MUSt be completed by each agency Ica on M type and be attached to the Building Permit Application at the time of submission. Applications presented for submission without a completed Proof of Submission form from a required agency will not be accepted or processed, Date: Project Address: 33oo I am mm��� I Mil I I 1I MQ MING I LORM I •- * Wheat ! «® Sanitation District * Clear Creek Sanitation District * Fruitdale Sanitation District * Westridge Sanitation District c) Other Agency Notes Signature Date, - 7. 13 Bu ildi n g Per mit A ppli ca tiol Address: C ity, Stag, Z T F MINE '!III: RIIIII HE Architect/Engineer E 0 c .NtC ,qA>rA ' Phone: 1 - 2, "5 Contractor: Contractors City License ; Phone: - - Contractor E -mail Address: %4 40r� t Electrical: 7, 6 Plumbing: Mechanical: W.R, City License # W.R. City License # W.R. City License # Other City Licensed Sub: tither City Licensed Stab: City License # City License # Complete all information on BOTH sides of this farm i of materials t±b used, etc,) \» » .. \ «@ <». < %i� V .� P� 4: .:4 . ^ 2§ \ ? . Sq. F z! U . #u . .. Gallons Amps . .. . . . Squares . ......... . Other \ ....... .... .. City of h+ °L CITY O WHEAT I2IDG BUILDING AND INSPECTION SERVICES DIVISIO 7500 W 29th Ave Wheat Ridge, CO 80033 -8001 Via. 303.235.2855. 303.237.8929 Date: r • .. x � • +. +1�s Mam f Firm/individual submitting •• P Ty•_ • + • . ° • • . V�Ils 1-10 z 6. � . • r -• -• _ s - .•- • -• •- a Ml o Wheat Midge Sanitation District o Clear Creek Sanitation District District o Fruitdale Sanitation District o Westridge Sanitation District (,) tither